JP7371798B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art A game machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which a winning game or the like is executed based on a game ball entering a specific ball entry opening or a specific area.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2001-038007

However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area can enter, and a first state in which a first flow path is formed. , a variable means capable of changing to a second state in which the first flow path is not formed, and control for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition. and a game state setting means that can set a second game state in which the game ball passing through the predetermined area is easier to reach the first channel than in the first game state. , the first ball entering means is disposed at a position where a game ball that has flowed down a predetermined flow path among the game balls that have reached the first flow path enters, and the variable control means changes the variable means. The gaming machine is configured to be able to execute at least a first variable control and a second variable control different from the first variable control as the control for causing the game ball to reach the first channel. At least some of the game balls that do not flow down the predetermined flow path are placed in a second flow path different from the first flow path or different from the first flow path and the second flow path. a distributing means capable of distributing the balls to a third channel; a second ball entering means into which the game balls flowing down the second channel can enter and which is different from the first ball entering means; a third ball entry means into which the game ball flowing down the third channel can enter, and which is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means; and a predetermined element during the second game state. means capable of setting the first gaming state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied by updating a value related to a specific value to a specific value; The player is configured to be able to provide benefits advantageous to players of the same value or different values depending on the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means based on the ball entering the ball, and the above-mentioned. When a game ball enters the third ball entry means, a benefit advantageous to the player is not provided, and the predetermined element is related to the game ball according to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means. The value can be updated, and when a game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means, the value regarding the predetermined element is not updated. The period until the game ball that has reached the first flow path enters the second ball entry means is longer than the period until the game ball that has reached the first ball entry means enters the second ball entry means. The configuration is such that when a game ball enters the first ball entering means under a situation where a specific condition is satisfied, the value related to the predetermined element is not updated in accordance with the entering ball. The configuration is such that the privilege can be given, and the game ball that reaches the first channel in a situation where the variable means changes to the first state due to the first variable control is In the situation where the variable means changes to the first state, the game ball enters the first ball entering means more easily than the game ball that reaches the first flow path, and the first variable control When a game ball reaches the first flow path in a situation where a first period has elapsed since the variable means changed to the first state, the first variable control causes the variable means to change to the first state. The game ball is configured to flow down the predetermined flow path more easily than a game ball that has reached the first flow path after a second period longer than the first period has passed since the state changed.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the first ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball that has passed through the predetermined area can enter, the first state in which the first flow path is formed, and the a variable means capable of changing the variable means to a second state in which no road is formed; and a variable means capable of controlling the variable means to change the variable means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition. a control means; and a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the game ball passing through the predetermined area is easier to reach the first flow path than in the first game state, The ball means is disposed at a position where a game ball that has flowed down a predetermined flow path among the game balls that have reached the first flow path enters, and the variable control means is configured to control the control for changing the variable means. The gaming machine is configured to be able to execute at least a first variable control and a second variable control different from the first variable control, and the gaming machine is a gaming ball that has reached the first flow path, At least some of the game balls that do not flow down the predetermined flow path are transferred to a second flow path different from the first flow path or a third flow path different from the first flow path and the second flow path. a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means into which the game balls flowing down the second flow path can enter, and a third ball entry means that is different from the first ball entry means; a third ball entering means different from the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, and a value related to a predetermined element set to a specific value during the second gaming state; and means capable of setting the first gaming state when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied by updating the game to the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. The configuration is such that a benefit can be given advantageous to a player of the same value or a different value according to the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means who entered the ball based on the above, and the third ball entering means If a game ball enters the first ball entering means, a benefit advantageous to the player is not granted, and the value related to the predetermined element can be updated in accordance with the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering means. The configuration is such that when a game ball enters the second ball entry means or the third ball entry means, the value related to the predetermined element is not updated, and the game ball that reaches the first flow path A configuration in which the period until the game ball that has reached the first channel enters the second ball entering means is likely to be longer than the period until the ball enters the first ball entering means. and when a game ball enters the first ball entry means under a situation where a specific condition is met, the benefit can be granted without updating the value related to the predetermined element according to the entry. In this configuration, when the variable means changes to the first state by the first variable control, the game ball that reaches the first flow path is more likely to have the variable means change to the first state by the second variable control. In the situation where the state changes to the first state, the game ball enters the first ball entering means more easily than the game ball that reaches the first flow path, and the variable means is controlled by the first variable control. If the game ball reaches the first flow path after a first period has elapsed since changing to the first state, the variable means changes to the first state by the first variable control. The game ball is configured to flow down the predetermined flow path more easily than a game ball that has reached the first flow path after a second period longer than the first period has elapsed.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved .

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the general power winning device. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the flow of winning balls into the general winning device into the out port. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the flow of winning balls into the special electric winning device into the special electric operating port. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the V winning device. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the flow of balls in the V prize winning device when the storage valve is in the storage state in the accessory winning game. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and the ball flow when the storage valve moves from the storage state to the release state and the first movable valve is located at the guiding position in the accessory winning game. FIG. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the first embodiment, and the ball flow when the storage valve moves from the storage state to the release state and the first movable valve is located at the passing position in the accessory winning game. FIG. It is a back view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time of the jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. 12(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the start of the V rush displayed in 81, and (c) shows the pending status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12(a) is displayed. FIG. 12(d) is a schematic diagram showing the reservation status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12(b) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a normal symbol hit during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode in the case of a normal symbol hit during the V rush, which is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. 13(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of a hit on the accessory during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the display screen shown in FIG. 13(a) is displayed. 13(d) is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 13(b) is displayed. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a V winning per accessory during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode in the case of a V winning per accessory during the V rush, FIG. 14(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a loss when hitting an accessory during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the mode, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the display screen shown in FIG. 14(a) is displayed. 14(d) is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 14(b) is displayed. FIG. . (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a jackpot ending during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a jackpot ending during V rush. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of timer addition during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and (c) shows each display mode when the display screen shown in FIG. 15(a) is displayed. 15(d) is a schematic diagram showing the pending state of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 15(b) is displayed. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. 16(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the device 81 when the V rush is extended, and FIG. 16(c) shows the hold status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16(a) is displayed. FIG. 16(d) is a schematic diagram showing the reservation status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 16(b) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the special screen at the time of the jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the special screen at the time of the jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. 17(c) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode displayed on the symbol display device 81 in the heaven mode, and FIG. 17(c) shows the suspension of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 17(a) is displayed. It is a schematic diagram showing the situation, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the reservation status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 17(b) is displayed. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of the mid-chance effect for winning a role item displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the middle chance effect for hitting the accessory displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. 18(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a regular symbol stop during V rush displayed on the symbol display device 81, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the display screen shown in FIG. 18(a) is displayed. It is a schematic diagram showing the reservation status of each symbol, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the reservation status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 18(b) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a special symbol stop during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case of a special symbol stop during V rush. 19(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the lucky time effect during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and (c) is a case where the display screen shown in FIG. 19(a) is displayed. 19(d) is a schematic diagram showing the holding status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 19(b) is displayed. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main control device 110. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first random number table in the first embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the first winning type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special drawing jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table in the first embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various motion scenario tables in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory hit motion scenario table in the first embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first movable valve operation scenario table in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the general-purpose valve operation scenario table in the first embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the scenario for normal ordinary maps in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a scenario for saving time in the first embodiment; FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. FIG. (a) to (i) are timing charts showing the flow of the game when a game with a common symbol is executed in the normal state in the first embodiment. (a) to (i) are timing charts showing the flow of a game when a game with a common symbol is executed in the time saving state in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating images when the power is turned on. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces B to D. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list. It is a flowchart which shows timer interrupt processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol jackpot determination processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation pattern selection processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation execution processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the start-up winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetching process performed by MPU in a main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passing process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric starting opening winning process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interrupt processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory hit control process performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special figure fluctuation start processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing winning command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing status command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing a stop-related process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the general map related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the win-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot termination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the accessory hit related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 1st Embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control device in a 1st embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing round number command processing. 7 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing a fluctuation stop command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 2 is a flowchart showing notification command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing error command processing. 7 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 3 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the general power winning device. It is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the winning ball of the general electric winning device can flow down to the second special electric operating opening. (a) is a state in which the regular figure long winning game and the accessory winning game are being executed overlappingly during the time saving state (V rush) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment. FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the long variation of the common figure and the game per accessory during the time saving state (V rush) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment. 90(c) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode in which , and are being executed in duplicate, and (c) shows the pending status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 90(d) is a schematic diagram showing the reservation status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 90(b) is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment is shorter than the predetermined period; b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment is longer than the predetermined period; ) is a schematic diagram showing the hold status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 91(a) is displayed, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the hold status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 91(b) is displayed. It is a schematic diagram showing the reservation status of each symbol in the case of (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of the game when the end conditions of the accessory winning game executed during the normal pattern long winning in the second embodiment are different. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of the game when the end conditions of the accessory winning game executed during the long fluctuation of the common figure in the second embodiment are different. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the per-regular card type selection table in the second embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the general pattern variation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various motion scenario tables in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second role-playing motion scenario table in the second embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of an operation scenario table per common map in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of two scenarios per common map for time saving in the second embodiment. FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of three scenarios per time-saving general map in the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric starting opening winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the common map related process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure fluctuation start process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory hit related process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory hit start process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure remaining fluctuation suggestion processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the general figure related time update process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (a) and (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment when the danger time enters during V rush, and (b) and ( d) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the jackpot is discarded at the danger time during the V rush, which is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode when the jackpot is interrupted at the danger time during the V rush, which is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the danger time selection table in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric starting opening winning process 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect update process 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the danger time setting process performed by MPU in a main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM of the main control device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a main control device in a fourth embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically composition of a small hit random number table in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special symbol variation processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop process performed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 2 off stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetching process performed by MPU in a main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetching process performed by MPU in a main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V passing processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a partially enlarged view of a game board in a modified example, and is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of a general-purpose power winning device. It is a flow chart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed special figure fluctuation start processing 5 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop related process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 6th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time of the jackpot ending displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment. 145(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the ending condition selection screen displayed in FIG. 145(c), and FIG. It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment after selection of the end condition, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment. 146(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the V rush start screen displayed on the device 81, and (c) shows the pending status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 146(b) is displayed. FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a sixth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the special electric start opening prize winning process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the switching process performed by MPU in a main control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot control processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing termination condition setting processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing termination condition related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a display mode during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second modification. It is a front view schematically showing a game board 13 of a pachinko machine 10 in a seventh embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial perspective views schematically showing the structure of the right electric accessory in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 7 is a plan view schematically showing the opening/closing lid of the right electric accessory in the seventh embodiment. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged views schematically showing a part of the right side area in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode during a probability change state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. 81 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when transitioning from a variable probability state to a probability state displayed in 81. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at a time when the second special symbol variation has not started during the potential state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, ( b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the second special symbol variation is started in the potential state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during the RUSH game executed during the potential state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the special symbol holding ball is changed during the RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the number of special symbol reserved balls reaches a specific number during the RUSH game, which is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a super RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating the end of the super RUSH game displayed on the device 81. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode indicating the end of the super RUSH game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. It is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of a game in a seventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the first random number seven table in the seventh embodiment. (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the small winning random number 7 table in the seventh embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the second winning random number 7 table in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of the jackpot type selection table which ROM of the main control device in a 7th embodiment has. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of seven normal tables included in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of seven tables for probability variation that the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment has; FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of seven potential confirmation tables. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 7 table included in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main control device in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a regular pattern variation pattern selection table included in a ROM. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows time saving update processing 7 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation start process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process 7 performed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 2 off stop processing 7 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning process performed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 7 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the stop related process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the preparation state setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed special figure discard setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed production mode setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ceiling effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 7 for special figure 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the setting process during probability change performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows setting processing 7 during RUSH performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in a modification of the seventh embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the V prize winning device in a modification of a 7th embodiment. (a) to (c) are partial sectional views of a V winning device in a modification of the seventh embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of a V winning device in a modification of the seventh embodiment. (a) and (b) are partial sectional views of a V winning device of a pachinko machine in a second modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of a game in a modified example of the seventh embodiment. (a), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the potential state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the modification of 7th Embodiment. a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode in a potential state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a front view schematically showing a game board 13 of a pachinko machine 10 in an eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a transition diagram schematically showing the contents of a small winning random number table 202ga executed by the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table which the ROM of the main control device in 8th Embodiment has. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of eight probability variation tables included in the ROM of the main control device in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of eight tables for potential confirmation included in the ROM of the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection 8 table which ROM of the main control device in 8th Embodiment has. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in an eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special figure 1 off variation processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 off variation pattern selection process 8 performed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 off stop process 8 performed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning process 8 performed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. (a), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the potential state displayed on the 3rd pattern display device 81 in 9th Embodiment. (a), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the potential state displayed on the 3rd pattern display device 81 in 9th Embodiment. (a), (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the potential state displayed on the 3rd pattern display device 81 in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode in the potential state displayed on the 3rd pattern display device 81 in 9th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot type selection 9 table which ROM of the main control device in 9th Embodiment has. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 9 table included in the ROM of the main controller in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the main controller in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a regular pattern variation pattern selection 9 table included in the ROM. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of an icon display number selection table included in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a continuous performance selection table included in the ROM. It is a flowchart showing winning command processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed preparation state setting processing 9 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the effect setting process 9 during RUSH performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot related processing 10 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modification of the ninth embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 3 to 5 are right side views of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of a general-purpose winning device 640 provided in the lower area, and FIGS. 6 to 9 show a special variable winning device provided in the upper left area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of the pachinko machine 65, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having ball entry holes 63, 64, 640, etc. into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 21) that fires a ball to the front area (gaming area) of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 21) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached to guide the target up to the target point. The contents of the numerous ball entry holes provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG. 2.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12 and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the inner frame 12 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 21). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the player's operation, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general entrance. It is constructed by assembling a ball opening 63, special drawing ball openings 64, 640, variable winning device 65, V winning device 650, normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, variable display device unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is inside. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures disposed on the rear side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general ball entrance 63, the special ball entrance 64, the general prize winning device 640, the V winning device 65, the variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, there is a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

A first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. This first symbol display device 37 is disposed so as to be covered by the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) of the game board 13 formed of transparent resin (for example, ABS). The ball is configured to prevent the shot ball from colliding with the first symbol display device 37.

This first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display. The first symbol display device 37 displays information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21), and mainly displays the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when a ball enters the special symbol entry hole 64 (wins a prize). That is, the first symbol display device 37 is a display means for showing the lottery result of a lottery (special symbol lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the special symbol entry hole 64. In this embodiment, since the pachinko machine 10 with one type of special symbol is used, the result of one type of special symbol lottery is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. If the pachinko machine 10 has two types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the first symbol display device 37 may be provided with a display area corresponding to the type of each special symbol.

In addition, the first symbol display device 37 uses an LED to indicate which of the gaming states (for example, normal state, time saving state, etc.) the pachinko machine 10 is in, and the special symbol (first symbol) changes. It is possible to indicate by the lighting state whether it is a medium (during dynamic display to stop and display a combination of symbols to show the lottery result), or whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a jackpot that is advantageous to the player or a symbol that is disadvantageous to the player. The lighting state indicates whether the symbol corresponds to a jackpot or a missed symbol, and the number of balls on hold is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of rounds during a jackpot and an error are displayed by a 7-segment display device. In addition, the lighting state can also indicate that the fluctuation of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted). The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs. In this embodiment, various gaming states are notified by combinations of emitted light colors of the light emitting means (seven segment display device), but any other structure may be used as long as the player can identify the various gaming states. For example, various game states may be notified by varying the length of the period in which the light emitting means is on and the period in which it is off (blinking mode).

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (special symbol lottery) is held when a ball enters the special symbol entry hole 64 (wins). Then, in the special symbol drawing, a judgment is made as to whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot drawing). Here, based on the fact that it has been determined that the player has won the jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the bonus game state is advantageous to the player.

When a jackpot game is executed, the variable winning device 650 becomes in an open state in which it is possible to easily win a ball into the specific winning hole 650a, and by placing a ball into the specific winning hole 650a, many winning balls can be won in a short period of time. A game that can be acquired is executed. This jackpot game is executed (in some cases) after the lottery result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display), and is executed during the opening period (for example, 1 second) of the specified winning opening of the variable winning device 650. 650a), a round game period in which an open state is set, and a predetermined period after one round game period ends until the next round game starts. period (for example, 0.5 seconds), an interval period in which the closed state is set, and an ending period in which the closed state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the end of the last round gaming period. A jackpot game period will be set.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating a jackpot win is stopped (determined display), the ball can be opened in accordance with the timing when the specific prize opening 650a becomes open during the jackpot game. Since preparations can be made to fire the ball in any direction, jackpot games can be played smoothly. Furthermore, since this opening period can be used as a period for informing the players of the game contents of the current jackpot game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting the ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a new special symbol lottery from being executed immediately after the last round game ends. Since preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction for the game to be played, it is possible to smoothly switch between games.

The length of each period (opening period, round period, ending period) of the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery depends on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot and the type of jackpot won. For example, if you win a jackpot in which the game content to be executed after the jackpot game is different from the game content at the time of winning the jackpot, The ending period of a jackpot game (for example, 10 seconds) is set to be longer than the ending period of other jackpot games (for example, 2 seconds), and the jackpot game ends for the player during that ending period. It is preferable to make it possible to perform an effect that provides advance guidance on the content of a game that will be executed later. This makes it possible to provide easy-to-understand games to players.

On the other hand, if you win a jackpot in which the game content at the time of winning the jackpot is the same as the game content executed after the jackpot game ends, the ending period (for example, 1 second) of the jackpot will be used as the ending period of the other jackpot game. It is preferable to configure it so that it is set shorter than the ending period (for example, 2 seconds). This allows the player to play the game efficiently.

In addition, without using a configuration that actually discriminates between the game content at the time of winning a jackpot and the game content to be executed after the jackpot game ends, for example, based on the type of jackpot won and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, Therefore, the gaming state to be set after the end of the jackpot game may be predefined, and the ending period of each jackpot game may be set in advance according to the specified content.

Although a specific explanation will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, there are two types of games that the player is allowed to perform when the game state is the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols); The game is configured to be different from the game that the player is made to perform when the player is in the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and the game that the player is made to perform during the time-saving state is different from the game that is made to be performed during the normal state. The game is configured so that the game that is executed in the game is more advantageous to the player (the jackpot game is more likely to be executed).

In other words, if you win a jackpot with the normal state set, and the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on the jackpot winning, the ending period of the jackpot game has the time-saving state already set. The contents of the jackpot game (operation scenario) are stipulated so that the ending period of the jackpot game is longer than the ending period of the jackpot game in which the time-saving state is set again after the jackpot game that is executed based on the jackpot win ends. Just leave it there. Thereby, it is possible to set an ending period suitable for the player simply by executing a jackpot game according to predefined contents.

Note that the period other than the ending period may be predefined to be different depending on the type of jackpot won or the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, or the opening period and the interval period may be different. Furthermore, even if the type of jackpot won is the same, the length of each period during the jackpot game may be varied depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to make players interested not only in which type of jackpot they won the jackpot (special symbol lottery results), but also in the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, thereby increasing the interest of the game. be able to.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the type of jackpot is also determined. A detailed explanation will be given later, but the jackpot type to be determined is that the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 rounds, and a time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is given after the jackpot game ends. 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot type with different durations of the time-saving state (after the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 4 times without winning the jackpot). 4 times) and a time-saving jackpot (time-saving number of 15 times) in which the time-saving state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 15 times without winning the jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery, it is determined that the player has lost and the bonus is not given to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. In some cases where it is determined that the lottery result is not the above-mentioned jackpot but a miss, the player is given fewer benefits than the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, the privilege of opening the V winning device 65 for only one round). It may be configured such that a winning game is executed. The first symbol display device 37 not only indicates whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot (or not) as a stop symbol after the fluctuation ends (or not), but also indicates the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. The corresponding pattern is shown.

In this embodiment, the gaming state is configured to be set to either a "normal state" or a "time saving state". The normal state is a gaming state in which the jackpot probability of special symbols is set to a low probability (1/100), and the winning probability of normal symbols is set to a low probability (1/1000) (hereinafter, special symbol low probability state, In the time saving state, the jackpot probability of special symbols is set to a low probability (1/100), and the probability of winning a normal symbol is set to a high probability (300/1000). This is a gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a low probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols).

Here, "4R jackpot (time saving 4 times)" means that after a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 4 (a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for 4 rounds), a time saving state (a low probability state of special symbols) , a high probability state of normal symbols), and a time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 4 is set after the end of the jackpot game.

"4R jackpot (time saving 15 times)" is a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds (a jackpot game that opens the variable winning device 650 for 4 rounds), and then a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, normal symbol This refers to a jackpot that can be transferred to a high probability state (high probability state), and a time-saving state in which the number of time-saving times is 15 is set after the jackpot game ends.

In this embodiment, after the time saving state is set, when a predetermined end condition (time saving end condition) is satisfied, the gaming state is configured to shift from the time saving state to the normal state, and the above-mentioned time saving state is set. The number of times indicates the time saving termination condition. In other words, the time saving number of times is 4 times, when the special symbol lottery is executed 4 times without winning a jackpot after the time saving state is set (the 4th special symbol variation is stopped and displayed).The time saving end condition is is established and the number of time saving times is 15 times, when the special symbol lottery is executed 15 times without winning a jackpot after the time saving state is set (the 15th special symbol change is stopped and displayed). It is specified that the termination condition is satisfied.

In other words, "4R jackpot (4 time savings)" is a jackpot type that has a time-saving ending condition that is easier to achieve than "4R jackpot (15 time savings)", so "4R jackpot (4 time savings)" )", "4R jackpot (time saving 15 times)" is a jackpot type in which the time saving state is more likely to continue, and is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a time-saving termination condition for ending the time-saving state, a condition regarding the number of special symbol drawings during the time-saving state (time-saving number of times) is defined, but other configurations may be set as the time-saving termination condition. For example, a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the result of a special symbol lottery is other than a jackpot and the number of times a specific lottery result (specific loss) reaches a predetermined number (for example, three times) , a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined amount of time (for example, 100 seconds) has elapsed since the time-saving state was set, or a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the time-saving state is set, and a ball enters a specific ball entrance (for example, the general entrance gate) during the time-saving state. An end condition may be set that is satisfied when the number of balls entered in step 63a) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 balls).

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. On the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, a plurality of left general ball entry ports 63a are arranged, from which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when balls enter the game board 13. Further, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a liquid crystal display that displays a third symbol in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37, triggered by the ball entering the special symbol entry hole 64 (starting winning). (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device"), and a normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed variably using the passing of a ball to a normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 21), so that, for example, three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed (moving) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (display). The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is configured to display the first symbol while the first symbol display device 37 displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 21). A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

The second symbol display device displays an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. This is a variable display in which the lights are turned on alternately for a predetermined period of time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the general prize winning device 640 is activated for a predetermined period of time. The configuration is such that a winning game (a regular game winning game) in which only the player is in the operating state (open state) is executed.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is always constant (3 seconds) regardless of the result of the ordinary symbol lottery and the probability state of the ordinary symbol (low probability state, high probability state). . By configuring in this way, for example, in order to make it difficult to perform a game with a normal symbol during a low probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, the time required for the fluctuating display of the regular symbol (the regular symbol fluctuation time) is reduced. In a pachinko machine 10 configured such that the time is longer in the normal state than in the time saving state, the time is changed from the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) in which it is difficult to execute a winning game with normal symbols (game with normal symbols) to When the game state shifts to a time-saving state (a state with high probability of normal symbols) in which a winning game is likely to be executed, the long-term normal symbol fluctuation executed during the normal state (which is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state) The normal symbol lottery during the time saving state may be set for a long time even though the time saving state has been set, and the period in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed is set for a long time. Can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the game content (opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a) of the normal symbol game to be executed is configured to be different between the normal state and the time saving state without changing the variation time of the normal symbol. ing. Specifically, a normal pattern winning game executed during a time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than a normal pattern winning game executed during a normal state. It is configured so that it is easy to win a prize in the opening 643. Specifically, when the normal state is set, after a 4.1 second opening period (closed period of the electric accessory 640a), a 0.1 second opening period is set for the regular game ( If a normal game per game) is executed and the time saving state is set, a 0.1 second opening period (closed period of the electric accessory 640a) is followed by a 3 second open period. A winning game (time-saving regular game winning game) is executed.

In this way, by executing the normal pattern winning game in which the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state is varied depending on the probability state of the normal pattern, the time is shorter than in the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol). The state (high probability state of normal symbols) can make it easier to win a ball in the normal symbol winning device 640 during the normal symbol winning game.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, in the normal state and in the time saving state, the rate at which the balls that win in the general electric winning device 640 enter the special electric operating opening 643 during the ordinary state and the time saving mode is calculated. It is configured to be different. Specifically, the ball that won a prize in the general computer winning device 640 during the time-saving general card winning game is more likely than the ball that won in the general computer winning device 640 during the normal general card winning game executed during the normal state. It is configured so that the ball can easily enter the special electric operation port 643. With this configuration, when the normal state is set, it is difficult for a ball to win in the general electric winning device 640, and even if the ball wins in the ordinary electric winning device 640, the special electric operating opening 643 If the time-saving state is set, it will be easier for the ball to enter the general electric winning device 640, and if the ball is won in the general electric winning device 640, the ball will be sent to the special electric operating port 643. It is possible to make it easier to let the ball enter the ball.

In other words, in this embodiment, in a plurality of processes until a fired ball enters the special electric operation port 643, a state in which the ball is allowed to enter the special electric operation port 643 and a state in which it is restricted are set. Since it is variable according to the game state to be set, the ease with which the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 can be reliably varied according to the game state to be set.

As described above with reference to FIG. 2, in this embodiment, the gaming method that is advantageous to the player is the same ( The game is configured to be a left-handed game. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, a lottery opportunity for a normal symbol is established even during the normal state (a ball passing through the through gate 67 occurs), and a lottery for the regular symbol is executed. As a result of the normal symbol lottery, if a winning result is won, the electric accessory 640a provided in the game area that can be reached by the ball fired in the left-handed game is controlled to open, so it is easier to save time than the normal symbol winning game. However, there is a risk that a ball may enter the winning device 640 during a game in which it is difficult to win a ball into the winning device 640.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if a ball enters the general winning device 640 during the normal game that is executed during the normal state, the winning ball does not enter the special electric operating port 643. It is configured to make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball. With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute the game using the same gaming method in the normal state (low probability state with normal symbols) and the time saving state (high probability state with normal symbols). Even if a ball enters the ordinary electric winning device 640 during the normal state, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the special electric operating opening 643.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same fluctuation time (3 seconds) is set as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) and the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) with normal symbols, and when the gaming state is a high probability state (time saving state) with normal symbols, the normal symbol It may be configured such that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter in the high probability state (time saving state). In addition, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state of the common symbol), other methods are used, such as increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit. If the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to be a state in which the ball enters the general prize winning device 640 more easily than the low probability state of the normal symbol, the time required for the fluctuating display of the second symbol is set regardless of the gaming state. It may be constant. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than in the normal state during normal and high accuracy, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left side area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired at the game board, the ball flows down the left side area of the game board 13. Most of the balls (approximately 100%) are configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery of this second symbol, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery is started. If the result is a failure, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is held up to a maximum of one time in total, and the number of balls held is displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84 mentioned above. The second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided in number corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to one time, but may be set to two or more times (for example, eight times). Further, the number of normal symbol starting ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, to the right side of the variable display unit 80. Further, in this embodiment, most of the balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 in a left-handed game are configured to pass through the through gate 67, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only some balls may pass through the through gate 67. It may be configured to pass through the through gate 67.

Next, a description will be given of the configuration of the general winning machine 640 that becomes open when a normal symbol lottery is won. As shown in FIG. 2, the general power winning device 640 is provided below the variable display device unit 80, and has an open state in which it is possible to win a ball into the interior thereof, and a closed state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state. An electric accessory 640a whose state can be changed is an electric accessory 640a that is electrically connected to a position where a ball flowing down the left side area (area on the left side of the variable display unit 80 in front view) of the game area formed on the game board 13 reaches. A accessory 640a is attached. In this embodiment, the balls fired in the left-handed game reach the general winning device 640 at a rate of approximately 1 out of 3 balls (if the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the balls fired by the left-handed game reach the general winning device 640). The system is configured so that the player reaches a position where he or she can win a prize.

The electric accessory 640a normally maintains a closed state, and when a normal symbol lottery is won, the electric accessory 640a is variably operated to an open state for a predetermined period in a predetermined variable pattern. A game with a common symbol is executed. In other words, in this embodiment, by winning a prize by winning the regular symbol lottery and executing the regular symbol winning game, it is possible to provide the player with a state in which it is easy for the ball to win in the regular symbol winning device 640.

As explained above, in this embodiment, by continuously executing the left-handed game, it is possible to establish a lottery opportunity for the normal symbol (allowing the ball to pass through the through gate 67), and the normal symbol It is configured such that it is possible to enter a prize into a general electricity prize winning device 640 which becomes open when a winning lottery is won. Furthermore, the left-handed game is configured so that a special symbol lottery opportunity can also be established. In addition, a variable prize winning device 650 which is variably operated according to a jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery is also arranged at a position where a ball fired by a left-handed game can win a prize.

With this configuration, the player can always play the same game method (left-handed game) regardless of the game state, thereby eliminating the trouble of forcing the player to change the game method. It is possible to smoothly play the game without having to give anything.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5, a detailed explanation will be given of the configuration of the general electricity winning device 640 and the flow of winning balls in the general electricity winning apparatus 640. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the internal structure of the general electric winning device 640, and FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing a flow in which a winning ball enters the special electric operating port 643 in the ordinary electric winning device 640.

In this embodiment, a normal symbol lottery is executed when a ball passes through the through gate 67, and when a winning result is won in the normal symbol lottery, the electric accessory 640a is opened in a predetermined variable pattern. A game with a common figure is executed. Then, when the electric accessory 640a changes to the open state in this general winning game, the ball becomes in a state where it can be won into the general drawing winning device 640.

As shown in FIG. 3, a second movable valve 642 is provided in the general electricity winning device 640. This second movable valve 642 allows the ball, which has flowed into the general winning device 640 and flowed down the first flow path 641a, into a second flow path that communicates with the special electric operating port 643, triggered by the execution of the normal winning game. It is configured to be variable in a predetermined variable pattern between a first state in which it can be guided to the third flow path 641b and a second state in which it can be guided to the third flow path 641c communicating with the outlet 644. Further, the ball that has won in the general winning device 640 is detected by the ball detection sensor 640s, and the number of winning balls in the general winning device 640 in one game per general drawing can be measured. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this embodiment, when the number of winning balls that enters the general winning machine 640 in one game per general drawing reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), at that point The configuration is such that the game ends when a normal figure is hit. In addition, in this embodiment, when a ball enters the special electric operation opening 643, the prize balls (4 balls) are paid out, and when the ball enters the out opening 644, the prize ball is not paid out. ing.

This general power winning device 640 has a cover body formed of a transparent acrylic resin so that the player can visually check the flow of balls inside the general power winning device 640, and the cover body is attached to the game board 13. ing. Therefore, since the player can visually check the flow of the balls in the general winning device 640, the player can enjoy the behavior of the winning ball in the general electric winning device 640.

The electric accessory 640a provided in the general electricity prize winning device 640 is provided with the upper end side of the second partition wall 640k2 as a base for rotation, and is in a closed state (Fig. 3) and an open state (see FIG. 4) in which the ball can more easily enter the general prize winning device 640 than the closed state. As shown in FIG. 3, the electrically powered accessory 640a in the closed state is configured to be housed in the general electricity prize winning device 640, and specifically, the electrically powered accessory 640a in the closed state is configured to be stored in the general electricity prize winning device 640, and specifically, to the left side of the vertical line of the second partition wall 640k2 ( The distal end of the first partition wall 640k1 is configured to protrude from the left side in the perspective of FIG. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the electric accessory 640a in the closed state to come into contact with a ball fired in a left-handed game, thereby making it difficult for the electric accessory 640a to be damaged. can.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, the ball that has won in the general electric winning device 640 is won in the special electric operating opening 643 according to the game state that is set at the time when the game per ordinary figure is executed. It is configured so that the probability of winning (easiness of winning) is different. Specifically, by varying the period (opening period for a common figure) from when the game for a common figure is executed until the electric accessory 640a is controlled to open in a predetermined opening pattern, the game can be played during a normal state. The ball that won in the general electricity prize winning device 640 in the ordinary figure winning game is entered into the special electricity operation opening 643 more than the ball that won in the ordinary electricity winning apparatus 640 in the ordinary figure winning game executed during the time saving state. It is structured so that it is difficult to win.

With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed game) is played during the normal state and the time saving state, the ball enters the special electric operation port 643 during the normal state. It is possible to suppress winnings. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a game to win a general figure that is executed during the normal state is a game to win a general figure in which it is more difficult for the ball to enter the prize winning device 640 than a game to win a general figure that is executed during the time saving state. is configured to run. With this configuration as well, it is possible to prevent a ball from entering the special electric operating port 643 during the normal state. In other words, in this embodiment, in addition to measures to make it more difficult for a ball to enter the general electricity winning device 640 during the normal state than during the time saving state, when a ball enters the general electricity winning device 640 during the normal state, has a measure to make it more difficult for a ball to win in the special electric operation opening 643 than when the ball wins in the ordinary electric winning device 640 during the time saving state. In this way, by providing a configuration in which the ball enters the special electric operating port 643 in a plurality of stages during the normal state, it can be suppressed more reliably.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, a description will be given of the ball flow when a ball enters the general prize winning device 640 in the general winning game executed when the normal state is set. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of winning balls in the general winning machine 640 in the normal state winning game. In this embodiment, in order to avoid giving the player the trouble of changing the game method, the game is configured so that the game can always be played with left-handed play. Therefore, even in the normal state where the probability of a normal symbol is low, if a lottery opportunity for a normal symbol is established (the ball passes through the through gate 67) and a game is executed with a common symbol, the regular symbol winning device is activated. There was a risk that the ball would land within 640.

In other words, the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) makes it easier to enter the ball into the general winning device 640 than the time saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). Although this is a gaming state in which it is difficult to play, in this embodiment, the same gaming method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state and the time saving state. There was a possibility that the ball would land inside the ball.

As described above, the normal electric winning device 640 is provided with a special electric operating opening 643 that triggers the execution of the winning game (accessory winning game) that opens the V winning device 65. If the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 and a game with a winning object is executed, there is a problem in that an excessively advantageous game is provided to a player who is playing a game in a normal state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the percentage of balls that enter the special electric winning device 640 in the normal state winning device 640 during the normal state and the percentage of balls winning the general electric winning device 640 during the time saving state that enter the special electric operating hole 643 are determined. The ratio of balls entering the operating port 643 is configured to be different. Specifically, when the game for winning a common symbol is executed in the normal state, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state after the game for winning the common symbol is started, compared to when the game for winning a common symbol is executed in the time saving state. The second movable valve 642, which moves based on the start of the winning game, is set to the second state (when the winning ball is released from the winning device 640). It is configured such that the ball can win in the general prize winning device 640 only at the timing when the ball can be guided to the mouth 644).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 4, when a ball enters the general winning machine 640 during the general winning game that is executed during the normal state, the ball falls during the first round, which is designed to have a falling period of approximately 0.5 seconds. The ball flows down the flow path 641a, is guided to the third flow path 641c by the second movable valve 642 located in the second state, and enters the out port 644 (the ball reaches the second movable valve 642). The period from when the ball enters the out port 644 is approximately 0.3 seconds). With this configuration, even if a ball wins in the normal electric winning device 640 during the normal state, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the special electric operating opening 643, so that the game in the normal state It is possible to prevent excessively advantageous games from being offered to players who play the game.

In addition, in order to prevent the ball from entering the special electric operating port 643 during the normal state, a system is provided to prevent the ball from entering the special electric winning device 640 due to the general winning game executed during the normal state. Since there is no need to use a special configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 can be increased.

Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in a normal figure winning game executed during the normal state, the timing at which the second movable valve 642 is changed to the second state (at the start of the normal figure winning game) is the electric accessory. 640a is in the open state (4.1 seconds after the start of the normal pattern winning game), for example, the normal pattern winning game is started in a state where the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state. Even so, the configuration is such that the ball does not reach the second movable valve 642 during the variable operation of the second movable valve 642. By configuring in this way, the second movable valve 642 which is in variable operation and the winning ball of the general electric winning device 640 come into contact with each other, thereby preventing a situation where the ball gets clogged in the general electric winning device 640. , it is possible to prevent a situation in which the second movable valve 642 breaks down.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 provided in the ordinary electric winning device 640, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and the ball enters the out opening 644. Although the configuration is such that the prize ball is not paid out when the ball is hit, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the ball enters the out port 644, the ball enters the special electric operation port 643. It may be configured such that a larger number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out than in the case where the player wins the game. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the benefits given to the player based on the lottery of normal symbols depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the state where the normal state is set, more prize balls are given to the player as a benefit than in the time saving state, and in the state where the time saving state is set, to the player, In addition to fewer prize balls than in the normal state, it is possible to give a bonus game that is not (hardly) given in the normal state. Therefore, regardless of which gaming state is set, it is possible to make the player interested in the lottery results of the normal symbols.

Furthermore, it may be configured to pay out the same number of prize balls (4 balls) when a ball enters the special electric actuation port 643 and when a ball enters the out port 644. It is preferable that the structure is such that it is difficult to tell whether the winning ball of the ordinary electric winning device 640 has entered the special electric operating opening 643 or the out opening 644. As a result, the player cannot determine which ball entrance (special electric operating opening 643, out opening 644) the ball entered based on the number of prize balls that have been paid out. After placing a ball in the winning device 640, it is possible to perform an effect that makes it seem like whether or not a winning game (accessories winning game) will be executed is determined by lottery by opening the V winning device 65. It is possible to enhance the performance effect. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the prize balls (4 pieces) are paid out when the ball detection sensor 640s detects a ball. The prize balls given to the player based on this can be quickly paid out.

As shown in FIG. 4, when the electric accessory 640a is located in the open state, the tip side of the first partition wall 640k1 and the electric accessory 640a are substantially parallel, and a spherical flow path is formed therebetween. Therefore, when the electric accessory 640a positioned in the open state receives a ball, it is possible to prevent the ball from bouncing out of the general electricity prize winning device 640 due to the impact.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, a description will be given of the ball flow when a ball enters the general prize winning device 640 in the general winning game executed when the time saving state is set. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of winning balls in the general winning machine 640 in the general winning game during the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 5, when the game per ordinary figure is executed during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is played after the game per ordinary figure is started than when the game per ordinary figure is executed during the normal state. Since the period until the open state (first open state) is set short, the second movable valve 642 is in the first state (the winning ball of the general electric winning device 640 can be guided to the special electric operating port 643). The electric accessory 640a enters the open state at the timing when the state) is maintained.

Therefore, when a winning ball in the general electricity winning device 640 flows down the first flow path 641a and reaches the second movable valve 642 (0.5 seconds after the ball wins in the general electricity winning device 640) ), since the second movable valve 642 is in the first state, the flow flows down the second flow path 641b communicating with the first flow path 641a (the flow period is designed to be about 0.2 seconds), and the The ball enters the operating port 643. Then, based on the detection means (proximity sensor) not shown detecting the entry of a ball into the special electric operation opening 643, a prize winning game is started in which the V winning device 65 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 5, when the second movable valve 642 is located in the first state, the ball flowing down the first flow path 641a (flowing vertically downward from the perspective of FIG. 5) will move toward the second movable valve 642. The second movable valve 642 is configured to be variable up to a position where it is difficult to come into contact with the second movable valve 642. This can prevent the second movable valve 642 from frequently coming into contact with the ball and causing the second movable valve 642 to malfunction. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, if a game with a normal figure is executed during the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a will be in the open state 0.1 seconds after the start of the game with a normal figure, and the normal figure will be activated. The ball enters the electronic winning device 640 into a state where it can be won. Therefore, the minimum period of time from when the game per common figure is executed until the ball reaches the position of the second movable valve 642 is 0.6 seconds (from the start of the game per common figure until the electric accessory 640a is in the open state). The value is the sum of 0.1 seconds until the winning ball reaches the second movable valve 642 and 0.5 seconds until the winning ball reaches the second movable valve 642.

The second movable member 642 performs a variable operation at the same time as the normal game starts, and its variable operation period (the period required to change from the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state)) The configuration is such that the time is 0.1 seconds. In addition, since the second movable valve 642 is configured to be variably operated one second after the electric accessory 640a enters the closed state in the normal game, the electric accessory 640a is changed to the closed state. The second movable valve 642 is made variable when a period (1 second) that is twice the period (0.5 seconds) for the ball that won in the universal power winning device 640 to reach the second movable valve 642 immediately before the ball reaches the second movable valve 642 configured to work. Therefore, even in the normal game played during the time saving state, it is possible to make it difficult for the second movable valve 642 in variable operation to come into contact with the ball.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. A V winning device 65 is provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (left side in the viewpoint of FIG. 2) so that a ball fired in a left-handed game and flowing down the left side area can win a prize. Here, with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9, the specific configuration of the V winning device 65 and the flow of winning balls in the V winning device 65 will be explained. In this embodiment, when a ball enters the special electric actuation opening 643 provided in the general electric winning device 640, the game for winning the accessory is executed in which the V winning device 65 is opened and operated. ing. A jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed when a ball enters a V jackpot 165 provided in the V jackpot device 65.

In other words, in this embodiment, in addition to the opportunity to execute a jackpot game (special pattern jackpot game) that is established when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, when a ball enters a specific winning hole (V winning hole 165), There is an opportunity to execute a jackpot game (V jackpot game) that is established. In this way, by providing a plurality of opportunities for executing the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with a game that never gets boring.

First, with reference to FIG. 6, the configuration of the V winning device 65 will be explained. The V winning device 65 is provided with an opening/closing door 65a that can be changed between an open state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the V winning device 65 and a closed state in which it is more difficult for a ball to enter the prize than in the open state. This opening/closing door 65a is provided at a position where a ball flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 can reach (see FIG. 2), and is changed to an open state when a game with an accessory is executed.

Inside the V-winning device 65, a first flow path 65b is formed in the space between the first partition wall 65k1 and the second partition wall 65k2, through which the balls that have passed through the opening/closing door 65a in the open state flow down. A storage valve 66a is provided at a position where the ball that has flown down the path 65b (flowing period: 0.5 seconds) reaches. A storage portion capable of storing one ball is formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 66a, and the ball that first wins the V winning device 65 during the accessory winning game is temporarily stored in the storage portion. It consists of Further, a storage sensor 65s is provided above the storage valve 66a, and is configured to be able to detect that the ball is stored in the storage section. Furthermore, a ball detection sensor 65s2 for detecting a winning ball in the V winning device 65 is provided on the upstream side of the first flow path 65b, and based on the ball detection sensor 65s2 detecting a ball, The number of balls that have won into the V winning device 65 during the winning game is counted, and prize ball payout control for the winning balls is executed. In this way, by providing the ball detection sensor 65s2 at a position where the winning ball flows down immediately after the winning ball in the V winning device 65, it is possible to suppress a situation in which more balls than the specified number enter into the V winning device 65. At the same time, it is possible to immediately award a prize ball to a player during a game where he or she wins an accessory.

Further, a second flow path 65c is formed to communicate with the first flow path 65b, and a first outlet 163a is provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 65c. As shown in FIG. 6, the balls flowing down the first flow path 65b do not directly flow into the second flow path 65c, but the balls are stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a. The subsequent balls flowing down the passage 65b come into contact with the balls stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a, and are configured to be guided to the second flow path 65c. The first out port 163a provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 65c is a ball entry port for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and is a ball inlet port for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. After a falling period of 0.1 seconds), the ball that enters the first out port 163a flows down a ball ejection path (not shown) and is ejected to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the storage valve 66a changes the storage state in which balls can be stored and the state in which the balls can be It is configured to be variably operated between a released state and a released state in which it is more difficult to store balls than the released state. When the storage valve 66a is in the released state, the first flow path 65b and the third flow path 65d communicate with each other, and the balls flowing down the first flow path 65b or are stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a. The ball flowing down flows down the third flow path 65d. The third flow path 65d is a vertically linear flow path with a width of about 15 mm formed in a space between the lower end side of the first partition wall 65k1 and the third partition wall 65k3.

A first movable valve 66b is disposed at a position facing the downstream side of the third flow path 65d. The first movable valve 66b has a guiding position (protruding position) where it can receive balls flowing down the third flow path 65d in a predetermined movable pattern when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10; It is configured to be movable to a passing position (buried position) where it cannot receive the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d. Specifically, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 and is configured to move according to the operation of the first movable valve solenoid 209d, which is drive-controlled by the main controller 110. When the valve solenoid 209d is turned on (energized), the first movable valve 66b moves to the passing position (the position buried in the game board 13) where it retreats from inside the V winning device 65, and the first When the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF (when electricity is cut off), the first movable valve 66b moves to the guiding position where it protrudes into the V winning device 65 (the position where it protrudes from the game board 13). It is configured as follows.

The first movable valve 66b located at the guiding position (protruding position) is configured such that a ball can flow down its upper surface, and as shown in FIG. It is configured to slope downward toward the road 65e. Therefore, when the first movable valve 66b is located at the guiding position (protrusion position), the ball that flows down the third flow path 65d (flow period 0.2 seconds) passes through the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b into the fourth flow path. It will flow down towards 65e. A second out port 163b is provided on the downstream side of the fourth flow path 65e, and the ball that has flown down the fourth flow path 65e (flowing period: 0.2 seconds) enters the second out port 163b. This second out port 163b is a ball inlet for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, similar to the first out port 163a described above, and is a ball entry port for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. The balls flow down a ball discharge path (not shown) and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, when the first movable valve 66b is located at the passing position, the third flow path 65d and the fifth flow path 65f communicate with each other, and the balls flowing down the third flow path 65d (flowing period 0.2 seconds) flows into the fifth flow path 65f (flow period 0.1 seconds). A V winning opening 165 is provided on the downstream side of the fifth flow path 65f. The V winning hole 165 is a winning hole that can be an opportunity to execute a jackpot game, and when a ball enters the V winning hole 165 while the jackpot game is not being executed, the jackpot game is executed.

As shown in FIG. 6, the V winning device 65 is provided with a first out port 163a and a second out port 163b. With this configuration, a ball won in the V winning device 65 when the storage valve 66a is in the storage state is connected to the flow path (third flow) through which the ball can pass when the storage valve 66a is in the released state. It is possible to reliably prevent the liquid from flowing into the passage 65d, the fourth passage 65e, and the fifth passage 65f. Note that, without being limited to the configuration of this embodiment, for example, the first outlet 163a may be eliminated, the second flow path 65c and the fourth flow path 65e may be communicated with each other, and the storage valve 66a may be in the storage state. , the ball flowing down the second flow path 65c may be configured to enter the second outlet 163b. In this case, the third partition wall 65k3, which is provided linearly in the vertical direction in FIG. It is preferable that the extension line in the direction is on the right side of the fourth partition wall 65k4 (the right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 6). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the balls that have flowed down the second flow path 65c from flowing into the fifth flow path 65f.

As described above, in this embodiment, there are two opportunities to execute the jackpot game, namely, when the jackpot game is executed when the jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol, and when the ball is There are cases where a jackpot game is executed when a prize is won in the winning hole 165. Hereinafter, when explaining the jackpot game by classifying the triggers for execution, the jackpot game executed when a prize is won in the V winning hole 165 is also referred to as the V jackpot game.

As described above, the V prize winning device 65 of the present embodiment enters an open state in which balls can be won by executing the accessory winning game, and only one ball stored in the storage valve 66a enters the third flow path. 65d is configured to flow down, and a ball wins in the V winning opening 165 according to the operating status of the first movable valve 66b when the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d reaches the first movable valve 66b. The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the time when the first movable valve 66b is located at the guiding position (the time during which the ball cannot enter the V winning hole 165) is 5 seconds, while the time when the first movable valve 66b is located at the passing position ( Since the ball is constantly moving in a movable pattern in which the time it takes for the ball to enter the V-winning port 165 is 0.5 seconds, the rate at which the ball that flows down the third flow path 65d enters the V-winning port 165 is , approximately 1/11.

In addition, even if a plurality of balls are won into the V winning device 65 in one game per accessory, the storage valve 66a controls the operation so that the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 65d is one. Therefore, the system is configured such that the ratio is such that one jackpot game is executed for every 11 times when the accessory winning game is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9, the contents of the flow of winning balls in the V winning device 65 during the execution of the accessory winning game will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 7, the ball flow in the first half period of the accessory winning game (the period in which the storage valve 66a is in the storage state) will be explained. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of balls in the V prize winning device 65 when the storage valve 66a is in the storage state in the accessory winning game. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the storage valve 66a is configured to be operated and controlled to be in the storage state from when the accessory winning game is executed until the V prize winning device 65 is in the closed state. ing. When a plurality of balls enter a prize in the V winning device 65 while the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, the first winning ball P1 is stored in the storage section formed in the storage valve 66a, and the second ball wins. The ball P2 comes into contact with the ball P1 stored in the storage valve 66a, flows down the second flow path 65c, and enters the out port 163a.

In this way, when the storage valve 66a is in the storage state, all winning balls other than the ball P1 (for example, ball P2) stored in the storage part of the storage valve 66a enter the out port 163a. Therefore, a plurality of balls do not stay in the V winning device 65. In addition, the storage valve 66a is released from the storage state after the V opening/closing door 65a of the V prize winning device 65 is closed (after the operation control for closing the door is executed), so one time It becomes possible to reliably set the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 65d to one in the accessory winning game.

With this configuration, the ease with which balls enter the V winning opening 165 can be varied depending on the timing of winning balls into the V winning device 65 during the accessory winning game and the number of winnings. Since there is no such system, it is possible to provide a fair game to all players.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the contents of the ball flow (the second half of the accessory winning game) when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state will be explained. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the accessory winning game. As shown in FIG. 8, after the V opening/closing door 65a is in the closed state and a new ball cannot enter the V winning device 65, the storage valve 66a is in the released state (indicated by a dotted line in the figure). When the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d. In the state shown in FIG. 8, since the first movable valve 66b is located at the guiding position, the ball P1 rolls on the downward slope formed on the upper surface of the first movable valve 66b, and flows through the fourth flow path 65e. The ball flows down and enters the second out port 163b.

On the other hand, at the timing when the ball P1 (see FIG. 7) stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down the third flow path 65d and reaches the first movable valve 66b, the first movable valve 66b moves to the passing position. The ball flow in the case where the ball is located will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the storage valve 66a shifts from the storage state to the release state in the accessory winning game. As shown in FIG. 9, if the first movable valve 66b is located at the passing position at the timing when the ball flowing down the third flow path 65d reaches the first movable valve 66b, the fifth flow path 66f is It flows down and enters the V prize opening 165.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. A special ball entry hole 64 into which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the special pattern ball entrance 64, a special pattern ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the special pattern ball entrance switch, A jackpot lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 21), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a. Further, when a ball enters the special drawing ball entrance 64, four prize balls are paid out as a bonus. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that out of the balls fired in the left-handed game, about 1 out of 15 balls can enter the special pattern ball entrance 64.

As shown in FIG. 10, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a device used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls using a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 21). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 21), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including the time when a power outage occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. A payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, a second symbol display device, and a second symbol holding lamp are connected to the input/output port 205. In addition, when a jackpot game is executed, a specific winning opening solenoid 209a for opening and closing a door for changing a specific winning opening 650a of the variable winning device 650 between an open state and a closed state, A V winning port solenoid 209b for driving the opening/closing door to open and close, a storage solenoid 209c for variably driving the storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65, and a first movable solenoid also provided in the V winning device 65. Drives the first movable valve solenoid 209d for variably driving the valve 66b, the second movable valve solenoid 209e for variably driving the second movable valve 641 provided in the universal power winning device 640, and other various devices. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid 209z and the like is connected thereto, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches (not shown) including a switch that detects that a ball has entered each ball entrance, a switch that detects that a ball is located at a specific position, etc. The switch 208 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 performs various functions based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Execute processing.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, includes a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area where the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a force corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating drive accessories provided in the pachinko machine 10 for performance.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the rear image is an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, an accessory drive command is sent to the other device 228 in order to drive a performance accessory (not shown), or a command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is sent. It is possible to set an audio output command to output audio to the audio output device 226, or to set a lamp output command to cause the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a lighting mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22. It may be configured as follows.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111 when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 19. FIGS. 11A and 11B are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns (top, middle, and bottom) ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 11(b)). The decorative pattern (which changes in response to the variable display of the third pattern (special pattern) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81) has identification information imitating numbers from "0" to "9". Each is composed of 10 types of main symbols.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the main symbols are formed using different types of display modes depending on identification information imitating numbers. In this way, by using the display mode that corresponds to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the lottery result of the special symbol, so that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned (for example, "777") is performed, and the variable display It is structured so that the jackpot occurs after the end of the game. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and are periodically scrolled up and down for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 to perform a variable display.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), the main display area Dm has one effective line L1 formed in the left-right direction, and when each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed, If the three symbols are stopped on the active line L1 in a jackpot symbol combination (in the first embodiment, the same main symbol combination), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

The manner in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and may be changed depending on the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol. The number of symbols in a column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to those described above, and for example, a symbol that combines an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third symbol. Furthermore, the area in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable; for example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be changed. By making the variable display area smaller or moving the variable display area to a position where it is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), it is difficult for the player to understand whether the third symbol is changing or not. You may also do so. Further, during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the variation of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then fluctuated again.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display), but the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol is not limited to this. may be configured to be displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). In this case, the player can determine whether the variable display of the third symbol being displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the variation of the special symbol or the variation of the normal symbol. The notification may be configured so as to be difficult to understand. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to understand what kind of benefit will be given to the player according to the result of the variable display of the third symbol being executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to perform both a variable display corresponding to the variation of special symbols (lottery) and a variable display corresponding to the variation of normal symbols (lottery), the game content to be executed ( The target of the third symbol may be changed depending on the game state (gaming state), for example, during the normal state, a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the special symbol is executed, and the time saving state is performed. The inside may be configured to perform a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation (lottery) of the normal symbol. In this case, it is preferable to display the third symbol in a variable manner in accordance with the symbol type in which a lottery advantageous to the player (a lottery on which the player pays more attention to the lottery results) is executed. On the other hand, the display mode and display area of the third symbol may be changed to correspond to the type of symbol that is changing. This makes it possible to provide players with easy-to-understand games.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts, upper and lower, with the lower two-thirds being the main display area Dm that displays the third symbol in a variable manner, and the other part being the main display area Dm. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in each of the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the active line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. This stopped display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (more than 1 second), the player can check whether the combination of the third symbols corresponds to a jackpot (if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is one). Also, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the active line L1 when the third symbol stops, the jackpot is confirmed, the jackpot game starts, and the jackpot video (opening effect) is confirmed. ) is displayed.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is a combination that corresponds to a loss and there are held balls, after a 1-second stop display (confirmed display), a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the held balls will be displayed. is started. In addition, when a plurality of reserved balls exist, a lottery is performed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered in terms of time.

On the other hand, if there is no held ball and the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second (confirmed display), the third symbol will continue to be displayed in a stopped state. . This state continues until a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed or a new game ball enters the special map ball entrance 64. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. Even though the player shoots the game ball continuously for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), it is rare that no ball enters the special symbol entry hole 64, and the third symbol stops. In most cases where the displayed state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), this is because the player has quit playing and no games are being played using the pachinko machine 10 at all. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, a player who is about to select the pachinko machine 10 to start a game can easily determine whether or not a game is being played based on the presence or absence of a demonstration effect being displayed. On the other hand, if a new game ball enters the special drawing ball entrance 64 before a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball will be displayed. executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided in a horizontally elongated manner above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of game balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the game balls that have entered the special drawing ball entrance 64 and the through gate 67. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying preview effect images.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 11(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to lead to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy wearing a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action other than the predetermined action or another character performs a predetermined action. A preview performance will be performed, such as appearing.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the special pattern ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of balls that enter the ball is up to 4. The number of balls held is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Furthermore, when a ball enters the through gate 67, the number of balls entered is held up to a maximum of one time, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. . In the small area Ds1, one pending pitch number symbol is displayed for each pending pitch number symbol, and the number of pending pitches is displayed according to the displayed number of the pending pitch symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved pitches is one, and when four reserved pitch number symbols are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved pitches is 1. Indicates that there are four pitches. Further, if the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, this indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there are no reserved balls. In addition, in the left half of the small area Ds1, a reserved ball number symbol indicating the number of reserved balls based on the number of balls entering the special ball entrance 64 is displayed, and in the right half of the small area Ds1, a through ball number pattern is displayed. It is configured to display a number of reserved balls symbol indicating the number of reserved pitches based on the number of balls entering the gate 67. In the example of FIG. 11(b), four reserved ball number symbols are displayed in the left half of the small area Ds1, while no reserved pitch symbol is displayed in the right half, so the special symbol is There are four reserved balls, but the number of reserved balls with normal symbols is 0.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the entry of the ball into the special drawing ball entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the entry of the ball into the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of one time. Although configured, the maximum number of reserved pitches is not limited to this, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved pitches may be displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be displayed in a mode that differs by the number of reserved balls. (For example, it may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns.) Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps in a lit state.

Further, in the display screen shown with reference to FIG. 11, the sub-display area Ds is formed above the main display area Dm, but the display area may be formed in a manner other than this. A sub-display area Ds may be formed below the area Dm. Further, in this case, it is preferable to variably form the display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 according to the set gaming state. Thereby, the player can easily understand that the game has moved to a different gaming state just by looking at the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, a state in which the player is forced to pay close attention to the display mode of the main display area Dm, such as a state in which a variable display of the third symbol indicating that there is a high expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot win is executed. Then, the display area of the sub-display area Ds may be made smaller or the sub-display area Ds may be hidden.

<About the production content on the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, the contents of the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be explained. In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery), a time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game. This time-saving state continues until the special symbol is drawn a specified number of times (until the predetermined end condition of the time-saving state is met), and when the special symbol is drawn a specified number of times, the time-saving state ends. is established and the normal state is set.

The time saving state is a state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and compared to the normal gaming state, the open state in which a ball can enter the general winning machine 640 by playing a normal pattern winning game is a state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set. It is configured to be easy to configure.

Then, when the normal symbol is won and the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 in the ordinary electric winning device 640, the accessory winning game is executed, and the ball enters the V winning opening 165 provided in the V winning device 65. A game is executed to win a prize.

Here, in this embodiment, the game ball fired aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is configured to pass through the through gate 67 with a 100% probability. In the normal symbol lottery that is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the time saving state is set, it is designed to win with a probability of 3/10, and the normal symbol If a winning result is won in the lottery, a game to win a common figure is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is in an open state.

In most of the games that are played during the time saving state, by continuing to play the left-handed game, the ball can be won into the computer winning device 640 (approximately 100%) for a period of 3 seconds. ) A normal figure winning game is executed in which the electric accessory 640a is in an open state.

Furthermore, in a game with a normal figure that is executed during the time saving state, most of the winning balls of the normal electric winning device 640 are configured to enter the special electric operating port 643; A game to win an accessory is executed when the ball is hit. Then, when the game for winning the accessory is executed, the V winning device 65 is opened, and the winning balls of the V winning device 65 enter the V winning hole 165 at a rate of about 1/11, and The game is configured such that a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed when a ball wins.

In other words, during the time saving state, rather than playing a game (special figure game) in which you aim to win a jackpot by drawing special symbols, you can play a game (special figure game) in which you aim to win a jackpot by placing a game ball in the V winning slot 165 (V winning). Since it is easier to execute the jackpot game in the game), the player plays the special electric game while hoping to win a V prize (V jackpot game) through the accessory winning game.

As described above, in this embodiment, in order to win a ball to the ordinary electric winning device 640 as a special electric game (to let the ball pass through the through gate 67 which is the trigger for executing the ordinary symbol lottery), the left side area of the game board 13 is used. You need to aim the ball at the target. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a game (left-handed game) is executed aiming at the left side area of the game board 13, the ball also enters the special ball entry hole 64, so that the special ball is not played during the time saving state. Both a figure game (a game in which a special symbol is drawn) and a special electric game (a game in which a normal symbol is drawn) are executed.

The time-saving state in which the special symbol game is more advantageous to the player than the special symbol game is the time it takes for the special symbol lottery executed by the special symbol game to reach the prescribed number of times (in other words, the time required for the special symbol lottery to reach the prescribed number of times) Since it is configured to continue until the time period (time) has elapsed, when the gaming state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state ends and the special symbol fluctuation time that triggers the transition to the normal state elapses. , Executing the game while expecting a V prize in the special electric game is the basic gaming method during the time saving state in this embodiment.

In order to convey the status of this time-saving game to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, various effects are executed on the third symbol display device 81. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, but when a jackpot game is executed and the jackpot ends, the game mode is changed to V rush mode to indicate that the game state is a time saving state that is advantageous to the player. to notify that the time saving state has been set. Next, various effects during V Rush will be explained. Hereinafter, to simplify the explanation, the time saving state will be referred to as "V rush".

First, with reference to FIG. 12(a), the jackpot ending screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 12(a) is a diagram showing an example of an ending screen for a jackpot (game). When the final round of the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 displays the words "V rush will start after the jackpot ends!!" , it is clearly shown to the player that the game will shift to the V rush mode, which indicates that a time saving state will be set after the end of the jackpot game. Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment "Get 40 seconds of V rush period" is displayed where the short-term remaining time mode 801 is "40 seconds" to indicate the period during which the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game continues. be done.

Here, the display contents of the short remaining time mode 801 will be explained. In this embodiment, as described above, the end condition of the time saving state is set as the end condition that is satisfied when the number of drawings of special symbols reaches a prescribed number of times (for example, four times). Therefore, the time saving state is continued until the time required for the special symbol lottery to reach the prescribed number of times (that is, the total time of the variation time of the special symbols for the prescribed number of times) has elapsed. The short remaining time mode 801 is a display mode that shows the total time that is the sum of the variation times of the special symbols until the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied.

Next, the reservation status of each symbol in the state shown in FIG. 12(a) will be explained with reference to FIG. 12(c). FIG. 12(c) is a schematic diagram showing the pending status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 12(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, a maximum of 4 special symbol reserved memories and a maximum of 1 regular symbol reserved memory can be stored. In FIG. 12(c), there is a running special symbol th0 for explaining the situation of special symbol fluctuations during execution, and special symbol 1st pending th1 to special symbol for explaining the winning information of the special symbols that are pending and stored. Figure 4th reservation th4, running regular symbol fh0 for explaining the status of normal symbol fluctuations during execution, and first reserved symbol fh1 for explaining winning information of the regular symbol stored on hold, is used to explain the situation of each symbol.

FIG. 12(c) shows a state in which four special symbol reservations each having a 10-second variation pattern are stored in special symbol first reservation th1 to special symbol fourth reservation th4. In other words, the current time saving state period is set to 40 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation times for four special symbol drawings. Therefore, the characters "40 seconds" are displayed in the short remaining time display mode 801 to indicate the duration of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to clearly inform how long the V-rush period will last. can.

As described above, in this embodiment, the duration of the V rush that is advantageous to the player is displayed in a specific number of seconds as shown in the short-term remaining time display mode 801. Any device that allows the remaining period of time to be known may be used, and an indicator or the like may be used to notify the player. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a game with a more thrilling feeling to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12(a), the short remaining time mode 801 is displayed in a display mode that shows all of "40 seconds" calculated as the duration of the V rush. However, at the time of notifying that the V rush is entering, only a part (for example, 30 seconds) of the value calculated as the duration of the V rush (for example, 40 seconds) is notified. However, it may be configured to additionally notify a value corresponding to the unreported portion (for example, 10 seconds) during execution of the V rush.

In this case, for example, when the number of time reductions is set to 4 times, the total variation time of the special symbols corresponding to the 3 special symbol reservations among the 4 acquired special symbol reservations (special symbol reservations) In other words, in the case of FIG. 12(c), it is sufficient to display "30 seconds", which is the sum of the special figure 1st reservation th1 to the special figure 3rd reservation th3, at the time of entering the V rush. With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process for notifying only a part of the value calculated as the duration of the V rush.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), in this embodiment, the duration of the V rush is displayed by adding up the varying time of the special symbol lottery executed multiple times until the time saving state ends. ing. Further, in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current number of reserved special symbols, the display mode for indicating the number of reserved special symbols is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the value of the short remaining time mode 801 displayed as the duration of the V rush is the total value of the variable time corresponding to how many special symbols are reserved. Further, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variation time of each special symbol lottery.

Therefore, for example, even in a pachinko machine 10 in which different fluctuation patterns of fluctuation time are set depending on whether the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot or a loss, depending on the display mode of the short period remaining time mode 801, It is possible to prevent the player from knowing in advance the lottery result in the reserved special drawings (whether or not the winning information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the reserved special drawings).

For example, if the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, a variation pattern with a variation time of 50 seconds is selected, and if the special symbol lottery result is a loss, the variation pattern is 10 seconds or 20 seconds. The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that either a second or 30 second variation pattern is selected, and the special figure first hold th1 is "10 seconds", the special figure second hold th2 is "30 seconds", and the special figure second hold th2 is "30 seconds". When the figure 3rd hold th3 is "20 seconds" and the special figure 4th hold th4 is "10 seconds", "50 seconds" is displayed as the display mode of the short remaining time mode 801 indicating the duration of the V rush. It is best to configure it so that it is displayed. By configuring it in this way, the period is shorter than the duration of V Rush "90 seconds" (the total value of the fluctuation time of 4 special drawings on hold), and it is executed during the time saving state. The player can have a sense of expectation that he or she has won a jackpot in the special symbol lottery (the first time-saving special symbol lottery has won a jackpot, and a variable time of 50 seconds is set).

In other words, when displaying only a part of the period instead of the entire period in which V Rush continues, the value corresponding to the variable time (50 seconds) that is set when a jackpot is won as described above is displayed. In addition to the configuration, for example, a "60 seconds" display mode may be used to make the player think that the first time saver is a winning variation (variation time 10 seconds) and the second time saver is a jackpot variation (variation time 50 seconds). The configuration may be such that the short remaining time mode 801 is displayed. In other words, it displays a value that is smaller than the value indicating the actual V rush duration and is calculated when combining at least a variation time that can be selected for a jackpot variation and a variation time that can be selected for a miss variation. Just do it.

In this embodiment, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured not to display the number of reserved special symbols that have been acquired, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display for showing the number of reserved special symbols is not limited to this. The mode may also be displayed. Even in this case, by displaying the display format for indicating the number of reserved special drawings in a display format that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the contents, the player can understand the number of reserved special drawings currently acquired. It can be made difficult.

Next, the V rush start screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 12(b). FIG. 12(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the ending period of the jackpot ends and the V rush starts, and FIG. 12(d) shows the display screen shown in FIG. 12(b). It is a diagram showing the status of each symbol when displayed. In other words, FIG. 12(b) shows the display screen at the time when the special figure reservation, which was indicated by the special figure first reservation th1 at the time of the ending of the jackpot, starts to fluctuate. The special figure reservation that was the first reservation th1 is shifted to the special figure th0 in progress, and the special figure second reservation th2 is changed to the special figure first reservation th1, and the special figure third reservation th3 is changed to the special figure second reservation. In th2, the special figure 4th reservation th4 is a display screen in a state where it has been shifted to the special figure 3rd reservation th3. In addition, since the start of the V-rush, no new balls have entered the special figure ball entrance 64, and the fourth reserved special figure th4 is in an empty state. Then, as shown in the running ordinary symbol fh0, the lottery of ordinary symbols has also started to fluctuate, and reservations are stored in the ordinary symbol first reservation fh1 (see FIG. 12(d)).

When the V rush is started, characters "V rush in progress" are displayed in the main display area Dm as a gaming status notification mode indicating that the current V rush period is in progress. Next to the main display area Dm, a character 810 imitating a rabbit is dynamically displayed as if trying to take something out of a bag 810a. This usually indicates that the pattern is changing.

In the center of the main display area Dm, a timer 812 is displayed to indicate the remaining period of the V rush period that is advantageous to the player. This timer 812 displays a value that is the sum of the fluctuation times for the specified number of special symbols until the end of the time saving state. In FIG. 12(b), the number of drawings of special symbols during the time saving state is specified as 4 times, and the fluctuation time of the running special symbol th0 is 10 seconds, and the special symbol 1st pending th1 to the 3rd special symbol. The timer 812 indicates "40.0 seconds", which is the sum of the varying times up to the hold th3. This timer 812 is displayed so that its value is subtracted every time the variable time of the special map th0 in execution is subtracted, so that the player can easily understand that the V rush period is progressing. can.

Furthermore, the text "V rush ends when the timer reaches 0!!" is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and when the value of the timer 812 that is being subtracted becomes 0, the V rush ends. Players are informed of this. As described above, during the V rush period, the player plays a game with the aim of causing a ball to enter the V winning hole 165. Therefore, the player can easily understand the period until the end of the advantageous period (remaining period) by visually checking the change in the value displayed on the timer 812.

Then, the characters "1st series" are shown in the upper left display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, and after winning a jackpot from the normal state (so-called first win) and starting the V rush, the gaming state changes. It shows how many times the V rush period has passed without transitioning to the normal state. Further, "0pt" is displayed in the display area HR2 shown below the display area HR1, and the number of prize balls won in the jackpot won during the V rush period is displayed. In this way, by displaying the number of consecutive V rushes in the display area HR1 and the number of prize balls won in the jackpot during the V rush in the display area HR2, the player can play at his or her own timing. It is possible to check the gaming history, and the convenience of gaming can be improved.

In addition, a V rush variation area 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a left area 811a, a middle area 811b, and a right area 811c of this V rush variation area 811 have symbols that vary (dynamic display). The display mode is displayed. This V rush variation area 811 displays information for suggesting to the player the gaming situation during the V rush. In FIG. 12(b), it is currently changing between the special map and the regular map, and the V rush fluctuation area 811 indicates that the V rush period has elapsed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13(a), a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment when a winning symbol is won during the V rush will be described. FIG. 13(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when winning a common card during V rush, and FIG. 13(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the display screen shown in FIG. 13(a) is displayed. It is a figure showing each symbol situation in the case of. In this embodiment, as described above, when a lottery with a normal symbol is won, the electric accessory 640a attached to the general prize winning device 640 is opened so that a game ball can be entered.

As shown in FIG. 13(c), in the currently running normal symbol pending fh0, "○" indicating that the normal symbol was won in the lottery is displayed. In the upper right corner of the main display area Dm, it is displayed that the character 810, who was searching for something in the bag 810a at the start of the V rush (see FIG. 12(b)), won the normal symbol lottery and obtained the privilege. An animation is displayed in which a ticket 810b with the word "Lucky" written on it is taken out, which is a notification mode for indicating the situation. Then, in the display area HR3 at the lower right of the main display area Dm, an image schematically showing the general power winning device 640 is displayed, and a state in which the general symbol lottery is won and the electric accessory 640a is released. is displayed. Furthermore, the words "If you enter the electric chew, you have a chance to get V!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to understand that he/she is playing the game aiming for the electric chew, so that the correct playing method can be guided to the player. In other words, the display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds described above serve as guidance notification modes for guiding the player about the content of the game to be executed.

Further, the timer 812 displayed at the center of the main display area Dm displays a value of 30.9 seconds. In the game situation of FIG. 13(a), the remaining variation time of the special figure variation in progress indicated by the special figure in progress th0 is 0.9 seconds, and the special figure 1st reservation th1 to the special figure 3rd reservation th3 The special drawing lottery will be held during the V Rush period. Therefore, the total value of 30.9 seconds is displayed on the timer 812. In addition, in FIG. 13(a), the special drawing 4th reservation th4, which was not stored at the start of the V rush (see FIG. 12(b)), is reserved, but this is due to the number of specified times of the V rush being reserved. Since the special drawing lottery is executed after the period has elapsed, the fluctuation time of this special drawing fourth reservation th4 is not added up. Therefore, "-" is shown in the special figure 4th reservation th4 (see FIG. 13(c)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 13(b), a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment when the player hits an accessory during the V rush will be described. FIG. 13(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the accessory winning game is executed during V rush, and FIG. 13(d) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen shown in FIG. 13(b). It is a diagram showing the status of each symbol when displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball wins in the special electric operation opening 643 in the ordinary electric winning device 640, the V opening/closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 becomes open. The game is executed.

FIG. 13(b) is a display screen when a game ball wins the special electric actuating opening 643 in the ordinary electric winning device 640 due to the winning of the ordinary figure shown in FIG. 13(a). In FIG. 13(a), the reserved ball that was reserved in the special figure first reservation th1 has been shifted to the special figure in execution th0 in FIG. 13(b). Then, a "?" is shown indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is 9.9 seconds and the fluctuation is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 13(d)). In this embodiment, when an accessory winning game or a jackpot winning game is executed, the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed is suspended (temporarily stopped) until each winning game is completed. are doing.

In the main display area Dm, the subtraction display of the value of the timer 812, which had been decreasing with the variation time of the special symbol until FIG. 13(a), is displayed as the variation of the special symbol (subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation). is interrupted and displayed at the time when it was interrupted (that is, the time when the special electric activation port 643 won). Furthermore, the characters "STOP!!" are displayed to indicate that the subtraction display of the timer 812 is interrupted. These display contents allow the player to understand that the V Rush period has been interrupted. In the display area HR3, the V prize winning device 65 with the V opening/closing door 65a opened is schematically displayed, along with the words "Aim!!".

This allows the player to understand that the V opening/closing door 65a of the V winning device 65 is open (that the accessory winning game is being executed) by visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81. can. In other words, the display mode of the display area HR3 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds in FIG. It has a function of a guide notification mode for guiding the player about the game to be executed during the winning game.

Further, the V rush variation area 811 is displayed in a so-called reach display mode, with the letter "V" being displayed in a stopped state in the left area 811a and the right area 811c. Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "If it enters the V, you win the jackpot!!" are displayed, and based on these display contents, the player can almost win the game ball into the V winning slot 165. It is possible to play the game with a sense of expectation that it will be possible.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 11(b), a general game in the pachinko machine 10, that is, a game (special symbol) in which a special symbol lottery is executed and the lottery result is executed while expecting the lottery result to be a jackpot. In a figure game), a plurality of pieces of identification information (each symbol dynamically displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (third symbol)) for indicating the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner in multiple columns (for example, three columns). A reach display mode in which the symbol rows excluding one of the plurality of symbol rows are a combination of identification information to indicate a jackpot win (for example, a combination of the same identification information). ) is stopped and displayed, a reach effect that increases the expectation of winning a jackpot is executed.

The game (special electric game) that is executed during the time saving state (V rush) in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is not a special symbol lottery, but a regular symbol lottery, and through various processes, the V prize is finally won. Since the game is to execute a jackpot game (V jackpot game) by placing a ball into the opening 165, there is a problem in that it is difficult for the player to understand the specific game contents of the special electric game. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the left area 811a of the V rush variation area 811, the center The variable display mode of the symbols (characters) that are dynamically displayed (dynamically displayed) in each area of the area 811b and the right area 811c is changed so that the effect mode is executed as if a special figure game is being executed. It consists of With this configuration, the player can understand each display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 without knowing the specific game content in the special electric game, so the game It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to players.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14(a), a description will be given of the V winning screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment during the game where the player wins the accessory during the V rush. FIG. 14(a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when a game ball enters the V winning hole 165 and a jackpot is awarded during a game to win an accessory during V rush, and FIG. 14(c) ) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 14(a) is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, when a game with a winning object is executed during the V rush, and a ball is won in the V winning slot 165 during the game with a winning object (in the case of winning a V prize), a jackpot game ( V jackpot game) will be awarded.

FIG. 14(a) is a display screen when a ball wins in the V winning hole 165 during the accessory winning game shown in FIG. 13(b). As mentioned above, since the fluctuation of the special symbol is interrupted during the game with the accessory, the special symbol th0 in execution is temporarily stopped with 9.9 seconds of fluctuation time remaining. The special figure first hold th1 and the special figure second hold th2 are holds within the specified number of times of the current V rush, and the variable time is set to 10 seconds for each. Therefore, the remaining period of the V rush period is "29.9 seconds", unchanged from the time shown in FIG. 13(b) (see FIG. 14(c)).

Then, when it is confirmed that the ball wins V and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, the V rush period will not be subtracted for a predetermined period (jackpot game period), so the figure The display mode of "29.9 seconds" displayed by the timer 812 shown in FIG. 13(b) is displayed in a display area HR4 that is less conspicuous than the timer 812. "Time stock 29.9 seconds" is displayed in the display area HR4.

In this embodiment, if a V winning (V jackpot game) occurs while a special pattern is temporarily stopped, a special pattern lottery will be executed this time after the temporarily stopped special pattern variation ends. The time saving state is configured to continue until the time saving number of times set corresponding to the jackpot type of the jackpot game is executed. That is, it is configured so that the information (time saving number) for establishing the time saving end condition is not updated (subtracted) by the interrupted special symbol variation (resumed special symbol variation) executed after the end of the jackpot game.

In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 14(c), if the number of time reductions is set to 4 after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol pending 4 The sum of the individual special symbol fluctuation times becomes the duration of the next V rush. By configuring in this way, a jackpot game (V jackpot game) during V rush is set in a time saving state (when the V rush first enters), which is set by playing a special figure game in the normal state and winning a jackpot. In the time-saving state (when V Rush continues) that is executed and re-set after the end of the jackpot game, the V Rush continuation period can be set longer by the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation time) of the restart special symbol fluctuation, It is possible to provide an advantageous V rush to the player more easily when the V rush continues than when the V rush first enters. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while making the player more hopeful that the V rush will continue.

Note that other methods may be used to set a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player when V Rush continues than when V Rush first enters; for example, the conditions for executing a jackpot game are met during the normal state. (Win a jackpot in a special drawing lottery) and a time-saving state is set after the end of that jackpot game.In the other case, the conditions for executing a jackpot game are established in a time-save state (V winning in a special electric game) and a time-saving state is set after the end of that jackpot game. It may be configured such that a different variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol depending on when the state is set. Specifically, the condition for executing the jackpot game is established during the normal state (special symbol lottery). (wins a jackpot in a special electric game) and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the conditions for executing the jackpot game are met in the time-saving state (V winning in the special electric game), and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. It is preferable to configure the structure so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when a variation pattern is selected. With this configuration, it is easier to lengthen the variation time of the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state when the V rush continues than when the V rush first enters, so as a result, the V rush The duration of the period can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to provide added value to the player who continues playing V Rush, thereby increasing the player's desire to play.

On the other hand, as a technical idea opposite to the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it may be configured such that the information (time saving number) for establishing the time saving end condition is updated (subtracted) by executing the restart special symbol variation. That is fine, and it may be configured such that a special symbol variation with a longer variation time is more easily executed when the V rush first enters than when the V rush continues. By configuring in this way, V Rush is suppressed from continuing excessively, and the V Rush can be performed without executing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) even once in the special electric game executed during V Rush. It is possible to prevent the desire to play from decreasing due to the end of the game.

Furthermore, as in this embodiment, when using a configuration in which the timing of interrupting the special symbol fluctuation being executed has a large effect on the length of the V Rush duration after the end of the jackpot game (V jackpot game), In a state in which it is possible to interrupt the special figure variation (for example, in a state where a normal winning game is won), the player is configured to notify the player of information indicating the remaining variation time of the special figure variation that is being executed. , the player may be configured to be able to select whether or not to interrupt the special symbol variation. In other words, if the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation that is being executed is longer than the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the special symbol operating port 643 is activated during the game to interrupt the special symbol variation (during the game per regular symbol). A game in which a ball is placed in a prize and a game is executed with a winning object) is executed, a game aiming at a V prize is selected, and the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation being executed is shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). In some cases, it may be configured so that it is possible to select a game that does not interrupt the special symbol fluctuations.

In addition, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is awarded by winning a V prize, the fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special symbol and the special symbol within the specified number of V rushes that were suspended at that time. The variable time is configured to be displayed as a preset period of the next V rush. The time is then displayed in the H display area HR4 of the main display area Dm. Therefore, the player can check the period in which the next V Rush is stocked by checking the display area HR4.

Then, in the V rush variation area 811 for indicating the gaming state during the V rush in the main display area Dm, "V" is stopped and displayed in the middle area 811b which was fluctuating in FIG. 13(b). Since the character "V" is stopped and displayed in the left area 811a and the right area 811c when the hit is executed, the left area 811a, the middle area 811b, and the right area 811c are combined with the character "VVV". ” is displayed, indicating that you have won the jackpot. Further, the words "Congratulations on the jackpot!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents clearly show to the player that a jackpot has been awarded by placing a game ball in the V winning hole 165 during the winning of the accessory.

In this embodiment, the V rush variation area 811 displays the left area 811a and the right area 811c in a stopped state when a winning object is executed, and displays the middle area 811b when a V win is won during an object winning. Although the configuration is such that the display is stopped, the present invention is not limited to this, and the left area 811a is displayed in the case of winning a common figure, the right area 811c is displayed in the case of winning a prize, and the middle area is displayed in the case of winning a V prize. 811b may be configured to stop display. In this way, by configuring the system to perform staged effects in response to the establishment of the game conditions, etc., when the player visually checks the V fluctuation area 811, it is possible to instantly determine which stage the game is in. can. Therefore, more information can be provided to the player. Further, the characters to be stopped may be any characters that indicate that a jackpot has been awarded and the player can obtain a benefit, and may be displayed as "win", "V-win", or the like. By configuring the game so that a plurality of characters indicating a jackpot are displayed in this way, it is possible to provide a more varied performance to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14(b), a description will be given of the hit/miss screen of the accessory object during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment. FIG. 14(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 165 during the winning of the accessory during the V rush. In this embodiment, the fluctuation of the special symbol that was being executed is temporarily stopped when it is executed to win a prize, but if a V prize cannot be won during a prize hit, the temporary stop is made. The changes in the special symbols that were previously used will be resumed.

FIG. 14(b) is a display screen when the game ball does not enter the V winning hole 165 from the case where the accessory hit is executed in FIG. 13(b). In the V fluctuation area 811 in the main display area Dm, which indicates the gaming situation during the V rush, the character "x" indicating that the player did not win the V prize is displayed in the middle area 811b. Therefore, in the V rush variation area 811, a deviation display mode of "V×V" is displayed. Thereby, the player can understand that the game ball could not be won in the V winning hole 165 during the current winning of the accessory.

Then, in the main display area Dm, the words "Restart!!" are displayed to indicate that the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special figure is to be resumed. Then, the display mode for indicating the remaining period of the V rush indicated by the timer 812 starts to decrease again as the variation of the special figure shown in the running special figure th0 resumes (see FIG. 14(d)). This allows the player to easily understand that he or she must play the game with the aim of winning a V prize within the time indicated by the timer 812.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15(a), the jackpot ending screen during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 15(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the jackpot ending during V rush, and FIG. 15(c) is a diagram showing each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 15(a) is displayed. It is a diagram showing the situation. In this embodiment, if a player wins a jackpot or wins a V prize during the V rush period, the V rush period (time saving state) is set again.

FIG. 15(a) is a diagram showing the ending screen of the jackpot awarded from the V winning shown in FIG. 14(a). As mentioned above, when a jackpot is awarded during V Rush, the fluctuation time between the currently running special map th0 that was temporarily stopped and the special map 2nd hold th2 that was the specified number of times during the previous V Rush period. The summed value is the time stock, and the words "Time stock 29.9 seconds" are displayed in the display area HR4. Then, during the special figure pending corresponding to the special figure third pending th3 in FIG. The figure hold fluctuation time is calculated.

As described above, if a jackpot is awarded during a V rush, the V rush is set again at the end of the jackpot game. The period of the V rush is set to a value that is the sum of the remaining time of fluctuation of the special symbol temporarily stopped during the jackpot and the fluctuation time corresponding to the number of drawings of the special symbol awarded according to the jackpot type. In FIG. 15(a), as displayed in the display area HR4, the time stock is 29.9 seconds, that is, the remaining period of the suspended special figure fluctuation (9.9 seconds) and the previous V rush period. The number of seconds that is the sum of the variable time of the special pattern holding (20 seconds in total) corresponding to the special drawing first holding th1 and the special drawing second holding th2, which were already added and displayed on the timer 812, is already displayed as the time stock. For this time stocked number of seconds, at the end of the jackpot game, a new value that can be added to the V rush period is the variable time (15 seconds) of the special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 3 hold th3. is added.

In addition, the example shown in FIG. 15(a) shows the ending screen of a jackpot game where four time reductions are given after the end of the jackpot game, and the special drawing reservation held as time stock is the second special drawing. Since the holding is up to th2 (2 special drawings pending), the fluctuation time of the remaining two special drawings holding can be added and displayed on the timer 812 as the current V rush period, but in FIG. 15(a) , since there is only one special figure reservation that can be added and displayed in the timer 812 (because no special figure reservation is stored in the special figure fourth reservation th4), the fluctuation of the special figure reservation corresponding to the special figure third reservation th3. Only the time is added and displayed.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot is awarded during V Rush and the number of reserved special drawings that are time-stocked at that time is less than the specified number of times (time-saving number) of time-saving (V-rush) granted this time, It is configured to execute an effect that adds the variable time corresponding to the special figure pending stored until the end of the jackpot game to the value of the time stock, and in Fig. 15 (a), the special figure 3 pending The characters "+15 seconds GET" are displayed in the additional period display mode 802 in correspondence with the special figure hold in which the 15 second deviation variation pattern shown in th3 is executed. This allows the player to enjoy the fact that the period advantageous to the player has been further extended. Furthermore, this embodiment is configured to perform an effect that adds a V rush period during the ending period of the jackpot game, so there is a feeling of expectation that the advantageous period will be extended at the end of the jackpot game. Since the player can play the game while holding the key, the player can draw more attention to the performance during the jackpot.

In addition, in the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, the words "2nd series" are displayed, indicating that the V rush has been continued twice, and in the display area HR2, the characters that were obtained by winning the jackpot during the V rush are displayed. The number of prize balls "670P" is displayed. In this way, the game results are displayed in a position that is easily visible to the player, and the value increases each time a jackpot is executed and a bonus is obtained, thereby making it possible to give the player a more satisfying feeling. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "V rush continue" indicating that the V rush has been set again are displayed. This allows the player to easily understand that the V-rush, which is advantageous to the player, will continue.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15(b), the timer addition screen during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 15(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the timer addition screen during V rush. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the special symbol newly won at the end of the jackpot executed during V Rush, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol that was normally outside the period of the specified number of V Rush. Execute additional performance. If the number of reserved balls for the specified number of times of V Rush is not reserved at the end of the jackpot, new balls will be added during the V Rush period until the number of reserved balls for the specified number of V Rush is accumulated. Execute an additional performance for the number of held balls.

FIG. 15(b) is a diagram showing a display screen when the game progresses from the ending of the jackpot shown in FIG. 15(a) and a game ball newly enters the special drawing ball opening 64. FIG. 15(d) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 15(b) is displayed. In the main display area Dm, the V rush variation area displays a variation display mode indicating that the V rush period has elapsed. In FIG. 15(b), as shown in FIG. 15(d), the running special figure th0 resumes fluctuation, the remaining fluctuation time becomes 3.2 seconds, and the special figure 1st reservation th1 and the special figure 2nd reservation th2 stores holds that are each set to 10 seconds as a variable time. The special figure third holding th3 is a state in which held balls with a variable time of 15 seconds are stored. Therefore, the timer 812 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 displays "38.2" seconds, which is the sum of these values.

As mentioned above, the state shown in FIG. 15(a) is a state in which it is possible to add the variable time for two new special figure reservations as the V rush period, but only one new special figure reservation has been acquired. state (special figure 3rd reservation th3 only). In this case, as shown in FIG. 15(b), when a new special symbol reservation is acquired next time, the fluctuation time of the acquired special symbol reservation is additionally displayed.

Specifically, it is shown that there was an additional winning in the special figure 4th reservation th4, and a variable time of 20 seconds is set for this new special figure reservation. Therefore, an effect is performed in which 20 seconds are added to the current V rush period. Then, the character 810 displayed in the main display area Dm throws the ticket 810b, which indicates to the player that the V Rush period has been added and the advantageous period has been extended, to the timer 812, which indicates the remaining period of the V Rush. The situation will be displayed. After this performance is executed, the variable time of the special drawing that has been additionally won this time is added to the remaining period displayed on the timer 812, and the timer 812 displays the value "58.2 seconds". is displayed. In addition, the words "Additional timer!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds to clearly notify that the V rush period has been extended (added).

Next, the V rush end screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 16(a). FIG. 16(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen indicating the end of the V rush, and FIG. 16(c) is a diagram showing each symbol status when the display screen shown in FIG. 16(a) is displayed. FIG. In this embodiment, if a game ball is not entered into the V winning hole 165 during the V Rush period, or if a jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery, the V Rush period ends; The gaming state shifts to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 16(c), an "x" is displayed indicating that the running special map th0f, which is the final variation of the current V rush, has stopped due to a miss. The reserved balls are accumulated from the special figure 1st reserved th1 to the special figure 3rd reserved th3, but these reserved balls are reserved balls that are outside the specified number of V rushes. It should be noted that the running general figure fh0 is in a fluctuating state, and the normal figure first reserved fh1 general figure reserved spheres are stored.

Then, in the main display area Dm, characters such as "VGET x 2" indicating how many times the V rush has been continued this time are displayed, and furthermore, the prize ball ( A message will be displayed to show how much you have earned (benefits). Thereby, the player is informed of the current V Rush game result in an easy-to-understand manner. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, characters "V rush end" are displayed to notify that the advantageous period has ended. With these display modes, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the V Rush period has ended.

Next, the V-lash extension screen will be explained with reference to FIG. 16(b). FIG. 16(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen indicating that the V rush period has been extended, and FIG. 16(d) is a diagram showing a case where the display screen shown in FIG. 16(b) is displayed. It is a diagram showing each symbol situation in .

In this embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the V rush effect is configured to be executed. The time saving state is configured to end when a predetermined number of special symbol variations are completed. Specifically, when the number of times of time saving is set to 4, when the fourth special symbol fluctuation is displayed as stopped (confirmed display) after the time saving state is set, the time saving state is ended and the state returns to the normal state. It is configured to migrate to Here, since the special symbol lottery (variation) and the normal symbol lottery (fluctuation) are executed independently, the final variation of the special symbol in the time-saving state is stopped near the end of the V rush period. If the normal figure winning game is executed immediately before the display), the accessory winning game may be executed after the time saving state ends (after transitioning to the normal state).

In this case, if the V rush performance ends at the timing when the gaming state changes from the time saving state to the normal state, a situation will occur where the game to win the accessory will start even though the V rush performance has ended. There was a risk that the player would be confused. Therefore, in this embodiment, if a game per normal symbol is being executed at the end timing of the V rush period (timing at which the final variation of special symbols in the time saving state stops), until the game per common symbol ends, Alternatively, the V rush effect is extended until the accessory winning game executed with the normal symbol winning game as an opportunity ends. Thereby, the V rush performance can be executed in correspondence with the special electric game period in which the player aims at the V jackpot game, so it is possible to execute the performance that is easy for the player to understand.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16(d), the final change in the time-saving state occurs during the state where the character "○" indicating that the winning symbol tf0 has been won during the execution, that is, during the game where the symbol is won. When the special symbol variation is stopped (displayed with an "x" indicating that the special symbol th0 in execution has stopped due to a miss), the third symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. 16(b). In the main display area Dm of the device 81, a left area 811a, a middle area 811b, and a right area 811c of a V rush fluctuation area 811 for indicating the gaming situation during V rush are displayed in a fluctuating state. In other words, this indicates to the player that the V rush is continuing.

Then, "00.0 seconds" is displayed on the timer 812, which indicates that all the variations of the special symbols for the specified number of times in the time saving state have been completed. However, above the main display area, the words "V-lash extension in progress" are displayed. By displaying the game in this way, the player can learn that the V rush that he thought had ended has been extended, and can experience unexpected joy. Then, the characters "Last Chance!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and if you do not win the game ball into the special electric actuating opening 643 and the V winning opening 165 with this regular drawing, The player can easily understand that the V Rush has ended.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 16(b), that is, when the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 during the extended display of the V rush, the accessory winning game is played as in the normal V rush period. is executed. In this case, the display screen during the accessory winning game shown in FIG. 13(b) is displayed, and the words "Last Chance!!" are continuously displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the V rush period will end if the ball does not enter the V winning hole 165 in the current accessory winning game. Then, when the ball enters the V winning hole 165 in the accessory winning game where "Last Chance!!" is displayed, the same V jackpot game as during the normal V rush period is executed. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the V winning hole 165, the V rush end screen shown in FIG. 16(a) is displayed after the end of the accessory winning game.

As explained above with reference to FIGS. 16(a) and 16(b), in this embodiment, the period in which the special electric game can be executed is defined as a series of V rush periods, not the transition status of the game state. It is configured to execute a V rush effect. With this configuration, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player. Note that the display timing of the end screen indicating the end of the V rush period shown in FIG. The display starts when the remaining period reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the final variation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the end screen display ends at the timing when the next special symbol variation starts. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is preferable to calculate the V rush period displayed on the timer 812 as the period until the V rush end screen is displayed.

With this configuration, the end screen can be displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) after the value of the timer 812 reaches 0, so that the player can see the game results during the V Rush period. can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, when such a configuration is used, for example, the lottery status of the normal symbol is determined in advance at the time of displaying the end screen of V Rush, and the lottery situation of the normal symbol is determined in advance at the time when the end screen of V Rush can be displayed. If it is determined in advance that a winning game will be executed, the extension screen shown in FIG. After displaying the screen, when a game with a common symbol is executed, the end screen may be configured to be switched to an extension screen. In this way, by using a configuration that switches the end screen to the extension screen, it is possible to leave the possibility of aiming for a V jackpot game even after the end screen is displayed, giving the player hope until the end. It is possible to have the player play the game while maintaining the feeling. In this embodiment, the normal state is set as the gaming state when the extended screen shown in FIG. 16(b) is displayed. When such a configuration is used, for example, a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player is executed when the V jackpot game is executed during the normal state than when the V jackpot game is executed during the time saving state. It is best to configure it so that As a result, the period during which the extension screen is displayed is a period indicating that the V rush period will end soon, and also a period during which an advantageous jackpot game can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the players who are playing the game during the V rush period play the game with a feeling of anticipation until the end. In addition, in this case, the state in which the normal state is set as the gaming state is configured to be manageable by dividing it into a special normal state in which the V rush period is extended and a normal normal state. The system is configured such that an advantageous jackpot game is awarded to the player only when the player is set, and if a V jackpot game is executed during a normal normal state, most of the prize balls can be obtained as a penalty. First, it is preferable that the disadvantageous jackpot game is executed in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, without being limited to this, for example, if the display conditions for the extended screen are met at the time when the final variation of the special symbol during the V rush period is stopped and displayed, the extended screen is displayed without ending the time saving state. The time saving state may be configured to end when the end condition is satisfied. As a result, the timing at which the time saving state ends is variable, so it can be made difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17(a), a special screen at the ending of the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 17(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the special screen at the ending of the jackpot game, and FIG. 17(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the special screen shown in FIG. 17(a). It is a diagram showing each symbol situation. In this embodiment, as described above, when a jackpot game is executed during a V rush, after the jackpot game ends, the V rush period is set again based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the variable time. However, at the end of a jackpot game, if there is a pending ball in the pending ball that will undergo a winning variation with a variation time of 200 seconds, a heaven mode performance will be executed that indicates that the player will definitely win the jackpot after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. .

FIG. 17(a) is a display screen when a winning variation with a variation time of 200 seconds is suspended at the end of a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 17(c), the holding status of each symbol at the end of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 17(a) is that the running special symbol th0 is a special symbol change that is not executed because the jackpot game is in progress. Not yet. In addition, "↓" is shown in the running general drawing fh0 indicating that it is changing, and it is shown that the general drawing 1st pending drawing fh1 is stored. Further, it is shown that the reserved balls on which the 10-second deviation fluctuation pattern is executed are stored in the special figure first reservation th1 and the special figure second reservation th2, respectively.

And, in the special figure 3rd reservation th3, a reserved ball in which a 200 second winning variation pattern is executed is shown. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, as a variation pattern of the special symbol during the time-saving game (during V rush), when the result of the win/fail judgment is a win, the variation time is 200 seconds and the long variation (hereinafter referred to as special symbol) is used. (referred to as a win) may be executed. Furthermore, in the case of jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) won in the lottery of special symbols, a time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, until the fluctuation of this special win stops (during heaven mode), even if the player is unable to enter the V winning slot 165 in the special electric game, he or she will definitely win the jackpot by playing the jackpot game won by the special win. Since the V rush period is set again after the game ends, the special electric game can be played with peace of mind. As shown in FIG. 17(c), the special figure 4th reservation th4 indicates that there is a reserved ball, but since the jackpot game is executed in the special figure 3rd reservation th3, the special figure 3rd reservation th4 indicates that there is a reserved ball. The variable time is indicated by "-" because it is set as the V rush period that is set after the end of the jackpot game executed by the th3 held balls.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), if there is a special win in the hold at the end of the jackpot game, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 indicates that there is a special win in the hold. The message "Entering heaven mode" will be displayed. Further, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b, which are not displayed when the gaming state is the normal state or during V rush where there is no special win in the hold, are displayed. Further, the words "Super Lucky!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this way, by displaying the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b, which are not displayed in the normal state or during V rush where there is no special hit in the pending state, the player can understand that the game situation is special. You can have a sense of expectation that this will be the case, and you can continue playing the game with excitement. In other words, the first lucky character 820a and the second lucky character 820b serve as a special game situation suggestion mode for suggesting to the player that the current game situation is a special game situation.

Further, a special period display mode 803 written as "220 seconds" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. The value displayed in this special period display mode 803 is the time until the fluctuation of winning a special winning in the special symbol lottery stops, that is, the value set as the period of heaven mode. In other words, this is a special game period notification mode for indicating the special game period that will be executed from now on. Therefore, the value displayed in this special period display mode 803 is the sum of 200 seconds, which is the variation time for the special win, and the variation time for the number of reserved balls until winning the special win. In FIG. 17(c), a variable time of 10 seconds is set for each of the special figure first reservation th1 and the special figure second reservation th2. Furthermore, since the variation time per special shown in the special figure 3rd reservation th3 is 200 seconds, "220 seconds" is the sum of the values of the variation time from the special figure 1st reservation th1 to the special figure 3rd reservation th3. , this is the period when heaven mode is set.

The period of the time saving state (V rush) in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be notified to the player on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the jackpot game, but the period of variation of special symbols in the time saving game state is is configured so that a variation pattern is executed in which the longest variation time is set to 50 seconds at most, excluding the special winning variation of 200 seconds (see FIG. 25(c)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17(a), if an extremely long time exceeding 200 seconds is displayed in the special period display mode 803, the player must understand that the time saving state will definitely be set again. This allows you to play special electric games with peace of mind.

In addition, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether there is a special winning change in the reserved balls, and if there is a special win, it is configured to notify the player at the end of the jackpot game. However, the notification mode is not limited to this. For example, if there is a special win in the hold, at the end of the jackpot, it is configured to notify the time until the special win variation is executed, and when the special win variation starts, the "200 seconds" The player may be notified that the period has been extended. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player the unexpected pleasure of knowing that the V-rush period, which seemed to have ended, has suddenly been extended for a longer period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17(b), the screen in the heaven mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 17(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in heaven mode, and FIG. 17(d) is a diagram showing each symbol status when the display screen shown in FIG. 17(b) is displayed. This is a diagram. In this embodiment, when there is a special win in the reserved ball at the end of the jackpot, the time until the fluctuation of the special win stops is called heaven mode, and the player can play the special electric game with peace of mind. It is structured so that the period is as long as possible. FIG. 17(b) is an example of a display screen when the gaming situation progresses after shifting to the heaven mode shown in FIG. 17(a).

As shown in FIG. 17(b), in the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm, there is a " The words "10th series" are displayed. In a display area HR2 provided below the display area HR1, characters "6000 pt" indicating the number of prize balls won by the jackpot game executed after shifting to the V rush are displayed. The words "in heaven mode" are displayed above the main display area Dm to allow the player to instantly determine the current gaming state. Also, as during V rush, a V rush fluctuation area 811 is displayed, and a lottery of normal symbols is executed in each area of the left area 811a, middle area 811b, and right area 811c, and the special electric game progresses. A fluctuating display mode is shown to indicate that the Also, like during the V rush, an animation in which the character 810 is searching for something in the bag 810a is displayed at the upper right of the main display area Dm. This indicates that the normal symbol lottery is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 17(d), in the currently running special symbol th0, a variation of the special symbol with a remaining variation time of 30 seconds is being executed. In the running special figure th0, in the game situation shown in FIG. 17(c), the reserved balls in which the special winning shown in the special figure 3 reserved th3 is executed have started to fluctuate. Therefore, the remaining period of the heaven mode being executed in FIG. 17(b) is 30 seconds, which is the remaining fluctuation time of the special map th0 during execution. In addition, it is shown that there are reserved balls in the special figure 1st reserve th1 to the special figure 3rd reserve th3, but this is a special figure lottery that is executed outside the period of the heaven mode that is being executed. , the variation time is indicated by "-". In addition, "↓" is shown in the running game fh0 to indicate that the game lottery is being executed, and a reserved ball is also stored in the game's first reservation fh1.

The timer 812 in the main display area Dm is displayed so as to be decremented according to the remaining period of the fluctuation of the special figure th0 being executed. As shown in FIG. 17(d), since the remaining fluctuation time of the running special symbol th0 is th0, the timer 812 displays the characters "30.0 seconds" (see FIG. 17(b)) . In addition, the words "Timer 0 can be good for you" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, informing the player that if the value of the remaining period displayed on the timer 812 reaches 0, the player will win the jackpot. Suggests. That is, in the sub-display area Ds, a suggestion effect notification mode for suggesting the future gaming situation to the player is displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, a part of the display mode during the heaven mode, which is the period from when a special winning is won until the winning symbols stop, is configured to be the same as the V rush mode. With this configuration, it is a basic gaming method that is advantageous for the player to execute the special electric game and win the game ball in the V winning hole 165 during the heaven mode as well as during the V rush. It is possible to guide the player about certain things. Therefore, it is possible to provide players with easy-to-understand games.

Note that the display mode is not limited to this, and may be configured to perform effects exclusive to the heaven mode. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a wide range of types of performances, and the performance effect can be further enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18(a), a chance production screen during a winning of the accessory displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 18(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen for a chance production during a winning role, and FIG. 18(c) is a diagram showing each case when the display screen shown in FIG. 18(a) is displayed. It is a figure showing the pattern situation. In this embodiment, as described above, when the normal symbol wins and the game ball enters the special electric actuating port 643, the accessory win is executed, and during the execution of the accessory win, the V prize in the V winning device 65 is activated. A jackpot is awarded when a game ball enters the mouth 165. In FIG. 18(a), from the gaming situation shown in FIG. 13(b), the timing at which a game ball is likely to win in the V winning hole 165 during winning of an accessory is reported to the player as a chance effect.

As shown in FIG. 18(c), the hold status of each symbol in FIG. 18(a) is "?", which indicates that the fluctuation is temporarily suspended because the special symbol th0 in execution is hitting a prize. It is shown. Each of the reserved balls from the special figure first reservation th1 to the special figure second reservation th2 each shows a deviation fluctuation of 10 seconds. Moreover, since the special figure 3rd reservation th3 is a special figure variation executed outside the period of the currently executed V rush, the variation time indicates "-". Furthermore, the special figure 4th reservation th4 shows that it is not reserved. For the currently running general drawing fh0, an "o" is shown indicating that the general drawing drawing has been won.

FIG. 18(a) is a notification screen for informing the player that a game ball is likely to win in the V winning hole 165 during the winning of the accessory shown in FIG. 13(b). In this embodiment, as described above, the game balls won in the V winning device 65 during the winning of the accessory are stored in the storage valve 66a. This storage valve 66a is configured to be in an open state for 1.5 seconds out of the 3 second period so that the game ball flows down the third flow path 65d (see FIG. 7). And, the first movable valve 66b disposed above the V-winning port 165 allows the game ball to pass through the fifth stream to the V-winning port 165 for 0.5 seconds out of 5.5 seconds regardless of the gaming state. It is configured to be in an open state where it can flow down the channel (see FIG. 27(a)).

In other words, in order to win a game ball into the V winning port 165, after the storage valve 66a is opened, the game ball that has flowed down the third flow path 65d must be placed in the first movable valve 66b while the first movable valve 66b is set to the open state. It is necessary to let the ball enter the V winning hole 165. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is determined whether the first movable valve 66b is set to the open state within 2 seconds after the storage valve 66a is set to the open state, and the first movable valve 66b is set to the open state within 2 seconds. If it is determined that this is the case, as shown in FIG. 18(a), an emphasis mode 811z is displayed around the V rush variation area 811 displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Great chance to win V!!" are displayed. In other words, the emphasis mode 811z is a timing notification mode for notifying the player of the timing at which it is easy to shift to an advantageous gaming state. With this configuration, the player can understand the timing when it is easy to win a V prize, making it easier to play the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the timing when it is easy to win a V prize is notified by the highlighted display mode 811z or the comment in the sub-display area Ds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing when it is difficult to win a V prize is also notified. You may do so. With this configuration, a more friendly game can be provided to the players.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18(b), the normal symbol stop screen during the V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 18(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the lottery of normal symbols is stopped during the V-rush period, and FIG. 18(d) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen shown in FIG. 18(b). It is a figure showing each symbol situation when is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, during the V rush (time saving state), it is possible to win the normal symbol lottery, place a game ball in the special electric operation opening 643, and execute a special electric game aiming at a V prize. This is the most advantageous gaming method for players. Therefore, if the normal symbol lottery is not executed during this V rush, the special electric game cannot be executed, and therefore, the third symbol display device 81 executes a performance to encourage the firing of game balls.

As shown in FIG. 18(d), the holding status of each symbol during the V rush in FIG. 18(a) shows that the running special symbol th0 is fluctuating and the remaining fluctuation time is 2 seconds. ing. In addition, the special figure first reservation th1 and the special figure second reservation th2 each store a reserved ball on which a deviation variation for 10 seconds is executed. And, special figure 3rd reservation th3 and special figure 4th reservation th4 are states in which no reserved balls are stored. Therefore, the remaining period of the V rush shown in FIG. 18(b) is 22.2 seconds, which is the sum of the remaining fluctuation time of the running special symbol th0, the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1st reservation th1 and the special symbol 2nd reservation th2. It is. In the running general drawing fh0, "-" is shown indicating that the general drawing drawing is not being executed. Further, normally, no reserved ball is stored in the first reserved ball fh1.

As shown in FIG. 18(d), when the normal symbol lottery is not executed and stopped during the V rush, the electric accessory 640a attached to the normal winning device 640 is not set to the open state. , it is impossible to enter the game ball into the special electric operation opening 643. In other words, it is not possible to perform the special electric game which is the basic gaming method during V Rush, and furthermore, since the special drawing lottery is being executed, if the specified number of special drawing lots are hunted, V Rush ends. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to enter the game ball into the special drawing ball entry hole 64 or the normal prize winning device 640, a left-handed game in which the game ball is fired aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is executed. If necessary and a left-handed game is executed, the game ball is configured to pass 100% through the through gate 67, which triggers the lottery of normal symbols. In other words, the gaming situation shown in FIG. 18(b) in which the special drawing lottery is being executed but the general drawing lottery is not being executed is a situation where no game ball is fired. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect that urges the player to shoot the game ball.

The main display area Dm displays the words "V rush in progress", and the timer 812 displays "22.2 seconds", which indicates the remaining period of V rush, as if it is being subtracted as time passes. are doing. From these display contents, the player can easily understand that the V Rush game is being executed and that the remaining period is decreasing. In addition, in the V variation area 811 where the variation display was performed when the normal symbol lottery was executed, the left area 811a shows "hit", the middle area 811b shows "tsu", and the right area shows " The character 810 is guiding the character 810 to show the characters ``hit'' and ``hit'' to the player. In other words, the V variation area 811 indicates that the normal symbol lottery is not being executed, and serves as a warning display mode to indicate to the player that the V rush will end.

Furthermore, the words "Please start the game" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents can notify the player that the regular symbol lottery has not been executed and the special electric game cannot be executed.Also, since the special symbol lottery has been executed, it is possible for the player to continue It is possible to warn that the V-rush period, which is an advantageous period, is about to end. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the advantageous period from ending in a way that the player does not expect.

It should be noted that the above-described presentation that encourages the firing of game balls is not limited to this display mode. In other words, it is sufficient that the lottery of normal symbols is not executed to the player, and characters indicating danger such as "WARNING" may be displayed on the entire third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further warn the player that there is a possibility that the player will lose money.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19(a), the special figure stop screen during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 19(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the special symbol lottery is not executed during V rush, and FIG. 19(c) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen shown in FIG. 19(a). It is a figure showing each symbol situation when is displayed. In this embodiment, as described above, the time saving state (V rush) continues until the special symbol lottery is executed a specified number of times, and the value obtained by adding up the fluctuation time for the specified number of times is the specified value of the V rush. It is configured to notify players as a period. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is not executed, the stipulated period has not been determined, so a performance that makes the player expect how long the V rush will continue is performed.

As shown in FIG. 19(c), the pending status of each pending symbol in the gaming situation shown in FIG. 19(a) is that the running special symbol th0 has a "-" indicating that the special symbol lottery is not being executed. It is shown. Also, special figure 1st reservation th1 to special figure 4th reservation th4 indicate that no reserved ball is stored. On the other hand, "↓" is shown in the running general drawing fh0 indicating that the general drawing lottery is being executed, and the first holding general drawing fh1 is also stored.

In this way, when the special symbol lottery is not executed during the V rush, the special symbol game can be executed until the special symbol lottery is executed a specified number of times. As shown in FIG. 19(a), the timer 812 displays the characters "??? seconds" indicating that the special symbol lottery has not been executed and the specified period has not yet reached. Further, in the V variation area 811, a variation display of "↓↓↓" indicating that a normal symbol lottery is being executed is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a notification mode is displayed to suggest that the specified period of V rush has not been reached, such as "I'm excited to see how long it will last." According to these display contents, the player is in a state where the remaining period of V Rush has not decreased because the special symbol lottery has not been executed, but the player can execute the special electric game because the regular symbol lottery has been executed. I can understand that there are With this configuration, the player can play the game while being excited to see how long the advantageous gaming situation for the player will last, in which the player can play the special electric game without the V-rush period elapsed. In other words, the display content shown in FIG. 19(a) is suggestion notification content for indicating to the player that the player is in an advantageous situation.

In addition, as mentioned above, if there are no reserved balls with special symbols during the V Rush period, it will be notified that the V Rush period has ended, and then game balls will be placed in the special symbol entry ball opening 64. When the ball enters the ball, a revival effect may be performed in which the V-rush period is revived. With this configuration, the player feels as if the V rush period, which seemed to have ended, has been revived, and can experience unexpected joy.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19(b), the lucky time screen during V rush displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 19(b) is a diagram showing an example of the lucky time screen during V rush, and FIG. 19(d) is a diagram showing each symbol situation when the display screen shown in FIG. 19(b) is displayed. FIG. In this embodiment, as described above, when the V jackpot game is executed during the time saving state (V rush), the remaining time of the suspended special symbol fluctuation and the number of time saving times (4 The special symbol fluctuation time (times) is set as a short period of time (V rush period) after the end of the V jackpot game.

Therefore, the longer the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation that has been interrupted at the time when the V jackpot game is executed, the longer the next V rush period can be. However, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, although the V rush period is displayed (subtracted display) using the display mode of the timer 812, the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation being executed is not displayed. The player had to play the game while expecting that the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed would be long every time the special symbol variation was interrupted.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed satisfies a predetermined condition, an effect is executed to notify the player of this fact. Specifically, if the remaining period of the special symbol variation is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or the remaining period of the special symbol variation currently being executed is longer than the variation time of the next special symbol variation. It is configured so that a lucky time effect can be executed when the time is long. With this configuration, if the player executes a V winning game during the lucky time, the next V rush period can be lengthened, so that the player can be motivated to play the game. Can be done.

When the lucky time effect is executed, the characters "Lucky time has entered" are displayed in the main display area Dm, and "10 seconds" is displayed as the period display mode 851. On the display screen shown in FIG. 19(b), a lucky time effect is being executed indicating that the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is longer than the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next. As shown in FIG. 19(d), when the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is 20 seconds and the variation time of the next special symbol variation is 10 seconds, the difference is 10 seconds. Seconds are displayed in the period display mode 851. The number of seconds displayed in this period display mode 851 is subtracted and displayed in correspondence with the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation, and when 0 seconds is displayed, the lucky time performance ends.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment ``Winning the accessory during lucky time is a chance'' is displayed as a guide display mode for guiding the player about the benefits during lucky time. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game during the lucky time. Although detailed illustrations have been omitted, in this embodiment, if the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 5 seconds), a production that can notify the player to that effect is provided. It is configured so that unlucky effects can also be performed. In other words, the configuration is such that the player can understand that if a V jackpot game is executed while this unlucky effect is being executed, the next set V rush period is likely to be shortened. .

By executing the unlucky performance in this way, the player is asked to either actively play the special electric game during the unlucky performance or to make the player play the V jackpot game during the V rush period. will be subtracted, but it will be possible to choose not to play the special electric game until the end of the unlucky performance and aim for a longer V rush period to be set after the end of the V jackpot game, increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned lucky time performance and unlucky performance are configured to be executed when the variation time of the special symbol satisfies a predetermined condition, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the predetermined condition is met. In such a case, whether or not to perform the performance may be determined by lottery, or whether or not to perform the performance may be determined based on the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player. It may be configured to do so. Furthermore, the execution frequency of the effect may be varied depending on the length of the period that can be displayed as a lucky time effect or an unlucky effect, and if the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed exceeds 50 seconds, It may be configured such that the lucky time effect is executed based on probability.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19(b), during the period in which the lucky time effect is being executed, the period display mode 851 is used to notify the player of a period that is advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that only the display mode indicating lucky time is displayed without displaying the period display mode 851. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the degree of advantage, so it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the length of the V rush period that will be set after the end of the V jackpot game.

Furthermore, as a condition for executing lucky time effects and unlucky effects, it is required that the remaining period of the V rush period, that is, the total period of special symbol fluctuations until the time saving state ends, is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or more. It may be provided as an execution condition, or it may be configured such that the lucky time effect or unlucky effect is not executed during the final variation of the special symbol during the V rush period.

<About the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the content of the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be explained. FIG. 20 is a transition diagram showing the flow of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the gaming states include a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and two. Regardless of the gaming state, the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and during the time saving state, the time saving end condition (for example, the special symbol lottery wins the jackpot). The configuration is such that the normal state is set when a condition that is satisfied when the process is executed a predetermined number of times (four times) is satisfied.

First, a case where the normal state is set as the gaming state will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is in an initial state (a state in which the process is executed when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) has been operated during the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 54). ), the normal state is set as the gaming state. This normal state is a game state in which it is difficult to win a ball in the normal symbol winning device 640 because it is a low probability state of normal symbols (it is more difficult to win a prize than a high probability state of normal symbols). A left-handed game to let the ball enter the mouth 64 is executed.

During this normal state, if a jackpot is won in a special symbol (special symbol) lottery (special symbol lottery), either jackpot A or jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, and the jackpot game is executed. Ru. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 24, but in this embodiment, 99% of the time when a jackpot is won in a special drawing lottery, the jackpot type is "Jackpot A (4R (round), 4 time saving rounds)". )" is set, and "Jackpot B (4R (round), time saving 15 times)" is set as the jackpot type at a rate of 1%.

In other words, if a jackpot is won during the normal state, the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the conditions for ending the time-saving state are different depending on the set jackpot type. ing. Specifically, it is configured such that a time-saving ending condition that is easier to establish is set for a jackpot type that is easier to set (jackpot A) than for a jackpot type that is harder to set (jackpot B). With this configuration, in addition to the game where the player who is playing the game in the normal state aims to win a jackpot in the special drawing lottery, the jackpot type set is a jackpot type (jackpot B) that is advantageous to the player. ), it is possible to have the player play the game while expecting that the result will be .

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, while the normal state is set, a dynamic display (effect display) for showing the lottery results of the special drawing lottery is performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The player is configured to be able to predict the result of the special drawing lottery being executed by understanding the dynamic display mode (performance mode) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. . In addition, as mentioned above, during the normal state, the low probability state of normal symbols is set, so it is difficult for a ball to enter the normal symbol winning device 640 by the lottery of normal symbols (general symbol lottery). , the effect display for suggesting the result of the general drawing lottery to the player is not executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, or rather than the dynamic display mode for suggesting the result of the special drawing drawing, It is configured to be executed in an inconspicuous display mode.

By configuring this way, during the period when the normal state is set, the player is given an effect that is performed based on the result of the special drawing lottery, rather than an effect that is executed based on the result of the regular drawing lottery. Since the player can be made to look at the player, it is possible to visually understand that a game (special pattern game) mainly consisting of a special drawing lottery is being executed during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

Then, when the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the common symbol winning device 640 is likely to be in the open state based on the common symbol lottery. A game (special electric game) that aims at a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in an accessory winning game executed by letting a ball enter the special electric operating port 643 based on a lottery is a jackpot game based on a special drawing lottery. The game is designed to be more advantageous to the player than a game (special figure game) aiming at (special figure jackpot game).

In this way, by changing the trigger for executing the jackpot that the player should aim for depending on the set gaming state, it is possible to have the player perform different games depending on the set gaming state, so that the player It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. In addition, in this embodiment, during the normal state, the special drawing game aiming at the special drawing lottery is configured so that it is more advantageous to the player than the special drawing game aiming at the general drawing lottery, and during the time saving state, the special drawing game aiming at the general drawing drawing is configured so that the special drawing game aiming at the general drawing drawing is more advantageous to the player. By configuring the game so that it is more advantageous to the player than a special drawing game that aims at a special drawing lottery, the content of the game that the player should perform differs depending on the gaming state, but this is not the only thing. Instead, multiple types of special symbols are provided (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the type of special symbol corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed by the player is made different depending on the set game state. For example, if the normal state is set, a first special pattern game aiming at a special drawing with the first special symbol is a second special pattern game aiming at a special drawing with the second special symbol. If a game state different from the normal state (for example, a time saving state) is set, the second special symbol game aiming at the special lottery of the second special symbol will be more advantageous to the player than the first one. It may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol game, which aims at a special symbol lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the game board is configured so that the same gaming method (left-handed game) is executed whether the special figure game is executed or the special electric game is executed. By configuring 13, the player is configured to avoid the trouble of changing the gaming method every time the gaming state changes; The method may be configured to be different. For example, a left-handed game (a game that aims at the game area (left side area) formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) is performed during the normal state, and a left-handed game is performed during the time saving state. may be configured to execute a right-handed game (a game in which the player aims at the game area (right side area) formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80). In this case, as a configuration for executing the special figure game in the left side area, a special figure entry ball opening 64 is provided, and as a configuration for executing the special figure game in the right side area, a through gate 67, a general electric prize winning device 640, a V It is preferable that a winning device 65 is provided and a variable winning device 650 that is opened as a jackpot game is provided in a game area (lower area) that can be reached by the ball that has flown down the left side area or the right side area.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) depending on the game content (special figure game, special electric game) that the player is mainly asked to perform. Therefore, it is possible to provide the fun of changing the game method.

In addition, in this way, when changing the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) depending on the game content (special figure game, special electric game) that the player is mainly asked to perform, Configured to execute guidance notification (for example, the display mode of "right-handed play" displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) for guiding the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) to be played. That's good.

Furthermore, when changing the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) depending on the game content (special figure game, special electric game) that the player is mainly asked to perform, it is possible for the ball that has flown down the left side area or the right side area to reach By providing a variable winning device 650 that is opened and operated as a jackpot game in the possible game area (lower area), even when a jackpot game is executed based on a special figure game, a jackpot game is executed based on a special electric game. Even in such a case, there is no need to change the gaming method upon execution of a jackpot game, and the game can be played smoothly.

Returning to FIG. 20, the explanation will be continued. In the present embodiment, the condition for ending the time saving state is established based on the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the special symbol is drawn). Further, the lottery for ordinary symbols (regular symbol lottery) is configured to be able to be executed independently without being involved in the lottery for special symbols (special symbol lottery). In other words, the trigger for executing the general drawing lottery is configured to be established regardless of the situation of the special drawing drawing.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 provided in the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) ordinary electric winning device 640 and a game with a winning object is executed, the special symbol being executed is The symbol variation is configured to be interrupted, and the interrupted special symbol variation is restarted when the accessory winning game is completed. In addition, if the ball enters the V winning hole 165 during the accessory winning game and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, the interrupted special symbol fluctuation will be resumed when the jackpot game ends. It is configured to allow

In this embodiment configured in this way, when the time-saving state is set, a predetermined number of times is required until the time-saving state end condition (time-saving end condition) that can be established based on the special drawing lottery is satisfied. By the time the special figure lottery is executed (for example, four times), a large number of special electric games aiming at a V jackpot game are executed. To give a specific example, if 4 special pattern fluctuations are set as the time saving end condition, the period until the end of the 4th special pattern lottery, that is, for each of the 4 special pattern drawings. When the variable time of 10 seconds is set, the time saving state set this time will continue until 40 seconds later (timing when the fourth special drawing lottery ends).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 12(a), if there are 4 special symbols on hold at the end of the jackpot game, "40 seconds" is the period until the time saving state that is set after the jackpot game ends. Is displayed.

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, while the accessory winning game or jackpot game (V jackpot game) is being executed in the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed is not subtracted. Therefore, the period in which the time-saving state is actually set is the sum of the special symbol fluctuation time until the time-saving end condition is met and the interruption time during which the subtraction of the special symbol fluctuation time is suspended. Become. As mentioned above, the interruption time during which the subtraction of special figure fluctuations is interrupted corresponds to the period in which winning games (accessory winning games, jackpot winning games) are being executed, and the execution period of the winning games is the same as the player's game. Since the length of the period varies depending on the content, it is not possible to accurately notify the player of the interruption time.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the remaining time (special figure variation time) until the end of the time saving state is displayed (see FIG. 13(a)), and when the subtraction of the special figure variation time is interrupted, the subtraction is It is configured to display a display mode (see FIG. 13(b)) to indicate that the subtraction display of the remaining time (special figure fluctuation time) until the end of the time saving state is suspended until it is restarted. are doing.

With this configuration, the display content of the display mode (remaining time short-term display mode 801 in FIG. 12(a)) showing the period until the end of the time saving state displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player without any difference between the time period and the period until the time saving state actually ends.

The normal symbol lottery (common symbol lottery) that is executed during the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) is configured so that the probability of winning is approximately 33%. It is configured so that it is easier to win on a regular symbol compared to the winning probability (1%) of the regular symbol lottery (common symbol lottery) executed during the state). Furthermore, in this embodiment, a variation time of 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation pattern regardless of the set gaming state. Therefore, by continuing to play the left-handed game during the time-saving state, the game is executed for winning a common symbol once every 10 seconds, and the common symbol winning device 640 is configured to be in the open state.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5, when a normal game is executed during the time saving state, the winning ball in the general winning device 640 is likely to enter the special electric operating opening 643 ( It is configured so that it is easier to enter the ball than the normal game that is executed during the normal state, and it is configured to be able to execute the accessory game about the same number of times as the normal game that is executed. . As described above with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9, the probability that a ball will enter the V winning hole 165 in one accessory game and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) will be executed is about 1/11. It is configured so that

In other words, in the first embodiment, the game is configured such that during the time-saving state, the accessory winning game, which provides a chance to win a ball into the V winning slot 165, is executed approximately once every 10 seconds. . If the game result of the accessory winning game is that the ball can be won into the V winning hole 165 (in the case of a V winning), after the accessory winning game, a jackpot game (a jackpot game with jackpot type jackpot C (10R) Round), time saving four times)) are executed, and after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state is set again. In other words, if a V jackpot game (a jackpot game executed by placing a ball into the V winning hole 165) is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends. are doing. Therefore, once the time saving state is set, the time saving state will not end as long as the jackpot game is continued to be executed in the special electric game, so it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player and make him perform the special electric game. can.

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, when a jackpot game is executed by a special electric game, the suspended special symbol fluctuation will be restarted after the jackpot game ends, but the restarted special symbol It is configured so that the number of special drawing drawings (special drawing fluctuations) for satisfying the time-saving end condition is not updated due to drawing fluctuations. That is, after the special symbol variation after restarting is completed, the time saving state continues until the special symbol variation is executed four times.

In other words, if the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is a long time (for example, 30 seconds), a game to win the accessory is executed, and a V jackpot game is executed by the game to win the accessory, the setting is set after the jackpot game. If the period of the time saving state is "30 seconds + 4 times of special figure fluctuations", but the remaining period of special figure fluctuations is short (for example, 0.5 seconds), the game per accessory is is executed, and when the V jackpot game is executed by the accessory winning game, the period of the time saving state set after the jackpot game is "0.5 seconds + 4 special figure fluctuations".

With this configuration, when executing a special electric game aiming at a V jackpot game during a time saving state where the end condition is satisfied based on the elapsed time, it is advantageous for the player to execute the V jackpot game sooner. Instead, it is possible to make it more advantageous for the player if the V jackpot game is executed in a state where the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation being executed is long. Therefore, even if the V jackpot game is not executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the time saving state was set, it is possible to make the player continue playing the game while creating a sense of expectation in the player. It becomes possible.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured so that the number of time-saving changes (the number of special pattern fluctuations updated to satisfy the time-saving end conditions) is not updated (subtracted) based on the special pattern fluctuation restarted after the end of the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the structure may be such that the time saving number (the number of special pattern fluctuations updated to satisfy the time saving end condition) is updated based on the special pattern fluctuation restarted after the end of the jackpot. . Even with this configuration, the longer the special symbol fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) after restarting, the more advantageous it can be to the player. Even if the V jackpot game is not being executed in the state, it is possible to make the player continue playing the game while giving him a sense of expectation.

Returning to FIG. 20, the explanation will be continued. If the game result of the accessory winning game executed during the time saving state is that the ball cannot be won into the V winning hole 165 (in the case of a non-V winning), the special electric game is repeated until the time saving state ends. is executed.

In addition, during the time-saving state, when the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) ends, it is determined whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied, that is, whether the special symbol fluctuation has ended for the number of times set as the time-saving end condition. , If the time saving end condition is satisfied, the game state shifts to the normal state and the special figure game is executed. On the other hand, if the time saving end condition is not satisfied, the next special figure variation is executed. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 25(c), but in this embodiment, as a variation pattern of the special drawing lottery executed during the time saving state, the result of the special drawing lottery is won (1/100). In this case, a variation pattern with a variation time of 50 seconds or 200 seconds is selected, and if the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss (99/100), a variation time of 10 to 50 seconds is set. The structure is configured such that the fluctuation pattern that occurs is selected. In other words, the jackpot is won in the special drawing lottery that is executed before the time saving end condition is met (if the time saving ending condition is set as 4 times, the special drawing drawing is carried out 4 times after the end of the jackpot game). The configuration is such that it is easier to continue the time saving state for a long period of time in this case. Further, if a jackpot is won in a special drawing lottery during the time saving state, the time saving state is set again after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the added value of winning a jackpot in the special drawing lottery within the limited period in which the time-saving state is set, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that there is jackpot information in which a variable time of 200 seconds is set in the reserved memory of the special symbol obtained at the end of the jackpot game, a special It is configured to perform a performance (see FIG. 17(a)).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the end conditions of the time saving state that are set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to set a time saving ending condition that is easy to satisfy (4 time saving times) and a time saving ending condition that is difficult to satisfy (15 time saving times). It is composed of Here, if 15 time reductions are set, the time reduction state will continue until the 15th special drawing lottery that is executed during the time reduction state ends, so In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot during the time saving state can be increased, and the time period can be further lengthened by a long-term fluctuation pattern set at the time of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment allows the game to be played using the same game method (left-handed game) during the normal state, during the time saving state, and during the jackpot game. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the special drawing lottery is not executed during the time saving state. In addition, in this embodiment, the variation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation is configured to be selected regardless of the number of reserved special symbols (the number of reserved special symbols), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if the time saving state is If set, it is good to configure so that the larger the number of reserved special symbols, the easier it is to select a variation pattern in which a longer variation time is set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player actively play the game in order to reach the upper limit (4 pieces) of the number of reserved special drawings in the stage before the time saving state is set (for example, during a jackpot game). . Moreover, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the special symbol variation is not executed during the time saving state (a state in which the time saving end condition is not satisfied).

Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this embodiment, during the period in which the time saving state is set, that is, in the period until the predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations (special symbol fluctuations) are completed, the normal symbol It is configured to execute a lottery and finally execute a special electric game in which a ball is won in the V winning hole 165 in the V winning device 65. The V prize winning device 65 is configured to easily win a ball during the game to win the accessory, and is configured so that the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation is not subtracted (interrupted) during the game to win the accessory. Furthermore, the accessory winning game has multiple termination conditions, specifically, it is established when the number of winning balls in the V winning device 65 during the accessory winning game reaches a predetermined number (3). A first termination condition (ball winning termination condition) that is satisfied, and a second termination condition (time elapsed termination condition) that is satisfied when the elapsed period after the accessory winning game is executed reaches a predetermined period (3 seconds). , and is configured to end the accessory winning game when either the first end condition or the second end condition is satisfied. In addition, during the normal symbol variation period and during the execution period of the regular symbol winning game, a new regular symbol lottery (general symbol lottery) is not executed, but during the regular symbol winning game, the ball enters the special electric operation port 643. is configured such that a new common map lottery can be executed during a period in which a prize is won and a game with a winning object is being executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, special electric games are performed with the aim of executing more accessory winning games while interrupting special symbol fluctuations by causing the accessory winning games to be executed during the time saving state. It will be done. However, during the fluctuation period of the normal symbols until the lottery results of the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, and during the period of execution of the game per common symbol, the period when the ball cannot be entered into the winning device 640 (the electric accessory 640a The period in which the player cannot perform the game with the accessory (such as the period in which the game is closed) is a period in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol during the time-saving state is wasted, so it is disadvantageous to the player during the time-saving state. Unfavorable times will be short-lived.

Therefore, for example, as normal symbol fluctuation patterns set during the time saving state, there is a short fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (variation time 3 seconds) and a long fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (variation time 15 seconds). If it is configured to be selectable, the player will play the game while expecting that the short and short fluctuation pattern will be selected so that the short period of time during the disadvantageous period described above will be shortened. Furthermore, as in this embodiment, if a configuration is used in which the special figure fluctuation is interrupted during the execution period of the accessory winning game (the process of subtracting the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation is interrupted), disadvantageous time reduction is possible. By lengthening the period in which the period and the interruption period of the special symbol fluctuation overlap, it is possible to suppress the special symbol fluctuation time from being subtracted during the disadvantageous short period.

Therefore, in order to shorten the disadvantageous time period during the time-saving state, when a game with a winning object is executed during the time-saving state, the remaining time of the common pattern fluctuation being executed is determined, and the remaining time is a predetermined time (e.g. , 10 seconds), it is preferable to perform an effect that urges that it is better to end the accessory winning game not by the ball winning but by the passage of time. By configuring in this way, the execution period of the accessory winning game can be lengthened, and the disadvantageous time period can be shortened.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 performs special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters etc. are used for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the following operations.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used in the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. A stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbol, and a first win type counter C2 used for setting the initial value of the first win random number counter C1. 1 initial value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

In addition, a second winning random number counter C4 is used for drawing the normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and a variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbols. A type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 39), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 55). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. A special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is provided in the RAM 203, which corresponds to the ball entering the special symbol ball entrance 64, which is composed of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4). In the storage area 203a, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of ball entry into the special figure entrance ball opening 64. Each is stored.

Then, when the special symbol starting condition (variation condition) is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and the various stored values are shifted to the special symbol execution area. A special symbol variation based on the value is started.

In this embodiment, a configuration in which the number of types of special symbols is one is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of special symbols may be provided. In this case, for example, in order to establish a lottery condition for one special symbol type (for example, the first special symbol) based on the ball entering the special symbol entrance hole 64 (first ball entrance), 1 Store each value mentioned above in the special symbol holding ball storage area, and enter the ball into a different entrance (e.g., second entrance) from the special symbol entrance 64 (first entrance). In order to establish the lottery conditions for other special symbol types (for example, the second special symbol) based on the It is only necessary to configure it so that it can be stored.

Then, when the starting condition (variable condition) of the first special symbol or the starting condition (variable condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area of the corresponding special symbol type is What is necessary is to shift the various values stored in the special symbol execution area to the special symbol execution area and to start special symbol variation based on the various stored values. With this configuration, even if the pachinko machine 10 uses a plurality of special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be smoothly executed.

Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 has multiple special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area, second special symbol reserved ball storage area) may be configured to have a special symbol execution area. good. Thereby, when the starting conditions for each special symbol are satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be executed promptly.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery results for the special symbols are configured to be only jackpots and misses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in some cases where the lottery results for the special symbols are misses, It may be configured such that the player can win a small win that can give the player fewer benefits than when winning a jackpot (a different benefit than when winning a jackpot). With this configuration, even if the player does not win a jackpot, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to receive a benefit, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In this case, a small winning type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the value of the obtained small winning type counter is configured to be able to be stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area, and when executing the special symbol lottery. All you have to do is configure it to reference it.

In addition, if the special symbol lottery is configured to allow small winnings, for example, the content of the transition of the gaming state based on the winning of the jackpot and the content of the transition of the gaming state based on the winning of the small winning are configured to be different. For example, if you win a jackpot, you can shift the gaming state to the normal state at the start of the jackpot game, and further set a new gaming state after the jackpot game ends based on the set jackpot type. If a small winning is won, the small winning game is executed while maintaining the gaming state at the time of winning the small winning, and the gaming state may not be changed even after the small winning game ends.

With this configuration, it is possible to change whether or not the game state is to be shifted and the content of the transition depending on the winning type (big win, small win), so it is possible to provide a game with a wide variety of variations. can.

Furthermore, the RAM 203 of this embodiment is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b that corresponds to the ball entering (passing the ball) into the through gate 67 consisting of one holding area (first holding area). In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 are stored in accordance with the timing of ball entry into the through gate 67, respectively.

Then, when the normal symbol starting condition (variation condition) is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the regular symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the regular symbol execution area, and the various stored values are Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

Next, each counter will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 22. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 399). It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 55).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), for example, and the special symbol is held in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the special symbol entry hole 64. The ball is stored in the ball storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. If it matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be explained with reference to FIG. 23(b). FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) for determining a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is defined.

Specifically, in the first winning random number table 202a, a determination value for determining a jackpot is defined within a predetermined range, and a determination value within a predetermined range is defined. As shown in FIG. 23(b), among the values of the first winning random number counter C1, "0 to 3" are defined as jackpot determination values, and other values ("4 to 399") are determined as misses. It is specified as a value.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot is configured to be the same regardless of the gaming state, but the structure is not limited to this, and the probability of winning a jackpot is configured to differ depending on the gaming state. It's okay. Further, in that case, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be set to two types, a high probability state and a low probability state, or three or more types. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be configured to be different for each of up to four types of gaming states that are set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, It is also possible to simply configure the state of the special symbol to be set in three or more types, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and to set a different jackpot probability for each state.

In addition, when configuring so that a "small win" can be won as a lottery result of a special symbol, the value of the first win random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small win" is defined in the first win random number table 202a. Just configure it. With this configuration, the jackpot lottery and the small prize lottery for special symbols can be executed in the same process, so compared to the case where the big prize lottery and the small prize lottery are executed in different processes, the main control The processing load on the device 110 can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to prohibit winning both a jackpot and a small jackpot in one special symbol lottery.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits the jackpot, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). The counter is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). For example, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the special symbol entry hole 64. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In this embodiment, the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is used to refer to the first winning type selection table 202c to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the first winning type selection table 202c will be explained with reference to FIG. 24.

FIG. 24(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection table 202c. As shown in FIG. 24(a), this first winning type selection table 202c includes a special symbol jackpot type selection table 202c1 that is referred to when winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and a special symbol jackpot type selection table 202c1 that is referred to when winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery. It has a V jackpot type selection table 202c2 that is referred to when a ball wins a prize (V prize).

First, with reference to FIG. 24(b), the contents of the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1 will be explained. FIG. 24(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special figure jackpot type selection table 202c1. As described above, this special symbol jackpot type selection table 202c1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. Different jackpot types are defined depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, a "jackpot A" is defined for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 98", and a "jackpot B" is defined for a value of "99". There is.

Here, the contents of the jackpot game executed corresponding to each jackpot type and the contents of the gaming state set after the jackpot game is finished will be explained. In this embodiment, the content of the opening operation (round game content) of the jackpot game executed according to each jackpot type, that is, the content of the operation (release timing, An opening operation scenario in which the number of openings) is defined in chronological order is stored in advance in a various operation scenario table 202e included in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

Then, an opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set in the case of winning a jackpot is read from the various operation scenario table 202e and stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. be done. When the opening operation scenario is stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario contents are updated every time the main processing (see FIG. 55) of the main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) that executes control during the jackpot game, the current scenario content is determined and processing is executed based on the determination result.

With this configuration, for example, when multiple movable members are moved by one opening operation control, by using an opening operation scenario that defines the operation details of each movable member in chronological order, multiple movable members can be moved. It is possible to centrally manage operation control for Therefore, compared to the case where each movable member is controlled separately, the operation timing of each movable member can be set appropriately, and if a problem occurs in one movable member, the other movable members can be Operation processing for the member can be smoothly executed.

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 4 rounds as a jackpot game, and a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened during the 4 rounds is executed. This round game is a game in which the first attacker 650 is continuously opened until 10 balls enter the variable prize winning device 650 or until the opening period elapses for 30 seconds. That is, in "Jackpot A" in which a four-round round game is executed, it is a jackpot game in which a maximum of 40 balls can be won into the variable winning device 650.

Furthermore, "Jackpot A" is stipulated so that a time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and "Time saving 4" is set as the period during which the time saving state continues. In other words, a short period of time is specified until the special symbol lottery is executed four times without winning a jackpot during the time saving state (until the fourth special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display)). has been done.

"Jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds (the number of times a round game is executed) is four rounds as a jackpot game, and a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 650 is operated to open during the four rounds. It is stipulated that the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the period during which the time saving state continues is "15 time savings", that is, the time saving state. A short period of time is specified until the special symbol lottery is executed 15 times without winning a jackpot during the state (until the 15th special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display)).

That is, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, four rounds of jackpot games are always executed, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot games are finished. When the set jackpot type is "Jackpot A" (99% of jackpot wins), the time saving number is "4 times", and when it is "Jackpot B" (1% of jackpot wins), the time saving number is "4 times". The configuration is such that the number of time reductions is set to ``15 times''.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during the time-saving state, the jackpot is greater than the special figure game (a game in which a ball enters the special symbol entry hole 64 and the aim is to win a jackpot through the special symbol lottery) during the normal state. It is configured so that a special electric game that is easy to execute (a game that aims to win a jackpot by placing a ball in the V-winning slot 165 (V-winning) based on the lottery of normal symbols) is executed, and the game is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. It is configured so that the time saving state is a more advantageous gaming state for the player. Therefore, "Jackpot B" in which the time-saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is difficult to end (the conditions for ending the time-saving state are difficult to satisfy) is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot A". .

In addition, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, a jackpot game with the same number of rounds is executed for all jackpots, but this is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that different numbers of round games can be executed depending on the type of jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game for all jackpots, and the number of time reductions (time saving end condition) is set according to the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are a jackpot type in which a time-saving state is set at the end of the jackpot game and a jackpot type in which a normal state is set depending on the selected jackpot type. It's okay.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24(c), the contents of the V jackpot type selection table 202c2 will be explained. FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2. This V jackpot type selection table 202c2 is a data table that defines the game contents of a jackpot game (V jackpot game) that is executed when a ball enters a prize (V prize) in the V winning hole 165. Specifically, a "big win C" is defined for the entire range of the value of the first win type counter C2 from "0 to 99".

This "Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds (the number of times a round game is executed) is 10 rounds as a jackpot game, and a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 650 is operated to open during the 10 rounds. . Then, after the end of the jackpot game, it is stipulated that the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, and the period during which the time saving state continues is ``four time saving times'', that is, the time saving state. A short period of time is defined for the special symbol lottery to be executed four times without winning a jackpot during the state (until the fourth special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display)).

In other words, in this embodiment, the jackpot game executed based on the V winning (jackpot game executed in the special electric game) is more suitable than the jackpot game executed based on the special figure lottery (jackpot game executed in the special figure game). The game is configured so that a jackpot game with a larger number of rounds is executed. In other words, in terms of the amount of benefits (number of prize balls) awarded during the jackpot game, the time saving state is a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the normal state.

In this embodiment, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired based on the fact that a ball has won a prize in the special electric actuation opening 643, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired based on the fact that a V prize has been won during the accessory winning game. In the jackpot game (V jackpot game), the V jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired when the ball enters the special electric actuation port 643 that triggered the execution of the V jackpot winning game. It is configured to be executed based on the jackpot type selected with reference to the table 202c2.

In addition, in this embodiment, since there is only one type of jackpot (jackpot C) specified in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2, no matter which accessory winning game is used to win a V prize, the same content may be won. Although a jackpot game is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of jackpot types may be defined in the V jackpot type selection table 202c2 according to the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2. Alternatively, a plurality of special electric operation ports may be provided in the ordinary electric winning device 640, and the jackpot type may be set in correspondence with the special electric operation hole in which a ball has won among the plurality of special electric operation holes. Furthermore, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired based on the fact that a ball has won in the V winning hole 165 while the accessory winning game is being executed, and the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is changed to the value of the first winning type counter C2. The configuration may be such that the jackpot type is selected based on the above.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game state is configured to be selected after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the gaming state that is set at the time when the jackpot is won or when the ball enters the V winning opening 165. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming state that is set after the end of the jackpot game can be varied depending on the gaming state that is set at the time when the jackpot is won or when the ball enters the V winning hole 165. In this case, for example, just before the end of the time saving state (immediately before the final variation of the special symbols in the time saving state stops), a game per normal symbol is executed, and the normal game after the time saving state ends. Only if you win a V prize during a bonus game that is executed in a state where the state is set, that is, if you win a V prize in a special electric game during a normal state, it is difficult for the time-saving termination condition to be satisfied after the end of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that a time saving state (for example, a time saving state where the number of time saving times is 20 times) is set.

In the present embodiment, there are three types of jackpot types, but the jackpot type is not limited to this, and may be two or less types, or may be configured to provide four or more types. Further, it may be configured such that the same jackpot type can be set for a case where a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery and a case where a V prize is won in a special electric game. Furthermore, the selection ratio and type of the jackpot type selected this time may be configured to be different based on information regarding the jackpot type selected in the past (for example, jackpot game content and game state transition content). . With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in past game history (jackpot history). Further, in this case, it is preferable to perform a suggestion performance that can suggest to the player the jackpot type that is likely to be set in the next jackpot based on the past jackpot history. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The rough display mode (variation time) such as so-called short time off, long time off, normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determining the display mode is specifically determining the variation time of symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and detailed pattern fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Incidentally, a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 25) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is being

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 25(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1 used when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and a time saving table 202d1 used when the time saving state is set. A table 202d2 is defined. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the data table used to select the fluctuation pattern is different depending on the gaming state, so the fluctuation pattern (variation time) to be selected is different depending on the gaming state. be able to.

Next, detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIGS. 25(b) and 25(c). FIG. 25(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the normal table 202d1. This normal table 202d1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the fluctuation time is longer when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a miss. The variation pattern is specified so that it is easy to select the variation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the lottery result of the special symbol (special symbol) is a "jackpot (win)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50". Various winning normal reaches with a variation time of 20 seconds are defined in association with each other, and winning super reaches with a variation time of 60 seconds to 120 seconds are defined in the range of "51 to 198". In FIG. 25(b), in order to simplify the explanation of the fluctuation pattern of the winning super reach, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is shown as "60 seconds to 120 seconds" in the range of "51 to 198". In reality, predetermined fluctuation times (for example, fluctuation time of 60 seconds, fluctuation time of 100 seconds, fluctuation time of 120 seconds) are respectively defined in the value range of the corresponding fluctuation type counter CS1. In other words, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a "big hit" and the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "51 to 198", then the value corresponding to the obtained value is "60 seconds to 198". A variation pattern in which a variation time of "120 seconds" is set is set.

In addition, if the lottery result is "loser", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of "0 to 179" as a short error with a variation time of 8 seconds, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined as being in the range of "180 to 194". A variation time of 20 seconds is defined in association with a normal reach, and a variation time of 60 seconds to 120 seconds is defined in a range of "195 to 198" in association with a variation in super reach. In addition, the content that the lottery result is a "miss" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "195 to 198" is for the same purpose as when the lottery result is a "jackpot (win)" described above. This is a simplified explanation.

In other words, in this embodiment, the types of variable times that can be selected are the same regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, and only the ratio at which each variable time is selected is configured to be different. ing. The system is configured such that when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot (win), the proportion of longer fluctuation times being selected is higher than when it is a loss. Therefore, the longer the special symbol fluctuation is being executed, the higher the expectation of winning a jackpot. Therefore, when a special symbol fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is executed, the player can It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in other words, in this embodiment, as the variable time set for the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, the smaller the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the longer the variable time is set. It is configured so that By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a period in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed frequently occurs. In addition, if the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, a short fluctuation time is set, so a ball enters the special symbol entrance 64 with the number of reserved balls reaching the upper limit. It is possible to prevent the ball from collapsing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the length of the set variation time can be adjusted by configuring the type of variation time that can be selected to be the same regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. By knowing this, it is possible to prevent the special symbol lottery results from being disclosed to the player in advance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol lottery results can be used as a jackpot (win). It may also be possible to partially set the variation time that is selected only in the case of a loss or the variation time that is selected only in the case of a loss.

As shown in FIG. 25(b), the present embodiment is configured to select a variation pattern based on the special symbol lottery result (result of judgment of validity) and the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be selected based on the type of jackpot that is set when a jackpot is won, for example.

Next, the contents of the time saving table 202d2 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 25(c). FIG. 25(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the time saving table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 25(c), in the time-saving table 202d2, symbol types, lottery results, ranges of values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and fluctuation patterns are defined in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25(c), when the win/fail determination result (lottery result) is a "win (jackpot)", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 fluctuates in the range of "0 to 99". A "short win" with a time of 50 seconds is defined, and a "long win" with a variable time of 200 seconds is defined in the range of "100 to 198". In addition, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "missing", "short missing A" with a variation time of 10 seconds is defined in the range of "0 to 149", and in the range of "150 to 169", "Short-out B" with a variation time of 15 seconds is defined, "Short-out C" with a variation time of 20 seconds is defined in the range of "170 to 189", and a variation time is defined in the range of "190 to 196". A "long deviation A" with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined, and a "long deviation B" with a variation time of 50 seconds is defined as a value of "197, 198".

As mentioned above, during the time saving state, unlike during the normal state, the type of variable time that can be selected is different depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a win or a loss. The variation time that can be selected in the case of winning a jackpot is configured to be longer than the variation time that can be selected in the case of a loss.

In this embodiment, as described above, the period in which the time saving state is set becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player, and during that short period of time, the special electric game is executed based on the lottery of normal symbols. Further, as the end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition), the end condition (time saving number of times) is set based on the number of times the special symbol changes (number of drawings).

Therefore, if a longer variation time is selected as the special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set. Then, in the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state, for example, if 4 time saving times are set, the jackpot winning (1/ 100), a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected as an added value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a more advantageous game to the player when a special symbol jackpot is won within a limited time period such as a time saving state, so that the player is motivated to play the game. can be made to do so.

In addition, even if the lottery result of a special symbol is a loss, the fluctuation time selected is ``10 seconds to 50 seconds'' with a difference of up to 5 times, so the winning fluctuation with a longer fluctuation time is selected. It is possible to play a game while making the player expect that the game will be played.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12(a), on the end screen of the jackpot game, a short remaining time mode 801 is displayed to indicate the length of the time saving state period (V rush period). This short remaining time mode 801 is a variable time period that is determined in advance based on the winning information included in the special symbol reservation that has already been obtained and is within the range until the time saving end condition is satisfied. It is configured to display the sum of the values.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether the number of seconds displayed as the short-term remaining time mode 801 is a display mode that is the sum of the variation times of multiple winning variations, or a display that corresponds to the variation time of one jackpot variation. It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether the situation will be different or not.

Returning to FIG. 22, the explanation will be continued. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 999, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 999). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting port (through gate) 67. It is acquired when the ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally becomes a win for the symbol is set by the second win random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second win random number counter C4 is set by the second win random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller. If it matches the random number value set by , it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. In addition, this second winning random number table 202b is divided into two types: one for normal symbols with low probability, and one for high probability instances where the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than that low probability, and the second winning random number table 202b is included in each type. The number of random numbers that become a jackpot is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of a win is changed between when the probability of a normal symbol is low and when the probability of a normal symbol is high.

The contents specified in this second winning random number table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 23(c). FIG. 23(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second winning random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 23(c), when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is defined as a value of "0" as a common symbol win, and when the normal symbol is in a high probability state. In some cases, the second winning random number counter C4 that has been obtained is defined as a normal winning number within the range of "0 to 299".

That is, in this embodiment, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability (1/1000) of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is set to a low probability. As a result, in this embodiment, in which the same gaming method (left-handed game) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols, and the time saving state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols, during the normal state, Since it is possible to make it difficult to win by winning a common symbol, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation in which a game to win a common symbol is executed during the normal state and a ball is won in the common symbol winning device 640. On the other hand, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (300/1000) is set to a high probability. Thereby, it is possible to easily execute a normal symbol winning game based on a winning of a normal symbol during the time saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in a game with a winning symbol that is executed during the normal state, it is difficult for a ball to enter the prize winning device 640 in a game with a winning symbol that is executed during the time saving state. Furthermore, even if a ball wins in the normal electric winning device 640 during the normal state, the winning ball is difficult to enter the special electric operating opening 643. That is, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to win a winning ticket in the normal state, and even if you win a winning ticket in the normal state, the ball will not enter the winning device 640 during the game for the winning ticket. Furthermore, even if a ball wins in the normal electric winning device 640, it is difficult for the winning ball to enter the special electric operating opening 643.

In this way, in the multiple processes (three processes) from the execution of the normal symbol lottery until the ball enters the special electric operating port 643, the game is made more difficult to proceed during the normal state than during the time saving state. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent a ball from entering the special electric actuating port 643 and playing a game with a winning object, triggered by a normal symbol lottery carried out during the normal state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the three processes described above, instead of being configured to restrict the winning of a ball to the special electric operating port 643 based on the normal symbol lottery being executed during the normal state, Among them, a short variation time (3 seconds, the same as in the time saving state) is set as the variation time of the normal symbol. In other words, even if the lottery of normal symbols is configured to be easily executed in a short period of time, the regulation in the three processes described above restricts the ball from entering the special electric actuating port 643. It is possible to reliably prevent a ball from entering the special electric operation opening 643 in response to the normal symbol lottery carried out in 2015, and a game where the accessory is won.

In this way, by setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbols short during the normal state, the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbols) is ), the normal symbol variation with a long variation time was executed across the transition timing of the gaming state, and even though the special symbol variation during the time saving state had started, the normal symbol variation during the time saving state It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery cannot be executed. Therefore, as in this embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 where the time-saving state is managed for a period of time, it is possible to provide players with a game (special electric game) that effectively uses a limited time and a short period of time.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned three processes (the winning probability of the normal symbol, the winning rate of the ball to the ordinary electric winning device 640 in the ordinary symbol winning game, and the ball that entered the ordinary electric winning device 640 in the special electric operation opening 643) (winning rate), the ball is configured to restrict the winning of the ball to the special electric actuation port 643 during the normal state, but is not limited to this, and is configured to be restricted in two or less processes. You may do so. In addition, in this embodiment, if the ball that has won in the normal electric winning device 640 does not enter the special electric operating opening 643, the ball enters the out opening 644 and the player is not given a benefit (for example, a prize ball). However, the present invention is not limited to this; for example, when a ball enters the out port 644, more prize balls are paid out than when a ball enters the special electric operation port 643. You may do so.

With this configuration, while suppressing the winning of a ball to the special electric operating port 643 during the normal state, when a ball wins in the ordinary electric winning device 640, a different privilege (a privilege to execute a game with a winning object) is provided. Since it is possible to provide a player with a benefit different from the above, it is possible to provide a surprising game to the player. Further, in a state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the player can be provided with an added value in the case of winning a regular symbol.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 999), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 55).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

The common figure variation type counter CS2 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of this common figure variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined by the value of the ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined using the value of the acquired ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2.

Returning to FIG. 21, the explanation will be continued. The ROM 202 has various data tables etc. defined corresponding to the various counters shown in FIG. 22. Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 23(a). FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 23(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment includes a first random number table 202a, a second random number table 202b, a jackpot type selection table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table. 202d, and various operation scenario tables 202e. Note that the first winning random number table 202a, the second winning random number table 202b, the jackpot type selection table 202c, and the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d have been described above when explaining the various counters illustrated in FIG. 22, so their explanation will be omitted. .

The various operation scenario table 202e is a data table having operation scenarios in which the operation contents of various movable members whose operation control is managed by the main controller 110 are defined in advance in chronological order. , which is read when controlling the operation of the movable member. In this embodiment, when controlling the motion of a movable member, a motion scenario that matches the current motion control conditions is read out of the various motion scenario tables 202e, and the read motion scenario is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 203. Remember. Then, in the main process executed at 4-millisecond intervals (see Figure 55), the contents of the operation scenario stored in the storage area are updated periodically (in 4-millisecond increments) to correspond to the updated values. If there is an operation scenario in which the movable member is variably operated in the area, the configuration is such that operation control is executed based on the operation scenario. Further, each operation scenario table is not provided for each movable member, but is set for each event (jackpot game, common figure game, accessory game) that controls the operation of the movable member. Therefore, in an operation scenario table corresponding to an event that requires operation control of multiple movable members within one event (for example, a game with a common figure), the operation control contents to be executed for multiple movable members are specified. has been done.

Here, the contents of the various operation scenario tables 202e will be explained with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28. FIG. 26(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the various operation scenario table 202e. As shown in FIG. 26(a), the various operation scenario tables 202e include a jackpot operation scenario table 202e1, a role winning operation scenario table 202e2, a regular winning operation scenario table 202e3, and a first movable valve scenario table 202e4. ing.

First, the contents of the accessory hit action scenario table 202e2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 26(b). FIG. 26(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various contents defined in the accessory winning action scenario table 202e2. The role-playing action scenario table 202e2 is a data table in which the role-playing scenario in which the action content during the role-playing game is set is defined. (the period from when the V winning device 65 is opened until the V winning device 65 is set to ON), the round period (the maximum period during which the V winning device 65 is opened), and the ending period (the maximum period during which the V winning device 65 is opened). 209c is set to OFF after the release period of Operation control corresponding to the value of a scenario counter (not shown) whose value is incremented by 1 each time the scenario counter is executed is executed.

Specifically, when the accessory winning game is started, the value of the scenario counter is set to "1". Scenario counter "1" has an operation scenario in which the storage solenoid 209c is set to ON as the corresponding operation scenario, so the storage solenoid 209c is set to ON at the same time as the start of the accessory winning game, and the storage valve is turned on. The storage valve 66a is moved to a state where the balls can be stored in the storage portion formed on the upper surface of the storage valve 66a. Then, the value of the scenario counter is incremented every 4 milliseconds, and the opening period ends when the scenario counter reaches "25", that is, 0.1 seconds after the start of the game for winning the accessory, and then the value of the scenario counter increases. At the timing when the value becomes "26", the V winning opening solenoid 209b is set to ON, and the V opening/closing door 65a (V attacker) is opened. That is, in this embodiment, the storage valve 66a is configured to be changed to the storage state using the period from the start of the accessory winning game to the opening of the V winning device 65. With this configuration, even if a ball enters the V-winning device 65 with force immediately after the V-winning device 65 becomes open, the storage valve 66a is already closed at the timing when the V-winning device 65 becomes open. Since the ball is changed to the storage state, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from passing through the storage valve 66a and entering the V winning opening 165.

Next, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is "375", that is, at the timing when 1.6 seconds have elapsed since the start of the accessory winning game, the V prize opening solenoid 209b is set to OFF, and the V opening/closing door 65a (V A scenario is defined to shut down the attacker. Then, after executing the closing control of the V opening/closing door 65a (V attacker), that is, at the timing when the value of the scenario counter is "376", the ending period of the accessory winning game is set, and the storage solenoid 209c is set to OFF. It is stipulated that Then, the closed state (ending period) of the accessory winning game is set until the value of the scenario counter reaches "750".

That is, in the accessory winning game executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the V winning device 65 is configured to open after the storage valve 66a is shifted to the storage state. The scenario is defined so that the storage solenoid 209c is set to OFF after the timing of closing the V winning device 65 (scenario counter "375"). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent an unforeseen situation from occurring at the start or end of the accessory winning game and the accessory winning game being executed at an unintended timing.

Next, the contents of the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 will be explained with reference to FIG. 27(a). FIG. 27(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the scenario defined in the first movable valve scenario 202e4. The first movable valve 66b of this embodiment is controlled to operate in a predetermined operation pattern while the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. The operation of the first movable valve 66b is set in the start-up process (see FIG. 54) of the main controller 110 that is executed when the main controller 110 is activated (see S1715 in FIG. 54). The scenario counter value is updated (increased by 1) by a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55).

As shown in FIG. 27(a), the first movable valve 66b in this embodiment is in a V-winning state where it is possible to win a ball into the V-winning port 165, and in a state where the ball can be entered into the V-winning port 165. It is configured so that the player is placed in either a state where it is difficult to win a prize or a state in which winning is difficult. The first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 turns on the first movable valve solenoid 209d when the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "1500" (the ball enters the V prize opening 165 when the first movable valve 66b is turned on). An operation scenario in which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off (a state in which the first movable valve 66b is in a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the V winning hole 165) are defined.

Specifically, the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned off until the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "1250", that is, until 5 seconds have passed after the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set. , the first movable valve solenoid 209d is turned on when the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1251" to "1500", that is, for 5 seconds to 5.5 seconds after the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set. An operational scenario is specified to be configured. If the value of the scenario counter reaches the upper limit "1500", the value of the scenario counter is switched from "1500" to "1" when the next main process (see Figure 55) is executed. From then on, the operation control based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is repeatedly executed until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the first movable valve 66b, which is a variable member for allowing or prohibiting the entry of balls into the V winning opening 165, is operated for 0.5 seconds for 5.5 seconds. It is configured to be variably operated so as to switch to a state in which it is possible to win a ball in the V winning opening 165. As a result, when a ball reaches the first movable valve 66b at random timing, the probability that the ball passes through the first movable valve 66b and enters the V winning hole 165 is 1/11. It consists of Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand in which game to win the accessory the ball will enter the V winning hole 165, and it is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm in all the games to win the accessory.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if a plurality of balls enter the V winning device 65 during one game for each accessory, the number of balls that can reach the first movable valve 66b is limited. It is configured so that there is only one. As a result, the jackpot probability (probability that the ball enters the V winning hole 165) in the accessory winning game becomes approximately 1/11, so it is possible to suppress excessive jackpot games from being provided to players. be able to.

In this embodiment, the same operation content is always set as the operation content of the first movable valve 66b during the period when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, but this is not limited to this. Any predetermined operation pattern may be used; for example, a first operation pattern defined as an off period (5.5 seconds) and an on period (0.5 seconds) of the first movable valve solenoid 209d; An operation scenario is set in which a second operation pattern is defined as an off period (3 seconds), an on period (0.2 seconds), an off period (2 seconds), and an on period (0.3 seconds). It's okay.

Further, in this embodiment, the same operation scenario is repeatedly set after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the same operation scenario is repeatedly set. It is also possible to provide a measuring means for measuring the elapsed time since then, and to switch to a different operation scenario based on the measurement result by the measuring means. In this case, only when the measurement result of the measurement means is a specific measurement result (for example, within 1 hour after power-on, 3 hours to 3 hours 10 minutes after power-on, etc.), the first It is preferable that the ratio of the period during which the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to ON is higher than the ratio of the period during which the movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute a jackpot game (V jackpot game) during a time-saving game only for a specific period, and it is possible to have the player play the game with the aim of playing the game during that period. The operation of the system can be improved.

Further, the control contents of the operation scenario may be changed depending on the game situation, for example, the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 is set to the initial state (scenario counter It may be configured to start from the value "1"), or the special symbol lottery result may be consecutively missed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times, which is the reciprocal of the jackpot probability of this pachinko machine 10). , a special operation scenario is set in which the proportion of the period during which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to be on is higher than the proportion of the period during which the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to off than in the normal operation scenario. It may be configured as follows. Once this special operation scenario is set, a time-saving state is then set, and it is preferable to continue setting the time-saving state for a period of time until the time-saving state ends. Thereby, by setting the special operation scenario, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game. In this case, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player that the special action scenario has been set. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a special action scenario has been set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27(b), the contents of the normal figure action scenario table 202e3 will be explained. FIG. 27(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the ordinary figure action scenario table 202e3. This normal pattern winning operation scenario table 202e3 is a data table that stores the operation pattern of the normal pattern winning game that is executed when a winning is won in the normal symbol lottery, and is a data table in which the operation pattern of the normal pattern winning game is stored. An operation scenario corresponding to the set gaming state is set.

Specifically, the action scenario table 202e3 includes a normal normal pattern scenario 202e31 that defines the operation scenario of a normal pattern game that is executed during the normal state, and a normal pattern pattern 202e31 that is executed during the time saving state. A time-saving normal figure winning scenario 202e32 in which an operation scenario for a normal figure winning game is defined is defined.

Here, with reference to FIG. 27(c), the contents of the normal scenario 202e31 will be explained. FIG. 27(c) is a schematic diagram showing the scenario contents defined in the scenario 202e31 per normal map. This normal normal symbol winning scenario 202e31 is performed when it is determined in the normal symbol fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) that the gaming state at the time when the winning normal symbol fluctuation stops (is fixed) is the normal state ( S1118 in FIG. 48: No) This is the operation scenario to be set.

The scenario 202e31 per ordinary map includes a general power solenoid that controls the operation of the electric accessory 640a of the general power winning device 640 and a general power winning device for the scenario counter value in the range of “1” to “1050”. An operation scenario is defined for turning on and off the second movable valve solenoid 209e that controls the operation of the second movable valve 642 that allocates the destination of the winning ball to the ball 640.

Specifically, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "1025", that is, after the scenario 202e31 for normal normal pattern is set (after the game for normal pattern in the normal state is executed) 4 .Until 1 second has elapsed, the general electric solenoid remains off (the electric accessory 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e remains off (the state that causes the ball to flow down to the out port 644), and then, When the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1026" to "1050", that is, for 0.1 seconds between 4.1 seconds and 4.2 seconds after the scenario 202e31 is executed per normal power map, the power solenoid is activated. The operation scenario is defined so that the second movable valve solenoid 209e is on (the electric accessory 640a is in an open state) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is on (a state in which the ball flows down to the special electric operation port 643).

That is, when a game per normal figure is executed in the normal state, a game per normal figure is executed in the closed state (4.1 seconds) and the open state (0.1 seconds). Furthermore, even if a ball enters the winning device 640 during the open state for 0.1 seconds, at that point the second movable valve 643 is at a position where the winning ball flows down to the out port 644 (see FIG. 4). Since it is variable, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the special electric operating port 643.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the contents of the scenario 202e32 for saving time will be explained. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing the scenario contents defined in the scenario 202e32 for time-saving common maps. This time-saving normal symbol winning scenario 202e32 is performed when it is determined that the gaming state at the time when the winning normal symbol variation has stopped (confirmed) in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) is the normal state ( S1118 in FIG. 48: Yes) This is an operation scenario to be set.

A general-purpose power solenoid that controls the operation of the electric accessory 640a of the general-purpose power winning device 640 and a general-purpose power winning device 640 for the time-saving general map per scenario 202e32, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of “1” to “1025”. An operation scenario is defined for turning on and off the second movable valve solenoid 209e that controls the operation of the second movable valve 642 that allocates the destinations of winning balls.

Specifically, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "1" to "25", that is, after the scenario 202e31 for normal normal map is set (after the game for normal map in the normal state is executed), the value of the scenario counter is 0. .Until 1 second has elapsed, the general electric solenoid is set to OFF (the electric accessory 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON (the state that causes the ball to flow down to the special electric operating port 643). After that, the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "26" to "775", that is, for 3 seconds from 0.1 seconds to 3.1 seconds after scenario 202e32 is set per time-saving plan. The general electric solenoid is set to ON (the electric accessory 640a is in the open state), the second movable valve solenoid 209e is continuously set to ON, and the value of the scenario counter is in the range of "776" to "1024", that is, Until 3.1 seconds to 4.1 seconds have elapsed after the time-saving general map scenario 202e32 is set, the general power solenoid is off (the electric accessory 640a is closed) and the second movable valve solenoid 209e is on. (a state in which the ball flows down to the special electric operation port 643), and when the value of the scenario counter reaches "1025", that is, the upper limit value specified in the scenario 202e32 per time-saving ordinary map, the second movable The operation scenario is defined so that the valve solenoid 209e is turned off (a state in which the ball flows down to the out port 644).

In other words, when a normal figure winning game is executed in the time saving state, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the ordinary figure winning game is immediately executed for 3 seconds after a short time closed state (0.1 seconds). be done. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the general prize winning device 640 than in the ordinary winning game in the normal state.

Furthermore, in the time-saving regular winning scenario 202e32, the second movable valve 643 is moved to the position where it is possible to win the ball to the special electric operation opening 643 during the period when the ball can be won to the ordinary electric winning device 640 (Fig. 5 (see) can be set, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the special electric actuating port 643 during the normal game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned normal scenario 202e31 and time-saving scenario 202e32, the operation scenario for the second movable valve solenoid 209d is defined to be the same. The content of operation control can be unified, and the process of controlling variable members can be simplified.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, this game with a winning card includes a time end condition that is satisfied based on the passage of time (a condition that is satisfied that the scenario with a winning card is updated to the upper limit value), and a winning device with a winning card. A winning end condition is set that is satisfied when the number of winning balls that hit 640 reaches an upper limit (for example, 5 balls). When playing a normal game, the winning end condition is set so that the time end condition is satisfied first. As a result, for example, in a game with a winning symbol, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally winning a large amount of balls into the prize winning device 640.

Returning to FIG. 21, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 22, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 55) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 54). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 53) as power outage processing is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a winning number counter 203e, and an operation. Counter group 203f, game state storage area 203g, time saving counter 203h, jackpot flag 203i, time saving end flag 203j, accessory hit flag 203k, special figure temporary stop flag 203m, special figure fluctuation time counter 203n, V flag 203p, other memory areas It has 203z.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a stores various counter values obtained based on balls entering the special symbol entry hole 64 (starting winning) up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). This is a storage area for

The special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of special symbols are stored, and when the special symbol stops varying, the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a When various counter values are stored in , this is a storage area in which the various counter values are shifted and stored.

The special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) store the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) upon detection of a starting prize. The values of the counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 are respectively stored. During the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), when the MPU 201 detects that a ball has entered the special drawing ball entrance 64 (starting prize winning), the MPU 201 inputs each counter C1 to C2, CS1 from the counter buffer. The values of are acquired and stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, respectively.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the special symbol variation (lottery), in order to execute processing such as the jackpot lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, Among the data corresponding to each starting winnings (values of counters C1 to C2, CS1) stored in the above-mentioned special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to one starting winning is stored in this special symbol holding ball. Shift to execution area. Note that a shift in this embodiment refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b stores the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 22) upon detection of the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 (starting winning). This is a storage area where values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (starting winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 reads the value of the second winning random number counter C4 from the counter buffer. , obtains the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 and stores it in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one holding area so that the data (values of counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one starting winning can be stored (held) for a maximum of one time. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (starting winning) is stored in the order of the holding areas in which the data is consumed earlier among the empty holding areas. .

In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the timing to start executing the fluctuating display performance of the normal symbol based on the starting winning, each counter value is stored and the winning lottery of the normal symbol is performed. It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting the display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the fluctuating display performance of the normal symbols, the MPU 201 suspends the above-mentioned normal symbols in order to execute processes such as winning lottery and setting the display of the second symbol display device 83. Among the data corresponding to each starting prize stored in the ball storage area 203b (the value of the second random number counter C4, the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to the first starting winning is stored in this normal Shift to the symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Note that a shift in this embodiment refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c determines the number of balls entered into the special symbol entry hole 64, which is detected during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. This is a counter that counts the number of held balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display performance performed on the 1st symbol display device 37 (the variable display performance performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81) up to 4 times. The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time a starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the variable display effect is executed.

In addition, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (namely, the number of reserved balls) is set in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the ball entering the special symbol ball entrance 64 (starting winning). When the counter value is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time a starting prize is detected and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is incremented by one.

When each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 stores the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). The data stored in 1) is referred to in the special symbol fluctuation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41), and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. do. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display is performed under the control of the main controller 110 based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Moreover, the fluctuation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a special figure fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command. Under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display performance based on the variable pattern and stop type notified by the variable pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d detects when a ball passes through the through gate 67 (hereinafter referred to as "start winning") detected during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) that is executed periodically every 2 milliseconds. ) This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the second symbol display device 83 up to a maximum of one time. This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time a starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added to the maximum value (see S1204 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol is executed (see S1105 in FIG. 48).

The winning number counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won in the V winning device 65 and the number of balls that have won in the specific winning hole 650a of the variable winning device 650 during the round game in the prize winning game. Specifically, based on the fact that a ball is detected to have passed through a detection port (not shown) provided in the V winning device 65, the number is incremented by one and updated. On the other hand, when one round ends, a detection means capable of detecting the number of winnings in the V winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203e) and the number of balls ejected (the number of balls passing through each winning opening) (the cumulative number of detection results) is determined to match, and is reset to the initial value "0". Note that the value of this prize winning number counter 203e is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The operation counter group 203k is a counter for measuring (updating) the progress status of various set operation scenarios, and is composed of scenario counters corresponding to each of the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario table 202e. When any of the operation scenarios in the various operation scenario tables 202e is set, counter value update processing is executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55). is executed.

In this embodiment, the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e may be executed redundantly. For example, a scenario regarding a game to win a common figure and a scenario to a game to win an accessory are configured to be executable at the same time. Therefore, although scenario counters are provided corresponding to the scenarios stored in the various operation scenario tables 202e, the present invention is not limited to this, and scenario counters for the maximum number of scenarios that can be executed simultaneously may be provided. In this case, when setting a scenario counter type and setting a new operation scenario, determine the unused scenario counter type, set the scenario counter based on the determination result, and set the scenario counter for the set scenario counter. The configuration may be such that usage information indicating which operation scenario is used is set, and the set usage information is set in the storage means of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. Furthermore, it is preferable that the storage means in which the usage information is set has a backup function that can retain the stored information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, similar to the other various configurations of the RAM 203. . With this configuration, even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like during operation control based on the operation scenario, the operation control after the power is restored can be continued from the state before the power outage. becomes possible.

The gaming state storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set gaming state, and is a gaming state corresponding to the gaming state (setting state of the time saving counter 203h) set after the end of the jackpot game. is memorized. Specifically, when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0, the normal state is stored, and when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is larger than 0, the time-saving state is stored.

Furthermore, when a jackpot game or an accessory winning game is being executed, a winning game state (jackpot state, accessory winning game state) indicating that each winning game is being executed, and a winning game state indicating that each winning game is being executed. The system is also configured to store type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game. In addition, it is configured to also store information during a game on a common symbol indicating that a game on a common symbol is being executed.

Then, a status command is set based on the information stored (stored) in the game status storage area 203g, and the status command is output to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 receives the output status command and temporarily stores it in the slave status setting area 223g.

The information stored in this game state storage area 203g is configured so that it can be retained even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the start-up process (see FIG. 54), a status command corresponding to the information stored in the gaming status storage area 203g is set.

Thereby, even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the audio lamp control device 113 can determine the current gaming state.

The time saving counter 203j is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, and a value corresponding to the case where a high probability state of normal symbols is set is set. After the jackpot game ends, the time saving counter 203j is set with a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type (S1914, 1915 in FIG. 56). Then, if the jackpot game is won, it is cleared to 0. As a result, the high probability state of the normal symbols is not set during the jackpot game, so it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the value of the time saving counter 203j is set, and based on the special symbol lottery (variation), the value of the time saving counter 203j is subtracted, and the value of the time saving counter 203j is set. When the value of becomes 0, the time saving state ends and the state returns to the normal state. It may be configured such that the high probability state of the symbol continues. In this case, the configuration may be such that "10000" is set as the value of the time saving counter 203j.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the conditions for ending the time saving state and the conditions for subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203j are only the conditions for subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203j based on the number of special symbol drawings (variations). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration is such that the value of the time saving counter 203j is subtracted when a termination condition that can be satisfied depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is established. You may. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed with the high probability state of the normal symbol is set becomes a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special winning), or when the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery is The configuration may be configured such that the value of the time saving counter 203j is subtracted even when the result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, winning a special general map), or when a ball enters the special electric operating port 643. Alternatively, the value of the time saving counter 203j may be decremented.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the time-saving counter 203j is decremented by 1, but depending on the type of termination condition that has been met, the value of the time-saving counter 203j may be decreased by a plurality of values (for example, 2). The time saving counter 203j may be configured to be subtracted, or may be configured to be subtracted so that the value of the time saving counter 203j becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time saving counter 203j. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time saving state will continue, and it is possible to make the player interested in the game during the time saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the time saving state may be changed depending on the fulfillment of the conditions for setting the time saving state (jackpot type). As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in playing the jackpot game but also in the jackpot type corresponding to the executed jackpot game, thereby increasing the interest of the game. .

The jackpot flag 203i is set to ON when the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is determined to be a jackpot at the start of fluctuation based on the ball entering the special chart entry ball opening 64. This is the flag to be used. Moreover, it is set to OFF when the jackpot game ends.

The time-saving end flag 203h is a flag to indicate that the time-saving end condition is satisfied, and is set to ON when the time-saving end condition is satisfied. This time-saving end flag 203h indicates that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 in the special symbol fluctuation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, that is, the current special symbol fluctuation is in a time-saving state. It is set to ON when it is determined that it is the final fluctuation of (see S311 in FIG. 41). Then, it is referenced in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) (see S802 in FIG. 45), and when it is determined that it is on, the value of the time saving counter 203j is reset to "0" and the time saving state is turned off. The process for terminating is executed (see S803 in FIG. 45), and is set to off (see S804 in FIG. 45).

In addition, when a ball enters the V winning hole 165 and a V jackpot game is executed during the special symbol variation executed with the time saving end flag 203j set to on (during the final variation of the time saving state), is also set to off (see S1508 in FIG. 52).

In other words, in this embodiment, the subtraction process of the time saving counter 203h is executed at the special symbol fluctuation start timing, and the end process for determining the time saving end is executed at the special symbol fluctuation stop timing. There is. Then, when the special symbol variation is interrupted by a game to win an accessory during the fluctuation of the special symbol, and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed using the game to win the accessory as an opportunity, the time saving end flag 203h is turned off. configured to be set.

Therefore, for example, even if a V jackpot game is executed with the time saving end flag 203h set to on and the suspended special symbol variation is restarted after the jackpot game ends, the restarted special symbol variation It is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending at the variable stop timing. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since the time-saving counter 203h is decremented when the special symbol fluctuation starts, the time-saving end flag 203h can be decremented when the special symbol fluctuation is restarted. None. Therefore, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203j from the time when the next special symbol variation after the special symbol variation after restarting is started is executed. .

With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to play the game for a longer time in the set time-saving state, and it is possible to increase the player's desire to play. In addition, in this embodiment, only the final change in the time saving state is updated when the special symbol changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this; ), the process of updating the time saving state may be performed when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped.

The accessory winning flag 203k is a flag for indicating that the accessory winning game is to be executed, and is set to ON when the accessory winning game is being executed. This accessory winning flag 203k is turned on when a winning ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 in the ordinary electric winning device 640 during the ordinary drawing winning game, and at that time, the accessory winning game is not being executed. (See S1307 in FIG. 50). In various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is referred to when determining whether a game with a winning object is in progress, and is set to OFF when the game with a winning object ends. In addition, in this embodiment, when the accessory hit flag 203k is set to ON, the special symbol fluctuation is configured to be interrupted.

The special figure temporary stop flag 203m is a flag indicating the period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special figure is stopped, and when it is set to on, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped and the flag is turned on. When the setting is turned off from the set state, the stopped updating (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is for indicating that the special symbol variation is temporarily stopped (interrupted), and is set to ON when the special symbol variation is temporarily stopped (interrupted). It is something. In addition, in this embodiment, when a ball is placed in the special electric operation opening 643, the game is configured to be able to execute a prize winning game, and when the prize winning game is executed, the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed stops. It is configured so that

The special symbol fluctuation time counter 203n is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol, which corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S307 of S6 in FIG. 43). A value indicating this is set (see SS509 in FIG. 43). The value is updated (subtracted) every time the special symbol variation execution process (see S206 in FIG. 44) is executed. In the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether the value is 0 (see S204 in FIG. 40). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter 203a is 0 (S204 in FIG. 40: No), special symbol fluctuation stop processing is performed to stop the special symbol that is fluctuating (see S287 in FIG. 45). ) is executed.

Furthermore, this special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is configured so that when a game to win an accessory or a game to win a jackpot is executed, the process for subtracting the value is interrupted. Therefore, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n will not be subtracted during the accessory winning game or the jackpot winning game.

The V flag 203p is a flag to indicate that the ball has entered the V winning hole during the game to win the accessory, and is set to ON when the ball has entered the V winning hole during the game to win the accessory. It is something that will be done. The setting status of this V flag 203p is referred to in the accessory hit control process (see S1805 in FIG. 58) (see S2008 in FIG. 58), and if it is set to on, the start of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is is set (see S2010 in FIG. 58). Thereafter, it is set to off (see S2011 in FIG. 58).

In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, etc. are set (stored).

Returning to FIG. 9, the explanation will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 650b of the specific winning opening 650a. A specific winning opening solenoid 209a for opening and closing the opening/closing door 65a of the V winning device 65, a V winning opening solenoid 209b for opening and closing the opening/closing door 65a of the V winning device 65, and a storage valve 66a provided in the V winning device 65. A storage solenoid 209c for driving, a first movable valve solenoid 209d for driving the first movable valve 66b, and a second movable valve solenoid 209e for driving the second movable valve 643 in the general electricity winning device 640. A solenoid 209 consisting of a solenoid (another solenoid 209z) for driving the electric accessories 640a and the like is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 is connected to a switch group and a sensor group (for example, a storage sensor 65s that detects balls stored in a storage section formed in a storage valve 66a in the V winning device 65), etc., which are not shown. The MPU 201 is connected to various switches 208 and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208 and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Perform various processing based on the information.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 53) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed at the time of super reach. It controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227, and also instructs the display control device 114 to change the content of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines errors according to commands from the main controller 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and controls the display of error commands including the type of error. to the device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

As shown in FIG. 30(a), the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an operation scenario table 222b.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each type of variation pattern (too far, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set in counter values for variation pattern selection (not shown). The audio lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the validity determination result, and the acquired selection counter value. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing general information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to suppress the problem of players getting bored of the game early.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, a variable effect is executed in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the special symbol variation to be executed. . In this variation performance, the detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the validity judgment result, and the acquired selection counter value, so the player can: By visually confirming the variation performance executed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to play a game (special symbol game) while predicting whether or not the current special symbol variation is a jackpot win.

On the other hand, when the time saving state is set, the variable performance for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is not executed on the third symbol display device 81, and the special electric game aiming at a V winning game using the regular symbol lottery as an opportunity. The game is configured so that a performance (V rush performance) for guiding the game contents is executed. Therefore, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, various fluctuation patterns are defined as fluctuation patterns to be referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, and fluctuation patterns to be referred to when the gaming state is the time saving state are not defined. do not have. In addition, when displaying the third symbol in a smaller size on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the time saving state in response to the special symbol variation, the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 It is only necessary to define only the variation display mode corresponding to (variation time).

The operation scenario table 222b is a data table for the audio lamp control device 113 side to grasp the status of operation control for various devices being executed on the main control device 110 side, and is a data table that allows the audio lamp control device 113 side to grasp the status of operation control for various devices executed on the main control device 110 side. It is formed from the same data table as the operation scenario table 202e. This operation scenario table 222b is used when setting an operation scenario corresponding to the received command when a command indicating the start of operation control (for example, a command indicating the start of a winning game) is received from the main control device 110 side. Referenced. The operation scenario set here is updated and controlled in synchronization with the update operation on the main controller 110 side.

With this configuration, only the command indicating the start of operation control is output from the main controller 110 side, and the audio lamp control device 113 side can easily grasp the operating status of various devices and future operation developments. becomes possible. Note that in this embodiment, the operation scenario table 222b is provided on the audio lamp control device 113 side for the purpose of reducing the processing load on the main control device 110 side, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the progress status of various operation scenarios included in the various operation scenario table 202e is set as a command and output to the audio lamp control device 113 side.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special symbol fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag. 223e, production counter 223f, slave state setting area 223g, look-ahead counter 223h, time period counter 223i, unreported period storage area 223j, unreported pending number storage area 223k, interruption flag 223m, special hit flag 223n, extension flag 223p, V At least a rush flag 223q, a variable time counter 223r, a notified pending number storage area 223s, and other memory areas 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command judgment process (see FIG. 61) of the voice ramp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command judgment process reads out the first command stored in the command storage area 223a. , the command is analyzed, and processing is performed according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Ru. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223a allows the audio lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of reserved balls and the like before the fluctuation starts.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110, is used in the variable performance (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of variable effects held in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of pending balls of the variable display is added due to the ball entering the special symbol entry hole 64, or when the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a number of reserved balls command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol held ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the held ball number command, and It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and also stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of , a command for the number of held pitches for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved pitches for display, it displays the number of reserved pitches corresponding to the value of the number of reserved pitches indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved pitch counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 (see FIG. 11(b)) of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The special symbol variation start flag 223d is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when a special symbol variation pattern command notifying the variation pattern of the special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. . On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display setting on the third symbol display device 81 is made.

The special symbol stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON when a stop type command notifying the variation stop type of the special symbol outputted from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display setting on the third symbol display device 81 is made.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, etc., and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 98. Note that each time the main process is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated.

In the slave state setting area 223g, data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set. The audio lamp control device 113 can also determine the current gaming state based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223g. The state setting command is also output from the main control device 110 when the power is turned on, so that the backed up gaming state can be determined by the audio lamp control device 113.

The look-ahead counter 223h is a counter for measuring the number of reserved special drawings whose variable time is pre-read out of the number of times of time reduction set as a time-saving state, and is a counter for measuring the number of reserved special symbols whose variable time is pre-read, and is the number of time-savings set when the time-saving state is set. A value corresponding to is set, and is subtracted according to the number of reserved special drawings for which variable time pre-reading has been performed. Then, it is referred to when the value of the short-time counter 223i, which will be described later, becomes 0, and if the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is not 0, the special symbol variation is being executed even though the time is shortened. , processing for displaying a dedicated effect (see FIG. 19(a)) is executed.

The time short period counter 223i is a counter that indicates the time of special symbol fluctuation until the end of the time saving state (special symbol fluctuation time), and is a counter that indicates the time of special symbol fluctuation until the end of the time saving state is completed. The value that accumulates the special figure fluctuation time is set. At this time, the value of the short-term counter 223i is referenced and subtracted in the effect update process (S4111 in FIG. 72) that is executed every millisecond in the main process of the audio lamp control process 113 (see FIG. 60). (See S5303 and S5304 of 72).

The value indicated by the time period counter 223i is used when setting the display mode of the timer 812 to indicate the remaining period of the V rush in the V rush effect executed during the time saving state (see FIG. 12(c)). . In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the game is configured so that the same gaming method (left-handed game) is performed during the normal state, jackpot game, and time saving state, and the settings are set after the jackpot game ends. It is configured such that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c easily reaches the upper limit (4) at the timing when the time saving state starts.

Therefore, on the ending screen of the jackpot game where the number of time reductions is set to 4 (see FIG. 12(a)), the special symbol reservation information obtained at that time (the special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223b) Based on the winning information), the fluctuation time (total value of the fluctuation time for 4 special symbol fluctuations) until the time saving state ends is displayed.

In addition, even if the number of time reductions is greater than the upper limit (4) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c or the number of time reductions is set to 4, the number of special symbols reserved at the end of the jackpot game ( If the number of reserved special symbols has not reached 4, set the value of the time period counter 223i according to the special symbol reservation information acquired at that time, and set the value of the time period counter 223i from the value of the look-ahead counter 223h. The number of special symbols reserved added to the counter 223i is subtracted. When new special symbol reservation information is acquired, the special symbol fluctuation time is added to the time period counter 223i based on the acquired special symbol reservation information, and the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted.

In the unannounced period storage area 223j, in a state where a variable time can be added to the time period counter 223i, that is, when the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or more, even if a winning command is received, the winning command is In a case where the value of the special symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the included special symbol retention information cannot be added to the time period counter 223i (for example, during a jackpot game, during a game with an accessory win), the special symbol retention information included in the received winning command This is an area that temporarily stores the special figure fluctuation time according to.

The value (special figure fluctuation time) stored in this unannounced period storage area 223j is read when the time period can be added, and is referenced when adding to the time period counter 223i. With this configuration, regardless of whether the time period can be added or not, when a winning command is received, it is only necessary to execute the process of reading out the special figure fluctuation time included in the winning command. The processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The unannounced pending number storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the number of winning commands whose special symbol fluctuation time is stored in the above-mentioned unannounced period storage area 223j, that is, the number of special symbol reserved balls. The readout counter 223h is read out when a short period of time can be added, and the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted in accordance with the readout value.

The interruption flag 223m is a flag for indicating that the value of the time and short period counter 223h is not subtracted, and is a state in which the value of the time and short period counter 223h is not subtracted, that is, a game to win an accessory or a jackpot game is not executed. This is set to on when the

The special winning flag 223n is a flag that is set to ON when winning information indicating a special winning ("Jackpot B") is included in the special symbol stored in reserve. This special win flag 223n is set to ON when it is determined in the jackpot end process (see S4914 in FIG. 69) that winning information indicating a special win is included in the reserved memory (see S5013 in FIG. 69). ).

In this embodiment, if there is a special win in the special symbol reservation acquired at the end of the jackpot game, only the period until the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special win ends is the time reduction during V rush. It is configured so that it is displayed as a period, and is further configured so that an effect (heaven mode) is executed to notify the player that there is a special win in the reserved special drawings (Fig. 17(a)).

By configuring this way, the player can receive a jackpot game (a jackpot won in a special drawing lottery) after a predetermined period of time (after a short period of time when it is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). Since it is possible to inform the player in advance that the game (game) will be executed, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the heaven mode is set, the period until the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special hit ends is notified as a short period of time, so the jackpot The remaining period of the time period at the time of the game (special win) can be set to 0 seconds. Therefore, since it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how many seconds later the jackpot game will be executed, the V jackpot will be played during a short period of time in heaven mode (during the period until the special jackpot game is executed). The game can be played while having fun seeing how many times the game can be played.

Furthermore, when the heaven mode is set, the period until the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special hit ends is notified as a short time period, so the special symbol corresponding to the special win It is possible to prevent a player from determining in advance the special symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the special symbol reservation acquired after the symbol reservation. As a result, for example, if a jackpot game corresponding to a special win is executed with 10 seconds remaining in the time period, the player can know in advance that the variation time of the next special symbol variation will be 10 seconds. This can prevent players from becoming aware of this and reducing their desire to play.

The extension flag 223p is a flag for indicating that a game per normal figure is executed at the timing when the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, and the game per normal figure is executed at the timing when the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. is set to on if the In this embodiment, as the operation scenario of the game per ordinary figure, the normal scenario 202e31 corresponding to the game per ordinary figure in the normal state, and the per normal figure for time saving corresponding to the game per ordinary figure in the time saving state. It has a scenario 202e32, and is configured to variably set the game content of the game for a common symbol based on the gaming state set at the execution timing of the game for a common symbol.

Therefore, for example, if a game with a common symbol is executed just before the end of the time saving state, the game with a common symbol during the time saving state may be executed even after the gaming state shifts to the normal state. When such a state occurs, the system is configured to execute a performance in which the end timing of the V rush performance indicating the game mode in the time saving state is extended to the end timing of the normal pattern winning game (Fig. 16 (see (c)). Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the period (V rush period) in which the player should aim to win the V prize in an easy-to-understand manner.

The V rush flag 223q is a flag to indicate that it is the V rush period, and is set to ON when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) during the normal state, and is set as an end condition for the time saving state. It is set to off when the following is true. This V rush flag 223q is configured to continue to be set on even when a jackpot game is executed during a time period (during V rush). Thereby, it is possible to easily set the period for which various cumulative information (information indicating the number of V jackpot games acquired and the number of balls acquired during the V rush period) is calculated during the V rush period.

The variation time counter 223r is a counter for measuring the variation time of the special symbol, and when a variation pattern command of the special symbol is received, the variation time corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set, and the voice lamp control is performed. In the effect update process (S4111 in FIG. 72) executed every millisecond in the main process of process 113 (see FIG. 60), it is referenced and subtracted (see S5303 and S5304 in FIG. 72). The value of this fluctuation time counter 223h is referred to when determining the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation in progress at a timing when the special symbol fluctuation may be interrupted, and is used to set different presentation modes depending on the remaining period. It will be done.

The notified reservation number storage area 223s is an area for storing the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variable time that has already been added to the value of the time period counter 223i, and the value of the unannounced reservation number storage area 223k is updated. When the special symbol variation is completed, the updated value is stored and the value is subtracted when the special symbol variation is completed. Then, at the end of the jackpot game in which a new time-saving number is set, a new time-saving state is set by subtracting the value stored in the notified pending number storage area 223s from the value set in the look-ahead counter 223h. In this case, in order to make the number of special symbol reserved balls that can be displayed correspond to the value of the look-ahead counter 223h by subtracting the number of special symbol reserved balls that have already been announced as the remaining period of the time saving state and adding the new time period. used for.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect that suggests to the player the variable time corresponding to the special figure reservation acquired during the normal state is configured not to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the performance mode to be varied depending on the content of the special figure reservation.

For example, the stop type of the special symbol (combination of the third symbol indicating a jackpot) may be set variably based on the variable time corresponding to the acquired special symbol reservation, and the total variation time of the special symbol reservation If a jackpot is won in a state where the winning time exceeds 100 seconds, a third symbol combination may be displayed in which odd numbers are stopped and displayed in rows.

In addition, the display mode of the reserved symbols displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the normal state is configured to be variably set based on the length of the fluctuation time in addition to the presence or absence of a jackpot win in the special lottery. You may do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, when entering the V rush, it is configured to notify all the variable times based on the reserved special symbols that have been acquired, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, The configuration may be such that only a part of the variable time based on the hold is notified to the player, or the player can change the duration of the V rush (the period until the end of the time saving state) by operating the operating means. It may also be possible to select a game feature in which the variation time of the special symbol for indicating the change is not announced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable time corresponding to multiple special symbol changes executed until the time-saving end condition is satisfied is configured to be aggregated and notified, but the notification is not limited to this, and the notification may be made individually. It may be configured such that the fluctuating time corresponding to the special figure hold can be identified by the connoisseur. In this case, for example, the display mode of the special figure reservation corresponding to the special figure fluctuation that is executed until the time-saving end condition is met is displayed in a display mode that imitates a character, and the display mode is It may be configured so that the player can roughly grasp the length of the variation time of the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special symbol reservation.

In this embodiment, the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is always set after a jackpot game is executed, so the V rush flag is set when a jackpot game is executed. However, for example, if the configuration is such that the time saving state and the normal state are set at a specific ratio after the end of a jackpot game, it is possible that the jackpot game is executed. Even so, there is a possibility that the time saving state will not be set after the end of the jackpot game. In this case, after the jackpot game ends (during the ending period of the jackpot game), it is determined whether or not the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends based on the set jackpot type, and the time saving state is set. If it is determined that this is the case, it can be changed after the special map is reserved at that time.

Next, the content of the game executed in response to the normal symbol lottery in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. 31 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when a game with a common symbol is executed in the normal state, and FIG. 32 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when a game with a common symbol is executed in the time saving state. It is a timing chart showing the flow.

Here, with reference to FIG. 31, a description will be given of the flow of the game when the normal game is executed in the normal state. In this embodiment, when you win a lottery with a regular symbol, you can play a game (special electric game) that can proceed in the order of a regular symbol prize game, a role item prize game, and a jackpot game (V jackpot game). It consists of In other words, the configuration is such that a jackpot game can be executed without drawing special symbols.

First, in the normal state, if a winning result is won in the normal symbol lottery, a common symbol winning game is executed based on the normal common symbol winning scenario 202e31 (see FIG. 27(c)), and the common symbol winning device 640 controls the opening. be done. In the normal pattern winning game executed during the normal state, as shown in FIG. 27(c), it takes 4 seconds (t1) from the start of the normal pattern winning game until the electric accessory 640a becomes in the open state. Then, after passing through an open state for 0.1 seconds (t2) and a closed state for 1 second (t3), the game for each normal figure ends. Then, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON so that the second movable valve 643 is in a state where the ball can enter the special electric actuation port 643 and win a prize for 4 seconds (t4) from the start timing of the game per common figure. Then, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to OFF so that the ball is guided to the outlet 644.

Therefore, in the normal game that is executed during the normal state, it is difficult for the ball to enter the general winning device 640, and even if the ball wins, the winning ball is guided to the out port 644. It turns out. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent a ball from entering the special electric actuating port 643 during the normal state and executing a game to win an accessory. By configuring in this way, a normal state in which a special figure game is executed aiming at executing a jackpot game by drawing a special symbol, and a time saving state in which a special electric game aiming at executing a jackpot game by drawing a normal symbol is executed. Even if the system is configured so that the same gaming method is executed in the middle and the middle, it is possible to suppress the execution of jackpot games by special electric games during the normal state, and prevent the players from being provided with excessive jackpot games. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the time saving state is configured to end when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (4 or 15 times) during the time saving state, the special symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state. It is necessary to prevent the situation from not being carried out. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the same game method is executed in the normal state, jackpot game state, and time saving state, it is possible to play a game in which only the normal symbol lottery is executed during the time saving state. What happens can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation contents of the regular game per game are set so as to prohibit the special electric game from being executed during the normal state, but the operation contents are not limited to this, and for example, the special electric game may be prohibited from being executed during the normal state. It may be configured such that the same operation scenario as the normal pattern winning game executed during the time saving state is selected in a part of the normal pattern winning game. This allows the player to play a surprising game.

Returning to FIG. 31, the explanation will be continued. As mentioned above, when a normal game is executed during the normal state, the winning ball in the normal winning device 640 will not enter the special electric operating port 643, so the ball will not enter the special electric operating port 643. The accessory winning game that is triggered by winning a prize is not executed, and the accessory winning game in which the V winning device 65 is opened and the jackpot game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened is not executed. , A new normal pattern variation (normal pattern variation) is executed based on the completion of the normal pattern winning game. Note that the first movable valve 66b (FIG. 31(h)) is set to an operation scenario in which it is constantly driven while the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, regardless of whether or not a prize winning game is executed. , is driven in an operation pattern based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 (see FIG. 27(a)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, in the time-saving state, among the game flows when a normal winning game is executed, the game flow when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed will be explained. .

First, in the time-saving state, if a winning is won in the normal symbol lottery, a regular symbol winning game based on the time-saving common symbol winning scenario 202e32 (see FIG. 28) is executed, and the regular symbol winning device 640 is controlled to open. As shown in FIG. 28, in the normal figure winning game executed during the time saving state, it takes 0.1 seconds (t1) from the start of the ordinary figure winning game until the electric accessory 640a becomes in the open state. Thereafter, after passing through an open state for 3 seconds (t2) and a closed state for 1 second (t3), the game for each normal figure ends. Then, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON so that the second movable valve 643 is in a state where the ball can enter the special electric actuation port 643 and win a prize for 4 seconds (t4) from the start timing of the game per common figure. Then, the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to OFF so that the ball is guided to the outlet 644.

Therefore, in a game with a regular symbol that is executed during the time saving state, it is easier for the ball to enter the prize winning device 640 (easier to win than in a game with a regular symbol in the normal state), and the winning ball is activated by the special electric wire. It is configured so that it is easier to win a prize in the opening 643 (easier to win a prize than in the regular game in the normal state). As a result, it is possible to make it easier to enter a ball into the special electric actuation port 643 in a normal figure winning game executed during the time saving state, thereby making it easier to execute an accessory winning game.

When a ball enters the special electric actuating port 643, the passage (winning) of the ball is detected by the special electric actuating port winning switch (FIG. 32(e)), not shown, and the detection result triggers the opening operation of the V winning device 65. A hit game is executed. When the game to win the accessory is started, after a waiting period of 0.1 seconds (t5) has elapsed, the V prize opening solenoid 209b is set to be on for 1.5 seconds (t6) in order to open the V opening/closing door 65a. After that, a prize winning game is executed in which the V prize opening solenoid 209b is set to OFF for 1.4 seconds (t7). In addition, with the start of the accessory winning game, the storage solenoid 209c is turned on for 1.6 seconds (t8) in order to position the storage valve 66a in the storage state. In other words, during the period when the ball can be entered into the V winning device 65 in the game to win the accessory, the storage valve 66a is maintained in the storage state (see FIG. 7), so during one game to win the accessory, It is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from reaching the V winning hole 165.

Then, when the storage solenoid 209c is turned off after the period t8 has elapsed, one ball stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a flows down toward the first movable valve 66b. The first movable valve 66b is driven based on the first movable valve operation scenario 202e4 to alternately switch between a closed state for 5 seconds (t10) and an open state for 0.5 seconds (t9). When the ball stored in the valve 66a reaches the first movable valve 66a, if the first movable valve 66b is in the closed state, the ball flows down toward the second outlet 163b, and the first movable valve 66b If it is in the open state, the ball flows down toward the V winning hole 165. When a ball enters the V winning hole 165, passage of the ball is detected by a V winning switch (FIG. 32(i)), not shown, and a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is started based on the detection result.

As explained above, in the present embodiment, when a game with a common symbol is executed during the time saving state, it is easier to make the general prize winning device 640 win a ball (than with a game with a common symbol in the normal state). When the winning ball is easy to win a prize) and the winning ball easily enters the special electric operating port 643 to win a prize, and when the ordinary symbol winning game is executed during the normal state, the ordinary electric winning device 640 is activated. It is difficult to win a ball (it is harder to win a prize than in a regular game in a time-saving state), and even if the ball wins in the regular power winning device 640, the winning ball enters the special power operating port 643. It is configured to execute a game with a common symbol that is difficult to win.

With this configuration, in order to continuously execute special symbol variations during the time saving state, there is a game method in which the special entry hole 64 is the trigger for the lottery of special symbols, and a through-ball that is the trigger for the lottery for normal symbols. Even if the game method of aiming at the gate 67 is the same, the probability of executing the game to win the accessory can be greatly varied depending on the game state. In addition, in a normal state winning game, an act of illegally placing a ball into the general prize winning device 640 (for example, a ball is fixed with a magnet near the electric accessory 640a, and the ball is placed in line with the release timing). Even if the act of winning a prize) is executed, the winning ball can be prevented from entering the special electric operation opening 643, so that a fair game can be provided to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, not only the game for establishing a special symbol lottery opportunity or a normal symbol lottery opportunity, but also a game with a regular symbol, a game with a role item, and a jackpot game can be executed with left-handed games. Therefore, the player can smoothly play the game without having to feel the trouble of having to change the game method.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and displays a variable display (fluctuation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. This controls the performance (performance) and preview performance. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 53).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, it is possible to read the data from the second page onward at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. A process of transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank, and a process of transferring data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying the address to outputting the data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) that is executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 38), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws a frame in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process for the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) on the third symbol display device 81. Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Generally, while NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 110 or display controller 114 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 sends the data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw an image; It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted. Therefore, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeated until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. I can do it. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and it is possible to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, the power-on variation image area 235b detects that the player starts playing the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball enters the special symbol entrance ball opening 64. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 in a variation effect when the lottery is performed in the main control device 110.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 shows the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image area 235a as shown in FIG. 34(a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 executes the command as shown in FIG. 34(b). As shown in FIG. 34(c), on the display screen of the power-on main image, there is a power-on fluctuation image with a "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and as shown in FIG. 34(c), a "○" A power-on variation image of an "x" symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the symbol during the variation period. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery held in the main control device 110 is determined. The result is judged, and if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in Figure 34(b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the image shown in Figure 34(c) is displayed. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some kind of processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can be done.

Furthermore, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, if the player starts playing the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball entering the special pattern ball opening 64 is detected, the power-on variation image The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 34(b) and 34(c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display the image. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball entering the special figure ball opening 64 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variable performance is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 33, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 35(b) shows back surfaces B to D corresponding to "forest stage," "river stage," and "sky stage," respectively, with respect to back surface A corresponding to "city stage." . Further, FIG. 28 shows the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 35, the back images corresponding to the back faces A to D are all images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each of the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at position a and position c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area. is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a connected manner.

When it is decided to change the back type based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 , First, a position between position a and position a' of the corresponding back image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at that initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Then, as time passes, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scrolling image, and the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches an image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, images between positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, the back images on the back surface E are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→... with the passage of time. Specifically, the back E is a third pattern in which an image of the mountain towering over the island, an image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in fixed positions. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of an image of the sky above a mountain changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", an orange sky representing a morning glow is displayed as the initial back image of the back surface E. Then, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined period of time, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined period of time, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then to orange. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a repeating back image that returns to the back image showing morning glow is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be explained. As shown in FIG. 35(a), the back surface A corresponding to the town stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to positions a to d are stored in the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage with the initial stage "Town Stage" displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the "Town Stage" that is frequently displayed is By making all the data reside permanently in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load placed on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are partial areas of the back surface, as shown in FIG. 35(b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Further, image data corresponding to the back surface E corresponding to the island stage is stored in the back surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process after the power is turned on, and becomes resident therein.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to have the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235; Therefore, it is necessary to use a RAM with a very large capacity, which may lead to an increase in cost.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from position a to position a', and from position a including that initial position to position Since the configuration is such that the image data corresponding to the images between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the fluctuation will not start. When a stage change is determined by the lottery at the time, by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial positions of the rear surfaces B to D are immediately displayed as the third symbol. The information can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed in a scrolling manner or while changing the color tone as time passes. Furthermore, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, for rear surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from position a to position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back surface E, while the image is displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data of the remaining image is The range of image data is set so that the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 can be completed. This allows the image data corresponding to the remaining images to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so the image is displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. After that, the remaining images can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Note that on the back faces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to back images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 33) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the back image data stored in the subarea dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so the back image can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. Duplicate image data is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from position b' on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image can be scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, then, The MPU 231 uses the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display images between positions a to c that are scrolled repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 33, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" as the third symbol is resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the special ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable production, the third symbol display device It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the variable performance is not started immediately in step 81.

In addition, the third symbol area 235d includes main symbols that are not numbered from "0" to "9" and include a main symbol consisting of a backward symbol such as a wooden box, a backward symbol and a character such as a plane, a wrapping cloth, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of an auxiliary pattern imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with a winning start does not start even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable effect stopped. It will be done. As a result, when the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration performance. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols to which numbers are not attached from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses the resident image data. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character pattern area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back side of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in advance in the error message image area 235f, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read out in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for rendering processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, opening presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , round performance, ending performance, and demo performance are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss is finally displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

The opening performance is a performance to inform the player that the pachinko machine 10 will now move to a special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened.The round performance will start from now on. This is an effect to notify the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending performance is a performance for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has passed since the first variable performance stopped. This is an effect in which the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to an opening performance, a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. Note that if the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than its standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than its standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image displayed on the back side of the sprite will be. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2,...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite is defined for each address, such as effects for expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, etc. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. This back type is the back side A to E that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (one of the "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display any one of the images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Furthermore, when specifying that a back image different from back images A to E is to be displayed, the back surface type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed based on the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as the drawing target, Furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information by the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current fluctuating performance, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is being displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the first address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the last address of the display data table (in the example of FIG. 37) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the drawing content is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the processing of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance, and as mentioned above, the transfer data table is the one that is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the normal video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 37). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 37 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 37, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 37, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display can be easily performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 34(a) to 34(c) on the third symbol display device 81. This is a flag to indicate. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 33), which will be described later, is generated that describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and draws the image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 38), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instruction contents are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 38), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 75(b ), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 38), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and acquires the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display can be easily performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Pattern 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite such as a pattern) is described for that sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and an obtained image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 adjusts the image data according to the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

The MPU 231 also specifies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and the character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (Character 1, Character 2, . . . , Pending pitch number symbol 1, Pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , Error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, V interrupt processing (FIG. 75(b) ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j indicates a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the designated drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and sends the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 75(b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When this back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and when it is off, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referenced in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). Thereby, it is possible to display a back image corresponding to the back image change command or production mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each bit is associated with each back surface type. If any bit of this back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the turned on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface A is set. In this rear image discrimination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 81(a) ), see S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to OFF. This back image discrimination flag 233x allows the currently set back type to be easily specified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration performance is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that a demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that a demonstration is not being performed. This demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demonstration display data table When a display data table other than the above is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to off (S6505 in FIG. 77(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b) , see S6905 in FIG. 79). This demo display flag 233y makes it easy to determine whether or not a demonstration is currently being performed.

The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the final display performance refers to a performance in which the stopped symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern (determined display). If this final display flag 233z is on, it means that a final display performance is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a final display performance is not in progress. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and when the fixed display data table is It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 86(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b), 79, S6905). With this confirmed display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not a confirmed display performance is currently being performed.

<About the control process executed by the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 39 to 58. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the second winning random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (399, 99, 99, respectively in this embodiment). 999), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed, which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104). Thereafter, a starting winning process is executed when a ball enters the special drawing ball entrance 64 (starting winning) or a ball enters the general winning machine 640 (starting winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 40 to 47.

After executing the starting winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through gate as the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is executed. Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. After executing the through gate passage process, a special train starting gate winning process is executed (S108), and then a V entrance passage process (S109) and a V passage process (S110) are executed. The details of the special electric starting entrance winning process, the V entrance passing process, and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. After executing the V passing process, a firing control process is then executed (S111), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether or not to fire. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S104) performs various judgments (appropriateness judgment) and decisions on the special symbol based on each acquired counter value, and displays the special symbol in the determined variation display mode by predetermined control. You can control the first symbol display device 37 to enable variable display, set various commands to make the third symbol display device 81 execute a variable display performance of the third and fourth symbols, Control is executed to stop and display the image in a display mode showing the judgment result). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S104) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S104), first, it is determined whether the game is in the middle of a jackpot game (during a jackpot) or in a game to win an accessory (during a hit) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, it is determined whether the current game is a jackpot game (during a jackpot) or a game to win an accessory (during a prize win).

In the process of S201, if it is determined that the jackpot or accessory is hit (S201: Yes), then it is determined whether the special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is set to on (S202), and the flag is turned on. If it is determined that it is set to (S202: Yes), the display on the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special symbol is updated (S203), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S202, if it is determined that the special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is not set to ON (S202: No), this process is directly ended.

Here, the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON when the accessory winning game is executed. In this embodiment, the variable time set in the variable display (special pattern variable display) for showing the lottery results of special symbols is not updated (subtracted) while the accessory winning game is being executed. During this period, the first symbol display device 83 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode to indicate that the variable display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the fluctuating display of the special symbols that was being executed with the start of the accessory winning game has been temporarily stopped, so that the It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful if the special symbol variation disappears. In addition, as a display mode to show that the fluctuating display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display format to show that the fluctuating display is in progress (for example, lighting at 0.2 second intervals, The display mode may be the same as the blinking display mode in which the light is repeatedly turned off), or the display mode may be the same as the display mode in which the blinking interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that the variable display is in progress (for example, the display mode is a display mode in which the light is repeatedly turned on and off at 0.5 second intervals). A blinking display mode) may also be used. Furthermore, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 83 is configured to be able to display a display mode of multiple colors, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only when temporarily stopped is used. Also good.

On the other hand, in the process of S201, if it is determined that the current situation is not a jackpot or a hit with an accessory (S201: No), the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter 203n is greater than 0, that is, the special symbol It is determined whether or not is being displayed in a variable manner (S204). If it is determined that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n is greater than 0) (S204: Yes), special symbol variation execution processing is executed (S206).

In this special symbol variation execution process (S206), a process for varying (updating) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 during the period in which the special symbol is varying is executed. be done. This special symbol variation execution process (S206) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 44.

When the process of S206 is finished, next, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n updated in the special symbol variation execution process (S206) is 0 (S207), and the process of S207 is performed. If it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation time counter 203n is 0 (S207: Yes), special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed (S208), and then this processing is ended.

In the special symbol variation stop process (S208), when the variation time specified for the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner has elapsed, a process to stop the variable display at a symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is executed. Details of this special symbol variation stop processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45. Further, if it is determined in the process of S207 that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is not 0 (S207: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S204 that the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S204: No), that is, if it is determined that the special figure is not currently changing, Next, special symbol variation start processing is executed (S205). In this special symbol variation start process (S205), processing for executing a new lottery (variation) of special symbols is performed, and it is determined whether the new lottery (variation) is executable. , if the state is such that a new lottery (variation) can be executed, a process for performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. This special symbol variation start process (S205) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. After executing the special symbol variation start process (S205), this process ends.

As described above with reference to FIG. 40, in this embodiment, in a configuration in which special symbol lottery (variation) can be executed, variation processing regarding special symbols (S204 to S208) is performed within one special symbol variation process. is configured to run. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (variation) for a special symbol, the variation process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the special symbol variation start process (S205), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S104), will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation start process (S205).

In the special symbol fluctuation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is acquired (S301), and the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0. It is determined whether it is larger (S302). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S302: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S303).

Then, a held ball number command indicating the number of held balls after subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in holding areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are sequentially transferred to the execution area side. Shifting processing is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reservation area 1 → execution area, reservation area 2 → reservation area 1, reservation area 3 → reservation area 2, reservation area 4 → reservation area 3.

Next, a special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The details of this special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG. , executes a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

Next, a special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S307) will be described in detail later, but the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the result of the validity judgment based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting based on each counter value.

After executing the process of S307, it is then determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S308). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (S308: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S308: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S309). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 1 (S309: No), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S310), and then this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S309: Yes), the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S311), and then this process is ended.

In other words, in this embodiment, during the time saving state, the process for updating the time saving number is executed at the start timing of the special symbol variation, and if the current special symbol variation is the final variation in the time saving state, the time number is updated. The configuration is such that processing for setting the time saving end flag 203j on is executed without updating the time saving end flag 203j. Although the details will be described later, the setting status of this time saving end flag 203j is referred to when the special symbol fluctuation stops, and if the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON when the special symbol fluctuation stops, the setting status of the time saving end flag 203j is The configuration is such that the value is set to 0 and the time saving state is ended. Then, when the accessory winning game is executed by the special electric game while the special symbols are changing and the V jackpot game is started, a process of setting the time saving end flag 203j to OFF is executed.

With this configuration, for example, if the special symbol variation is interrupted based on the V jackpot game being executed during the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state, the interruption will be performed after the jackpot game ends. The special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation that was being restarted is restarted, but if the special symbol fluctuation after the restart is stopped and displayed, since the time saving end flag 203j is set to OFF, The time saving state never ends. Furthermore, when the special symbol variation is restarted, the special symbol variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed, so the value of the time saving counter 203h is not decremented.

As a result, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during the time saving state, the special symbol change during the interruption is changed to the number of time saving times (4 times) corresponding to the jackpot type (jackpot C) corresponding to the jackpot game. The period obtained by adding the remaining period is set as the short period when the time saving state is set. Therefore, the special symbol game is executed during the normal state, and the ball enters the V winning hole 165 during the time saving state, and the ball enters the V winning hole 165, rather than the duration of the time saving state that is set when a special symbol lottery is won. To make it easier to lengthen the duration of a time-saving state that is advantageous to a player when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed by winning a prize, since the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is added. I can do it.

In other words, when the time-saving state is set again based on the game during the time-saving state, the duration of the set time-saving state is longer than when the time-saving state is set based on the game during the normal state. Since the game can be made easier, the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting a more advantageous game state to be set.

Furthermore, if a configuration is used in which a process for updating the number of time saving times and a process for ending the time saving state are executed at the start timing of the special symbol variation, when the special symbol variation is restarted, the special symbol variation Since the start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) is not executed, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not decremented, but since the gaming state during the variation period of the last special symbol variation in the time saving state becomes the normal state, There was a problem in that it was not possible to provide the maximum amount of games to players during the time saving state.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the process for updating the number of time saving times and the process for terminating the time saving state are configured to be executable at different timings. Specifically, it is configured to execute a process to update the time saving number at the special symbol fluctuation start timing, and to execute a process to end the time saving state at the special symbol fluctuation stop timing. . With this configuration, the time saving number is not updated when the special symbol fluctuation is restarted, and the time saving state can be set as the gaming state during the fluctuation period of the last special symbol fluctuation in the time saving state. , it is possible to provide players with the maximum amount of games possible in a time-saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the process for ending the time saving state is executed at the special symbol fluctuation stop timing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the next special symbol fluctuation start condition is established and until the next special symbol variation lottery is executed, for example, the process of S305 is executed in the special symbol variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41), and the process of S306 is executed. The configuration may also be such that processing for ending the time saving state is executed at a timing before the time saving state is completed.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, the management of the number of remaining time reductions during the time reduction state is configured to be executed on the audio lamp control device 113 side. In other words, based on the reception of the information indicating the gaming state included in the status command set at the end of the jackpot game (information indicating that the time saving state is set, information indicating the number of time saving times), the time saving set this time is By storing the state information and updating the remaining time reduction number based on receiving the special symbol variation pattern command indicating that special symbol variation has started, the audio lamp control device 113 side can play the game in the time reduction state. Configured to manage the situation.

With this configuration, in the control processing of the main controller 110, a command for indicating the remaining number of time reductions and a command for indicating the final change in the time reduction state (that the time reduction end flag 203j has been set to on) can be executed. Even without setting, the audio lamp control device 113 can manage the game situation in the time saving state and set the performance mode corresponding to the current game situation. Therefore, the control processing in main controller 110 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is one process of the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S401). Then, based on the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)), it is determined whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S401 matches the jackpot determination value, and the lottery The result (determination result) is acquired (S402).

When the process of S402 is finished, it is next determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot (S403), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S403: Yes), a jackpot is displayed as a jackpot winning of the special symbol. The flag 203i is set on (S404). In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the presence or absence of a jackpot win.

Then, the lottery result of the special symbol is set as a jackpot (S405), and the jackpot symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired winning type counter C2 (S406). Finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S403 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S403: No), a special symbol that is a missed symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S407), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 43), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 42), it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, the jackpot of the special symbol is set. It is determined whether or not it is set (S501). Here, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is on for the special symbol. This jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S404 in the above-mentioned special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 42).

In the process of S501, if it is determined that a special symbol jackpot is set (S501: Yes), the jackpot type selection table 202c (see FIG. 24) and the acquired first win type counter C2 are The jackpot type is determined based on the value (S502). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S503), and the current gaming state (normal state, latent state, probability variation) corresponding to the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g is obtained. The variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to the state) is read out (S504).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read out in the process of S504 (S505), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505. Then, a special figure fluctuation pattern command is set (S506). The special symbol variation pattern command set here includes the lottery result of the special symbol lottery and information indicating the variation time of the special symbol, and the external output processing ( (See S1801 in FIG. 55) is output to the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, a special symbol stop type command is set to indicate the stop symbol of the special symbol (S507), a special symbol fluctuation start is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and a fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is indicated. The value is set to the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 203n (S509), and this processing is ended. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S507 includes information indicating the type of the stop symbol that indicates the result of the current special symbol variation, that is, the rough type such as out of reach or out of reach. It is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is a loss (that is, the jackpot flag 203i for the special symbol is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped and S503 Shift to processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the special symbol variation execution process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 40), will be explained. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation execution process (S206). In this special symbol variation execution process (S206), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed is executed.

In the special symbol variation execution process (S206), first, it is determined whether the special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S701).

In the process of S701, if it is determined that the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is set to on (S701: Yes), a special figure fluctuation restart command is set (S702), and the special figure temporary stop flag 203m is turned off. setting (S703), subtracts 1 from the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter 203n (S704), updates the display of the special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S705), and ends this process.

In this embodiment, within the special symbol variation processing (see S104 in FIG. 40) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39) that is executed every 2 milliseconds, the special symbol variation execution processing (see FIG. 44) (see S206 in FIG. 44), and the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n is updated (subtracted by 1) within the special symbol variation execution process (see S205 in FIG. 44). There is. Therefore, for example, when a variation time of 30 seconds is set as the variation time of the special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n, and the value is subtracted by 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured as follows.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S701 that the special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is not set to ON (S701: No), the process of S702 and S703 is skipped and the process proceeds to S704.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the special symbol variation stop process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 40), will be explained. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation stop processing (S208). This special symbol variation stop processing (S208) is executed when it is determined that the current value of the special symbol variation time counter 203n is "0", that is, when the variation time of the special symbol (special symbol) has elapsed. This is a process that

When the special symbol variation stop processing (S208 in FIG. 45) is executed, it is first determined whether the jackpot flag 203i is set on (S801). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to on (S801: Yes), next, a jackpot scenario won by this special symbol change is set (S806), and the jackpot flag 202i and time saving counter 203h are set. The value is reset (S807), information indicating that the current gaming state is a jackpot (jackpot game in progress) is stored in the gaming state storage area 203g (S808), and the process moves to S809. The game state storage area 203g is configured to be able to store the game state related to the lottery game (normal state, time saving state) and the game state related to the winning game, and by executing the process of S808, the jackpot winning The game state (normal state, time saving state) related to the lottery game at the timing when the game is performed, and the game state indicating that the jackpot is in progress are stored.

With this configuration, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine the gaming state that was set at the timing when the jackpot was won.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to off, that is, if the result of this special symbol lottery is a loss (S801: No), then the time saving end flag 203j is set to on (S802). If it is determined that the time-saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S802: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation that has been stopped this time is the final fluctuation of the time-saving state, the time-saving counter 203h resets the value to 0 (S803), sets the time saving end flag 203j to OFF (S804), stores information indicating that the current gaming state is the normal state in the gaming state storage area 203g (S805), The process moves to S809. In the process of S802, if it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is set to OFF (S802: No), the processes of S803 to S805 are skipped and the process moves to the process of S809.

In the process of S809, a special symbol confirmation command is set to instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the special symbol (S809), and the special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. A process is executed to stop the variable display of (S810), and this process ends.

As described above, in the special symbol variation stop processing (S208), processing (S809, S810) is executed to stop the variation display at the symbol indicating the special symbol lottery (lottery game) result.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a ball enters the special electric actuating port 643 and a game with a winning object is executed, the special symbol fluctuation being executed is interrupted, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the result of a predetermined determination performed when a ball enters the special electric operating port 643, the special symbol variation in progress may be discarded instead of being interrupted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it appear that the special symbol fluctuation indicating the duration of the time-saving state is interrupted or discarded, so the duration of the time-saving state can be suddenly subtracted ( This makes it possible to execute a performance that gives players a sense of tension.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the starting prize winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). In the starting prize winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), it is determined whether a ball has entered the special drawing ball opening 64 (starting winning), and if the starting winning has been made, the maximum number of pending prizes (into the special drawing ball opening 64) is determined. This is a process of storing each acquired counter value (up to 4) in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved balls is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in each of the special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203a, Processing (so-called pre-reading processing) of predicting the validity determination result, the selected variation pattern, etc. is executed in advance. The starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the special drawing ball entry hole 64 which is the starting hole (starting winning) (S901). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special drawing ball entrance 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has entered the special symbol entry ball opening 64 (there is a starting prize) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is obtained (S902), It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903).

In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for the special map entry hole 64 is currently less than the upper limit of 4 (that is, whether the number of reserved balls has not been stored up to the upper limit). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c (904), and a message is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. A command for the number of reserved balls for notifying the number of reserved balls in the starting opening (number of reserved lottery rights for special symbols) is set (S905).

Then, each value of the various counter values (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, fluctuation type counter CS1) is read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 corresponds to the value. Each ball is held (stored) in a storage area corresponding to the number of held balls to be held (S906).

Next, a prefetch process is executed (S907), and then this process ends. This pre-reading process (S907) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47, but from each counter value newly stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the result of judgment, the fluctuation pattern determined, the stop type, etc. Processing to determine the is executed. In addition, although this embodiment is configured to execute processing for determining the validity judgment result, determined fluctuation pattern, stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, this is not limited to this. For example, when there is a new starting prize, the results of judgment on all the pending memories stored (stored) in the special symbol pending ball storage area 203a, the determined fluctuation pattern, and the stop type are displayed. The configuration may also be configured to execute processing for determining etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, that is, when the special symbol lottery right (winning information) is newly acquired, the special symbol lottery right (winning information ), but the present invention is not limited to this; for example, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, or according to the lottery result of a normal symbol, the lottery right (winning information) for a special symbol is determined. The content may be determined in advance.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S901 that the ball has not entered the special pattern ball entrance 64 (S901: No), or if it is determined in the process of S903 that the number of balls reserved for the special pattern ball entrance 64 has reached the upper limit at the moment. If it is determined that it is the value (S903: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is skipped and this process is ended.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is added, the pre-reading process (S907) is executed based on the information regarding the added winnings (winning information). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if it is determined in the process of S903 that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is the upper limit number (4) (S903: No), that is, It may be configured such that the pre-reading process (S907) can be executed when a ball is entered into the special pattern ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special pattern has reached the upper limit. Thereby, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of special symbols has reached the upper limit, the player can be made to continue playing the game in order to execute the pre-reading process. In addition, additional value can be added when a ball enters the special pattern ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, so the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play when a ball enters the special drawing ball entry hole 64 in a state where the ball has reached .

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the pre-reading process (S907), which is one process of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 46), will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S907).

In the pre-reading process (S907 in FIG. 47), first, various counter values such as the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter are obtained from the storage area newly stored in the special symbol holding storage area 203a. Each value of CS1 is read out (S1001). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the empty storage areas of the prefetch pending storage area (S1002).

Next, the validity determination result is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetch pending storage area. Note that here, both the validity determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the validity determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are determined. This is because the jackpot determination is executed based on the timing when a new pending memory occurs (the timing when a new pending (winning information) is stored in the special symbol pending storage area 203a) and the newly pending winning information this time. Because there is a time lag between the timing and the timing when the winning information is newly suspended, it is difficult to predict the gaming state (probability state of special symbols) that will be set at the timing when the jackpot determination based on the newly suspended winning information will be executed. It is.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the determination is a jackpot (S1003). If the determination result is that it is a jackpot (S1003: Yes), a winning command is set that indicates the conditions for winning the jackpot (gaming state set at the time of lottery) and the type of jackpot in the event of winning (S1004). , and then ends this process.

On the other hand, if the determination result in the process of S1003 is that it is not a jackpot (S1003: No), a winning command indicating a loss is set (S1005), and then this process ends.

Here, the winning command set in the process of S1004 or S1005 includes the information for indicating the above-mentioned judgment result (information that has a different meaning based on the judgment result), as well as the common information in S1001. It is set to include information indicating the values of various counter values read out through processing. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S1801) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when a winning command is received, the display mode of the reserved balls is changed based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the reserved balls is changed to a color different from normal). It is possible to execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which the player is shown the result of a judgment of success or failure by displaying a variable) or by displaying a preview symbol or the like before the change starts.

In addition, in this embodiment, since there is only one probability state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol), the information (win/fail judgment result) to be set in the winning command can be set regardless of the gaming state. For example, in a gaming machine that has multiple special symbol probability states (special symbol high probability state, special symbol low probability state), the validity judgment result in the case of the special symbol high probability state and the special symbol low probability state It may be configured such that the winning command is set based on the result of each determination, or even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state. It may also be configured such that a determination value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) for determining a jackpot is defined, and a winning command indicating a special symbol jackpot is set only when the determination value is read.

With this configuration, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the audio lamp control device 113 side only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot, so special symbols for which the pre-read effect is not executed In response to fluctuations, it is possible to create a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, the gaming state when a special symbol lottery is performed based on the pending memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the special symbol pending storage area 203a is accurately determined, and the win/fail judgment is made based on the gaming state. It may be configured to execute. In this case, the determination can be made by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of balls on hold at the start of the variation, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of balls on hold. When pre-reading is executed, the game state at the time of the start of fluctuation can be determined by determining the fluctuation order until the fluctuation of the reserved ball starts based on the information stored in suspension.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a new pending memory (winning information) is stored (stored) in the special symbol pending storage area 203a, a pre-reading process based on the winning information is executed, and in the pre-reading process, the Although a configuration is used in which the determination is predicted in advance, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the pre-reading process of the main controller 110, the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (stored) in the special symbol retention storage area 203a is used. Information indicating the content (each counter value) may be set as the winning command, and the winning command may be configured to predict the winning/failure determination result based on the information included in the winning command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side.

With this configuration, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 side executes a process to determine whether or not to execute a prefetch effect, and when it is determined that a prefetch effect is to be executed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is It may be configured to perform analysis (prediction of validity determination results). Thereby, when the pre-read effect is not executed, the specific pre-read process (prediction of the result of judgment of validity) is not executed, so it is possible to suppress unnecessary control being executed in the pachinko machine 10. Further, it is possible to prevent a problem in which a player illegally obtains the result of a prefetch process executed without a title.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting. (S1101). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is winning, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is performed after the winning symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (after the winning symbol stops being displayed). This includes the middle part (until the winning game ends). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S1101: Yes), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1101: No), it is determined whether the regular symbol on the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S1102). If it is determined that the normal symbol variation is not being displayed, that is, the current state is such that a new normal symbol variation (lottery) can be executed (S1102: No), then the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is The value (M) is acquired (S1103), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S1104).

If it is determined in the process of S1104 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S1104: No), this process is ended as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S1104: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S1105). In other words, if it is determined in the process of S1104 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol variation (that the winning information for use in the normal symbol variation is held and stored) is satisfied, the new normal symbol variation is held and stored. In order to execute the normal symbol variation using the winning information, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S1106). In the process of S1106, the data stored in normal symbol reservation 1 to normal symbol reservation 4 of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of normal symbol reservation 1→execution area. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1107).

Next, it is determined whether the time saving counter 203h is on, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state of normal symbols (S1108), and if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is set to on. (S1108: Yes), a win/fail determination result (lottery result) is obtained based on the win determination value of the second random number table 202b for high probability win (see FIG. 23(c)), and the process proceeds to S1111. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is off (S1108: No), the success/failure determination result is determined based on the win determination value of the second random number table 202b for low probability times (see FIG. 23(c)). is acquired (S1110), and the process moves to S1111.

In the process of S1111, it is determined whether the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is a win (S1111), and if it is determined to be a win (S1111: Yes), the "○" which is the display mode at the time of a win is displayed. The display mode is set (S1112), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern using the value of the ordinary symbol fluctuation type counter (S1114). On the other hand, in the process of S1111, if it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) is not a hit (it is a miss) (S1111: No), the display mode of "x", which is the display mode when it is a miss, is set. (S1113), and proceeds to the process of S1114 described above.

As described above, this embodiment is configured so that 3 seconds is always set as the variable time regardless of the set gaming state. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the gaming state is switched, specifically, from the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) in which a long fluctuation time is likely to be set, to the time saving state where a short fluctuation time is likely to be set. At the end of the jackpot game when the game state changes to the state (high probability state of normal symbols), a normal symbol fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is being executed, and even though the time saving state has been set, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the normal symbol lottery is not executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a special electric game (V rush) aiming at a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed using the normal symbol lottery as an opportunity during the time saving state. ) is configured so that the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 also displays an effect based on the normal symbol lottery. In this way, when performing a performance based on normal symbol lottery (variation), the amount of performance data can be reduced by unifying the variation time.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if a normal figure winning game is executed during the normal state and a ball enters the ordinary electric winning device 640, the special electric operating port 643, which triggers the execution of the accessory winning game, The structure is such that it is difficult for a ball to win a prize. Therefore, even if configured so that only the same variable time (3 seconds) is set, it is possible to eliminate the advantage of playing the game by timing the execution of the game per common symbol.

Note that the method of setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, and may include varying the fluctuation time depending on the gaming state, varying the fluctuation time depending on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, The fluctuation time may be changed depending on the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is set according to the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol. ) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (normal symbol reserved number). Furthermore, the ease with which the ball enters the general winning machine 640 may be configured to vary depending on the set fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In this way, by configuring the state of entry of the ball into the general winning device 640 to be varied according to the length of the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol, the ball entering the general winning device 640 can be changed. Since the ease of entering the ball can be easily varied depending on the game state, it is possible to create a variety of game features.

On the other hand, in the process of S1102, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1102: No), the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. If it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S1115: No), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the process of S1115 (S1115: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1116). In the process of S1116, if the current normal symbol lottery is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the "○" symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) on the second symbol display device 83. That is, settings are made to stop displaying the display mode set in the process of S1112 or S1113 described above.

When the stop display is set by the process of S1116, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed as the second symbol in the display mode set in the process of S1112 or the process of S1113. A stop display (lit display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

Next, it is determined whether the current lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit (S1117). If it is determined that the lottery result of this normal symbol is a hit (S1117: Yes), a process for setting the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result for the normal baby crying symbol is not a hit (a loss) (S1117: No), this process is ended as is.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a in this embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing of determining the validity of the normal symbol (timing of performing the processing of S1108 to S1111), The probability of the normal symbol set at the timing of executing the validity determination of the normal symbol and setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a (timing when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the process of S1115) The opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is configured to be set based on the state (high probability state, low probability state).

That is, in this embodiment, the fluctuation processing (lottery processing) regarding the normal symbols and the fluctuation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and the fluctuation processing (lottery processing) regarding the special symbols is executed independently. The probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery process). Therefore, depending on the result of the variation process (lottery process) related to special symbols that is executed in parallel during the period when the variation process (lottery process) related to normal symbols is being executed, the normal symbols may A high probability state is set, and a low probability state of a normal symbol may be set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a.

In such a situation, for example, the opening control mode (opening If you set a long open pattern (pattern), the electric accessory 640a will be set to a long open pattern (a release pattern that is executed when a high probability state of normal symbols is set) while a low probability state of normal symbols is set. ).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and the electric accessory is determined based on the determination result. It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a. Thereby, the electric accessory 640a can be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

In the process of S1117, if it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win (S1117: Yes), next, to determine the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the current normal symbol. Then, it is determined whether the time saving counter 203h is on (S1118), and if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is not on (off), that is, the current state is a low probability state of normal symbols (S1118: No), a scenario operation is set for normal ordinary map (S1119).

On the other hand, in the process of S1118, if it is determined that the time-saving counter 203h is set to ON (S1118: Yes), a scenario operation for a regular map for time-saving is set (S1120).

Next, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the scenario set in the process of S1119 or S1120 (S1121), and this process ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the validity judgment of the normal symbol is executed based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing when the validity determination of the normal symbol is performed, and the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a that is moved in the winning game of the normal symbol. Although the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is configured to be set based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of setting the (opening pattern), the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the validity of the normal symbol may be determined. The high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is also set at the timing of setting the release control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the winning game of the normal symbol. It may be configured such that the electric accessory 640a is opened long only when the electric accessory 640a is opened long, or the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a can be set based on the gaming state set at the timing of determining the validity of the normal symbol. It may be configured to set.

In addition, although detailed explanations are omitted, various information determined in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) (results of the normal symbol lottery, variation time of the normal symbol variation, normal symbol winning scenario, etc.) , commands indicating the contents of various types of information are set, and are output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

Next, referring to FIG. 49, the through gate passing process (S107) executed in the first embodiment is executed. This process is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), and determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting gate (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, the second winning This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S1201). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1201: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained (S1202), and then , it is determined whether the value (M) of the acquired normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 1 (whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol has not reached the upper limit value) (S1203).

In the process of S1203, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 1 (the upper limit value is 1) (S1203: No), this process is ended as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not larger than 1 (0) (S1203: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to 1. (S1204), sets the normal symbol reserved ball number command (command for indicating the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) (S1205), and sets the value of the second winning random number counter C4 to the normal symbol. The ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b (S1206), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the special electric starting opening winning process (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special electric start opening winning process (S108) executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a special electric operation opening 643 in the ordinary electric winning device 640, and by making a ball enter the special electric operation opening 643, the V winning apparatus 65 is activated. The game is configured to execute a game in which a predetermined variable pattern is used to win an accessory. In this special electric start opening winning process (S108), various processes are executed when a ball wins in the special electric start opening 643.

When the special electric start opening winning process (S108) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special electric start winning is achieved, that is, whether a game ball has been won in the special electric operating opening 643 (S1301). In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not a detection signal indicating that a ball has been detected is output from a detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting a winning ball in the special electric actuation port 643. In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the special electric actuation port 643 (S1301: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the special electric actuation port 643 (S1301: Yes), then it is determined whether the current game is a winning game with normal symbols (S1302). If it is determined that the current game is not a normal symbol winning game (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1309) because the ball cannot enter the special electric operating port 643, and then this process is performed. end. By performing the process of S1309, if a game ball enters the special electric operation port 643 outside the normal game period, that is, a game is played in which the game ball enters the special electric operation hole 643 illegally, or It is possible to promptly notify the outside of a malfunction in a member attached to the special electric actuation port 643 (for example, the electric accessory 640a, the second movable valve 642).

In the process of S1302, if it is determined that the current game is a normal symbol winning game (S1302: Yes), then it is determined whether the special electric current is currently being activated (accessories winning game) (S1303). If it is determined that the special electric current is currently in operation (during a game to win an accessory) (S1303: Yes), it is in a state where it is not possible to execute a new game to win an accessory, so the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special electric current is not currently in operation (during a game with a winning accessory) (S1303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently changing (S1304). If it is determined that the special symbol is currently changing (S1304: Yes), the special symbol temporary stop flag 203m is set to ON (S1305), the special symbol temporary stop command is set (S1306), and the accessory The winning flag 203k is set on (S1307), and the process moves to S1308.

That is, in the process of S1304, when it is determined that the special symbol is currently changing, the process of S1305 and S1306 is executed in order to interrupt the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation that is being executed. As a result, when the accessory winning game is executed, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted. Further, the temporary stop command set in the process of S1307 is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) of the main process (FIG. 55) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, in the process of S1304, if it is determined that the special symbol is not currently changing (S1304: No), the processes of S1305 and S1306 are skipped, and the process moves to the process of S1307. In the process of S1308, a special electric activation command is set (S1308), and then this process ends.

As explained above, in the special electric start opening winning process (S108), when a ball wins in the special electric start opening 643, a determination processing means is used to determine whether the winning is a normal winning and based on the winning. processing means for determining whether a new accessory winning game can be executed, and processing for special symbol fluctuations (processing to interrupt the special symbol fluctuation in progress, and preventing new special symbol fluctuations from being executed during the accessory winning game) The present invention has means for executing a game (processing for making a game similar to the above) and a means for executing a game to win an accessory.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the V entrance passage process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S109) executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

In the V inlet passing process (S109), it is first determined whether the storage sensor 65s (see FIG. 6) is on (S1401), and if the storage sensor 65s is not on (storage sensor 65s01: No), this process is continued. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the storage sensor 65s is on (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether the V winning hole opening period is in progress, that is, the game is in progress for winning the accessory (S1402). In the process of S1402, if it is determined that it is during the V prize opening opening period (during the game with the accessory prize) (S1402: Yes), a V entrance passing command is set (S1403), and this process ends. If it is not during the V winning hole opening period (S1402: No), this is a case where a game ball enters the V winning device 65 even though the game is not in the middle of a winning game, so an error command is set (S1404). ), this process ends.

The V entrance passage command set in the process of S1403 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output process (S1801) of the main process (see FIG. 55) executed by the MPU 201. , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the V-entrance passing command, it counts the game balls that have passed through the V-entrance and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute a performance based on the V-entrance passing. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect during the game to win the accessory based on the ball entering the V winning device 65.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the V passing process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the V passing process (S110) executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39).

When the V passing process (S110) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is a V passing, that is, whether a game ball has won in the V winning hole 165 (S1501), and whether the game ball has won in the V winning hole 165 or not. If it is determined that there is no such information (S1501: No), this process is immediately terminated. If it is determined that a game ball has won in the V winning hole 165 (S1501: Yes), then it is determined whether the current V validity period is in effect (S1502). In the process of S1502, it is determined that the period in which the operation scenario regarding the accessory winning game is set is within the V validity period, and otherwise it is determined that it is not within the V validity period.

In the process of S1502, if it is determined that the V validity period is in progress (S1502: Yes), then it is determined whether the current game is a game with a winning accessory (S1503), and if it is a game with a winning accessory. (S1503: Yes), acquires the V passing jackpot type value corresponding to the current accessory winning game (S1504), sets the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON (S1505), and sets the value of the time saving counter 203h. It is set to 0 (S1506), and the process moves to S1507.

That is, in the processing of S1504 to S1506, processing for executing the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the game ball enters the V winning hole 165 during the accessory winning game. On the other hand, in the process of S1503, if it is determined that the accessory winning game is not in progress (S1503: No), the process of S1504 to S1506 is skipped because there is no need to perform the process to newly execute the jackpot game. Then, the process moves to step S1507.

In the process of S1507, a V passing command is set (S1507), and this process ends. The V passing command set here is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 in the same way as other commands set in the control processing of the main control device 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a V passing command, for example, when the V passing command is received during a game to win an accessory, the performance during the V rush executed during the game to win an accessory is successful, and the Following the object winning game, a performance is performed to show that a jackpot game will be executed. Further, when the V passing command is received during the jackpot game, the same effect as when the V passing command is received during the accessory winning game is executed.

On the other hand, if the V passage command is not received at the predetermined timing during the jackpot game, a regrettable effect is performed to indicate that the V challenge has failed, and the V passage command is sent at the predetermined timing during the jackpot game. If not received, a revival performance from the disappointing performance is executed and the player is informed that the jackpot game will be continued.

In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is shown in which only a command (V passing command) for indicating that a game ball has won in the V winning hole 165 is set, but when a game ball has not won in the V winning hole 165. It may also be configured to set a command (for example, a V non-passing command) to indicate this. In this case, for example, in this embodiment, the only game ball that can enter the V winning hole 165 is the game ball (for example, one) that is stored in the storage valve 66a, A number discriminating means for discriminating the presence or absence (number) of game balls present, and a detecting means for detecting passage of the game balls to the hemorrhoid 2-out height 163b are provided, and the number of game balls determined by the number discriminating means is provided. The configuration may be such that the above-mentioned V non-passing command is set when the detection means detects this. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 113 can perform an appropriate performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that a game ball is jammed in the V winning device 65.

On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if it is determined that the current V validity period is not in progress (S1502: No), an error command is set (S1508), and this process ends. By performing the process of S1508, if a game ball enters the V winning hole 165 outside the V validity period, that is, if a game is played in which the game ball enters the V winning hole 165 illegally, or if a game ball enters the V winning hole 165 illegally, It is possible to promptly notify the outside of a malfunction in a member attached to the port 165 (for example, the V opening/closing door 65a, the storage valve 66a, the first movable valve 66b).

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26(b), the operation scenario is defined so that the timing at which the ball can enter the V winning hole 165 in the accessory winning game is the ending period of the accessory winning game. Therefore, the process from S1506 to S1508 is configured to be executed in the V passing process (S110), that is, to be executed at the timing when the ball enters the V winning hole 165. Without limitation, for example, if the operation scenario of the accessory winning game is defined so that the ball can always enter the V winning hole 165 during the accessory winning game, the V passing process (S110) , only the process of S1505 is executed, and the processes of S1506 to S1508 are executed as the process to be executed when the V flag is set to on in the accessory hit control process (see S1805 in FIG. 58). It is good to configure. As a result, even if the ball enters the V winning hole 165 immediately after the accessory winning game is executed, the time-saving state can continue until the jackpot game starts, which does not give the player a sense of discomfort. You can play the game without any problems.

Next, referring to FIG. 53, NMI interrupt processing will be explained. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1601), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout firing control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 54), first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process moves to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if it is not stored (S1705: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S1712 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1706), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process also moves to S1712 in such a case. Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup process, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed.

In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S1713, S1714) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1713, S1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1714). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1707: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power outage is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1708). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, a production permission command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit execution of various productions (S1710). Thereafter, an interrupt is permitted (S1711), and an operation based on the first movable valve operation scenario is set (S1715). Then, the process moves to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up processing described above. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is roughly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main processing (see FIG. 55), first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is sent to each sub-side control. External output processing to be sent to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the award corresponding to the number of balls acquired is sent to the payout control device 111. Send a sphere command. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 40) or the start winning process (see FIG. 46) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, through this external output process (S1801 in FIG. 55), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are sent. Information for setting effects (variable effects, decorative effects, etc.). In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 56) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, various commands set in other control processing are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 has been updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then, in the case of a special symbol jackpot, the sound lamp control device 113 A command is set for executing a jackpot effect, and a jackpot control process is executed for opening a specific winning opening (big opening opening) 650a of the variable winning prize device 650 (S1804).

The details of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described later with reference to FIGS. etc.), and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning opening, etc. (specific winning opening 650a) has elapsed, or whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the winning opening, etc. (specific winning opening 650a). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning opening etc. (specific winning opening 650a) is closed. This opening and closing of the winning opening etc. (specific winning opening 650a) is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an accessory winning control process regarding an accessory winning game to be executed when the ball enters the special electric actuation opening 643 is executed (S1805). In this accessory winning control process (S1805), the period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is opened and the period in which it is closed are determined based on a predetermined scenario for the V winning device 65 that is opened during the accessory winning game. A process for setting is executed based on the (accessory object hitting motion scenario). In addition. The detailed content of the accessory hit control process (S1805) will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process is executed to control opening and closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the general electricity winning device 640 (S1806). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1121 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. In addition, the opening/closing control of this electric accessory is continued until the period set by the process of S1119 and the process of S1120 in the normal symbol variation process ends.

Next, a first symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B (S1807). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (S205 in FIG. 41), a variation display according to the variation pattern is started on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. . In this embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started, that red LED Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. turns off the light and lights up the red LED.

Note that the main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed every time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is Change the lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, the first symbol display update process is executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41) has ended. After finishing the fluctuation display, the special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S208 in FIG. 45) causes the stopped symbol to be displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set in S507 of the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the devices 37A and 37B.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (jackpot symbol), the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a loss (missing symbol). The system is configured, and the stop display for that purpose is also executed.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display on the second symbol display device (S1808). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1114 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 48), variable display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display is performed in which the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process in S1116 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48), the second symbol display update process (S1808) is executed in the second symbol display device. The current variation display is ended, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S1112 or S1113 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 48). (lit display).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1810). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1810: Yes), the process moves to S1801, and the processes from S1801 described above are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main processing (S1810: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S1811 (S1812). In addition, in the process of S1812, the value of the general pattern variation type counter CS2 is updated as well as the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process from S1801 to S1808 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the regular pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 can also be randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to understand the processing details for updating the judgment value regarding the lottery of special symbols and normal symbols, and to prevent illegal games from being executed at the timing when the judgment value corresponding to a win is acquired. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the process of S1809, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1809: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 53 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S1813 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1813), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S1814). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S1815), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S1809 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S1801 to S1808, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from the process in S1801. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1801, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is saved during the initial setting process (S1701). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1801. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56, the jackpot control process (S1804) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, information (command ), and opening or closing of the winning opening, etc. (specific winning opening (large open opening) 650a).

In the jackpot control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the jackpot of the special symbol (S1901). Specifically, if the process of S806 of the special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S208 in FIG. 45) is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, or if the special symbol change stop process (see S1805 in FIG. 58) When the process of S2010 (see) is executed and the start of a jackpot is set, an operation counter is set in correspondence with the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 included in the various operation scenario tables 202e. Then, when the value of the operation counter matches the jackpot start timing defined in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1, it is determined that the jackpot has started. In the process of S1901, if it is determined that it is the special symbol jackpot start timing (S1901: Yes), an opening command is set (S1902), and this process ends.

It should be noted that the opening command may be configured to be transmitted with a delay (variable) depending on the gaming state or jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated periodically (every 4 ms) is provided. When a special symbol jackpot or accessory hit starts, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for jackpots A and B, and 2500 for jackpot C). 5000), the opening command may be transmitted. By doing this, for example, in a left-handed game, if a jackpot is achieved in a special drawing lottery, the time until the start of the jackpot (the specific prize opening 650a is opened) is shortened, and the left-handed game is played with a left-handed player. In the case of a jackpot in the accessory winning game as a result of the special electric game, the time until the jackpot starts (specific winning opening 650a is opened) can be lengthened. With this configuration, it is possible to secure a period during which the player who has been watching the ball flow situation during the accessory winning game prepares for the jackpot winning game.

On the other hand, in the process of S1901, if it is determined that it is not the jackpot start timing (S1901: No), then it is determined whether the current jackpot is being won (S1903). In the process of S1903, the game information related to the winning game stored in the game state storage area 203g is read out and determined.

During a jackpot, a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and a predetermined period after the jackpot game is over. This includes the middle of time. It also includes a time when a display indicating that a ball has won a prize in the V winning hole 165 is being displayed. If it is determined in the process of S1903 that there is no jackpot (S1903: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S1903: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1904).

If it is determined in the process of S1904 that it is the start timing of a new round, that is, if it is determined that the value of the acquired operation counter is the start timing of the round game specified in the jackpot operation scenario table 202e1 (S1904 :Yes), sets the specific winning a prize opening solenoid 209a to ON (S1905), sets a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started (S1906), and then ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1904, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1904: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S1907). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the round, that is, if it is determined that the value of the acquired action counter is the end timing of the round game specified in the jackpot action scenario table 202e1 (S1907: Yes), The specific winning opening solenoid 209a is set to OFF (S1908), and the value of the winning number counter 203e is cleared to 0 (S1909). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1907, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the round (S1907: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1910). The starting timing of the ending effect is when the final round in the jackpot game (in the case of jackpot A, the fourth round) is finished, the specific prize opening 650a is closed, and the waiting time (this embodiment In this case, when 3 seconds have elapsed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. If it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1910: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1911), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1910, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending performance (S1910: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1912). Note that the end timing of the jackpot is, specifically, the end timing of the jackpot game in which the value of the acquired action counter is specified in the jackpot action scenario table 202e1. In the process of S1912, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (end timing of the ending effect) (S1912: Yes), then it is determined whether the type of jackpot is jackpot B (S1913). If it is determined that it is a jackpot B (S1913: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 15 (S1914), and the process moves to S1916. In the process of S1913, if it is determined that the type of jackpot is not jackpot B (jackpot A or jackpot C) (S1913: No), the process moves to S1915.

In the process of S1915, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 4 (S1915), then a status command corresponding to the gaming state after the jackpot is set (S1916), and a jackpot end command is set to set the end of the jackpot. After setting (S1917), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1912, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the jackpot (S1912: No), the winning process is executed (S1918), and then this process ends. Here, this winning process (S1918) will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1918).

In the winning process (S1918 in FIG. 57), first, it is determined whether the round is valid (S2001). The round validity period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period during which the specific winning hole 650a is open. If it is determined that the round is outside the valid period (S2001: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S2001: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball has passed through the specific winning hole 650a (S2002). If it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific winning opening 650a (S2002: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter to update it (S2003), and a command indicating the number of entered balls after the addition is set ( S2004). On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the specific winning a prize opening 650a (S2002: No), this process is directly ended.

After executing the process of S2004, it is then determined whether the value of the prize winning counter is 10 (S2005). If it is determined that the value of the prize winning counter is 10 (S2005: Yes), the value of the operation counter is updated to one value before the value indicating the end of the current round (S2006), and then this process ends. do. In the process of S2005, if it is determined that the value of the prize winning number counter is not 10 (S2005: No), the process of S2006 is skipped and the process is directly ended.

With this configuration, the end conditions for the round game are the end condition that is satisfied when time elapses (30 seconds have elapsed) and the end condition that is satisfied when the ball is won (10 balls are won). In the case where such a system is provided, the operation control of the jackpot game can be executed based on the same operation scenario regardless of which end condition is satisfied. Therefore, the control processing of main controller 110 can be simplified.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 58, the accessory hit control process (S1805) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this accessory hit control process (S1805). This accessory hit control process (S1805) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55), and the accessory hit flag 203k is turned on in the special electric starting gate winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50). Various control processes are executed based on the update status (obtained value of the motion counter) of the motion scenario (motion scenario defined in the accessory motion scenario table 202e2) that is set.

In the accessory hit control process (S1805), first, it is determined whether it is the timing to start winning the accessory (S2101). Here, it is determined whether the value of the motion counter corresponding to the accessory motion scenario table 202e (see FIG. 26(b)) is 1 or not. If it is determined that it is the start timing for winning the accessory (S2101: Yes), an opening command for winning the accessory is set (S2102), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start winning the accessory (S2101: No), then it is determined whether the current timing is during the winning of the accessory (S2103). If it is determined that the accessory is not being won (S2103: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the accessory is being hit (S2103: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the timing for the release operation (S2104). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the motion counter corresponding to the accessory hit motion scenario table 202e is 26 or not. When it is determined that it is the timing of the opening operation (S2104: Yes), the opening solenoid (V winning hole solenoid 209b) is set to ON (S2105), and then this process is ended. Although not shown, there is a process of closing (setting off) the opening solenoid (V winning port solenoid 209b) in accordance with the value of the operation counter corresponding to the role winning operation scenario table 202e of the V winning device 65. , processing for setting the storage solenoid 209c on is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2104, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the release operation (S2104: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing for the end of hitting the accessory (S2106). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the motion counter corresponding to the accessory hit motion scenario table 202e is 750 or not. If it is determined that it is the timing to end the accessory hit (S2106: Yes), the accessory hit flag 203k is set to OFF (S2107), and then it is determined whether or not the V flag 203p is on. (S2108). If it is determined that the V flag 203p is off (S2108: No), the process is immediately ended. If it is determined that the V flag 203p is on (S2108: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S2110), the V flag 203p is set off (S2111), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2106, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the hit of the accessory (S2106: No), the V passing detection process is executed (S2112), and then this process ends.

<About the control process executed by the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 72. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 59, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When startup processing is executed, first, initialization processing associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "momentary power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S4117 (see Figure 60). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 60, upon receiving power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 60), the audio lamp control device 113 executes power-off processing in S4117. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4117 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S4117 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process moves to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process moves to S4008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process moves to S4004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4117 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process moves to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process in S4117, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 60). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4117 is executed, so the reason for reaching the process in S4008 with the power-off flag on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the interrupt Permission is set (S4011) and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S4008 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after, for example, the power was completely shut off. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), the process skips S4009, which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, moves to S4010, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004 when the process reaches S4008 from S4004 through the process in S4006. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main processing was started or since the processing in S4101 was previously executed (S4101), and 1 millisecond If the above period has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is the process of S4102 to S4111 related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S4112 and the variable display setting process in S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, a command to send various commands to the display control device 114 set in the processes of S4103 to S4113 to the display control device 114 is sent. Output processing is executed (S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108, which will be described later (S4103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S4105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting performance, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device. 114.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is then executed (S4108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, a liquid crystal performance execution management process is executed (S4110), and then a performance update process is executed (S4111). Details of this effect update process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 72. After executing the process of S4111, the process moves to S4112. In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing/output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing in S4111, command determination processing (S4112) is executed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110, and the process moves to S4113. Details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

In the process of S4113, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. Execute the variable display setting process, which is the process to set up to send to. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

When the process of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off process is executed (S4117). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4118), and the process is then looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. . The details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4112), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, and the first command received from the main control device 110 is read out and analyzed. It is determined whether a movable valve operation command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that the first movable valve operation command has been received (S4201: Yes), update of the operation scenario is set based on the received first movable valve operation command (S4202), and then this process is performed. finish.

In other words, in the present embodiment, when a command related to the operation control of the first movable valve 66b (first movable valve operation command) that is executed when the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 is received, the operation scenario is updated without delay. In addition, a process for determining reception of the first movable valve command is provided in the highest priority determination order of the command determination process. With this configuration, it is possible to easily synchronize the operation control contents on the main control device 110 side and the situation understanding contents on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

Note that in this embodiment, the operation scenario (first movable valve 66b The configuration is such that an operation scenario is set for the audio lamp control device 113 to grasp the operating status of the main control device 113 at each predetermined period (every hour). It may be configured such that a command indicating the operation control content of the first movable valve 66b is output from the side, or a command indicating the operation control content of the first movable valve 66b is output every time a jackpot game is executed. good. Then, the contents of the received command and the contents of the operation scenario being updated may be compared, and processing may be executed to correct the updated contents of the operation scenario. Thereby, the accuracy with which the audio lamp control device 113 side grasps the operation control details of the main control device 110 side can be further improved. Furthermore, the update process of the operation scenario on the audio lamp control device 113 side may be configured to take into consideration in advance the time lag required until the command output from the main control device 110 side is received.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the first movable valve operation command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not a special figure variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4203). Here, the special symbol variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. In the process of S4203, if it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), a special figure variation start process is executed (S4204), and this process ends. Details of this special figure fluctuation start process (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the special figure variation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure stop type command has been received (S4205). If it is determined that a special figure stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S4206), the stop type is extracted from the received special figure stop type command (S4207), After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4205, if it is determined that the special figure stop type command has not been received (S4205: No), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4208). Here, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has been received (S4208: Yes), the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) of the received number of reserved balls command is analyzed, and the data is stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The value of the provided corresponding counter is updated (S4209). Specifically, when a special symbol reserved ball number command is received, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 included in the reserved ball number command (i.e., the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (i.e., the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c) The number of balls) is extracted, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value.

In addition, when a normal symbol held ball number command is received, the value of the normal symbol held ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the held ball number command (i.e., the number of held balls in the normal symbol fluctuating display) is extracted, and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value.

Here, the number of held balls command is executed when a ball enters the various ball entrances (special ball entrance 64, through gate 67) (starting winning) and the values of the various number of held balls counters are added, or , S4209 is sent from the main controller 110 when the values of the various reserved ball counters are subtracted when executing various fluctuation start processes, so each time a starting prize is won or a fluctuation display is set, S4209 is sent. Through the process, the values of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed to the values of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Can be matched.

Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c included in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the values of the various reserved ball number counters 203c and 203d of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., At the time of starting winning, when setting the variable display, that is, when the number of reserved balls command is notified based on the number of reserved balls being changed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected. , the various reserved ball number counters of the main controller 110 can be adjusted to the values of the various reserved ball number counters 203c and 203d.

Further, in the process of S4208, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved pitches has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4210). In the process of S4210, if it is determined that the winning command has been received (S4210: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S4211), and this process ends. This winning command processing (S4211) analyzes the symbol type (special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command, and stores the storage area (voice lamp control device 113) corresponding to the analysis result. It performs processing for storing (memorizing) the winning information in the winning information storage area 223b in the RAM 223, and processing for executing an effect (pre-reading effect) based on the received winning information. Note that detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

In the process of S4210, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S4210: No), then it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4212). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4212: Yes), status command reception processing is executed (S4213), and this processing ends. The details of this status command reception process (S4213) will be described later with reference to FIG. , a process of setting the winning game state (during jackpot, during winning of accessory) in the subordinate state setting area 223g is executed.

Next, in the process of S4212, if it is determined that no status command has been received (S4212: No), it is determined whether a stop-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4214). If it is determined in the process of S4214 that a stop-related command has been received (S4214: Yes), the stop-related process is executed (S4215), and this process ends. Although a detailed explanation of this stop-related process (S4215) will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is Processing for setting the display mode of the variable production using the fourth symbol or the fourth symbol is executed.

In this embodiment, a variation pattern (variation time) is set in advance when special symbol variation is executed as a period during which the variation display of the special symbol is executed. Even when a special symbol variation is being executed based on the above, there are cases where a process of forcibly stopping the special symbol variation may be executed depending on the result of another special symbol variation. Therefore, it is possible to execute the stop-related process (S4215) on the audio lamp control device 113 side and stop the variable display (fluctuating effect) of the third and fourth symbols in response to the timing at which the special symbol variation is stopped. It is configured so that it can be done. Thereby, it is possible to synchronize the fluctuation state of the special symbols and the state of the fluctuation performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand display mode to the player.

On the other hand, in the process of S4214, if it is determined that a stop-related command has not been received (S4214: No), it is determined whether a general map-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4216), and the general map-related command is If it is determined that the message has been received (S4216: Yes), the general map related process is executed (S4217), and this process ends. Details of the general map related process (S4217) will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

In the process of S4216, if it is determined that a common map related command has not been received (S4216: No), it is determined whether a winning related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4218), and the winning related command is received. If it is determined that this has been done (S4218: Yes), a win-related process is executed (S4219), and this process ends. The details of the win-related process (S4219) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but the production corresponding to the jackpot game or small win game that is executed when a jackpot or small jackpot is won as a result of the special symbol lottery. It performs processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

In the process of S4218, if it is determined that a winning related command has not been received (S4218: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (S4220), and this process ends. In the process of S4220, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, that command is executed. This command is used to set a command so as to send the command to the display control device 114.

The command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of this embodiment has been described above. However, in the command determination process (S4112), the order in which it is determined whether or not various commands have been received has been explained. , an order other than the order shown in this embodiment may be used; for example, the process of determining whether or not a status command has been received may be performed faster than the process of determining whether or not a special figure variation pattern command has been received. The determination order may be specified so that it is executed first.

With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, during the special symbol fluctuation start process of the main controller 110 (see S205 in FIG. 41), Even if the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43) is executed, a special symbol variation pattern command is set, and a state command indicating that the gaming state has been changed is subsequently set, the voice lamp control The gaming state currently set on the device 113 side can be determined before the special figure variation pattern command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the special figure fluctuation start process (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the special figure fluctuation start process (S4204). This special figure fluctuation start process (S4204) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is Then, a process for setting a display mode (a main variation variation pattern, a sub variation variation pattern) corresponding to the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The display control device 114 then displays the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 71), which will be described later. The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, details of the special figure fluctuation start process (S4204) will be explained.

When the special figure fluctuation start process is set, first. The special figure variation start flag 223d is set on (S4301), a variation pattern is extracted from the received special figure variation pattern command (S4302), and a detailed display mode is selected using the variation pattern selection table 222a (S4303). .

Next, the information set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223g (information indicating the current gaming state) is read out, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (S4304). In the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current state is not a time saving state (normal state) (S4304: No), a command for displaying in the normal state is set (S4305), and this process ends. When the display command is set in the process of S4305, it is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 of FIG. 60) of the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. A performance mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is set in the main display area Dm as shown in b).

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S4304: Yes), a command for displaying the time saving state is set (S4306), and the value of the notified pending number storage area 223s is set. is subtracted by 1 (S4307), and the value (variation time) corresponding to the variation pattern received this time is set in the variation time counter 223r (S4308), and this process ends.

Next, the winning command process (S4211) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing winning command processing (S4211). This winning command process (S4211) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is based on the type of the received winning command (special symbol, normal A process is executed to set an effect (so-called pre-read effect) to be executed when a winning command is received in accordance with the winning command (symbols) and the current gaming state.

When the winning command process (S4211) is executed, first, based on the information included in the received winning command, it is analyzed which symbol type it corresponds to, and it is set (stored) in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b. (S4401). Then, it is determined whether the V rush flag 223q is set to on (S4402), and if it is determined that it is not set to on (S4402: No), the process moves to S4412, and then this process ends. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to on (S4402: Yes), variable time information included in the received winning command is extracted (S4403).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the prefetch counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404). If it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is smaller than 1 (0) (S4404: No), the fluctuation time (variation time of special symbols) included in the winning information received this time is used as the remaining period of V Rush. Since the state is such that additional notification cannot be made, the extracted variable time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4410), the value of the unreported pending number storage area 223k is added by 1 (S4411), and the process of S4412 is performed. Move to.

On the other hand, in the process of S4404, if it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is 1 or more (S4404: Yes), the fluctuation time (the special symbol fluctuation time) included in the winning command received this time is Since it is possible to additionally notify the remaining period, it is then determined whether or not the interruption flag 223m is on (S4405). In the process of S44405, it is determined whether the current time is a timing at which additional notification can be executed. In this embodiment, during the V Rush, the remaining period of the V Rush is not additionally notified during the accessory winning game period and the jackpot winning game period. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player concentrate on various winning games while playing the games.

In the process of S4405, if it is determined that the interruption flag 223m is off (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not the special winning flag 223n is on (S4406). If it is determined that the special hit flag 223n is off (S4406: No), it is currently possible to execute additional notification, so the value of the time period counter 223i corresponds to the fluctuation time extracted in the process of S4403. (S4407), 1 is added to the value of the notified pending number storage area 223s, and the process moves to S4409.

Although not shown in the figure, if the variable time is added in the process of S4407, a display command corresponding to the added value is set and an additional notification effect is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15). a) Reference) is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, all the values added in the process of S4407 are configured to be notified as an additional notification effect, but the added value is not limited to this and may be divided into multiple times with the upper limit. It may also be configured to perform an additional notification effect. By configuring this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggers the addition of the remaining period of V Rush (short remaining time), so it is possible to create a performance that does not cause players to get bored early. can be executed.

In addition, the value added in the process of S4407 will be notified until the value added in the process of S4407 reaches a predetermined value or until the value of the time period counter 223i is subtracted to a predetermined value. It may be configured such that the variation time (variation time of special symbols) included in a plurality of winning commands is totaled and notified. Thereby, it is possible to make the length of the short period of remaining time added in one additional notification performance surprising. In addition, in this case, for example, if the same variable time as the variable time (for example, 50 seconds) is added to the time short period counter 223i that is set when winning a special symbol jackpot, an additional notification effect will be displayed. It is preferable to configure the system so that an additional notification effect of 50 seconds is executed. With this configuration, the player can be made to think that he or she has won a special symbol jackpot, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the interruption flag 223m is on in the process of S4405 (S4405: Yes), and if it is determined that the special hit flag 223n is on in the process of S4406 (S4406: Yes), the extraction The fluctuation time obtained is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j (S4410), and the process proceeds to S4411 described above.

When the process of S4411 is finished, the value of the prefetch counter 223h is decremented by 1 (S4409), then other processes are executed (S4412), and then this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the status command reception process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this status command reception process (S4212). This status command reception process (S4212) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is executed according to the set gaming status. This is to execute processing for setting different display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the status command reception process (S4213) will be explained below.

When the status command reception process (S4213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the currently set gaming status is to be changed (S4501). Here, it is determined whether the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223g and the gaming state indicated by the currently received state command are different. In the process of S4501, if it is determined that there is no change in the gaming state (S4501: No), the process of S4502 to S4508 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S4509. If it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (S4501: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4502).

In the process of S4502, if it is determined that the gaming state after the change is the normal state (if the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4502: Yes), then the current state is the normal state. It is determined whether or not there is a winning result (S4503). If it is determined that the normal symbol is not hitting (S4503: No), a display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4504), and the information indicated by the status command received this time is stored in the subordinate status setting area 223g (setting ) (S4509), and this process ends.

Here, the command set in the process of S4504 is notified to the display control device 114, so that the variable effect display in the normal state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the types ( mode, background) and outputs a command indicating the type to the display control device 114.

With this configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each gaming state set on the audio lamp control device 113 side. In other words, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set gaming state and a variable pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of special symbols are output to the display control device 114. Based on the type command and common command received on the display control device 114 side, display data is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current gaming state and the received variation pattern. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the case where the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, The configuration is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the display data after setting from the display control device 114 side to the audio lamp control device 113 side, and confirms that the confirmation information received on the audio lamp control device 113 side is appropriate. A determination means is provided to determine whether the information is present, and if the determination result is determined to be inappropriate, a simple display variation pattern command that indicates appropriate information is set, and the content of the display data that has already been set is changed. It is preferable to configure the display data to be rewritten to simple display data.

With this configuration, when appropriate display data is not set for various commands received by the audio lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110, simple display data indicating appropriate information can be set. It is possible to display a variable effect display based on the simple display data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to execution of a variable effect display with content different from the actual game result (special symbol lottery result). In addition, examples of the above-mentioned simple display data include display data that displays a special mode that does not correspond to any gaming state (for example, a black background mode), and display data that displays a variable display of the fourth symbol. It is sufficient to use display data that has a smaller amount of data than the display data used in normal variable effect display.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned configuration is used, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the display variation pattern command is set on the audio lamp control device 113 side based on the current gaming state and the received variation pattern. It may be configured to do so.

Returning to FIG. 64, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4502, if it is determined that the gaming state after the change is not the normal state (if the status command received this time is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4502: No), then the gaming state after the change is It is determined whether the gaming state is in a time saving state (S4507), and if it is determined that the gaming state is in a time saving state (the status command received this time is a command indicating a time saving state) (S4507: Yes), V rush mode is indicated. A display command is set (S4508), and the process proceeds to S4509 described above. If it is determined that the gaming state is not in a time saving state (S4507: No), the process of S4508 is skipped and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4503, if it is determined that the current normal symbol is hitting (S4503: Yes), a display command indicating the extension mode is set (S4505), and the extension flag 223p is set to ON ( S4506), the process proceeds to S4509 described above. When the display command is set in the process of S4505, it is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 of FIG. 60) of the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. The display mode showing the extended screen shown in b) is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the stop-related process (S4215), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop-related process (S4215). This stop-related process (S4215) sets the display mode when a stop-related command (a command set when the stop display is performed based on the lottery result of another special symbol lottery) is received from the main controller 110. The processing for this is executed.

When the stop-related process (S4215) is executed, first, it is determined whether the stop-related command received this time is a special map confirmation command (S4601). If it is determined that it is a special figure confirmation command (S4601: Yes), a display command for stopping fluctuation is set (S4602), and the process moves to S4603. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure confirmation command has not been received (S4601: No), the process of S4602 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4603.

In the process of S4603, it is determined whether the stop-related command received this time is a special map temporary stop command (S4603). If it is determined that the special pattern temporary stop command has been received (S4603: Yes), the interruption flag 223m is set to ON (S4604), a display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special pattern is set (S4605), and the Move to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure temporary stop command has not been received (S4603: No), the process of S4604 and S4605 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4606.

When the display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special symbol is set in the process of S4605, the display mode (letters "STOP") indicating that the special symbol is temporarily stopped is displayed as shown in FIG. 13(b). At the same time, the subtraction display of the timer 812 for indicating the remaining period of the special symbol variation is interrupted.

In the process of S4606, it is determined whether the stop-related command received this time is a special symbol fluctuation restart command (S4606). This special symbol fluctuation restart command is a command that is set when the special symbol fluctuation is restarted in the special symbol fluctuation execution process of the main controller 110 (see S206 in FIG. 44) (see S702 in FIG. 44). . If it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation restart command has been received (S4606: Yes), the interruption flag 223m is set to OFF (S4607), and a display command indicating the special symbol fluctuation restart is set (S4608).

Then, it is determined whether the unreported information was updated during the period when the interruption flag 223m was set to ON (S4609). In this process, it is determined whether information indicating a new variable time is stored in the unreported period storage area 223j and the unreported pending number storage area 223k. In the process of S4609, if it is determined that there is no update (S4609: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an update (S4609: Yes), the value of the time period counter 223i is added in accordance with the update content (S4610), and the unreported period storage area 223j, the unreported pending number storage area 223k, The information in the notified pending number storage area 223s is updated, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation restart command has not been received (S4606: No), this process is ended as is.

The value added by the process of S4610 is the value of the timer 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the interruption flag 223 is set to OFF, that is, when the special symbol variation is restarted. is additionally reported at the same time as starting subtraction. With this configuration, when the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol is stopped, the attention is paid to the various winning games, and the additional notification effect is executed all at once after the completion of the various winning games, so the various winning games are Even after the end of the game, the player can expect that the remaining period of V Rush will be added in a large amount.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the general map related process (S4217) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this common map related process (S4217). This general drawing related process (S4217) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The details of the general map related process (S4217) will be explained below.

When the general pattern related process (S4217) is executed, first, it is determined whether the currently received general pattern related command is a general pattern fluctuation pattern command (S4701). If it is determined that the received command is a regular pattern fluctuation pattern command (S4701: Yes), a small hit start command for display is set (S4702), and then this process is ended.

In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the received command is not a regular pattern fluctuation pattern command (S4701: No), then it is determined whether the currently received general pattern related command is a regular pattern hit start command. (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is a normal winning start command (S4703: Yes), a small winning winning command for display is set (S4704), and then this process is ended.

In the process of S4703, if it is determined that the received command is not a regular map start command (S4703: No), then it is determined whether the currently received general map related command is a special electric activation command (S4705). ). If it is determined that the received command is a special electric activation command (S4705: Yes), a V winning command for display is set (S4706), and then it is determined whether the extension flag 223p is set to on (S4707). ), if it is determined that it is set to on, that is, in the accessory winning game executed when the ball enters the special electric actuating port 643 in the general figure winning game being executed at the end timing of the time saving state. If it is determined that there is one (S4707: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set to OFF (S4708), and then this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4707 that the extension flag 223p is not on (S4707: No), the process of S4708 is skipped and the present process ends.

In the process of S4705, if it is determined that the received command is not a special electric activation command (S4705: No), then it is determined whether the general map related command received this time is a general map hit end command (S4709). ). If it is determined that the received command is not a normal map winning end command (S4709: No), this process is ended as is. If it is determined that the received command is a normal map winning end command (S4709: Yes), then it is determined whether the extension flag 223p is on (S4710). If it is determined that the extension flag 223p is on (S4710: Yes), the extension flag 223p is set to OFF (S4711), a display command indicating the end of V rush is set (S4712), and the V rush flag 223q is set to OFF. It is set to off (S4713), and then this process ends.

In the process of S4710, if it is determined that the extension flag 223p is off (S4710: No), a display command indicating the end of winning the normal map is set (S4714), and then this process ends.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when the normal symbol winning game is executed with the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state stopped, the extension flag 223p is set in order to extend the V rush effect. Set to on. Then, the end timing of the V rush effect is varied depending on the progress of the special electric game executed based on the normal figure winning game. Specifically, if the ball does not enter the special electric actuation port 643 in a game with a common figure, the V rush effect is ended at the end timing of the game with a common figure, and the ball enters the special electric actuation port 643. When a prize is won and a game to win an accessory is executed, the V rush performance is ended at the end timing of the game to win the accessory. In addition, when a ball enters the V winning hole 165 in the accessory winning game, the performance based on the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed with priority.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the period during which he can aim for the V jackpot game regardless of the gaming state, so it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the hit-related process (S4219), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the win-related process (S4219). In this win-related process (S4219), as a result of the special symbol lottery, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the jackpot game or the accessory winning game that is executed when a jackpot or accessory winning is won. The main control device 110 performs processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a jackpot or an accessory is won.

In addition, when receiving a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a winning game (jackpot game, accessory winning game), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated, A process for setting a command for the number of prize balls to be displayed based on the cumulative result is executed.

In the win-related process (S4219), first, it is determined whether the received command is a jackpot-related command by the command determination process (see FIG. 61) (S4801). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4801: Yes), jackpot-related processing is executed (S4802), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 68, the jackpot related process (S4802), which is one process in the win related process (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4802). The jackpot-related process is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a jackpot game to be executed when a jackpot is won, and when a jackpot is won, the main control device Processing corresponding to various commands sent from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related processing (S4802), first, it is determined whether the winning-related command received in the winning-related processing (S4801 in FIG. 67) is a jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined that it is a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S4902). The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 60). The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, it displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect that suggests the start of a jackpot.

Next, it is determined whether the V rush flag 223q is on (S4903). If it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is on (S4903: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot is a special win (jackpot B) (S4911), and it is determined that it is a special win (jackpot B). If so (S4911: Yes), the special winning flag 223n is set to OFF (S4912), and the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4911 that the current jackpot is not a special win (jackpot B) (S4911: No), the process of S4912 is skipped and the process is directly ended.

In the process of S4903, if it is determined that the V rush flag 223q is off (S4903: No), the number of time savings awarded for the jackpot executed this time is extracted (S4904) and stored in the winning information storage area 223b. The selected special drawing winning information is read out (S4905), the target is selected with the number of time savings extracted from the read out special drawing winning information as the upper limit (S4906), and the number of selected special drawing winning information is stored in the unreported pending number storage area 223k. (S4907), calculates the fluctuation time included in the selected special drawing winning information (S4908), stores the calculated fluctuation time in the unannounced period storage area 223j (S4909), and turns on the V rush flag 223q. settings (S4910), and then ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4901: No), then it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S4913). If the number of rounds command has been received (S4913: Yes), the number of rounds command for display is set based on the number of rounds (S4914), and this process ends. Note that in this embodiment, since information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as a round number command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, if the main control device 110 transmits information indicating that a new round has started as a round update command, the voice lamp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the 113, a round number accumulation counter is provided that accumulates the number of received round update commands. The configuration may be such that the number is calculated and a display round number command is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4913, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4913: No), it is determined whether the jackpot end command has been received (S4915). If it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S4915: No), this process is ended as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S4915: Yes), the jackpot end process is executed (S4916) and this process is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 69, the jackpot end process (S4919), which is one process in the jackpot related process (S4802 in FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S4919).

In the jackpot end process (S4919), the number of time reductions given in the jackpot to be executed this time is set in the look-ahead counter 223h (S5001), and the value in the announced pending number storage area 223s is subtracted from the value of the look-ahead counter 223h ( S5002), and then reads the value stored in the unreported pending number storage area 223k (S5003). Next, it is determined whether the value of the unreported pending number storage area 223k is 1 or more (S5004). If it is determined that the value of the unreported pending number storage area 223k is smaller than 1 (0) (S5004: No), an additional notification effect is executed on the ending screen of the jackpot game (see FIG. 15(a)). Since this is not possible (because there is no variable time information to be added), a command for displaying no addition is set (S5014), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5004, if it is determined that the value of the unannounced pending number storage area 223k is greater than or equal to 1 (S5004: Yes), that is, if the value of the pending notification number storage area 223k is determined to be 1 or more (S5004: Yes), then the If there is any special symbol fluctuation time information), the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is subtracted in accordance with the read value (S5005), and the value of S5005 is subtracted from the value stored in the unannounced pending number storage area 223k. The value corresponding to the value subtracted in the process is cleared (S5006), and the variable time stored in the unreported period storage area 223j is read (S5007).

After that, it is determined whether the winning information (special figure pending information) included in the winning information storage area 223b includes winning information indicating a special win (jackpot B) (S5008), and if the winning information is not included. If it is determined that there is no change (S5008: No), an additional command for display corresponding to the read out fluctuation time is set (S5009), and among the fluctuation time stored in the unreported period storage area 223j, the current time The period corresponding to the variable time used for the additional effect is cleared (S5010), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5008, if it is determined that the winning information storage area 223b contains winning information indicating the winning of the special win (jackpot B) (S5008: Yes), A display command corresponding to the variable time is set (S5011). In other words, if the special symbol fluctuations that are executed one after another are special symbol fluctuations that correspond to special winnings, even if it is possible to notify by adding up the fluctuation time of 4 special symbols as an additional notification effect. Even if it is, only the fluctuation time is the sum of the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation (special winning fluctuation) corresponding to the special winning winning. is used in the additional announcement production.

Furthermore, a display command indicating the special mode (heaven mode) is set (S5012), the special winning flag 223n is set on (S5013), and the process moves to the process of S5010 described above.

As a result, if there is winning information indicating that a special win (jackpot B) has been won in the reserved special symbols at the end of the jackpot game, the game goes to the special mode (heaven mode) as shown in FIG. 17(a). An effect notifying the transition will be displayed, as well as a variation time of ``220 seconds'' until the special winning variation ends. Therefore, the period until the special winning game (the jackpot game where jackpot B is set) is executed can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, after the special winning game ends, the time saving state is set again, so the player can play the game in the heaven mode with peace of mind. Furthermore, since the player is not informed of the variation time of special symbols that are stored after the special winning variation, the period of the time saving state (V rush) set after the jackpot game ends until the jackpot game ends. It can be made difficult for players to understand.

Returning to FIG. 67, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4801, if it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot related command (S4801: No), it is determined whether the received command is a jackpot related command (S4803). When it is determined that the received command is an accessory hit related command (S4803: Yes), accessory hit related processing (S4804) is executed, and the present process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the accessory hit-related process (S4804), which is one process in the win-related process (S4219 in FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory hit related process (S4804). The accessory winning related process is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute a performance display corresponding to the accessory winning game that is executed when the accessory winning is executed. When executed, processes corresponding to various commands sent from the main control device 110 are executed.

In the accessory winning related process (S4804), first, it is determined whether the winning related command received in the winning related processing (S4219 in FIG. 67) is an accessory winning start command (S5101).

In the process of S5101, if it is determined that the accessory hit start command has been received (S5101: Yes), a display accessory hit start command is set (S5102), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the received command is not an accessory hit start command (S5101: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a V entrance passage command (S5103) .

In the process of S5103, if it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S5103: Yes), a winning command per display accessory is set (S5104), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, if it is determined that the received command is not a V entrance passage command (S5103: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a V entrance passage command (S5105).

In the process of S5105, if it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S5105: Yes), a display V per command is set (S5106), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5105, if it is determined that the received command is not a V passing command (S5105: No), then it is determined whether the received command is an ending command (S5107). If it is determined that the received command is not an ending command (S5107: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S5107: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S5108), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 67, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4803, if it is determined that the received command is not a hit-related command (S4803: No), it is determined whether a prize ball command has been received (S4805). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4805: No), this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4805: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of a prize ball counter (not shown) (S4806), A prize ball number command for display corresponding to the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition is set (S4807), and this process ends.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls command received during the period in which the V rush flag 223q is set to ON (advantageous continuous period) is configured to be accumulated in a prize ball counter. The configuration is such that information indicating the number of prize balls according to the cumulative value of the prize ball number counter is displayed during winning games (jackpot games, accessory winning games) or during the V rush performance (Fig. 12 (See display area HR2 in (c)).

With this configuration, the cumulative number of pitches acquired during the period (advantageous continuation period) from when the time saving state (V rush) is set until the end of the V rush can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. I can do it.

In this embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is configured to be displayed during the advantageous continuation period, but it is also possible to notify the player of the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period. For example, the number of prize balls acquired in jackpot games and the number of prize balls acquired in accessory winning games may be displayed separately during the advantageous continuation period. . In this case, the winning game state (during a jackpot, hitting a role object) at the time of receiving the prize ball command is determined based on the information set in the secondary state setting area 223g, and the number of prize balls is accumulated for each determination result. It would be good to have a means to do so. Thereby, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuous period can be easily classified.

Furthermore, the number of prize balls acquired during one game period within the advantageous continuation period (the combined period of the jackpot game period and the potential state period until the next jackpot game is executed) is accumulated and displayed. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is preferable to provide a storage means for storing the cumulative number of prize balls acquired within one game period as history information, and to display the information stored in the storage means as history.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of V jackpot games executed based on special electric games during the V rush period is cumulatively displayed (see display area HR1 in FIG. 12(c)). However, as mentioned above, when using a configuration that cumulatively displays the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuous period, the number of times the special symbol lottery result was a lottery result (jackpot) that was advantageous to the player. It may be configured to display the lottery result of the special symbol or the lottery probability of the lottery result being advantageous to the player (big win).

With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the lottery results of special symbols executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period. can be made to do so.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 71) sets the special symbol based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. A process of setting a display variation pattern command and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Furthermore, based on the extracted stop type (Jackpot A to Jackpot C), a process is executed to set a display special figure stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether the special symbol fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5201). If it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223d is off (S5201: No), it means that the special figure variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process moves to S5205. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223d is on (S5201: Yes), the special figure variation start flag 223d is set to off (S5202).

Then, in the process of S4302 of the special figure variation start process (see S4204 of FIG. 62) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 of FIG. 61), the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 Based on the variation pattern related to this, a variation pattern command for displaying the special symbol is set (S5203), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is subtracted by 1 (S5204), and the process proceeds to S5205.

The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5203 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 60) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 60). Ru. The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed in the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating the gaming state.

In the process of S5205, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e is set to on (S5205), and if it is determined that it is not set to on (S5205: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to on (S5205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to off (S5206), the extracted stop type is set as is (S5207), and the special figure for display is stopped. A type command is set (S5208), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the effect update process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this effect update process (S4111). This effect update process (S4111) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and updates the values of various counters set during the V rush period. , executes a process for setting a performance mode based on the updated counter value.

In the effect update process (S4111), first, it is determined whether the interruption flag 223m is set to on (S5300), and if the interruption flag 223m is set to on (S5300: Yes), the process moves to S5309. Then, this process ends. On the other hand, if the interruption flag 223m is not set to ON, that is, if the special symbol fluctuation is not interrupted (S5300: No), then it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r is greater than 0 or not. (S5301). If it is determined that the value of the variable time counter 223r is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S5301: No), the process moves to S5309. If it is determined that the value of the variable time counter is greater than 0 (S5301: Yes), the value of the variable time counter is updated (S5302), and then it is determined whether the value of the time period counter 223i is greater than 0. (S5303). If it is determined that the value of the time period counter 223i is 0 (S5303: No), this process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S5303, if it is determined that the value of the time and short period counter 223i is larger than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the time and short period counter 223i is updated (S5304), and then the value of the time and short period counter 223i after the update is It is determined whether the value of is 0 (S5305). If it is determined that the updated value of the time/duration counter 223i is not 0 (S5305: No), a display command corresponding to the value of the time/duration counter 223i is set (S5306). The display command set here, like other display commands, is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113. is output. Then, image data is created in the display control device 114 and displayed as a display mode of the timer 812 displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the V rush (see FIG. 13(a)).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the variable time counter is a value indicating a remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307). In the process of S5307, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r is a value indicating a remaining period of 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is small is set (S5308), The process moves to S5309. When the display command is set in the process of S5308, it is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 of FIG. 60) of the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 60), and is sent to the player. On the other hand, a performance mode (for example, an unlucky performance) is set to indicate that the remaining time of the special symbol variation being executed is short. Thereby, the player can play the game while selecting whether or not to execute the special electric game for executing the V jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation being executed is 5 seconds (S5307: Yes), a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is short is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, before executing the process of S5308, a lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to set a display command indicating that the remaining variation time is small, and the lottery process is executed. It may be configured such that a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is small is set only when it is determined that a display command is set based on the result of the above. With this configuration, the performance mode (for example, unlucky performance) to indicate that the remaining time of the special symbol variation being executed is short is not set (the third symbol display device 81 displays the unlucky performance). (is not being executed), it can be made difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is long or short.

In addition, in the process of S5307, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r indicates a remaining period of 5 seconds and is not a value (S5307: No), the fluctuation time of the next fluctuation (next execution) is determined from the winning information storage area 223b. (S5313), and the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the fluctuation time counter 223r (remaining number of seconds of the special symbol fluctuation being executed) is determined in the process of S5313. It is determined whether it is larger (longer) than the number of seconds indicating the read fluctuation time of the next fluctuation (S5314).

In the process of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (the remaining seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) indicates the variation time of the next variation read in the process of S5313. If it is determined that it is larger (longer) than the number of seconds (S5314: Yes), the current situation is advantageous to the player, that is, when a V jackpot game is executed, the V set after the V jackpot game is A display command indicating a lucky time is set to notify the player that the rush period is likely to be long (S5315), and the process moves to S5309. On the other hand, in the process of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (the remaining seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is the variation time of the next variation read in the process of S5313. If it is determined that the number of seconds is not greater than (shorter than) (S5314: No), the process of S5315 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5309.

When the display command is set in the process of S5315, it is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 of FIG. 60) of the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. The display mode of the lucky time effect shown in b) is set. With this configuration, the player can grasp the period during the V rush period that is more advantageous to the player, so it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the V rush period. In addition, in this embodiment, the execution trigger for the lucky time performance is set when the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is longer than the variation time of the next special symbol variation by 10 seconds or more. There is no limit to this, as long as the player can be informed of the period during which the remaining fluctuation time will be longer if the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted, for example, regardless of the fluctuation time of the next special symbol fluctuation, The execution of the lucky time performance may be triggered by determining that the remaining period of the special symbol variation is longer than a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 50 seconds).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the process of S5314, the value obtained by adding 10 seconds to the number of seconds indicated by the value of the variation time counter 223r (the remaining seconds of the special symbol variation being executed) is higher than the value read in the process of S5313. Although the configuration is such that the process of S5315 is always executed when the number of seconds indicating the variation time of the next variation is larger (longer), the process of S5315 is not limited to this, for example, before executing the process of S5315, A lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to set a display command indicating that the remaining fluctuation time is long, and only when the result of the lottery process determines that a display command is to be set, the remaining fluctuation time is long. The configuration may be such that a display command indicating this is set. With this configuration, the effect mode (for example, lucky time effect) to indicate that the remaining time of the special symbol variation being executed is long is not set (the third symbol display device 81 displays the lucky time effect). (is not being executed), it can be made difficult for the player to determine whether the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is long or short.

On the other hand, in the process of S5305, if it is determined that the value of the updated time period counter 223i is 0 (S5305: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is greater than 0 (S5310). If it is determined that the value of the look-ahead counter 223h is larger than 0 (S5310: Yes), the special symbol variation is not executed even though the end conditions of the time saving state are not met, so the V rush A display command indicating "???" for continuation is set (S5311), and the process moves to S5309. The display command set in the process of S5311, like other display commands, is sent to the display control device in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113. 114. Then, image data is created in the display control device 114, and a display mode (see FIG. 19(a)) indicating that the time saving end condition is not updated is displayed during the V rush.

On the other hand, in the process of S5310, if it is determined that the value of the lookahead counter 223h is 0 (S5310: No), a display command indicating the end of V rush is set (S5312), and the V rush flag 223q is set to off. Then, the process moves to S5309. In the process of S5309, other effect update processes are executed (S5309), and this process ends.

<About the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 73, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration. , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can be used at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S6101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently stored are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the command to be executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. I can do it.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S6101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further transfers the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S6101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a predetermined amount of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. In addition, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S6101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the process of S6102 and S6102 multiple times, the process of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 73. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer (see S7502 in FIG. 85(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)), a simple Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the special drawing ball entrance 64 (starting prize winning), and the main controller 110 issues an instruction to start the variable performance by controlling the audio lamp. If the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, and since it takes time to transfer the data, the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process in S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75(a). FIG. 75(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75(b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt processing, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each process will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75(b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is used as the third symbol instead of the power-on image. In order to display the command on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview effect and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 38, and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S6307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (jackpot A, jackpot B, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete miss) indicated by the display stop type command is detected. The corresponding stop type table and stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process moves to S6304.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, it is first determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 77(a). FIG. 77(a) is a flowchart showing the variable pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to actually display fluctuations that are longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is extracted, and at the same time, the content is transferred to the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data has been set in the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 76. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77(b). FIG. 77(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of jackpot A to G, small hit A to C, out of reach, or completely out) indicated by the display stop type command is created. (S6601), compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed, and displays the stop type in the third symbol display device. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. It is set to on (S6603) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S6602 is specified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in S6603, and the identified stopped symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss, in reality, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), opening command processing is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(a). FIG. 78(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display command is If there is an ending command (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a display variation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display If there is a fluctuation stop command (S6414: Yes), the fluctuation stop command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80(a). FIG. 80(a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

This display variation stop command is the end timing of the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 73), that is, the end timing of each special symbol in the main control device 110. A display stop command ( The normal stop command) and various display commands set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the audio lamp control device 113 are shown.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to independently (in parallel) execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, and further , when one special symbol is stopped (determined) and displayed as a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a jackpot), the other special symbol that is fluctuating is changed to the end of a predetermined fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Regardless of the presence or absence of the error, the system is configured to forcibly stop and display a symbol indicating a failure.

Then, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command set to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the special symbol from the main control device 110, it executes the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70). , a display command (forced (stop command).

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the above-mentioned normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The configuration is such that a stop display is executed based on a forced stop command received later. That is, the forced stop command is configured to be processed with priority over the normal stop command. Thereby, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be reliably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the control content of the main controller 110.

In addition, the display variation stop command also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop that is set in the variation stop processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S4217 in FIG. 70). When a (temporary stop command for display) is received, a data table is determined in which display data in which a symbol to be stopped and displayed slightly oscillates is set as the variable stop display data.

In the fluctuation stop command processing, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the determined fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6931, time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6933). S6934). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6935), the fluctuation stop command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification command is determined. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), display notification command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the additional effect command processing (S6415) will be explained with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a flowchart showing notification command processing. This notification command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the audio lamp control device 113.

This notification command is one of the various notification commands that are set when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal conditions set in the main control device 110 and is output to the display control device 114. This is a process executed when the display control device 114 receives a display notification command.

In the notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer. 233d (S6951). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6955), the notification command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In addition, in this embodiment, among the various notification commands set by the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 discriminates only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and related commands such as light emitting commands other than display commands, voice output commands, and accessory drive commands are also received once, and the display control device 114 processes them. The configuration may be such that the related command is output to the corresponding control device with information added to indicate the data content (display mode) set in .

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and the rear image is changed. If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to on (S7001), which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back side A, B), the bit corresponding to the back side image type indicated by the back side image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), this back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the changed back image type is determined from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified that either the back surface A or B should be displayed according to the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, based on the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the RAM type ( (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 76. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and if there is an error command, it is determined that there is no command. If (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 81(b). FIG. 81(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S7102, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 76. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), the processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are selected from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77(b)), which are the processing corresponding to each command. Performs processing to discard the command without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) that is executed in this case, in the process of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S7201: No ), it is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process skips steps S7202 to S7204, and proceeds to the process S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing.

In the warning image setting process, after the process in S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 82. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), then the process moves to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 82, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S7206, as well as the warning image developed earlier, and , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the performance time of the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag is on or not. (S7209).

As a result, if the final display flag is off (S7209: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. setting (S7210), and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag indicating that the confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state (S7214), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), returning to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S7215, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so a certain period of time has elapsed since the end of the confirmed display effect. Later, processing for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration performance is in progress is set to ON (S7221), and this process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable production is not received after the confirmed display production is finished, the demonstration production will be automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can set the content of the drawing.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and that the demo effect has ended, so the display setting process is ended. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image ends, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined period of time. A process is performed in which a display data table specifying that the image of is to be displayed in a stopped state is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. First, FIG. 85(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off (S7501: No), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 85(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not finished (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process in S7601, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed with . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not finished (S7706: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process moves to S7707. Further, as a result of the process in S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process was completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag 233w to off (S7710), the Among the back image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process moves to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the displayed stop type information is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, among the image data used for that back image, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 is Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. I can do it.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 38) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (the storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and develops the images by overwriting into the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process in S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 107. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in part of the configuration of the game board 13, part of the configuration of the main control device 110, and part of the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113. are doing.

In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the general electric winning device 640 is configured to have a special electric operating opening 643 and an out opening 644 as ball entry openings into which winning balls can enter. was. The game is configured such that when a ball enters the special electric operating port 643, an accessory winning game is executed. However, in the first embodiment described above, there is only one operating port for executing the accessory winning game, and it is not possible to provide variation to the accessory winning game, so the game becomes monotonous. In addition to getting bored with the game early, the game with the accessory is executed with the same movement pattern every time, so the accessory game is executed at a timing that makes it easy for the ball to enter the V winning hole 165 (special There is a problem in that it becomes easier to play a game (by placing a ball into the operating port 643).

In contrast, in the second embodiment, a second special electric operating port 1643 is newly provided in the general electric winning device 640, and the ball that has won in the general electric winning device 640 enters the special electric operating port 643 and the second special electric operating port 1643. The difference is that the system is configured so that a prize can be won at either the exit 1643 or the exit 644.

Furthermore, it is configured such that a game with different opening patterns for winning the accessory is executed depending on whether the ball enters the special electric operating port 643 or the second special electric operating port 1643. The accessory winning game, which is executed when the ball enters the second special electric actuating port 1643, is better than the accessory winning game, which is performed when the ball wins, than the accessory winning game, which is performed when the ball enters the second special electric operating port 1643. 165 (see FIG. 6).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more interested in the falling situation of the winning ball in the general winning device 640 during the general winning game. In addition, since a game with different movement patterns is executed depending on whether the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 or the second special electric operation opening 1643, the ball enters the V winning opening 165. It is possible to make it difficult for the game to be executed by executing the accessory game at an easy timing (to make the ball enter the special electric operating port 643).

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, in contrast to the various performances executed in the first embodiment described above, in the case where a game to win a role model is executed during the time saving state, the remaining fluctuation time of the normal symbol being executed is The first game method suggestion performance is executed based on the first game method suggestion performance, and the first game method suggestion performance is executed based on the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) that is interrupted when the accessory winning game is executed during the time saving state. 2 is different in that it is configured to be newly executable.

In the first embodiment described above, as described above with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19, the remaining duration of the time saving state, the normal symbol The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display an effect for notifying the lottery results, the execution status of the game winning the common symbol, and the execution status of the game winning the accessory. It was intended to inform players in an easy-to-understand manner.

However, with the performance content executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, although it is possible to inform the player of the gaming situation during the time saving state (during V rush) in an easy-to-understand manner, , it was not possible to allow the player to select a gaming method in order to make the player play a better game. In other words, if a game per accessory is executed that interrupts the subtraction of the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation that is the remaining period of V Rush (the period until the special symbol variation ends when the time-saving termination condition is satisfied), the current situation However, by placing a plurality of balls into the V winning device 65, it is better to end the game with the winning object as soon as possible while aiming to win the balls into the V winning hole 165, or by placing multiple balls into the V winning hole 165. It has not been possible to suggest (inform) the player whether it is better to give up on winning balls and continue playing the game with the accessory for as long as possible.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the above-mentioned first gaming method suggestion performance and second gaming method suggestion performance are configured to be executable, various suggestions executed to the player. It becomes possible to select the game method of the accessory winning game based on the content of the performance. Therefore, the game during the V rush is executed according to the gaming method arbitrarily selected by the player, and the advantage during the V rush can be varied depending on the selection result of the gaming method, so that the various suggested effects that are executed are In contrast, it is possible to make the players interested. Furthermore, since the degree of advantage during V Rush can be varied depending on the player's selection result, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

First, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the configuration of the general electricity winning device 640 used in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the universal winning device 640 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a winning ball of the device 640 can flow down to the second special electric operation port 1643. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration inside the general-purpose power winning device 640 is different. are the same. Identical configurations will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 88, the general power winning device 640 of the second embodiment is different from the general power winning device 640 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 3) on the lower end side of the second partition wall 640k2 (see FIG. 3). In order to form a fourth flow path 641d into which a ball can flow from the opening formed by the notch, the second partition wall 640k2 The difference is that a fourth partition wall 640k4 is provided, which is connected to the lower end side.

In order to cause the second flow path 641b to flow down toward the special electric operation port 643 without the balls flowing down the first flow path 641a flowing into the fourth flow path 641d, the second flow path 641b and the fourth flow path The normal position (see FIG. 88) where the ball flows down the first flow path 641a blocks the flow path where the ball flows down the second flow path 641b and enters the special electric operation port 643, and the fourth The difference is that a third movable valve 1643 is provided which can be changed to the operating position (see FIG. 89) that guides the flow path to the flow path 641d.

Although detailed description will be given later, this third movable valve 1643 is configured to be variably operated by driving the third movable valve solenoid 209f connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110, and When the control device 110 starts controlling the operation of the normal game, it is variably operated between the above-mentioned normal position and the operating position in a predetermined variable pattern. The third movable valve 1643 is located in the operating position when the third movable valve solenoid 209 is set to ON (when energized), and when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF (when not energized). ) in its normal position. Therefore, it is located at the normal position in a state where no game is being executed. In addition, in the present second embodiment, the game contents (actions) of the accessory winning game that are executed when a ball is won in the special electric operation opening 643 and when a ball is placed in the second special electric operation opening 1643 are changed. It is configured so that when the ball is won in the second special electric operation opening 1643, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the V winning opening 165 during the accessory winning game. Therefore, when the third movable valve solenoid 209d is set to OFF, by placing the third movable valve 1642 in the normal position where the ball cannot enter the second special electric operating port 1643, the ball may be illegally placed in the first prize. It is possible to suppress the act of winning a prize using the 2 special electric operating port 1643.

Further, the movable range of the third movable valve 1643 is the second state in which the ball flowing down the first flow path 641a is guided to the third flow path 641c (see FIG. 88). It is designed to be within a range that does not come into contact with the movable valve 642. With this configuration, the third movable valve 1642 can be moved without considering the movable condition of the second movable valve 642.

When the second movable valve 642 is in the first state and the third movable valve 1642 is in the operating position, as shown in FIG. It is received on the upper surface of the valve 1642 and guided to the second special electric operation port 1643. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the third movable valve 1642 is variably operated in a predetermined variable pattern upon the start of the normal game, and the operating position (see FIG. 89) is It is configured to repeatedly perform a variable operation in which the position is maintained for 0.2 seconds and the normal position (see FIG. 88) is maintained for 1.5 seconds. In other words, about 85% of the balls passing through the second movable valve 642 located in the first state enter the special electric operation port 643, and about 15% enter the second special electric operation port 1643. are doing. Therefore, during the normal game, the special electric actuating hole 643 becomes an actuating hole in which it is easier to win a ball than the second special electric actuating hole 1643.

Furthermore, when the ball wins in the second special electric actuation port 1643 than in the case where the ball wins in the special electric actuation port 643, it is easier for the ball to enter the V winning hole 165 in the accessory winning game to be executed. It is configured as follows. Therefore, in the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, in the special electric game aiming at the V jackpot game using the normal symbol lottery as an opportunity, the game result during the normal symbol winning game (in which operation port does the ball hit? Since the ease with which the ball enters the V-winning slot 165 during the game to win a prize varies depending on whether the player wins a prize or not. This will make the player pay close attention to the game, which can improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the regular game played during the time saving state, whether the operating port where the ball wins is the special electric operating port 643 or the second special electric operating port 1643 is determined by the third movable Since it is determined by the variable operation of the valve 1642, the operating port where the ball is likely to win does not change depending on the regular game played, and it is expected that the ball will always enter the second special electric operating port 1643. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the first type of winning pattern that is set when a winning is won in a normal symbol lottery. About 85% of the balls that passed through the second movable valve 642 located in the state enter the special electric operating port 643, and about 15% enter the second special electric operating port 1643. A game with a normal normal figure is executed. The normal normal pattern winning type to be played, and the advantageous normal pattern winning type in which an advantageous normal pattern winning game in which a ball enters the second special electric operating port 1643 at a higher rate than the normal normal pattern winning game is executed. It may be configured to be configurable.

By configuring this way, for players who aim for V jackpot games through special electric games, in all of the normal symbol lottery results (set common symbol winning type), common symbol winning games, and accessory winning games, It is possible to make the player pay attention, and it is possible to make the player more motivated to play the special electric game.

<About the content of the performance executed in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91, characteristic contents of various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 90(a) shows a state in which a game with a long win on a regular figure and a game with a hit on an accessory are being executed overlappingly during the time saving state (V rush), and the remaining period of the game with a win on a long figure with a predetermined number. FIG. 90(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the time is less than the period (less than 15 seconds), and FIG. A schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the remaining time of the long winning game is longer than a predetermined period (15 seconds or more) in a state where the hitting game and the hitting game are being executed overlappingly. It is. Note that the same display modes as those displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 described in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. do.

In this embodiment, similar to the first embodiment described above, the time saving state is configured to continue until the special symbol fluctuation that satisfies the end condition of the time saving state is completed, and during the time saving state (special symbol fluctuation When the accessory winning game is executed during (middle), the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted). In other words, while the accessory winning game is being executed, the remaining period of the time saving state is not subtracted. Therefore, the game can be played without worrying about the remaining period of the time-saving state from when the game to win the accessory is executed until the ball is placed in the V winning hole 165 (V winning).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in order to execute many jackpot games (V jackpot games) during the time saving state (V rush), a long variation is required as a special symbol variation executed during the time saving state. By setting, the remaining period of the time saving state can be subtracted as much as possible by lengthening the period of the time saving state (period until the time saving end condition is satisfied) and shortening the interval at which the accessory winning game is executed. There is a way to interrupt it. The former method is based on the result of the special symbol lottery and is set regardless of the player's skill, so if a short variation time is set as a special symbol variation executed during the time saving state, the player's game There was a risk that motivation would decrease.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the length of the period from which the remaining period of the time-saving state is subtracted can be varied depending on the player's skill, so in contrast to the latter method described above, it is possible for the player to It is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm.

Here, a method will be described in which the subtraction of the remaining period of the time saving state is interrupted as much as possible by shortening the interval at which the accessory winning game is executed. The game in the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is the same as the first embodiment described above, and first, a lottery of normal symbols is executed, and a game for winning a common symbol is executed based on the winning of a common symbol. . Then, during the general figure winning game, a ball is won in the special electric operating port 643 and the second special electric operating port 1643 in the ordinary electric winning device 640 to execute the accessory winning game, and during the accessory winning game, the V winning device A game (special electric game) aiming at a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed by making a ball enter a prize (V prize) into the V prize opening 165 in 65.

The normal symbol lottery, which is the trigger for starting the special electric game, is configured so that it is not newly executed when the normal symbol lottery has already been executed or during the regular symbol winning game. In other words, the accessory winning game and the regular symbol lottery are configured to be able to be executed simultaneously. Furthermore, a plurality of end conditions are set for the accessory winning game, such as when a predetermined number (3) of balls enter the V winning device 65 during the accessory winning game, or when a predetermined period of time (per accessory winning) occurs. The accessory winning game is configured to end as the period during which the game operation scenario is updated until the end timing of the accessory winning game ends.

Therefore, by lengthening the lottery period (fluctuating period) of normal symbols, that is, the execution period of the accessory winning game that overlaps with the period when the normal symbol winning game is not executed, the normal symbol winning game can be executed. It is possible to shorten the execution period of the special symbol variation during the period when the special symbol variation is not performed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the execution interval of the accessory winning game from becoming longer due to the special symbol variation being executed during the normal symbol lottery period (during the variation period).

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of opening operation patterns are configured to be executable as a game to win a general figure, and an open state (electric accessory 640a is opened) is set to be relatively long, and an unfavorable normal pattern game in which the open state is set to be shorter than the advantageous pattern pattern game. There is. Furthermore, in the disadvantageous game winning game, after the open state in which it is possible to enter the ball into the winning device 640 is set, the closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the winning device 640 remains for a long period of time ( 15 seconds).

Even in this long-term closed state in the disadvantageous normal symbol winning game, it is virtually impossible to execute a new accessory winning game, as in the above-mentioned normal symbol fluctuation period, so In the case where the game and the disadvantageous normal symbol winning game are executed overlappingly, by lengthening the execution period of the accessory winning game, special symbol fluctuations are executed during the period in which no new accessory winning game is executed. The period can be shortened. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the execution interval of the accessory winning game from becoming longer due to the special symbol variation being executed during the closed period during the normal symbol winning game.

As mentioned above, during the V rush, we determine the disadvantageous period (difficult to execute) during which a new accessory winning game is not executed (regular symbol fluctuation period, closing period of the regular symbol winning game), and compare that unfavorable period with the special symbol fluctuation. If the game period for a special symbol change during which subtraction is interrupted overlaps with the game period for a special symbol change during a disadvantageous period, it is possible to shorten the execution period for special symbol fluctuations during a disadvantageous period by lengthening the execution period for the game for a game that is currently being executed. In this embodiment, when the disadvantageous period and the game with the accessory overlap, the player is configured to be able to be informed of this fact.

In other words, the performance content displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 allows the player to visually recognize the game situation of the normal symbol winning game during the accessory winning game. The presentation mode is configured to vary depending on the game situation of the normal figure winning game during the accessory winning game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90(a), during the execution of the game for winning the accessory (the state in which the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted), a long period of time (15 seconds) in the game for winning the disadvantageous symbol. If it is during the closing period, "10 seconds until the end of the winning pattern" is displayed in the display area HR10 as information indicating the remaining period until the end of the game (remaining period until the closing period ends). Comments will be displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "STOP continues if no prize is won by winning a prize" is displayed as a notification mode for informing the player of the advantage of lengthening the playing period of the game winning a prize. Other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13(b) of the first embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, by making the player understand the display mode of the display area HR10 and the display mode of the sub-display area Ds, the player can send the ball to the V winning device 65 for the accessory winning game that is currently being executed. A game that aims to win a V prize by winning a prize, that is, an end condition for a game to win a prize based on a ball prize, is likely to be satisfied, and the period of playing a prize to win a prize is likely to be shortened, but a jackpot game (V jackpot game) can be achieved by winning a prize. A first game that lengthens the period of the accessory winning game by executing the first game that can be aimed at, or giving up on the jackpot game (V jackpot game) by winning the V prize, and satisfying the termination condition of the accessory winning game based on the passage of time. 2 games (games in which the ball is not fired) can be selected.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 90(b), even when the game with the accessory and the long-term fluctuation of the normal symbols overlap, the player is asked to play the game method ( Information for selecting the first game, the second game) is displayed. Specifically, if the game per accessory is being executed (the special symbol variation is suspended) and the remaining period of the normal symbol variation being executed is longer than the predetermined period (15 seconds), In the display area HR11, a comment "15 seconds until the end of the normal pattern variation" is displayed as information indicating the remaining period of the normal pattern variation. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "STOP continues if no prize is won by winning a prize" is displayed as a notification mode for informing the player of the advantage of lengthening the playing period of the game winning a prize. Other display elements are the same as those in FIG. 13(b) of the first embodiment described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With this configuration, it is possible to vary the length of the period during which special symbol fluctuations are interrupted depending on the player's skill (game content to be executed). It is possible to actively play the game in the current state). In addition, no matter which game the player selects, the game is configured so that a game result that may be advantageous to the player in different respects may occur, so the game selected by the player will affect the subsequent The game results can be greatly different, and the game method can be selected more actively.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the operation pattern of the normal pattern winning game executed during the time saving state, at least an advantageous normal pattern winning game and a disadvantageous normal pattern winning game are configured to be executable, and the operation pattern is executed during the time saving state. The variation time of the normal symbols is also configured to be settable as long-term variation or short-time variation. Then, if a game to win an accessory is executed during a game to win an advantageous normal symbol, or if a game to win an accessory is executed during a short period of fluctuation of the normal symbol, the ball is placed in a V prize during the game to win an accessory. The configuration is such that it is more advantageous for the player to execute a game (first game) in which the device 65 wins a prize.

In this way, the timing (presence or absence of a disadvantageous period) of a disadvantageous period (period in which a new accessory winning game cannot be executed) during the time saving state (during V rush) is varied according to the lottery result of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the time-saving game (during V rush).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as a game to win an advantageous object, there is a game to win an advantageous object in which the ball that enters the V winning device 65 easily enters the V winning hole 165 (V winning), and a game to win the advantageous object. It is configured to be able to execute a game with a disadvantageous accessory, and when a game with an advantageous accessory is executed, it is possible to make the ball win a V prize at a rate of approximately 100% during the game with an advantageous accessory. If it is possible and a game with a disadvantageous accessory is executed, the probability of winning a V prize is approximately 1/11.

Therefore, if the accessory winning game that is executed overlapping the disadvantageous period described above is an advantageous accessory winning game, the production shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b) is configured so that it is not executed. ing. With this configuration, even though a situation occurs in which a player can easily obtain a V jackpot game, a game (second game) that does not aim to execute a V jackpot game is executed. , it is possible to prevent the player from playing excessively disadvantageous games.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 91(a) and (b), an explanation will be given of the production executed based on the length of the remaining period (remaining variation time) of the special symbol variation that is interrupted in the accessory winning game. do. FIG. 91(a) is a diagram schematically showing the display contents on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). FIG. 91(b) schematically shows the display content on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining period of the interrupted special symbol variation is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). FIG.

In this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed during a time saving state (during V rush), a time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game. The period is configured to be set as a period obtained by adding the remaining period of the suspended special symbol fluctuation to the number of time reductions (for example, 4 time reductions) set corresponding to the jackpot type of the jackpot game to be executed. are doing. In other words, the subtraction of the time saving number is started after the special symbol variation restarted after the jackpot game (the special symbol variation that was interrupted during the execution of the jackpot game) is completed.

Therefore, even if a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in which the same jackpot type is set is executed, depending on the remaining period of special symbol fluctuation at the time of the jackpot game (V jackpot game), after the jackpot game ends. The period of the new time-saving state that is set will be different. Like the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it has a gameplay that aims to win a jackpot by a game different from the special symbol lottery during the time saving state, and an element for ending the special symbol lottery during the time saving state. In the pachinko machine 10 used as (the element for setting the duration of the time saving state), it is desirable to execute the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in a state where the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation is long. However, similar to the first embodiment described above, the short remaining time mode 801 (see FIG. 12(a)) indicating the duration of the time saving state does not indicate the remaining period of each special symbol fluctuation, Information corresponding to the total time until the end of the special symbol variation where the end condition is met is displayed, and the timer 812 (see FIG. 12(b)) is used to display the information corresponding to the total time until the end of the special symbol variation where the end condition of the time saving state is met. The time is configured to be displayed as a countdown.

In other words, in the performance mode explained in the first embodiment, the player cannot grasp the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation that has been interrupted due to the execution of the accessory winning game. It was something. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to the presentation mode of the first embodiment described above, a presentation according to the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation during interruption can be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 91(a), if the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation during the interruption during the accessory winning game is 0.1 seconds (see FIG. 91(c)), the secondary In the display area Ds, the comment "It's a better chance to get a VGET on the next winning object" is displayed, and as shown in FIG. When the time is 20.1 seconds (see FIG. 91(d)), the sub-display area Ds is configured to display a comment such as "If you get VGET with this accessory, you have a great chance."

That is, in this embodiment, the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation during interruption is determined, and if the determination result is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the current game with the accessory is changed. When a ball is entered into the V winning opening 165 and a V jackpot game is executed, an effect indicating that the time saving state period (V rush period) set after the V jackpot game is likely to be shortened is displayed. If the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation that has been executed and is being interrupted is longer than the predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), a ball is won in the V winning opening 165 in the current accessory winning game, and the V jackpot game is played. When the game is executed, an effect is executed indicating that the period of the time saving state (V rush period) set after the V jackpot game is likely to become longer. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to select the gaming method during the V jackpot game based on the content of the performance to be executed (choose whether to let the ball enter the V winning hole 165 or not), and the player It becomes possible to greatly vary the gaming results during the V rush period based on the gaming method arbitrarily selected by the player.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in order to execute the performance shown in FIG. 91(a), other performance execution conditions are set. The first condition is satisfied when the winning information of a winning regular symbol is included in the winning information of the normal symbol that has already been completed, and the special symbol fluctuation that is satisfied when the special symbol fluctuation during the interruption satisfies the time-saving end condition. 2. A second condition that holds true when the time-saving final fluctuation is not the case. By setting the performance execution conditions in this way, the time saving state ends immediately after selecting a game that does not allow the ball to win a V prize during the accessory winning game that is being executed, according to the comment displayed in the sub display area Ds. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which this occurs.

Note that the execution conditions for the effects shown in FIGS. 91(a) and 91(b) described above may be the same as those used in this embodiment. If the comparison result determines that the remaining period of the suspended special symbol fluctuation is longer than the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation, the V If the performance that encourages winning is executed (see FIG. 91(b)) and it is determined that the remaining period of the suspended special symbol fluctuation is shorter, the performance that suppresses V winning during the current accessory winning game is executed (see FIG. 91(b)). 91 (see (a)) may be configured to be executed.As a result, for the period of special symbol variation that is actually executed (the period of special symbol variation that will be executed next), the suspended Since it is possible to relatively determine the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation, it is possible to execute (set) a highly accurate performance for the player, and to enhance the performance effect.

As shown above in FIGS. 90 and 91, in this embodiment, the fluctuation situation of the normal symbol during the game with the accessory hit during the V rush (while the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted), the gaming situation of the game with the regular symbol, And, based on the remaining period of the suspended special symbol variation, the player is configured to perform a performance that suggests a gaming method that may be advantageous to the player, thereby allowing the player to select a gaming method. Although it is configured to provide fun, it is not limited to this, but includes, for example, the fluctuation situation of normal symbols during a game with a winning symbol, the playing situation of a game with a winning symbol, and the situation where the game is interrupted. It may be configured to execute effects that suggest each of the remaining periods of the special symbol fluctuation, that is, to execute only situation suggestion effects that suggest various situations during the V rush period. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a player who has grasped the situational suggestion effect the enjoyment of analyzing the gaming situation during the V rush period, predicting the most advantageous gaming method by himself, and selecting the gaming method. I can do it.

<About the flow of the game during the time saving state in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93, the flow of the game in the time saving state in the second embodiment will be explained. In the second embodiment, as the regular symbol game that is executed when a winning is won in the regular symbol lottery during the time saving state, there is a regular symbol game with a short period of the regular symbol game, and a regular symbol game with a short period of the regular symbol game. It is configured to be able to execute a game with a long number of common symbols. Then, in a game with a long game per game with a long period of time, the general winning device 640 is opened with respect to the length of the entire period of the game with a general pattern, compared to a game with a short game with a game with a short pattern. The configuration is such that the ratio of the length of the period in which the state occurs is low. In other words, in a game with a short winning pattern, a ball can be won into the winning device 640 during the game with a short winning pattern, and the game can be won in a short period (about 3.5 seconds). In the game with a long winning pattern, which is an advantageous game where the game with a winning pattern ends and the period of playing the game with a winning pattern is long, it is possible to win a ball into the winning machine 640 during the game with a winning pattern, but The period until the end of the game per figure is long (approximately 17.5 seconds), resulting in a game with an unfavorable figure.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the above-mentioned disadvantageous winning game, the general winning device 640 is opened in the same variable operation as the advantageous winning game, and then the general winning device 640 is in the closed state. This is a normal symbol game where the period is set for 15 seconds, and that 15 seconds is a disadvantageous period in which the remaining period of special symbol fluctuations is wasted.

Therefore, the timing at which the above-mentioned disadvantageous period is set and the game contents of the accessory winning game will be explained with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when a game with a disadvantageous normal pattern (B with a normal pattern) is executed. When a winning result is won in the normal symbol lottery and a game with a disadvantageous symbol is executed, the ordinary winning device 640 opens for 1 second, closes for 0.5 seconds, opens for 1 second, closes for 15 seconds, and opens for 0.1 seconds. A game per figure is executed. Then, when the ball that has won in the general electric winning device 640 during the first one-second opening period enters the special electric actuation opening 643, the prize winning triggers the execution of a prize winning game.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96(b), but as shown in FIG. 92(a), the ball is not entered into the V winning device 65 during the special electric operation (accessory winning game). , If the game ends after time has elapsed, the game per accessory will end 8.1 seconds after the game starts, so the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation) will be delayed for 8.1 seconds. Variable time subtraction is interrupted. Therefore, part of the disadvantageous period that is set when a game per disadvantageous symbol (B per symbol) is executed can be overlapped with the state in which the fluctuation time of special symbol fluctuation is not subtracted, so during the disadvantageous period It is possible to reduce the variation time of the special symbol variation to be subtracted.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92(b), a specified number of balls (3 balls) are entered into the V winning device 65 during the special electric operation (accessory object winning game), and the accessory winning game is ended based on the ball winning. In this case, the period of the accessory winning game (the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted) compared to the case where the accessory winning game is ended after the time elapsed as shown in FIG. 92(a). period) becomes shorter, the variation time of the special symbol variation subtracted during the disadvantageous period becomes longer.

In such a situation, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90(a), the period until the end of the normal symbol winning game is displayed in the display area HR10, and furthermore, the special symbol variation is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Since the game method that continuously interrupts the subtraction of the variable time is displayed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to select the game method during the accessory winning game. In addition, when the ball enters the V winning hole 165 during the game to win the accessory and the V jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game period and the game to win the unfavorable normal figure (B to win the common figure) are executed. Since the disadvantageous period set when the game is played overlaps with the disadvantageous period, the setting of the disadvantageous period does not put the player at a disadvantage.

Therefore, the player is asked to either choose a gaming method that prevents the current role winning game from ending after a certain amount of time and from unnecessary subtraction of the variation time of special symbol fluctuations, or to It is possible to provide the enjoyment of winning a ball into a V winning hole 165 in a winning game (winning probability is approximately 1/11) and selecting a game method aiming at a V jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a description will be given of the flow of the game when a long variation (15 seconds), which is disadvantageous to the player, is selected as the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state. do. FIG. 93 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the game when a long variation (15 seconds), which is disadvantageous to the player, is selected as the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state. be.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, a short fluctuation of 1 second and a long fluctuation of 15 seconds are selected as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the time saving state. . Here, during the fluctuation period of the normal symbol during the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted, and since it is a period in which no game is performed per normal symbol, it becomes a disadvantageous period for the player. . Therefore, similar to the closed state period during the normal symbol winning game described above with reference to FIG. A game in a time-saving state can be more efficiently executed by making the variation period of symbol variation overlap with the variation period of special symbol variation so that the variation time of special symbol variation is not wasted during the disadvantageous period.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96(b), but as shown in FIG. 93(a), a specified number of balls (3 balls) are entered into the V winning device 65 during special electric operation (accessory winning game). When the accessory winning game is ended based on the ball winning, the period of the accessory winning game ( Since the period during which the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted becomes shorter, the variation time of the special symbol variation that is subtracted during the disadvantageous period becomes longer.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93(b), if the ball is not entered into the V winning device 65 during the special electric operation (game to win the accessory) and the game is ended after time has elapsed, the game to win the accessory Since the accessory winning game ends 8.1 seconds after it starts, the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) is interrupted for 8.1 seconds. Therefore, since it is possible to overlap the long period of normal symbol fluctuation (15 seconds) with the state in which the fluctuation time of special symbol fluctuation is not subtracted, the fluctuation time of special symbol fluctuation that is subtracted during the disadvantageous period is reduced. be able to.

In such a situation, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90(b), the period until the end of the normal symbol fluctuation is displayed in the display area HR11, and the special symbol fluctuation is further displayed in the sub display area Ds. Since the game method that continuously interrupts the subtraction of the variable time is displayed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to select the game method during the accessory winning game. In addition, when the ball enters the V winning hole 165 during the accessory winning game and the V jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game period and the long period of normal symbol fluctuation (15 seconds) Since these periods overlap, the player will not be disadvantaged by setting a disadvantageous period.

Therefore, the player is asked to either choose a gaming method that prevents the current role winning game from ending after a certain amount of time and from unnecessary subtraction of the variation time of special symbol fluctuations, or to It is possible to provide the enjoyment of winning a ball into a V winning hole 165 in a winning game (winning probability is approximately 1/11) and selecting a game method aiming at a V jackpot game.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 94 to 99. In the second embodiment, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 and a part of the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device 113 are different from the first embodiment described above. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 94, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, in contrast to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 21), a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 and a RAM of the audio lamp control device 113 are The difference is that a new solenoid is added to the solenoid 209 connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110, but the rest is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, a third movable valve 1642 is provided in the universal power winning device 640, and a The difference is that a three-movable valve solenoid 209f is added. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, this third movable valve solenoid 209f is controlled to be switched between an on state and an off state at predetermined intervals, triggered by the execution of a winning game. As a result, the third movable valve 1642 is varied between the normal position (see FIG. 88) and the operating position (see FIG. 89) during the normal winning game. Therefore, when the second movable valve 642 is activated during the normal game and the winning ball of the general electric winning device 640 flows down toward the special electric operating port 643, , it will be switched whether the ball enters the special electric operating port 643 or the second special electric operating port 1643. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the falling situation of the winning ball in the general prize winning device 640.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 95(a). FIG. 95(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, a various operation scenario 2 table 202aa is provided in place of the various operation scenario table 202e in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 23) in the first embodiment described above, and a new type selection table 202ab per normal pattern is provided. , is different in that a normal figure variation pattern selection table 202ac is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the ordinary figure type selection table 202ab will be explained with reference to FIG. 95(b). FIG. 95(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the type selection table 202ab per ordinary figure. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it provides a plurality of types of games for winning regular symbols that are executed during the time saving state, and is configured to be able to execute games for winning regular symbols with different movement patterns. ing. Although a specific explanation will be omitted, in the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48), when the normal symbol variation that is won per common symbol stops (S1117: Yes), the ball passes through the through gate 67. Based on the value of the second winning type counter C9 (0 to 99) acquired at the time of the game and the set gaming state, the type per normal pattern is selected by referring to the normal pattern per type selection table 202ab. It is configured as follows.

To specifically explain the contents stipulated in the type selection table 202ab per ordinary symbol, the set gaming state is a time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and the acquired When the value of the second winning type counter C9 is in the range of "0 to 89", "A" is defined as the type per ordinary symbol, and in the range of "90 to 99", "A" is defined as the type per ordinary symbol. "B per ordinary map" is stipulated. The specific details of the operation of the game per normal pattern will be described later, but if “A per normal pattern” is selected (selection rate 90%), the game will be played multiple times (twice) throughout the game period per normal pattern. ), the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, and a game with a common symbol winning is executed in which it is relatively easy to win a ball into the common symbol winning device 640. On the other hand, if "B" is selected (selection rate 10%), after the same "B" game as "A" is executed (in the latter half of the game period), A common figure winning game is executed in which the period during which the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state is set for a long period of time (15 seconds).

As mentioned above, since the normal pattern winning game is executed without the special symbol variation being interrupted, the "normal pattern winning A" is performed by moving the ball to the special electric operating port 643 or It is possible to execute a game aiming at winning a game by placing the ball into the second special electric actuating port 1643, but "Public figure winning B" is by placing the ball into the general prize winning device 640 in the latter half of the general figure winning game. Since the period during which it is difficult to change is set for a long period of time, the remaining period of special symbol fluctuation is wasted and the game becomes a game with a disadvantageous common symbol that is disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, in the case where such a game to win a common figure is executed which is disadvantageous to the player, if the player is playing a game to win an accessory, it is possible to continue the game to win the accessory for a long time. , is configured to execute an effect (see FIG. 90(a)) that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special symbol that is subtracted during the execution period of the disadvantageous common symbol game. There is. This makes it possible to vary the period during which the time-saving state continues based on the player's skill, thereby increasing the player's desire to play.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95(c), the contents of the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ac will be explained. FIG. 95(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the regular pattern variation pattern selection table 202ac. This normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table 202ac is a data table for selecting a normal symbol fluctuation pattern that is executed when a ball passes through the through gate 67, and is used for the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S106 in FIG. Reference) is referred to when selecting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 48, the variation time of the normal symbols is unified to 3 seconds, so in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbols (see S1114 in FIG. 48), the variation time of the normal symbols is 3 seconds. Only the variation time (variation pattern) was set. In contrast, in the second embodiment, different fluctuation patterns can be selected based on the set gaming state and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 that is referred to when selecting the fluctuation type of the normal symbol. It is composed of

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal variation with a variation time of 3 seconds is selected for the entire range (0 to 198) of the obtained variation type counter CS2. . That is, in the normal state, the same normal symbol fluctuation for 3 seconds as in the first embodiment described above is executed. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a time saving state, a short fluctuation is defined as a fluctuation pattern in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 179" and the fluctuation time is 1 second. A long variation is defined as a variation pattern with a variation time of 15 seconds in the range of "180 to 197".

In this way, in this embodiment, the length of the period in which the normal symbols are fluctuating varies greatly depending on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected during the time saving state. During the normal symbol fluctuation period during this time saving state, it is a period in which no game is executed per normal symbol, and furthermore, the remaining period of the special symbol variation is subtracted, so during the time saving state , resulting in a normal pattern fluctuation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, in the case where a normal symbol variation is executed with such an unfavorable symbol variation pattern that is disadvantageous to the player, if the player is currently playing a game with a winning object, the game with a winning object is executed. By continuing the game for a long time, an effect (see FIG. 90(c)) is executed that allows the player to select a game that reduces the remaining period of the special symbol that is subtracted during the execution period of the unfavorable symbol fluctuation. It is composed of This makes it possible to vary the period during which the time-saving state continues based on the player's skill, thereby increasing the player's desire to play.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96(a), contents of each operation scenario table 202e that are different from those in the first embodiment described above will be explained. FIG. 96(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of each operation scenario table 202e in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, a part of the motion scenario table 202e3 for a normal symbol is changed from each motion scenario table 202e (see FIG. 26) of the first embodiment described above, and a motion for a second role object is changed. The difference is that a scenario table 202e5 is added. Other than that, they are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 96(b), the contents of the second role-playing action scenario table 202e5 will be explained. FIG. 96(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second accessory per action scenario table 202e5. This second accessory winning operation scenario table 202e5 is a data table that defines the operation scenario of the accessory winning game that is executed when a ball enters the second special electric actuating port 1643 in the regular figure winning game. .

Specifically, the storage solenoid 209c is set to OFF immediately after the scenario counter value is "1", that is, immediately after the accessory winning game is executed, and the state in which the storage solenoid 209c is off is the accessory winning game. is stipulated to continue until the end of the period. Then, the opening period (period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is in the closed state) continues until the value of the scenario counter is "25", that is, 0.1 seconds after the start of the game with the accessory, and after that, the value of the scenario counter continues. An operation scenario is defined in which the V winning a prize opening solenoid 209b is set on (the round period is set) for a value in the range of "26" to "400", that is, for 1.5 seconds. When this V winning port solenoid 209b is set to ON, the V opening/closing door 65a becomes open, and the ball can enter the V winning device 65 to win. The balls won into the V winning device 65 during this round period pass through the storage valve 66a, which has moved to the ball non-storage state (retreat state), and reach the first movable valve 66b. Therefore, it is possible to cause a plurality of balls to flow into the first movable valve 66b during one game with the accessory, so it is possible to increase the probability of winning a V prize during the game with the accessory.

When the value of the scenario counter reaches "400", the V prize opening solenoid 209b is set to OFF, and the V opening/closing door 65a remains closed until the value of the scenario counter reaches "1650". , the operation scenario is defined to last for 5 seconds. After that, when the value of the scenario counter reaches "1650", the V prize opening solenoid 209b is set to ON until "1675", that is, for 0.1 seconds, and then the value of the scenario counter reaches "2025". During this period, the V winning port solenoid 209b is set to OFF.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation scenario for the storage valve 66a specified in the above-mentioned accessory action scenario table 202e2 and the operation scenario for the storage valve 66a prescribed in the second accessory action scenario table 202e5 are used. Although the operation content of the storage valve 66a is made different, the operation content of the storage valve 66a is unified in the game to win the accessory, without being limited to this, and the V winning opening during the game to win the accessory is unified. It is also possible to configure the winning ratio of balls to be different from 165 to 165.

Specifically, the operation scenario of the storage solenoid 209c is such that the storage solenoid 209c is set to OFF for 3 seconds after the game with the accessory is started, then the storage solenoid 209c is set to ON for 2 seconds, and then the storage solenoid 209c is set to ON again for 2 seconds. It is specified that the solenoid 209c is set to OFF, and when a ball enters the second special electric operating port 1643, the opening period (the period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is in the closed state) is 0.1 seconds, and the round period (the period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is in the closed state) is set to OFF. The operation scenario is defined so that the accessory game is executed with a duration of 1.5 seconds (period in which the door 65a is open) and a 1.5 second ending period (period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is closed).

On the other hand, when a ball enters the special electric actuation port 643, the opening period (the period when the V opening/closing door 65a is in the closed state) is 3.1 seconds, and the round period (the period when the V opening/closing door 65a is in the open state) is 1.5 seconds. , the operation scenario may be defined so that the accessory winning game is executed for an ending period (period in which the V opening/closing door 65a is in a closed state) of 1.5 seconds. With this configuration, in the accessory winning game that is executed based on the ball winning in the second special electric operating port 1643, the storage valve is closed during the period in which the ball can be entered into the V winning device 65. Since the ball 66a is in a retracted state (ball non-storage state) in which it cannot store balls, the plurality of winning balls that have entered the V winning device 65 will flow into the first movable valve 66b and enter the V winning opening 165. You can increase the probability of

In addition, in a prize-winning game that is executed based on a ball winning in the special electric operating port 643, the storage valve 66a has a protrusion that can store the ball during a period in which the ball can be won into the V winning device 65. state (ball storage state), of the balls that have entered the V-winning device 65, only the balls stored in the storage portion of the storage valve 66a will flow into the first movable valve 66b, resulting in a V-winning state. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 165 can be lowered.

With this configuration, when varying the ease of winning a ball into the V winning hole 165 during the accessory winning game (V winning rate) according to the type of the accessory winning game to be executed, Among the opening pattern of the V opening/closing door 65a and the operation pattern of the storage valve 66a, the V winning rate can be varied by only changing the length of the period (opening period) until the V opening/closing door 65a is first opened. Therefore, the operation control in the accessory winning game can be simplified. In other words, an operation scenario is set for each type of accessory winning game only during the period from the start of the accessory winning game until the end of the opening period, and after that, the operation of various devices is controlled based on the common operation scenario. can be executed, so operation control can be simplified.

Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned example, the accessory winning game that is advantageous to the player (the accessory winning game executed when the ball lands in the second special electric operating port 1643) is disadvantageous to the player. To enter the ball into the V winning device 65 at an earlier stage after the start of the accessory winning game than in the accessory winning game (the accessory winning game executed when the ball enters the special electric operating port 643). It is configured so that it can be done. Thereby, it is possible to efficiently execute a game advantageous to the player. In addition, as the operation content of the storage valve 66a, an operation that is advantageous to the player (an operation of turning off the storage solenoid 209c) is performed, and a ball is won to the V winning device 65 by a game with an accessory that is disadvantageous to the player. Since the timing is set before the timing when it is possible to do so, a ball that enters the V winning device 65 during a prize winning game that is disadvantageous to the player may become clogged in the V winning device 65, or Even if the ball is intentionally retained, an operation advantageous to the player (operation of turning off the storage solenoid 209c) is not performed afterwards, so that the act of illegally placing the ball into the V winning hole 165 is suppressed. I can do it.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this embodiment, the action scenarios defined in the accessory hit action scenario table 202e2 are different from the above-described first embodiment, and specifically, Similar to the second accessory win operation scenario table 202e5 explained with reference to FIG. 96(b), a 15 second closing period and a 0.1 second open period are defined in the second half of the accessory winning game. They are different in that they do so.

That is, in this embodiment, when a game to win an accessory is executed, the game to win the accessory is terminated based on the ball winning, and the game to win the accessory is ended based on the passage of time. The game is configured so that the game period of the object game can be greatly varied. As a result, it is possible to greatly vary the game result during the time-saving state depending on the selection result of the gaming method during the game to win the accessory, and it is possible to motivate the player to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97(a), a description will be given of the differences from the above-described first embodiment in the normal figure action scenario table 202e3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 97(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal figure action scenario table 202e3 of the second embodiment. The second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the operation contents of the normal symbol winning game executed during the time saving state are different, and other than that, the second embodiment is the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 97(a), in the second embodiment, the operation scenario of the game per normal figure that is executed during the time-saving state is different from the first embodiment described above, and the operation scenario for the game per normal figure for time-saving is 2. It has a scenario 202e33, and three scenarios 202e33 per normal map for time saving.

First, with reference to FIG. 97(b), the contents of the two scenarios per time-saving plan 202e33 will be explained. FIG. 97(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the two scenarios 202e33 per time-saving general map. This time-saving 2 per normal pattern scenario 202e33 specifies the operation scenario of the normal pattern game that is executed when "normal pattern per A" is selected as the normal pattern type, and the entire normal pattern game. The operation scenario has a length of 3.6 seconds and the ratio of the period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state to the entire game period per ordinary figure is specified in the 3 scenarios 202e34 for time-saving ordinary figure to be described later. A game with a higher normal figure is executed.

Specifically, when the value of the scenario counter is "1", an operation scenario in which the second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to ON is defined, and an operation scenario in which the third movable valve solenoid 209f is set to ON is defined. stipulated. The second movable valve solenoid 209e is set to be in the on state until the end of the normal game (the value of the scenario counter becomes "900"). In other words, in the game to win a regular map that is executed in response to "win a regular map A", the ball that wins the electric accessory 640a will always enter the special electric operating port 643 or the second special electric operating port 1643. It consists of

Further, the third movable valve solenoid 209f has an ON period of 0.2 seconds (a period during which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at the operating position where the ball can enter the second special electric operating port 1643) and 1.5 seconds. The off period (the period during which the third movable valve 1642 is positioned at the normal position in which a ball can enter the special electric actuating port 643) is repeatedly set. In other words, the percentage of balls passing through the second movable valve 642 that enter the second special electric operating port 1643 is approximately 11%, and the percentage of balls that pass through the second movable valve 642 entering the special electrical operating port 643 is approximately 11%. It is configured so that it is 89%.

Then, the opening period (period in which the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state) continues until the value of the scenario counter is "25", that is, 0.1 seconds after the start of the normal game, and after that, the value of the scenario counter continues. The value ranges from "26" to "274", that is, the general electric solenoid is set on for one second (the electric accessory 640a is in the open state), and the value ranges from "275" to "400", That is, the general electric solenoid is set to OFF for 0.5 seconds (the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state). Then, the normal power solenoid is set to ON again in the range of "401" to "649", that is, for 1 second, and then, the normal power solenoid is set to ON in the range of "650" to "900", that is, for 1 second. An operating scenario is defined in which the electric solenoid is set off. In other words, when a game per ordinary figure based on the operation scenario specified in the time-saving 2 scenarios per ordinary figure 202e33 is executed, an opening operation in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second is executed twice per ordinary figure. When the game is executed, the total open state period of the electric accessory 640a during which the ball can enter the general prize winning device 640 is 2 seconds for the entire period of the game per general figure (3.6 seconds). Therefore, about 40% of the game period per regular map is a period in which the player is advantageous (it is possible to advance the special electric game (it is possible to make the ball enter the special electric operation opening 643 or the second special electric operation opening 1643) ) period).

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the contents of the three scenarios per time-saving plan 202e34 will be explained. FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the three scenarios 202e34 per time-saving general map. This time-saving 3 per normal figure scenario 202e34 defines the operation scenario of the normal figure game to be executed when "normal figure per B" is selected. The contents stipulated in the 3 scenarios per time-saving regular map 202e34 are the same as the above-mentioned 2 scenarios per time-saving regular map 202e33 until the value of the scenario counter reaches "650", so the details Further explanations will be omitted.

The utility solenoid is set to OFF while the scenario counter value is in the range of "650" to "3500", that is, for 15 seconds, and after that, the scenario counter value is in the range of "3501" to "3524", that is, The general power solenoid is set to ON for 0.1 seconds, and then, when the value of the scenario counter becomes "3525", the general power solenoid is set to OFF.

In other words, in the game per ordinary figure specified in the three scenarios 202e34 for saving time, the total length of the game period per ordinary figure is 17.7 seconds, and the ball is won by a general figure during the game per ordinary figure. It is configured such that the total period during which winnings can be made to the device 640 is 2.1 seconds. Therefore, the total duration of the open state of the electric accessory 640a during which the ball can enter the general prize winning device 640 is 2.1 seconds for the entire period of the game per ordinary card (17.7 seconds). , Approximately 12% of the game period per regular map is an advantageous period for the player (it is possible to proceed with the special electric game (it is possible to make the ball enter the special electric operation opening 643 or the second special electric operation opening 1643) period). Furthermore, after the second opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is completed, the electric accessory 640a remains in the closed state for 15 seconds.

Therefore, if 3 scenarios 202e34 are set per time-saving general map during the time-saving state, the period during which the ball cannot enter the general prize winning device 640 is set for a long time, which is disadvantageous to the player. It becomes a game. In addition, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, when the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) (the fourth special symbol variation ends). The time-saving state is terminated when the game is played (in the event of a normal symbol winning), and the remaining period of the special symbol variation is subtracted during the normal symbol winning game. In other words, even during the closed state for 15 seconds, the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted, resulting in a game with regular symbols that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 99, in the second embodiment, the normal pattern fluctuation time counter 223aa, the normal pattern per time counter 223ab, and the firing prohibition are stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment. It is different from the suggestion flag 223ac and the effect setting completed flag 223ad in that it is added. Other elements are the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The normal pattern variation time counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the variation time of normal symbols, and when a normal pattern variation pattern command is received, the variation time corresponding to the received command is set, and the voice lamp control device It is configured such that the value of the counter set in the effect update process that is executed periodically (every 1 millisecond) in the main process 113 (see FIG. 60) is subtracted. It is configured so that it is referred to when a game with a winning accessory is executed and various effects are executed based on the counter value.

The time counter 223ab per ordinary figure is a counter for measuring the game period during which the game per ordinary figure is executed, and when a start command per ordinary figure is received, the game period per ordinary figure corresponds to the received command. is set, and the value of the counter set is subtracted in the effect update process that is executed periodically (every 1 millisecond) in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 60). are doing.

The firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to ON when executing a puncture suggestion effect for puncturing the accessory winning game (terminating the accessory winning game as time passes), and is set to ON when the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to ON. It is set to off when the object game ends. When the accessory winning game ends, the display mode of the ending screen of the accessory winning game is varied based on the setting status of the flag and the ending conditions of the established accessory winning game (end of prize winning, end of time elapse). Referenced from time to time.

The production setting flag 223ad indicates a blowout suggestion production that suggests ending the game to win the role item based on the passage of time, or a performance that suggests that the ball is won into the V winning device 65 during the game to win the role item. This is to indicate that it has been set, and is set to ON when a special effect is set during a game with a winning accessory.

<About the control process executed by the main control device in the second embodiment>
In the second embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment described above, different accessory winning games are played depending on the operating opening (special electric operating opening 643, second special electric operating opening 1643) in which a ball enters a prize during the normal figure winning game. They differ greatly in that they are configured to be executable. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol lottery is determined based on the gaming state and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS2 in the normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202ac (FIG. 95(c)). They are different in that they are configured to be selectable with reference to (Reference), and in that they are configured to be able to execute a normal pattern winning game with different operation contents as a normal pattern winning game executed during the time saving state. The control processing executed by the main control device 110 is the same except for the above-mentioned contents, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the contents of the special electric starting gate winning process 2 (S108) will be explained. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special electric starting gate winning process 2 (S108). This special electric starting opening winning process 2 (S108) is different from the above-mentioned special electric starting opening winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) of the first embodiment to the operating opening where the ball has won (the special electric starting opening 643, the second The difference is that the winning type corresponding to the special electric actuating port 1643) can be set, but other than that, they are the same. The same control contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 101 to 107, the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be explained. The explanation will focus on the differences from processing. The control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment is different from the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment described above, except for the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61). Instead of the common symbol related process (see S4217 in FIG. 66) executed in the common symbol related process (see S4217 in FIG. 66), the common symbol related process 2 (see S4217 in FIG. The object hit related process 2 (see S4851 in FIG. 103) is executed instead of the object hit related process (S4804 in FIG. 70), and the effect update process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 105) is executed instead of the effect update process (see S4111 in FIG. 72). ). The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 101, the contents of the ordinary map related process 2 (S4217) will be explained. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the common map related process 2 (S4217). This general pattern related process 2 (S4217) is different from the general pattern related process (see S4217 in FIG. 66) of the first embodiment described above, and includes a process executed when a general pattern fluctuation pattern command is received, The difference is that the process executed when a per-figure start command is received has been changed, but otherwise the process is the same.

When the general pattern related process 2 (S4217) is executed, first, it is determined whether the general pattern fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4701), and if it is determined that the general pattern fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4701: Yes), the general pattern fluctuation start process is executed. is executed (S4751), and then this process ends. Note that the normal symbol fluctuation start process (S4751) executed in the process of S4751 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 102, but a process for measuring the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is executed. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation times can be selected as the variation pattern of the normal symbol (see FIG. 95(c)), and depending on the variation pattern selected, the advantage of the game executed during the time saving state is It is configured to vary the degree.

In the process of S4701, if it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4701: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern per change start command has been received (S4703), and if it is determined that it has been received ( S4703: Yes), sets the time per ordinary figure (the END time of the corresponding ordinary figure game operation scenario) in the ordinary figure time counter based on the received command (S4752), and issues the display ordinary figure start command. is set (S4704), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4703 that the common map hit start command has not been received (S4703: No), the steps S4705 to S4714, which are the same as the common map related processing (see FIG. 66) of the first embodiment described above, are performed. Execute the process and end this process.

Next, the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation start process (S4751) will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation start process (S4751). When the normal pattern fluctuation start process (S4751) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time is being shortened (in the time saving state) (S4771), and if it is determined that the current time is not being shortened (S4771: No), A display general figure variation command is set (S4771), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4771 that the time is not being shortened (S4771: Yes), the general pattern fluctuation time is extracted from the received general pattern fluctuation pattern command (S4772), and the extracted value is stored in the general pattern fluctuation time counter 223aa. (S4773), executes the process of S4774 described above, and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the contents of the accessory hit related process 2 (S4851) will be explained. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of accessory hit related processing 2 (S4851). This accessory hit related process 2 (S4851), in contrast to the above-mentioned accessory hit related process (S4804), specifies the contents of the process to be executed when the accessory hit start command is received and the ending command is received. They are different in that they have been changed, and other elements are the same, and the same elements are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the accessory winning related process 2 (S4851) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the accessory winning start command has been received (S5101), and if it is determined that it has been received (S5101: Yes), the accessory winning start command is executed. The process is executed (S5151), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that it has not been received (S5101: No), the processes of S5103 to S5107, which are the same as the above-mentioned accessory hit related process (S4804), are executed, and the ending command is sent in the process of S5107. If it is determined that it has been received (S5107: Yes), then it is determined whether the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set on (S5152).

In other words, in the process of S5152, it is determined whether or not an effect is being executed to suggest that it would be more advantageous to prohibit the player from shooting the ball. If it is determined in the process of S5152 that the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is not on (S5152: No), the process of S5108 to S5109, which is the same as the above-mentioned accessory hit related process (S4804), is executed and this process is ended. do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5152 that it is set to ON (S5152: Yes), the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to OFF (S5153), and the end condition for the current normal game is set as time elapses. It is determined whether there is one (S5154).

If it is determined that the game based on the passage of time has ended (S5154: Yes), a display command indicating "success" is set (S5155), and it is not the end of the game based on the passage of time. That is, if it is determined that the game based on the ball winning is over (S5154: No), a display command indicating "unfortunate" is set (S5156). In this way, it is possible to predict whether it is more advantageous or disadvantageous for the player to shoot the ball based on the game content of the regular game in the time-saving state, and to ask the player to play the game based on the prediction result. When a performance that suggests a method is executed, it is determined whether the game with a winning pattern has ended based on the content of the suggestion, and the display mode of the end screen of the game with a winning pattern is changed based on the determination result. By configuring this, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not the current gaming method was the correct choice.

Note that, unlike this embodiment, for example, it is possible to predict whether it is more advantageous or disadvantageous for the player to shoot the ball based on the game content of the regular game in the time saving state, and the prediction result is calculated. When a performance that suggests a gaming method to a player based on the actual predicted result is performed, in order to make the player predict and select a truly advantageous gaming method, a performance that suggests a gaming method different from the actual predicted result (so-called If the configuration is such that a fake effect) is also executable, in the process of S5154, it is determined whether the game corresponding to the actual prediction result (time elapsed, ball winning) has ended the game per normal pattern, and based on the determination result. The display mode of the end screen may be changed based on the configuration. Thereby, it is possible to perform a surprising performance for the player.

In addition, in this case, in addition to the above-mentioned performance that suggests a playing method to the player, a situation notification performance (for example, a performance that suggests the type of game per common map) to make the player predict the actual gaming situation is performed. That's good. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of having the player predict whether or not the performance that suggests a gaming method to the player is a fake performance. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the game to win a normal figure and the game to win a role model are executed at the same time, an effect that suggests a playing method to the player is executed, but this is not limited to this. As long as the player is in a state where he or she can select a gaming method, the system may be configured so that a performance suggesting a gaming method to the player is performed using the same method.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the contents of the accessory winning start process (S5151) will be explained. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the accessory winning start process (S5151). In the accessory winning start process (S5151), various processes are executed to vary the performance mode to be executed depending on the game situation at the start timing of the accessory winning game.

When the accessory winning start process (S5151) is executed, first, the type of the special electric actuation opening that won the prize is extracted based on the received command (S5301). Then, it is determined whether the current accessory winning game is an accessory winning game that is executed when a ball enters the special electric operating port 643 (special electric operating port 1) (S5302), and the game to the special electric operating port 1 is determined. If it is determined that it is not based on winning (S5302: No), a display command is set to indicate winning of an advantageous accessory (S5303), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5301, if it is determined that the winning is based on the winning at the special electric actuating port 1 (S5301: Yes), then the value of the regular figure fluctuation time counter is read out (S5304), and the read value is It is determined whether the value indicates 10 seconds or more (S5305). If it is determined that the value indicates 10 seconds or more (S5305: Yes), a display command is set to suggest that the time has elapsed for hitting the accessory (S5306), and the firing prohibition suggestion flag 223ac is set to on. (S5307), the process moves to S5310. Based on the display command set in the process of S5306, the display mode (corresponding to the comment in the sub-display area Ds) for suppressing (prohibiting) the launch of the ball is displayed, as shown in the display screen shown in FIG. 90(a). ) is displayed.

In addition, in the process of S5305, if it is determined that the value does not indicate 10 seconds or more (S5305: No), then it is determined whether the value read in the process of S5304 is a value that indicates 5 seconds or less ( S5308), if it is determined that it is 5 seconds or less (S5308: Yes), by quickly ending the accessory winning game, it is possible to execute the accessory winning game again with the next common figure winning game. Therefore, a display command is set to suggest the end of winning the accessory (S5309), and the process moves to S5310. Here, based on the display command set by the process of S5309, the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a display mode that prompts the ball to be fired (for example, "Fire the ball quickly and hit the object"). When you finish the game, "Chance") will be displayed.

If it is determined in the process of S5308 that the value does not indicate 5 seconds or less, that is, the value indicates 5 to 10 seconds, a display command to indicate a hit with an accessory is created without setting a dedicated display command. A command is set (S5310), the effect setting completed flag 223ad is set to ON (S5311), and this process ends.

As explained above, in the second embodiment, the first gaming method suggesting performance and the second gaming method suggesting performance described above are configured to be executable, so that they are executed for the player. It becomes possible to select the game method of the accessory winning game based on the performance contents of various suggestive performances. Therefore, the game during the V rush is executed according to the gaming method arbitrarily selected by the player, and the advantage during the V rush can be varied depending on the selection result of the gaming method, so that the various suggested effects that are executed are In contrast, it is possible to make the players interested. Furthermore, since the degree of advantage during V Rush can be varied depending on the player's selection result, the player can be encouraged to actively participate in the game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the player can select the playing method of the game to win the accessory depending on the normal symbol fluctuations executed during the game to win the accessory and the situation of the game to win the symbol. Although it is configured to execute a suggestion effect, it may also be configured to execute a similar suggestion effect when multiple games are executed overlappingly, for example, when a jackpot game ends. When a time-saving state is set later, a suggestion performance is executed that allows the player to select the end timing of the jackpot game based on the length of the remaining period of the normal symbol fluctuation being executed. You may do so. With this configuration, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the normal symbol fluctuations executed during the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) will be executed for a long time, and the It is possible to suppress a situation in which the period in which normal symbol variations are not executed becomes long and the desire to play decreases.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 113. In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, based on the fact that a ball enters the special electric operation opening (the special electric operation opening 643 or the second special electric operation opening 1643), the game for winning the accessory is executed, It was configured to interrupt the subtraction of special symbol fluctuations in progress. In other words, the configuration was such that the more the player was allowed to play the accessory winning game, the more advantageous it became to the player. Therefore, the gaming method during the time-saving state (V-rush) becomes monotonous, and there is a risk that the player may get bored with the game.

On the other hand, the present third embodiment differs from the first embodiment and the second embodiment in that the content of processing for special symbol fluctuations during execution when the accessory winning game is executed is different. Specifically, depending on the type of game per accessory to be executed (set), there is a process of interrupting the special symbol variation in progress, and a process of discarding (discarding the remaining variation time, The configuration is such that one of two processes is executed: a process of forcibly stopping the lottery if the lottery result is a loss regardless of the lottery result, and a process of terminating the time saving state in addition to discarding the lottery.

With this configuration, the gaming situation during the time saving state can be greatly varied based on the execution of the accessory winning game, so it is possible to provide the player with a game that never gets boring.

Furthermore, based on the performance executed during the time-saving state (V rush), the system is configured to perform a performance that allows the player to select whether or not to perform the accessory winning game. As a result, for example, when a game to win an accessory that ends the time-saving state is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful due to the sudden end of the time-saving state. can. In addition, since the player can choose whether or not to play the role-playing game based on the contents of the performance, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game, increasing the interest of the game. can be done.

<About the production content in the third embodiment>
First, with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109, the contents of the characteristic effects among the effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be explained. The effect executed in this embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that the duration of the time saving state (the duration of the V rush) is displayed as a time-saving subtraction of the value displayed on the timer 812. When a winning game is executed, the value displayed on the timer 812 is significantly reduced when the special symbol variation being executed is discarded, and time is saved by executing a winning game. The major difference is that the system is configured to be able to display a disappearing display in which the state ends.

In addition, when the special symbol variation in progress has won a jackpot (during jackpot variation), a suggestive effect that suggests that the jackpot variation in progress will be discarded due to the execution of the accessory winning game. They differ greatly in how they are configured to execute. The other display contents are the same except that the size and position of the display area are changed in order to display the above-mentioned differences. The same display contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 108(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents executed when the remaining period of jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds), and FIG. 108(a) is a schematic diagram showing the pending status of each symbol when the display screen shown in FIG. 108(a) is displayed. As shown in Figure 108(a), when the remaining period of the jackpot fluctuation reaches 10 seconds, the display mode of "Entering Danger Time" is displayed, and the period until the danger time ends (until the jackpot fluctuation stops displaying) is displayed. “10 seconds” is displayed as a period display mode 851 indicating the period. Similar to the value displayed on the timer 812, this period display mode 851 is periodically subtracted (countdown displayed) by the effect update process of the audio lamp control device 113.

Furthermore, in the V rush variation area 811, in addition to a symbol imitating a "V" that corresponds to a successful game during V rush (execution of a V jackpot game), a "skull" symbol indicates a gaming result that is disadvantageous to the player. A pattern imitating the image is displayed in a fluctuating manner. In addition, the words ``During Danger Time, you are in big trouble if you hit an accessory'' are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In other words, when entering the danger time, it is suggested to the player that the jackpot fluctuations may stop (execution of jackpot game based on the special drawing lottery) after a predetermined time (10 seconds). On the other hand, although the details will be described later, this danger time is configured to be executed even in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss.

Therefore, when the player enters the danger time, the player either does not play the special electric game (does not fire the ball) aiming at winning the object until the danger time ends, or executes the special electric game even during the danger time. Then, the player has to choose whether or not he/she wants to go for the V winning game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the condition for entering danger time is when the remaining period of the special variation being executed reaches a predetermined period (10 seconds), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special symbol variation being executed The conditions for entering the danger time may be different depending on whether the lottery result is a jackpot or a loss. During jackpot fluctuations, the remaining period is "27 seconds", "17 seconds", "10 seconds", It may be configured so that the danger time can be entered when the remaining period is "7 seconds", and during the deviation fluctuation, the danger time may be entered only when the remaining period is "10 seconds". Thereby, it becomes possible for the player to predict the lottery result of the special symbol variation that is being executed based on the display of the remaining period of the danger time that is displayed when the danger time starts.

In addition, in the above example, an example was shown in which a danger time entry condition was set exclusively for when the jackpot is fluctuating, but the condition is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the danger time can be entered when the remaining period becomes "14 seconds". This makes it possible to encourage players who understand that their winnings are fluctuating to actively play the game without having them shoot the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108(b), a description will be given of the display contents when the accessory winning game is executed during the danger time and the jackpot fluctuation is discarded. FIG. 108(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents when the accessory winning game is executed during the danger time and the jackpot fluctuation is discarded. As shown in FIG. 108(b), when the accessory win is executed during the danger time, the characters "end" are displayed in the period display mode 851, notifying that the danger time has ended. Then, in order to indicate that the jackpot variation that was being executed has been discarded, a symbol resembling a "skull" is displayed in a stopped state in the V rush variation area 811. Furthermore, the comment "Unfortunate...please go back" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

On the other hand, since the accessory game is being executed, a display mode for aiming for a V prize in the accessory game is displayed.

Also, since the special symbol variation being executed has been discarded, only "10 seconds", which is the variation time of the next variation, is displayed in the display area HR4 indicating the remaining period of the time saving state (V rush). By displaying such a display screen, it is possible to inform the player that the jackpot variation has been discarded in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, if a game to win an accessory in which the jackpot fluctuation is interrupted is executed during the danger time, as shown in FIG. The performance is executed.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 110. In the third embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment described above, when a ball enters the special electric operating port 643, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is acquired, and the acquired first winning Based on the value of the type counter C2, the type (jackpot type) of the jackpot game (V jackpot game) to be executed when a prize is won in the V winning hole 165 is configured to be selectable, and the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 The difference is that the configuration of . The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 110(a), the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3 will be explained. FIG. 110(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3. As shown in FIG. 110(a), three types of jackpot are defined in the V jackpot type selection 3 table 202c3, and depending on the selected jackpot type, the game content of the V jackpot game to be executed, V The game state (time saving number) set after the end of the jackpot game and the effect on the special symbol being executed when the accessory winning game is executed are configured to be different.

Specifically, jackpot C is defined when the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", jackpot D is defined in the range of "80 to 94", and jackpot D is defined to be in the range of "80 to 94", and "95 to 99" is defined as jackpot D. ”, jackpot E is defined in the range.

"Jackpot C" (selection rate 80%) has the same contents as the V jackpot game executed in each embodiment described above, including a 10 round (R) jackpot game, 4 time saving times, and a special symbol during execution. The content to interrupt is set. "Jackpot D" (selection rate 15%) is set to include a 10-round (R) jackpot game, 4 time saving times, and discarding the special symbol variation being executed. ``Jackpot E'' (selection rate 5%) is set to perform a 15-round (R) jackpot game, 15 time-saving times, cancel the special symbol variation in progress, and end the time-saving state.

As mentioned above, if "Jackpot E" is set, which has the most disadvantageous effect on the player due to the special symbol fluctuations being executed, if a V prize is won during the game with the special symbol, it will be the most advantageous to the player. Since the jackpot game and the game state (number of time reductions) after the jackpot game is completed, the last chance can be given to the player. Also, for example, if the final change in the time saving state is a loss and the losing change is about to end, that is, if the time saving state will end in a few seconds even if you do nothing, then this "jackpot" E'' can be the most advantageous jackpot type for the player.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained with reference to FIG. 110(b). FIG. 110(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 110(b), this embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a danger time selection table 222ca is added. Since everything else is the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The danger time selection table 222ca is a data table that is referred to when deciding whether to actually execute the danger time effect when the danger time entry conditions are met, and is a data table that is referred to when deciding whether to actually execute the danger time effect, and is based on the lottery result of the special symbol variation that is being executed. The execution probability is configured to differ based on the execution probability.

Here, the contents of the danger time selection table 222ca will be explained with reference to FIG. 110(c). FIG. 110(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the danger time selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 110(c), the structure is such that the danger time performance is more easily executed when the special symbol fluctuation being executed is a jackpot fluctuation than when it is a losing fluctuation. Thereby, when the danger time effect is executed, the player can play the game while making the player expect that the jackpot is fluctuating.

Specifically, if the special symbol lottery result (special symbol determination result) is a jackpot, execution of danger time is selected regardless of the value of the acquired production counter 223f, and the special symbol lottery result (special symbol determination result) is a jackpot. If the judgment result) is incorrect, it is selected not to execute the danger time effect when the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 89", and it is selected that the value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "90 to 99" to execute the danger time effect. It is configured so that certain things are selected.

With this configuration, even if the result of the special drawing lottery being executed is a loss, the danger time performance can be executed, so that the player's game during the danger time has a game element related to prediction and selection. Since the player can hold the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<About control processing content in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113, the content of control processing in the third embodiment will be explained. This embodiment differs in that the content of the control processing executed by the main control device 110 and the content of the control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and other than that, are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 111, the special electric start opening winning process 3 (S158) executed by the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special electric starting gate winning process 3 (S158). This special electric starting opening winning process 3 (S158) selects a different jackpot type when a ball wins in the special electric operating opening 643 compared to the above-mentioned special electric starting winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) of the first embodiment. The difference is that the jackpot type is configured to be possible and the process corresponding to the selected jackpot type is executed, but other than that, they are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the special electric start opening winning process 3 (S158) is executed, the same processes as S1301 to S1303 and S1305 to S1309 as the above-mentioned special electric starting winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) are executed. Then, in the process of S1303, it is determined that the special electric power is in operation (during a game where the accessory is won), and if it is determined that the special electric power is in operation, then the jackpot type selected this time is "jackpot E". (S1371), and if it is determined that it is a "jackpot E" (S1371: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S1373), and special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed (S1374). , the process moves to S1375. In addition, since the contents of the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S1374) are the same as the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) of the first embodiment described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S1371, if it is determined that it is not a "jackpot E" (S1371; No), then it is determined whether it is a "jackpot D" (S1372), and if it is determined that it is a "jackpot D" (S1372: Yes), the process of S1374 is executed, and the process moves to the process of S1375. If it is determined in the process of S1372 that it is not a "jackpot D", that is, it is a "jackpot C" (S1372: No), the processes of S1305 and S1306 are executed, and the process moves to the process of S1375.

In the process of S1375, the accessory hit flag is set to ON (S1375), a command corresponding to the current winning type ("Jackpot C" to "Jackpot E") is set (S1376), and a special electric activation command is set. (S1308), this process ends.

Next, the effect update process 3 (S4171) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 will be explained with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 3 (S4171). This effect update process 3 (S4171) is different from the effect update process 2 (see S4151 in FIG. 105) of the second embodiment described above, in which the danger time setting process (S5371) regarding the setting of the danger time effect is replaced with the process of S5306. The difference is that it is configured to be executed after , but otherwise they are the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the danger time setting process (S5371) will be explained with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the danger time setting process (S5371). In this danger time setting process (S5371), when the execution conditions for the danger time effect are met, a process is executed to determine whether to actually execute the danger time and to set the danger time effect based on the determination result. be done.

When the danger time setting process (S5371) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the variable time counter 223r indicates a remaining period of 10 seconds (S5601), and it is determined that the value does not indicate a remaining period of 10 seconds. If this is the case (S5601: No), this means that the execution conditions for the danger time are not satisfied, so the process is immediately terminated.

In the process of S5601, if it is determined that the value indicates the remaining period of 10 seconds (S5601: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed (special symbol lottery result) and the value of the acquired production counter 223f. Based on this, the danger time selection table 222ca is referred to to select whether or not to execute the danger time effect (S5602).

In the process of S5603, based on the processing result (selection result) of S5602, it is determined whether or not to execute the danger time effect (S5603), and if it is determined that it is to be executed (S5603: Yes), the display for indicating the danger time effect is determined. A command is set (S5604), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5603, if it is determined that the danger time effect is not to be executed (S5603: No), this process is directly ended.

By the display command set in the process of S5604, the danger time effect shown in FIG. 90(a) is executed.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 137. The fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the game board 13 and the configuration of the main control device 110.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, in the normal game state, a special figure game is executed in which the ball enters the special figure ball entrance 64, and when the game condition shifts to the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is easier to open, so the special electric game that aims to enter the game ball into the special electric operation opening 643 in the general electric winning device 640 and the game ball into the V winning opening 165 in the V winning device 65 is a game. It was designed to be a gaming method that is advantageous to players. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, instead of the special electric operation opening 643, a ball entrance (second ball entrance 1645) that is a trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol is provided (see FIG. 114). As a result, the trigger for opening the V opening/closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is triggered by the ball entering the second ball entry port 1645, rather than by the ball entering the special electric operation port 643 and hitting the accessory. This is a case where a small hit is won by drawing the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured to be executed simultaneously (so-called simultaneous fluctuation). Then, during the time saving state, the variation time is set to be shorter for the second special symbol lottery than for the first special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed more easily. There is.

In addition, as a time saving termination condition for ending the time saving state, if the total of the number of drawings for the first special symbol (number of fluctuations) and the number of drawings for the second special symbol (number of fluctuations) reaches 100. A cumulative time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of drawings (variable number of times) of the first special symbol reaches 4 is set, and a special figure 1 time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of drawings of the first special symbol (number of fluctuations) reaches 4. The time saving state is configured to end when the time saving end condition is satisfied.

In the fourth embodiment having the above-described configuration, the variation pattern of the first special symbol set during the time saving state is the variation pattern of the special symbol set during the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. It is configured to have the same content as the pattern, and the gameplay during the time saving state (V rush) is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment by entering the ball into the special electric starting port 643 and hitting the accessory. A small winning game (V A winning game that opens the winning device 65) is used, and the cumulative time reduction end condition is set before the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (number of drawings) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 times). The difference is that a game is used in which the time saving state ends even if the game is established.

In other words, in the fourth embodiment, compared to the first embodiment described above, the period for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol (the fluctuation period of the second special symbol) is configured to be variably settable. For example, by configuring a short fluctuation period (for example, 0.1 seconds fluctuation time) and a long fluctuation period (for example, 10 seconds fluctuation time) to be settable as the fluctuation period of the second special symbol. , the interval of the small winning game executed during the time saving state can be greatly varied according to the variable period of the second special symbol that is set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of games during the time-saving state, thereby increasing the interest of the games.

Further, since the cumulative time saving end condition can be satisfied based on the execution of the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to set an upper limit on the number of small winning games to be executed during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive benefits (V jackpot games) from being given to the player during the time saving state. Furthermore, by making it difficult to set a short fluctuation period (for example, 0.1 seconds) as the fluctuation period of the second special symbol set during the time saving state, small winning games can be executed frequently during the time saving state. This can be suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent excessive benefits (prize balls) from being given to the player in a short period of time.

The characteristic configuration and gameplay of the fourth embodiment will be mainly explained below. First, the update timing of the number of time saving times and the determination processing timing for terminating the time saving state in the fourth embodiment will be explained. Similar to the fourth embodiment, in a simultaneous variation type gaming machine that can execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol in parallel, the variation of the special symbol executed during the time saving state is possible. In order to prevent the number of times from exceeding a specified number of times (for example, 100 times), at the timing of the start of fluctuation of each special symbol, updating processing of the number of time saving times and determination processing for terminating the time saving state are executed. was. As a result, the time saving state can be ended at the timing when the special symbol fluctuation is executed for the specified number of times, so the 101st special symbol fluctuation that exceeds the specified number of times (for example, 100 times) can be reliably performed in the normal state. This prevents players from being given excessive benefits (special symbol fluctuations in a time-saving state). However, before the final variation of the time saving state (100th special symbol variation) is stopped and displayed, specifically, immediately after the 100th special symbol variation starts, the time saving state ends, so each There is a problem in that depending on the timing at which the special symbols are determined (varied), the period during which the time-saving state is set becomes shorter, giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the special symbol variation of the 100th rotation (the final time of the time saving number) is executed as the discrimination (variation) of the first special symbol, the discrimination (variation) of the second special symbol, i.e. , When the 101st rotation special figure variation is executed, the time saving state can be ended at the timing when the 100th rotation special figure variation is executed (just before the 101st rotation special figure variation is executed). , it does not cause discomfort to the player, but if the special pattern variation of the 101st rotation is not executed while the special pattern variation of the 100th rotation (the final time of the number of time reductions) is executed, for example, the 100th rotation In the case where the 101st rotation special figure variation starts after the 101st rotation special figure variation ends, the time saving state ends at the timing when the 100th rotation special figure variation is executed. There is a problem in that the state of the normal symbols during the special symbol fluctuations gives the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, when the number of special symbol variations (for example, 100 times) is set as the time-saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, the time-saving end condition is satisfied. The end timing of the special figure variation (for example, the special figure variation of the 100th rotation) and the start timing of the special figure variation that is executed first after the time-saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the special figure variation of the 101st rotation) It is configured such that the time saving state is terminated based on the timing that is executed first among the timings.

By configuring in this way, the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is maintained until the timing when the special symbol variation stops displaying for the specified number of times, or until the timing when the special symbol variation exceeds the specified number of times. It is possible to provide the player with a time-saving state for the maximum period of time, and to increase the player's desire to play.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the timing at which the 101st rotation special figure variation is executed is configured to be able to determine the timing at which the conditions for executing the 101st rotation special figure variation are satisfied, and The time saving state is configured to end before the special symbol is determined. Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent the time saving state from being set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of time saving times and the special symbol lottery being executed in the time saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, between the end timing of the special figure variation at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied and the timing at which the special figure variation is executed next to the special figure variation at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the time-saving end condition is satisfied first. Although the configuration is such that the time saving state is terminated based on the timing, the time saving state is not limited to this, and for example, the time saving state is terminated based only on the timing at which the special figure variation is executed next to the special figure variation for which the time saving termination condition is satisfied. It may be configured to terminate the state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol (the process of subtracting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol) is temporarily stopped (interrupted). It consists of Then, when a V winning (a ball enters the V winning opening 165) occurs during a small winning game and a jackpot is awarded, the temporarily stopped special symbol variation is restarted after the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that In the fourth embodiment, the trigger for subtracting the number of time-savings is when the variation of the special symbol whose variation has started during the time-saving game is stopped.

With this configuration, the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbol is a fluctuation that was started before the jackpot game, so when the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbol resumes and stops, The number of time reductions is not subtracted. In other words, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is awarded by winning a V prize, in addition to the number of time savings awarded by the jackpot, the period until the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped is also reduced. Set as gaming state. With this configuration, the time-saving state that is most advantageous to the player can be set as long as possible.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, the game performance of the pachinko machine 10 described in the first to third embodiments described above (the special symbol lottery and the winning of the ball to the special electric operating port 643, This is shown as an example of realizing the game performance (playability aiming at the game) using another method, and each technical idea described in the first to third embodiments and the content of the performance to be executed, etc. may be changed as appropriate. May be repurposed. Note that detailed explanations of the technical ideas and presentation contents that are used in the same manner as in the first to third embodiments described above will be omitted.

<About the game board configuration of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 114, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be explained. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has a second ball entrance unit 1640 instead of the general winning machine 640 in contrast to the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a second ball entry port 1645 is provided in place of the special electric operating port 643.

In the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 2, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed based on the ball entering the special symbol entry hole 64 by executing the left-handed game, and the through ball is drawn. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be in an open state in which the game ball can enter the general winning device 640 when the normal symbol lottery is executed and the ball is won by passing through the gate 67. Then, when a game ball enters the special electric operation opening 643, a prize winning is executed and the V opening/closing door 65a attached to the V prize winning device 65 is opened.

On the other hand, the fourth embodiment differs greatly in that, in place of the above-mentioned special electric operation opening 643, a second ball entry opening 1645 is provided which is a trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, in this embodiment, the trigger for opening the V opening/closing door 65a is not the winning of the special electric operating port 643, but the entry of the ball into the second ball entry port 1645, and the small winning is won by drawing the second special symbol. This triggers the opening of the V opening/closing door 65a.

When the game state is the normal state, the player fires the game ball toward the left side area of the game board 13 and causes the ball to enter the special drawing ball entrance 64, as in the first embodiment described above. The game is played while hoping to win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol. When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the game state shifts to a time-saving gaming state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) at a rate of 100%.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, if a game is executed aiming at the left side area of the game board 13, the game ball can pass through the through gate 67 at a rate of 100%. If you win the normal symbol lottery that is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the second electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entry unit 1640 is in the open state (the game ball is in the open state). A state in which the second ball entering unit 1640 can enter the ball is set.

A second ball entry port 1645 is provided in the second ball entry unit 1640, and when a game ball enters, a second special symbol lottery is executed. In this embodiment, a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery. When a small win is won, the V opening/closing door 65a in the V winning device 65 is set to an open state, and when the game ball enters the V winning opening 165, a jackpot is awarded.

In addition, in this embodiment, although details will be described later, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is stipulated to be 396/400 (approximately 9/10). The time-saving state in which the game ball easily enters the second ball entrance 1645 is the most advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which V winnings are likely to occur.

<About the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 115 to 118. In the fourth embodiment, the special symbol lottery method is different from the first embodiment described above, and in response to the above-mentioned differences, some configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main controller 110 are different. It's set.

First, with reference to FIG. 115, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. These counters etc. are used for special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37, display settings on the second symbol display device 83, and display settings on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the following operations.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used in the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. a first winning type counter C2 used for the first win type counter C2, a stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbol, and a small win type counter (not shown) used to select the small hit type of the special symbol. A winning type counter C5, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used.

In addition, a second winning random number counter C4 is used for drawing the normal symbols, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and a variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the normal symbols. A type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 39), and some counters are updated irregularly during main processing (see Figure 55). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da that corresponds to the ball entering the special symbol ball entrance 64, which is made up of four holding areas (holding areas 1 to 4), A second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645 consisting of (first to fourth areas) is provided, and a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da is provided. , the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of ball entry into the special drawing ball entrance 64, respectively. .

Then, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are shifted to the first special symbol execution area. , special symbol variations based on the various stored values are started.

Similarly, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db, a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, The values of the small hit type counter C5 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored respectively.

Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. , special symbol variations based on the various stored values are started.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (in parallel) execute the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Each of the reserved ball storage areas (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db) is configured to have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting conditions for each special symbol are satisfied, the next special symbol variation can be executed promptly.

In addition, in this embodiment, since only the second special symbol is configured to have a small win as a lottery result, the value of the small win type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da. However, for example, the lottery result of the first special symbol is configured to have a small win, and the value of the small win type counter C5 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. It may be configured.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, even in the reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da) corresponding to the special symbol type (first special symbol) that does not have a small hit as a lottery result, a small hit may occur. The configuration may be such that the value of the type counter C5 is stored. In this way, regardless of the specifications of the special symbol lottery (whether there is a small hit or not), the entry of the ball into the starting hole (special symbol entrance hole 64, second ball entrance hole 1645) that triggers the special symbol lottery. It is configured to store all the counter values obtained by the method, and when the special symbol starting conditions (variation conditions) are met, the special symbol lottery is performed using only the necessary values from among the obtained counter values. By configuring the system to perform this, the same configuration can be used for multiple gaming machines with different special symbol lottery specifications (whether or not there is a small win), thereby making it possible to standardize parts and technology. This makes it possible to reduce costs.

Furthermore, the RAM 203 of this embodiment has a normal symbol reserved corresponding to the ball entering (passing the ball) to the through gate 67 which is made up of four reserved areas (the first to fourth reserved areas) like the above-mentioned special symbols. A ball storage area 203dc is provided, and in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc, the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2 are stored in accordance with the timing of ball entry into the through gate 67. Each is stored.

Then, when the normal symbol starting condition (variation condition) is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the regular symbol reserved ball storage area 203dc are shifted to the regular symbol execution area, and the various stored values are Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

In addition, in this embodiment, each counter value obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 1645 is held and stored, and each counter value obtained based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is stored. Although it has a configuration that stores and stores values, it is not limited to this, and does not have a function (retention storage function) that stores each counter value obtained for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol). It may be configured as follows.

With this configuration, in a gaming machine where a lottery of one special symbol type is switched between a lottery that is advantageous to the player and a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, an advantageous lottery can be executed. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a different game state is set and an unfavorable lottery is executed with one special symbol in a state where a large number of reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment replaces the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment with a jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 24(a)). The difference is that a variable pattern selection 4 table 202dc is provided in place of the variable pattern selection table 202e for the jackpot type selection 4 table 202db, and a small winning random number table da is newly provided. Note that since the other components are the same, the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 117(a), the small winning random number table 202da provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 117(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small winning random number table 202da. This small hit random number table 202da is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol is defined.

Specifically, in the small hit random number table 202da, the determination value for determining a small hit is defined for each type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the state of the special symbol (low A predetermined range of determination values is defined regardless of the probability state or high probability state. As shown in FIG. 117(a), when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small win is not defined, and the first special symbol is drawn by the first special symbol. It is stipulated that there is no chance of winning.

On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first win random number counter C1 corresponding to the small win is defined in the range of "4 to 399". In other words, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is 0 (does not win), and the probability of winning a small win in the second special symbol lottery is 396/400 (approximately 9/10 ).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 for winning the jackpot is different from the value of the first winning random number counter C1 for winning the small winning, and the special symbol lottery is performed. In one process of executing (the process of determining whether or not there is a hit), the system is configured to execute successively (simultaneously) a determination of whether or not a big win is appropriate and a determination of whether or not a small win is appropriate.

With this configuration, it is possible to perform a lottery for a big win or a small win with a predetermined probability for one acquired counter value (first winning random number counter C1 value).

In this embodiment, when a small win is won, the V opening/closing door 65a attached to the V winning device 65 is opened for a certain period of time (a state in which the game ball can enter the V winning device 65). It is configured so that A jackpot is awarded by placing a game ball into the V winning opening 165 in the V winning device 65 while the V opening/closing door 65a is open. Therefore, the player plays the game while hoping to win many small wins.

In addition, in this embodiment, the V opening/closing door 65a is configured to be opened for a predetermined period of time when a small win is won, but the invention is not limited to this, and the type of small win that is won can be classified. The period during which the V opening/closing door 65a is opened may be changed based on the winning type. In such a configuration, it is preferable to provide a small win type table and refer to the table to determine the small win type. With this configuration, the player can be interested not only in winning a small win but also in the type of small win to be won, and the player can enjoy a small win in which the V opening/closing door 65a is opened for a longer period of time. A player plays a game while hoping to win. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit is defined as being different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the benefits given to the player different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol. In addition, it is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm in order to perform more lottery drawings with more advantageous special symbols. As described above, in this embodiment, unless a specific gaming state (time saving state) is set, the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is not executed frequently, so the player On the other hand, it is possible to have the player actively play the game so that a specific game state is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, a table referred to when executing a jackpot lottery (first winning random number table 202a) and a table referred to when executing a small winning lottery (small winning random number table 202da) are provided. Although they are configured separately, the present invention is not limited to this, and a single table may be used to execute the large winning lottery and the small winning lottery. In this case, for example, the first winning random number table 202a may be configured to define a range of counter values for winning a small win for each type of special symbol. With this configuration, the number of data tables included in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

As explained above, in this embodiment, a jackpot is determined according to a predetermined judgment value according to the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1, the type of special symbol, and the state of the special symbol. Although the system is configured to determine whether a winner or a small win has been won, the invention is not limited to this; for example, depending on the number of jackpot wins or the number of small win wins within a specific period until a predetermined condition is met, It may be configured to vary the first random number counter C1 value defined as a jackpot win or a small win, or a jackpot lottery or a small win that is executed when a predetermined abnormal condition is met. As a data table for abnormal times that is referred to in the lottery, a data table may be provided in which a determination value corresponding to a jackpot or a determination value corresponding to a small win is not defined.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, and A restriction is set so that the players do not win the jackpot at the same time (in parallel) (so that the jackpot game is not executed). In a pachinko machine 10 having such restrictions, for example, if a jackpot is won in the drawing of one special symbol, and until the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed, the lottery of the other special symbol will not be executed. In order to avoid winning the jackpot, the special symbol lottery will be executed by referring to a dedicated data table that does not specify the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot, but only the judgment value corresponding to the small win. It may be configured.

Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, compared to the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above. Reserved ball storage area 203dc, 1st special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd, 2nd special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203cf, small hit flag 203dg, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh, special figure 1 The difference is that a variable time counter 203di, a special figure 2 variable time counter 203dj, a special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk, a special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl, and a short time end standby flag 203dm are added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da stores various counter values obtained based on balls entering the special symbol entrance 64 (starting winning) up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). This is a storage area for storing. In addition, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203db is acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance 1645 (starting winning) up to the upper limit number (four in this embodiment). This is a storage area for storing various counter values.

The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops varying and displaying, When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, this is a storage area where the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting variable display of the second special symbol are stored.For details, please refer to the first special symbol holding ball execution area ( (not shown).

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) are activated. The values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the small winning type counter C5 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) upon detection of winning are respectively stored. During the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), when the MPU 201 detects that a ball has entered the special drawing ball opening 64 (starting prize winning), the MPU 201 inputs each counter C1 to C2, C5 from the counter buffer. , CS1 are acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, respectively. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 1645 (starting winning), each counter C1 to C2, C5, CS1 is transferred from the counter buffer, similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. The values are obtained and similarly stored in each corresponding area (not shown).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the special symbol variation (lottery), in order to execute processing such as the jackpot lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, One of the data (values of counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1) corresponding to each starting prize stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db described above. The data corresponding to the starting prize is shifted to this special symbol holding ball execution area. Note that a shift in this embodiment refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc stores the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 115) upon detection of the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 (starting winning). This is a storage area where values are stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (starting winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39), the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 reads the value of the second winning random number counter C4 from the counter buffer. , obtains the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 and stores it in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc has four holding areas so that the data (values of counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one starting winning can be stored (held) for up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203dc, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (starting winning) is stored in order from the holding area in which the data is consumed earlier among the empty holding areas. .

In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the timing to start executing the fluctuating display performance of the normal symbol based on the starting winning, each counter value is stored and the winning lottery of the normal symbol is performed. It is a memory for storing data (values of counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting the display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the fluctuating display performance of the normal symbols, the MPU 201 suspends the above-mentioned normal symbols in order to execute processes such as winning lottery and setting the display of the second symbol display device 83. Among the data corresponding to each starting prize stored in the ball storage area 203dc (the value of the second random number counter C4, the value of the normal pattern fluctuation type counter CS2), the data corresponding to the first starting winning is stored in this normal Shift to the symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Note that a shift in this embodiment refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are used to detect the special symbol input detected during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on winnings to the ball opening 64 or the second ball entrance 1645, the number of pending balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable display performance performed on the first symbol display device 37 (the variable display performance performed on the third symbol display device 81) ) is a counter that counts up to four times each. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 54). Then, each time a starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de are decremented by 1 each time the variable display performance is executed.

In addition, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd (that is, the number of reserved balls) is determined based on the ball entering the special symbol ball entrance 64 (starting winning). When the counter value is stored in the area 203da, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command that is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time a starting prize is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is incremented by 1. It is.

In addition, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de (namely, the number of reserved balls) is determined based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1645 (starting winning). When the counter value is stored in the area 203db, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time a starting prize is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203de is incremented by 1. It is.

The MPU 201 inputs each value of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer into the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). are respectively stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is transferred to the first special symbol fluctuation start process. (See S255 in FIG. 123) or in the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), perform a jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and determine the fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. do. In the first symbol display device 37, a variable display is performed under the control of the main controller 110 based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure second fluctuation pattern command and stop type command. Under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display performance based on the variable pattern and stop type notified by the variable pattern command and the stop type command.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is fluctuatingly displayed. This is set to ON when a jackpot of a symbol is executed. This special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to ON in S852 of the first special symbol variation stop process (see S257 in FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. In addition, in the process of S952 of the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), it is set to OFF.

As a result, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol, which was forced to stop and display as a missed symbol, is prevented from executing the lottery again. be able to.

In addition, in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, after executing the process related to the first special symbol within one special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), the process related to the second special symbol is executed. By configuring the process to be executed, the variation process for each special symbol can be executed without delay.

Then, in special symbol variation processing 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), when any special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, jackpot control is performed in the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55). The configuration is such that the process (S1804 in FIG. 56) is executed. In addition, the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) is a variation process for each special symbol (S254 in FIG. ~S263) is configured to be skipped.

In other words, in this embodiment, while a jackpot game or a small win game is being executed based on the special symbol lottery result, a new special symbol variation (lottery) is not executed. Due to the variation process for the first special symbol that is executed first in special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode to indicate that the lottery result is a jackpot. In this case, a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119).

In this embodiment configured in this way, by using the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode to indicate that the lottery result is a jackpot, It is possible to prevent a new variation process for the second special symbol from being executed in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S154 in FIG. 119).

The small hit flag 203dg is a flag indicating that the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a small win, and is set to ON when the small win is won. This small hit flag 203dg is set to ON when the judgment result of the second special symbol is a small win (see S1151 in FIG. 128), and when the special symbol variation whose winning result is a small win is stopped and displayed. (See S1655 in FIG. 128).

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is a flag indicating the period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special figure 1 is stopped, and when set to on, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, When the setting is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the stopped updating (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) whose lottery result is a small win (S1652 in FIG. 133), and special symbol fluctuation processing 4 ( (see FIG. 119) (S252 in FIG. 119). If it is set to on in the process of S252, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in the same way as during fluctuation is executed (Fig. 119 S253). In other words, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the variable display continues to be executed. Become. Thereby, by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh to ON, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has not been forcibly stopped. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol variation execution process (see FIG. 123) that it is set to ON (S751 in FIG. 123: Yes), it is set to OFF (S753 in FIG. 123).

In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured such that only the second special symbol lottery can win the small hit, the special symbol whose variable display is temporarily stopped based on winning the small win is the first special symbol. However, if the first special symbol lottery is configured so that a small hit can be won, a special symbol 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot, it is determined based on the fact that one of the special symbols stops in a combination indicating a jackpot (based on the execution of a jackpot game). ), a process that forcibly stops the fluctuating display of the other special symbol when it misses, and if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small win, one special symbol stops with a combination that indicates a small win. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small winning game ends).

That is, the structure is such that, depending on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various ways. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result for the player (for example, a jackpot), and while the fluctuating display to show the game result is being executed, the lottery result of the special symbol on the other side is It is possible to prevent the special symbol (the lottery result is a small win) from being displayed in a stopped state and the large win from being erased by the small win.

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is a counter for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S559 in FIG. 122). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123) is executed, and the value is 0 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). (See S256 in FIG. 119). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is 0 (S256 in FIG. 119: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process ( (See S257 in FIG. 119) is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special symbol 1 variation time counter 203di is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (see S1555 in FIG. 132). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss when the second special symbol is displayed as a jackpot, the value of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time counter 203di remains, and the After the stop display, it can be suppressed that the variation of the first special symbol is restarted again based on the value left in the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203dj.

The special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is a counter for measuring the variation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S956 in FIG. 129). A value indicating the fluctuation time is set (see S1260 in FIG. 129). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol variation execution process (see S261 in FIG. 131) is executed, and the value becomes 0 in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119). (See S262 in FIG. 119). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is 0 (S262 in FIG. 119: Yes), a second special symbol fluctuation stop process ( (See S263 in FIG. 119) is executed.

Furthermore, the value of this special symbol 2 variable time counter 203dj is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (see S855 in FIG. 124). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot, the value of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj remains, and the After the stop display, it is possible to prevent the variation of the second special symbol from being restarted again based on the value left in the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203dj.

The special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is a flag indicating whether or not the variation of the first special symbol is such that the value of the time saving counter 203h should be subtracted when the variation is stopped. This special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 in the first special symbol variation start process (see S258 in FIG. 120) (S358 in FIG. 120: Yes). , is set to ON (S359 in FIG. 120), and the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is ON in the time saving update process (see S863 in FIG. 125) of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S257 in FIG. 124). If it is determined that (S2101 in FIG. 125: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted (S2102), and the special map 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF (S2103).

In addition, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is set to off in the first special symbol variation stop process (see S257 in FIG. 124). Similarly, in the second special symbol lottery, if a jackpot is won, the second special symbol variation stop process (see SS263 in FIG. 132) is set to off. In addition, by setting the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk to OFF when winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, if the variation of the first special symbol has temporarily stopped after the jackpot game, the variation will be stopped. After restarting and when the fluctuation is stopped, it is determined whether the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S2101 in FIG. 125), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (FIG. 125 (S2101: No), the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h (see S2102 in FIG. 125) is skipped, and the process of stopping the variation is executed.

By configuring in this way, when the jackpot game ends and the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped first special symbol restarts, and the fluctuation stops, the remaining time shortening number is not updated (subtracted). Therefore, in this embodiment, in the time-saving game after the end of the jackpot game awarded by winning a V prize, in addition to the number of drawings of the special symbol specified by the jackpot, the remaining variation of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is Time also becomes a time-saving game state. With this configuration, it is possible to set the time-saving gaming state, which is an advantageous period for the player, to be longer.

The special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is a flag for indicating whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203h should be subtracted when the variation stops in the variation of the second special symbol. In the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (see S960 in FIG. 126), and the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0. If it is determined that the value is the same (that is, the time is being saved) (S960: Yes), it is set to ON (see S961 in FIG. 126). Then, it is referenced in the time saving update process (S1661) of the special figure 2 off-setting stop process (S1564), and if it is on, the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl is set to off. . In addition, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) is set to off (see S860 in FIG. 124), and the second special symbol is turned off (see S860 in FIG. 124). If a jackpot is won in the lottery, it is set to off in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S263 in FIG. 132) (see S1560 in FIG. 132).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the lottery of the first special symbol, when a jackpot is won and the second special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped when the second special symbol is changed. As mentioned above, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, this special symbol 2 subtraction flag 203dl is configured to be set to OFF, so when the fluctuation is forcibly stopped due to the miss, , the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203h can be skipped. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

The time-saving end standby flag 203dm is a flag indicating that a special symbol fluctuation that satisfies the end conditions of the time-saving state has been started. Specifically, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol is changed 4 times or 15 times as the prescribed period of the time saving state, and the time saving state is ended. This time saving final variation has started, indicating that the time saving state is a standby state to be ended.

This time-saving end standby flag 203dm determines whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 (that is, the final variation of the prescribed number of times in the time-saving state) in the first special symbol variation start process (see S258 in FIG. 120). (S360), when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), it is set to ON (see S361 in FIG. 120). Also, in the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S962: Yes), it is set to ON (see S963 in FIG. 126).

Then, when the time saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 125), which is the timing to stop the variation of the special symbol, is executed, or when a new special symbol is determined (the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S862 in FIG. 121) (see S356)), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127)), and when the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to on, the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to off. .

With this configuration, when the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (that is, the standby state), when any of the time saving end timings arrives, the time saving end standby flag 203dm is reliably set according to each timing can perform time-saving termination processing.

<About the control process executed by the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 119 to 136. In the fourth embodiment, in contrast to the control processing of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are overlapped (in parallel). They are different in that they are configured to be executable, and the content of control processing corresponding to the above-mentioned difference is different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 119, special symbol variation processing 4 (S151), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be explained. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process 4 (S151). Special symbol variation processing 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) performs various judgments (validity judgment) and decisions on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on each acquired counter value, and changes the first special symbol and the second special symbol by predetermined control. Various commands for controlling the first symbol display device 37 to enable variable display in the determined variable display mode, and for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variable display effect of the third symbol and the fourth symbol. Control is executed to set the information and to stop and display the display in a display mode that indicates the determination result (appropriate determination result). The special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), first, it is determined whether the game is in a jackpot game (during jackpot) or a small win game (during small win) (S251). Here, based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, it is determined whether the current game is a jackpot game (during a jackpot) or a small win game (during a small win).

In the process of S251, if it is determined that it is a big hit or a small hit (S251: Yes), then it is determined whether the special map 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on (S252), and the flag is turned on. (S252: Yes), the display on the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special symbol (in this embodiment, the first special symbol (special symbol 1)) is The information is updated (S253), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S252, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to ON (S252: No), this process is directly ended.

Here, the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when the second special pattern is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating a small hit win. In this embodiment, while the small winning game is being executed, the variable time set in the variable display (special symbol variable display) for showing the lottery results of special symbols is configured not to be updated (subtracted). During this period, the first symbol display device 83 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode to indicate that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, which was being executed at the start of the small winning game, has been temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful if the first special symbol variation among them disappears. In addition, as a display mode to show that the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display format to show that the fluctuating display is in progress (for example, at 0.2 second intervals). The display mode may be the same as the blinking display mode in which the light is turned on and off repeatedly), or the display mode may be the same as the display mode in which the blinking interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that the variable display is in progress (for example, the display mode is lit on and off at 0.5 second intervals). (blinking display mode) may also be used. Furthermore, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 83 is configured to be able to display a display mode of multiple colors, a blinking display mode using a dedicated color that can be displayed only when temporarily stopped is used. Also good.

On the other hand, in the process of S251, if it is determined that the current jackpot or small win is not in progress (S251: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is greater than 0, that is, the first It is determined whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S254). If it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is greater than 0) (S254: Yes), the first special symbol variation in progress process is executed ( S255).

In this first special symbol variation execution processing (S255), in order to vary (update) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 during the period in which the first special symbol is varying. processing is executed. When the process of S255 is finished, next, it is determined whether the value of the first variation time counter 203a2 updated in the first special symbol variation execution process (S255) is 0 (S256), and If it is determined in the process that the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203di is 0 (S256: Yes), a first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S257), and the process proceeds to S259, which will be described later.

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S257), when the fluctuation time specified for the first special symbol that is being fluctuatedly displayed has elapsed, the fluctuating display is stopped at a symbol that indicates the lottery result of the first special symbol. is executed. In addition, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S257), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the second special symbol that is being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss. is executed. Further, if the second special symbol being executed has won a jackpot, a process for erasing information regarding the jackpot is executed. Details of this first special symbol variation stop processing (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. 124. If it is determined in the process of S256 that the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di is not 0 (S256: No), the process of S257 is skipped and the process proceeds to S259.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S254 that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S254: No), that is, if it is determined that the current time is not during the special figure 1 fluctuation. Next, executes a first special symbol variation start process (S258). In this first special symbol variation start process (S258), processing for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and the state is such that a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If the state is such that a new lottery (variation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (variation) is executed. This first special symbol variation start process (S258) will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 120 to 122.

After executing the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S258), after determining that the special symbol 1 is fluctuating in the process of S256 (S256: No), or after executing the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S257). After the execution, next, the variation processing regarding the second special symbol (S259 to S263) is executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is greater than 0 (S259). That is, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is currently being displayed in a variable manner. In the process of S259, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S259: No), this means that the current time is not during the special figure 2 fluctuation, so the next Then, a second special symbol variation start process is executed to execute a new lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (S260), and this process ends.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S260), if pending data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol pending ball number storage area 203b, jackpot determination and variation pattern selection based on the pending data Processing is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation start process (S260), when the lottery result is a jackpot (or a small jackpot), the jackpot flag 203i (or the small jackpot flag 203y) is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the process of S259, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is larger than 0, that is, the special figure 2 is currently changing (S259: Yes), then the second A special symbol variation execution process is executed (S261). The contents of this second special symbol variation execution process (S261) will be described later with reference to FIG. is executed by changing from the first special symbol to the second special symbol.

Then, when the second special symbol variation execution process (S261) is finished, it is determined whether the current value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203dj is 0 (S262), and if it is determined that it is 0 (S262 :Yes), executes the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S263), and then ends this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S262 that the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj is not 0 (S262: No), the process of S263 is skipped and this process is ended.

The second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the variable time has elapsed, a process is executed to stop the variable display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. In addition, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S263), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the first special symbol fluctuation that is being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss. Processing is executed. Further, if the second special symbol being executed has won a jackpot, a process for erasing information regarding the jackpot is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since the configuration is such that a small win can be won in the second special symbol lottery, if the second special symbol lottery result is not a jackpot, it can be handled as a small win or a loss. The specified processing is executed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 119, in this embodiment, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this, it is configured to execute a variation process regarding the first special symbol (S254 to S258) and a variation process regarding the second special symbol (S259 to S263) within one special symbol variation process. Therefore, when it becomes possible to execute a new lottery (variation) for each special symbol, the variation process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

Moreover, in this embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed earlier (with priority) than the variation process regarding the second special symbol. In this way, by clearly setting the processing order of each special symbol, even if the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol and the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, priority will be given to the first special symbol. 1 Special symbol fluctuation stop processing will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation processing regarding the first special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing regarding the second special symbol; however, the variation processing regarding the second special symbol is not limited to this. The processing may be configured to be executed with priority over the variation processing regarding the first special symbol.

Further, it may be configured to give priority to execution of variation processing for a special symbol type in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed in the set gaming state, and the player If the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol types in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol types in which the variation process is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a lottery result that is advantageous to the player from being canceled (discarded) by a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the first special symbol variation start process (S258), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation start process (S258).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is acquired (S351), and the value of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is It is determined whether the value (N1) is greater than 0 (S352). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is larger than 0 (S352: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is subtracted by 1 (S353 ).

Then, a held ball number command indicating the number of held balls after subtraction is set (S354), and the data stored in holding areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol held ball number storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A process of sequentially shifting to the side is performed (S355). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reservation area 1 → execution area, reservation area 2 → reservation area 1, reservation area 3 → reservation area 2, reservation area 4 → reservation area 3.

Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S356). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 120) will be described in detail later, but using the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), Based on the set gaming state, a jackpot determination is performed as to whether or not it is a jackpot.

Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S357). The first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S357) will be described in detail later, but is based on the result of the validity determination based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357) is executed, and then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current gaming state is in the time saving mode (S358). ). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (S358: Yes), the special map 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to ON (S359), and the process moves to S360. On the other hand, in the process of S358, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not a value greater than 0 (S358: No), the gaming state is the normal state, so the process is directly ended. In this way, when the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, when the time is being shortened, by setting the special chart 1 subtraction flag 203dk to ON, the time saving is started when the fluctuation is stopped. It is possible to determine whether the fluctuation has occurred, and to update the time saving end condition (subtract the value of the time saving counter 203h) when the fluctuation is stopped.

After executing the process of S359 described above, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 (S360). That is, it is determined whether the final fluctuation is the condition for ending the time saving state. When it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 (S360: Yes), the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S361), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S360, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 1, this process is ended as it is because it is not the final change in the time-saving gaming state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S451). Then, in order to determine whether the time saving end condition has been met and the state is on standby, that is, whether the final variation of the time saving is being executed in the lottery of the second special symbol, the time saving end is determined. It is determined whether the standby flag 203dm is set to on (S452). If it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is on (that is, the second special symbol is in the final variation of time saving) (S452: Yes), the currently set time saving state period has ended. Therefore, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S453), and the time saving end standby flag 203dm and the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl are set to OFF (S454). Next, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S455), a state command indicating that the gaming state has been switched to the normal state is set (S456), and the process moves to S457. On the other hand, in the process of S452, if it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is not on (S452: No), the final variation of the time saving state is not being executed, so the processes of S453 to S456 are skipped, The process moves to S457.

In this way, if you are waiting for the end of the time saving state (the final variation of the time saving state has started with the other special symbol), the game By setting the state to the normal state, even though the time-saving gaming state has ended, the time-saving gaming state will continue with the other special symbol until the final variation of the time-saving state is completed. It is possible to eliminate the problem of executing a game based on . Therefore, it is possible to provide players with appropriate games.

After completing the process of S452 or S453, it is next determined whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value based on the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)). , obtains the lottery result (determination result) (S457). Then, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot (S458), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (S458: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON to indicate that the first special symbol has won a jackpot. (S459). In this embodiment, the jackpot flag 203i is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of special symbol winning the jackpot in addition to information indicating the presence or absence of a jackpot winning. It is configured such that information indicating the presence or absence of a jackpot can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the process of S459, information indicating a jackpot is set in the area corresponding to the first special symbol in the jackpot flag 203i.

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S460), and the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired winning type counter C2 (S460). S461), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S458 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S458: No), a missing symbol of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S462), and this process ends. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120), will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357).

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot. It is determined whether the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S551). Here, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is on for the first special symbol. This jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S459 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 121) described above.

In the process of S551, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S551: Yes), the jackpot type selection 4 table 202db and the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 are Based on this, the jackpot type is determined (S552). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is acquired (S553), and the current gaming state (normal state, latent state) corresponding to the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203g is obtained. , probability variable state) is read out from the variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc (S554).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S553 and the variation pattern selection 4 table 202dc read out in the process of S554 (S555), and the variation pattern selected in the process of S555 is selected. Based on this, a special figure 1 variation pattern command is set (S556).

Next, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S557), a fluctuation start of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S558), and the selected fluctuation pattern A value indicating the variation time of is set to the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di (S559), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S551, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss (that is, the jackpot flag 203i for the first special symbol is off) (S551: No), the process of S552 is performed. The process skips to step S553.

Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the first special symbol variation execution process (S255), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be explained. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation execution process (S255). In this first special symbol variation execution processing (S255), processing for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation in progress, and Processing for restarting symbol variation is executed.

In the first special symbol variation execution processing (S255), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on. This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to ON when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, when a small hit is won with one special symbol, if the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the other special symbol will be displayed for a predetermined period of time (from the small winning to the small winning game). (period until the end of the small winning game), and after a predetermined period has passed (after the end of the small winning game), the other special symbol fluctuation is restarted again.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special symbol variation of one from ending during the small winning game of the other, resulting in a game that is difficult for the player to understand. Furthermore, based on winning a small winning game in one special symbol lottery, the lottery results of the other special symbol lottery will not be discarded, so for example, winning a small winning game will result in a jackpot win. It is possible to prohibit (suppress) the occurrence of a situation in which a lottery result (a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than a small winning prize) is discarded.

In the process of S751, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on (S751: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S752), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set to Set to off (S753), subtract 1 from the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di (S754), update the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S755), and end this process. .

In this embodiment, in the special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) executed every 2 milliseconds, the first special symbol variation execution process (See S255 in FIG. 119) is configured to execute, and the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203di is updated (subtracted by 1) in the first special symbol variation execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123). It is configured to do so. Therefore, for example, if a variation time of 30 seconds is set as the variation time of the first special symbol, "15000" is set as the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203di, and the value changes by 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured so that it is subtracted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S751 that the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is not set to ON (S751: No), that is, if it is determined that the small hit has not been won in the second special symbol lottery. , the process skips steps S752 and S753 and proceeds to step S754.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the first special symbol variation stop process (S257), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation stop processing (S257). This first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S257) is performed when it is determined that the current value of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is "0", that is, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is This is a process that is executed when the time period has elapsed.

When the first special symbol variation stop process (S257 in FIG. 124) is executed, it is first determined whether the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S851). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set on for the first special symbol (S851: Yes), then the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set on (S852) and the special symbol A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is turned on is set (S853).

Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (S854), and the value of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time counter 203dj is set to 0 (S855). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a jackpot, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) that is being executed is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a loss (missing symbol). (confirmed display).

After completing the process of S855, it is next determined whether the jackpot flag 203i for the second special symbol is set to on (S856), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S856: Yes), the above-mentioned In order to apply the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol that was forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss in the process of S854, the jackpot flag 203i for the second special symbol is set to off (S857 ), the stored information regarding the special figure 2 jackpot is deleted (S858), and the process moves to S859. On the other hand, in the process of S856, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the process of S857 and 808 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S859.

In the process of S859, first, a jackpot scenario won by this special symbol variation is set (see 809), and then the jackpot flag 203i, special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk, and special symbol 2 subtraction flag corresponding to the first special symbol are set. 203dl and the time-saving end standby flag 203dm are set to OFF, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is reset (S860). Then, information indicating that the current gaming state is a jackpot (jackpot game in progress) is stored in the gaming state storage area 203g (S861). The game state storage area 203g is configured to be able to separately store the game state related to the lottery game (normal state, time saving state) and the game state related to the winning game (medium jackpot, medium win), By executing the process of S861, the gaming state (normal state, time saving state) related to the lottery game at the timing of winning the jackpot and the gaming state indicating that the jackpot is being won are stored.

With this configuration, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine the gaming state that was set at the timing when the jackpot was won.

After completing the process of S861, next, a special figure 1 confirmation command is set to instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol (S863), and the first special symbol display device A process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner at step 37 (S864), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S851, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S851: No), the time saving update process (S862) is executed, and the process of S863 described above is executed. Move to processing. A detailed explanation of the time saving update process (S862) will be described later with reference to FIG. 125.

As described above, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S257), the processing (S859 to S864) of stopping the fluctuation display at the symbol indicating the lottery (first lottery game) result of the first special symbol is executed. Further, if the current lottery result is a jackpot (S851: Yes), the second special symbol that is changing is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result becomes a loss (S854). In this way, in the process of stopping and displaying one special symbol (determined display) with the symbol indicating a jackpot, by configuring the process to forcibly stop the other special symbol that is fluctuating, it is possible to simultaneously Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol variations to be executed.

In other words, in a configuration in which, like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation processing regarding the first special symbol and the variation processing regarding the second special symbol are sequentially executed, the fluctuation processing is executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. By executing the variation process (forced stop process) of the second special symbol within the variation process related to the first special symbol, the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at a timing when the variation process related to the second special symbol is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing related to the second special symbol from being duplicated and to execute the processing smoothly.

In addition, in this embodiment, at the timing when one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a jackpot, a process is executed to forcibly stop the other special symbol as a symbol indicating a loss. For example, if it is determined that one of the special symbols has won a jackpot, that is, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) ( In S458: Yes in FIG. 121, the variation of the other special symbol may be forcibly stopped at the missed symbol. In this case, it is preferable to perform a special variation that does not result in a jackpot for the other special symbol that has been forcibly missed and stopped until the jackpot variation of one special symbol ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that when one special symbol wins a jackpot, the other special symbol variation is forcibly stopped. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the other special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped and displayed, and to prevent the player from knowing whether or not a jackpot has been won.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that when one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a jackpot, the lottery result for the other special symbol variation being executed is discarded. For example, it is possible to suspend the special symbol variation of the other until the end of the jackpot game based on one special symbol, and restart the suspended special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot game. good. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming distrustful of the Pachinko machine 10 due to the game results of the lottery game executed by the player being discarded.

In addition, when controlling the fluctuation of the other special symbol being executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the content of the fluctuation control is configured to be different depending on the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed. For example, if the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol and is stopped and displayed, and the second special symbol is fluctuating to indicate that the lottery is a loss (loss fluctuation), that lottery During the fluctuation (winning fluctuation) to discard the result and forcibly stop the fluctuation to show that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit (big hit, small win) In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol ends, an interruption process may be executed so that the variation of the second special symbol can be restarted.

In this case, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol ends, the player is kept interested in whether a new second special symbol variation will be executed or whether the suspended second special symbol variation will be restarted. You can play games. Furthermore, when such a configuration is used, the system is configured to execute a suggestion performance for suggesting to the player the status of the second special symbol (whether or not it is suspended) during the jackpot game of the first special symbol. That's good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125, one process of special symbol fluctuation stop processing (first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S151 in FIG. 119), second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132)) The time-saving update process (S862 (S1661)) will be explained. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time-saving update process (S862 (S1661)). In this time-saving update process (S862 (S1661)), when the gaming state is in the time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is updated when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, and when the end condition is satisfied, the gaming state is changed to normal. Execute the process to transition to the state. In addition, in the explanation to be described later, a process will be described in the case where the variation of the first special symbol is stopped, but the same process is executed also when the target is the second special symbol.

When the time-saving update process (S864 (S1661)) is executed, first, check whether the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on or not, that is, the fluctuation of the special symbol currently being executed starts to fluctuate during the time-saving game. It is determined whether or not it is the same (S2101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on, that is, the fluctuation has started during the time-saving game (S2101: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted (S2102). Then, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF (S2103), and the process moves to S2104. On the other hand, in the process of S2101, if it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is not on (S2101: No), the process of S2102 to S2106 is skipped because it is not a fluctuation stop that triggers the update of the time saving state. Then, the process moves to step S2107.

As mentioned above, if the gaming state is in the time-saving state when the special symbol fluctuation starts, by setting the subtraction flag of the corresponding symbol type to ON, the value of the time-saving counter 203h can be subtracted when the fluctuation stops. I can do it. Therefore, the time-saving gaming state can be set until the final fluctuation of the time-saving gaming state stops. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player for a maximum period of time.

In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation is stopped for a period until the small win game ends. It is configured not to restart. Then, a V win occurs during the small winning game, a jackpot is awarded, and after the jackpot game ends, the temporarily stopped fluctuation of the first special symbol resumes. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 137, since the special symbol 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF before the jackpot game starts, when the temporarily stopped fluctuation restarts and stops, the special Since the subtraction flag 203dk in FIG. 1 is off, the value of the time saving counter 203h is not subtracted. That is, the structure is such that the number of remaining time shortening times is not subtracted when the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbols is stopped after the end of the jackpot game due to the V winning. With this configuration, in addition to the specified time-saving period set by the jackpot type, the time-saving game is also set for the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped special symbol, making it an advantageous period for the player. It is possible to set the time saving state to be as long as possible. Therefore, the interest in the game is improved.

In the process of S2104, it is determined whether the time saving end standby flag 203dm is on (S2104). If it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is on (S2104: Yes), that is, the current special symbol variation is the final time-saving variation, and in the second special symbol (the other special symbol), the time-saving completion flag 203dm is on. If the next variation has not started since the last variation, it is the timing to shift the gaming state to the normal state, so the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to OFF (S2105) and the gaming state is stored. A normal state is set in the area 203g (S2106). Then, the process moves to S2107.

On the other hand, in the process of S2104, if it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is not on (S2104: Yes), the final variation of the time-saving game is not executed, that is, the time-saving state continues. Therefore, the process of S2105 to S2106 described above is skipped and the process proceeds to S2107. In this way, in a simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, when the final fluctuation of the time-saving game stops, fluctuations exceeding the prescribed number of times in the time-saving game state (from the last fluctuation to the next fluctuation) are executed in the other special symbol. If it is not being executed, the game state is shifted. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not feel strange.

When any one of S2101, S2104, and S2106 is completed, the process moves to S2107. In the process of S2107, a command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203h and the gaming state is set (S2107), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the second special symbol variation start process (S260), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation start process (S260).

When the second special symbol variation start process (S260) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to on (S951). That is, the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) executed immediately before this process (within the same special symbol variation process 4 (see S151 in FIG. 119)) (see)) to determine whether or not you have won the jackpot.

In the process of S951, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to on (S951: Yes), various processes for starting the fluctuation of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to OFF (S952), and this processing ends. That is, in this embodiment, by using the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the second After a special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with a removed symbol, a new second special symbol variation is prohibited from being executed. Thereby, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed during the variation process related to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing any problems.

In this embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S951 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to OFF. Therefore, by setting the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203df, the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126) can be skipped only once.

This is the first special symbol lottery (first special If you skip the second special symbol fluctuation start process (S260 in FIG. 126) that is executed immediately after winning the jackpot in the symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), then the first special symbol The jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (jackpot scenario) set in the jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121), and the jackpot game is This is because the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 119) is configured not to be executed until the end of the process.

With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation process of the other special symbol based on the lottery result of one special symbol, so that the control process executed by the main controller 110 The processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed (stopped and displayed on a missed symbol), and one special symbol is stopped and displayed. In order to prevent a new variation (lottery) of the other special symbol from being executed until a jackpot game based on the lottery result of the symbol is executed, the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203df is set and the variation processing of the other special symbol is performed. Although a configuration in which the process is skipped once is used, other configurations may be used.

In other words, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (jackpot win), the jackpot will not be won in the other special symbol lottery (variation) until the jackpot game based on the jackpot win ends. For example, when a jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56) for executing a jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 described later, the special figure 2 The configuration may be such that the fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to OFF.

With this configuration, even if the timing to turn on the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set before the timing at which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the timing for turning on the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set before the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, until the jackpot game is executed. It is possible to prohibit a new variation (lottery) of the second special symbol from being performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126) is executed with the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203df set to on, the variation of the second special symbol The configuration is such that the process is skipped, that is, a new variation is not started (the second special symbol remains stopped), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203df is turned on. If set, a variable display of a dedicated second special symbol may be performed.

In this case, the second special symbol is drawn using a special lottery that does not win a jackpot, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed for a period corresponding to the variation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. It may be configured, or the period until the jackpot game is executed based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol without executing the lottery of the second special symbol, or the period until reaching a specific timing during the jackpot game. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner until the end of the jackpot game. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped.

In addition, the content of the variation process regarding each special symbol mentioned above is configured to be outputted to the audio lamp control device 113 side as appropriate by setting a command indicating the content, and the third symbol display device The variable display of the third and fourth symbols displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, the voice lamp control device 113 side receives a command indicating that the second special symbol has been forcibly stopped and displayed. In this case, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 or the fourth symbol is used to execute the variable production during the forced stop. Also good.

In this way, each symbol (third symbol, fourth symbol) that is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol on the third symbol display device 81, which is easily visible to the player, is used to display the actual second special symbol. Even when the variation performance is configured to be executed while the symbols are forcibly stopped, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol variation has been forcibly stopped.

In the process of S951, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol and is not stopped and displayed (S951 in FIG. 126: No), The processes of S953 to S959 are executed, and the process moves to the process of S960, which will be described later. The processing of S953 to S959 is performed in response to the processing of S351 to S357 of the first special symbol fluctuation start processing (S258 in FIG. 120), the first special symbol reservation ball counter 203dd, the first special symbol reservation The value of the ball number counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S355), the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S356), the second special symbol reserved ball number The counter 203de, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S958), and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S959) Since they are the same except for the changes, their explanation will be omitted.

Furthermore, after executing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909), the processes of S960 to S963 are executed, and this process ends. This process of S960 to S963 changes the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to the special figure 2 subtraction flag 203dl for each process of S358 to S361 of the first special symbol variation start process (S258 in FIG. 120) described above. Since they are the same except for the above, the explanation thereof will be omitted.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, since the gaming machine is a game machine in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol are executed at the same time, the same process may be executed when the fluctuation of both special symbols starts. This can prevent problems such as the remaining time shortening count not being subtracted in the other special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955). This second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955) is different from the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) in that the type of target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. , and added some other processing.

The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955 in FIG. 127) differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) described above in the following points. That is, in the process of S1051 corresponding to the process of S451, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) was changed to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and in S452 to S461 In the processing of S1052 to S1061 corresponding to the processing of , the target was changed from special symbol 1 (first special symbol) to special symbol 2 (second special symbol), and when the lottery result of the special symbol was a loss. The difference is that the processing to be executed has been changed. Since the other points are the same, the explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S955 in FIG. 127), if it is determined that the current lottery is not a jackpot (S1058: No), the special symbol 2 loss variation process is executed (S1062) and this process ends. do.

This special symbol 2 loss variation process (S1062) is a process that is executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than a big hit, that is, a small hit or a loss. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 128, but if the lottery result is a loss, a process similar to the process in S462 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S356 in FIG. 121) described above is executed, If the lottery result is a small win, processing corresponding to the small win is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 128, the contents of the special figure 2 off variation process (S1062) will be explained. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 off variation process (S1062).

In the special figure 2 out-of-win variation process (S1062), first, it is determined whether the current lottery result (the lottery result obtained in the process of S1057 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127)) is a small hit. (S1151).

If it is determined that the small win has been won in the process of S1151 (S1151: Yes), the small win flag 203dg is set to ON (S1152), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set as a small win (S1153). ), then sets the small winning symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1154), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1151, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is a miss (S1151: No), the miss symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is is set (S1155), and this processing ends.

As explained above, the special symbol 2 off variation process (S1062 in FIG. 128), which is executed as one process of the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), that is, the special symbol variation (lottery) By setting the small hit flag 203dg on when it is determined that a small hit has been won in the process executed at the timing when the second special symbol starts, the setting status of the small win flag 203dg is determined at the timing when the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops. Based on this, it is possible to easily execute processing corresponding to a small winning win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126), will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959).

The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959 in FIG. 129) differs from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S357 in FIG. 122) described above in the following points. In the process of S1251 corresponding to the process of S551, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S552 to S559 In each process of S1252 to S1256 and S1258 to S1260 corresponding to each process up to, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. The difference is that the process of selecting the out-of-shape variation pattern in FIG. 2 (S1257) is added. Since other points are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the special symbol 2 off variation pattern executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S959) which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126) The contents of the selection process (S1257 in FIG. 130) will be explained.

When the second special symbol variation start process (S260 in FIG. 126) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S1351). In the process of S1351, determination is performed based on the lottery result obtained in the process of S1057 of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S959 in FIG. 127).

In the process of S1351, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S1351: Yes), then the value of the small win type counter C5 is acquired (S1352), and the value of the acquired small win type counter C5 is A small winning type is selected based on the value (S1353). In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since there is only one type of small win, a different small win type is not set based on the value of the acquired small win type counter C5, but for example, a plurality of small win types are not set. If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set the small win type, a small win type selection table is provided in which different small win types are defined for the value range of the obtained small win type counter C5, and S1352 and S1353 The configuration may be such that different small winning types are selected depending on the processing.

As in this embodiment, even though there is only one small winning type, by configuring to use the processes of S1352 and S1353, for example, the game specifications can be changed during the development period of the pachinko machine 10. Even if changes are made, the changes can be easily accommodated.

After completing the process in S1353, the variable pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state is read out (S1354), and the small winning pattern is selected based on the read variable pattern selection table and the obtained value of the variable type counter CS1. A variation pattern (small winning variation pattern) is selected (S1355). Then, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the small winning variation pattern selected in the process of S1355 is set (S1356), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1351 that the current lottery result is not a small win (a loss) (S1351: No), the process for the case where the lottery result is a loss (S1357 to S1359) is executed. In the process of S1357, first, the fluctuation pattern selection table according to the gaming state is read out (S1357), a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS2 (S1358), and a special fluctuation pattern is selected based on the selected fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern command shown in FIG. 2 is set (S1359), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the contents of the second special symbol variation execution process (S261), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be explained. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation execution process (S261). In this embodiment, since it is configured so that the first special symbol lottery does not result in a small win, in this second special symbol variation execution process (S261), the above-mentioned first special symbol variation execution process ( (See S255 in FIG. 123), is the flag (special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203dh) set when winning a small hit (running a small winning game) with the other special symbol set on? The difference is that the process for determining is omitted, and other than that, they are the same except that the processing target has been changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. .

In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a small win can be won in the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to win a small win in the first special symbol lottery (a small win game is executed). A flag (for example, special symbol 2 temporary stop flag) is provided to indicate this, and in this second special symbol variation execution process, the same process as the first special symbol variation execution process (see S255 in FIG. 123) described above is provided. All you have to do is execute.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the second special symbol variation stop process (S263), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 4 (S151 in FIG. 119), will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation stop processing (S263). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S263) differs from the above-described first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S257 in FIG. 124) in that the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. The difference is that the content of the process executed when the lottery result is other than a jackpot is changed, and the process of setting a flag to stop the fluctuation of the other special symbol is omitted.

That is, the process of S852 in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S257 in FIG. 124) has been deleted, and the processing target of S851 and S853 to S864 has been changed to the second special symbol (S1551 and S1553 to S1513). The difference is that when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S1551: No), special drawing 2 out-of-game stop processing (S1558) is executed. Since other points are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the contents of the special symbol 2 off stop process (S1564) executed in the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 132) will be explained. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 out-of-place stop processing (S1564). This special symbol 2 missing stop process (S1564) is a special symbol corresponding to the case where the lottery result obtained in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) is other than a jackpot (small hit or miss). This is to execute the processing to stop the fluctuation.

When the special figure 2 missing stop process (S1564) is executed, it is first determined whether the small hit flag 203dg is set to on (S1651), and if it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is set to on, (S1651: Yes), sets the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh to on (S1652), and sets the special figure 1 temporary stop command to indicate that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on ( S1653). The special figure 1 temporary stop command set here is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by external output processing (S1801) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55). When the voice lamp control device 113 side receives the special pattern 1 temporary stop command, the temporary stop mode is set to indicate that the first special pattern (special pattern 1) has temporarily stopped (is being done). A display command for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is set and outputted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes processing for displaying the temporary stop mode display of the special figure 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

Returning to FIG. 133, the explanation will be continued. After completing the process of S1653, next, a small winning scenario (opening operation scenario for small winning) corresponding to the small winning game is set (S1654), the small winning flag 203dg is set to OFF (S1655), and the game state is changed. The winning information indicating that a small winning game is being played (mid small winning) is stored in the storage area 203g (S1656), and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) as a symbol indicating a small winning (small winning symbol). A special figure 2 confirmation command is set to indicate that the second special symbol is a small winning symbol (S1657), and the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped fluctuating (determined display) as a small winning symbol (S1658). Then, a time saving update process (S1661 (S863)) that performs processing such as subtraction of the remaining time saving number is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 203dg is set to off in the process of S1651 (S1651: No), this is to indicate that the second special symbol will be stopped and displayed (confirmed display) as a symbol indicating a loss (missing symbol). The special symbol 2 confirmation command is set (S1659), and the variation is stopped (determined display) at the symbol that is removed from the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S1660). Then, the time saving update process is executed (S1661 (S863)), and this process ends.

Regarding the time-saving update process (S1661 (S863)), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk referred to in the process of S2101 and S2104 of the time-saving update process (S863 (S1661)) described above with reference to FIG. Since the only difference is that the flag is changed to 2-subtraction flag 203dl, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be able to be executed independently and in parallel. The special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed variably at the same time. Therefore, more special symbol lottery games can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a jackpot will be awarded to a player within a predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

Furthermore, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a fluctuating manner at the same time and a lottery game is executed, if a jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other Since the variable display of the special symbols is stopped, the player can concentrate on playing the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a symbol indicating a jackpot (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed on one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly removed and the symbol is stopped. Although the display is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be configured to be displayed in a variable manner while the other special symbol is temporarily stopped or the measurement of the variable time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or notification mode that allows the player to know that they are temporarily stopped, so the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of a variable display disappears. It is possible to know that the player is not playing a jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, starting winning process 4 (S152), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process 4 (S152). In the starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134), it is determined whether the ball has entered either the special drawing ball entrance 64 or the second ball entering opening 1645 (starting winning), and if the starting winning is achieved, The obtained counter values are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area up to the maximum number of reserved balls (maximum 4 for each of the special symbol entrance ball opening 64 and the second ball entrance 1645). This is the process of storing each in 203db.

In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved balls is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203db, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da Or, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage areas 203db, a process (so-called pre-reading process) is executed to predict the validity determination result, the selected variation pattern, etc. in advance. . The starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134) will be described below.

In the starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 147), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the special symbol entry ball opening 64 (starting winning) which is the first starting opening (S1751). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the special drawing ball entrance 64 is detected. It is determined that the ball has entered the special symbol entry ball opening 64 (there has been a starting prize) (S1751: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is obtained (S1752), and the It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753).

In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for the special map entry hole 64 is currently less than the upper limit of 4 (that is, whether the number of reserved balls has not been stored up to the upper limit). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1753: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is added by 1 (S1754), and the sound lamp control device 113 A command for the number of reserved balls is set to notify the number of reserved balls at the special symbol entrance ball opening 64 (the number of reserved lottery rights for the first special symbol) (S1755).

Then, each value of the various counter values (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, fluctuation type counter CS1) is read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 is read out (obtained) from the counter buffer. Each ball is held (stored) in the storage area of the corresponding number of held balls in 203a (S1756).

Next, a first prefetch process is executed (S1757). This first pre-reading process (S1757) will be described later with reference to FIG. 135, but the validity judgment result and the determined fluctuation pattern are obtained from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. , processing to determine the stop type, etc. is executed. In addition, although this embodiment is configured to execute processing for determining the validity judgment result, determined fluctuation pattern, stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, this is not limited to this. For example, when there is a new starting prize, the result of judgment on all the reservations stored (stored) in the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203da, the fluctuation pattern to be determined, It may be configured to execute processing for determining the stop type and the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, when storing new information (winning information) in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, that is, when the lottery right for the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol Although the configuration is such that the content of the lottery right (winning information) is determined in advance, the content of the lottery right (winning information) for the second special symbol is determined in advance, but the present invention is not limited to this. ) may be configured to be determined in advance.

After executing the process in S1757, the process in S1758 is then executed. In addition, if it is determined in the process of S1751 that the ball has not entered the special pattern ball entrance 64 (S1751: No), or if it is determined in the process of S1753 that the number of balls reserved for the special pattern ball entrance 64 has reached the upper limit at the present time. If it is determined that it is the value (S1753: No), the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is skipped and the process proceeds to S1758.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203dd is added, the first pre-reading process (S1757) is performed based on the information regarding the added prize (winning information). Although it is configured to be executed, the execution is not limited to this, for example, when it is determined in the process of S1753 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203dd is the upper limit number (4) (S1753 : No), that is, when a ball is entered into the special pattern ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the first pre-reading process (S1757) can be executed. It may be configured to do so. Thereby, even in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the pre-reading process. In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reaches the upper limit, an added value can be added when a ball enters the special pattern ball entrance 64, so the reservation of the first special symbol It is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing when a ball enters the special drawing ball entrance 64 in a state where the number of balls has reached the upper limit.

Next, each process from S1758 to S1764 is the same as the process performed for the winning of a ball to the first starting port (special chart entry ball port 64) executed in each process from S1751 to S1757. The only difference is that the process is executed for the second ball entry port 1645, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. In addition, in this embodiment, since it is comprised so that a small win can be won by the lottery of the 2nd special symbol, the value of the small win type counter C5 is also acquired in the process of S1763.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the first prefetching process (S1757), which is one process of the starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134), will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this first prefetching process (S1757).

In the first pre-reading process (S1757 in FIG. 135), first, various counter values are obtained from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2. , each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read out (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in the area with the lowest winning order among the vacant storage areas of the prefetch pending storage area (S1822).

Next, the validity determination result is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the prefetch pending storage area. Note that here, both the validity determination when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the validity determination when the special symbol is in a high probability state are determined. This is because the jackpot determination is based on the timing when a new pending memory occurs (the timing when the new pending (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area 203a) and the newly pending winning information this time. Since there is a time lag between the execution timing and the execution timing, it is not possible to predict the gaming state (probability state of special symbols) set at the timing when the jackpot determination based on the newly suspended winning information is executed. This is because it is difficult.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel). In addition, since the variable time set corresponding to the lottery result of each special symbol is set to be variable depending on the number of reserved symbols (the number of reserved symbols) at the time of lottery of the special symbol, each special symbol This is because it is difficult to determine in advance the timing at which the fluctuation (lottery) starts.

If the determination result in the process of S1823 is a jackpot (jackpot only in low probability state, jackpot only in high probability state, jackpot in both low probability state and high probability state) (S1823: Yes), it is a jackpot. A first winning command is set that indicates the conditions for winning (gaming state set at the time of lottery) and the type of jackpot in the event of winning (S1824), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination result in the process of S1823 is that it is not a jackpot (it is a win even if the special symbol is in a high probability state or a low probability state) (S1823: No), a first winning command indicating a win is set. (S1825), this process ends.

Here, the first winning command set in the process of S1824 or S1825 includes, as common information, in addition to the information for indicating the above-mentioned result of the judgment (information that has different meanings based on the result of the judgment). It is also set to include information indicating the values of various counter values read out in the process of S1821. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 54).

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when a winning command is received, the display mode of the reserved balls is changed based on various information included in the winning command (for example, the color of the reserved balls is changed to a color different from normal). It is possible to execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which the player is shown the result of a judgment of success or failure by displaying a variable) or by displaying a preview symbol or the like before the change starts.

In addition, in this embodiment, when performing the pre-reading process, the validity determination result when the special symbol is in a high probability state and the validity determination result when the special symbol is in a low probability state are determined, and the results of each determination are Although the configuration is such that the winning command is set based on the winning command, it is not limited to this, and for example, the judgment value ( It may also be configured such that a winning command indicating a jackpot of a special symbol is set only when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is defined and the determination value is read.

With this configuration, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the audio lamp control device 113 side only when it is determined in advance that it is a specific jackpot, so special symbols for which the pre-read effect is not executed In response to fluctuations, it is possible to create a feeling of expectation of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, the gaming state when a special symbol lottery is held based on the pending memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol pending storage area 203a is accurately determined, and the game state is determined based on the gaming state. It may be configured to perform a validity determination. In this case, the determination can be made by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of balls on hold at the start of the variation, instead of changing the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of balls on hold. When pre-reading is executed, the game state at the time of the start of fluctuation can be determined by determining the fluctuation order until the fluctuation of the reserved ball starts based on the information stored in suspension.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a new pending memory (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol pending storage area 203a, a pre-reading process based on the winning information is executed, and during the pre-reading process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the pre-reading process of the main controller 110, winning information newly stored (memorized) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a is used. It is also possible to set information indicating the contents (each counter value) of the content (reserved memory) as a winning command, and to predict the result of the win/fail judgment based on the information included in the winning command received on the audio lamp control device 113 side. good.

With this configuration, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 side executes a process to determine whether or not to execute a prefetch effect, and when it is determined that a prefetch effect is to be executed, the information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is It may be configured to perform analysis (prediction of validity determination results). Thereby, when the pre-read effect is not executed, the specific pre-read process (prediction of the result of judgment of validity) is not executed, so it is possible to suppress unnecessary control being executed in the pachinko machine 10. Further, it is possible to prevent a problem in which a player illegally obtains the result of a prefetch process executed without a title.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the second prefetching process (S1764), which is one process of the starting winning process 4 (S152 in FIG. 134), will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this second prefetching process (S1764). The second pre-reading process (S1764 in FIG. 134) is based on the fact that the first pre-reading process (S1757 in FIG. 133) described above has entered the first starting hole (special chart entry ball opening 64) (starting winning). This is a process in which the pending data (winning information) is determined in advance (read ahead) and various judgments are made, whereas the object to be judged is the second starting from the winning information based on the starting winning in the first starting opening. The only difference is that the winning information is changed to the winning information based on the starting winning in the opening (second ball entry opening 1645), and the other processes are the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, details of V passage processing 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the contents of this V passing process 4 (S153). The V passing process 4 (S153) in the fourth embodiment is different from the V passing process in the first embodiment (see S153 in FIG. 52) when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. When a V winning occurs during the game, a process is added to set the time saving end standby flag 203dm and the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk to OFF. Since other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are given and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the V passing process 4 (S153), first, the above-mentioned processes of S1501 to S1502 are executed, and if it is determined that the V is in the valid period (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether the small win is in progress (S1571 ). If it is determined that a small win is occurring (S1571: Yes), the processes of S1504 to S1506 described above are executed, and the process moves to S1572. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no small win (S1571: No), the process of S1504 to S1506 and S1572 to S1575 is skipped, and the process moves to the process of S1509.

In the process of S1572, it is determined whether the time saving end standby flag 203dm is on (S1572). If it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is on (S1572: Yes), a new time-saving state period is set after the end of the jackpot game awarded from this V winning, so the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set. 203dm is set to off (S1573). In this way, when a small win is won in the final fluctuation of the time saving game, a V winning prize occurs and a jackpot is awarded, a new short time period is awarded. Therefore, when a V prize is won, by setting the short time end standby flag 203dm to OFF, it is possible to prevent the problem of immediately transitioning to the normal gaming state after a new short time period is set.

After executing the process in S1572 or S1573, the process moves to S1574. In the process of S1574, it is determined whether the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S1574). That is, it is determined whether the variation of the first special symbol is being executed in parallel with the variation of the second special symbol this time, and whether the variation of the first special symbol has not yet stopped and is temporarily stopped. . When it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is on (S1574: Yes), the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to off (S1575), and the process moves to S1509. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is off (S1574: Yes), the process of S1575 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1509.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that a small win is won by drawing the second special symbol. If the lottery of the first special symbol is being executed at the time of winning a small hit, the variation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Although the structure is such that the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped special symbols resumes after the small winning game ends, in this embodiment, a V prize may be won during the small winning game and a jackpot may be awarded. Even during the jackpot game, the drawing of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, after the end of the jackpot game, the fluctuation of the special symbol that was temporarily stopped will be restarted, but in this embodiment, the remaining time shortening number will be subtracted when the fluctuation is stopped, so even if this temporarily stopped fluctuation, the remaining time will be short. There was a problem in that the number decreased.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a V win occurs during a small hit, the special figure 1 subtraction flag 203dk is set to OFF, so that the time period is not subtracted when the fluctuation that has been temporarily stopped is stopped. Therefore, in addition to the stipulated time saving period, the player can also set the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped symbols as a short time period. With this configuration, it is possible to set a longer period of time that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to provide pleasure for a longer period of time.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the other special symbol, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped (discarded) due to a loss. Furthermore, if a small hit is won, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped, but this is not limited to this, and if a small hit is won, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped. may be configured to be discarded. With this configuration, after a jackpot game is awarded due to a V winning, it is possible to prevent the player from winning a jackpot due to the fluctuation that was temporarily stopped and giving excessive benefits to the player.

Furthermore, if a player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player with one special symbol, the disadvantageous jackpot variation can be canceled by winning a small win with the other special symbol. Therefore, more diverse gaming features can be provided to the players.

As described above, the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine in which fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are performed in parallel, and when a small hit is won, the other symbol is temporarily stopped. Then, when a V win occurs during the small winning game and a jackpot is awarded, the temporarily stopped symbols resume fluctuating after the jackpot game ends. In addition, in this embodiment, if the gaming state is in the time saving state at the start of the fluctuation, by setting on a flag indicating that the value of the time saving counter is scheduled to be subtracted at the start of the fluctuation, the change When stopped, the value of the time saving counter 203h is updated.

Therefore, by setting the subtraction flag to OFF when a V winning occurs, the fluctuation of the special symbol which has been temporarily stopped will restart, and when it stops, the time saving counter will not be subtracted. In other words, when the temporarily stopped symbol resumes its fluctuation and stops, the time period is not updated, so the player is required to check the remaining time of the temporarily stopped special symbol in addition to the preset time period. A variable period can also be set. Therefore, the time period that is advantageous to the player can be set to be as long as possible.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the type of jackpot awarded by V winning is one, it is not limited to this and may be configured to provide a plurality of jackpots. In such a configuration, it is preferable to provide a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player and a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player. With this configuration, the player can play the game while being interested not only in whether a V winning prize will occur, but also in the type of jackpot that will be awarded.

Further, in this embodiment, the number of small winning types to be won is one, but it is not limited to this, and a plurality of small winning types may be provided. Furthermore, it may be configured such that a small win can be won even in the lottery using the first special symbol. In this way, by providing a plurality of small win types, the player can play the game while expecting a small win that is more likely to cause a V win.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to change in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the corresponding special symbol changes in the order in which the ball enters the ball entry hole. It may be configured such that the winning order is executed (so-called winning order variation). In addition, when configured in this way, it is preferable to configure the first special symbol and the second special symbol to differ in the advantageous degree of the jackpot type to be won. With this configuration, the player can play the game while hoping to win the jackpot when a more advantageous special drawing lottery is being executed, which creates a sense of tension. can provide games.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the lottery of the second special symbol, when a small hit is won, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. A small win that discards the fluctuation of the symbol (forced to stop when it misses) and a small win that temporarily stops may be set separately. In this case, if the player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player due to the change in the other special symbol, it is preferable to perform an effect that prompts the player to discard the winning jackpot. . With this configuration, it is possible to provide players with a variety of gaming features.

In this embodiment, two types of gaming states are set (normal state, time saving state), but it may be set to three types (normal state, time saving state, fixed variable state), or four types (normal state, time saving state, (definite variable state, potential state). Moreover, it is good also as two or less types.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game is executed by aiming the game ball to flow down the left side area of the game board 13 regardless of the game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the right side area of the game board 13 is It is also possible to execute a game method that aims at the following. Then, the switching of the gaming method may be configured to be set based on the gaming state. Furthermore, in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to perform a guide display mode to show the current gaming method to the player. The player can understand not only the gaming method but also the current gaming state by this guide display mode.

As explained above, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of updating the time saving state, that is, the timing of subtracting the number of time saving times, and the timing of determining whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied are made different. As a configuration, after updating the time saving state, it is determined whether the end condition of the time saving state is met, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that the time saving state update process is executed when the termination condition is determined and the termination condition is not satisfied. Moreover, although the process of subtracting the number of times of time saving is performed after executing the special figure lottery, it may be configured to execute the special figure lottery after subtracting the number of time savers.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, even if a small hit is won in the special symbol final variation in the time saving state (special symbol variation executed while the time saving end condition is satisfied), the special symbol variation The time saving state is configured to end at the timing when the is stopped and displayed, but this is not limited to this. For example, if a small hit is won in the final variation of the special symbol, the time saving state is ended until the small winning game ends. The configuration may be such that the state does not end. In other words, if the switching condition (the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit win) is satisfied at the timing of determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied in a state where the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the time-saving end condition is It is preferable that the timing for determining whether the game is established is changed (delayed at the end of the small winning game). As a result, the period during which the time saving state continues can be varied based on the result of the special symbol lottery during the time saving state, so it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of anticipation until the end. .

In addition, contents other than the above-mentioned (small hit winning) may be used as the above-mentioned switching condition. For example, in a state where the time-saving end condition is satisfied, normal symbol fluctuation is You may set the switching condition to be that the game is being executed or that the game per normal symbol is being executed, or the special symbol pending or normal symbol that is stored in the pending memory may be set as the switching condition. It may be set as a switching condition that specific information (winning information) is included in the winning information included in the hold. By providing a plurality of switching conditions in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time saving state ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Variation example of combination of general electricity prize winning device 640>
Next, a modification will be described with reference to FIG. 138. In the above-described first embodiment, the special electric actuation opening 643 is provided in the ordinary electric winning device 640, and when the ball that has won the ordinary electric winning device 640 enters the special electric operation opening 643 during the ordinary winning game, the accessory is released. Configure it to run a winning game. Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, in order to solve the problem that may occur in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, that is, the motivation to play decreases due to the monotony of the game during the time saving state. , a plurality of special electric actuating ports (special electric actuating port 643, second special electric actuating hole 1643) are provided in the general electric winning device 640, and depending on the special electric actuating port in which the ball has won, the V jackpot game is easily executed. It was configured to be able to execute games and accessory winning games that are difficult to execute in V jackpot games.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, by interrupting the special symbol fluctuation that is being executed (interrupting the process of subtracting the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation) using the execution of the accessory winning game as an opportunity, Since the time saving state was configured to last for a long time, it would be advantageous for the player to play many games with winning objects during the time saving state, and there was a problem in that the games during the time saving state became monotonous. Ta. On the other hand, in the third embodiment described above, the V jackpot type is selected based on the ball entering the special electric actuation port 643, and the accessory hit is determined according to the selected V jackpot type. It is configured so that any one of the following patterns is executed: a pattern that interrupts the special symbol variation being executed when the game is executed, a pattern that discards it, and a pattern that terminates the time saving state after discarding it, and the accessory By providing a new game feature that allows the player to select whether or not to execute a winning game, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the time-saving state.

In addition, in the first to third embodiments described above, a special electric operation opening 643 is provided in the ordinary electric winning device 640, and when a ball enters the special electric operation opening 643, a game is executed to win the accessory. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, a second ball entrance 1645 is provided in the general purpose winning device 640 to trigger the execution of the second special symbol lottery. Similar gameplay was realized using a so-called simultaneous variation type specification in which the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol were executed in parallel.

On the other hand, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 138, the second special electric operating opening is 1643, a second ball entrance 1645 is provided so that the winning ball in the normal electric winning device 640 can enter the special electric operating opening 643 or the second ball entrance 1645. This embodiment is different from other embodiments.

Then, there is a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery that is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entry opening 1645, and a small winning game that is executed when the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643. The V prize winning device 65 is configured to be opened with the same contents as the accessory winning game executed based on this.

With this configuration, when the V winning device 65 is opened due to a small winning game, the second special symbol lottery has been executed, so the end condition of the time saving state is met as in the fourth embodiment described above. While the elements that satisfy the cumulative time-saving end condition are updated, when the V winning device 65 is opened in the accessory winning game, the elements related to the time-saving end condition are not updated. Therefore, the number of times the V winning device 65 is opened does not match the number of times the time-saving termination condition is updated, so the player is not made to know the period until the time-saving state ends. It can be made difficult.

In this modification, an example is shown in which the same termination condition as in the fourth embodiment described above is set as the termination condition of the time-saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if a game to win an accessory is executed. The time saving termination condition may also be configured to be satisfied even when the number of times the process has been performed reaches a specific number (for example, 50 times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied first based on the lottery of the second special symbol or whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the execution of the accessory winning game. The player can play the game while predicting.

In addition, in this case, the performance executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is based on the time saving end condition established based on the lottery of the second special symbol and the execution of the accessory winning game. Suggestive performance for suggesting to the player which of the time-saving ending conditions is likely to be satisfied among the time-saving ending conditions (for example, a presentation suggesting the number of times until each time-saving ending condition is satisfied) It is best to configure it to run. With this configuration, the player can be made aware of the period until any of the time-saving termination conditions is satisfied, so that the player can have his or her joys and sorrows about where the winning ball will fall in the general prize winning device 640.

As shown in FIG. 138, in this modification, a special electric operating port 643 and a second ball entry port 1645 are provided in the general electric winning device 640, but the second special electric operating port 1643 is also provided. It may also be configured such that a ball that wins a prize in the general electricity winning device 640 wins any one of the three prizes mentioned above.

Furthermore, when using the configuration of this modification, there are cases where a small winning game is executed based on a ball entering the second ball entry port 1645, and cases where a small winning game is executed based on a ball entering the special electric operation port 643. For example, when a small winning game is executed, the processing content for the special symbol fluctuation being executed may be different from the case where the accessory winning game is executed based on the It is easier to discard the special symbol fluctuations that are being executed than when the special symbol fluctuation is being executed, and it is easier to discard the special symbol fluctuation that is being executed when the accessory winning game is executed than when the small winning game is executed. It is best to configure it as follows.

In addition, in this modification, a ball may enter the special electric operating port 643 in a state where the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are being executed. In this case, the configuration is such that both the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are interrupted. After the accessory winning game ends, the suspended first special symbol variation and second special symbol variation are configured to be restarted. Then, if the second special symbol variation after restarting has won a small hit, and a small win game is executed based on the small win win, the first special symbol variation in progress is interrupted, or , is configured to be discarded.

In this way, in this modified example configured to be able to execute three types of games at the same time: the first special symbol variation (lottery), the second special symbol variation (lottery), and the ball winning into the special electric operating port 643, the time saving state Among them, it becomes possible to interrupt the first special symbol variation, in which a longer variation time is likely to be selected than the second special symbol variation, at a plurality of opportunities. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game with surprises to the player regarding the timing and period during which the first special symbol variation is interrupted during the time saving state.

In addition, in this modification, the ball won in the ordinary electric winning device 640 is configured so that it can be won in the special electric operation opening 643 or the second ball entry opening 1645, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , the configuration of the game board 13 may be changed so that the player can play the game by aiming at the second ball entrance 1645 or the special electric activation opening 643. The opening 643 may be provided, and a second ball entrance opening 1645 may be provided in the right side area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting a gaming method.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 143. The fifth embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it includes a method for setting various commands for outputting the control processing contents executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 side. The difference is that a part of the control processing that is executed when the audio lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 is changed; other than that, it is the same. be. The same control contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, the production mode of the performance (V rush) according to the special symbol fluctuation during the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is changed to the remaining period of the time saving state (time saving state). In order to make variable settings according to the remaining period of the special symbol variation executed during the state, the voice lamp control device is configured based on the information (state command) output from the main control device 110 at the time when the time saving state is set. The 113 side stores the period until the time saving state ends, that is, the number of time saving times (number of changes of special symbols) set as the end condition of the time saving state, and sends information indicating the start of variation of the special symbols (variation pattern command). When received, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to determine the remaining period of the time saving state by executing a process of updating the number of time saving times.

By configuring in this way, the first embodiment differs from the timing at which the time saving number is updated (when the special symbol fluctuation starts) and the timing at which it is determined whether the time saving condition is satisfied (when the special symbol fluctuation stops). In this case, the special symbol lottery can be performed without setting a dedicated command on the main controller 110 side, that is, a state command to be set when changing the gaming state or a fluctuation pattern command to be set when starting fluctuation of special symbols. Using only a command indicating the content of the game using , the remaining period of the time-saving state can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and an effect can be set according to the elapse of the period during the time-saving state. It was something.

However, in the control content used in the first embodiment described above, the update status of the game state in the time saving state is managed (temporarily stored) in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, which does not have a backup function. Therefore, for example, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (a power outage occurs) during the period in which the time saving state is set, and then the power supply is resumed, the voice lamp control device There was a problem in that the various information temporarily stored in the RAM 223 on the 113 side was cleared (initialized), and the audio lamp control device 113 could not determine the update status of the game state in the time saving state. .

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the main controller 110 executes the process of starting special symbol variation (processing of setting a variation pattern command), a command indicating the update result of the number of time saving times (time saving number command ) to be settable, and set a command (time-saving continuation command) to indicate the end determination result of the time-saving state when executing the process to stop the special symbol variation in progress (processing to set the confirmed command). It is configured as follows.

The variable pattern command and the time saving number command can be outputted at the same timing, and the confirmation command and the time saving continuation command can be outputted at the same timing. Furthermore, when the voice lamp control device 113 side receives a fluctuation pattern command, it is determined whether a time saving number command is also received, and the current time saving situation can be determined based on the determination result. When a command is received, it is determined whether a time saving continuation command is also received, and the current time saving situation can be determined based on the determination result.

With this configuration, it becomes possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the time-saving state based on the combination of commands set by the main controller 110 and received by the voice lamp control device 113, and the special Even if a power outage occurs while symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, it is possible to determine the time-saving state on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the command output from the main control device 110.

In addition, since the configuration is configured to determine the time-saving state based on a combination of commands received at the same timing, it is easier to set individual commands to indicate the time-saving state on the main controller 110 side. Also, the types of commands set in the main control device 110 can be reduced, and the processing load of control processing in the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<About the control processing content of the main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141, points of the control processing content of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment that are different from the above-described first embodiment will be explained. In the fifth embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment described above, special symbol fluctuation start processing 5 (see S235 in FIG. 139) is performed instead of special symbol fluctuation start processing (see S205 in FIG. 41), and special symbol fluctuation stop processing is performed. Special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) is replaced with the normal symbol fluctuation processing (see S106 in FIG. 48) instead of the normal symbol fluctuation processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) (see S136 in FIG. 141). (Reference)), but other than that, they are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, when the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the number of time savings (value of the time saving counter 203h) is set. ) (see S205 in FIG. 139) and determines whether the conditions for ending the time saving state are satisfied when stopping the variation of the special symbol (FIG. 45) (see S208).

Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, in order to manage the time saving state on the audio lamp control device 113 side, the state command output from the main control device 110 (the state command set in the process of S1916 in FIG. 56 ) and a variation pattern command (special figure variation pattern command set in S506 of FIG. 43), the remaining period of the time saving state can be determined.

On the other hand, in the present fifth embodiment, when the special symbol fluctuation starts or when the special symbol fluctuation stops, in addition to the command indicating the start and stop of the special symbol fluctuation, the situation of the time saving state (remaining time shortening number etc.), and if the information for managing the time-saving state stored on the voice lamp control device 113 side is deleted (the voice lamp control device Even if the information stored in the RAM 223 of the main controller 113 is deleted), the voice lamp control device 113 can display the time saving status (remaining number of time reductions) based on various commands output from the main controller 110. The system is structured in such a way that it is possible to understand the

First, with reference to FIG. 139, the contents of special symbol variation start processing 5 (S235) will be explained. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation start processing 5 (S235). In this special symbol variation start process 5 (S235), in contrast to the special symbol variation start process of the first embodiment described above (see S205 in FIG. 41), a process for updating the time saving state at the start of the special symbol variation is performed. are different; everything else is the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the first embodiment described above, information indicating the processing content (update result) of the process for updating the time saving state executed by the main control device 110 is output to the audio lamp control device 113. Since there is no need to The process of updating the value of the counter 203h and the process of setting the time saving end flag 203j) are executed.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a command for indicating the number of time reductions (remaining number of time reductions) of the special symbol is set and configured to be outputtable to the audio lamp control device 113.

The processing contents of the special symbol variation start process 5 (S235) will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 139. First, it is the same as the special symbol variation start process (see S205 in FIG. 41) of the first embodiment described above. The processes from S301 to S308 are executed. In the process of S308, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0, that is, the current time saving state is in progress (S308: Yes), then the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted (S371 ), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction is 0 (S372).

If it is determined in the process of S372 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not 0 (it is 1 or more), a time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203h after the subtraction, that is, the number of remaining time saving times is set (S373). , this process ends. The time saving number command set in the process of S373 is executed by the main control at the same timing as the special symbol variation pattern command (see S506 in FIG. 43) set in the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 43). It is output to the audio lamp control device 113 in external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of the device 110 (see FIG. 55).

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the fifth embodiment, in the control process of the audio lamp control device 113, when a variation pattern command (special figure variation pattern command) is received during the time saving state, the time saving number command is also executed. It is configured to determine whether or not it has been received, and based on the determination result, determine the number of time reductions (remaining number of time reductions) corresponding to the current special symbol variation.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, in the process of S372 in FIG. 139, the time saving number command is executed only when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h after updating (after subtraction) is 1 or more (S372: No). Because it is configured to be set, in the control process of the audio lamp control device 113, when a variation pattern command (special figure variation pattern command) is received during the time reduction state, but at the same time, the time reduction number command is not received. can be determined to be the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state.

Returning to FIG. 139, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S372, if it is determined that the value of the updated time saving counter 203h is 0 (S372: Yes), that is, if the special symbol variation to be executed this time is the final variation of the time saving state, the above-mentioned As in the first embodiment, the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON (S311), and this processing is ended.

Although detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, in addition to when the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (1 or more), even if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0, the time saving end flag is set. While 203j is set on, a high probability state of normal symbols is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 139, if the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 at the special symbol fluctuation start timing (S308: Yes), the process of subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203h is always executed. It is possible to standardize control processing.

Further, as described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the time saving counter 203h value after subtraction (updating) is larger than 0 (1 or more), the time saving number command is set, When the time saving counter 203h value is 0, the time saving number command is not set. In addition, the time saving number command is set in the same process (special symbol variation start process) as the process for setting the special symbol variation pattern command (special symbol variation pattern command) (see S506 in FIG. 43). and is configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 at the same timing in the external output processing (S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 55). .

With this configuration, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, when a variation pattern command is received in a state where the time saving state is set, it is possible to determine whether or not a time saving number command is also received. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether or not the special symbol variation executed this time is the final variation in the time saving state. In addition, when a time saving number command is received at the same time, it is possible to determine the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining time saving number) to be updated by executing the special symbol variation this time.

In addition, if the value of the time saving counter 203h after updating becomes 0, that is, if the special symbol variation to be executed this time is the final variation of the time saving state, the time saving number command is not set. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when a variation pattern command is received while the time saving state is set, and a time saving number command is not received at the same time, it is determined that this is the final variation of the time saving state. , the performance mode corresponding to the final change in the time saving state will be set. In this way, when the final variation of the special symbol in the time saving state (time saving final variation) is executed, instead of setting the time saving number command that indicates 0 remaining time saving times as the time saving number command, the time saving number command is not set. With this configuration, if the main controller 110 cannot receive the time reduction number command set, for example, if the command cannot be received normally due to noise etc., the time reduction final change time The performance will be executed.

Therefore, when the command output from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 cannot be received normally, there is no need to use dedicated performance data, and the number of times the remaining time is shortened is less than the actually set number of times. Since the performance corresponding to the number of remaining time reductions is 0 can be executed, the performance can be executed without giving a player a sense of discomfort while reducing the processing load on the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the time saving end is satisfied when the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 times). Although only the conditions are provided, the conditions are not limited to this, for example, in addition to the termination condition that is established based on the number of changes of the special symbol, the termination condition that is established based on the lottery result of the special symbol (specified in the lottery of the special symbol). An end condition may be provided that is satisfied when a lottery result (for example, small win) is won a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 that has a plurality of termination conditions for ending the time saving state, which termination condition is satisfied among the plurality of termination conditions varies depending on the game content of the player. It is necessary to determine the update status until the termination condition is met. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the final variation of the time saving state is executed, the time saving number command is not set. Therefore, even if any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the voice lamp control device 113 can easily determine that the current special symbol variation is the final change in the time saving state. I can do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the contents of the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S238) will be explained. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation stop processing 5 (S238) in the fifth embodiment. This special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S238) differs from the special symbol fluctuation stop processing in the first embodiment described above (see S208 in FIG. 45) by changing the update content of the time saving state when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. They differ in that they are the same, but are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (S238) is executed, first, the same processing of S801 and S802 as the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above is executed, and the processing of S802 is executed. If it is determined in the process that the time saving end flag 203j is not on (S802: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (1 or more) (S871), and the value is set from 0. is also large, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation that is stopped and displayed this time is not the time saving final fluctuation (S871: Yes), a time saving continuation command indicating that the time saving state continues is set (S872), and the above-mentioned The same processes of S809 and S810 as the special symbol variation stop process (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment are executed, and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S871, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (S871: No), that is, if the current gaming state is the normal state, the process of S872 is skipped and S809 Shift to processing. In addition, in the process of S802, if it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the special symbol variation that is stopped and displayed this time is the time saving final variation (S802: Yes), The same processes of S804 and S805 as the special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S208 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above are executed, and then the processes of S809 and S810 are executed, and the present process ends.

In addition, in the process of S801, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S801: Yes), the processes of S806 to S810 are executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in the fifth embodiment, the special symbol confirmation command is set in the special symbol variation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) for stopping and displaying the special symbol variation (confirmation display). In addition, it is configured to set a time-saving continuation command. The special symbol confirmation command and time saving continuation command set in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140) are externally output to be executed in the main processing of the main controller 110 (FIG. 55). In the process (see S1801 in FIG. 55), it is output to the audio lamp control device 113 at the same timing. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives a special map confirmation command while the time saving state is set, it determines whether a time saving continuation command has also been received, and based on the determination result, whether or not the current stop display is It is necessary to determine whether the special symbol variation is the final variation of the time-saving state (time-saving final variation) and set the performance mode.

Specifically, in a state where the time saving state is set, if the audio lamp control device 113 receives the special map confirmation command and the time saving continuation command at the same timing, this indicates that the time saving state will continue. When only the special figure confirmation command is received, a presentation mode is set to indicate that the time saving state ends. In this way, by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 to be able to grasp the current time saving status by combining a plurality of commands output from the main control device 110 at the same timing, the main control device 110 can The types of commands set in the main controller 110 can be reduced compared to the case where individual commands are set to indicate the time-saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol confirmation command and the time saving continuation command are configured to be set in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing 5 (see S238 in FIG. 140), but the main It is sufficient that each command is output at the same timing in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the process (see FIG. 55), and the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55) The special figure confirmation command and the time saving continuation command may be configured to be respectively settable within the 4 millisecond interval in which the external output process (S1801) is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when executing the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 55) executed in the main process (FIG. 55) of the main controller 110, the Although the configuration is such that various commands set for a period of 4 milliseconds are output to the audio lamp control device 113 at once (as serial data), the present invention is not limited to this, for example, When the special figure confirmation command is set, the output of the special figure confirmation command may be made to wait until the external output process (see S1801) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times). With this configuration, it is possible to output the special figure confirmation command and the time saving continuation command to the audio lamp control device 113 at the same timing without having to set them in the same process.

Next, the contents of the normal symbol variation process 5 (S136) will be explained with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the contents of normal symbol variation processing 5 (S136). This normal symbol variation processing 5 (S136) is different from the normal symbol variation processing of the first embodiment described above (see S106 in FIG. 48), in which it is determined whether the current gaming state is a high probability state of normal symbols. The difference is that the processing for The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, the state where the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (the state where the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more) and the state where the time saving end flag 203j is set to on are the normal symbols. It is configured to be managed as information indicating a high probability state, and only the state where the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (the state where the value of the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more) indicates the high probability state of the normal symbol. This is different from the first embodiment, which is managed as information.

That is, unlike the first embodiment in which the process of subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203h is skipped when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1, in the present fifth embodiment, the special symbol fluctuation start process 5 (Fig. In S235) of 139, the update process of the time saving counter 203h is simplified by configuring the time saving counter 203h to be decremented until the value becomes 0, and when the value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted to 0. However, the difference is that the time saving end flag 203j is set to ON in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. .

Therefore, when the normal symbol variation process 5 (S136 in FIG. 141) is executed, first, the same processes from S1101 to S1108 as the normal symbol variation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) of the first embodiment described above are executed. , If it is determined in the process of S1108 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (0) (S1108: No), the time saving end flag 203j is set on, that is, the time saving final of the special symbol It is determined whether the fluctuation is in progress (S1171), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S1171: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation is in the high probability state of the normal symbol in the first embodiment described above. The process of S1109, which is the same as the process (see S106 in FIG. 48), is executed, and then the processes of S1111 to S1114 are executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S1171, if it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is not set to ON (S1171: No), the current state is a low probability state of normal symbols (normal state), so the first implementation described above is performed. The process of S1110 to S1114, which is the same as the normal symbol variation process of the form (see S106 in FIG. 48), is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1102, if it is determined that the normal symbol is changing (S1102: Yes), the process of S1115 to S1118, which is the same as the normal symbol changing process of the first embodiment (see S106 in FIG. 48), is performed. If the process is executed and it is determined in the process of S1118 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is larger than 0 (1 or more) (S1118: Yes), a scenario operation per normal map for time-saving is set (S1120). , sets the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory (S1121), and ends this process.

In the process of S1118, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S1118: No), then it is determined whether the time saving end flag 203j is set to on ( S1172), if it is determined that it is set to on (S1172: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation process of the first embodiment described above (see S106 in FIG. 48) is performed because the current state is a high probability state of normal symbols. ), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S1172, if it is determined that the time saving end flag 203j is not set to ON (S1172: No), the current state is a low probability state of normal symbols, so the normal symbols of the first embodiment described above are used. The same processes as S1119 and S1121 as the fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) are executed, and this process ends.

That is, in the fifth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the length of the period (dynamic display period) for stopping and displaying the lottery results of normal symbols (the length of the dynamic display period), Alternatively, the contents of the regular symbol winning game (opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a) to be executed when a winning result is won in the ordinary symbol lottery (common symbol lottery) are set to differ depending on the probability state of the ordinary symbol. In order to determine the probability state of the normal symbol, the setting status of the time saving end flag 203j is referred to in addition to the value of the time saving counter 203h. With this configuration, the probability state of the normal symbol can be appropriately determined.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above. For processing, special figure variation start processing 5 (see S4254 in Fig. 142) is replaced with special figure variation start processing (see S4204 in Fig. 62), and stop related processing is replaced with stop related processing (see S4215 in Fig. 65). The difference is that process 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143) is executed, but the rest is the same. Detailed explanation of the same processing contents will be omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, the types of commands output from the main controller 110 are added to the first embodiment described above, and the time saving state is determined based on the various commands output from the main controller 110. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to determine the status (the number of times the remaining time is shortened). With this configuration, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like during the time saving state, the data temporarily stored in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be erased. Even in such a case, after the power supply is restored, it is possible to set an appropriate performance mode according to the actual time saving state (remaining number of time saving times).

First, with reference to FIG. 142, the contents of special figure fluctuation start processing 5 (S4254) will be explained. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the contents of special figure fluctuation start processing 5 (S4254). This special figure variation start process 5 (S4254) is a process executed when a special figure variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 61), and is This process is different from the figure fluctuation start process (see S4204 in FIG. 62) in that the process content during the time saving state has been changed, but otherwise is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure variation start process 5 (S4254) is executed, the same processes of S4301 to S4305 as the special figure variation start process of the first embodiment (see S4204 in FIG. 62) are executed, and this process ends. do. In addition, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time-saving state, that is, if the special figure fluctuation pattern command is received while the time-saving state is set (S4304: Yes), the current gaming state is the time-saving state. It is determined whether a time saving number command is included in the commands executed (S4351).

In this embodiment, in the external output processing (see S1801 in FIG. 60) executed in the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 60), the audio lamp control is performed using serial data that can store a plurality of commands. It is configured to output commands to the device 113. Therefore, in the special symbol variation start process 5 (see S235 in FIG. 139) executed by the main controller 110, if the special symbol variation pattern command and the time saving number command are set in the same process. , at least the special figure variation pattern command and the time saving number command are stored in the same serial data and output to the audio lamp control device 113.

In the process of S4351, it is determined whether the command received this time includes a time saving number command, that is, whether the time saving number command was also included in the serial data in which the special figure fluctuation pattern command was stored (S4351), and the time saving number command is determined. If it is determined that the number of times command is included (S4351: Yes), the time saving state is set and the special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern command received this time is the final variation of the time saving state. Since this is not the case (time saving final variation), a display command is set to indicate that the time saving state is in progress (S4306), and the above-mentioned special figure variation start process of the first embodiment (see S4204 in FIG. 62) ), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4351, if it is determined that the received command does not include the time-saving number command (S4351: No), the special symbol variation corresponding to the current special symbol variation pattern command is the time-saving final variation, so the time-saving A display command indicating the final change is set (S4352), and after proceeding to the process of S4307 described above, the process of S4308 is executed and the present process ends.

With this configuration, when a special figure fluctuation pattern command is received during a time-saving state, the situation of the time-saving state (remaining time-saving The number of times) can be easily determined on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

Next, the contents of stop-related processing 5 (S4265) will be explained with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop-related processing 5 (S4265). This stop-related process 5 (S4265) differs from the stop-related process of the first embodiment (see S4215 in FIG. 65) in that the process content to be executed when a special map confirmation command is received is changed. They are different. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the stop related process 5 (S4265) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special map confirmation command has been received (S4601), and if it is determined that the special map confirmation command has not been received (S4601: No), The process of S4602 to S4611, which is the same as the stop-related process of the first embodiment described above (see S4215 in FIG. 65), is executed and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the special map confirmation command has been received (S4601: Yes), then it is determined whether the time saving continuation command has been received (S4631), and it is determined that the time saving continuation command has been received. If so (S4631: Yes), a display command for stopping fluctuation indicating continuation of time reduction is set (S4632), and the process moves to S4602.

In the process of S4631, if it is determined that the time saving continuation command has not been received, then it is determined whether the time saving end command has been received (S4633), and if it is determined that the time saving end command has been received (S4633: yes). ), set the display command for stopping the fluctuation, which indicates the end of the time saving state.

In this way, when the special map confirmation command is received, the time-saving continuation command or the time-saving end command can be received at the same time, so by executing the stop-related process 5 (see S4265 in FIG. 143), , the display mode (presentation mode) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, when a time saving continuation command is received, when a time saving end command is received, and when no command is received. It can be set variable. Therefore, a process for setting a display mode for stopping fluctuation to be executed when a special map confirmation command is received, a process for setting a display mode for indicating the time saving state status (remaining time shortening number), can be executed within the same process, and the processing load of the control process can be reduced.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 155. In the above-described first embodiment, the aim is to play a game to win an accessory by taking advantage of the game to win a regular symbol, which is executed when a winning result is won in the lottery for a regular symbol. Aiming to win the ball into the special electric actuation opening 643 provided), during the game with the winning object (within the period when the V winning device 65 is open), enter the V winning hole 165 provided in the V winning device 65. The player is configured to play a game (special electric game) in which the player aims to execute a jackpot game (V jackpot game) by winning a ball.

Then, the time saving state in which the special electric game is executed is until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (4 or 15 times) (until the special symbol fluctuation for the predetermined number of times is stopped and displayed), or until the predetermined number of times is reached. It is configured to continue until a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (until the special symbol stops displaying to indicate that the lottery result is a jackpot), and changes in the special symbol during the time saving state. The longer the time, the longer the period in which the time-saving state is set (time-short period), and the number of normal symbol drawings to be executed during the time-short period can be increased.

Furthermore, when a ball enters the special electric actuating port 643 during a regular symbol winning game and a role winning game is executed, the special symbol fluctuation in progress is interrupted (the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted). It is configured so that the interrupted special symbol fluctuation (processing for subtracting the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation) is performed after the end of the accessory winning game or the jackpot game ( After the end of the V jackpot game), that is, when a condition for executing a new special symbol change is established, the game is restarted.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the length of the execution period (time period) of the special electric game is variable depending on the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation and the interruption period due to the game winning the accessory. It was possible to make the middle players play the game with the hope that they would select as long a variation time as possible as a special symbol variation, and to have them execute many games that hit the accessory. .

However, during the special electric game, for example, during the fluctuation period of the ordinary symbols or during the ordinary symbol winning game, it is difficult to make the ball enter the ordinary electric winning device 640. The closed period) is a period in which the game with the accessory cannot be executed and the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted, so it is possible to enter the ball into the electric accessory 640a. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a during the winning game, that is, the period in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted, is a disadvantageous period that is more disadvantageous to the player than the period in which it is possible to execute the accessory winning game. becomes.

In addition, in the accessory winning game where the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted, there is an end condition (winning end condition) that is satisfied when the number of winning balls to the V winning device 65 reaches a predetermined number (3 balls), or a winning end condition. The game is configured to end when any of the end conditions (time end conditions) that are satisfied when a predetermined period of time (1.6 seconds) has elapsed since the object winning game was started. The accessory prize game ended when any of the termination conditions was satisfied, depending on the content of the game by the player (whether or not a ball was fired) during the accessory prize game.

In other words, in the first embodiment described above, in consideration of the fluctuation situation of the normal symbols during the special electric game and the playing situation of the normal pattern winning game, it is determined which ending condition should be established for the ongoing accessory winning game. It had a gameplay feature that allowed players to make choices. With this configuration, depending on the skill of the player, the above-mentioned disadvantageous period during the special electric game (regular symbol fluctuation period, electric accessory 640a closing period for the regular symbol winning game) and execution period of the accessory winning game can be changed. The length of the overlapping period can be varied, and the player can be motivated to play the game.

However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, since a plurality of end conditions are set, for example, even though the game is played to satisfy the winning end condition, the V winning device 65 The ball does not win the prize as expected and the time end condition is met, or the ball that was previously fired is not sent to the V winning device 65 even though the game is played to make the time end condition come true. There is a problem in that a player wins a prize and the winning termination condition is satisfied, and the player is unable to satisfy the desired termination condition.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, the player is configured to be able to select either the winning end condition or the time end condition as the end condition of the accessory winning game. In other words, when the winning end condition is selected, the time ending condition will not be satisfied even if the period in which the time ending condition can be satisfied has passed, and when the time ending condition is selected, the time ending condition will not be satisfied. Even if the number of winnings reaches the number for which the winning ending condition can be satisfied, the winning ending condition is not satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to end the accessory winning game when the ending condition desired by the player is met, so it is possible to make the player more actively play the game during the special electric game. .

In addition, in the present sixth embodiment, when the winning end condition is selected, the winning prize game does not end based on the elapsed time during the winning prize game, and when the time ending condition is selected, Although the game is configured so that the game to win the game does not end based on the number of balls that hit the V winning device 65 during the game to win the game, the present invention is not limited to this, and the conditions for ending winning can be selected, for example. In this case, a forced time end condition or a time end condition that is satisfied when a longer time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed than the elapsed time (e.g., 1.6 seconds) set as the normal time end condition. If you select , you can set a forced winning end condition that will be satisfied if the number of winnings (for example, 10) is greater than the number of winnings (for example, 3) that is set as the normal winning ending condition. It may be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the accessory winning game from being executed for a long time.

First, with reference to FIG. 144, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 144 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2) in that it has operation means (switch button 22za, first selection button 22zb, first selection button 22zb, The difference is that a 2 selection button 22zc) is newly provided, and the rest is the same. Identical components will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 144, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, a switching button 22za is provided on the right side of the return button 43 provided in the ball rental operation section 40 (the right side when viewed from the front in FIG. 144). A first selection button 22zb and a second selection button 22zc are provided on the right side of the upper plate 17 (right side in front view in FIG. 144). When the switching button 22za, the first selection button 22zb, and the second selection button 22zc (hereinafter also referred to as the end condition switching button group 22z) are pressed by the player, a detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing and displays the detection result. is configured to be output to the input/output port 205 (see FIG. 21) of the main controller 110.

Specifically, when the switching button 22za is pressed, the switching button detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing of the switching button 22za, and when the first selection button 22zb is pressed, the switching button detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing of the switching button 22za. When the first selection button detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing of the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc is pressed, the second selection button detection switch (not shown) detects the pressing of the second selection button 22zc. The configuration is configured to detect the depression of the 2 selection button 22zc, and each detection switch is configured to output the detection result to the main controller 110, respectively.

That is, the changeover button detection switch, the first selection button detection switch, and the second selection button detection switch are included in the various switches 208 described above with reference to FIG. 21.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the above-mentioned end condition switching button group 22z is provided at a distance of about 10 cm from the frame button 22. With this configuration, in order to make the player interested in various performances performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, the operation performance using the frame button 22 is executed, and the game When having a player operate the frame button 22, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally operating the end condition switching button group 22z.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 includes an operation means for performance (frame button 22), an operation means that affects the gaming performance (termination condition switching button group 22z), The game is designed so that players can select the contents as they wish, both in terms of production and game performance. Therefore, players can be encouraged to actively participate in the game.

<About the production content in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146, the characteristic presentation content executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be explained. In the sixth embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment described above, there is a selection effect for causing the player to operate the end condition switching button group, and a switching effect for showing the result of the player's operation on the ending condition switching button group. It is configured to be executable.

First, with reference to FIG. 145(a), the display contents of the ending screen in the jackpot game will be explained. FIG. 145(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display content displayed on the jackpot ending screen in the sixth embodiment. The display screen shown in FIG. 145(a) differs from the jackpot ending screen in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12(a)) in a display mode for prompting the player to operate the switching button 22za. They differ in the additions, but are otherwise the same. The same display contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 145(a), in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the words "V rush will start after the jackpot ends!!" are displayed, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. It is clearly shown to the player that the game will be shifted to the V rush mode. Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment "Get 40 seconds of V rush period" is displayed where the short-term remaining time mode 801 is "40 seconds" to indicate the period during which the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game continues. be done. In addition, when the display screen of FIG. 145(a) is displayed, the reserved storage status of the special symbol (see FIG. 145(c)) is not the same as that of the display screen of FIG. 12(a) of the first embodiment described above. Since this is the same as the special symbol reservation storage status (see FIG. 12(c)), detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, a display area HR20 is formed at the lower left side of the main display area Dm (lower left side when viewed from the front in FIG. 145), and a display mode for prompting the user to operate the switching button 22za is "Select end condition with button PUSH". ” and an icon imitating the switching button 22za are displayed.

In the sixth embodiment, the ending condition of the accessory winning game can be selected by the player operating (pressing) the switching button 22za during the period when the ending screen of the jackpot winning game is displayed. . In other words, in the sixth embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the termination condition of the accessory winning game is configured to be selectable, and during the time saving state (V rush) set after the end of the jackpot winning game, the ending condition of the accessory winning game is selected. The game is configured so that the conditions for ending the game cannot be changed.

By configuring in this way, the end condition of the game per accessory is frequently changed depending on the gaming situation during V rush, that is, the changing situation of special symbols and the changing situation of normal symbols, and the player is given an excessive amount of money. It is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an advantageous gaming situation. In addition, the configuration is such that the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected at the timing when the game of winning a ball in the variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game ends, but before the special electric game is executed. To provide an easy-to-understand game to a player without duplicating the game of firing a ball and the act of selecting an end condition.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 145(a), the condition for ending the accessory winning game is configured to be selectable while the time saving state period (40 seconds) set after the end of the jackpot winning game is announced. Therefore, it is possible for the player to select the end condition for the accessory winning game while understanding the short remaining time mode 801 displayed on the jackpot ending screen. Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the period of the time saving state is short (for example, 40 seconds) is displayed as the display mode of the short remaining time mode 801, the winning end condition is set as the end condition of the accessory winning game. By selecting and arbitrarily adjusting the game period of the game per accessory, we aim to create a special electric game that efficiently sets the period during which special symbol fluctuations are interrupted, and as a display mode of the short remaining time mode 801, the period of the time saving state is long. (for example, 200 seconds), select the time end condition and increase the number of balls to be won in the V winning device 65 in one game per accessory. You can aim for a special electric game where the amount of benefits (number of prize balls) per hour is large.

Note that in the sixth embodiment, the player is configured to be able to select the end condition of the accessory winning game during the period when the ending screen of the jackpot winning game is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, It may be configured such that the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected at any timing during the jackpot winning game.

In addition, even when the standby screen (demonstration screen) that is displayed when the special symbol fluctuation is not executed during the time saving state is displayed, the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected. Alternatively, the termination condition of the accessory winning game may be configured to be selectable during the period in which the accessory winning game is being executed. Even in such a case, it is possible to select the end condition for the accessory winning game at a timing when the remaining time in the time saving state (time period) is not subtracted, so the player can receive the accessory while giving the player time. It is possible to select the conditions for ending the winning game.

On the other hand, different from the technical idea of the sixth embodiment, it may be configured such that the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected only during the period in which the remaining time of the time saving state (time period) is subtracted. With this configuration, during the special electric game where the remaining time in the time saving state (time period) is subtracted, it is possible to concentrate only on the special electric game or to select the end condition of the accessory winning game. It is possible to allow the player to select whether to execute the game, and the player can play the game while predicting the future game content, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the player presses the switching button 22za while the screen shown in FIG. 145(a) is being displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 145(b) is displayed. Next, with reference to FIG. 145(b), the display contents of the selection screen for allowing the player to select the conditions for ending the accessory winning game will be described. FIG. 145(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed as the termination condition selection screen.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the switching button detection switch (not shown) detects that the switching button 22za has been pressed, the detection result is output to the main controller 110. The main controller 110 sets a command (switching command) indicating that the switching button 22za has been pressed, and the set command (switching command) is executed in the external output process (see FIG. 55). (See S1801 in FIG. 55) is configured to be output to the audio lamp control device 113. Based on the reception of the switching command, the audio lamp control device 113 sets the display mode of the display screen shown in FIG. 145(b).

To specifically explain the display contents of the ending condition selection screen for selecting the ending condition for the accessory winning game, with reference to FIG. Please select termination conditions.'' is displayed. By visually recognizing this comment, the player can easily understand that the currently displayed screen is a screen for selecting the termination condition of the accessory winning game.

The main display area Dm is divided into display areas (HR21, HR22) corresponding to a plurality of end conditions that can be selected by the player, and the contents of the plurality of end conditions (winning end conditions, time end conditions). (Contents for satisfying the termination condition) is displayed. Specifically, the display area HR21 displays the winning end condition in association with the end condition for the game to win the accessory, and the display area HR22 displays the time end condition in association as the end condition for the game to win the accessory. .

In the display area HR21, the comment "It will end when three balls enter the V attacker" is displayed as a requirement for the winning end condition to be satisfied, and the comment "Winning ends" to indicate the target ending condition is displayed. It is displayed in the display area HR21a. In addition, as a guide display mode 871 for guiding the player to the selection button to be operated when selecting the winning end condition, an icon (circle with the number 1 attached) imitating the first selection button 22zb is displayed. Displayed.

On the other hand, in the display area HR22, the comment "It will end in 1.6 seconds from the start of hitting the object" is displayed as a requirement for establishing the time end condition, and the comment " "Time is over" is displayed in the display area HR22a. In addition, as a guide display mode 872 for guiding the player to select the selection button to be operated when selecting the time end condition, an icon (circle with the number 2 attached) imitating the second selection button 22zc is displayed. Displayed.

Furthermore, a display area HR23 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and the characters "time" are displayed to indicate the type of ending condition currently set as the ending condition for the accessory winning game. has been done. That is, FIG. 145(b) shows a state in which the time end condition is set as the end condition of the accessory winning game. In addition, when the winning end condition is set as the end condition of the accessory winning game, the characters "winning" are set in the display area HR23. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, there is a comment "Please select with the button" as a guidance display mode for guiding the operation that the player should perform in order to select the end condition of the accessory winning game. An icon indicating that the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is to be operated (pressed) is displayed.

By displaying such a selection screen, it becomes possible for the player to easily make a selection while understanding the contents of the termination conditions for the accessory winning game. In addition, on the display screen shown in FIG. 145(b), when a selection screen is displayed that allows you to select the end condition of the accessory winning game, the period of the time saving state (short time period) that is set after the end of the jackpot winning game is displayed. Although the configuration is configured such that information suggesting the length of (for example, the short remaining time mode 801 shown in FIG. 145(a)) is not displayed, the selection screen is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that the short remaining time mode 801 is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to easily select the end condition of the accessory winning game while referring to the length of the period of the time saving state that is set immediately after.

When the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed) while the termination condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)) is displayed, the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed). The detection switch detects, and the detection result is output to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. Then, in the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a process based on the operation of the first selection button 22zb (a process for storing the selected end condition) is executed, and the first selection button 22zb is executed. A command (operation command) for indicating that the selection button 22zb has been effectively operated is set.

When an operation command is set in the control process of the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device The operation command is output to 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 sets the display mode after the termination condition is selected based on the information included in the received operation command (information indicating the type of selection button operated). Ru. Here, an example of the display screen displayed after selecting the termination condition will be described with reference to FIG. 146(a). FIG. 146(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed after the winning end condition is selected as the end condition of the accessory winning game.

When the first selection button 22zb corresponding to the winning ending condition is operated (pressed) while the ending condition selection screen shown in FIG. 145(b) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 146(a), A display area corresponding to the selected end condition (winning end condition) is formed on the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and the word "Decision" is displayed at the top of the main display area Dm, indicating that the selection of the end condition is completed. be done. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the comment "Winning ends after the next winning object" is displayed as a guidance mode to guide the player as to when the current selection result will be reflected. In the region HR23, characters "Win" are displayed indicating that the currently set end condition is a winning end condition.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this embodiment, the ending condition for the accessory winning game can be selected multiple times as long as the ending condition for the accessory winning game can be selected multiple times. The end condition selected at the time when the period during which the end condition of the object winning game can be selected is set as the ending condition of the accessory winning game. Therefore, even if the player selects the ending condition by mistake, he or she can select the ending condition again until the period during which the ending condition of the accessory winning game can be selected has elapsed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated in a state where the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected, a message indicating that the selection button has been operated is displayed. and the type of the operated selection button, and when the ending period of the jackpot game ends, that is, when the period in which the ending condition of the accessory winning game can be selected ends, the final The configuration is such that a command (end condition command) indicating the end condition of the game with the selected accessory is set.

In other words, during the period when the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected, since the player may select the end condition multiple times, only the fact that each selection button has been operated is output to the audio lamp control device 113. , a display mode corresponding to the operation of the selection button is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and only the finally selected end condition is output to the audio lamp control device 113. are doing. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent unnecessary commands from being output from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113.

Then, when the jackpot game ends and the time saving state is set, as shown in FIG. 146(b), a display mode indicating that the V rush has started is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. be done. FIG. 145(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during V rush. The display screen shown in FIG. 146(b) is the same as the situation in which the display screen shown in FIG. 12(b) of the first embodiment described above is displayed (see FIG. 12(c)). 146(c)), in which a display area HR23 is formed for indicating the currently set termination condition for the accessory winning game in contrast to the first embodiment described above. They differ in some respects and are otherwise the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 146(b), the words "Win" are displayed on the display screen during the V rush, indicating that the winning end condition is set as the end condition for the accessory winning game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the end conditions of the accessory winning game executed during the V rush in an easy-to-understand manner. Although not shown in the figure, this display area HR23 is configured to always be displayed during the V rush period. It is structured so that it can be easily understood. In addition, when displaying the end condition during the prize winning game in this way, the elements for establishing the end condition (if the winning end condition is set, the elements for the V attacker (V winning device 65)) The number of winning balls, if a time end condition is set, the update status (elapsed time since the start of the accessory winning game) and the value at which the end condition is satisfied are displayed on the display screen. It is best to configure it as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a game with a winning object suddenly ends and the player is confused.

<About the electrical configuration of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 147, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment adds an end condition storage area 203ea, a switchable flag 203eb, and a switching flag 203ec to the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 29). They are different in that they are the same, but otherwise the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The ending condition storage area 203ea is a storage area for storing the ending condition of the accessory winning game selected by the player, and in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), the selection button (first selection button 22zb, When it is determined that the second selection button 22zc) has been operated, the end condition corresponding to the operation content is stored. Then, when the jackpot game ends, the stored end conditions are read out and referenced when setting the end condition command corresponding to the read end conditions. In addition, when executing the accessory winning game, it is read out, and the accessory winning game is executed based on the read ending condition.

In the sixth embodiment, the ending condition storage area 203ea is configured to store information indicating winning ending conditions as initial data. Specifically, in the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 54), if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 10) is operated (S1704: Yes in FIG. 54), the process in S1714 is performed. As part of the process, information indicating winning termination conditions is stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea.

In this way, by configuring so that at least one of the termination conditions as the termination conditions of the accessory winning game is stored as initial data in the termination condition storage area 203ea, a function that allows selection of the ending condition of the accessory winning game is achieved. In the pachinko machine 10 having the above, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation from occurring in which no conditions for ending the accessory winning game are set. In addition, in this embodiment, information corresponding to the winning end condition is stored (stored) in the end condition storage area 203ea as initial data of the end condition for ending the accessory winning game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured such that at least the winning end condition and the time end condition are set as the initial data of the end condition of the accessory winning game.

The switchable flag 203eb is a flag for indicating that it is a period in which the ending conditions of the accessory winning game can be selected, and is set to ON when starting the ending period of the jackpot game, and is set to ON when starting the ending period of the jackpot game. This is set to off when the program ends.

In the sixth embodiment, if the switch button 22za is operated in a state where the switchable flag 203eb is not set to on, the operation on the switch button 22za is invalidated. With this configuration, even if the player accidentally operates the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc while the switchable flag 203eb is not set to on, the processing based on the operation will not be performed. It is possible to prevent it from being executed.

The switching flag 203ec indicates that the switching button 22za is operated (pressed) during a period in which the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected (a period in which the switchable flag 20eb is set to on), and the first selection button 22zb , or a flag for indicating that the period is such that it is possible to select the end condition by operating the second selection button 22zc, and the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated. This is set to ON when a period is set in which the termination condition can be selected.

This switching flag 203ec is set when the switching button 22za is operated in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151) while the switchable flag 203eb is set to on (see S2201: Yes in FIG. 151). That is, when the switching button 22za is operated during the ending period of the jackpot game (S2203: Yes in FIG. 151), it is set to ON (see S2204 in FIG. 151).

Then, when determining whether the setting status of the switching flag 203ec is a period in which operations on the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc can be effectively determined in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151). (S2202 in FIG. 151), and is set to off when the termination condition is selected based on the operation of the first selection button 22zb and the second selection button 22zc (see S2206 in FIG. 151). (See S2209). Further, if the switching flag 203ec is set to on and the selection operation is not performed by the player, it is set to off at the end timing of the jackpot game (see S2303 in FIG. 153).

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the contents of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 148, in the sixth embodiment, an end storage area 223ea is added to the RAM 223 (see FIG. 30(b)) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. They differ in the additions, but are otherwise the same. Identical configurations will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The end storage area 223ea is a storage area for storing the end condition of the selected accessory winning game, and when an operation command is received in the end condition related process (see S4272 in FIG. 156), the end storage area 223ea is a storage area for storing the end condition of the selected accessory game. Based on the operation information included in the command (information indicating whether the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc was operated), the corresponding end condition is stored (see S5706 and S5707 in FIG. 155). ). When the termination condition command output at the end of the jackpot game is received (S5709 in FIG. 155: Yes), the contents of the received termination condition command (type of termination condition set) and the termination storage area 223ea are stored. The stored information (type of termination condition stored in advance based on the operation command) is compared (S5710 in FIG. 155), and if the comparison results are different, the contents of the termination condition command are The corresponding end condition is stored.

In other words, when an operation command indicating that a selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated by a player is received, this end storage area 223ea stores information based on the received operation command. End conditions are stored, and the display mode of the switching performance to be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be set based on the end conditions stored in the end storage area 223ea. When a termination condition command indicating the finally selected termination condition is received, the termination condition set on the audio lamp control device 113 side based on the operation command and the termination condition actually set, If the comparison results are not the same, the termination condition corresponding to the contents of the termination condition command is stored.

With this configuration, the end condition command can be received in the pachinko machine 10 using the configuration in which the command for indicating the finally selected end condition (end condition command) is set at the end of the jackpot game. At an earlier stage, it is possible to predict the end condition selected by the player based on the operation command, set the performance mode based on the prediction result, and execute the performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, in this embodiment, the setting timing of the end condition command is the end timing of the jackpot game, but it is not limited to this, for example, when the player presses the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc). In addition to the operation command, a termination condition command may be set when the operation is performed. When configured in this way, the display mode to be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be selected based on the received end condition command, that is, based on the actually set end condition. I can do it.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
The control processing of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 149 to 153. In the sixth embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment described above, timer interrupt processing 6 (see FIG. 149) is replaced with timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 39), and special electric start opening winning processing (see FIG. In that the special electric start opening winning process 6 (see S178 in FIG. 150) is executed instead of the special electric start opening winning process 6 (see S108), and the jackpot control process 6 (see S1854 in FIG. 152) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 56). Different, otherwise the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of timer interrupt processing 6 will be explained with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of timer interrupt processing 6. This timer interrupt process 6 is performed in place of the special electric start gate winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) in place of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39). ) and added a switching process (see S171), and the other processes (S101 to S107, S109 to S112) are the same as the timer interrupt process described above (see FIG. 39). A detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the contents of the special electric start opening winning process 6 (S178) will be explained. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special electric start opening winning process 6 (S178). In this special electric starting gate winning process 6 (S178), the processing content that is executed when the execution condition of the accessory winning game is satisfied is changed from the above-mentioned special electric starting opening winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50). They differ in some respects and are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the special electric start opening prize winning process 6 (S178) is executed, first, the same processes of S1301 to S1307 as the above-mentioned special electric start opening winning process (see S108 in FIG. 50) of the first embodiment are executed, and then, The termination condition stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea is read (S1381), and the read termination condition is set (S1382). Thereafter, a special electric activation command is set (S1308), and this processing is ended. Further, if it is determined in the process of S1302 that the normal pattern is not hit (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1309), and this process ends.

As explained above, in the sixth embodiment, when the execution conditions for the accessory winning game are met, the information stored in the end condition storage area 203ea is read out, and the end condition corresponding to the read information is set. By setting, it is configured to vary the end condition of the accessory winning game. This makes it possible to end the accessory winning game when the ending condition selected by the player is met, so the player can select the size of the benefit given during the special electric game, and the game Can increase motivation. In addition, in this embodiment, the termination condition of the accessory winning game to be executed is set every time the execution condition of the accessory winning game is satisfied, but unlike this embodiment, during the jackpot winning game If the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the termination condition for the accessory winning game can be selected only when the jackpot winning game ends, or the first time after the jackpot winning game ends, the execution condition for the accessory winning game is set. When the termination condition is established, the termination condition stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea is read out, and the accessory winning operation scenario corresponding to the termination condition is set.The setting is continued until the next jackpot game is executed. It may also be configured to execute an accessory winning game based on the accessory winning action scenario.

With this configuration, the accessory corresponding to the ending condition selected by the player can be created without having to perform the process of reading information from the ending condition storage area 203ea every time the execution condition for the accessory winning game is satisfied. A winning game can be executed.

Furthermore, unlike the sixth embodiment, even in the case of a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to allow selection of the end condition of the game to win the accessory during the special electric game (during the time saving state), for example, the end condition for the game to win the accessory A flag indicating that the termination condition has been switched (termination condition switching flag) is provided, and only when the termination condition switching flag is set to on, the information stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea is read out and used. It is preferable to configure the end condition of the object game to be changed. As a result, when executing a new accessory winning game with the same ending conditions as the previous accessory winning game, it is possible to skip the process of reading out the information stored in the ending condition storage area 203ea. It is possible to simplify the control process when executing the accessory winning game.

Next, the contents of the switching process (S171) will be explained with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the switching process (S171). This switching process (S171) is a control process executed in the timer interrupt process 6 (see FIG. 149), and is a process based on the player's operation on the end condition switching button group 22z.

When the switching process (S171) is executed, it is first determined whether the switchable flag 203eb is set to on (S2201), and if it is determined that it is not set to on, that is, the current ending of the jackpot game is determined. If it is determined that it is not during the period (S2201: No), this process ends as it is because the operation on the end condition switching button group 22z is invalid. On the other hand, if it is determined that the switchable flag 203eb is set to on in the process of S2201, that is, if it is determined that the current period is during the ending period of the jackpot game (S2201: Yes), next, during the switching It is determined whether the flag 203ec is set to on (S2202).

In the process of S2202, if the switching flag 203ec is not set to on, that is, during the ending period of the jackpot game and the switching button 22za is not operated (the display screen of FIG. 145(a) is displayed) If it is (S2202: No), it is determined whether there is an operation on the switching button 22za (S2203), and if it is determined that it is not operated (S2203: No), this process is continued. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that there has been an operation on the switching button 22za (S2203: Yes), then the switching flag 203ec is set to on (S2204), the switching command is set (S2205), and the main processing is continued. end.

Here, the determination processing in S2203 will be explained. In this embodiment, when the player operates (presses) the switching button 22za, the switching button detection switch detects the pressed switching button 22za, and sends the detection result to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. It is configured so that it is output as follows. In the determination process of S2203, it is determined whether a detection signal is output from the above-mentioned changeover button detection switch.

On the other hand, in the process of S2202, if the switching flag 203ec is set to ON, that is, during the ending period of the jackpot game, and the switching button 22za has already been operated (the display in FIG. 145(b) If the screen is being displayed (S2202: Yes), it is determined whether any of the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is being operated (S2206). In the determination process of S2206, if the first selection button 22zb is operated (pressed), the first selection button detection switch detects the pressed first selection button 22zb, and the detection result is sent to the main controller. Since the detection signal is output to the input/output port 205 of 110, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the detection switch for the first selection button. Further, when the second selection button 22zc is operated (pressed), the second selection button detection switch detects the pressed second selection button 22zc, and the detection result is sent to the input/output port of the main controller 110. 205, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the second selection button detection switch.

In the process of S2206, if it is determined that either the first selection button 22zb or the second selection button 22zc is operated (S2206: Yes), information indicating that the selection button was operated and information indicating that the selection button was operated are displayed. information indicating the type of the selected selection button (S2207), stores the termination condition selected in the process of S2206 in the termination condition storage area 203ea (S2208), and turns off the switching flag 203ec. settings (S2209), and ends this process.

In addition, in the process of S2206, if it is determined that neither the first selection button 22zb nor the second selection button 22zc is operated, that is, the detection switch for the first selection button and the detection switch for the second selection button If it is determined that no detection signal is output (S2206: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

As explained above, in the switching process (see S171 in FIG. 151), at the timing when it is determined that the operation on the selection buttons (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is valid, any selection button is pressed. When the (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated, information indicating the selected termination condition is stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea, but a command indicating the selected termination condition is not set. The configuration is configured to set an operation command including information indicating that a selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) has been operated and information indicating the type of selection button operated. are doing. In addition, since the switching flag 203ec is set to OFF in the process of S2209, it is possible to select the ending condition again by operating the ending condition switching button group 22z during the ending period of the jackpot game. ing.

In other words, since the ending conditions are not determined until the ending period of the jackpot game ends, the configuration is such that the command (ending condition command) for indicating the selected ending condition is not output to the audio lamp control device 113. ing. With this configuration, when the voice lamp control device 113 side receives an end condition command, the information (end condition type) included in the received end condition command is displayed until the next jackpot game is executed. You can set the performance according to your needs. Therefore, compared to the case where the end condition command is set every time the player operates the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc), the control processing on the voice lamp control device 113 side is simplified. be able to.

In addition, since it is configured to be able to set an operation command that indicates that the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated while the switching flag 203ec is set to on, it is possible to set a jackpot. During the ending period of the game, effects can be executed based on the received operation commands. Therefore, it is possible to perform a performance that does not make the player who operates the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) feel uncomfortable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the contents of jackpot control processing 6 (S1854) will be explained. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot control processing 6 (S1854). In this jackpot control process 6 (S1854), in contrast to the jackpot control process of the first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56), there is a process executed at the start timing of the ending period, and a process executed at the end timing of the jackpot game. The process executed is different, but the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When jackpot control processing 6 (S1854) is executed, first, the same processing as S1901 to S1911 as the jackpot control processing of the first embodiment described above (see S1804 in FIG. 56) is executed, and the processing of S1911 is finished. Afterwards, the switchable flag 203eb is set to ON (S1951), and this processing is ended. In other words, in this embodiment, when the ending period is set after the end of the last round game in the jackpot game, by setting the switchable flag 203eb to ON, the player's operation on the switching button 22za is It is configured to effectively determine the

On the other hand, in the process of S1910, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S1910: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing of the end of the jackpot, that is, the end timing of the ending period (S1912), If it is determined that it is the timing to end the jackpot (S1912: Yes), the same processing as S1913 to S1917 as the jackpot control processing of the first embodiment described above (see S1804 in FIG. 56) is executed, and then the end condition Setting processing is executed (S1952), and this processing ends. In addition, if it is determined in the process of S1912 that it is not the timing to end the jackpot (S1912: No), the process of S1918, which is the same as the jackpot control process of the first embodiment (see S1804 in FIG. 56), is executed, This process ends.

Next, the contents of the termination condition setting process (S1952) will be explained with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the termination condition setting process (S1952). This end condition setting process (S1952) is executed in the jackpot control process 6 (see S1854 in FIG. 152), and is the selection of the end condition selection for the accessory winning game executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. It executes processing based on the results.

When the termination condition setting process (S1952) is executed, first, the switchable flag 203eb is set to OFF (S2301), then it is determined whether the switching flag 203ec is set to ON (S2302), and the switchable flag 203ec is set to ON. If it is determined that it has been set, that is, if the jackpot end timing is reached while the selection screen for selecting the end condition (see FIG. 145(b)) is displayed (S2302: Yes), the switching flag 203ec is set to off (S2303), the information (finally selected termination condition type) stored in the termination condition storage area 203ea is read (S2304), and the termination condition is set based on the information read from the termination condition storage area 203ea. A command is set (S2305), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the switching flag 203ec is not set to on, that is, if the switching button 22za is not operated on the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 145(a)), or If the desired selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated (pressed) on the condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)) (S2302: No), the process of S2303 is skipped. Then, the process moves to S2304.

As explained above, in this embodiment, in the end condition setting process (see S1952 in FIG. 153) executed at the end timing of the jackpot game, the end condition command is used to target only the finally selected end condition. is configured to set. Furthermore, it is configured such that the period during which the termination condition of the accessory winning game can be selected is only during the jackpot winning game. With this configuration, the number of end condition commands output to the audio lamp control device 113 side in response to one jackpot game can be reduced to one, and the end condition included in the end condition command can be The termination conditions corresponding to the above will be applied at least until the next jackpot game is executed.

Therefore, on the voice lamp control device 113 side, the performance based on the received end condition command can be continuously executed at least until the next jackpot game is executed. When changing the presentation mode accordingly, it is possible to prevent the processing for changing the presentation mode from becoming complicated.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155, the content of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be explained. The sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that command determination processing 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is executed instead of command determination processing (S4102 in FIG. 61), and other than that, are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of command determination processing 6 (S4172) will be explained with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 6 (S4172). This command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is different from the command determination process in the first embodiment (S4102 in FIG. 61) described above, and is a process for determining whether a command related to the termination condition of the accessory winning game has been received. , and a process executed based on the result of the determination process.The other points are the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When command determination process 6 (S4172 in FIG. 154) is executed, first, the same processes as S4201 to S4219 as the command determination process (see S4102 in FIG. 61) of the first embodiment described above are executed. In the process of S4218, if it is determined that a winning related command has not been received (S4218: No), then it is determined whether an end condition related command has been received (S4271). Here, the termination condition related commands include switching commands and operation commands set in the switching process of the main controller 110 (see S171 in FIG. 151), and termination condition setting processes (see S1952 in FIG. 153). This applies to the end condition command that is set.

In the process of S4271, if it is determined that the end condition related command has been received (S4271: Yes), then the end condition related process is executed (S4272) and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4271, if it is determined that the termination condition related command has not been received (S4271: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S4220), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the termination condition related process (S4272) will be explained with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the termination condition related process (S4272). This end condition related processing (S4272) is a process in which, when a player performs a selection operation to select an end condition for the accessory winning game, various processes are executed to set the performance mode corresponding to the selection operation. Ru.

When the end condition related process (S4272) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current jackpot game is in progress (S5701), and if it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S5701: No), this process is continued. finish. In other words, in this embodiment, the termination condition of the accessory winning game can be selected only during the jackpot game, so if a command related to the termination condition is received other than during the jackpot game, the command corresponding to the received command will be handled. The configuration is such that no effects are set. Therefore, when an incorrect command is received due to noise or the like, it is possible to prevent a performance that is not intended by the player from being executed.

In the process of S5701, if it is determined that the current jackpot game is being played (S5701: Yes), next, the switching command is received or the player operates the switching button 22za during the jackpot ending period. (Pressed) is determined (S5702). If it is determined in the process of S5702 that a switching command has been received (S5702: Yes), a display command indicating a selection screen is set (S5703), and this process ends.

When the process of S5703 is executed, a screen for switching the jackpot ending screen (see FIG. 145(a)) to a selection screen for selecting the ending condition for the accessory winning game (see FIG. 145(b)) is displayed. Display commands are set. The display command set here, like other display commands, is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 60) of the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113. is output. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S5703, it creates image data for displaying the termination condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)), and the third symbol display device A selection screen is displayed at 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S5702, if it is determined that the switching command has not been received (S5702: No), then it is determined whether an operation command has been received (S5704). This operation command is executed when it is determined that the player has operated (pressed) the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc), that is, during the ending period of the jackpot, the switching button 22za, and when the selection button (first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) is operated with the ending condition selection screen displayed, the command is set and is a command that is set by the player. This is a command that includes information indicating the type of selection button.

In the process of S5704, if it is determined that an operation command has been received (S5704: Yes), it is determined whether the operation command received this time is the operation command corresponding to the first selection button 22zb, that is, whether the information included in the operation command It is determined whether information indicating that the first selection button 22zb has been operated is included (S5705), and if it is determined that it is the first selection button 22zb (S5705: Yes), the first selection button 22zb is A display command indicating the winning end (condition) which is the corresponding end condition is set (S5706). When the display command is set in the process of S5706, the ending condition selection screen (see FIG. 146(a)) indicating that the player has selected the winning ending condition is displayed from the ending condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)). ) will be displayed. Thereafter, the set termination condition (winning termination condition) is stored in the termination storage area 223ea, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S5705, if it is determined that the operation command received this time is not the operation command of the first selection button 22zb (S5705: No), the operation command received this time is the operation command of the second selection button 22zc. Therefore, a display command indicating the end of time (condition) is set (S5707), and this processing is ended. When the display command is set in the process of S5707, an end condition determination screen is displayed that indicates that the player has selected the time end condition from the end condition selection screen (see FIG. 145(b)). Specifically, on the display screen described above with reference to FIG. 146(a), display area HR22 (see FIG. 145(b)) is enlarged and displayed instead of display area HR21, and "time" is displayed in display area HR22a. "End" is displayed, and the characters "Time" are displayed in the display area HR23. Thereafter, the set end condition (time end condition) is stored in the end storage area 223ea, and this process is ended.

In the process of S5704, if it is determined that no operation command has been received (S5704: No), then it is determined whether an end condition command has been received (S5709), and it is determined that no end condition command has been received. If so (S5709: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the termination condition command has been received (S5709: Yes), the information indicating the termination condition stored in the termination storage area 223ea is compared with the information included in the termination condition command received this time. , it is determined whether they indicate the same termination condition (S5710).

In the process of S5710, if it is determined that they are the same termination condition, that is, if the termination condition set based on the received operation command and the termination condition indicated by the termination condition command indicate the same termination condition. (S5710: Yes), this process ends immediately. Further, if the termination condition set based on the received operation command and the termination condition indicated by the termination condition command do not indicate the same termination condition (S5710: No), the termination condition actually set, Since this is a case where the selection result displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is different, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the end condition indicated by the end condition command. A display command for switching to the display mode is set (S5711), and this processing ends.

When the display command is set in the process of S5711, while displaying the comment "Switching termination condition" in the center of the main display area Dm, a display corresponding to the termination condition indicated by the termination condition command is displayed in the display area HR23. The mode is displayed.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the player is configured to be able to select either the winning end condition or the time end condition as the end condition of the accessory winning game. In other words, when the winning end condition is selected, the time ending condition will not be satisfied even if the period in which the time ending condition can be satisfied has passed, and when the time ending condition is selected, the time ending condition will not be satisfied. Even if the number of winnings reaches the number for which the winning ending condition can be satisfied, the winning ending condition is not satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to end the accessory winning game when the ending condition desired by the player is met, so it is possible to make the player more actively play the game during the special electric game. .

In addition, in the present sixth embodiment, when the winning end condition is selected, the winning prize game does not end based on the elapsed time during the winning prize game, and when the time ending condition is selected, Although the game is configured so that the game to win the game does not end based on the number of balls that hit the V winning device 65 during the game to win the game, the present invention is not limited to this, and the conditions for ending winning can be selected, for example. In this case, a forced time end condition or a time end condition that is satisfied when a longer time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed than the elapsed time (e.g., 1.6 seconds) set as the normal time end condition. If you select , you can set a forced winning end condition that will be satisfied if the number of winnings (for example, 10) is greater than the number of winnings (for example, 3) that is set as the normal winning ending condition. It may be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the accessory winning game from being executed for a long time.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the ending condition of the accessory winning game can be selected by the player operating (pressing) the switching button 22za during the period when the ending screen of the jackpot winning game is displayed. ing. In other words, in the sixth embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the termination condition of the accessory winning game is configured to be selectable, and during the time saving state (V rush) set after the end of the jackpot winning game, the ending condition of the accessory winning game is selected. The game is configured so that the conditions for ending the game cannot be changed.

By configuring in this way, the end condition of the game per accessory is frequently changed depending on the gaming situation during V rush, that is, the changing situation of special symbols and the changing situation of normal symbols, and the player is given an excessive amount of money. It is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an advantageous gaming situation. In addition, the configuration is such that the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected at the timing when the game of winning a ball in the variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game ends, but before the special electric game is executed. To provide an easy-to-understand game to a player without duplicating the game of firing a ball and the act of selecting an end condition.

Furthermore, since the time-saving state period (40 seconds) set after the end of the jackpot game is configured so that the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected, the remaining amount displayed on the jackpot ending screen is It is possible to allow the player to select the termination condition for the accessory winning game while understanding the time period aspect 801. Specifically, when a display mode indicating that the period of the time saving state is short (for example, 40 seconds) is displayed as the display mode of the short remaining time mode 801, the winning end condition is set as the end condition of the accessory winning game. By selecting and arbitrarily adjusting the game period of the game per accessory, we aim to create a special electric game that efficiently sets the period during which special symbol fluctuations are interrupted, and as a display mode of the short remaining time mode 801, the period of the time saving state is long. (for example, 200 seconds), select the time end condition and increase the number of balls to be won in the V winning device 65 in one game per accessory. You can aim for a special electric game where the amount of benefits (number of prize balls) per hour is large.

Note that in the sixth embodiment, the player is configured to be able to select the end condition of the accessory winning game during the period when the ending screen of the jackpot winning game is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, It may be configured such that the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected at any timing during the jackpot winning game.

In addition, even when the standby screen (demonstration screen) that is displayed when the special symbol fluctuation is not executed during the time saving state is displayed, the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected. Alternatively, the termination condition of the accessory winning game may be configured to be selectable during the period in which the accessory winning game is being executed. Even in such a case, it is possible to select the end condition for the accessory winning game at a timing when the remaining time in the time saving state (time period) is not subtracted, so the player can receive the accessory while giving the player time. It is possible to select the conditions for ending the winning game.

On the other hand, different from the technical idea of the sixth embodiment, it may be configured such that the end condition of the accessory winning game can be selected only during the period in which the remaining time of the time saving state (time period) is subtracted. With this configuration, during the special electric game where the remaining time in the time saving state (time period) is subtracted, it is possible to concentrate only on the special electric game or to select the end condition of the accessory winning game. It is possible to allow the player to select whether to execute the game, and the player can play the game while predicting the future game content, and the interest in the game can be improved.

<Second modification example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 156, a second modification of each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In each of the embodiments described above, when the normal state is set, when the time saving state is set, and in all games such as winning games (accessories winning games, small winning games, jackpot winning games), Of the game areas formed in the game area, the left side area (the left side of the variable display unit 80) is configured to play a game in which a ball is launched so that it flows down (a left-handed game).

This eliminates the need to change the game area in which the ball is fired at the player, making it possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, in each embodiment, as described above, there is no need to change the gaming method during the game (for example, when a winning game is executed), so when a winning game is executed (see FIG. 13). (see a)) or when a game with a winning object is executed (see Fig. 18 (a)), guidance information for changing the game method (for example, displaying a comment such as "Play right") is displayed. It was configured so that the player is informed of the devices that are not executed and will be in the open state during the winning game to be executed (for example, the general power winning device 640, the V winning device 65, etc.) in the display area HR3.

However, in the display area HR3 (see FIG. 13(a)) in each of the above-described embodiments, there is simply an image display schematically showing the winning device (general power winning device 640) corresponding to the winning game to be executed. There is a problem in that the display is unnecessary for players who understand the content of the winning game that is being executed. Furthermore, since there is a limit to the area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 provided in the pachinko machine 10, if an unnecessary display is displayed in the display area HR3 (see FIG. 13(a)), other There is a problem in that the area in which the performance display is executed becomes narrow, and the performance effect of the pachinko machine 10 deteriorates. On the other hand, if each display area on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set for the purpose of widening the area where other effects are displayed and increasing the effect, the display area of the display area HR3 will be There was a problem in that the space became narrow and games that were difficult for players to understand were provided.

On the other hand, in the present second modification, the guide display mode (display area HR3 This embodiment differs from the above-described embodiments in that the display mode of the displayed image can be variably set based on various conditions. The other contents are the same as those in each embodiment described above, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, an example of the display screen displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents displayed when a game with a normal figure is executed during the V rush period, and FIG. A diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen that is displayed when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (frame button 22) while the display screen shown in (a) is displayed. It is a diagram.

In the second modified example, similarly to each of the first embodiments described above, when a game with a common symbol is executed, a ball can be won into the common symbol winning device 640. A special electric operating port 643 is provided inside the general electric winning device 640, and when a ball enters the special electric operating port 643, the ball can be won into the V winning device 65. configured to run. Furthermore, a V winning hole 165 is provided in the V winning device 65, and by winning a ball into the V winning hole 165, a jackpot game (V jackpot) in which the ball can be won into the variable winning device 650. The system is configured so that games (games) are executed. In other words, the configuration is such that a plurality of possible winning games can be executed based on a single winning game (a regular winning game).

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, for example, when a ball enters the special electric actuating port 643 during a game with a regular figure, a game with an accessory is executed in continuation with a game with a regular figure. become. In this case, if the guidance display mode is displayed in accordance with the type of winning game that is being executed, the guidance display format will be displayed in the display area HR3 in accordance with the timing of switching from the normal figure winning game to the role winning game. As a result, there is a problem in that the timing at which the guidance display mode for guiding the player to the winning device (V winning device 65) corresponding to the accessory winning game is displayed is delayed. In addition, in consideration of the delay in the timing at which the guidance display mode is displayed, for example, when the winning game switches from a game with a common figure to a game with a role model, specifically, when the game with a common figure ends, It is also possible to set a waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) between (after the ball enters the special electric actuating port 643) and when the accessory winning game is executed, but it is not necessary to set the waiting period. As a result, the sense of speed of the special electric game aiming at a jackpot game (V jackpot game) in a series of steps decreases, and there is a problem that the interest of the game cannot be improved.

On the other hand, in the second modified example, as shown in FIG. 156(a), it is a game with a common symbol, and an image imitating the common symbol winning device 640 is displayed as a guide display mode in the display area HR3. In the state in which it is being executed, a winning game that can be executed next, that is, a winning game that is executed when the ball enters the special electric operation opening 643 in the ordinary figure winning game that is being executed. ), a second guide display mode for guiding the player in advance about the winning device (V winning device 65) that the player should aim for is displayed in the display area HR30.

By configuring in this way, when the game result of the current game with a normal figure is a specific game result (the game result of winning a ball into the special electric operation port 643), the winning game to be executed next Since it is possible to inform the player of the winning device to be aimed at in an easy-to-understand manner, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player. In addition, by notifying in advance the game content of the next game to win the accessory that can be executed during the game to win the regular symbol, the game can be played during the period from the end of the game to win the symbol to the time when the game to win the accessory is executed. It is possible to eliminate the need to provide a waiting period for the player to grasp the game content (winning device to be aimed at) of the winning game (the length of the waiting period can be shortened). Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by smoothly performing the special electric game aiming at the jackpot game (V jackpot game) in a series of steps.

In addition, as mentioned above, since the game is configured so that the accessory winning game is executed when the game result of the playing game that is currently being executed becomes a specific game result, the display area The comment "Aim" is not displayed in the second guidance display mode displayed on HR30. In addition, in a state where the execution of the game to win the accessory has not been determined, that is, when the game to win the regular figure is in progress and the ball has not entered the special electric operation opening 643, a display imitating the V winning device 65 is displayed. It is configured so that only a part of the image (for example, the image displayed in display area HR3 in FIG. 18(a)) is displayed. With this configuration, it is easy for the player to understand the first guide display mode that shows the game content of the winning game that is being executed, and the second guide display mode that shows the game content of the winning game that may be executed next. Since it can be identified, for example, it is possible to suppress a game in which the player aims at the V winning device 65 from being executed during a game in which a common symbol is won.

In the example shown with reference to FIG. 156(a), as the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode, an image display imitating a winning device that becomes open in the corresponding winning game is used. However, the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode may be set using only text display, or may be set using both text and images.

Further, as the image display imitating the winning device displayed in the first guidance display mode and the second guidance display mode, photographic data obtained by photographing each winning device actually installed in the pachinko machine 10 may be used. . As a result, an image actually photographed of the winning device can be used as the image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that it is possible to implement an effect that is easier for the player to understand.

On the other hand, a simplified display that displays only the minimum necessary display information among winning devices that support winning games may be used. In this case, since the simple display can be used in multiple pachinko machines 10, the cost of developing gaming machines can be reduced.

Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this second modification, when the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode are displayed in the display area HR3, the winning game currently being executed (for example, The system is configured to also display past history information in order to make it possible to notify the type of winning game that triggered the execution of the jackpot game.

By configuring this way, when a jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed, it becomes possible to review the past game contents, so if the jackpot game executed this time is won a jackpot by drawing a special symbol. To inform a player in an easy-to-understand manner whether it is a jackpot game executed based on a winning game or a jackpot game executed based on a ball winning a prize in a V winning hole 165 during an accessory winning game. I can do it.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the second guide display mode displayed during the game with a normal figure is changed depending on the progress of the game with a normal figure, that is, in the game with a normal figure that is being executed, the special electric operating port 643 The ball is configured to be set variably in accordance with changes in the degree of expectation that the ball will win. Specifically, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating the start of a game for winning a general figure from the main control device 110, the first image data to be displayed as the first guidance display mode (the first image data for winning a general figure) A display command that shows the image data that schematically shows the device 640) and a display command that shows the second image data that should be displayed as the second guide display mode (image data that schematically shows the V-winning device 65) and is set and transmitted to the display control device 114.

The display control device 114 creates image display data for the first guide display mode and image display data for the second guide display mode shown in FIG. 156(a) based on receiving the display command described above. , is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In other words, immediately after the game with a common symbol is started, the display screen shown in FIG. 156(a) is displayed. Then, when the main control device 110 outputs a winning command indicating that the winning sensor 640s has detected that the ball has entered the general winning device 640 during the general winning game, the audio lamp control device 113 A command indicating the progress of the game per common figure is output to the display control device 114.

As a result, an image imitating the V winning device 65 is displayed as a second guide display mode to indicate that the expectation level that a ball will win a prize in the special electric actuation opening 643 in the regular game that is being executed is increased (see FIG. 156). The image display data exposed more than the display mode shown in a) (image display data in which about 3/4 of the image imitating the V winning device 65 is displayed) is created, and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is created. to be displayed. Similarly, it indicates a state in which it is determined that the ball enters the special electric operation port 643, for example, a state in which the ball passes through the second movable valve 642 and flows down toward the special electric operation port 643 is detected. When the command is output from the main control device 110, the entire image imitating the V winning device 65 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a second guide display mode.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the display mode (second guide display mode) of the guidance display for the winning game that may be executed next depending on the progress of the winning game being executed, that is, The higher the expectation that a ball will land in the special electric operating port 643 in the regular winning game being executed, the more clearly the guide display for guiding the winning game that may be executed next can be displayed.

The example shown with reference to FIG. 156(a) is just an example, and in a gaming machine that can execute multiple winning games in a series, during the period when one winning game is being executed, It is sufficient if it is possible to guide the playing method of the winning game that can be executed next. When using a configuration in which the probability of a winning game (win game) being executed is different, the first guidance display mode displayed during the winning game, or the first guide display mode displayed during the winning game 2. The guidance display mode may be varied. Specifically, the display color and size of the first guide display mode are configured to be changed so that the higher the probability that the next winning game (for example, the role winning game) will be executed, the more noticeable it is to the player. That's good. In addition, the display mode of the second guide display mode displayed at the start of the game to win a common figure may be changed. When a game per figure is executed, the display mode is set such that about half of the image of the V winning device 65 is displayed as the second guide display mode, and the advantageous and popular game is easier to execute than the disadvantageous and popular game. It is preferable to display a display mode in which 3/4 of the image of the V prize winning device 65 is displayed as the second guide display mode in a horse race in which a winning game is executed.

With this configuration, by visually checking the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode, it is possible to not only understand the playing method of the winning game to be executed in an easy-to-understand manner, but also to ensure that the winning game being executed is Since it is possible for the player to predict whether or not it will be a winning game that is advantageous, the presentation effects of the first guide display mode and the second guide display mode can be enhanced. In addition, as described above, the display mode is configured to be changed in stages according to the game result and expectation level that is advantageous to the player, and the display mode is changed in stages according to the degree of advantage of the winning game (game per normal figure) to be executed. By configuring the stage of the display mode that is initially set to be different, that is, by varying the timing of displaying the display mode that indicates a high level of expectation, execution can be performed even when using common image data. Since it is possible to notify the player of the degree of advantage of the winning game, the amount of image data can be reduced.

In addition, in the above-mentioned content, an example was shown in which a game to win a common figure and a game to win to a role object are executed as an example of a winning game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple winning games may be executed as a series of winning games. Of course, it may be used in all cases.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156(b), the display contents that are displayed when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22) during the normal winning game will be explained. When the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 once while the display screen shown in FIG. The image will be enlarged. This makes it possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to a player who wants to know how to play the winning game that is currently being executed. Furthermore, when the frame button 22 is operated twice, the display area HR3 is displayed smaller than the size shown in FIG. 156(a), and when the frame button 22 is operated three times, the display area HR3 is deleted from the display screen and the frame The configuration is such that when the button 22 is operated four times, the screen returns to the display screen shown in FIG. 156(a).

In this way, by varying the size of the guide display mode (first guide display mode) for guiding the playing method of the winning game that is being executed based on the player's operation, the size desired by the player can be changed. You can display the guidance display mode with . In addition, when the guidance display mode is reduced or deleted, the display area of other effect displays (effect displays such as reference numerals 811 and 812) that are displayed on the display screen at the same time as the display timing of the guide display mode. is configured so that it becomes large. Furthermore, it has an effect display that is executed only when the display area of other effect displays becomes larger. This allows the player to actively operate the frame button 22.

Note that, without being limited to this, for example, by enlarging and displaying the first guidance display mode, a detailed display location of the first guidance display mode, for example, the second movable valve 642 in the general electricity prize winning device 640 can be imitated. The display mode is configured so that it can be visually recognized by the player that the display mode is a specific display mode different from normal, and the specific display mode is configured so that it is easily displayed when a winning game that is advantageous to the player is being executed. That's good. Thereby, even players who already understand the gaming method can be made interested in the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

In the example explained above, the guidance display mode can be enlarged or reduced by the player operating the operating means (frame button 22), but the guidance display mode can be changed based on the operation on the operating means. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a direction operation means (a cross switch) that can perform operations indicating at least the left and right directions or the up and down directions, the direction operation is possible. By operating the means, an area other than the winning device that is the target of the guidance display mode (near the area where the target winning device is arranged on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10) is displayed. The guide display mode may be varied, or the guide display mode may be varied so as to rotate (horizontal rotation, vertical rotation) the winning device that is the target of the guide display mode. In this case, the display control device 114 is stored in advance with image data showing the entire gaming area of the game board 13 and three-dimensional image data (3D data) of the winning device, and the operation contents for the direction operation means are stored in advance. When a command corresponding to the operation signal shown is received, image data corresponding to the command may be created and displayed. Further, in this case, it is preferable that information advantageous to the player is displayed in the area that can be displayed only when the direction operation means is operated. Thereby, the player can be motivated to operate the operating means.

As described above, in the second modified example described above, all games can be executed as left-handed games, as in the first embodiment, but for example, multiple winning games can be played as a series of games. In a game machine that can be executed, and when the first winning game is executed as a left-handed game and the next winning game is executed as a right-handed game, the display area HR3 in which the first guide display mode is displayed is replaced with the third symbol. It is preferable that the display area HR30 is formed on the left side of the display surface of the display device 81 and the display area HR30 in which the second guide display mode is displayed is formed on the right side of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the game method to the player also by the position of the display area formed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in this case, the player may be able to control the position where the display area HR3 and the display area HR30 are displayed by operating the direction operation means described above.

In the second modified example described above, the case where multiple winning games are executed as a series of games has been explained, but even when a specific winning game is executed individually, the above-mentioned effects can be applied. Can be applied. For example, a special symbol variation period and a jackpot game are set as a series of games, and during the special symbol variation period, an image of aiming at the special symbol entrance ball opening 64 is displayed as the first guide display mode, and an image of aiming at the special symbol entrance ball opening 64 is displayed as the second guide display mode. Alternatively, an image showing the variable winning device 650 may be displayed. In this case, the configuration may be such that the first guide display mode, which is less necessary to guide the player about the gaming method, is deleted and only the second guide display mode is displayed. In addition, if the gaming machine is equipped with a plurality of variable winning devices 650 that are opened when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, which variable winning device 650 is finally displayed as the second guide display mode? It may also be configured to be able to execute a performance that encourages the player to do so.

In addition, in the above-mentioned second modification example, the guidance display mode was explained when a game with a common symbol is being executed. During this period, only the first guidance display mode may be displayed. Also, at that timing, the guidance display mode is switched and displayed in order to show the flow of the game when all of the games in the example are successful, that is, the flow of the game winning the common symbol, the game winning the accessory, and the jackpot winning game. It may be configured as follows.

Furthermore, the variable contents of the guidance display mode displayed during the winning game may be set as appropriate. For example, in addition to enlarging, reducing, and rotating, the guide display mode may be varied using blinking or color change. , the guide display mode may be varied by making a character appear near the guide display mode. Further, a decorative structure imitating an actual winning device and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 may be combined to guide the gaming method.

Furthermore, in each of the second modified examples described above, an image display using an image imitating the real thing is executed in order to guide the player in an easy-to-understand manner about the game method during the winning game. For example, without limitation, where in the gaming area the target winning device is located, the location where the ball can enter the winning device, and the area where the ball can pass into the winning device. If a gaming machine is provided with an advantageous area and a disadvantageous area, the display image is simplified to the extent that the player can understand at least one of the advantageous area and the advantageous area. May be used. With this configuration, it is possible to provide players with the minimum necessary information, and it is also possible to use common image data for different pachinko machines 10, which reduces development costs for pachinko machines 10, Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, or when a ball enters (wins) a specific area (V winning hole 165) during an accessory winning game, the jackpot game is played. is configured to be executable, and a time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, as an end condition for the time saving state, there is a time saving end condition (time saving number) that is satisfied based on the special symbol lottery being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times) without winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. configured to be set. Furthermore, if a game to win an accessory is executed during the dynamic display period (special symbol fluctuation period) from when the special symbol lottery is executed until the lottery results are stopped and displayed, the dynamic display period is subtracted. The processing is interrupted based on the end of the game to win the accessory, or the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on the ball passing (entering) a specific area during the game to win the accessory. The configuration is such that the process for subtracting the dynamic display period is restarted.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the process of updating the number of special symbol drawings executed during the time saving state (processing of subtracting the remaining time saving number of times) is executed based on the execution of the special symbol drawing. Specifically, it is configured to be executed during the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed until when the special symbol variation is executed, and after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied. There is.

With this configuration, during the execution of special symbol fluctuations, the process for subtracting the dynamic display period based on the execution of the accessory winning game is interrupted, and after that, the suspended dynamic When the processing for subtracting the display period is restarted, the number of time saving times can be prevented from being updated when the dynamic display period after the restart has elapsed and the special symbols are stopped and displayed. Therefore, for example, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the residual dynamic display period of the suspended dynamic display is extremely short, and the number of time savers set after the end of the jackpot game is different from the special symbol fluctuation after restarting. By stopping the display, it is possible to prevent instant subtraction.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the timing at which it is determined whether the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied is the timing at which the dynamic display period of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, the time saving state can be continued until the lottery result of the special symbol lottery for which the conditions for ending the time saving state are met is stopped and displayed, so the gaming state that is advantageous to the player can be maintained for as long as possible. It can be continued. Furthermore, since it is not determined whether the end condition for the time saving state is satisfied during the dynamic display period of the special symbol, the gaming state may not change from the time saving state to the normal state during the dynamic display period of the special symbol. There is no Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

Note that the above-described content may be used in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment provides a plurality of types of special symbols (a first special symbol, a second special symbol), and a lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and a lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. ) is configured to be able to be executed in duplicate. If the result of one special symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (small hit, jackpot), when that lottery result is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol fluctuation (special symbol movement) The processing for subtracting the target display period) is interrupted or discarded. Specifically, if one of the special symbol drawings wins a jackpot, the other special symbol variation in progress is discarded, and if a small win is won, the other special symbol variation in progress is interrupted. It is composed of

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the cumulative number of drawings that is the sum of the number of drawings for the first special symbol and the number of drawings for the second special symbol is a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or when the number of drawings of the first special symbol reaches a specific number (for example, four times), the time saving end condition is established.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above performs the process of updating the number of special symbol drawings executed during the time saving state (processing of subtracting the remaining time saving number of times) based on the execution of the special symbol drawing. The timing for determining whether the time-saving end condition is met is set to the timing at which the dynamic display period of the special symbol has elapsed, or to the timing at which the dynamic display period of the special symbol has passed, or As a result of the process of subtracting the number of remaining time reductions executed at the time of special symbol variation, during the execution of a special symbol variation in which the time reduction end condition can be satisfied (a special symbol variation in which the number of time reductions after subtraction becomes 0), the other The timing is set when the special symbol lottery execution condition is satisfied and before the special symbol lottery is executed.

With this configuration, even in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the special symbol lottery (variation) is not executed more than the specified number of times during the time saving state, and it is advantageous for the player. This gaming state (time saving state) can be continued for as long as possible.

In addition, in the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment described above, the process of determining whether the termination condition of the time saving state is satisfied and the process of terminating the time saving state (transferring to the normal state) based on the processing result are performed. ) process is the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing at which the special symbol is stopped and displayed), but it may be any other timing, for example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second). The timing (the timing that is confirmed and displayed) may be used, or if the special symbol variation (the final variation of the time saving state) that satisfies the time saving end condition is won (small win or jackpot), that winning game The timing at which the winning game is executed, a predetermined timing during the winning game (for example, one second after the winning game starts), or the end timing of the winning game may be used. In other words, the process of updating the number of special symbol drawings executed during the time-saving state (processing of subtracting the remaining time-saving number) is executed, and after the special symbol fluctuation that was the target of the execution is stopped and displayed, the next special symbol It is sufficient that the period is until the lottery is executed.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, a time saving end condition is provided that is satisfied when the number of drawings of special symbols reaches a specific number (for example, 4 times). , without being limited to this, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result (for example, a lottery result other than a jackpot win, but a part of the lottery result in the case of a missed win) is a predetermined number of times (for example, . It may be configured such that a time saving termination condition that is satisfied when the elapsed time after the time saving state is set exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 200 seconds) can be set. In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, if the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a winning game (small winning game) different from a jackpot game, the number of times the small winning game is executed reaches a specific number of times. The configuration may also be such that it is possible to set a time-saving termination condition that is satisfied when this occurs.

In addition, in a case where the end conditions for the time-saving state that are satisfied under various conditions can be set, it is preferable to set different time-saving end conditions depending on the occasion when the time-saving state is set. Specifically, when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving end condition may be set based on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot or the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot. The time-saving termination condition may be set based on the number of special symbol drawings performed until the jackpot is won. Furthermore, the time-saving end condition may be set based on the number of times that a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set consecutively across jackpot games. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the time-saving termination conditions that will be set.

In addition, the player may be configured to be able to select a time-saving ending condition to be set for the current time-saving state from among a plurality of time-saving ending conditions that can be set as time-saving ending conditions. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game while predicting which time-saving ending condition will be selected to play the most advantageous game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of each embodiment described above, when the special symbol variation is interrupted during the time saving state, the number of time saving times is not subtracted when the resumed special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. , without being limited to this, it may be configured such that the number of time reductions is subtracted when the restarted special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the time reduction is performed at the timing when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to execute a process of updating (subtracting) the number of times. Even if such a configuration is used, the length of the short period after restarting will differ depending on the length of the remaining fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation at the time of interruption, so it will be difficult for the player to It is possible to arouse interest in determining at what timing the special symbol fluctuation was interrupted (whether the jackpot game was executed).

Furthermore, in each of the embodiments described above, the process of updating (subtracting) the number of time reductions is configured to be executed during the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed until the special symbol fluctuation starts. For example, the special symbol variation may be configured to be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed (5 seconds) after the start of the special symbol variation. With this configuration, depending on the timing at which the special symbol variation is interrupted, it is possible to provide a case where the time saving number is updated (subtracted) or not based on the special symbol variation after restarting. Specifically, if the special symbol variation is interrupted 2 seconds after the special symbol variation is started, the time saving number update process is executed 3 seconds after the special symbol variation is restarted. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation is interrupted 10 seconds after the special symbol variation is started, the time saving number update process will not be executed after the special symbol variation is restarted. Therefore, even if the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted immediately after the special symbol fluctuation has started, that is, when the remaining fluctuation time is long, a disadvantageous situation may occur for the player. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player more interested in the game after restarting (the game in the time saving state). In addition, if it is configured to update (subtract) the number of time reductions during the period when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fluctuation pattern of the selected special symbol (fluctuation time, jackpot lottery result, stop type) ), the timing of updating (subtracting) the number of time reductions may be configured to be different. By configuring in this way, the special symbol variation is advantageous to the player (the number of time saving times is not updated due to the special symbol variation after restarting. Alternatively, the time saving state set at the time of restarting can be continued for a long period of time). Since the interruption timing can be made difficult for the player to understand, the player can play the game while predicting the content of the game to be executed later, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in each of the embodiments described above, when the length of the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed satisfies a predetermined condition, an effect is executed to notify the player of this fact. There is. Specifically, if the remaining period of the special symbol variation is longer than a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), or the remaining period of the special symbol variation currently being executed is longer than the variation time of the next special symbol variation. It is configured so that a lucky time effect can be executed when the time is long. With this configuration, if a V winning game is executed during the lucky time, the next V rush period can be lengthened, so that the player can be motivated to play the game. Can be done.

In addition, when determining the length of the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation being executed, a method (absolute determination) of determining whether the remaining period is longer than a predetermined length (for example, 30 seconds) and a method (relative discrimination) for determining whether the variation time is longer than the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed next. Thereby, the player can grasp the timing to advantageously interrupt the special symbol fluctuation.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, it is configured to be able to execute a performance that can notify the player of the remaining period of the special symbol variation that is being executed, but the interruption of the special symbol variation that is advantageous to the player It is sufficient that the timing of the performance can be predicted by the player, and the performance may be executed using conditions other than the length of the remaining period of the special symbol fluctuation. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 uses a configuration in which the process of updating the number of times of special symbol fluctuations is executed while the special symbol is changing, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute an effect indicating that the process of updating the number of times of time-savings has been executed. It's okay.

In each of the embodiments described above, when a specific winning game (accessory winning game, small winning game, jackpot game) is executed during the execution of the special symbol variation, the special symbol variation in progress is interrupted or discarded. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted or discarded when a condition other than a winning game is satisfied.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a general winning device 640 is provided that makes it easier for a ball to win when a normal symbol is won in a lottery and a game with a general symbol is executed. When the ball passes (enters) a specific area (special electric operation opening 643, special electric operation opening 1643, second ball entry opening 1645), a game that is advantageous to the player (a game with a winning object, a small winning game), i.e. , and is configured to be able to execute a game in which a jackpot game may be executed depending on the game result. Furthermore, the general electricity winning device 640 is configured to be able to set a gaming state (time saving state) in which the winning ball easily passes through the above-mentioned specific area and a gaming state (normal state) in which it is difficult to pass through.

With this configuration, even if a ball enters the general winning machine 640 during a general winning game executed during the normal state, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering a specific area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively advantageous games from being provided to players who are playing games in the normal state.

In addition, in order to prevent the ball from entering a specific area during the normal state, a special system is installed to prevent the ball from entering the general prize winning device 640 due to the general winning game executed during the normal state. Since there is no need to provide the configuration on the game board 13, the degree of freedom in designing the game board 13 can be increased. In each of the above-described embodiments, among the winning balls in the general purpose winning device 640, the ball that does not pass through (enter the ball) a specific area is configured to enter the out hole, and the player is informed However, this is not limited to the first benefit (prize ball) that is awarded when the ball passes (enters) a specific area (providing a game that can be an opportunity for a jackpot game). ) may be configured to provide a second benefit (prize ball) different from the second benefit (prize ball).

With this configuration, it is possible to vary the type of benefits given to the player depending on the winning ball in the general winning device 640 according to the set gaming state, so it is possible to provide surprises to the player. It is possible to provide games with a sense of sexiness.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, a game state (time saving state) in which the winning ball easily passes through the above-mentioned specific area and a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for the winning ball to pass through the above-mentioned specific area are set. A first specific area for executing an accessory winning game in which an opportunity to execute a jackpot game is likely to be established is set as a specific area into which a winning ball enters the general power winning device 640 during the time saving state. (second special electric operation opening 1643), and a second specific area (special electric operation opening 643) for executing a game with an accessory that is less likely to trigger a jackpot game than in the first specific area. A switching means (third movable valve 1642) for switching is provided.

With this configuration, the rate at which a winning ball passes through a specific area (ease of passing) in the general electricity winning device 640 is varied depending on the set game state, and the winning ball passes through the specific area easily. In the state where the gaming state (time saving state) is set, the winning ball of the general electricity winning device 640 is placed in either a first specific area that is advantageous to the player or a second specific area that is more disadvantageous than the first specific area. can be passed through. Therefore, even in a state in which it is determined that the first benefit will be awarded to the player by the winning ball in the general electricity winning device 640 (a state in which it is likely to be awarded), the ball enters (passes through) any specific area. ) can create interest in what is being done. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player interested until the end in the game with common symbols that is executed during the time saving state.

In addition, in the second embodiment described above, the ease with which a ball enters the V winning opening 165 in the accessory winning game to be executed is determined depending on the type of the specific area (special electric operation opening) into which the ball enters. It's different. That is, the execution probability of the V jackpot game executed via the accessory winning game is different, but it is not limited to this, and for example, the V jackpot game executed when a ball enters the V winning hole 165. The contents (the number of rounds, the game state (time saving number) set after the end of the jackpot game) may be configured to differ depending on the type of the specific area (special electric operation opening) into which the ball enters.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments described above, when a ball enters the special electric actuating port 643, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (the variation time subtraction process is interrupted). However, as in the third embodiment described above, the special symbol variation that is being executed is discarded (the special symbol variation is forcibly discarded) according to the conditions that are satisfied when the ball enters the special electric activation port 643. It may be configured such that the time-saving state is terminated after the data is discarded (stopped when it misses) or discarded.

Furthermore, as in the fourth embodiment described above, for the pachinko machine 10 configured to execute multiple types of special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) in duplicate. , the technical idea of the second embodiment described above may be applied. In the fourth embodiment described above, the second ball entry port 1645 is provided in the general power winning device 640, which triggers the execution of the second special symbol lottery, and when a ball enters the general power winning device 640 during the normal state. Although the configuration is such that the winning ball enters the second ball entry port 1645 more easily when the ball enters the winning device 640 during the time saving state than when the winning ball enters the second ball entry opening 1645. In addition, a right first ball entry hole is provided in the general power winning device 640, which triggers the lottery of the first special symbol, and the ball that enters the general power winning device 640 during the time saving state enters the second ball entrance 1645 or A switching means may be provided so that the ball enters either of the right first ball entry ports. In this case, the lottery is more advantageous to the player when the ball enters the second ball entry port 1645 than the right first ball entry port, which triggers the lottery of the first special symbol that can be executed even during the normal state. It is best to configure it so that it is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to enjoy the results of the normal game winning game executed during the time saving state until the end. In addition, when using the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments in which the number of drawings (number of fluctuations) of the first special symbol is defined as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of drawings (variation number) of the first special symbol during the time saving state is used. ) is not executed. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable that the operation of the switching means provided in the general electricity winning device 640 is configured to be variable based on the execution status of the first special symbol lottery and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, for example. , When the time saving state is set and the first special symbol lottery is not executed, or when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small (for example, 1), the general prize winning is It is preferable to configure the switching means to control the operation so that the winning ball in the device 640 can easily enter the first right ball entrance. With this configuration, the first special symbol lottery can be executed more reliably during the time saving state.

Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, the operation of each movable valve provided in the general winning device 640 is configured to be executed upon the start of the general winning game, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the execution may be configured to be executed based on the timing at which the normal symbol indicating the winning of the common symbol is stopped and displayed, or the timing at which the stop display period has elapsed, or the execution may be executed based on the timing when the normal symbol indicating the winning of the common symbol is started, or it may be executed at a predetermined time after the winning of the common symbol is started. It may be configured to be executed when a period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, or it may be executed at any timing as long as it operates according to predetermined rules.

In each of the embodiments described above, when the time saving state is set, the specific game (accessories winning game The pachinko machine 10 has been described which has a gameplay of aiming for a jackpot game (V jackpot game) via a small jackpot game (or a small jackpot game).

In the pachinko machine 10 having such a gaming property, the longer the variation time of the special symbol during the time saving state, the longer the period in which the time saving state is set (time period), and the specific time period during the time period. It was possible to increase the number of times the game was played.

Furthermore, when a specific game is executed, the special symbol variation being executed is interrupted (the process for subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation is interrupted), and the interrupted special symbol The fluctuation (processing for subtracting the fluctuation time of special symbol fluctuation) is performed after the end of a specific game or after the end of a jackpot game (V jackpot game), that is, when the conditions that allow a new special symbol fluctuation to be executed are established. It is configured so that it can be restarted.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the length of the time period varies depending on the variation time of the special symbol variation and the interruption period due to a specific game, so the player is informed of the special symbol variation as much as possible. It was possible to make the player play the game with a desire to have the player select a long variable time, and to play a number of specific games.

However, for example, during a game period for executing a specific game (during a period in which the normal symbols change or during a game where a ball hits the normal symbol, it is difficult to enter the ball into the normal winning device 640 (difficult to win)) The closed period ()) of the electric accessory 640a is a period during which a specific game cannot be executed and the variation time of special symbol variations is subtracted, so it is a gaming period () during which a specific game can be executed. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a during the regular symbol winning game in which the ball can be placed in the electric accessory 640a, that is, the period during which the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is subtracted, This is a disadvantageous period that is more disadvantageous to the player than the period in which the player can execute the game.

In addition, in a specific game where the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted, when the number of winning balls in the variable ball entering means (V winning device 65) that is released during the specific game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 balls), Either the end condition that is satisfied (winning end condition), or the end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.6 seconds) has elapsed after the accessory winning game started (time end condition). The system is configured to end when one of the end conditions is met, and depending on the content of the game by the player (whether or not the ball is fired) during the game to win the accessory, the end condition is met. It was the end of the guessing game.

On the other hand, in each of the embodiments described above, when the state in which a specific game is being executed overlaps with the above-mentioned disadvantageous period, it is possible to change the presentation mode of the specific game based on the length of the disadvantageous period. It consists of This makes it possible for the player to select the content of the game (termination conditions to be met) during the specific game, and thus allows the player to play the game with enthusiasm.

In each of the embodiments described above, as shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 88, or FIG. 89, a special electric operation opening 643 is provided in the general electric winning device 640, which becomes an opportunity to interrupt the special symbol variation in progress. Also, in the fourth embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 114, a second ball entry hole 1645 is provided in the general purpose winning device 640, which becomes an opportunity to interrupt the special symbol variation in progress. In a game machine with such a configuration, the period (descent period of the ball) until the winning ball enters the special electric actuation port or the second ball entry hole in the general electric winning device 640 is made random (delayed). It is better to provide a delay means.

That is, in each of the embodiments described above, the period until the special symbol fluctuation ends multiple times is configured to be a short time period, and when a jackpot game is executed, a new time saving state (number of time saving times) is set. In this case, the remaining period of the suspended special symbol variation is added without subtracting the number of time reductions. Therefore, rather than when the remaining time shortening number remains and the remaining period of the special symbol variation being executed is short, it is better to use the special symbol variation after that when the remaining time number has decreased and the special symbol variation being executed. The configuration is such that it may be more advantageous for the player to execute the jackpot game when the remaining period of the figure fluctuation is long (or to execute the jackpot game after the time period is shortened).

This may be advantageous to the player by providing a delay means in the ordinary electric winning device 640 and delaying the timing at which the ball enters the special electric operating opening or the second ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to enjoy watching at what timing the winning ball in the ordinary electric winning device 640 enters the special electric operating opening or the second ball entry opening. In addition, it is possible to prevent a game in which a ball enters the special electric operation opening or the second ball entrance opening to be played intentionally in a state where the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is long.

In this case, a croon member on which the balls can roll is provided as the delay means, so that when a plurality of balls flow into the croon member, the balls easily flow into the passage hole provided at the center of the croon member. It may also be configured such that the ball passing through the passage port flows into the special electric operation port or the second ball entrance port. With this configuration, even though the delay means is provided, the ball can be sent to the special electric operation opening or the second ball entrance depending on the game content (the degree of winning of the ball to the ordinary electric winning device 640) during the ordinary winning game. It is possible to control the timing of the ball's entry. Therefore, the player can play the game with enthusiasm so that the ball enters the special electric operation opening or the second ball entry opening at an arbitrary timing.

In addition, when the ball flows into the delay means (croon member), a suggestive effect is executed to suggest to the player a period that is advantageous to the player (a period in which the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation is long), and when the ball is A result notification means may be provided to notify whether the timing at which the ball enters the special electric operation opening or the second ball entrance is an advantageous timing for the player (a period in which the remaining period of special symbol fluctuation is long). Further, in the above-mentioned example, an example was explained in which a Kroon member was used as the delay means, but any device that can vary the falling period of the ball entering the general electric power winning device 640 may be used. A plurality of channels are provided with different periods (flowing periods) from the time the ball enters the winning device 640 until the ball enters the special electric operation port or the second ball entry port, and the ball enters any of the plurality of channels. A sorting means for sorting the balls may be provided.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 192. Like the pachinko machine 10 used in the fourth embodiment described above, the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 lottery) and the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 lottery) are executed in duplicate. By making it possible (so-called simultaneous variation specification) and varying the length of the variation time of the first special symbol and the length of the variation time of the second special symbol selected according to the set gaming state, Among the two types of special symbol drawings that can be executed overlappingly, there is one in which the special symbol type in which the lottery is more likely to be executed is varied depending on the game state. Specifically, when one gaming state (for example, normal state) is set, a short variation time (for example, 5 seconds to 60 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol. It is configured so that a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is selected as the symbol variation time, and when a specific gaming state (for example, potential state) different from the normal state is set, the first special The structure is configured such that a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is selected as the symbol variation time, and a short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is selected as the second special symbol variation time. There is a configuration in which the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed, and the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed during the probability state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration is configured to win a small win at a high probability (for example, about 1/1) in the second special symbol lottery, and the small win is executed based on the small win winning. There is a game state in which a potential state in which games are frequently executed is a game state advantageous to the player.

In the gaming machine described above, a game that frequently generates small winning games (advantageous game) can only be executed in a specific gaming state (potential state), so the player is made to expect that the gaming state will change. It was possible to play games while playing the game. However, since the configuration is such that a fixed variation time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the probability state, the small winning game during the probability state is It is not possible to make a large difference in the execution frequency.In other words, in the gaming machine described above, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the small win is almost always won, so the small win game is executed only depending on the execution frequency of the second special symbol lottery. Since the frequency is different, there is a risk that the game during the potential state may become monotonous.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, the range that can be selected as the variation time of the second special symbol is varied according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Specifically, it is configured such that the smaller the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the easier it is to select a short variation time as the variation time of the second special symbol variation.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, by executing the game (right-handed game) in the potential state, the starting winning of the first special symbol (suspended memory) and the starting winning of the second special symbol are both possible. Depending on the type of small win that is set when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation in progress may be interrupted, or it may be forcibly stopped (discarded) if the lottery result indicates a loss. It is configured so that it can be done. And, by forcibly stopping the first special symbol variation in progress, it is possible to actively reduce the number of reserved first special symbols. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of stored first special symbols on hold based on the lottery result of the second special symbol mainly executed during the potential state.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. , the configuration of the RAM 203 has been partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed. , and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fourth embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming state in the seventh embodiment will be briefly explained. In the seventh embodiment, the gaming states include a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and a variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols). It is configured to be able to set a certain state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and a detailed explanation will be given later, but the certain state is configured as the most advantageous gaming state for the player. However, the normal state is configured as the gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player. Further, the variable probability state is configured as a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state. In the following explanation, the gaming states may be indicated using the names of the performance modes executed during each gaming state. For example, the normal state is referred to as the normal mode, the variable probability state is referred to as the variable probability mode, and the potential state is referred to as the rush mode. In some cases.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 157, the board structure of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment is different from the board structure of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment (and first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 2). The V winning device 65 and the electric accessory 640 are deleted, and a right variable winning device 1650, a right electric accessory 164, and a right second ball entrance 645 are provided instead. Further, the difference is that the variable winning device 650 and the through gate 67 are arranged in different positions. The other configurations are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 157, in the seventh embodiment, an area to the left of the variable display unit 80 (left side area) and an area to the right (right side area) of the variable display unit 80 in the game area formed on the game board 13, respectively. A prize opening (ball entrance) is provided that allows a ball to enter a prize (ball entry). Therefore, unlike the board configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above, there are two types of games: a game in which the ball is sent down to the left area of the player (a left-handed game), and a game in which the ball is made to go down in the right area (a right-handed game). The game is configured so that it can be executed.

Although detailed explanation will be given later, in the seventh embodiment, the player is configured to perform different games depending on the set gaming state, and when the normal state is set, A left-handed game is executed in order to cause the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and when a variable probability state is set, a right-handed game is executed in order to cause the ball to enter the right electric accessory 164. , when the potential state is set, a right-handed game is executed in order to cause the ball to enter the second right ball entrance 645. Further, even when a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) is executed, the right-handed game is configured to be executed.

In other words, when a game advantageous to the player is to be executed, the player is configured to play a right-handed game. Therefore, since it is possible for the player to understand whether the current situation is advantageous or not based on the gaming method, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game. Although the details will be described later, during the game states (probability change state, potential probability state, and various winning states) in which the right-handed game is executed, a right-handed game is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The configuration is such that a guidance display mode for executing the process is displayed. This makes it possible to provide games that are easier for players to understand.

As shown in FIG. 157, the first ball entry port 64 is disposed below the variable display unit 80, and the ball that flows down the left side area due to a left-handed game enters the first ball entry port 64. The rate and the rate at which the ball that flows down the right side area in a right-handed game enters the first ball entry port 64 is made to vary depending on the nails planted on the board surface of the game board 13 and various structures. Specifically, it is configured such that one ball out of approximately 15 balls flowing down the left side area in a left-handed game enters the first ball entrance 64, and in a right-handed game, the right side area is The configuration is such that one ball out of about 250 balls that has flown down enters the first ball entry port 64. Therefore, in the normal state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, playing a left-handed game is the most advantageous gaming method for the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 157, in the right area of the game board 13 (the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80), there is a right variable winning device 1650 and a through gate 67 provided downstream of the right variable winning device 1650. , a right electric accessory 164 having a first right ball entrance 164r provided downstream of the through gate 67, and an opening/closing door 164r1 that can open and close the top surface of the first right ball entrance 164r. , when the opening/closing door 164r1 is closed, the ball that flows down (passes) the top surface of the door 164r1 can enter the second right ball entry port 645, and the ball does not enter any of the above-mentioned ball entry ports. A variable prize winning device 650 is provided in the downstream region where the ball that has flown down the right region reaches.

As shown in FIG. 157, only game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 with the right electric accessory 164 closed (opening/closing door 164r1 closed) enter the second right ball entrance 645. The falling path of the game ball is set so that it can be reached. In other words, even if a right-handed game is performed in a high probability state (variable probability state) with normal symbols in which the right electric accessory 164 is likely to be in an open state, almost all the game balls that have passed through the through gate 67 will enter the right first ball. Since the ball enters the ball opening 164r, the game ball cannot enter the right second ball entry opening 645. With this configuration, even in a variable probability state (variable probability mode), it is possible to proceed with the game in a right-handed game.

In the seventh embodiment, a variable member (opening/closing door) 1650a is configured to be variable so that almost all balls flowing down the right side area in a right-handed game can win a prize in the right variable winning device 1650 in an open state. There is. This right variable winning device 1650 is a variable winning device (variable ball entry means) that is opened in a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery.

When the right variable winning device 1650 is closed (the small winning game is not being executed), about 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right area are transferred to the area where the through gate 67 is arranged (the right variable winning game is not being executed). Of the left and right regions defined by the nails planted on the left side of the device 1650, the water flows down the right region (first path), and the remaining approximately 1/2 flows down the left region (second path). flows down. The ball flowing down this left region (second path) flows down toward the variable prize winning device 650 without entering the right electric accessory 164 and the right second ball entrance 1645.

On the other hand, all of the balls that have flown down the right area (first path) where the through gate 67 is arranged flow down toward the upstream side of the right electric accessory 164 (upstream end side of the opening/closing door 164r1). , flows down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 from the upstream side to the downstream side. Approximately 2/3 of the balls ejected from the upper surface of the right electric accessory 164 enter the right second ball entrance 645, and the remaining approximately 1/3 enter the right electric accessory 164 and the right second ball entrance 645. It passes through the gap formed between the ball entry hole 645 and flows down toward the variable prize winning device 650.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of routes are provided for the ball launched to the right side area in a right-handed game to reach the variable winning device 650, and each route is set so that the period required for the ball to flow down is different. A route has been formed. Specifically, the configuration is such that the falling period of the ball in the right area (first path) is about 2 seconds, and the falling period of the ball in the left area (second path) is about 1 second. With this configuration, balls fired at different timings (balls fired in right-handed games), specifically, multiple balls fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, can be varied at the same timing. It becomes possible to reach the winning device 650. Therefore, during the period when the variable winning device 650 is in the open state (during jackpot games), it is possible to easily enter a plurality of balls into the variable winning device 650 at the same time. You can create interest in the behavior of the ball.

The right electric accessory 164 is opened when a winning is won in a normal symbol lottery (common symbol lottery) where the lottery condition can be met when a ball passes through the through gate 67 (when a common symbol game is executed). This is a variable ball entry means that is operated. Here, the contents of the normal symbol lottery (common symbol lottery) and the common symbol winning game in the seventh embodiment will be briefly explained.

In the seventh embodiment, even if the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball can enter the right electric accessory 164 by a right-handed game, although the probability is low. For example, when playing a right-handed game during the normal state, the configuration is such that one ball out of approximately 50 balls can win the right electric accessory 164. This rate of ball entry is set lower than the rate of balls that enter the first ball entry port 64 (ratio of about 1 in 20 balls) when playing a left-handed game in the normal state. The ball that enters the right electric accessory 164 is configured to always enter the right first ball entrance 164r. Then, when the ball enters the right electric accessory 164, the lottery right for the first special symbol is obtained (the lottery conditions are met), in the same way as when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. ).

Further, when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, prize balls (four balls) are given in addition to the right to draw the first special symbol as a privilege for entering the ball. On the other hand, when a ball enters the right electric accessory 164, a prize ball (one) is given in addition to the right to draw the first special symbol as a privilege for entering the ball. In other words, when the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the gaming state, the lottery of the first special symbol is better when a left-handed game is executed than when a right-handed game is executed. It is configured so that it is easy to acquire the right, and the number of prize balls awarded when a ball enters the ball entry hole in which the ball is entered in order to obtain the lottery right for the first special symbol is increased. ing. Therefore, during the normal state, left-handed games are more advantageous to the player than right-handed games.

Furthermore, if a right-handed game is played during the normal state, approximately 1/3 of the balls flowing down the right side area will enter the right second ball entrance 645. When a ball enters the second right ball entrance 645, a lottery right for executing a lottery of the second special symbol is granted, and one prize ball is awarded. Although detailed explanation will be given later, in the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, a long variation time (10 minutes) is set as the variation time. Further, in this embodiment, the lottery right of the second special symbol is configured not to be stored (suspended storage). Therefore, even if a right-handed game is performed during the normal state, the second special symbol lottery will not be performed smoothly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157, when a jackpot game is executed, a right-handed game is executed and a game is executed in which the ball enters the variable winning device 650. During the jackpot game, the normal state of the normal symbol is set, so during the jackpot game, a ball enters the right first ball entrance 164r in the right electric accessory 164, and the jackpot game ends. Afterwards, the number of reserved memory (number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol becomes the upper limit value.

Thereby, when the potential state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the game is started with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being at the upper limit. In this embodiment, when the potential state is set, short fluctuations (0.5 seconds, 10 seconds) are selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and long fluctuations (10 minutes) are selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. ) is configured so that it is selected. The second special symbol lottery is configured so that a game (small win RUSH) in which a large number of prize balls are won while frequently winning small wins is executed.

Furthermore, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol during the potential state reaches a predetermined number (1 or 2), than when the number is other than the predetermined number (0, 3, 4), It is configured such that a short variation time is easily selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation. In other words, the period in which the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number during the potential state is the period in which the number of small winning games executed per unit time is likely to be the highest, and is an advantageous game period for the player. becomes.

As described above, this embodiment does not have a hold storage function for storing the lottery right of the second special symbol, so it is necessary to continuously execute the right-handed game during the potential state. The variation time of the first special symbol during the potential state is configured to be a long time (10 minutes). Therefore, during the potential state, it is difficult to make the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reach a predetermined number (one or two) as the first special symbol fluctuates over time. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol fluctuation being executed is forcibly stopped (discarded) in some cases where a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Thereby, in the potential state, the player can play a game to reduce the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol while playing a game aiming to win a small winning in the lottery of the second special symbol.

Further, in this embodiment, the advantageous period for the second special symbol lottery (variation) during the potential state is set based on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, and furthermore, the second special symbol lottery is It is configured such that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol can be increased when the game to be executed (right-handed game) is executed. Therefore, when an advantageous period for the second special symbol lottery (variation) is set, it can be made difficult for the player to understand how long the advantageous period will last.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not have a reservation storage function for storing the lottery right of the second special symbol, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined based on the number of reservation memories of the first special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the second special symbol is selected based on the sum of the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol. It may be configured to select the variation time of .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variation time of the first special symbol selected during the potential state is configured such that a long variation time is always selected, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, It may be configured such that a short variation time (for example, 20 seconds) is selected with a probability of about 1/10 as the variation time of the first special symbol variation during the potential state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to include the fluctuation time elapse of the first special symbol in the realistic method of causing the retention memory of the first special symbol to occur during the potential state. Therefore, it is possible to substantially have a plurality of opportunities to reduce the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol during the potential state.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, if the discard condition is satisfied in a part of the case where a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded. However, it is also possible to use a discard condition that can be established regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol, for example, the number of balls that entered the right variable winning device 1650 during the execution of a small winning game. You may set a discard condition that is satisfied based on the fact that the number of winnings exceeds a predetermined winning condition (for example, 11 winnings), or if the number of winnings placed in any of the gaming areas (right side area) of the game board 13 A discard condition that can be established when a ball enters the ball mouth may be set. In this way, by establishing the state of discarding the first special symbol due to various factors, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the advantageous period will be set.

Next, the configuration of the right electric accessory 164 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. FIG. 158(a) is a front perspective view schematically showing the closed state of the right electric accessory 164 (the opening/closing door 164r1 is closed), and FIG. 158(b) is a front perspective view of the right electric accessory 164. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view schematically showing an open state (a state in which the opening/closing door 164r1 is open).

As shown in FIG. 158(a), the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 is provided with convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c provided to prevent the game balls from flowing down. The game ball flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 is prevented from flowing down by each of the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c, and therefore flows down from the left side to the right side in the figure on the opening/closing door 164r1 along the outer periphery of each of the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c. In other words, a meandering flow path is formed on the opening/closing door 164r1 by each of the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c. For this reason, compared to the case where each convex part 164r1a to 164r1c is not provided (that is, the case where the game ball flows down linearly from the left direction to the right direction on the opening/closing door 164r1), the opening/closing door 164r1 The period required for the water to completely flow down the upper surface of the water can be lengthened. Thereby, while one ball is flowing down the top surface of the door 164r1, it is possible to make it easier for a plurality of balls (subsequent balls) to reach the top surface of the door 164r1. Therefore, the period during which the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is flowing down the top surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 can be lengthened, and when a game with a normal figure is executed, the ball can easily enter the right electric accessory 164. can do.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 160, but in this embodiment, when a high probability state (probability variable state) of normal symbols is set as the game state, most of the balls that pass through the through gate 67 are on the right side. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the operation content of the normal symbol winning game, and the path of the ball passing through the through gate 67 are designed so that the ball enters the electric accessory 164. With this configuration, in the variable probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is higher than in the normal state, and by executing the right-handed game, the probability of winning the first special symbol in the lottery is higher than in the normal state. can be made easier to execute. In addition, since it is difficult to draw the second special symbol during the variable probability state, it is possible to prevent a game that is excessively advantageous to the player who is playing the game during the variable probability state. can. In addition, in this embodiment, if a ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during the probability variation state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the variation time (60 seconds) is selected.

With this configuration, when the second special symbol variation is being executed for a long period of time (for example, 10 minutes), the state changes from the probability change state to the potential state, and when the state changes to the probability state, Nevertheless, the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed for a long time is suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as a transition condition for shifting the gaming state from a variable probability state to a potential state, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) executed during the variable probability state is a predetermined number (50 times). A first transition condition is established when the winning number is reached, and a second transition condition is established when a specific small win (small win C) is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state. are doing. In other words, in a state where the second special symbol lottery is difficult to execute, if a specific small win (small win C) is won in the second special symbol lottery (when the second transition condition is met), the probability variable state is difficult to execute. Even if the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (variation) executed during the state has not reached the predetermined number (50 times), the state can be shifted to the potential state.

FIG. 158(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening/closing door 164r1 is opened. As shown in FIG. 158(b), the opening/closing door 164r1 slides from the front side to the rear side in the front view, and enters the inside of the game board 13 through the opening provided in the game board 13. It will be stored. As a result, the first right ball entry port 164r is placed in an open state. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the opening/closing door 164r1 is connected to a solenoid (not shown) that can be switched between an on state and an off state based on instructions from the main controller 110. When a current is applied to the solenoid, the solenoid is turned on and the opening/closing door 164r1 is opened. In other words, the current is configured to flow through the solenoid only when a winning result is won in the normal symbol lottery and a normal symbol winning game is executed. As a result, power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced because no power is required during the period when the opening/closing door 164r1 is in the closed state, which accounts for a large proportion of the period when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. .

When the first ball entry port 164r is opened (when the opening/closing door 164r1 is in an open state), the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can win a prize in the right electric accessory 164. In addition, since the interval in the height direction of the opening for storing the opening/closing door 164r1 is sufficiently low relative to the diameter of the game ball, the top surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 is When the game ball that was flowing down is not stored inside the game board 13 together with the door 164r1 and the door 164r1 slides into the inside of the game board 13, it is located on the top surface of the door 164r1. The ball can be dropped from above the opening/closing door 164r1 toward the first ball entrance 164r.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, by providing three convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1, a configuration is made in which the game ball bypasses the convex portions 164r1a to 164r1c, and the game ball passes through the opening/closing door 164r1. Although the configuration is such that the transit period is long, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the convex parts 164r1a to 164r1c, the material of the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1 may be made of a material with a coefficient of friction higher than that of other parts (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the variable winning device 65, etc.). The ball may be made of a large material (for example, an elastic body), or may be processed to make it difficult for the game ball to roll (for example, the surface may be provided with irregularities).

FIG. 159 is a plan view of the opening/closing door 164r1 viewed from the vertical top side. As shown in FIG. 159, on the upper surface of the door 164r1, passage detection sensors 228a to 228f capable of detecting passage of the ball are embedded in a meandering path on which the ball can (easily) roll. These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged at a distance that exceeds at least the diameter of the game ball from each other in the path formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 164r1. These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are known sensors in which the output is H (high) when a game ball is placed above them, and the output is L (low) when there is nothing obstructing the upward direction. It consists of an optical sensor. In the seventh embodiment, the combination of outputs of these passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is monitored on the audio lamp control device 113 side. The ball passing situation on the opening/closing door 164r1 is calculated by a combination of the outputs of the passing detection sensors 228a to 228f, and the ball passing situation can be notified based on the calculation result.

With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to grasp how close a ball shot in a right-handed game has come to the second right ball entrance 645 during a probability variable state. Therefore, by shifting the execution timing of the right-handed game during the variable probability state based on the content of the ball passing situation notification to be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the variable probability state. In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 159, the passing detection sensors 228a to 228f are provided only on the opening/closing door 164r1, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, if a ball passes through the through gate 67, Passage detection sensors are provided in the area from passing through until reaching the opening/closing door 164r1 and in the area after passing the top surface of the opening/closing door 164r1, and detecting the number of balls reaching the opening/closing door 164r1 and the top surface of the opening/closing door 164r1. The configuration may be such that the number of balls that have passed can be detected.

Next, referring to FIG. 160, a description will be given of a flowing situation when a ball shot in a right-handed game flows down the right side area. FIG. 160(a) schematically shows the falling situation of the ball when the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 in the potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). FIG. 160(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the falling situation of the ball when the small winning game is being executed in the potential state.

In the seventh embodiment, when a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, a ball is input into the second right ball entrance 645 by a right-handed game. The game is configured so that the game of making balls is the most advantageous game for the player. When a right-handed game is executed during the potential state, as shown in FIG. The ball enters the second ball entrance 645.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in the probability state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, which is executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67, is 1/2. In addition, 30 seconds is set as the period (variable time) from when the normal symbol lottery is executed until the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed). In other words, if you play a right-handed game during a game state where a low probability state of normal symbols is set (normal state, potential state, jackpot game state), one out of every two balls will hit the through gate 67. passes, so 1 out of every 4 balls will win on a regular symbol, and a game will be executed on a regular symbol once every 60 seconds.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 158, a meandering ball channel (passing period 1. 3 seconds), by continuously playing the right-handed game, it is possible to have a plurality of balls stay on the opening/closing door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164 in the closed state with a high probability. It consists of

Therefore, even when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to win 1 to 2 balls into the right electric accessory 164 per minute. In addition, since the ball is configured to easily stay on the opening/closing door 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164, even if the playing period of the normal figure game is set to a short period (for example, opened for 0.2 seconds), It is possible to make it easier for the ball to land in the right electric accessory 164 during the normal figure winning game.

In this way, by setting the game period of the normal pattern winning game to be short, if a right-handed game is executed after determining that the normal pattern winning game will be executed based on the stop display mode of the normal pattern, the ball It becomes possible to end the game with a normal figure hit before it reaches the right electric accessory 164. Therefore, it is possible to execute the right-handed game after determining that the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win, and to efficiently suppress the execution of the game in which the ball enters the right electric accessory 164.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 160(b), in the seventh embodiment, a right variable prize winning device (second attacker) that is opened during a small winning game is provided above (upstream) than the through gate 67. It is provided. Therefore, even if the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, as long as the second special symbol lottery can be executed smoothly (potential state), the small winning game will be executed. It is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the through gate 67 and the right electric accessory 164.

With this configuration, even when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is more difficult to make the ball land in the right electric accessory 164 in the probability state than in the normal state or during a jackpot game. can do. Therefore, in a right-handed game executed during a jackpot game, by placing a ball in the right electric accessory 164, it is possible to obtain the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1) up to the upper limit. However, it is possible to prevent the number of special drawing 1 reserved balls from increasing excessively due to the right-handed game executed during the potential state.

<About the production content in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 161 to 165, characteristic presentation contents among the various presentation contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be explained. Specifically, the flow of the performance from the time when the variable probability state is set as the gaming state until the probability state is set, and the flow of the performance executed during the probability state will be explained.

First, with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162, the flow of performance from the time when the variable probability state is set as the gaming state until the probability state is set will be explained. In this embodiment, a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game in a part of the case where a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery. There is. Then, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a state where the variable probability state is set, the gaming state is configured to shift from the variable probability state to the potential state. Specifically, as the variable probability state, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot is won, and the high probability state of the normal symbol continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times. In other words, if the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning a jackpot after the variable probability state is set, the gaming state is configured to shift from the variable probability state to the probability state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a variable probability state is set, an effect is performed to suggest a period until a probability state that is most advantageous to the player is set. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the conditions until the potential state is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 161(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the variable probability state (variable probability mode) is set. 161(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the transition condition to the potential state is satisfied during the probability change mode. .

As described above, the seventh embodiment is configured to directly shift to the most advantageous potential mode (potential state) by elapse (adding) the number of time reductions in the variable probability state. Therefore, in the variable probability state (variable probability mode), a performance aiming at the probability state is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 161(a), an effect is performed in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit climbs up a rocky mountain. In addition, in the display area HR1 formed above the character 811 climbing the rocky mountain, the words "Aim for the top!!" are displayed, and in the display area HR2 formed on the right side of the character 811, the fixed variable mode is displayed. Display content is displayed that suggests the remaining number of fluctuations (number of drawings) until the time saving number ends (the time saving number passes a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times)). In the example of FIG. 161(a), a case is illustrated in which the words "50 m remaining" are displayed in the display area HR2. The remaining meter display to the top is subtracted by 1m each time the variable display (variable display of the third symbol) is executed, so the remaining meter (distance) to the top is displayed to the player. ) is the remaining number of fluctuations until shifting to the definite mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the meter display displayed in the display area HR2 mentioned above is varied (subtracted) every time the variable display of the third symbol is executed, and the meter display after the variation (subtraction) is When the display mode becomes a specific transition display mode (for example, "0 meters remaining"), the gaming state is configured to shift from the variable probability state to the probability state, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. , is configured so that it is added every time the variable display of the third symbol is executed, and configured so that the probability mode is set when the display mode (numeric value) of the meter display is added up to a specific value. You may do so. In addition, it is not necessarily necessary to change the display mode of the meter display every time the variable display of the third symbol is executed; for example, when the variable display of the third symbol is executed multiple times, the display mode of the meter display may change. It may be configured to be variable. With this configuration, the timing at which the display mode of the meter display changes can be made different from the variable display timing of the third symbol. It is possible to provide a surprising effect by executing an effect in which the display mode (numeric value) of the meter display is greatly reduced at once while making the user aware of the approximate period until it is set.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the meter display displayed in the display area HR2 indicates that the period until the potential mode is set is short (that the timing when the transition condition is satisfied is approaching). In order to inform the player, the system is configured to only perform an effect that subtracts the display mode (numeric value) of the meter display, but when a potential state is set, a specific transition display mode (for example, For example, while the variable probability state is set, an effect may be performed to temporarily increase the display mode (numeric value) of the meter display. This makes it difficult for the player to predict when the probable state will be set, so that the player can play the game while always expecting the probable state to be set.

In this case, there are at least multiple transition conditions as transition conditions for transitioning from a variable probability state to a potential state, specifically, the type of jackpot that triggered the setting of a variable probability state, and the time when the jackpot was won. Depending on the gaming state, the time saving end conditions for ending the time saving state include a first transition condition that is easy to satisfy (for example, the number of time savings 20 times), and a second transition condition that is more difficult to satisfy than the first transition condition ( For example, the display is configured to set one of the time saving end conditions (for example, the number of time saving times 50 times), and when a variable probability state is set, a display indicating the period until the first transition condition that is likely to be satisfied is satisfied. A mode (for example, "20 meters remaining") is configured to be displayed in the display area HR2, and if the actually set time saving end condition is the first transition condition, the display mode of the meter display is directly subtracted. is executed, and if the actually set time saving end condition is the second transition condition, the display mode of the meter display is increased based on the number of remaining time reduction times, and the specified transition condition is set at the timing when the second transition condition is met. The configuration may be such that the transition display mode is displayed. By configuring in this way, when a variable probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what the time-saving termination condition is set for the current variable probability state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a plurality of time-saving termination conditions are set in a variable probability state that is set after execution of a specific jackpot game. More specifically, the first time saving end condition is satisfied when the number of executions of the special symbol variation (lottery) executed during the variable probability state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), and A second time-saving end condition is set that is satisfied when the result of the special symbol variation (lottery) is a specific result (for example, small winning C winning). The display area HR2 is configured to display a meter display based on the first time-saving end condition, which allows the timing at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied to be calculated in advance. In other words, during the probability change state, the meter display is subtracted every time a special symbol change is executed, and when the meter display becomes a specific transition display mode (for example, "0 meters remaining"), the probability state is set. A performance is performed to notify that the event will be performed. On the other hand, if the second time saving end condition is satisfied before the first time saving end condition described above is satisfied (before the display mode of the meter display changes to a specific transition display mode), then the meter display is displayed. As a shortening effect in which the mode (number) rapidly decreases, a mode in which the character 811 climbs a mountain vigorously is followed by a mode in which the meter display changes to a specific transition display mode (for example, "0 meters remaining").

In this way, by configuring the meter display displayed in the display area HR2 to be variable in various ways, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at what timing the transition to the probable state occurs. To allow a player who is playing a game to play the game while always expecting the transition to a definite state. Furthermore, regardless of which of the time-saving termination conditions is met, the player can be notified of the transition to the potential state by displaying a specific transition display format as the display format of the meter display. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand presentation to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161(b), the content of the effect executed when the time-saving termination condition is satisfied during the variable probability state will be explained. FIG. 162(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the time saving number of times has elapsed (the time saving end condition has been satisfied) in the variable probability mode (variable probability state). As shown in FIG. 162(a), when the time-saving end condition (for example, special symbol variation a predetermined number of times) is satisfied, an effect in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain is executed, and the display area HR1 is The words "We've reached the top!!" will be displayed. Furthermore, the words "0 m remaining" are displayed in the display area HR2. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that the game has entered the potential state (potential mode).

Here, in this embodiment, by executing the right-handed game when the potential state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is more effective than when a game state other than the potential state is set. The second special symbol lottery is configured to have a high probability of winning a small hit (higher probability than the first special symbol lottery). Then, by frequently executing the second special symbol lottery, small winning games are executed frequently, and the player is configured to execute a game in which a large number of benefits (prize balls) can be obtained. . Hereinafter, a game in which a small winning game is frequently executed by a second special symbol lottery in a probability state will be referred to as "RUSH", and a performance executed during the RUSH game will be referred to as a "RUSH performance" for explanation.

Figure 162(a) shows the process from transitioning to the potential state (potential mode) until it becomes possible to actually win the prize ball (until winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode in an intermediate state (preparation state). As shown in FIG. 162(a), in the preparation state, the words "Right hit" are displayed in the small area Dm3, and the message "Start RUSH by right hit!!" is displayed in the display area HR1. is displayed. In addition, the words "RUSH preparation in progress" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that by playing the right-handed game, the player enters a RUSH state in which he can win prize balls.

In other words, in this embodiment, the probability state is set when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the probability variable state, but the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the probability state is set. There may be cases where it is not possible to do so. Specifically, when the second special symbol variation is executed during the probability variation state, and the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first special symbol variation while the second special symbol variation is being executed. In this case, the gaming state changes from the probability variation state to the probability state while the second special symbol variation is being executed. In this case, a situation occurs in which the second special symbol variation in the probability state is not executed until the second special symbol variation in progress (the second special symbol variation that started during the probability variation state) is stopped and displayed. .

In this way, if there is a predetermined period during which the second special symbol lottery cannot be newly executed after the potential state is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 162(a) (RUSH preparation screen), it is possible to notify the player that a RUSH game will be executed later, so it is possible to notify the player that a RUSH game will be executed later. It is possible to prevent players from feeling distrustful.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, at the timing when the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to the probability state, the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation being executed is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds or more). The configuration is such that the RUSH preparation period display shown in FIG. 162(a) is executed when If the length of the period until the game execution condition is satisfied is a predetermined period, it may be configured to notify that an advantageous game will be executed later. In the pachinko machine 10, the game method that the player is forced to execute (for example, a left-handed game) and the game method that the player is forced to execute during an advantageous game (a potential state) (for example, a right-handed game) are different. It is preferable to configure the RUSH preparation display shown in FIG. 162(a) to be executed using the period from when the potential state is set until the second special symbol variation is actually executed by the right-handed game. .

Furthermore, for example, in an unfavorable gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, it is easier to win a lottery with normal symbols than in an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the length of the selected variation time is longer. This is a pachinko machine 10 that is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is easily executed during a regular symbol winning game that is executed when a winning symbol is won in the regular symbol lottery. If so, at the time when the advantageous gaming state is set, the RUSH preparation period display shown in FIG. 162(a) is executed during the period until the normal symbol fluctuation executed during the disadvantageous gaming state is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, on the display screen shown in FIG. 162(a), the display mode of "right-hand hit" displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 may be hidden (displayed in a way that makes it difficult to see), or the "preparation" display mode displayed in the display area HR1 may be hidden. It would be a good idea to display the message "Please wait for a while." In other words, the player is informed that although the probability state is set, the second special symbol lottery cannot be executed (it is difficult to execute) even if a right-handed game is executed. It is better to display the RUSH preparation period as shown below. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the RUSH game from being executed even though the right-handed game has been executed, which would give the player a sense of distrust.

Then, when the second special symbol variation (lottery) is executed during the potential state, the display screen shown in FIG. 162(b) is displayed and the RUSH effect is executed. FIG. 162(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the RUSH game is executed. As shown in FIG. 162(b), when the ball enters the right second ball entry port 645 during the potential state and the second special symbol variation in which a small hit is won is executed, the display area HR1 The characters "RUSH start" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and the characters "RUSH enters!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Furthermore, an icon resembling a treasure box (treasure box 812) is displayed in the main display area Dm. Thereby, during the RUSH game, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a performance (RUSH performance) using an icon imitating a treasure box (treasure box 812) will be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the display contents of the RUSH effect executed during the RUSH game in the seventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 163 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the RUSH effect. As shown in FIG. 163, when the RUSH effect is executed, the effect in which the character 811 opens the treasure box 812 is executed. Then, an effect is executed in which a lottery result display mode showing the lottery result of the current second special symbol lottery is displayed from inside the opened treasure box 812. As for the lottery result display format, for example, if the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a small win, a display format that imitates a "V" is displayed, and if it is a jackpot, a display format that imitates the letter "win" is displayed. If the result is an error, a display pattern imitating a "cross" mark is displayed. In this way, the lottery result of the second special symbol can be displayed by simply executing the effect of opening the treasure box 812 and the effect of displaying the contents of the treasure box 812 for the constantly displayed treasure box 812. , the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be shorter than the case where the effect of displaying the treasure box 812, the effect of opening the treasure box 812, and the effect of displaying the contents of the treasure box 812 are executed. Also, since the number of performances to be executed can be reduced, it is possible to perform performances that are easy for players to understand.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, a description will be given of the effect executed during the super RUSH game that is more advantageous to the player than during other RUSH games. In this embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol executed during the potential state is configured to vary based on the number of reserved special symbols (the number of reserved memory of the first special symbol). Specifically, in the second special symbol variation that is executed when the number of special symbols on hold is a specific number (for example, 1), the second special symbol variation that is executed when the number of special symbols on hold is other than the specific number. 2. It is configured so that a short variation time is more likely to be selected than a special symbol variation. As described above, while the probability state is set, an effect is executed in which a bonus (prize ball) is given to the player by frequently playing a small winning game based on the small winning winning of the second special symbol lottery. .

Therefore, the shorter the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation during the potential state, the larger the proportion of the small winning game period in the unit period can be, which allows the player to have a more playful gaming state. can. Hereinafter, during the RUSH game, the RUSH game during a period in which the number of special symbols reserved becomes a specific number and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation becomes short will be referred to as a super RUSH game and will be explained.

First, the contents of the effect executed when the RUSH game is switched to the super RUSH game will be explained. FIG. 164(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance contents executed in a state where the number of reserved special symbols is likely to be subtracted during the RUSH game. In this embodiment, when a specific small win (for example, small win B) is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the potential state, the first special symbol variation being executed is forcibly removed. It is configured to stop and display at . Further, the configuration is such that a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is likely to be selected for the first special symbol variation executed during the potential state. Further, the game is configured such that a reserved ball of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved ball) can be acquired by a right-handed game executed during the potential state. In other words, while executing the RUSH game during the potential state, it is configured such that it becomes difficult to reduce the number of special figure 1 reserved balls based on the elapse of a varying time.

Therefore, in order to reduce the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls until the conditions for executing the super RUSH game are satisfied, it is necessary to win a specific small win in the second special symbol lottery. Then, when the second special symbol variation that wins a specific small hit is executed, as shown in FIG. An effect for the character 811 to aim for a higher position is executed in the display area Dm.

Specifically, a display mode is displayed that shows the stage corresponding to the difference between the currently acquired number of special figure 1 reserved balls and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls that is a condition for executing the super RUSH game. , a guidance suggestion display indicating to the player the situation until the Super RUSH game is executed is displayed in the display area HR71 formed on the right side of the main display area Dm.

Then, when a specific small win is won multiple times during the RUSH game and the number of reserved balls in the special drawing 1 reaches a specific number (2), the display mode shown in FIG. 164(b) is displayed. FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed when the conditions for executing the super RUSH game are satisfied. When the execution conditions for the Super RUSH game are met (for example, the number of balls reserved for 1 special figure becomes 2), the character 811 reaches the top and changes the display mode to notify that the execution conditions for the Super RUSH game have been met. The performance that was taken is executed. Then, in the display area HR71, a display mode "2" is displayed indicating that the current number of reserved balls of special drawing 1 has the execution condition of the super RUSH game.

In addition, in the state where FIGS. 164(a) and (b) are displayed, that is, after setting the production mode that suggests super RUSH entry in the special figure discard setting process (see S4643 in FIG. 186) described later, the new If the special symbol 1 hold is obtained, the super RUSH game may not be executed if the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded. Therefore, in the state where FIGS. 164(a) and (b) are displayed, a process is executed to determine whether or not a new special drawing 1 reservation has been acquired, and if acquired, the production mode is switched. It is configured to perform the following processing. For example, when a special figure 1 reservation is newly acquired, an effect is performed in which the top shown in FIG. 164(a) moves away in accordance with the number of newly acquired special figure 1 reservations. Thereby, even if the opportunity to enter the super RUSH disappears during the execution of the performance suggesting entry into the super RUSH, it is possible to perform the performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in FIGS. 164(a) and 164(b), we have explained the production contents when the super RUSH game is executed by reducing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. Even when a super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of balls, a performance suggesting a super RUSH entry is executed. In this case, a process is executed to determine whether the current state is a state (increasing advantageous state) in which an advantageous period (period in which the Super RUSH game is executed) is set when the number of reserved special drawings 1 increases by one. , when it is determined that the increased advantageous state is present, it is determined whether or not a game with a common symbol is to be executed. In this determination, a prefetch process (same process as the prefetch process for special symbols performed in each of the above embodiments) is performed on the normal symbol Based on the preliminary determination result (pre-reading result) as to whether information for winning a common symbol is included (equivalent to the process executed for a common symbol), it is determined whether or not a common symbol winning game is to be executed. Then, when it is determined that a game with a regular symbol is to be executed, a super RUSH entry effect is executed to suggest that an opportunity to increase the number of special symbols 1 pending will come soon.

The performance mode of this Super RUSH entry performance is to notify the player that the Super RUSH game will be executed by increasing the number of reserved special drawings 1 (by placing a ball in the right electric accessory 164). The notification mode is set. Thereby, it is possible to easily satisfy the conditions for causing the player to execute the super RUSH game. In addition, in this embodiment, the player can understand the conditions for executing the Super RUSH game, that is, the case where the Super RUSH game is executed by reducing the number of special figure 1 pending balls, and the case where the special figure 1 pending ball count is executed. Although the configuration is such that an effect is executed that allows the player to distinguish between a case where a super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of balls, and a case where a super RUSH game is executed by increasing the number of balls, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a case where a super RUSH game is executed. It is configured to inform the player only that the conditions for making the game happen are likely to be satisfied, and allow the player to select whether to execute a game that increases the number of reserved special drawings or a game that decreases it. You may do so.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the contents of the effect executed during the super RUSH will be explained. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of a production screen during Super RUSH. When the super RUSH game is executed, the second special symbol variation with a shorter variation time than the normal RUSH game is more likely to be executed, so as a result, the execution interval of the small winning game becomes shorter and the small winning game is executed in a unit time. The number of times the game can be played is greater than that of a normal RUSH game. Therefore, during the Super RUSH game, the game period is more advantageous to the player than during the normal RUSH game. During the Super RUSH game, as shown in FIG. 165(a), the words "Super RUSH" are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a plurality of treasure boxes 812a to 812c are displayed. Then, the words "speed up" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In other words, during the Super RUSH game, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation is short (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the fluctuation period of one second special symbol fluctuation is used to draw the second special symbol lottery. Since it is difficult to execute in a way that is easy for players to understand, it is difficult to perform a performance that suggests the result (a performance that displays a treasure box) and a performance that announces the lottery result (a performance that opens a treasure box and displays the contents), so multiple Treasure boxes 812a to 812c are displayed, and an effect is performed to open the treasure boxes based on the lottery results as appropriate.

Specifically, a plurality of treasure boxes with different display modes (for example, colors and designs) are displayed in advance, and an effect is performed in which the treasure boxes are opened according to the lottery result of the second special symbol to be executed. It is composed of In this case, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, for example, if the player has won a jackpot in which the probability state is set again after the end of the jackpot game, rainbow-colored or golden For example, if you win a jackpot in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, that is, a jackpot in which the RUSH game ends, as a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player by opening a luxurious treasure chest, you may be able to open a tattered treasure box. A performance that opens a treasure chest is performed.

In this way, by displaying a plurality of treasure boxes with different display modes in advance, the lottery results can be adjusted without having to perform an effect that changes the display mode of the displayed treasure chests according to the results of the second special symbol lottery. It is possible to make it easier to perform a production that suggests the following (a production that changes the display mode of the treasure chest to be opened).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the second special symbol mainly executed during the RUSH game (super RUSH game) does not have a reservation storage function, for example, winning information of the second special symbol that is reserved and stored is stored. It is determined in advance, and based on the preliminary determination result, it is not possible to perform a performance that suggests the lottery result (so-called pre-reading performance) from a period before the second special symbol variation based on the winning information is executed. It is composed of Therefore, it is difficult to set a long period for performing a performance that suggests the lottery result of each second special symbol lottery, so it is difficult to further enhance the performance effect of displaying a plurality of treasure boxes with different display modes as described above. can.

In addition, when using a configuration in which a plurality of treasure chests with different display modes are displayed in advance as in this embodiment, the number of treasure chests displayed at the same time and the display mode may be set randomly, or the probability The display mode may be configured to be varied depending on the number of games played during the state (the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed). In addition, the current number of special symbol reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is read out, and based on the read result, it is determined whether or not the Super RUSH game is in a state where it is easy to end, and based on the determination result, the treasure box is The display mode and number of displays may be changed. With this configuration, the player can grasp not only the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery but also the gaming situation of the Super RUSH game by using the display mode and the number of displayed treasure boxes, which increases the interest of the game. can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165(b), the content of the performance that suggests the end of the Super RUSH game during the Super RUSH game will be explained. FIG. 165(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in an end suggestion effect that suggests the end of the Super RUSH game. As described above, in this embodiment, the super RUSH game is configured to be executed when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is a specific number (1 or 2). In addition, the right side area of the game board 13 is configured so that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1) can be increased by the game executed during the Super RUSH game (right-handed game). (See Figure 157).

Therefore, during the Super RUSH game, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases, that is, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases from 2 to 3, and the Super RUSH game may end. In such a case, an end suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 165(b) is executed. In the state shown in FIG. 165(b), the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is 2, the normal symbol is won during the Super RUSH game (winning probability 1/30), and the right electric accessory 164 is This is an end-suggestion performance executed when the game is released, and a display mode is displayed in the main display area Dm in which the character 811 crouches down and suggests that the Super RUSH game ends. Then, the words "end pinch" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

By executing the termination suggestion performance in this way, a ball is won in the right electric accessory 164 during the Super RUSH game, and the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 increases, which causes the Super RUSH game to transition to a normal RUSH game. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable if the player does so. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 165(b), in a state where the super RUSH game ends due to the factor that causes the super RUSH game to end, that is, the number of special chart 1 reserved balls increases, the number of special chart 1 reserved balls increases. Although the configuration is such that the player is not notified that the game is likely to increase (a state in which a game is executed per normal pattern), the present invention is not limited to this, and may include, for example, "Interrupting the right-hand hit and resting the rabbit." It is also possible to display the comment "Let's make it happen" and execute a guidance notification to make it difficult for the ball to enter the right electric accessory 164 during the game with a common figure. As a result, it is possible to prevent the Super RUSH game from ending based on an increase in the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, and to notify the player on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the Super RUSH game. Since it is possible to make the user pay close attention to the displayed content, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the execution timing of the end suggestion performance shown in FIG. 165(b) may be the start timing of the game per ordinary symbol, or the timing of the normal symbol fluctuation (variation time 10 seconds to 30 seconds) that is won per ordinary symbol. The start timing, the timing when the remaining fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and the information included in the normal symbol holding ball are determined in advance, and a predetermined value is set based on the preliminary determination result. It may be timing (for example, 30 seconds before a game with a common symbol is executed).

Furthermore, when executing the above-mentioned guidance notification (guidance notification that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the right electric accessory 164 during the normal pattern winning game by interrupting the right-handed game), the notification content of the guidance notification When a right-handed game is interrupted after understanding the above, a period of time is ensured to ensure that the ball fired by the right-handed game that was being executed before the interruption cannot enter the right electric accessory 164. The notification may be executed, and for example, the guide notification may be configured to be executed 10 seconds before the game per common symbol is executed. Thereby, it is possible to ensure that the player who has grasped the guidance notification plays a game that does not increase the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1. In addition, if the game per normal symbol is not actually executed, or for example, if the information included in the normal symbol holding ball is determined in advance and the game is determined in advance that the game per common symbol will be executed after 60 seconds, in other words, if the right The above-mentioned termination suggestion performance (so-called false performance) may be configured to be executed at a timing when the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 cannot be increased without interrupting the hitting game.

In FIG. 165(b) described above, this is executed when the number of special figure 1 reserved balls increases and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is no longer a specific number (1 or 2) and the super RUSH game can end. We have explained the end suggestion effect, but conversely, as the number of special figure 1 reserved balls decreases, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is no longer a specific number (1 or 2), and the super RUSH game ends. In some cases it is possible.

Here, with reference to FIG. 166, a description will be given of an end suggestion effect that is executed when the super RUSH game ends due to a decrease in the number of reserved balls of special figure 1. FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example of a production screen of an end suggestion production executed when the super RUSH game ends due to a decrease in the number of reserved balls of special figure 1. The state shown in FIG. 166 is a state in which the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls is one, and the remaining variation time of the first special symbol variation being executed is 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 166, in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, an end suggestion effect is executed in a display mode similar to that shown in FIG. 165(b) described above. .

In this case, the first special symbol variation will stop displaying after 1.5 seconds, and the next first special symbol variation will start, so the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls will become 0 and the Super RUSH game will end. Become. Therefore, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Termination pinch!! Accumulate reservations" are displayed. By executing the termination suggestion performance in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the Super RUSH game will be terminated unless the number of special drawing 1 reserved balls is increased.

In this embodiment, multiple opportunities are provided to reduce the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls, and as shown in FIG. There are cases where a specific small win (small win B) is won in the special symbol lottery and the first special symbol variation that is being executed is forcibly stopped (discarded). In any state in which any opportunity is established (or possible), by executing the termination suggestion effect shown in FIG. This can prevent people from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the timing to execute the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 166 is determined by determining the remaining variation time of the first special symbol variation that is being executed and the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation that has won the small hit B. , the remaining period until the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 becomes 0 is calculated based on the determination result, and the calculation is configured to be executed at the timing when the calculation result becomes a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Alternatively, it may be configured to be executed at predetermined intervals (for example, at 30 second intervals) from the timing when the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 becomes one from two. In other words, when the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is 1, the Super RUSH game continues even if the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 increases by 1, so the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 becomes 0. It may be configured such that the termination suggestion performance is executed in order to reduce the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 to two without determining the timing to obtain the ball.

As described above, in this embodiment, the Super RUSH game is configured to end even when the number of reserved balls in the special drawing 1 increases or decreases, so there is no need for the player who is playing the Super RUSH game. So far, it has been possible to execute a game that continues the Super RUSH game by increasing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, and a game that continues the super RUSH game by not increasing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. It is possible to provide novel gameplay that is not available in other games.

It should be noted that, different from the production contents of this embodiment, for example, an end suggestion production (Fig. 165 (b)) and the end suggestion performance (see Fig. 166), which is executed in a state where the end condition for ending the Super RUSH game is likely to be satisfied due to a decrease in the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1, are the same. , it may be configured to execute an effect that allows the player to select whether or not to continue the right-handed game in the sub-display area Ds. As a result, the game method selected by the player, that is, the game method of continuing the Super RUSH game by executing a right-handed game to increase the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, and increasing the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. To make a player play the game with enthusiasm, since the duration of the Super RUSH game can be varied depending on the game method of continuing the Super RUSH game by interrupting the right-handed game in order to prevent the players from playing the game. Can be done. In addition, if the player selects the wrong playing method, the playing method selected by the player will affect the subsequent gaming results because that playing method will make it easier to satisfy the termination condition of the Super RUSH game. The impact can be made even greater.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the period during which the Super RUSH game is executed is configured to be a specific range (1, 2) in which the number of reserved balls for 1 special figure is continuous. Without limitation, for example, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls for which the super RUSH game is executed may be set in a non-consecutive range. For example, if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 1 and 3, It may also be configured such that a super RUSH game is executed in case of a super RUSH game. In this case, as an end suggestion effect, if the number of reserved balls in special drawing 1 can go from 1 to 0, or if it can go from 3 to 4, the above-mentioned FIG. 165(b) and FIG. 166 If a similar ending suggestion performance is executed and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls can go from 1 to 2, or from 3 to 2, it does not suggest the end of Super RUSH, but instead of suggesting the end of Super RUSH. It is preferable to perform a standby performance as a performance that suggests transition to a standby state. In other words, according to the above-mentioned example, if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is 2, the super RUSH game will be executed even if the number of special figure 1 reserved balls decreases or increases. Since the Super RUSH game is more likely to be executed (standby state) than when the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is 0 or 4, the player is notified of this by executing the standby effect. Information can be provided in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in this case, the first special symbol variation that is executed when the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls is 2 (the special symbol 1 reserved ball is subtracted from the special symbol 1 reserved ball used in this first special symbol lottery) The variation time selected in the first special symbol variation when the number of balls is 2) is configured to be shorter than when the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls is 0 or 4. It's okay. Thereby, it is possible to easily shift from the standby state to the super RUSH game, and it is possible to encourage the player who has entered the standby state to play the game with enthusiasm.

Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 167 is a transition diagram schematically showing the transition contents of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167, in this embodiment, the gaming states are a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). , a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) can be set. The amount of benefits given to the player playing the game is configured to vary depending on the gaming state that is set. Specifically, the most benefits are given to the player when the potential state is set, and then the amount of benefits given to the player decreases in the case of the variable state and then the normal state. It consists of

The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment is configured such that the normal state is set as the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 (the state in which the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 122). During the normal state, it is easier to execute a special symbol lottery when a left-handed game is executed than when a right-handed game is executed, so a left-handed game where the ball is aimed at entering the first ball entrance 64 is played. is executed. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during the normal state, a first special symbol lottery is executed in which a jackpot is won with a probability of 1/200. If you win a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, a jackpot type (jackpot A7) is set in which the normal state is set again after the jackpot game ends at a rate of 35%, and a probability change after the jackpot game ends at a 45% rate. A jackpot type (jackpot B7) for which a state is set is set, and a jackpot type (jackpot C7) for which a probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game at a rate of 20% is set.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery during the normal state, the transition to the variable probability state is the easiest, the next is the normal state, and the potential state is the easiest to shift to. It is designed to be difficult. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming experience in which a potential state that is most advantageous to the player is set by passing through a plurality of gaming states.

Next, when a variable probability state is set, it becomes a high probability state of a normal symbol, so the right electric accessory 164 is easier to open than a low probability state of a normal symbol, and the first ball enters in a left-handed game. Since it is easier to enter the ball into the right first ball entrance 164r by playing the right-handed game than by letting the ball enter the opening 64, the game in which the first special symbol lottery is executed is performed by playing the right-handed game. . Further, during the variable probability state, the special symbol is in a high probability state, and a first special symbol lottery is executed in which the player wins a jackpot with a probability of 1/60. If you win a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed during a variable probability state, a jackpot type (jackpot A7) is set in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game ends at a 35% rate, and a jackpot game at a 45% rate. A jackpot type (jackpot B7) in which a probability state is set after the end of the game is set, and a jackpot type (jackpot C7) in which a probability change state is set again after the end of the jackpot game at a rate of 20% is set.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, the variable probability state is configured so that it is easier to shift to the probability state when a jackpot is won than the normal state which is the initial state. As a result, when a jackpot is won during the normal state and the state changes to a variable probability state, the variable probability state can be changed to a state where it is easier to shift to the probability state than the normal state. It is possible to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game.

In addition, if the special symbol variation is executed 50 times without winning a jackpot while the probability variation state is set, the condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol (time saving termination condition) will be met. , it is configured to transition to a potential state. In other words, when a probability variable state is set, the first transition condition (probability of establishment is about 35%) that is satisfied when special symbol drawing is executed 50 times without winning a jackpot (winning probability 1/60), and the probability variable state are set. A potential state is set when any of the second transition conditions (probability of establishment is approximately 30%) is satisfied when a jackpot is won during the state and jackpot B7 is set. That will happen. In addition, the above-mentioned first transition condition is such that the probability of establishment varies depending on the remaining period of the variable probability state, and for example, in a state where the special symbol variation has been executed 49 times during the variable probability state, the next transition condition will be executed. The first transition condition is satisfied (probability of establishment is about 90%) when the winning result is won (probability of winning 59/60) in the 50th special symbol change.

In this way, when a plurality of transition conditions are provided for transitioning the gaming state from a variable probability state to a potential state, a transition condition (first transition condition) in which the probability of establishment is variable depending on the number of executions of special symbol fluctuations. By providing a transition condition (second transition condition) in which the probability of establishment does not change depending on the number of executions of special symbol fluctuations, it is possible for a player who is playing a game in a variable probability state to The desired game result can be varied depending on the progress of the game. Therefore, the probability that the probable state will be set based on the establishment of the second transition condition is higher than the probability that the probable state will be established immediately after the definite variable state is established, that is, based on the establishment of the first transition condition. During the period in which the probability is higher, an effect is performed to encourage the player to see whether or not the second transition condition is satisfied, and if a predetermined period of time has passed since the variable probability state was set, that is, the first transition condition is satisfied. In a period in which the probability that potential information is set based on is higher than the probability that a potential state is set based on the establishment of the second transition condition, the first transition condition is satisfied for the player. It becomes possible to perform a performance that incites whether or not it is true.

Next, the flow of the game in the potential state will be explained. When the potential state is set, as described above, the RUSH game is executed according to the number of reserved special figures (the number of reserved balls of special figures 1). Specifically, when the number of special symbols reserved (the number of special symbols 1 reserved balls) is 0, 3, or 4, the normal length is likely to be selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation during the potential state. When a RUSH game is executed and the number of special symbols reserved (number of special symbols 1 reserved balls) is 1 or 2, a shorter length than usual is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation during the potential state. It is configured so that an easy super RUSH game can be executed. In this way, by varying the fluctuation time of the second special symbol fluctuation according to the gaming situation (the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1), the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery per unit time, and by extension, the small winning game Since it is possible to vary the number of times the RUSH game is executed, it is possible to make the player play a game in a potential state while making the player expect a more advantageous RUSH game to be executed.

The above-mentioned RUSH game and super RUSH game are both games that are executed during the probability state, and the winning probability of the special symbol (winning with the second special symbol) is set to the same (1/60). ing. Further, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is set to be a high probability (59/60). If a jackpot is won during the probability state, a jackpot type (jackpot D7) in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game is set at a rate of 35%, and a probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game at a rate of 65%. is set again. On the other hand, if a small win is won during the probability state, the gaming state will not change. That is, once the potential state is set, the RUSH game (game in the potential state) can be continued until the jackpot D7 (35% of jackpot winning) is set.

<About the electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 168 to 174. The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above in that a part of the ROM 202, a part of the RAM 203, and a voice lamp control provided in the main control device 110 are provided. The difference is that a part of the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 is changed, and the rest is the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 168(a). FIG. 168(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 168, the ROM 202 of this embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 116) in that it has a small first random number 7 table 202fa instead of the first random number table 202a. A small winning random number 7 table replaces the winning random number table 202de, a second winning random number 7 table 202fc replaces the second winning random number table 202b, and a jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd replaces the jackpot type selection 4 table 202db. The difference is that a variable pattern selection 7 table 202fe is provided in place of the pattern selection 4 table 202dc, and a small winning type selection 7 table 202ff and a regular pattern selection 7 table 202fg are newly provided. ing. Furthermore, although not shown, in the seventh embodiment, the range in which the value of the first random number counter C1 can be updated is from "0 to 399" to "0 to 599", unlike the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that the range in which the value of the second winning random number counter C2 can be updated is changed from "0 to 999" to "0 to 299." Since the other configurations are the same, they will be given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

First, the first random number 7 table 202fa will be explained with reference to FIG. 168(b). FIG. 168(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 7 table 202fa. This first random number 7 table 202fa is used to determine a win according to the symbol type of the special symbol and the probability state of the special symbol, compared to the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 23(b)) described above. The difference is that the value of the first random number counter C1 is specified.

Specifically, regardless of the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) for which the special symbol lottery was executed, if the low probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot judgment value (special The range of the value of the first hit random number counter C1 (0 to 2) is defined as the value that is determined to be a jackpot in the lottery of symbols, and if the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the jackpot determination value is the value that is determined as the jackpot determination value. A range of 0 to 9 is defined as the value of the random number counter C1. That is, in the seventh embodiment, no matter which type of special symbol lottery is executed with the special symbol low probability state set, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/200, and the special symbol No matter which type of special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state where a high probability state is set, the system is configured so that the jackpot will be won with a probability of about 1/60. In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot is commonly defined for each special symbol type, but the value is not limited to this, and a different number for each special symbol type is defined. It may be stipulated that the value of the 1st hit random number counter C1 becomes the jackpot judgment value, or the number of values of the 1st win random number counter C1 that becomes the jackpot judgment value may be made different for each special symbol type. .

As explained above, in this embodiment, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 ("0 to 2"), which is determined to be a jackpot when the special symbol's low probability state is set, is the value of the special symbol's low probability state. It is configured so that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is determined to be a jackpot even when a high probability state is set. With this configuration, the first prefetching process (see S1757 in FIG. 135) executed in the start winning process 4 (see S152 in FIG. 134) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the second prefetching process (see S1757 in FIG. 135) In the process (see S1764 in FIG. 136), for example, when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol is acquired, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information is executed. It is possible to predict in advance that the winning information includes information on winning a jackpot without executing processing for determining (predicting) the gaming state at the time of the game. In addition, without being limited to this, at least part or all of the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot in a low probability state of a special symbol is not determined to be a jackpot in a high probability state of a special symbol. The contents of the first winning random number table 202fa may be defined. By configuring in this way, when the same value of the first winning random number counter C1 is acquired, it is set when a jackpot determination using the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is executed. The determination result can be varied depending on the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent act to obtain the value of the specific first random number counter C1 to be carried out.

Next, the contents of the small winning random number 7 table 202fb will be explained with reference to FIG. 168(c). FIG. 168(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small winning random number 7 table 202fb. This small win random number 7 table 202fb has a pattern different from the small win random number table 202da (see FIG. 117) in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment in that the range of values that the first win random number counter C1 can take is changed. The only difference is that the range of the small hit determination value in the second special symbol type has been changed to "10 to 599", and the rest is the same, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. In other words, the seventh embodiment is configured such that a small win is not won in the first special symbol lottery, and a small win is won with a high probability (590/600) in the second special symbol lottery.

Next, the contents of the second winning random number 7 table 202fc will be explained with reference to FIG. 168(d). FIG. 168(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number 7 table 202fc. As shown in FIG. 168(d), this second winning random number 7 table 202fc shows that when the normal symbol is in a low probability state, the obtained second winning random number counter C4 has a value of "0". If the normal symbol is in a high probability state, the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is defined to be in the range of "0 to 299".

That is, in this embodiment, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol (1/299) is set to a low probability. Thereby, the execution probability of the game per common symbol can be made different between the normal state and potential state, which are low probability states of normal symbols, and the variable probability state, which is a high probability state of normal symbols.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the same gaming method (right-handed game) is executed in the variable probability state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the potential state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is configured so that In a right-handed game executed during the probability state, a game is performed in which a second special symbol lottery is executed by entering the ball into the right second ball entrance 645 (see FIG. 157), and during the probability variation state In the right-handed game executed in , the game is configured such that a first special symbol lottery is executed by letting a ball enter the right electric accessory 164.

Next, details of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd. Similar to the jackpot type selection table 202d in the first embodiment, this jackpot type selection table 202fd is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 169, the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd in the seventh embodiment includes three jackpots, "jackpot A7" to "jackpot C7", as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). The type is specified. On the other hand, two jackpot types, "Jackpot D7" to "Jackpot E7", are defined as jackpot types of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 169, the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "jackpot A7" when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34". They are defined in correspondence. This "Jackpot A7" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds (R) normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the special symbol is set to the normal state after the jackpot ends. In addition, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, whether or not the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is set is variable. More specifically, when "jackpot A7" is won in the normal state, variable probability state, and potential state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is not set (the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0). That is, if "Jackpot A7" is won in the normal state, variable probability state, and probability state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set again.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot A7" are 35, so the first special symbol lottery When a jackpot is achieved, the percentage of "jackpot A7" being determined is 35% (35/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, "Jackpot B7" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 79". This "Jackpot B7" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot B7" in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 50, while if you win "Jackpot B7" in the variable probability state or the probability state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 50. The value is set to 0.

That is, if "Jackpot B7" is won in the normal state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous probability variable state (50 times). On the other hand, if "Jackpot B7" is won in the variable probability state or the probability state, the time saving number is set to 0, so the gaming state after the end of the jackpot becomes the most advantageous probability state. Therefore, "Jackpot B7" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state if won in the normal state. On the other hand, if you win in a gaming state other than the normal state, it will be the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot B7" are 45, so the first special symbol lottery When a jackpot is achieved, the percentage of "jackpot B7" being determined is 45% (45/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, a jackpot type "Jackpot C7" is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "80 to 99". This "jackpot C7" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot C7" in the probability change, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 50, while if you win "Jackpot C7" in the normal state or the probability state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0.

That is, in the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player to win "jackpot C7" than to win "jackpot B7", and in the variable probability state, it is more advantageous for the player to win "jackpot B7" than to win "jackpot C7". It is more advantageous for the player to win. Furthermore, in the potential state, the degree of advantage does not change between winning "Jackpot B7" and winning "Jackpot C7".

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 20 random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot C7", so the first special symbol lottery When a jackpot occurs in , the ratio of "jackpot C11" being determined is 20% (20/100).

As explained above, in this embodiment, the rate of transition to the gaming state (potential state) that is most advantageous to the player is determined depending on the gaming state when winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. They are configured differently, and the rate is 20% during the normal state, 45% during the variable probability state, and 65% during the probability state, and the probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game. . With this configuration, when the gaming state shifts, for example, if a jackpot is won during the normal state and a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the state will shift from the normal state to the probable state. Since it is possible to provide an easy advantageous state, it is possible to motivate players who have not been set to a potential state to continue playing the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 169, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 34", and the jackpot type is "jackpot D7". ” are defined in association with each other. This "Jackpot D7" is a jackpot type that has the same contents as the above-mentioned "Jackpot A7", and the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and after the jackpot is over, the special symbol is set to the normal state. This is a jackpot (8 rounds (R) normal jackpot). In addition, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, whether or not the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol is set is variable. More specifically, when the "jackpot D7" is won in the normal state, variable probability state, and potential state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is not set (the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0). That is, if the "jackpot D7" is won in the normal state, variable probability state, and probability state, the most disadvantageous normal state is set again.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 35 random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot D7", so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot D7" being determined is 35% (35/100). In addition, in this embodiment, since the second special symbol lottery is easily executed when the most advantageous gaming state (probability state) for the player is set, this "jackpot D7" is This provides an opportunity to end the gaming state (potential state) that is most advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 169, a jackpot type "Jackpot E7" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 99". This "Jackpot E7" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot E7" in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100, while if you win "Jackpot E7" in the variable probability state or the probability state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100. The value is set to 0.

That is, if you win "Jackpot E7" in the normal state, you will move to a relatively advantageous probability variable state (100 times). On the other hand, if the jackpot E7 is won in the variable probability state or the probability state, the time saving number is set to 0, so the gaming state after the end of the jackpot becomes the most advantageous probability state. Therefore, "Jackpot E7" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state if won in the normal state. On the other hand, if you win in a gaming state other than the normal state, it will be the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot E7" are 65, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot E7" being determined is 65% (65/100).

As explained above, in the seventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) that is mainly executed in the gaming state (potential state) that is most advantageous to the player, The configuration is such that the potential state loops at a rate of 65%, and the potential state ends (the normal state is set) at a rate of 35%. Therefore, in a state where the probability state is set, a player can win a prize ball by playing a small winning game that is executed with a high probability (59/60), while playing a game in which he hopes that he will not win the "jackpot E7". It will be executed.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202fe in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171. Similar to the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 25) in the first embodiment, this variation pattern selection table 202fe determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1. This is a data table for In the seventh embodiment, as a variation pattern selection table 202fe, the contents of the data table that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state are partially changed from the first embodiment described above, and the gaming state The difference is that a 7 table for probability variation 202fe2 that is referred to when is in a state of variable probability and a 7 table for probability variation 202fe3 that is referenced when it is in a state of probability is added.

First, the contents of the normal 7 table 202fe1, which is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state, will be explained with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal 7 table 202fe1. This normal 7 table 202fe1 has a variation pattern corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) as a symbol type and a second special symbol in contrast to the regular table 202d1 (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment described above. They differ greatly in that the variation patterns corresponding to the symbols (special figures 2) are respectively prescribed.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot is a normal fluctuation (10000 milliseconds (10 seconds) when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99". )) is associated with the range ``100 to 179'', and a super variation (15,000 milliseconds (15 seconds)) is associated with the range of ``180 to 198'', and a special variation (20,000 milliseconds (20 seconds)) is associated with the range of ``180 to 198''. are associated.

Note that in FIG. 170, the length of the fluctuation time specified for each fluctuation pattern is shown in milliseconds (1/1000 seconds), but for convenience of explanation, the length of the fluctuation time is shown in the following explanation. will be explained using units of seconds.

As a fluctuation pattern determined when the first special symbol is a loser in the lottery, a fluctuation pattern of a short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 180". , an outlying medium fluctuation (10 seconds) is associated with the range of "181 to 197", and an outlying super fluctuation (15 seconds) is associated with a value of "197,198".

On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the lottery result, long fluctuations (long winning fluctuation, long losing fluctuation) (600 seconds) are associated with the entire range "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is being

In this embodiment, when selecting a variation pattern of special symbol variation, the variation pattern is selected by referring to the total value of the number of reserved memories of all special symbols. In addition, in this embodiment, since only the first special symbol is configured to have a reservation memory function, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is substantially based on the number of reservation memories (number of reserved balls) of the first special symbol. , and the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be selected. Here, the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (see S307 in FIG. 139) is executed at a later stage than the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 in FIG. 139). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 170, the variation pattern is not selected when the number of reserved balls of special figures is 4. On the other hand, the process of selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (see S1277 in FIG. 179) is executed independently of the first special symbol lottery, as in the fourth embodiment described above, so the special symbol is reserved. A variable pattern may be selected when the number of pitches (number of reserved pitches for special figure 1) is four.

Next, with reference to FIG. 171(a), the contents of the probability variation 7 table 202fe2 that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in the probability variation state will be explained. FIG. 171(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the 7 probability variation table 202fe2. In this embodiment, as described above, in a state where the variable probability state is set, a game is performed in which a ball is placed in the right electric accessory 164 by a right-handed game and the first special symbol lottery is executed more efficiently than in the normal state. It will be done. For the first special symbol variation during the probability variation state, a variation pattern having the same contents as the above-mentioned normal 7 table 202fe1 is defined. On the other hand, for the second special symbol variation, a variation pattern is defined in which a shorter variation time (60 seconds) is set than the variation pattern defined in the normal 7 table 202fe1. Other elements are the same as those of the normal 7 table 202fe1 described above, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

In other words, in the present embodiment, in the probability variable state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the right electric accessory 164 is opened with high probability, making it difficult for the ball to enter the right second ball entrance 645. It is configured so that In other words, the configuration is such that it is more difficult for the ball to enter the second right ball entry opening 645 when executing a right-handed game in a variable probability state than when executing a right-handed game in a normal state. . Furthermore, when the normal state is set, a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 by a left-handed game is a proper playing method, and when a variable probability state is set, a right-handed game is used to cause the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. The game is configured such that a game in which a ball enters the electric accessory 164 is an appropriate game method.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when a right-handed game is executed during the normal state, the ball can easily enter the right second ball entrance 645, so that the ball can easily enter the right second ball entrance 645. By setting a variation pattern in which a long variation time (10 minutes) is specified as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation executed during the normal state, a right-handed game is executed during the normal state, and the second special symbol We are trying to suppress the act of running a lottery.

On the other hand, when a right-handed game, which is a proper gaming method, is executed during a probability change state, as described above with reference to FIGS. However, if the balls flowing down the right side area behave irregularly, for example, if the balls flowing down the right area collide with each other and jump over the open door 164r1, the second right entrance ball enters the object 164. The ball may enter the ball opening 645.

In this embodiment, when a proper game method is being executed, if the ball flows down in an unpredictable manner and enters the right second ball entry port 645, that is, if the ball enters the right second ball entry port 645, When a ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during the state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state ( 60 seconds). Furthermore, although the details will be described later, if you win a specific small hit (small win C) in the second special symbol lottery, the variable probability state will change to the probable state regardless of the number of special symbol changes executed during the variable probability state. It is configured so that it can be moved to

As a result, the player who is playing the game in the variable probability state is made to watch the behavior of the ball flowing down the right side area, and to actively play the game while expecting that the second special symbol lottery will be executed. You can make it happen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 171(b), the contents of the potential probability 7 table 202fe3, which is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation during the potential state, will be explained. FIG. 171(b) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the seven potential confirmation tables 202fe3. In this embodiment, as described above, in the state where the probability state is set, the ball enters the second ball entrance 645 by the right-handed game, and the second special symbol lottery is executed more efficiently than in the normal state. A game is played where the Then, by executing a long variation (10 minutes) for the first special symbol variation executed during the potential state, the number of reserved memories (special symbol) of the special symbol (first special symbol) during the potential state The configuration is such that the number of balls held in Figure 1) is the upper limit number. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variation pattern of the second special symbol set during the potential state is made to differ depending on the number of reserved memory (special symbol 1 reserved ball number) of the special symbol (first special symbol). It consists of

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171(b), the variation pattern determined in response to the first special symbol lottery is based on the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. Regardless, a variation pattern with a variation time of 600 seconds (super long variation for winning, super long variation for losing) is associated. In other words, it is configured such that a variation time of 600 seconds is always set for the first special symbol variation executed during the potential state.

On the other hand, as for the fluctuation pattern determined in the case of a hit (jackpot) in the lottery of the second special symbol, if the number of reserved special symbols (number of reserved special symbols 1) is "0 to 3", the fluctuation type If the long variation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range of counter CS1 from "0 to 198" and the number of reserved special drawings (number of reserved special drawings 1) is "4", then the entire range of variation type counter CS1 is A short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the range "0 to 198".

In addition, the fluctuation pattern determined when the second special symbol is out of the lottery (including small winnings A and C) is when the number of special symbols reserved (the number of special symbols 1 reserved) is "1, 2" , the short variation (0.5 seconds) is associated with the entire range of variation type counter CS1 "0 to 198", and the number of special drawings held (number of special drawings 1 held) is "0, 3, 4". In this case, the entire range "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with an outlying middle fluctuation (10 seconds).

Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern determined when the second special symbol lottery results in a small hit B is that if the number of special symbols reserved (the number of special symbols 1 reserved) is "0, 1, 2", the fluctuation pattern If the small hit medium fluctuation (10 seconds) is associated with the entire range "0 to 198" of the type counter CS1, and the number of reserved special drawings (number of reserved special drawings 1) is "3, 4", the fluctuation type counter Small hit short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is associated with the entire range of CS1 "0 to 198".

In other words, in this embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) set for the second special symbol variation executed during the potential state is set when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery. The fluctuation pattern is configured to have a short fluctuation of 0.5 seconds and a long fluctuation of 10 seconds, and the small winnings A and B are won in about 95% of the small winnings. In this case, if the number of reserved special drawings is a specific number (1, 2), a game (super RUSH game) in which short fluctuations (0.5 seconds) are set is executed, ), a game (RUSH game) in which a long variation (10 seconds) is set is executed.

By configuring in this way, the number of small winning games per unit time can be varied according to the number of special figures reserved (the number of special figures 1 reserved balls) during the potential state, so as a result, the number of small winning games per unit time can be changed. The amount of benefits (number of prize balls) that a player can acquire can be varied depending on the player. Therefore, the player who is playing the RUSH game while in the potential state can be motivated to play the game aiming at the super RUSH game that is more advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, if you win the small hit B, that is, if you win the small win type in which the process of discarding (forced stop) the first special symbol variation that is being executed, the number of special symbols pending (special symbol 1 pending) If the number of pitches) is greater than the specific number (1, 2), a short fluctuation (0.5 seconds) is set when the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls for special diagram 1) is greater than the specific number (1, 2). , 2) or less, the long variation (10 seconds) is set to (0, 1, 2). In other words, if you win a small hit that can reduce the number of reserved balls for special figure 1, if the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 (number of reserved balls for special figure 1) is greater than the specified number, the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 It is configured so that a shorter fluctuation time is determined than when (the number of reserved special figures) is less than a specific number.

By configuring this way, if the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls (number of reserved special symbols) is greater than a specific number and the small hit B is won, the first special symbol variation in progress can be immediately discarded. Therefore, it is possible to easily set the special figure 1 reserved ball number (special figure reserved number) to a specific number. On the other hand, if you win the small hit B when the number of special drawing 1 reserved balls (number of special drawings reserved) is less than the specified number, a long fluctuation time will be set as the small winning fluctuation, so it will not be executed. It is possible to lengthen the period required to discard the first special symbol variation, and it is therefore possible to prevent the number of special pattern 1 reserved balls (special pattern reserved number) from decreasing below a specific number. .

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation (variation The configuration is such that it is easy to set a long-term variation (10 seconds variation) as the time). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171(b), when the number of reserved balls for special drawings is the lower limit value "0", no matter which small winning is won, the number of balls on hold for a long period of time (10 seconds) fluctuation) is set.

In this way, by imposing a penalty that makes it easier to perform long-term fluctuations when the number of special figure reserved balls is the lower limit value "0", the number of special figure one reserved balls is increased after the potential state is set. Suspend the game until (number of special symbols pending) becomes "0", specifically, continue playing until the first special symbol variation is executed 4 times during the potential state where the variation time of 10 minutes is set. After the game is interrupted, it is possible to suppress the act of playing the game in the potential state.

In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is used in which the degree of advantage in the potential state is divided into two stages according to the number of reserved special drawings, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the degree of advantage in the potential state is divided into two stages according to the number of reserved special drawings. The degree of advantage may be divided into three or more stages. In this case, for example, as a fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol that is set when the number of reserved special symbols is "0" which is the lower limit value, a fluctuation time longer than the long-time fluctuation (10 seconds fluctuation) described above (for example, , 30 seconds) can be set, and if the number of special figure held pitches is the lower limit "0", the penalty that long-term fluctuation is more likely to be executed may be made larger, or the special figure held Among the specific numbers (1, 2), one (for example, 1) of the special figure reservation number has a shorter fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 seconds) than the other (for example, 2) the special figure reservation number. It may be configured to be settable so that an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player can be executed.

In addition, the trigger for setting the probability state, that is, when winning a jackpot where the probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and when the probability state is set via the probability change state, It is configured to refer to different fluctuation pattern tables, and if the potential state is set due to the establishment of one opportunity (for example, the opportunity to set the potential state after the end of a jackpot game), the other opportunity ( For example, an advantageous game (second special symbol variation) that is more advantageous to the player during the probability state than when the probability state is set due to the establishment of the probability state (the trigger for setting the probability state via the probability change state) It may be configured such that a game in which a short variation time is likely to be selected as a variation pattern is more likely to be executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern is selected (determined) with the same specified content regardless of the number of executions of the special symbol variation executed during the potential state. For example, the specified content of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first period (first half period) after the potential state is set and the second period (second half period) after the first period has elapsed. In this case, for example, the number of special symbol fluctuations (the first Different fluctuation patterns are defined according to the total number of special symbol fluctuations and second special symbol fluctuations, and advantageous games (second special symbol fluctuations) that are more advantageous to the player in the second period than in the first period are defined. It is preferable to configure the game so that a game in which a short variation time is likely to be selected as a variation pattern is more likely to be executed. With this configuration, by making the potential state continue for a long time, that is, the longer the period during which the player does not win a jackpot during the potential state (so-called addictive period), the more advantageous the player can become. It is possible to provide innovative gameplay.

In addition, when the probability change state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed and based on winning the small hit C, the probability is guaranteed without executing the special symbol variation the specified number of times (50 times). It may be configured such that an advantageous game that is most advantageous to the player (a game in which a short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation) is executed when the state changes. In this case, for example, for the 7 table 202fe2 for probability variation that is referred to when the probability variation state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol variation is set the specified number of times (50 times) to the variation pattern data referred to during the probability variation state. ) It is sufficient to define the period until execution in correspondence with each other, and also to define the special fluctuation pattern data to be referred to when the transition to the potential state occurs within the prescribed number of times. That is, in the 7 table 202fe2 for probability variation in which variation pattern data is defined for a range in which the number of special symbol variations is within the specified number of times (50 times), data for special symbol variation to be executed during the probability variation state within the specified number of times is included. What is necessary is to predefine the variation pattern data of , and the variation pattern data for special symbol variations executed during the potential state.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while making the player expect more that the second special symbol variation (lottery) will be executed during the probability variation state. In this case, after the number of executions of the special symbol variation executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches the specified number of times (50 times), the variation is made with reference to the 7 potential confirmation table 202fe3 shown in FIG. 171(b). It may be configured to set a pattern, and even after the number of executions of the special symbol variation executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches the specified number of times (50 times), the system will shift to the potential state within the specified number of times. The special variation pattern data that is referred to in the case may be configured to be continuously settable.

The variation patterns (variation time) set corresponding to each gaming state have been explained above with reference to FIGS. Based on the game state being played, the symbol type of the special symbol, and the validity determination result, the variation time of each variation pattern to be set is within a range that does not deviate from the technical concept of this embodiment (compared to other variation patterns). It is sufficient if it is specified within a range that does not relatively deviate from the technical philosophy. In addition, in this embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, an example is shown in which a specific variation pattern (variation time) is determined under various specific conditions, but under each specific condition, the obtained variation type It may be configured such that different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) can be selected depending on the value of the counter CS1. In this case, the selection ratio of each possible variation pattern and the average value calculated based on the variation time of each variation pattern should be specified so as to be within a range that does not deviate from the technical concept of this embodiment. For example, as a variation pattern for the special figure 1 specified in the 7 table 202fe3 for potential probability, it can be executed during the probability state with a small probability (for example, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "1"). It may be configured such that a shorter variation time (for example, 1 second) is set than the variation pattern (variation time) that can be set for the second special symbol variation.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to rarely provide unexpected games to the player without changing the flow of the main game executed during the potential state. can improve the interest of In addition, although the above-mentioned example uses a variation pattern selected in a potential state as an example, based on the same technical idea, a variation pattern selected when another gaming state is set is used. Of course, similar technical ideas may be applied.

Next, the contents of the small winning type selection 7 table 202ff will be explained with reference to FIG. 172(a). This small winning type selection 7 table 202ff is a data table that is referred to when selecting a small winning type after winning a small winning in the special symbol lottery, and is made to correspond to the value of the acquired small winning type counter C5. Three types of small winnings are specified to be selected: "small winning A7", "small winning B7", and "small winning C7".

If you win a small hit in the special symbol lottery, depending on the selected small win type, the details of the small win operation, symbol confirmation time (the period required to confirm the stop display of the special symbol), and the special symbol currently being executed will be displayed. It is configured so that the processing contents for fluctuations can be varied. In addition, in this embodiment, as explained using the small hit random number 7 table 202fb (see FIG. 168(c)), since the structure is such that the small win is won only by the lottery of the second special symbol, the main In the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) executed by the control device 110, when it is determined that a small hit has been won, the small hit type selection 7 table 202ff is referred to.

To specifically explain the contents stipulated in the small win type selection 7 table 202ff, "small win A" is associated with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 74". , "Small win B7" is associated with the range "75-79", and "Small win C" is associated with the range "80-99". Since the range of values that the small win type counter C5 can take is 100 from "0 to 99", the percentage of "small win A" selected when winning a small win is 75% (75/100), " The proportion of selection of ``Small win B'' is 5% (5/100), and the proportion of selection of ``Small win C'' is 20% (20/100).

When "small win A" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. Further, "0.2 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol, and a process of interrupting the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed. Here, when the process of interrupting the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed, the process of interrupting the process of measuring the elapsed time of the variation of the first special symbol variation being executed is executed. executed. Specifically, when a small winning game is executed, the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on, and while the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203d is set to on, the first special symbol (special symbol) is A process is executed to skip the process of updating the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203di indicating the variation time (remaining variation time) in FIG. 1). Then, with the end of the small winning game as a trigger, the restart condition is established (the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to OFF), and the suspended process of updating the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203di is restarted. . With this configuration, while the small winning game is being executed (while the interruption condition is satisfied), it is possible to prohibit the remaining variation time of the first special symbol variation being executed from decreasing. Therefore, while the small winning game is being executed, for example, the winning first special symbol variation may be stopped and displayed, resulting in repeated winning games (big winning game, small winning game) being executed. may be prohibited. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

In addition, since the process of measuring the elapsed time of the special symbol fluctuation that is being executed is simply interrupted (skip), after the restart condition is met, the first special symbol fluctuation that was being executed before the small winning game is can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the results of the special symbol lottery that has already been executed. In addition, in this embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied in response to winning a small hit, a process is executed to interrupt the special symbol fluctuation being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special symbol variation in progress may be continuously executed, and the stop display of the first special symbol variation may be interrupted when the variation time of the special symbol variation has elapsed. In other words, even if the interruption condition is met, the update process that updates the variation time of the special symbol variation will continue to be executed, and if the update process is executed until the preset variation time has passed, it will be interrupted. It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not the conditions are met, and when it is determined that the suspension conditions are met, the stop display of the special symbol variation is not executed until the restart conditions are met. Thereby, there is no need to interrupt the update process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation, so the processing load can be reduced.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in a state in which the interruption condition is satisfied and the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted, that is, in a state in which the process of updating the value of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time counter 203di is skipped, the 3. On the display surface of the 3-symbol display device 81, there is an interruption effect in which the fluctuation display of the special symbol fluctuation (first special symbol fluctuation) is interrupted, and a game indicating that the first special symbol fluctuation is being suspended as the current gaming situation. The system is configured to be able to display a notification display for notifying the user and a guide display for indicating that the suspended special symbol variation will be resumed after a predetermined period of time (after the end of the small winning game). Thereby, when the special symbol variation is interrupted, it is possible to notify the player to that effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, as the above-mentioned interruption performance, for example, the performance mode of the variable display performance (variable display performance using the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol) being executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 It may be configured to be able to execute different interruption effects depending on the situation.For example, when the interruption condition is satisfied and the special symbol fluctuation is interrupted, the third symbol changes at high speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. That is, if the third symbol is fluctuating at a speed that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the fluctuating third symbol, an interruption performance is performed in which the high-speed fluctuation of the third symbol continues until the restart condition is met. In the case where the third symbol changes at a low speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, that is, the third symbol changes at a speed that allows the player to visually recognize the changing third symbol. It is preferable to configure the system to perform, as an interruption performance, a performance in which the low-speed fluctuation of the third symbol continues until a restart condition is satisfied. In this way, by varying the variable presentation mode (interruption presentation mode) during the period in which the interruption condition is met, depending on the variation presentation mode of the third symbol at the time when the interruption condition is met, it is possible for the player to Interruption performance can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, if the interruption condition is met just before the fluctuation of the third symbol stops, for example, if the other symbols except one among the plurality of symbols are a combination indicating a jackpot win (a combination of symbols indicating the same number), the suspension will stop. The interruption condition is set during a fluctuating performance (so-called reach performance) that stimulates whether or not the remaining one symbol will stop at a combination that indicates a jackpot win (or whether all symbols will stop at the same number). If this is established, an interruption effect may be executed to continue the fluctuating display for the remaining 1 symbol as described above, or a display may be performed for the 1 symbol currently being fluctuated to indicate that the interruption condition has been met. The ready-to-reach effect may be ended by stopping the display in a manner (for example, "Take a break!!"). Then, after the restart condition is met, the words "Break Ended!!" are displayed, and the result of the reach effect that was being executed before the interruption is stopped and displayed without executing the reach effect. good. As a result, various effects can be performed depending on the timing when the interruption condition is met, so it is possible to diversify the effects that are executed based on the satisfaction of the interruption condition, thereby increasing the effect of the presentation. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 172(a), the explanation will be continued. When "small win B" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. Further, "0.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol, and a process of discarding the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed. Here, when the process of discarding the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed, regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol variation being executed and the remaining variation time, the first special symbol variation Processing is executed to stop and display the lottery result in a display mode that indicates that the lottery result is a loss. Specifically, when a small winning game is executed, a process is performed to clear the value of the special pattern 1 variation time counter 203di indicating the variation time (remaining variation time) of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) to 0. A forced stop command indicating that the first special symbol variation has been stopped and displayed is set. Furthermore, if the first special symbol variation that is subject to forced stop has won a jackpot, the information indicating the jackpot win that is set at the start timing of the first special symbol variation is cleared (special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203i off).

When the forced stop command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the forced stop command (when the forced stop display condition is met), the third symbol variation being executed (the third symbol is displayed in response to the first special symbol variation) A forced stop performance for switching the variation display mode of the third symbol variation displayed on the display surface of the device 81 is executed.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, when the forced stop condition is established based on the winning of "Small win B" and the special symbol fluctuation is forcibly stopped, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. , the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is a loss and the lottery result is forcibly stopped. Further, the performance mode of the forced stop performance for forcedly stopping and displaying the third symbol variation being executed is configured to be different depending on the timing at which the forced stop condition is satisfied.

Specifically, the third symbol is changing at a high speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, that is, the third symbol is changing at a speed that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the changing third symbol. If the forced stop display condition is met, a forced stop display is performed in which the third symbol fluctuates at high speed and the third symbol fluctuates in a short period (first period). If the third symbol is changing at a low speed on the display surface of the display device 81, that is, if the third symbol is changing at a speed that allows the player to visually recognize the changing third symbol, the slow fluctuation is performed as a forced stop effect. It is configured to perform an effect in which a forced stop display is executed using a second period longer than the first period described above for the third symbol fluctuation display in the middle.

In other words, while the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, it is difficult for the player to identify the third symbol that is being displayed in a fluctuating manner. In order to avoid giving players a sense of discomfort, the third symbol is forced to be displayed in a short period (first period) in order to immediately notify the player that the forced stop condition has been met. On the other hand, while the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the player can identify the third symbol being displayed in a fluctuating manner, so if a forced stop effect is suddenly performed in that state, the execution will be delayed. If the performance mode of the third symbol variation suddenly changes, it will give the player a sense of discomfort. In addition, the forced stop performance is to stop and display the third symbol in a display mode that ultimately indicates that the result of the special symbol lottery is a failure, so the performance mode of the third symbol variation that is being executed may suddenly switch. After the third symbol is displayed, the third symbol is displayed out of place, which causes a problem in that the player's desire to play decreases.

On the other hand, if the third symbol changes at a low speed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, that is, if the third symbol changes at a speed that allows the player to visually recognize the third symbol that is changing, As the forced stop effect, the forced stop display is configured to be executed using a second period longer than the first period described above for the third symbol fluctuation display during low speed fluctuation, and is currently being executed. The performance mode of the forced stop performance to be executed during the second period is set according to the content of the third symbol variation display, and the system is configured to finally execute the miss display. Therefore, depending on the variation presentation mode of the third symbol at the time when the forced stop condition is met, the period from when the forced stop condition is met until the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is By varying the performance mode and performance period, the forced stop performance can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

When "small win C" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the right variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. Further, "1.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol, and the process of discarding the first special symbol (special symbol 1) being executed is executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned "small win A". Furthermore, when "small win C" is selected during the high probability state (probability variable state) of the normal symbol, a process of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state is executed. That is, "Small hit C" is set as a time-saving ending condition that shifts the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the process to be executed for the first special symbol variation that is being executed is different depending on the selected small win type. It's set. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in which small win type will be selected when a small win is won. Further, depending on the content of the process (interruption, discard) executed in response to the first special symbol variation, the degree of advantage of the game executed later can be varied.

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the special symbol finalization time is configured to vary depending on the selected small win type. Thereby, the period from when the special symbol for indicating a small winning win is stopped and displayed until the small winning game is executed can be varied depending on the selected small winning type. Therefore, it is possible to predict the timing at which a small winning game will be executed and make it difficult to execute a game in which a ball is fired.

In addition, in this embodiment, the small winning game is configured to be executed with the same opening content no matter which small winning type is selected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the selected small winning type Depending on the type of small winning, the type of attacker who performs the opening operation in the small winning game may be different, or the contents of the opening operation (opening time, number of openings) may be different.

Next, the contents of the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202fg will be explained with reference to FIG. 172(b). FIG. 172(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the regular pattern variation pattern selection table 202fg. This normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202fg is a data table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern for the normal symbol lottery, and is based on the acquired value of the second variation type counter CS3 and the set gaming state. Each piece of data is defined so that a different variation pattern (variation time) is selected accordingly.

Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the value of the second variation type counter CS3 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the variation time is set in the range of 10 seconds to 30 seconds. Each fluctuation pattern (long fluctuation) is defined. More specifically, there is a variation pattern of "10 seconds" in the range of "0 to 99", a variation pattern of "20 seconds" in the range of "100 to 149", and a variation pattern of "30 seconds" in the range of "150 to 198". The fluctuation patterns are associated with each other. In this way, by configuring the fluctuation pattern with different fluctuation time to be selectable according to the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS3 acquired when the same gaming state is set, it is possible to The stop display timing of symbol fluctuations, and by extension, the normal symbol fluctuations are stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a winning symbol, making it difficult to predict the timing at which a game with a winning symbol will be executed.

In addition, during the variable probability state, the obtained value of the second variation type counter CS3 is associated with a variation pattern of "0.8 seconds" (short variation) for the entire range of "0 to 198". By configuring in this way, the ball that passes through the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery in a right-handed game executed during a probability change state, can enter the right electric accessory 164 with a high probability. Can be done.

On the other hand, when the potential state is set, a fluctuation pattern of "0.1 second" is associated with the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS3 in the range of "0 to 169", and a fluctuation pattern of "170 to 198 ” is associated with a variation pattern of “10 seconds.” With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the ball to enter the right electric accessory 164 during the probability state than during the probability variable state, and to make the ball enter the right electric accessory 164 appropriately during the probability state. It is possible to cause the ball to enter the object 164.

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. The RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment described above in that a variable probability flag 203fa for storing the high probability state of the special symbol is added, and other than that, the RAM 203 is the same. be. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the types and number of game states that can be set are different from those in the fourth embodiment, so for example, the types and number of game states that can be set can be Although the type and number of information are different, the role of the gaming state storage area 203g and the processing content for updating the stored information are the same, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The variable probability flag 203fa is a flag for indicating that the gaming state has become a variable probability state, and is set to ON when it is determined that the variable probability state is set. Then, it is set to OFF when the end condition of the variable probability state is satisfied.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be explained using FIG. 174. FIG. 174 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. In this embodiment, in contrast to the fifth embodiment described above, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa, a special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, a fluctuation number counter 223fc, a preparation state flag 223fd, and a special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223fe are added. , special figure 2 variable time counter 203ff, RUSH in progress flag 223fg, ceiling effect in progress flag 223fh, and super RUSH in progress flag 223fi are added, but other than that they are the same. Identical elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb will be explained. The special figure 2 variation start flag 223fa and special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb are different from the above-mentioned special figure variation start flag 223d and stop type selection flag 223e in that the target is changed to the second special symbol. are doing. Therefore, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb, the process of determining whether or not to set the flag to ON or the process of determining the setting status of the flag is the first special Whereas the special symbol 2 variation start flag 223fa and special symbol 2 stop type selection flag 223fb are executed based on the symbol variation, the flags are turned on in the process executed based on the second special symbol variation. Processing to determine whether or not to set the flag and processing to determine the setting status of the flag are executed. Since other elements are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The variation counter 223fc is a counter for measuring the number of variations in special symbol variations, and the counter value is updated based on the execution of the special symbol variation.

The ready state flag 223fd is a flag for indicating whether or not the state is in the ready state. If it is on, it means that the state is in the ready state (see FIG. 162(a)), and if it is off, it means that the state is not in the ready state. It means no. In the potential state, this ready state flag 223fd is referred to, and it is determined whether the ready state has already ended (the display has been switched to RUSH), and whether or not to execute the ready state production. , determines whether to perform the RUSH state effect.

The RUSH flag 223fg is a flag for indicating whether or not RUSH is being played (consecutive game mode). If it is on, it means that RUSH is being played (consecutive game mode), and if it is off, it means that RUSH is being played (consecutive game mode). This means that the player is not playing RUSH (consecutive game mode). In the potential state, the preparation state flag 223fd and the RUSH state flag 223fg are referred to to determine which state the presentation mode should be set.

The ceiling effect execution flag 223fh indicates whether the effect (top reaching effect) in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain is being executed, which is executed when the number of variable probability or the number of time reduction is 1 remaining. This is a flag indicating whether If this ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is on, it means that the summit reaching effect (see Figure 161(b)) is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the summit reaching effect is not being executed. do. When the symbol stop timing comes while the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is on, the game shifts to the consecutive game mode and enters the preparation state. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the remaining number of probability variations (time saving number) in the probability variation state is not 1, the time saving ends when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (small win C). The configuration is such that the conditions are satisfied, and the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set to on. In this case, the performance mode is gradually changed according to the subtraction status of the number of probability variations, and compared to the case where the top reaching performance is executed, the top reaching performance will be executed suddenly, so for example, a small hit It is preferable to configure the warp effect to be executed as a dedicated top reaching effect based on the information indicating that C has been won and the setting status of the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh. As a result, the performance executed on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed without any discomfort, and the player can be assured that the top has been reached earlier than planned (a potential state has been set). This can be communicated in an easy-to-understand manner.

The super RUSH flag 223fi is a flag to indicate that the number of special symbols reserved balls reaches a certain number while the RUSH game is being executed, and the RUSH game that is advantageous to the player is being executed. If it is off, it means that the Super RUSH game is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the Super RUSH game is not in progress. By setting this super RUSH flag 223fi on, a super RUSH effect (see FIG. 165) is executed.

<About the main control process in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 175 to 182, details of the control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, like the fourth embodiment described above, has a first special symbol (special symbol 1) lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) and a second special symbol (special symbol 2) lottery. (Special symbol 2 lottery) is configured to be able to be executed overlappingly, and the function of temporarily storing the lottery right of the second special symbol (reservation storage function) is removed from the fourth embodiment described above. In addition, the high probability state of the special symbol can be set, and when a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the types of small winning types that are set are increased, and the small winning type that is set is increased. The process to be executed for the first special symbol fluctuation (special symbol 1 fluctuation) that is being executed is different depending on the The difference is that the state is configured to transition (transition from a high probability state of a normal symbol to a low probability state). Furthermore, as described above with reference to FIGS. 168 to 172, the differences are that the contents stipulated in the various data tables referred to in the control processing executed by the main controller 110 are different. . The rest is the same as the fourth embodiment described above, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 175, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) will be explained. This first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) is different from the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S258 in FIG. 124) of the fourth embodiment described above, in which the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203i is When it is determined that it is not set to on (S581: No), that is, when the first special symbol fluctuation to be stopped this time is a missed fluctuation, the time saving update process (see S862 in FIG. 124) is executed. Changed to time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 175) and when it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to on (S581: Yes), that is, the first special symbol whose fluctuation is stopped this time Among the processes executed when the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, the probability change flag 203fa is added to the process of clearing various flags and various counters based on the stop of the jackpot fluctuation (start of the jackpot game) (S860 in FIG. 124). The difference is that the additional processing (S870 in FIG. 175) is executed, but other than that, they are the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176) executed in the first special symbol variation stop process 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175) will be explained with reference to FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176). This time-saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 176) determines that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to on, in contrast to the time-saving update process in the fourth embodiment described above (see S862 in FIG. 125). The difference is that the gaming state set in the case (S2104: Yes in FIG. 125) is changed, and the rest is the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the seventh embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 167, the gaming states include a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a variable state (high probability state of special symbols, normal It is configured such that three types of game states can be set: a high probability state for symbols, a potential state (a high probability state for special symbols, and a low probability state for normal symbols). When the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to shift to the low probability state. A transition is made from a state in which the variable probability mode is set to a state in which a probability mode (RUSH game) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) will be explained. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177). The seventh embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment described above in that it does not have a second special symbol retention storage function, and therefore starts the variation of the second special symbol (second The content of the information referred to when determining whether the starting conditions for starting the special symbol variation are satisfied has been changed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 177, when the second special symbol variation start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) is executed, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203df is set to on. (S951), when it is determined that it is set to on (S951: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to off (S952), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S951 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203df is set to ON (S951: Yes), then the ball enters the second ball entrance (second right ball entrance 645). It is determined whether the ball has entered the ball (S974). In this embodiment, since the second special symbol does not have a reservation storage function (because it does not have a second special symbol reservation ball number counter and a second special symbol reservation ball storage area), the second special symbol In a state where variation start processing 7 (S280) is executed, it is determined whether the ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery has been acquired.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, when a detection switch (not shown) detects that the ball has entered the second right ball entry port 645, the second special symbol variation start process 7 is performed in the control process of the main controller 110. The detection signal is configured to be output for a period in which (S280) is executed multiple times and is shorter than the shortest variation time set for the second special symbol variation, The configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that a ball has entered the right second ball entry port 645 will not be missed due to processing timings of various control processes executed by the main controller 110. Here, in the process of S974, once winning of the ball is detected, a process for starting the second special symbol variation is executed, and the second special symbol variation is executed at a predetermined variation time. Therefore, even if the control process of the main controller 110 is configured so that the detection signal is output for the length of the period in which the second special symbol variation start process 7 (S280) is executed multiple times, the detection signal is output only once. Based on the output of the signal, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol variation from being executed multiple times. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and a flag may be set so that the currently output detection signal is invalidated when processing for starting the second special symbol variation is executed based on reception of the detection signal. You may add additional processing. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably prevent the second special symbol variation from being executed a plurality of times based on the output of a single detection signal.

In the process of S974, if it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entry port (second ball entry port on the right 645) (S974: Yes), then the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 is executed. (S978), and then executes the same processes of S959 to S963 as the second special symbol variation start process (see S260 in FIG. 126), and ends this process. In addition, in the process of S974, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the second ball entry port (second ball entry port 645 on the right) (S974: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) executed in the second special symbol fluctuation start process 7 (see S280 in FIG. 177) will be explained. do. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178). This second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) is different from the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) of the fourth embodiment described above, in which the special symbol that has been set is The difference is that a jackpot determination corresponding to the probability state is executed, but other than that, they are the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 178, when the second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178) is executed, S1051 and S1052 are the same as the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) described above. If it is determined in the process of S1052 that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1052: Yes), the process of S1053 to S1056 is executed, and the process moves to the process of S1071. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1052 that the time saving end standby flag 203dm is not set to ON (S1052: No), the process directly proceeds to S1071.

In the process of S1071, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203fa is set on, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state of a special symbol (S1071), and if it is determined that the probability change flag 203fa is set on. (S1071: Yes), the lottery result (win/fail determination result) is determined by referring to the data specified in the high probability state of the first winning random number table (first winning random number 7 table) 202fa (see FIG. 168(b)). get. On the other hand, in the process of S1071, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203fa is not set to ON, that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state (S1071: No), the first winning random number table (first winning random number 7 The lottery result (win/fail determination result) is obtained by referring to the data defined in the low probability state of table) 202fa (see FIG. 168(b)).

After acquiring the lottery result in the process of S1073 or the process of S1072, the process of S1058 to S1062, which is the same as the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S955 in FIG. 127) described above, is executed, and the main Finish the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277) will be explained. This special symbol 2 off variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277) is executed in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S956 in FIG. 129) for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. This is a process executed when selecting a variation pattern when the target second special symbol lottery result is not a jackpot (a miss including a small win).

FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277). As shown in FIG. On the other hand, the difference is that when selecting the fluctuation pattern, the processing contents when selecting (determining) the small win type for the small win won this time are different, but other than that, they are the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process 7 (S1277) is executed, first, the process of S1371 which is the same as the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process (see S1257 in FIG. 130) is executed, and this second special If it is determined that the symbol lottery result (special pattern 2 lottery result) is not a small hit (S1371: No), the process of S1377 to S1379 is the same as the special pattern 2 off variation pattern selection process (see S1257 in FIG. 130). Execute and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a small win in the process of S1371 (S1371: Yes), the value of the small win type counter C5 is acquired (S1372), and the small win type is determined based on the value of the acquired small win type counter C5. The small winning type is selected with reference to the selection 7 table 202ff (S1391). Next, the same process as S1374 to S1376 as the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process (see S1257 in FIG. 130) is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the process of selecting the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, the process of selecting the small winning type is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol may be selected. When it is determined in the determination process (second special symbol jackpot determination process 7 (see S978 in FIG. 178)) that the current lottery result is a small win, a process is also executed to select the small win type. It is also possible to define a different small hit judgment value for each small win type, and make it correspond to the small win judgment value (value of the first random number counter C1) used when it is determined that a small win has been won. It may also be configured such that the small winning type is determined by This allows the number of types of counters to be reduced and manufacturing costs to be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 7 (S283) will be explained. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 7 (S283). This second special symbol variation stop process 7 (S283) is a process that is executed when the variation time of the second special symbol variation has elapsed and the second special symbol variation that is in progress is stopped. It differs from the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S263 in FIG. 132) in that a part of the processing that is executed when the second special symbol fluctuation to be processed is a jackpot fluctuation is changed, and other than that. are the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the second special symbol variation stop process 7 (S283) is executed, first, the same processes as S1551 to S1559 as the second special symbol variation stop process (see S263 in FIG. 132) described above are executed, and then the special Figure 2: Set the jackpot flag (the flag corresponding to the second special symbol lottery among the jackpot flags 203i), the special drawing 1 subtraction flag 203dk, the special drawing 2 subtraction flag 203dl, the time-saving end standby flag 203dm, and the probability variable flag 203fa to OFF, The value of the time saving counter 203h is reset to 0 (S1580).

In other words, if one special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a jackpot win, the lottery result and remaining fluctuation time for the other special symbol fluctuation that is being executed are completely discarded and the remaining fluctuation time is stopped and displayed. The information regarding the current gaming state (probability change flag 203fa, time saving counter 203h, time saving end standby flag 203dm) is also reset. Therefore, since the normal state is set during the jackpot game, there are no benefits other than the privilege (prize ball) obtained by placing a ball in the variable ball entry means (first attacker 1650) opened by the jackpot game. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to obtain a benefit, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player is given an excessive amount of benefits.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 with simultaneous variation specifications, after the end of a jackpot game, the special symbol variation that was executed before the jackpot game is restarted, or the number of time reductions is subtracted based on information based on the special symbol variation that was executed before the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player. After completing the process of S1580, the process of S1561 to S1563, which is the same as the second special symbol variation stop process (see S263 in FIG. 132) described above, is then executed, and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the special figure 2 out-of-place stop processing 7 (S1584) will be explained with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 off-position stop processing 7 (S1584). This special figure 2 missing stop processing 7 (S1584) is performed when it is determined that the small hit flag 203dg is set to on (S1651: The difference is that the small winning process (S1671) is executed in response to a ``Yes''. Since the other processing contents are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted. Here, the contents of the small winning process (S1671) executed in the special figure 2 missing stop process 7 (S1584) will be explained with reference to FIG. 182.

FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the details of the small winning process (S1671). This small win process (S1671) is executed when stopping and displaying the second special symbol that has won a small win, and is a process (interruption process, forced stop) according to the selected small win type. This is for executing the discarding process) for the first special symbol variation that is currently being executed.

When the small hit process (S1671) is executed, first, the small hit type set for the current second special symbol variation (special pattern 2 off variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) The selected small winning type) is read out (S1682), and it is determined whether the read small winning type is "small winning A" (S1683). If it is determined that it is "Small hit A" (S1683: Yes), it is determined whether the current state is during the special pattern 1 fluctuation (during the first special symbol fluctuation) (S1684), and it is determined whether the special symbol 1 is currently fluctuating. If it is determined that (S1684: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is set to on (S1685), and the special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203dh is on is set (S1686). , this process ends. In the process of S1684, if it is determined that the special figure 1 is not changing (S1684: No), the processes of S1685 and S1686 are skipped and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1683, if it is determined that it is not "small win A" (S1683: No), then it is determined whether the read small win type is "small win C" (S1687), If it is determined that it is a "small hit C" (S1687: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, whether the current state is in a variable probability state (in a high probability state with normal symbols). (S1688). If it is determined that the current state is in a variable probability state (S1688: Yes), that is, the second special symbol variation that won "small win B" in the second special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state is the current process. If it is, then it is determined whether the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to on (S1689), and if it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is not on (S1689: No), that is, the probability change If it is determined that the state is not the final change, the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1690), and the process moves to S1684 described above. Further, if it is determined in the process of S1688 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0, that is, the current state is not in a variable probability state (S1688: No), or if the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set in the process of S1689. If it is determined that it is set to on, that is, it is the final change in the variable probability state (S1689: Yes), the process of S1690 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S1684 described above.

In other words, if you win "small win C" while in a variable probability state, even if the value of the time saving counter 203h is not decremented to 0, the time saving end standby flag 203dm is forcibly set to ON, so during the variable probability state Before the special symbol variation (lottery) is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), it is possible to shift the gaming state from the variable probability state to the potential state. Therefore, the winning of "small hit C" is set as an ending condition for ending the variable probability state (high probability state of normal symbols). In this embodiment, since the potential state is a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the variable probability state, it is possible to win a jackpot in a state where the number of special symbol drawings executed during the variable probability state is small, that is, during the variable probability state. By setting the value of the time saving counter 203h to 0, the time saving counter 203h is set to 0, so that the state can be changed to a certain state without changing to a certain state and the possibility of shifting to a normal state is low. The ending condition that is established due to the winning of "small win C" is more advantageous to the player than the ending condition that shifts to "small win C". In addition, if the value of the time saving counter 203h is 0 (in a low probability state with a normal symbol), that is, in a normal state or a potential state, the process to end the time saving state is not executed. , the same process is executed when "small win C" is won and when "small win A" is won.

In the process of S1687, if it is determined that it is not "Small win C", that is, if it is determined that the read small win type is "Small win B" (S1687: No), the current special figure 1 is changing. (During the first special symbol fluctuation) (S1691), and if it is determined that the special symbol 1 is fluctuating (S1691: Yes), a special symbol 1 fluctuation stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol 1 fluctuation is set (S1692), the first special symbol on the first symbol display device is stopped and displayed as a missing symbol (S1693), and the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203di is set to 0 (S1694).

Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol among the jackpot flags 203i) is set on, that is, whether the first special symbol variation being executed is a jackpot variation ( S1695), if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol among the jackpot flags 203i) is set on (S1695: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag (jacket flag 203i Among them, the flag corresponding to the first special symbol) is set to OFF (S1696), the stored information regarding the special symbol 1 jackpot is deleted (S1697), and this process is ended. In the process of S1691, if it is determined that the special figure 1 is not changing (S1691: No), this process is directly ended. In addition, in the process of S1695, the special symbol 1 jackpot flag (the flag corresponding to the first special symbol among the jackpot flags 203i) is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol variation being executed is a losing variation. If it is determined that (S1695: No), the process of S1696 and S1697 is skipped and the process ends.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 183 to 192, the content of control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be explained. First, the contents of command determination processing 7 (S4192) will be explained with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 7 (S4192). This command determination process 7 (S4192) is a control process executed in place of the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61), and is similar to the command determination process 7 (S4192) described above. It executes processing corresponding to various commands.

When the command determination process 7 (S4192) is executed, it is first determined whether a status command has been received (S4231), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4231: Yes), the status command reception process is executed (S4232). , this process ends. This received command processing (S4232) is a process similar to the received command processing (see S4213 in FIG. 64) executed in the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 61) described above. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, a state command indicating the current gaming state is received, a mode performance mode corresponding to the gaming state is set, and a corresponding performance mode (for example, , rear image) is set. For example, when a state command indicating a variable probability state is received, a display command corresponding to the presentation mode in which the character 811 climbs a mountain shown in FIG. 161 is set, and when a state command indicating a probable state is received, Display commands corresponding to presentation modes for indicating the preparation state shown in FIG. 162 or the RUSH gaming state shown in FIG. 163 are set. In addition, the details of the switching control of the performance mode during the potential state will be described later.

In command determination processing 7 (S4192), the order of determining whether or not a status command has been received is different from the command determination processing described above (S4112 in FIG. 61). Specifically, it is configured to determine whether a status command has been received before determining whether a special figure variation pattern command has been received. With this configuration, after determining the current gaming state, it is possible to reliably execute the process based on the special figure fluctuation pattern command. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and various command determinations may be performed in the same order as the command determination process described above (S4112 in FIG. 61).

If it is determined that the status command has not been received in the process of S4231 (S4231: No), then it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4203), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4203) :Yes), sets the variation start flag (special figure variation start flag 223d, special figure 2 variation start flag 223fa) corresponding to the received special figure variation pattern command to ON (S4233), and executes the variation pattern command from the received command. Extract (S4234). Then, this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S4203 that the special figure fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), then it is determined whether the special figure stop type command has been received (S4205), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4205: Yes), sets the stop type selection flag (stop type selection flag 223e, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223fb) corresponding to the received special figure stop type command to ON (S4235), and from the received command The stop type is extracted (S4236). Then, this process ends.

If it is determined that the special figure stop type command has not been received in the process of S4205 (S4205: No), the processes of S4208 to S4214, which are the same as the command determination process described above (S4112 in FIG. 61), are executed, and the process of S4214 is executed. In the process, if it is determined that a stop-related command has been received, stop-related process 7 is executed (S4236), and this process ends. The detailed contents of this stop-related process 7 (S4236) will be described later with reference to FIG. 184.

In the process of S4214, if it is determined that a stop-related command has not been received (S4214: No), then the processes of S4216 to S4218, which are the same as the command determination process described above (S4112 in FIG. 61), are executed, and the process of S4214 In the process, if it is determined that a stop related command has been received, win related process 7 is executed (S4237) and this process ends. A detailed explanation of this win-related process 7 (S4237) will be omitted, but in contrast to the above-mentioned win-related process (see S4219 in FIG. 67), the process is based on receiving a small win-related command instead of the accessory win-related command. is executed. This small win related command, like the above-mentioned accessory win related commands, is a small win start command that indicates the start of a small win game, and a small win related command that indicates the start of a round game that is opened by the winning device that is the operating target during the small win game. At least a round command and an ending command indicating the end of the small winning game are included, and processing for setting display commands corresponding to each received command is executed. Thereby, the performance mode corresponding to the small winning game executed by the main control device 110 can be executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

Then, in the process of S4218, if it is determined that the winning related command has not been received (S4220: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, the contents of the stop-related process 7 (S4236) executed in the command determination process 7 (see S4192 in FIG. 183) will be explained with reference to FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop-related processing 7 (S4236). This stop-related process 7 (S4236) is performed in the preparation state setting process (S4641 in FIG. ), and a process is executed to determine whether a special map discard command has been received (S4642), and if it is determined that a special map discard command has been received in the process of S4642 (S4642: Yes), the difference is that a process of executing a special figure discard setting process (S4643) is added, and other than that, they are the same. Identical contents will be given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the preparation state setting process (S4641) will be explained with reference to FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preparation state setting process (S4641). As described above, this preparation state setting process (S4641) is a process for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 162(a)). In this preparation state setting process (S4641), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is on (S8001), and if it is determined that it is off (S8001: No), the transition is made to the preparation state. Since there is no possibility of doing so, this process is ended as is. On the other hand, in the process of S8001, if it is determined that the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is on (S8001: Yes), the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh is set to OFF (S8002), and the display mode of RUSH preparation ( (see FIG. 162(a)) is set (S8003). Next, the RUSH flag 223fg and the ready state flag 223fd are both set to ON (S8004), and this process ends.

By executing this preparation state setting process (see FIG. 185), the display mode of the preparation state can be set from the time of transition to consecutive game mode (RUSH game).

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the potential state is an advantageous game state (continuous game mode) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and small winning games are frequently executed. The normal mode was configured as the most disadvantageous normal mode. Then, by ending the number of variable probability (50 times) in the variable probability state, it is configured to shift to the most advantageous consecutive winning mode. In other words, it is configured to be able to directly shift from a variable probability state to the most advantageous gaming state without going through a jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to have the player play a game in a variable probability state with one goal being to elapse the number of variable probability.

Here, conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which the potential state is set to the most advantageous gaming state, and the potential state can be set after winning a jackpot. However, in such conventional gaming machines, the potential state is not set unless a jackpot is won, so while the game stays in the normal state (that is, until the jackpot is won), the balls held are Since this creates a disadvantageous situation in which the number of players is likely to decrease, there is a problem in that it does not give the player a sense of satisfaction and it is difficult to improve the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, by ending (passing) the number of probability changes in a probability variation state that is more disadvantageous than the probability state, the most advantageous successive winning mode (probability state ). In other words, even if the player does not win the jackpot, the player can easily enter an advantageous state in which he can continue to win prize balls intermittently by simply continuing the right-handed game. By configuring in this way, when the number of fixed variations can be completed, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction and accomplishment, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a state where the probability variation state is set, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific lottery result (small win C), the most advantageous continuous winning mode without elapse of the probability variation number of times. (Possible state). Thereby, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the lottery results other than the jackpot winning during the probability change state.

In addition, the above-mentioned lottery result (small win C) is configured so that it can be won only in a lottery with a special symbol (second special symbol) that is difficult to execute during a variable probability state. Therefore, when a game ball fired in a right-handed game in a variable probability state enters the second right ball entrance 645 with irregular behavior and the second special symbol lottery is executed, the player will feel a sense of anticipation. can have.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the second special symbol is not stored in the reserved memory, the small winning C cannot be won unless the ball enters the second ball entrance 645 during the probability change state. It consists of Therefore, the player can be made to pay close attention to the behavior of the ball during the variable probability state. It should be noted that only a part of the configuration of the present embodiment described above may be adopted. For example, a second special symbol may be retained and stored, and for example, the second special symbol obtained during a jackpot game in which a variable probability state is set. The second special symbol lottery based on the reserved storage of special symbols may be configured to be executed during the probability change state. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute the second special symbol variation a plurality of times immediately after the probability variation state is set. In this case, as a performance during the period in which the second special symbol variation is executed, for example, as a preliminary stage to the performance mode in which the character 811 shown in FIG. (Warp inciting effect) is executed, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is "Small hit C", the character 811 boards the helicopter and executes the effect of reaching the top shown in FIG. 161(b). good.

Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that immediately after the variable probability state is set, a period in which it is easy to shift to the probable state is set. Furthermore, in this case, as a variation pattern of the second special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state, if the number of special symbol variations executed after the probability variation state is set is less than a predetermined number (for example, less than 10 times), , it is preferable to configure the short fluctuation (fluctuation time is 5 seconds) to be easily selected. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly execute the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation obtained during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by frequently opening the right electric accessory 164 during the probability change state, the ball fired in the right-handed game is configured to be difficult to enter the second right ball entrance 645. However, for example, a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) is selected with a small probability (for example, 1/100 probability) as the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, and the fluctuation pattern is temporarily changed to the right. The configuration may be such that a state in which the ball easily enters the second ball entry port 645 can be created. Thereby, it is possible to temporarily make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery during the probability change state. Therefore, in a state where the variable probability state is set, the result of the special symbol lottery becomes a specific lottery result (small win C), increasing the chance of transitioning to the probability state, and improving the interest of the game. be able to. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the "small win C" that triggers the transition from the probability variable state to the probability state is configured so that it can be won only in the second special symbol lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first Even in the special symbol lottery, it may be configured such that the player can win with a slight probability (for example, 1/200) lower than in the second special symbol lottery.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is configured to notify the period from the transition to consecutive game mode (potential state) until the first small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol as the preparation state. Then, when it becomes possible to actually win a prize ball (that is, when the small winning fluctuation starts), it is configured to notify that the player is in an advantageous state (RUSH state). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent players from feeling dissatisfied due to a situation in which prize balls cannot be won for a long time even though the RUSH state is notified.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the probability of getting a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol was set to approximately 1/1 (59/60), but the probability of getting a small win is not limited to this. It may be determined arbitrarily. For example, the small winning probability may be lowered.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the contents of the special figure discard setting process (S4643) will be explained. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure discard setting process (S4643). This special figure discard setting process (S4643) is executed when a special figure discard command is received in the stop related process 7 (see S4236 in FIG. 184). In this embodiment, by executing a right-handed game in the potential state, while securing the reserved ball of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved ball), the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed, and the lottery is frequently executed. It is configured so that a RUSH game in which a small winning game is executed is executed.

During the potential state, the variation time set as the first special symbol variation is likely to be long (600 seconds). Furthermore, the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the potential state is configured to vary depending on the number of special pattern 1 reserved balls, and specifically, when the number of special pattern 1 reserved balls is The structure is such that the smaller the number of balls reserved for special symbol 1 (in the case of 1 or 2), the shorter the variation time is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol variation. In addition, if a specific lottery result ("small win B") is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol variation in progress is discarded (forcibly stopped).

In other words, in this embodiment, during the potential state, the small winning game is frequently executed in the second special symbol lottery, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reduced by a specific small winning winning, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is reduced. A game aiming at an efficient game (a game that increases the number of small winning games executed within a unit time) will be executed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the RUSH game executed during the potential state is divided into a normal RUSH game and a super RUSH game in which the number of small winning games executed within a unit time is increased compared to the normal RUSH game. A suggestive effect that suggests a transition to the Super RUSH game when a specific lottery result ("Small win B") is won in the second special symbol lottery (see Figure 164). ) is configured to be executable. As a result, a player who is playing a game in a potential state is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that a more advantageous state (super RUSH game) exists and the situation until the super RUSH game is executed. This can further increase the player's desire to play.

When the special figure discard setting process (S4643) is executed, it is first determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to on (S8101), and if it is determined that it is not set to on (S8101: No). , since the current state is not a potential state (RUSH game), the process skips the processes of S8102 to S8107, which will be described later, and moves to the process of S8108.

On the other hand, in the process of S8101, if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is set to on (S8101: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter) 203dd is read out. , determines whether the current number of reserved special drawing balls is 3 or not. That is, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is three and the state is forcibly stopped (S8103). Here, if it is determined that the number of special figure reserved balls is 3 (S8103: Yes), the production mode indicating the entry of super RUSH (see FIG. 164(b)) is determined, and the flag during super RUSH is set to on. (S8105), determines the forced stop mode of the first special symbol (S8108), sets display commands to show the determined various modes (S8109), and ends this process.

Here, the process of S8108 will be explained. In this embodiment, since the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to be executed in parallel (overlapping), a specific small hit (small prize) is achieved in the second special symbol lottery. The timing at which the second special symbol variation that won B7) is stopped and displayed is determined independently of the variation timing of the first special symbol variation. Therefore, it may be forcibly stopped (discarded) immediately after the first special symbol variation is started, or it may be forcibly stopped (discarded) immediately before the first special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. Then, the variation mode of the third symbol (decorative symbol variably displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) that is variably displayed in response to the first special symbol variation is variable based on the passage of the variation time. For example, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 in which the variation is started, the third symbol is displayed at such a high speed that it is difficult for the player to distinguish it immediately after the variation starts, and when the variation time is about to end (immediately before the variation stops), the third symbol is displayed. Generally, a low-speed fluctuation display is performed in which the fluctuation speed is slowed down to a level that the player can discern.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, based on the forced stop of the first special symbol variation, the third symbol variation that is being executed is displayed on the third symbol display device at the timing when a command indicating the forced stop is received. If the display mode displayed on the display screen of 81 is stopped and displayed, for example, if the third symbol is displayed with slow fluctuation, the third symbol will be stopped and displayed in the display mode that indicates a jackpot. There was a risk that it would get lost.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the process of S8108, based on the remaining period of the first special symbol fluctuation that is being executed as the forced stop mode of the special symbol (first special symbol), the high speed fluctuation stop mode and the low speed Determine either the stop mode at the time of fluctuation. Then, it is output to the display control device 114 using the display command set in the process of S8109. On the display control device 114 side, the forced stop display mode of the third symbol being variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the type of the forced stop mode included in the received display command. , executes display control based on the determined forced stop display mode.

Specifically, when a display command indicating a stop mode during high-speed fluctuation is received, the image data of the display mode indicating forced stop is inserted into the image data prepared for executing the high-speed fluctuation display, and Display control is performed so that the display suddenly switches to a display mode indicating forced stop. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player without delay that the first special symbol has been forcibly stopped. In addition, during high-speed fluctuations, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the fluctuating third symbol, so even if the display mode indicating a forced stop is suddenly displayed as a stop, it is difficult for the player to identify the fluctuating third symbol. It does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, when a display command indicating a stop mode during low-speed fluctuation is received, the image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is read out, and the image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is read out, It is determined whether or not the state is such that the 3 symbols can be stopped and displayed. If it is determined that the current state is not in the reach state, the image corresponding to the display data in which each third symbol is displayed at a predetermined position (establishment line) among the display data used for low-speed fluctuation display is forcibly stopped. image is determined, and the low-speed fluctuation is continued until the forcibly stopped image is displayed, and then the fluctuation display is forcibly stopped. In addition, if it is in the reach state, image data is created in which the first symbol included in the remaining third symbol row that is changing is replaced with a forced stop symbol indicating a forced stop, and the forced stop symbol is stopped and displayed. The variable display data for forced stop is generated such that the variable display data for forced stop is generated, and display control is executed based on the variable display data for forced stop.

In this way, in the case of forcibly stopping the first special symbol, there is a method for forcibly stopping the third symbol according to the variable display mode of the third symbol being executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. By differentiating the processing, the third symbol can be stopped and displayed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, no matter at what timing the first special symbol fluctuation is forcibly stopped.

In addition, when the above-mentioned display control is executed, the period from when the first special symbol variation is forcibly stopped until the third symbol variation display is stopped and displayed will be the same as the variation display mode of the third symbol variation that is being executed. In this case, for example, in the case of forcibly stopping the first special symbol variation, the period from displaying the first special symbol variation to forcibly stopping until the forced stop is confirmed, or The symbol determination period from when the special symbol indicating the small winning B win in the second special symbol variation where the forced stop condition for forcibly stopping is satisfied until it is confirmed is defined as a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). However, within the predetermined period, various forced stop display controls for stopping and displaying the third symbol variation may be executed. Then, based on the fact that a command indicating that the confirmation period has elapsed (confirmation command) is output from the main controller 110, a third symbol display mode (for example, "123") for confirming forced stop is displayed. good. With this configuration, when the third symbol fluctuation display is forcibly stopped, the period until the third symbol fluctuation display is forcibly stopped is varied depending on the fluctuation display mode of the third symbol fluctuation that is being executed. However, the third symbol fluctuation display can be forcibly stopped within the confirmation period, and furthermore, the third symbol can be displayed in the display mode for forced stop confirmation in the same display mode when the confirmation period has elapsed.

Returning to FIG. 186, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S8103, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawings is not 3 (S8103: No), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for special drawings is 4 (S8106), and it is determined that it is 4. If so (S8106: Yes), a production mode aiming for the top (for example, a production mode in which the character 811 climbs one step higher from the production screen shown in FIG. 164(a)) is determined (S8107), and the process proceeds to S8108. Transition. Further, if it is determined in the process of S8106 that the number is not 4, the process of S8107 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S8108.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (S4153) will be explained with reference to FIG. 187. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (S4153). This variable display setting process 7 (S4153) is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and is in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. , generates and sets a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process 7 (S4153), first, it is determined whether the special symbol fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5201). If it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S5201: No), it is in a state where the variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S5234 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5201: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc (S5231), and the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5202). ), then executes production mode setting processing for generating a display variation pattern command to notify the display control device 114 based on the obtained variation pattern type (S5232), and updates the data in the winning information storage area 223b. Shift (S5233) and proceed to the process of S5234.

In the process of S5234, it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5234). If it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223fa is not on (that is, off) (S5234: No), the variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so S5238 Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223fa is on (S5234: Yes), the value of the variation number counter 223fc is incremented by 1 (S5235), and the special figure 2 variation start flag 223fa is set to off ( S5236), then the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 is executed (S5237). Details of this special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237) will be described later with reference to FIG. 190. After completing the process in S5237, the process moves to S5238.

In the process of S5238, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e or the special map 2 stop type selection flag 223fb provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5238). If it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223e or the special figure 2 variation start flag 223fb is not on (that is, off) (S5238: No), a variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110. Since this is the current state, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure variation start flag 223e or the special figure 2 variation start flag 223fb is on (S5238: Yes), the special figure variation start flag 223e or the special figure 2 variation start flag 223fb is set to off ( S5239), Next, the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5240), and then this process ends.

Next, details of the above-mentioned performance mode setting process (S5232) will be explained. As described above, this production mode setting process (S5232) is a process for setting a production mode according to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command. In this production mode setting process (S5232), first, it is determined whether the current state is a normal state (S8201), and if it is determined that the current state is not a normal state (S8201: No), then it is determined whether the current state is a variable probability state. (S8202). In the process of S8202, if it is determined that the state is not a variable probability state (S8202: No), it means that the state is a potential state (consecutive shot mode), and the ceiling effect setting process is executed (S8203), and the determined effect mode is A display variation pattern command indicating this is set (S8208), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S8202, if it is determined that the state is in a variable probability state (S8202: Yes), in order to determine whether the current first special symbol is the final variation in the variable probability state, the value of the variation number counter 223fc is It is determined whether it is 1 (S8204). In the process of S8204, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc is 1 (S8204: Yes), ceiling effect setting for selecting the performance mode of the last variable display performance before shifting to the RUSH game. The process is executed (S8206), and the process moves to S8208. On the other hand, in the process of S8204, if it is determined that the remaining time shortening number is not 1 (S8204: No), that is, there is no possibility of transitioning to a potential state (consecutive game mode), so the fluctuation pattern command indicates The performance mode corresponding to the variation type is determined (S8205), and the process moves to S8208. On the other hand, in the process of S8201, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S8201: Yes), then the performance mode for the normal mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined. (S8207), and the process moves to S8208.

Next, details of the above-mentioned ceiling effect setting process (S8202, S8206) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 188. As shown in FIG. 188, in the ceiling effect setting process (S8203 (S8206)), first, data in the execution area corresponding to the first special symbol is read out of the winning information storage area 223b (S8301), and the read execution It is determined whether the data in the area is data corresponding to a jackpot (S8302), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S8302: Yes), that is, it is determined that the current special drawing 1 fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation. In this case, the performance mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command (the production mode for notifying the jackpot is determined (S8303), and this process ends. That is, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery) Since the jackpot game is executed without transitioning to the potential state, the presentation mode for notifying the jackpot without determining the presentation mode for the presentation for notifying reaching the top (see FIG. 161(b)). (For example, a presentation mode that displays a display mode indicating a jackpot win while climbing a cliff) is determined. With this configuration, even though the top reaching presentation has been executed, a jackpot game is executed, and then a gaming state other than the potential state is set, which can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S8302 that it is a special symbol change that has won a jackpot, the top reaching effect is not executed regardless of the selected jackpot type. Without limitation, if you have won a jackpot in which the probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, execute the top reaching effect and then further execute the effect to display a display mode indicating that you have won the jackpot at the top. It may be configured as follows. In addition, in this embodiment, the process of determining whether or not to perform the peak reaching performance is executed at the final change of the variable probability state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot game during the variable probability state is executed. If you have won a jackpot with a probability status set after the end (the jackpot is fluctuating), after executing the top reaching effect, an effect will be executed to display a display mode indicating that you have won the jackpot at the top. It may be configured. As a result, it is possible to vary the performance mode of the performance (the performance in which the character 811 aims for the top) performed during the variable probability state based on the remaining period of the variable probability state and the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery. In addition, when the summit reaching performance is executed, the potential state can be reliably set, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the process of S8302, if it is determined that the data read from the execution area is not data indicating a jackpot (S8302: No), the effect mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain (FIG. 169(b) (see S8304), sets the ceiling effect execution flag 223fh to ON (S8305), and ends this process.

By executing this ceiling effect setting process (see FIG. 189), the top reaching effect (see FIG. 169(b)) is performed according to the pre-read result of the lottery result of the first special symbol at the time of transition to the potential state. It is possible to suitably set whether or not the execution is possible.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 190, details of the variable display setting process 7 for special figure 2 (S5237) executed in the above-mentioned variable display setting process 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187) will be described. This special figure 2 variation display setting process 7 (S5237) is a process for setting a variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. When this special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5237) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the RUSH flag 223fg is on (S8401), and it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is OFF. (S8401: No), that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state or the probable state, then it is determined whether the variable probability state is set (S8402).

In the process of S8402, if it is determined that the probability variable state is not set, that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S8402: No), the number corresponding to the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is 2. The variable display mode of the special symbol is determined (S8403), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S8402, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a probability variable state (S8402: Yes), a probability variation setting process ( S8404) is executed, and this processing ends. The details of this probability change setting process (S8404) will be described later with reference to FIG. 191.

In the process of S8401, if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223fg is on (S8401: Yes), then it is determined whether the ready state flag 223fd is on (S8405), and the ready state flag is set. If it is determined that 223fd is off (S8405: No), it means that the RUSH game is in progress (the preparation state has ended), so the second special symbol in the potential state (RUSH game) A RUSH setting process (S8410) for setting the variation display mode of the variation is executed, and this process ends. The details of this RUSH setting process (S8410) will be described later with reference to FIG. 192.

On the other hand, in the process of S8405, if it is determined that the preparation state flag 223fd is on (that is, the preparation state is in progress) (S8405: Yes), then the small winning variation type is notified by the variation pattern command. (S8406), and if it is determined that the small winning variation type has been notified (S8406: Yes), the preparation state flag 223fd is set to off (S8407), and the current variation display performance is performed. As a mode, a presentation mode (see FIG. 162(b)) of the RUSH entry effect that notifies the RUSH entry is determined (S8408), and this processing is ended.

Next, the contents of the probability change setting process (S8404) will be explained with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the probability change setting process (S8404). This probability variation setting process (S8404) is for setting the performance mode when the second special symbol variation is executed during the probability variation state, and if the small win C is won during the probability variation state and the probability variation number ( 50 times), the processing for setting the presentation mode (shortcut presentation mode) when the potential state is set is executed. As described above, in this embodiment, when a right-handed game is executed during a probability change state, most of the balls flowing down the right side area enter the right electric accessory 164, and the first special symbol variation is executed. It is composed of However, if the balls flowing down the right area behave irregularly due to collision, etc., the balls will rarely enter the second right ball entrance 645, and the second special symbol lottery will be executed. There are cases. If a small win C is won by the second special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state, the probability change is not executed without executing the special symbol variation for the number of probability variations (50 times), which is the condition for ending the probability variation state. The configuration is such that the state can be shifted to the potential state. Therefore, when the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the probability change state, a special performance is executed to show the player that the chance to shift to the probability state has arrived. .

When the probability change setting process (S8404) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current second special symbol change is a change in which the small winning C is won (S8501). If it is determined that it is a small win C (S8501: Yes), then the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc is read out (S8502), and the remaining number of probability fluctuations is 5 based on the value of the fluctuation number counter 223fc read in the process of S8502. It is determined whether the number of times is less than 5 times (S8503), and if it is determined that it is less than 5 times (S8503: Yes), a performance mode indicating a small hit RUSH (RUSH game) entry is determined, and the process proceeds to S8506 described later. Transition.

On the other hand, in the process of S8503, if it is determined that the number of probability changes is not less than 5 times (it is 6 times or more) (S8503: No), an effect indicating that a shortcut will be entered into small hit RUSH (RUSH game) The mode (for example, warp effect) is determined (S8504), and the process moves to S8506. Further, in the process of S8501, if it is determined that the current variation has not won the small win C (S8501: No), the process directly proceeds to S8506.

In the process of S8506, the character 811 is dressed in flames ( (S8506), sets display pattern commands indicating the various determined effects (S8507), and ends this process. .

Next, the contents of the RUSH setting process (S8410) will be explained with reference to FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the contents of the RUSH setting process (S8410). In this RUSH setting process (S8410), a process for setting various effects for the second special symbol variation executed during the RUSH game is executed.

When the RUSH medium setting process (S8410) is executed, it is determined whether the super RUSH medium flag 223fi is set to on (S8601), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S8601: Yes), the next Then, it is determined whether the current fluctuation is a small win B winning (S8602). If it is determined that the small hit B has been won (S8602: Yes), the first special symbol variation that is being executed when the variation is stopped is forcibly stopped, so the production mode of the end suggestion production indicating the pinch of the end of the super RUSH is changed. setting (S8603), and determines the RUSH production mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command (S8604), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S8602, if the current variation is not a small hit B winning (S8602: No), or if it is determined in the process of S8601 that the super RUSH flag 223fi is not set to on (S8601: If No), the process directly proceeds to S8604, and then this process ends.

<About another example using the game board configuration of the seventh embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 157, a flow path is formed in the right side area of the game board 13 through which the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can flow down, and a right electric accessory 164 is placed in the flow path. Further, while the right electric accessory 164 is in a closed state (a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the right electric accessory 164), the ball is placed on the opening/closing lid 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164. A flow path (see FIG. 158) is formed so that the ball flows down, and the second right ball entry port 645 is disposed at a position where the ball can enter after flowing down on the opening/closing lid 164r1. Then, according to the opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164 (opening operation pattern of the game per normal figure), the ball flowing down the right side area, and by extension, the flow path (hereinafter, specified The rate at which the balls flowing down the flow path (referred to as the flow path) enter the right electric accessory 164 (the first right ball entrance 164r provided in the right electric accessory 164 (which is the lottery trigger for the first special symbol lottery) The percentage of balls entering the starting port) and the percentage of balls entering the right second ball entry port 645 (the percentage of balls entering the starting port which becomes the lottery trigger for the second special symbol lottery) are varied. It was configured so that it could be done.

Specifically, when the probability variable state is set as the game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation and the right electric The opening pattern of the accessory 164 is defined, and when the probability state is set, the ball that flows down the specific channel will win the right electric accessory 164 more than when the probability variable state is set. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation and the opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164 are defined so as to reduce the rate of fluctuation. In addition, when the normal state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is defined so that the rate of winning the right electric accessory 164 is lower than when the potential state is set. ing. In addition, in both the potential state and the normal state, a low probability state of normal symbols is set, and the opening operation pattern (the opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164) executed in the normal symbol winning game is the same. However, by varying the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the interval at which the game is executed per normal symbol is varied, and as a result, the rate at which the balls flowing down the specific channel land in the right electric accessory 164 is varied. It was composed of

According to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, the starting ports into which the ball is likely to enter (the first right ball entry port 164r, the second right ball entry port 645) are made different depending on the set gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to easily change the type of special symbols for which the special symbol lottery is mainly executed by executing a right-handed game, so when different gaming states are set for the player, different games It was possible to have the player play a sexual game and to improve the interest of the game.

However, in the seventh embodiment described above, the special symbol type in which the special symbol lottery is mainly specified is defined for the set gaming state (for example, the variable probability state), and specifically, the special symbol type in which the special symbol lottery is executed is specified. The first special symbol lottery is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed during the probability state. Therefore, unless the set gaming state is set to be variable, it is not possible to change the special symbol type corresponding to the special symbol lottery that is mainly executed, and a player who has been playing the game for a long time in the same gaming state There was a problem that the players got tired of the game early.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, it is preferable to use each of the following configurations or a combination of each configuration in place of the configuration of the seventh embodiment.

<Configuration example 1: Configuration of general figure fluctuation pattern selection table>
In the seventh embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 172(b), the fluctuation pattern is defined in correspondence with the set gaming state and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS3, and the fluctuation pattern is selected. When the processing is executed, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the acquired value of the second fluctuation type counter CS3 is selected. In other words, in the seventh embodiment described above, when the same gaming state is set, the variation pattern with the same content is prescribed regardless of the number of special symbol variations executed during the gaming state. The configuration was such that a variation pattern was selected based on the value of the second variation type counter CS3 obtained from the data table. On the other hand, in this configuration example 1, according to the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of special symbol drawings executed after the end of the probability variable jackpot game) that is executed while a specific gaming state (probability variable state) is set. The general figure fluctuation pattern selection table is configured so that the selection ratio of the selected fluctuation time and the length of the selected fluctuation time can be varied.

In other words, with respect to the configuration of the normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202fg (see FIG. 172(b)) of the seventh embodiment described above, different variation patterns are created corresponding to the number of special symbol variations after the gaming state is set. They differ in terms of stipulations. Specifically, in the range where the number of special symbol changes after the probability change state is set is 1 to 2 times, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds is specified, and in the range of 3 to 50 times, the above-mentioned variation pattern is specified. Similar to the general figure variation pattern selection table 202fg of the seventh embodiment, a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.8 seconds is defined.

With this configuration, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected as a normal symbol variation from when the probability variation state is set until the special symbol variation is executed twice. Therefore, the predetermined period after the probability variation state is set (the period until the special symbol variation is executed twice) is more right than the period outside the predetermined period (the period after the special symbol variation is executed twice). It is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 645. Thereby, it is possible to easily execute the second special symbol lottery only for a part of the period during the variable probability state. Therefore, a specific small win (small win C) will be won in the second special symbol lottery only for a part of the period during the variable probability state, and the probability will change without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined period (50 times of probability variation). It is possible to easily transition from a state to a probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the probability change state.

In addition, in the above-mentioned configuration example 1, a variation pattern of the normal symbols is defined that can be selected so as to make the predetermined period after the probability change state is set more advantageous to the player than the period other than the predetermined period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured such that a normal symbol variation pattern that is advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected when a specific period of time has elapsed since the probability variation state was set. By configuring in this way, when the specific period elapses without ending the variable probability state, it is possible to cause the player to execute a game that is more advantageous than within the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to motivate a player who has been playing a game for a long time to play the game without changing the game state.

In addition, in the above-described configuration example 1, a different variation time (variation pattern) is selected depending on the number of special symbol variations after the probability variation state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, Regardless of the number of special symbol variations, a variation pattern with a variation time of 2 seconds and a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.8 seconds can be selected, and the probability that each variation pattern is selected is calculated based on the number of special symbol variations. Specifically, when the number of special symbol changes after the variable probability state is set satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, the number of special symbols executed after the variable probability state is set) A variation pattern that is more advantageous to the player (if the number of variations is less than 2, or if the number of special symbol variations after the probability variation state is an even number) is more advantageous to the player than if the predetermined conditions are not met. 2 second fluctuation pattern) may be configured to be more likely to be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to easily set a period during which a game advantageous to the player is executed simply by variably setting the selection ratio of each variation pattern according to the number of variations of the special symbol.

In the above-mentioned configuration example 1, there is one type of regular pattern fluctuation pattern selection table that is referred to when a variable probability state is set. , the variation pattern of the normal symbol may be selected by referring to a different data table. In this case, even if the jackpot type has the same probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game, the winning jackpot Depending on the type, a variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol variation can be selected by referring to a different data table (ordinary symbol variation pattern table). In this case, depending on the type of jackpot, the length of the advantageous period (a period in which games that are more advantageous to the player (for example, the second special symbol lottery) are more likely to be executed than other periods) and the timing when the advantageous period is set are determined. It is better to configure them so that they are different. In addition, if a specific advantageous jackpot type is set, the entire period of the variable probability state is set as an advantageous period, and if a specific disadvantageous jackpot type is set, the advantageous period is set for the entire period of the variable probability state. It may be configured so that it is not set.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, if the configuration is such that games that are more advantageous to the player can be executed during some periods in which a specific gaming state (probability variable state) is set, than in other periods, In addition to the current gaming state, the player is informed whether the current period is an advantageous period (a period in which it is easier to execute games that are advantageous to the player (for example, the second special symbol lottery) than other periods). For example, during the mountain climbing performance (see FIG. 161(a)) performed during the probability change state in the seventh embodiment, the rabbit It is configured to change the display mode to a powered-up character 811 imitating a character 811, display the words "Entering the Powerful Zone" in the main display area Dm, and execute an effect that can shorten the time it takes to reach the top. That's good.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the current period is advantageous in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, for example, by preparing a plurality of regular pattern fluctuation pattern tables with different advantageous periods as the regular pattern fluctuation pattern tables to be referred to during the probability variable state, one Even when the regular pattern fluctuation pattern table is configured to be selectable, it is possible to inform the player of the advantageous period in an easy-to-understand manner. The above-mentioned period-suggesting effects are intended for all effects that are configured to be executed more easily during an advantageous period than outside of an advantageous period. Even if it is a production other than a production that directly explains a certain thing, at the time the production is executed, the possibility that the current period is in an advantageous period is higher than the possibility that it is outside the advantageous period, so it is a period suggestion. Included in the performance. Therefore, the period suggesting performance only needs to be executed at a frequency lower than the advantageous period, and may be executed in a period outside the advantageous period (unfavorable period).

In addition to the above-mentioned period suggesting effect, that is, the effect that suggests to the player that the current period is likely to be advantageous, the regular pattern fluctuation pattern table referred to in the current probability change state is It may be configured to perform a state suggestion effect that suggests that among the plurality of ordinary figure fluctuation pattern tables that can be referred to during the state, it is the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern table in which an advantageous period is likely to be set.

Furthermore, when a ball enters the right second ball entry port 645 in the case where the variable probability state is set, a notification is provided to notify that the ball has entered the right second ball entry port 645. The presentation mode of the presentation may be configured to differ based on the result of determining whether the current period is an advantageous period. For example, if a ball enters the right second ball entrance 645 during an advantageous period. In this case, the ball enters the ball in a state where the frequency of ball entry is high (during an advantageous period), so the notification effect is executed without setting a presentation mode that excessively congratulates the player, and the ball enters the ball with a low frequency. If the ball enters the second right ball entry port 645 in an unfavorable state (during an unfavorable period), a notification effect that can be set when the ball enters the second right ball entry port 645 during an advantageous period. It is preferable to set a performance mode that congratulates the player rather than a performance mode of . In this way, when a plurality of periods can be set that differ in the ease with which the ball enters a specific ball entrance, by varying the performance mode of the notification performance according to the set period, When a ball can be made to enter a specific ball entrance during a period when it is difficult to enter the ball, a notification performance of a special performance mode can be executed.

In the configuration example 1 described above, the specific flow path (through gate 67 Although the configuration is such that the rate at which the balls that have passed through the flow path (the flow path through which the balls flow down) and reaches the second right ball entry port 645 is varied, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when winning a normal symbol lottery. In the case of winning, the length of the period from when the won normal symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed until the winning common symbol game is executed (the winning common symbol confirmation period) can be determined by the type of winning common symbol or the selection. It may be made different depending on the type of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern. In other words, the period from the start of normal symbol fluctuation until the execution of the normal symbol winning game is determined based on predetermined conditions (jacket type, gaming state, number of special symbol fluctuations, value of fluctuation type counter CS3, common symbol lottery result, etc.). It may be configured such that it can be varied depending on the situation.

<Configuration example 2: Opening operation configuration of right electric accessory>
In the seventh embodiment described above, an example is shown in which there is one type of opening operation pattern of the right electric accessory 164 in a game with a common symbol that is executed during a variable probability state, but the pattern is not limited to this, and for example, A plurality of types of opening operation patterns of the right electric accessory 164 can be set in the game to win a normal figure, and the right electric accessory 164 during a game to win a normal figure can be set in a plurality of types according to the set opening operation pattern. The length of the period during which the ball is in the closed state (the ball flows down the opening/closing lid 164r1 and enters the second right ball entry port 645) may be configured to be different. With this configuration, the ball that has flown down the specific flow path (the flow path through which the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down) will be placed in the right second position depending on the winning type of the normal game that is executed during the variable probability state. The rate at which the ball reaches the entry port 645 can be varied.

Furthermore, for example, as an opening operation pattern for a normal game, the first open state (a state in which it is easy to win the ball to the right electric accessory 164) is in the first closed state (the ball to the right electric accessory 164) for 2 seconds. A release operation pattern is set in which the state in which it is difficult to win a prize) is set for 5 seconds and the second release state is set for 0.5 seconds, and when one ball enters the right electric accessory 164 during the game with a common figure, It may be configured such that the game ends when a normal figure hits.

With this configuration, for example, if a ball enters the right electric accessory 164 during the first open state, the game will end at that point, but if the ball enters the right electric accessory 164 during the first open state, the game will end at that point. By executing the game so as not to let the ball enter the right electric accessory 164, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to reach the right second ball entrance 645 during the normal winning game. Further, in this case, it is preferable that an opening operation pattern in which the game per common symbol ends when the period of the first opening state has elapsed can also be set. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting whether or not to shoot a ball during the normal game (play the right-handed game).

In the seventh embodiment described above and another configuration example of the seventh embodiment, in the seventh embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. A flow path is formed in which the ball can flow down, and the right electric accessory 164 is disposed in the flow path, and the right electric accessory 164 is in a closed state (when the ball enters the right electric accessory 164). During the difficult state), a channel (see FIG. 158) is formed so that the ball flows down on the opening/closing lid 164r1 of the right electric accessory 164, and the ball flowing down on the opening/closing lid 164r1 can enter. The second right ball entry port 645 was arranged at a position where Then, according to the opening pattern of the right electric accessory 164 (opening operation pattern of the game per normal figure), the ball flowing down the right side area, and by extension, the flow path (hereinafter, specified The rate at which the balls flowing down the flow path (referred to as the flow path) enter the right electric accessory 164 (the first right ball entrance 164r provided in the right electric accessory 164 (which is the lottery trigger for the first special symbol lottery) The percentage of balls entering the starting port) and the percentage of balls entering the right second ball entry port 645 (the percentage of balls entering the starting port which becomes the lottery trigger for the second special symbol lottery) are varied. The second special symbol lottery is designed to be more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery during a probability change state. In other words, the starting port provided on the upstream side of the specific flow path is configured so that a lottery is executed that is more disadvantageous to the player than the starting port provided on the downstream side. By varying the winning ratio of balls, the winning ratio of balls to the starting port on the downstream side where a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed is varied. However, the invention is not limited to this, for example. , the lottery is configured such that if the ball enters the starting port provided on the upstream side of the specific area, the lottery is more advantageous to the player than if the ball enters the starting port provided on the downstream side. It's okay.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment described above, no matter when the most advantageous potential state for the player is set, specifically, winning a jackpot for which the potential state is set after the end of the jackpot game However, even if the potential state is set after the end of a jackpot game, or even if a predetermined transition condition (for example, 50 times of probability variation) is met during the probability change state and the probability state is set, the probability state At the time when is set, in order to make it easier for the first special symbol to be stored in the reserved memory (special symbol 1 reserved) for a predetermined number (for example, 4), it is executed during a jackpot game or during a variable probability state. It was configured so that the special figure 1 reservation could be obtained in a right-handed game. Specifically, the first special symbol variation is executed during the probability variation state, and the first special symbol variation is not executed during the jackpot game, so when the probability state is set after winning the potential jackpot. In this case, the potential probability state is more likely to be executed when the number of reserved special drawings 1 is the upper limit value (4) than when the potential probability state is set via the probability variable state.

In addition, when the potential state is set, a game (second special symbol lottery) with different degrees of advantage (different variable times) is executed depending on the number of special symbols 1 pending, and a game (second special symbol lottery) is executed. The configuration is such that when the number is small, a game more advantageous to the player is executed than when the number of reserved special drawings 1 is large.

In other words, when the number of probability variations (the number of special symbol variations performed during the probability variation state) reaches 50 times during the probability variation state, the special symbol is It was configured so that the number of pending items would be the upper limit (4) with a high probability. Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment described above, if a small win C is won in the second special symbol lottery during a variable probability state, the variable probability state is changed to a probability state before the number of variable probability reaches 50. It was configured so that it could be migrated. Therefore, for example, if you win a small win C immediately after the variable probability state is set and shift to the probability state, the probability will be lower than if the probability state was set based on the establishment of other transition conditions. Since the execution period of the right-handed game before the probability state is set is shortened, it is possible to easily reduce the number of reserved special symbols 1 at the time when the probability state is set. Therefore, the transition condition can be made more advantageous to the player than the other transition conditions mentioned above (the transition condition that is satisfied when the probability variation number reaches 50 times).

In this way, in order to set a specific gaming state (for example, a potential state), a plurality of transition conditions (jackpot, 50 probability variations, small win C win) are set in advance, and the types of transition conditions that are established are By configuring the degree of advantage after a specific gaming state is set to be variable depending on the situation, the player is interested not only in the gaming state that is set for the player, but also in the transition conditions that are established. be able to. Furthermore, in order to set a specific gaming state (for example, a potential state) in a state where the same gaming state (for example, a probability variable state) is set, multiple transition conditions (50 times of probability variation, small winning C win) are set. As a result, transition conditions that can be established without a jackpot are set in advance, and the degree of advantage after a specific gaming state is set is variable depending on the type of transition condition that has been established. A player can be made to play a game aiming at winning a jackpot and a game aiming at establishing an advantageous transition condition in parallel. Furthermore, the preset specific transition condition (small hit C win) is configured so that the degree of advantage after setting the potential state is easily changed depending on the timing of establishment, so specifically, , If the transition condition is satisfied when the number of reserved special drawings 1 is small, the system is configured so that an advantageous game (Super RUSH) is more likely to be executed after setting the potential state. This allows the player to play the game while having expectations as to whether the transition conditions will be met. In addition, since the specific transition condition (small winning C win) can be established regardless of the number of reserved special drawings 1, it is possible to make the player expect that the specific transition condition will always be satisfied. .

In the seventh embodiment described above, among the plurality of transition conditions for transitioning to the potential state, the transition condition established by winning the small hit C is configured to be most advantageous to the player, but this is not limited to this. It may be configured such that it is more advantageous for the player when the number of probability variations reaches 50 times. In this case, for example, the variable probability state may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the probability state, or if the probability state is set when the number of special drawing 1 reserved balls is large, the probability state is set when the number of balls is small. It may be configured such that a game more advantageous to the player is executed than the state is set.

In addition, as a performance (mountain climbing performance) performed during the variable probability state shown with reference to FIGS. 161(a) and (b), the performance mode of the performance performed when the transition condition is satisfied is It may be changed according to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, for example, if the execution condition for executing an advantageous game is satisfied after setting the potential state (for example, if the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 is 1) If the transition condition is met (in the state of It may be configured to notify that the transition condition has been satisfied in an advantageous state. In addition, the time when you win the small hit C (the time when the second special symbol variation that won the small win C starts), or the time when it is confirmed that the number of probability variations will reach 50 (by anticipating the special symbol 1 pending, At the point when it is determined that the jackpot won't be won before reaching the 50th time, an effect may be performed to prompt the user to interrupt the right-handed game. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the number of special drawing 1 reservations from increasing unnecessarily.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment described above, with the potential state set, the game is interrupted until the first special symbol variation (10 minute variation) of long-term variation is executed multiple times, so that the forced However, by interrupting the game for a long time while in the potential state, the most disadvantageous game for the player is executed. It would be good to set a penalty like this. Specifically, the selected normal symbol variation pattern is configured to be different depending on the number of reserved memories of ordinary symbols (the number of reserved ordinary symbols), and is selected when the number of reserved memories of ordinary symbols is 0. It is preferable that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal pattern fluctuation pattern that is selected when the number of stored normal symbols is greater than 0 (for example, 3). More specifically, the configuration may be such that a regular figure variation pattern in which a long variation time is set is likely to be selected.

With this configuration, if the number of reserved general drawings becomes 0 due to a long-term interruption of the game during a potential state, the player is in a disadvantageous situation where it is difficult to increase the number of reserved special drawings from 0. can be made to play games. In addition, without being limited to this, for example, the general pattern variation pattern may be configured to be selectable based on the number of reserved general symbols and the number of reserved balls for one special symbol. For example, if the number of reserved regular symbols is 0, When the number of reserved figures is 1 or 2, a short variation time is easily set as the variation time of the normal symbol so that the number of reserved balls for 1 special figure is likely to be 3 or more, and the number of reserved ordinary symbols is 0. If the number of reserved special symbols is 0, it is preferable to set a long variable time in order to make it difficult to newly obtain 1 reserved special symbol.

Furthermore, a configuration in which the normal symbol variation pattern is varied depending on the number of reserved memory symbols for normal symbols may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 having the following configuration. Specifically, as a configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, a through gate 67 is also provided in the left side area with respect to the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. (a game in which the ball flows down into the left area) and a right-handed game (a game in which the ball flows down into the right area). The game board 13 has a different configuration in that a variable prize winning device 650 that is opened during a jackpot game is disposed at the lower position of the opening 64, and a left-handed game and a right-handed game are played during a jackpot game. The system is configured so that the user can make a selection. Then, the rate at which the fired balls pass through the through gate 67 is made different depending on whether a right-handed game is played or a left-handed game is played. Thereby, depending on which game is played during the jackpot game, the number of reserved stored normal symbols (number of reserved regular symbols) obtained at the end of the jackpot game can be varied. The game states set after the end of the jackpot game are a first game state in which a larger number of reserved symbols is more advantageous than a smaller number, and a second gaming state in which a larger number of reserved symbols is more disadvantageous than a smaller number. The gaming state is configured to be settable.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting a gaming method during the jackpot game while predicting the gaming state that will be set after the jackpot game ends.

<Modification of seventh embodiment>
Next, a modification of the seventh embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 200. In the seventh embodiment described above, the gaming machine (so-called simultaneous fluctuation) is capable of executing the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 lottery) and the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 lottery) in duplicate. Specifications), when a specific gaming state (e.g., potential state) is set, a long-time (e.g., 10 minutes) fluctuation pattern as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol fluctuation is used as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol fluctuation. It was configured so that a short time (for example, 1 second) variation pattern was set as the variation time, and furthermore, it was configured so that a small win could be won in the special drawing 2 lottery.

By configuring in this way, during the potential state, it is possible to increase the number of times the special pattern 2 lottery is executed than the number of times the special pattern 1 lottery is executed, and the lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special pattern 2 lottery. By making small winning games occur frequently, it is possible to provide advantageous games to players.

On the other hand, in a modification of the seventh embodiment, similar to the seventh embodiment described above, a gaming machine (so-called , simultaneous variation specification), when a specific gaming state (for example, probability variation state) is set, the variation time of one special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) becomes longer (for example, 10 minutes). By configuring the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) so that the variation time of the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is short (for example, 1 second), the other special symbol lottery is preferentially executed.

Then, the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is more advantageous than the lottery of one special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) (for example, the lottery of the second special symbol). It is easier to win a small hit than the first special symbol drawing, or the contents of the jackpot game that will be executed when a jackpot is won), and it is advantageous to the player during a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability state). There are things that make it easier to play games.

In the gaming machine described above, at least during the period in which the variable probability state is set, the first special symbol lottery becomes a disadvantageous lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, and the second special symbol lottery becomes an advantageous lottery that is advantageous to the player. . Furthermore, in the gaming machine described above, the lottery result of one special symbol lottery (for example, the first special symbol lottery) is specified as at least one of the termination conditions for terminating a specific game state (for example, variable probability state). A game feature is provided in which a termination condition is set that is satisfied when the lottery result (for example, a winning or jackpot winning) is achieved, and a number of advantageous special symbol lots are executed until the termination condition is satisfied by the unfavorable special symbol lottery. There are things that can improve the interest of the game.

However, in the gaming machine described above, when a specific gaming state (for example, a variable probability state) that is an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues is limited to the first special symbol lottery. Since the setting is made only based on the result of , there is a problem in that the player cannot be motivated to play the game while expecting that the advantageous gaming state will continue for a long time. Specifically, if the result of the first special symbol lottery is a lottery result that ends the advantageous gaming state (for example, a jackpot win where the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game), a The period until the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the period until the jackpot game based on the lottery result starts) is the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues, and once the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues is set. , there was a problem that the period could not be varied (discarded).

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, when a small hit is won in the advantageous special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) that is mainly executed during the advantageous gaming state, the disadvantageous special symbol fluctuation (second special symbol lottery) that is being executed 1 special symbol variation) can be discarded. In other words, if the result of the unfavorable special symbol fluctuation being executed is a result that ends the advantageous gaming state (for example, a result indicating a jackpot win in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game), the lottery result is By discarding the game, the advantageous gaming state can be extended (continued). In addition, when the currently executed unfavorable special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) is discarded, the number of unfavorable special symbol variations is not updated (added) by the discarded disadvantageous special symbol variation. Therefore, as an end condition for ending the advantageous gaming state, a change number end condition is set that is satisfied when the number of disadvantageous special symbol changes during the advantageous gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2 times). Even in such a case, the advantageous gaming state can be extended (continued).

With this configuration, the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues can be varied based on the lottery result of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol), so that it is possible for the player who plays the game during the advantageous gaming state to The player can be made to play the game with enthusiasm.

Furthermore, in this modification, if a small hit is won in an advantageous special symbol lottery in an advantageous gaming state (variable probability state), a small win type that discards the unfavorable special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) being executed as described above. (Small win B) and a small win type (Small win C) that terminates the advantageous gaming state after discarding the unfavorable special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) being executed, are configured to be able to be set at least. ing.

That is, in the present modification, the termination condition that is established based on the lottery result of the advantageous special symbol (second winning symbol) is set as the termination condition for terminating the advantageous gaming state. By providing a plurality of termination conditions for ending the advantageous gaming state in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the length of the period during which the advantageous gaming state will continue.

In addition, since the end condition that can be satisfied is set based on the lottery result of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) during the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. In addition, as mentioned above, when a small win is won in the advantageous special symbol lottery, the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues can be shortened or lengthened depending on the small win type that is set. When a small win is won in the drawing of an advantageous special symbol (second special symbol), the player can be made to pay close attention to the subsequent game content.

Furthermore, in this modification, similarly to the seventh embodiment described above, the number of reserved balls of the unfavorable special symbol (first special symbol) (the total number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the advantageous special symbol) According to The smaller the number of reserved balls (the total number of reserved balls of advantageous special symbols and the number of reserved balls), the shorter the variation time is set as the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed during the advantageous gaming state (during the probability change state). It is configured to be easy.

As a result, by winning a small hit in the drawing of the advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) and discarding the unfavorable special symbol variation in progress, it is possible to increase the number of times the second special symbol is drawn in the advantageous gaming state. .

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment described above, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the jackpot is won in the next special symbol lottery. The probability state of the normal symbol shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state when a predetermined transition condition (a specific small winning win or execution of a special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times) is established. It was configured like this. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, once the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol drawing can be increased until the next jackpot is won, allowing the player to play with confidence. However, on the other hand, once the special symbol's high probability state is set, the special symbol's high probability state will not end until the jackpot is won, so the special symbol's high probability state Among them, there was a problem in that players' motivation to play decreased.

In contrast, in this modification, a condition is added for the high probability state of the special symbol to transition to a low probability state, and even if the special symbol does not win a jackpot in the lottery, the high probability state of the special symbol changes to a low probability state. It is configured so that it can transition to a stochastic state. As a result, even if the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol may end without winning the jackpot, so it is difficult to play during the high probability state of the special symbol. To allow a player to play a game with a sense of tension.

In addition, in this modification, when a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, when the first transition condition is satisfied, a low probability state of special symbol is set, and When the second transition condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. If the first transition condition is satisfied before the second transition condition, the variable probability state is changed to the short time state (the low probability state of the special symbol). state, high probability state for normal symbols), and if the second transition condition is satisfied before the first transition condition, the state changes from the variable probability state to the potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). The system is configured to transition to a probabilistic state). The normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is configured when both transition conditions are satisfied.

In other words, the configuration is such that the state finally shifts to the normal state through different processes depending on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition are satisfied during the variable probability state. With this configuration, players who are playing in a variable probability state are interested not only in when the variable probability state ends, but also in which gaming state they will transition from the variable probability state. be able to.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above, while the potential state is set, a long time (for example, 10 minutes) variation pattern is set as the variation time of the first special symbol variation, and the normal state is set. While this is set, a long-time (for example, 10 minutes) variation pattern is set as the variation time of the second special symbol variation, and as in this modification, it is possible to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. If a first transition condition is set that can be satisfied even if no prize is won (for example, the number of executions of the special symbol lottery is 50 times), a normal state is set based on the first transition condition being satisfied. Among them, there is a risk that both the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation may vary for a long time (for example, 10 minutes), making it impossible for the player to play the game smoothly. was there.

In contrast, in this modification, from a gaming state (for example, a probability variable state) in which a long-term variation is set as a variation pattern for one special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation), the other special symbol variation It is configured so that there is no direct transition to a gaming state (for example, a normal state) in which a long-term variation is set as a variation pattern (for example, a second special symbol variation) without going through a jackpot winning of a special symbol. , the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are configured so that a situation in which both the variation occurs for a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is unlikely to occur. This allows the player to smoothly play the game.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modification will be explained based on FIG. 193. FIG. 193 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in a modification of the seventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of this modification is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 157) in that the right side area (the right side of the variable display unit 80) of the game area formed on the game board 13 is A part of the structure of the formed region is different, and the other structure is the same. Identical configurations will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 193, in this modification, a distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right side area, and a left side channel 701 is formed on the left side of the distribution member 700 for balls fired in a right-handed game. It is configured so that it can be distributed alternately to the right flow path 702.

A movable lid 1500 that forms the downstream surface of the left flow path 701 is provided on the upstream side of the left flow path 701, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a fixed opening/closing operation is performed by a movable control means (not shown). The movable lid 1500 has two states: an open state in which a ball can enter the first right ball entry port 64b disposed below the movable lid 1500, and a closed state in which it is difficult (impossible) for the ball to enter. The opening/closing operation is performed such that the opening/closing operation is performed such that the opening/closing operation is performed such that the

Specifically, a movable lid opening/closing process is provided as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55), and the movable lid opening/closing process causes an opening period of 0.1 seconds. and a closing period of 0.8 seconds on average are repeated according to a predetermined scenario. The first ball entry port 64b on the right side, which is controlled to open and close in this manner, is configured so that it is more difficult for a ball to enter than the first ball entry port 64.

The balls that flowed down the left flow path 701 and flowed down on the movable lid 1500 (the balls that flowed down the flow path formed on the movable lid 1500 in the closed state) flow down the bent part of the left flow path 701. Then, it flows down toward the electric accessory 640a by a nail planted at a position facing the downstream end of the left flow path 701.

On the other hand, a bent part is formed in the right flow path 702 by the sorting device 700, and a small hit attacker (variable ball entry means) 3650 is arranged so as to form a part of the downstream surface of the bent part. ing. This small hit attacker 3650 is an opening/closing lid 3650a that is controlled to open and close during a small winning game that is executed based on winning a small winning in the second special symbol lottery, and an inflow when the opening/closing lid 3650a is in an open state. It is composed of a flow path through which the ball flows down, and a small winning prize opening 3653 into which the ball that flows down the flow path enters. Regarding the contents of the opening/closing control of the opening/closing lid 3650a during the small winning game, the access control processing executed in the main processing (see FIG. 55) of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above. Since the content is the same as that of , a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the operation of the constantly movable member 1500 will be explained in detail. This constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be variable between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10. There is. Specifically, in the movable member drive process (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 55), the operation is controlled based on the movable scenario stored in the ROM 203. has been done. In this movable scenario, the operation of constantly opening the movable member 1500 for 0.1 seconds and then closing it for 0.8 seconds is repeatedly executed.

In other words, in the game board 13 of this modification, the balls fired in the right-handed game flow into the first flow path 701 at 1.2 second intervals, and the rolling surface where the constantly movable member 1500 is disposed. It flows downstream while rolling. When the timing at which this ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falls onto the always movable member) matches the timing at which the always movable valve 1500 becomes open, The ball passes through the constantly movable member 1500 in the open state and enters the right first ball entry port 64b.

The timing of rolling on the constantly movable member 1500 (or falling onto the constantly movable member) is at 1.2 second intervals, and the timing at which the constantly movable valve 1500 becomes open is 0.9 seconds. Since it is .1 second, the timing at which both of them match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when a right-handed game is played continuously, about four balls will enter the right first ball entrance 64b in one minute.

In other words, in a gaming state where a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a time-saving game, the ball will periodically enter the right first ball entrance 64b, so that the jackpot game will not be possible. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the first special symbol is not held (special symbol 1 pending) to occur when the probability variable state is set after completion of the game. In addition, since the period during which the constantly movable valve 1500 is opened at one time is set as a period (0.1 seconds) during which it is difficult for the player to aim, the first ball entry port is opened in the normal gaming state. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to the player than a left-handed game where the player aims for 64.

To explain specifically, when the game state is normal and a left-handed game is played, it is designed so that about 15 of the 250 balls fired will enter the first ball entrance 64. If the ball enters the ball, five prize balls will be paid out. Further, it is designed so that about 5 balls enter the general ball entrance 63, and when a ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in a left-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, it is possible to allow approximately 20 balls to enter the first ball entrance 64, considering that the prize balls that are paid out will be fired again. Become.

On the other hand, when the game state is the normal state and a right-handed game is performed, the ball is designed so that about 9 of the 250 balls fired will enter the first right ball entrance 64b. If the ball hits the ball, two prize balls will be paid out. Further, the general ball entrance 63 is not provided in the right side area. Therefore, in a right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, approximately 10 balls must enter the right first ball entrance 64b, even considering that the prize balls that are paid out will be fired again. I can only do it. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from playing right-handed games.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the general winning hole 63 is not provided in the game area (right side area) through which the ball fired in the right-handed game passes, when the game state is normal, the right-handed game is more popular than the left-handed game. The general winning hole 63 may be provided based on a design concept that does not give an advantage to the player. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls paid out as prize balls in a right-handed game during a time saving state or a jackpot state.

Furthermore, since the distribution member 700 is provided as a delay means for delaying the flow of the ball on the path until the ball launched in the right-handed game reaches the movable lid 1500, the ball fired in the right-handed game is movable. The timing of reaching the lid 1500 can be made difficult to predict. In addition, in this modification, the purpose is to delay the falling of the ball (to make the falling behavior of the ball different), and to distribute the ball fired by right-handed games into multiple channels. Although the distribution member 700 is provided, the configuration is not limited to this, and different configurations may be used for individual purposes, and the balls distributed to the first flow path 701 by the distribution member 700 may be On the other hand, a delay means (for example, a channel in which the friction coefficient of the falling surface is different from that of other falling surfaces, or a ball flowing downward) to vary the falling period of the ball (the falling period until it reaches the movable lid 1500). A flow path may be provided in which the flow direction of the liquid branches in the middle and ultimately reaches the movable lid 1500 regardless of which direction it branches.

Next, the electric accessories 640a that the balls that flowed down the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702 reach will be explained. As shown in FIG. 193, the electric accessory 640a is provided in an area that can be reached by both the ball flowing down the first flow path 701 and the ball flowing down the second flow path 702. A guiding state (protruding state) in which the ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a can be caused to flow down toward the second ball entry port 640 by the normal game that is executed when a winning is won, and the electric accessory 640a The state is changed to a release state (buried state) in which the ball cannot be received when it reaches the target state.

Furthermore, the variable mode (opening/closing control content) of the electric accessory 640a executed as the above-mentioned normal symbol game is varied depending on the set probability state of the normal symbol, and the high probability state of the common symbol is In the set game state (variable probability state, time saving state), the electric accessory 640a is held for a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) for the ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a to reach the second ball entrance 640. In the gaming state (normal state, potential state) in which the opening and closing are controlled so that the is in the guided state, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set (normal state, potential state), the ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a enters the second ball entry port 640. The opening/closing control is performed so that the electric accessory 640a is in the guided state for a time that cannot be reached (for example, 0.1 seconds).

With this configuration, during a gaming state in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set (for example, a normal state, a probability state), a left-handed game is considered to be an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the advantageous player than a right-handed game. During a game state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), a right-handed game can be a more advantageous game for the player than a left-handed game.

Finally, the balls that have passed through the electric accessories 640a (the balls that have flown down the first channel 701 and the balls that have flowed down the second channel 702) reach the V winning device 2650. This V winning device 2650 is controlled to open and close according to a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and the ball that enters the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game passes through a specific gate. Accordingly, the high probability state of the special symbol can be set after the end of the jackpot game.

Next, the internal structure of the V winning device 2650 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. First, the structure of the V winning device 2650 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. 194 is an exploded perspective view of this V winning device 2650.

As shown in FIG. 194, the V winning device 2650 is combined with an opening forming member 2650b that is arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the back side of the opening forming member 2650b. A base member 2650c for fixing to the game board 13 with screws, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 2650c to light the LED from the back side of the base member 2650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. To open and close the arranged LED board 2650d, the back cover body 2650e that holds the LED board 2650d with the base member 2650c, and the jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a formed in the opening forming member 2650b. An opening/closing unit 2650f having an opening/closing door 2650f1, a channel cover body 2650g that is combined with the back side of a back cover body 2650e to form a channel, and a back cover body 2650e and a channel cover body 2650g. A switching member 2650h that protrudes into the flow path and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 2650i that is locked with the switching member 2650h, a back cover body 2650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 2650g, and the A flow path solenoid 2650k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 2650j to operate the link member 2650i, and a fixing cover body that covers the flow path solenoid 2650k from the back side and is fixed to the back cover body 2650j with screws. It consists of 2650m.

FIG. 195 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 2650. FIG. 195(c) is a top view of the V winning device 2650, and FIG. 195(b) is a sectional view of the V winning device 2650 along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 195(b), the V winning device 2650 is formed with a jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a is a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 195(b). The bottom surface slopes downward to the left. A detection port 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged at the left end of the bottom surface. The game ball that has passed through this detection port 2650a1 is guided to the distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 195(b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 195(b), the opening of the jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a is an opening that allows a ball to enter through an opening/closing door 2650f1 that is configured with a shutter mechanism that can go in and out from the game board 13 side. state and a closed state in which it is impossible to enter the ball (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 2650f1, and the ball is configured to be able to roll on the top of the opening/closing door. In addition, in the open state, the opening/closing door 2650f1 is configured to be evacuated from inside the jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a by being evacuated inside the base member 2650c (inside the game board 13). .

In addition, in the open state, since the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 2650, more game balls can be efficiently input into the jackpot winning opening (jackpot winning opening) 2650a. You can win within. Therefore, it is possible to win the ball into the V winning device 2650 during the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of the game.

FIG. 195(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line La-La shown in FIG. 195(b). As shown in FIG. 195(a), a magnetic sensor 2650c1 having a detection port 2650a1 is fixed to a base member 2650c such that the detection port 2650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 2650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 196, a configuration will be described in which balls guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 2650e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 2650e1 and a special discharge channel 2650e2, which will be described later.

FIG. 196(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is activated so that the balls are distributed to the special drainage channel 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 196(a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guiding piece 2650h2 that guides the ball, and the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guide piece 2650h2 that guides the ball. It is pivotably supported from the back side. Here, the channel cover body 2650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2650h is rotated into the distributed channel from the back side of the channel cover body 2650g. It is configured so that it can be placed anywhere.

As shown in FIG. 196(a), the ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 2650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left, and is guided to the special discharge channel (specific gate) 2650e2. be guided by. The special discharge channel (specific gate) 2650e2 is configured to have a V route through which the balls that have flowed in pass through the specific region (detection switch) 2650e3, and the ball that has flowed into the special discharge channel (specific gate) 2650e2. The passing of the ball is detected by the detection switch 2650e3, and then the ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the above-mentioned detection switch 2650e3 detects a ball during a jackpot game, that is, when the ball passes through the V route, a special symbol is displayed. The configuration is such that a high probability state is set. That is, the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for setting a high probability state of the special symbol. In addition, the switching member 2650h serves as a flow path for the winning ball in the V winning device 2650 during a jackpot game, or a flow path (special discharge flow path (specific gate) 2650e2) that can pass through a specific area (detection switch) 2650e3; This is for setting one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot (difficult) pass through the specific area (detection switch) 2650e3, and sets the flow path solenoid 2650k to ON. The flow path is changed so that the winning ball in the V winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 196(a)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 198, the contents of the transition of the gaming state in this modification will be explained. FIG. 198 is a transition diagram schematically showing the transition contents of the gaming state in a modification of the seventh embodiment. In this modification, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set to 1/200, and in the state where the normal state is set, it is impossible to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64 by playing a left-handed game. Accordingly, a game is performed in which a lottery of the first special symbol is executed. When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol drawing (special drawing 1 drawing), jackpot A is set as the jackpot type at a rate of 40%, and jackpot B is set at a rate of 60%. When a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery), the jackpot C is set as the jackpot type at a rate of 100%.

When jackpot A is set as the jackpot type, the same jackpot game as jackpot A7 (see FIG. 169) of the seventh embodiment described above is executed, and the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. When jackpot B is set, the same jackpot game as jackpot B7 (see FIG. 169) of the seventh embodiment described above is executed, and a variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. In this modification, when a variable probability state is set, the special symbol executed during the high probability state of the special symbol is set as the end condition (first transition condition) of the high probability state of the special symbol (special symbol high probability). The number of drawings (ST number) is set to 50, and as the end condition (second transition condition) of the high probability state of normal symbols (high probability of normal symbols), the number of special symbol drawings executed during the high probability state of normal symbols. (Number of time reductions) 70 times (second transition condition A), or number of special drawing 1 lottery times 2 times (second transition condition B) is configured to be set.

When a jackpot game is executed, a right-handed game is executed. As described above with reference to FIG. 193, by executing the right-handed game during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1) is the upper limit (4). can be easily reached. During the probability change state, a game in which the special drawing 2 lottery is executed is performed by a right-handed game. In this modified example, the special drawing 2 drawing is more advantageous to the player than the special drawing 1 drawing so that the gaming state that is most advantageous to the player is the probability variable state, and This embodiment differs from the seventh embodiment described above in that the special drawing 2 lottery is configured to be more likely to be executed when the high probability state of the symbol is set.

Specifically, the special pattern 2 lottery is configured so that it is easier to win a small win than the special pattern 1 lottery, and the probability of winning a small win in the special pattern 2 lottery is set to 1/20. Furthermore, it is configured so that a gaming state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is more likely to be set after the end of the jackpot game in the case of winning the jackpot in the special drawing 2 drawing than in the case of winning the jackpot in the special drawing 1 drawing. ing. In addition, the potential probability 7 table 203fe3 that was referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the potential state in the seventh embodiment described above is referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the high probability state of the normal symbol, The seventh table 202fe2 for probability variation, which was referred to when selecting a variation pattern in a high probability state of a normal symbol in the seventh embodiment, is configured to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern in a potential probability state. .

In this embodiment configured in this way, a right-handed game is played in which the special drawing 2 lottery is mainly executed in the probability variable state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set and the time saving state, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. A left-handed game is played in which the special drawing 1 lottery is mainly executed in the normal state where the state is set and the potential state.

Next, a description will be given of the relationship between the gaming results during the variable probability state and the content of the transition of the gaming state. As described above, in this modified example, a first transition condition is set to transition from a definite variable state to a time saving state when satisfied, and a second transition condition is set to transition from a definite variable state to a potential definite state if satisfied. has been done. Specifically, as the first transition condition, 50 special symbol drawings (ST times) are set during the high probability state of the special symbol, and as the second transition condition, the number of special symbol drawings (ST number) performed during the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is configured such that the number of executed special symbol drawings (time saving number) is 70 times (second transition condition A) or the number of special symbol 1 drawings is two times (second transition condition B).

In other words, after the variable probability state is set, if the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times without winning a jackpot, it will shift to the time saving state, and after that, if the special symbol lottery is executed 20 times during the time saving state. , it is configured to transition to the normal state. Here, in this modification, during the probability change state, a different fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (number of reserved balls of special symbol 1). It consists of Specifically, similar to the 7 table for potential confirmation 203fe3 in the seventh embodiment described above, when the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is less than a predetermined number (for example, 1, 2), when it is more than a predetermined number (for example, 4) is configured so that a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected.

With this configuration, in a probability variable state where a set period (50 times of ST) is specified, the special drawing 2 lottery, in which a lottery advantageous to the player is likely to be executed, is increased. The player can play an innovative game in which the player wins a small winning B in the second lottery and reduces the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 by discarding the special symbol 1 variation.

Furthermore, in this modification, since the second transition condition B is set, for example, if the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the game can be interrupted and the special figure 1 change can be executed multiple times. When the act of reducing the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is executed, the second transition condition B is satisfied and the state is configured to shift from the variable probability state to the potential state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation of the game decreases due to interrupting the game during the period when the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed during the probability change state in which a long time fluctuation time is likely to be selected. can.

Next, the fluctuation status of each special symbol when the gaming state changes will be explained. First, a description will be given of the flow when the second transition condition B is satisfied in a state where a variable probability state is set and a potential state is set. As mentioned above, since the second transition condition B can be satisfied when the special figure 1 variation is stopped and displayed, a new special figure 1 variation is executed immediately after the potential state is set. For this newly executed special figure 1 variation, the variation pattern (variation time) is selected using the variation pattern table that is referred to during the potential state, so it is used as the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation during the normal state. A variation pattern that can be selected will be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the long-time special figure 2 variation from being executed while the long-time special figure 1 variation is being executed.

On the other hand, a case will be described in which the first transition condition is satisfied during the variable probability state and the time saving state is set. As mentioned above, the first transition condition can be satisfied either when the special figure 1 variation is stopped and displayed or when the special figure 2 variation is stopped and displayed, so the time saving state is set. In some cases, a long-time special figure 1 variation is executed at the same timing. However, the time saving state is configured to continue until the special drawing lottery is played 20 times or until a big hit is won in the special drawing drawing, and the total variation time of 20 special drawing 2 fluctuations executed during the time saving state is The value is configured to be longer than at least the variation time of the special figure 1 variation set during the potential state. The contents of the variation pattern table are defined so that the special figure 1 variation executed during the time saving state is more likely to have a shorter variation time than the special figure 1 variation executed during the potential state.

With this configuration, when transitioning from a variable probability state to a time saving state and then to a normal state, both the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation are performed for a long time (for example, 10 minutes). ) It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the change occurs. In addition, if you win a jackpot in a special drawing lottery while in a time saving state or a potential state, the running special drawing fluctuation will be discarded, so after the jackpot game ends, the game state will change to the one set after the jackpot game ends. A new special drawing lottery will be executed accordingly. Therefore, when a new gaming state is set after winning a jackpot, the long-term special symbol fluctuation that has been running before winning the jackpot continues to be executed even after the jackpot game ends, so that the first special It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which both the symbol variation and the second special symbol variation vary for a long time (for example, 10 minutes).

As explained above, in this modified example, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be executed in duplicate, and the second special symbol lottery is more effective than the case where the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. It is configured so that when a jackpot is won in a symbol lottery, a variable probability state is more likely to be set after the end of the jackpot game. With this configuration, the second special symbol lottery is a lottery (game) more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery in terms of the game state set after the end of the jackpot game.

Note that the same technical idea as this modification may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 having a different playability from that of this modification. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be developed using the first to third embodiments described above. Even if you do not win a big hit in the special symbol lottery, if a predetermined execution condition (for example, the ball enters the special train starting hole or you win a small win in the special symbol lottery) is met, the prescribed game ( The system enables the execution of games (accessory winning games, small winning games), and indicates that a ball that enters a variable ball entry means that is opened during a predetermined game enters a specific area (for example, a V winning hole). The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 in which a jackpot game is executed.

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 197(a) and 197(b), the internal structure of the small hit attacker 3650 is changed, and the ball that enters the small hit attacker 3650 is placed in either the normal winning hole 3652 or the V winning hole 3653. The movable valve 3651 may be configured to move so as to win a prize, and the jackpot game may be executed when the ball enters the V winning opening 3653 (see FIG. 197(b)). Also, even if the ball that enters the small winning attacker 3650 enters the normal winning slot 3652 (see Figure 197(a)), the same prize ball as when winning the V winning slot 3653 will be awarded. It is good to configure it as follows.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 and 200, the contents of the effect executed in this modification will be explained. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, various transition conditions for ending the variable probability state are set, and the variable probability state is configured to shift to a different gaming state according to the established transition condition. Among them, the content of the effect regarding the second transition condition B, which is satisfied when the special figure 1 variation is executed a predetermined number of times (twice) during the probability variation state, will be explained.

In this modification, when a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, similar to the seventh embodiment described above, the small winning type (small winning A, small winning C) that interrupts the running special drawing 1 variation is selected. , a small win type (small win B) that discards the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed, and is configured to be settable. Then, when the special figure 1 variation is stopped and displayed without being discarded, the number of special figure 1 variations is updated.

In other words, when a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery and small winning B is set, the running special drawing 1 fluctuation is discarded, and a new special drawing 1 is created without updating the number of special drawing 1 fluctuations. Configure it so that the variation is executed. Therefore, in the probability change state, if the special symbol 1 variation being executed continues to be discarded, the above-mentioned second transition condition B is configured to become difficult to hold. On the other hand, as a variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation during the probability change state, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation is set for a long time (for example, 10 minutes), and the variation time is set for a short time (for example, 1 minute). In the case where the short special figure 1 variation is selectable, if the long special figure 1 variation is being executed and the remaining variation time is, for example, 8 minutes, the small win B will be won. It is more advantageous for the player to win the small win A and interrupt the feature chart 1 variation than to discard the feature chart 1 variation. That is, there were cases where it was possible to make it difficult for the second transition condition B to hold.

Specifically, if the newly executed special pattern 1 variation after discarding the currently running feature pattern 1 variation is a short feature pattern 1 variation, than when the feature pattern 1 variation is not discarded, As the variation time of the short special figure 1 variation elapses, there is a possibility that the number of changes in the special figure 1 will be updated.

Therefore, in this modified example, in the state where the probability variable state is set, the situation of the special figure 1 variation being executed (the length of the remaining variation time) and the special figure 1 variation to be executed next are set. Based on the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of It is configured to execute a performance that suggests whether or not it is true. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the game content during the probability change state in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 199(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display contents when the RUSH period variable effect is executed when a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery during the variable probability state (RUSH). FIG. 199(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an extension display indicating that the RUSH period has been extended as a result of the RUSH period variable effect. Further, FIG. 200(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an extended display indicating that the RUSH period has been shortened as a result of the RUSH period variable performance, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an extension display indicating that the RUSH period has been extended as a result of the variable performance. In addition, among the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in this modification, the same elements as in the seventh embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. do.

As shown in FIG. 199(a), during the RUSH period, if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is a predetermined lottery result (big hit, small win, part of the loss), a rabbit will be displayed in the main display area Dm. An effect (duration variable effect) in which a character 811 imitating a character 811 discovers a treasure box 812 to which a bonus bag 812h is attached is executed. Then, the words "What's in the bonus?" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The treasure box 812 is a display mode mainly for showing the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery to be executed, and the bag 812h shows how the RUSH period (variable probability period) is changed based on the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery. This is a display mode for notifying the player of the current situation.

After the period variable effect shown in FIG. 199(a) has started, when the special drawing 2 variation is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 199(b), from the opened treasure box 812, the current second An effect is executed in which a result display mode 812a indicating the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery 2) is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 199(b), as the result display mode 812a, a display mode of "V" indicating that a small hit has been won in the special drawing 2 lottery is displayed. In addition, as the result display mode 812a, if the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a small win, a display mode imitating the letter "V" is displayed, and if it is a jackpot, a display mode imitating the character "win" is displayed. If the result is an error, a display pattern imitating a "cross" mark is displayed.

Then, from the opened bag 812h, a status display mode 812j indicating whether the RUSH period (probability variable state period) is variable (transferred to a state where it is easy to change) based on the lottery result of the current special drawing 2 lottery. An effect in which is displayed is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 199(b), as the status display mode 812j, a display mode of "extension" indicating that the RUSH period has been extended is displayed. In addition, as the status display mode 812j, in addition to the display mode of "extension" indicating that the RUSH period has been extended, "unfortunate" indicating that the RUSH period has been shortened, and the small hit C are set and the RUSH period ends. “End” indicates the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery that is subject to the variable period production, “?” that does not affect the RUSH period because the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery that is subject to the variable period production is a lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery that is subject to the variable period production A display mode such as "congratulations" is displayed to congratulate the result as a jackpot.

Here, regarding the method of setting various display modes displayed when the period variable effect is executed, the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIGS. 183 to 192) Explain using. First, in the state command reception process (see S4232 in FIG. 183) executed in command determination process 7 (S4192 in FIG. 183), it is determined whether the current gaming state is in a variable probability state, and whether the current gaming state is in a variable probability state is determined. If it is determined that ``RUSH in progress'' shown in FIG.

Next, instead of the variation display setting process 7 for special figure 2 (see S5237 in FIG. 190) executed in the variation display setting process 7 (see S4153 in FIG. 187), the current special figure 2 variation is the jackpot variation, A selection process is executed to determine whether the fluctuation is a small hit fluctuation or a loss fluctuation, and to select whether to perform a variable period performance based on the determination result. In this selection process, it is selected whether or not to execute the period variable effect based on the contents defined in a dedicated data table (period variable effect selection table). Specifically, if this special drawing 2 fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, it will be applied at a rate of about 20%, if it is a small hit fluctuation, it will be 100%, and if it is a miss fluctuation, it will be changed at a rate of 10%. The contents of the period variable performance selection table are defined so that execution of the variable performance is selected.

Here, if you select to execute a period variable production in the jackpot fluctuation, the display format of "Win" will be displayed as the result display mode 812a, and the display format of "Congratulations" will be displayed as the situation display mode 812j, in accordance with the stop timing of the special figure 2 variation. A display command for displaying the display mode on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. In addition, when it is selected to execute a period variable effect in the out-of-range variation, the result display mode 812a is a "cross mark" display mode, and the situation display mode 812j is a "?" display mode, in accordance with the stop timing of the special figure 2 variation. A display command for displaying the display mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set.

On the other hand, if you select to execute the period variable performance in the small hit fluctuation, then read out the small hit type set in the current small hit fluctuation, and at the stop timing of the special drawing 2 fluctuation, the special drawing 1 being executed A type determination process is executed to determine whether it is a small win type that causes variation to be interrupted or a small win type that causes it to be discarded. Next, the remaining time of the currently running special figure 1 variation is calculated based on the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 223fe, and based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation currently being executed is calculated. The variation time of the special figure 1 variation (variation pattern command included in the winning information stored in the reservation first area) is predicted.

As a result of the type determination process, if it is determined that it is a small hit type that interrupts the special pattern 1 variation, the remaining time of the special pattern 1 variation at the time of interruption is the variation time of the next special pattern 1 variation. If the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation at the time of interruption is shorter than the variation time of the next special figure 1 variation, the display mode of "extension" is displayed as the status display mode 812j. A display command for displaying a display mode of "Sorry" on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. In addition, as a result of the type determination process, if it is determined that the small winning type causes the special figure 1 variation to be discarded, the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation at the time of discarding will be the variation time of the next special figure 1 variation. If the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation at the time of discard is shorter than the variation time of the next special figure 1 variation, the display mode of "unfortunate" is displayed as the situation display mode 812j. A display command for displaying the display mode of "extension" on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is set. Furthermore, if the small hit type set this time is small hit C, the high probability state of the normal symbol will transition to the low probability state at the stop timing of the special symbol 2 variation, so the status display mode 812j will be "End". A display command for displaying the display mode on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set.

As explained above, in this modification, even if the same small hit type is set, the timing at which the small hit variation is stopped and displayed, and the special figure 1 variation to be executed next time The performance result of the period variable performance is configured to be variable in accordance with the set variation pattern. In other words, as a performance result of the variable period performance, at the timing when the current small hit variation is stopped and displayed, the small hit type is such that the special pattern 1 variation that is being executed is interrupted at the stop timing of the special pattern 2 variation, It is configured to relatively determine which is more advantageous to the player between the small winning type that is discarded and to set the performance mode (display mode) of the period variable performance based on the determination result. ing. Therefore, no matter at what timing the small win fluctuates, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not a small win type advantageous to the player has been set at that time.

In addition, as mentioned above, in this modification, the production mode of the period variable production is configured to be set relatively, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the remaining The production mode of the variable period production may be determined depending on whether the variation time is longer than a specific time (for example, 1 minute), or the remaining variation time when the special figure 1 variation is discarded is longer than a specific time (for example, 1 minute). , 30 seconds) may determine the performance mode of the variable period performance.

Further, the technical idea of the seventh embodiment described above and the technical idea of the modification of the seventh embodiment may be combined. For example, in the potential state of the seventh embodiment, an ending condition other than winning the jackpot is set. , the potential state may also be configured to end when the end condition is satisfied.

Specifically, the first termination condition can be satisfied when the total number of drawings of the first special symbol and the number of drawings of the second special symbol reaches 100, and the number of drawings of the first special symbol is 5. A second end condition that can be established when the second special symbol is reached and a third end condition that can be established when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a specific small win (small win C) can be set. Just do it.

With this configuration, when a potential state that is advantageous to the player is set for the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above, it is possible for the player to know how long the potential state will continue. It can be difficult to understand. In other words, in the seventh embodiment described above, once the potential state is set, the potential state continues at least until the next jackpot game is executed (until the jackpot is won). There was a problem that the game became monotonous, but in this modification, it is possible to have the player play the game while expecting that the potential state will continue for a long time or that the game will continue until the jackpot is won. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In addition, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, there is a small win type (small win A) that interrupts the first special symbol variation in progress (small win A), and discards the second special symbol variation in progress (forced by a loss). A plurality of small winning types including at least a small winning type (small winning B) that causes the game to stop) can be set. Then, when small win B is set as the small win type and the first special symbol variation is discarded, the number of drawings of the first special symbol during the potential state is updated by the discarded first special symbol variation. It is configured so that it does not occur. With this configuration, the ease with which the above-mentioned second end condition is satisfied during the potential state can be varied based on the lottery result of the second special symbol. Further, the degree of advantage of the lottery result of the second special symbol can be varied depending on the execution status of the first special symbol.

For example, in a gaming machine that is configured to be able to set at least a variation time A (2 minutes) and a variation time B (10 minutes) as the variation time of the first special symbol in the potential state, the variation time B (10 minutes) may be set. ) is executed, and if the remaining time of the first special symbol variation being executed is longer than 2 minutes, the first special symbol variation being executed may be discarded. , it is more advantageous for the player to be interrupted, and in a state where the remaining time of the first special symbol variation in progress is shorter than 2 minutes, it is better for the player to have the first special symbol in progress discarded than to be interrupted. be advantageous to

Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in both the lottery result of the special symbol and the fluctuation situation of the first special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the degree of advantage to the player can be varied by a combination of a plurality of events (special symbol lottery, fluctuation status of the first special symbol), it is possible to provide a game that is difficult to predict to the player.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned technical idea may be applied to a gaming machine using the configuration of the third embodiment. In this case, the processing for the special symbol fluctuations being executed may be changed depending on the winning type obtained when winning the special electric actuation opening.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, in a gaming machine that can execute the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery in duplicate (so-called simultaneous variation specification), the second special symbol lottery result is changed to the second special symbol lottery result. Accordingly, the length of the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set is varied by discarding or interrupting the first special symbol variation in progress. In other words, by discarding the first special symbol variation, the end condition that could be established based on the number of executions of the first special symbol lottery is made difficult to satisfy, thereby aiming at a long-term advantageous gaming state. , Instead of this, a specific area is provided within the small hit attacker that is released in the small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and when the ball passes through the specific area. It may also be configured such that a jackpot game is executed.

In the seventh embodiment described above, a configuration is used in which only the first special symbol has a retention memory function, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both the first special symbol and the second special symbol can have a retention memory function. A function may be provided. In this case, in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (potential state), only the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is used as the number of reserved balls that is referred to when selecting the variation time of the second special symbol to be executed. It may be configured to refer to the total number of reserved balls that is the sum of the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol. Furthermore, the variation time of the second special symbol may be selected based on the difference between the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. The greater the value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol from the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, the more likely a fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time) advantageous to the player will be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. It is best to configure it so that

With this configuration, the player has to reduce the number of balls reserved for the first special symbol while acquiring balls reserved for the second special symbol, so the player interrupts the game and suspends the number of balls reserved for the first special symbol. Acts that reduce the number of pitches can be suppressed. In addition to this, the total number of reserved balls is the sum of the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol, and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol. The variation time of the second special symbol is selected based on both the difference and the total number of reserved balls is a specific number (for example, 5 balls) or more, and the difference is 3 balls or more. In this case, it is preferable to configure the second special symbol so that a variation pattern advantageous to the player (a variation pattern with a short variation time) is easily selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. This allows the player to actively play the game, thereby improving the performance of the game.

In the seventh embodiment described above, when a gaming state (potential state) advantageous to the player is set, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is a specific number (1 or 2), , a variation pattern (a short-time variation pattern) more advantageous to the player is selected as the second special symbol variation than cases other than the specific number, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is the specific number. Although a small value is set, it is not limited to this, for example, the specific number may be set to multiple values (for example, 3 or 4) including the upper limit number (4) of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. However, it is also possible to use separate values (for example, one or three). In this case, if a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery and a small win type is set that discards the first special symbol variation in progress, the small win will be advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. can be varied according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. In other words, depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, there are cases where it is more advantageous for the player to discard the first special symbol variation, and cases where it is more advantageous for the player not to discard (interrupt) the first special symbol variation. can be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player more interested in the relationship between the lottery result of the second special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment described above, there is one type of variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol when a gaming state (potential state) advantageous to the player is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a large number of jackpot types are provided in which a variable probability state or a probability state is set after the end of the jackpot, and the jackpot type is referred to during the probability state based on the set jackpot type. In order to make the fluctuation pattern tables different, a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables may be provided to be referenced during the potential state. In this case, the second special It is preferable to vary the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol in which a variation pattern advantageous to the player (a short-time variation pattern) is likely to be selected as the symbol variation. With this configuration, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol that the player aims at during the probability state can be varied, so it is possible to provide the player with a game that is difficult to predict. Furthermore, if a plurality of variation pattern tables are provided that are referred to during the potential state, some of them may be displayed to the player as a second special symbol variation, regardless of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. An advantageous variation pattern table in which an advantageous variation pattern (a short-time variation pattern) is easily selected (always selected), and a second special symbol variation that is advantageous to the player regardless of the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol. It is preferable to provide one or both of a disadvantageous variation pattern table in which variation patterns (short-term variation patterns) are difficult to select (never selected).

In addition, in the modification of the seventh embodiment described above, the time saving number is not subtracted when the first special symbol variation being executed is discarded, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol It may be configured such that the number of time reductions is subtracted when the variation is discarded. With this configuration, when a gaming state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set, a short period of time (for example, 5 seconds) is set as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. The variation pattern is configured so that it is easy to select, and the variation pattern in which a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is set is configured to be easily selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation. Then, in the second special symbol variation that is executed efficiently in response to the first special symbol variation, the probability change state is maintained until a small win that discards the first special symbol variation in progress is won a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). It is possible to provide players with novel gameplay in which they can play the games in the game.

In the seventh embodiment described above, when the number of stored first special symbols becomes one or two during the potential state, the variation time of the second special symbol variation is configured to be shortened. Ta. Furthermore, when a specific small hit (small win B) is won in the second special symbol lottery, the number of retained memories of the first special symbol is reduced by discarding (forced stop) the first special symbol variation in progress. It was composed of Further, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the reserved memory of the first special symbol can be acquired in a game executed during the potential state (right-handed game). In addition, the variation time of the first special symbol variation executed during the potential state is configured to be long (for example, 10 minutes). With this configuration, as a game in a potential state, a jackpot or small win advantageous to the player can be generated in the second special symbol lottery in which a lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed. This is an unprecedented game in which a game in which a large number of prize balls are won by winning a game, and a game in which the retention memory of the first special symbol is reduced and the execution frequency of the second special symbol lottery is increased are simultaneously executed. It was something that could be provided to players.

On the other hand, when the number of stored first special symbols is four (upper limit), the second special symbol lottery may be executed more frequently. In this case, in contrast to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, the configuration may be such that it is difficult to obtain the reserved memory of the first special symbol during a game in a potential state (right-handed game). In this case, unlike each of the embodiments described above, winning a specific small win (small win B) in the second special symbol lottery is disadvantageous to the player.

Even in this case, it is easier to draw a special symbol (second special symbol) that is advantageous to the player according to the number of reserved special symbols (first special symbol) that are disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to make the size different. In addition, in this case, for example, by acquiring the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol up to the upper limit during a jackpot game in which the potential state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the second special symbol lottery can be carried out advantageously. This makes it easier to set the state in which the Therefore, during the jackpot game, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to acquire the number of stored first special symbols up to the upper limit.

In addition, even if the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is acquired up to the upper limit during a jackpot game, the process of starting the first special symbol fluctuation after setting the potential state is better than starting the second special symbol fluctuation. Since it is executed before the process, it is possible to prevent the second special symbol variation from being executed in an advantageous state after setting the potential state. In addition, as a control process of the main control device 110, the process of starting the second special symbol variation may be configured to be executed before the process of starting the first special symbol variation. With this configuration, for example, when the potential state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is varied (decreased) from the number of reserved memories acquired during the jackpot game. The second special symbol variation can be executed without any trouble.

As explained above, in the seventh embodiment, when the number of reserved special symbols stored (the number of special symbols reserved balls) is a specific number (for example, 1), a game that is advantageous to the player (for example, the first A first game (for example, a game that forcibly stops special symbol fluctuations) that makes it easier to execute special symbol fluctuations (2 special symbol fluctuations), and also makes it easier to set the number of reserved memory of special symbols (number of special symbol reserved balls) to a specific number. ), and a second game that makes it difficult to set a specific number (for example, a game that stops special symbol fluctuations after a fluctuation time elapses). In addition, the design is such that the specific number of special figure reserved balls (for example, 1), which makes it easier for the player to play a game advantageous to the player, is smaller than the upper limit number of special figure reserved balls (for example, 4). However, when the current number of reserved special symbols balls is more than a specific number, the first game is configured to be executed more easily than when it is less than the specific number. In addition, when the current number of reserved special symbols balls is a specific number or less than the specific number, the first game is configured to be more difficult to execute than when it is greater than the specific number.

By configuring this way, the number of reserved balls of special symbols can be brought closer to a specific number simply by having the player play the game with the aim of executing the first game. It is possible to make the player play an easy game.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment described above, the number of special figure reserved balls that makes it easy for the player to execute an advantageous game is set to be smaller than the upper limit number of special figure reserved balls, but the number is not limited to this, for example. The upper limit number of special figure reserved balls may be set as the number of special figure reserved balls (specific number) that makes it easy for the player to play an advantageous game. In this case, when a game that forcibly stops the special symbol variation is executed, the number of special symbol reserved balls is likely to decrease, resulting in a disadvantageous game for the player. In other words, it is possible to provide the player with an innovative gaming experience in which the player is forced to play the game with the aim of not executing the game in which the special symbol variation is forcibly stopped.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 to 215. In the seventh embodiment described above, the processing content for the first special symbol variation being executed is configured to be different depending on the small win type that is set when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. Ta. Specifically, when small hit A or small hit C is set as the small hit type, the special symbol variation in progress is interrupted, and when small win B is set, the special symbol variation in progress is stopped. It was configured to be destroyed.

In the pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, no matter what the lottery result of the first special symbol variation that is being executed, processing according to the set small winning type is executed, so for example, if the small winning is won There is a problem in that even if there is a jackpot variation, which is a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player, the jackpot variation is discarded based on a small win. In addition, when such a configuration is used, a high expectation performance in which the first special symbol variation being executed is highly expected to be a jackpot will be executed before the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. This causes the player to notice that the jackpot variation has been discarded (the jackpot winning has become invalid), making it difficult to perform a high expectation performance.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment described above, when a gaming state (potential state) advantageous to the player is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, In addition, since the second special symbol is configured not to be stored on hold, for example, the second special symbol that won a small hit is stopped and displayed at a timing before the first special symbol that won a jackpot is stopped and displayed. Even if a means is provided to determine in advance whether or not the jackpot fluctuations will stop displaying, the timing at which it is determined that the jackpot fluctuations will not be stopped and displayed will be just before the jackpot fluctuations are stopped and displayed. There was a problem in that it was difficult to implement (the time corresponding to the varying time of).

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, when a small winning game is executed (when special processing is executed for a special symbol variation that is being executed), depending on the content of the special symbol variation that is being executed, This embodiment differs greatly from the seventh embodiment described above in that it is configured such that the content of the process is determined based on the process. More specifically, at the time when a small winning game is executed based on one special symbol drawing (at the time when the special symbol indicating a small winning win is stopped and displayed), the fluctuation pattern of the other special symbol fluctuation that is being executed If the determination result is a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds or more), the other special symbol variation being executed is discarded, and the specific variation pattern is determined. If it is other than the pattern, it is configured so that the other special symbol variation being executed can be interrupted.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, as a variation pattern of a special symbol variation (jackpot variation) that has won a jackpot, an advantageous jackpot type in which a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a probability-variable jackpot) is executed, and an advantageous jackpot type in which a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a probability-variable jackpot) is executed, and a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player. It is configured such that a different variation pattern is selected depending on the disadvantageous jackpot type in which a big jackpot game (for example, a normal jackpot) is executed, and furthermore, a variation pattern is selected depending on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. It is configured to be different.

More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is large, the variation with a variation time of less than 30 seconds is set as a variation pattern corresponding to the advantageous jackpot type than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is small. A pattern is configured to be easily selected, and a variable pattern in which a variable time of 30 seconds or more is set is configured to be easily selected as a variable pattern corresponding to a disadvantageous jackpot type.

With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is large, a jackpot game advantageous to the player (for example, a probability-variable jackpot) is more likely to be executed than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is small ( It is possible to make a jackpot game disadvantageous to the player (for example, a normal jackpot) difficult to execute (easily discarded due to a small win). In other words, the proportion of probability-variable jackpots at the time of jackpot winning can be varied depending on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to accumulate the number of reserved balls of special symbols with the expectation that an advantageous jackpot game will be executed, and as a result, the performance of the game can be improved.

In addition, the eighth embodiment is different from the seventh embodiment described above in that it is configured so that a small win can be won in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. There is. With this configuration, even if a jackpot is won in either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot can be canceled due to the small win in the other, The proportion of the probability-variable jackpot at the time of jackpot winning can be reliably varied according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol.

First, with reference to FIG. 201, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 201 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 201, the configuration of the game board 13 in this embodiment differs from the modification of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. The difference is that the configuration of a part of the lower area of the display unit 80 is different. The other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and their explanations will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 201, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the eighth embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the modification of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 193). The first channel 701 and the second channel 702 through which the balls distributed by the distributing member 700 can flow down are provided extending to the lower side of the right area, and the through gate 67 and the electric The configuration and arrangement position of the object 640a have been changed, and instead of the small hit attacker 3650, a small hit attacker (second attacker) that is opened in a part of the small win game that is opened in the small win game. ) 5650 is disposed at the center lower position of the game board 13. Other than that, the components are the same, and the same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the modification of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 193). The balls distributed to the first flow path 701 by the distribution member 700 pass through the bending path 701a, pass through the through gate 67, and flow out to the lower right side area. In addition, the balls distributed to the second flow path 702 flow down the third flow path 703a provided on the downstream side, flow into the inlet 704a, and enter the back side of the first flow path 701 (see FIG. 201). The ball flows down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the rear side (as seen from the viewpoint), passes through the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, and flows out from the outlet to the lower right side area on the game board 13. . The balls distributed to the two channels (first channel 701, second channel 702) by the distributing member 700 merge below the right side area, flow over the variable winning device (first attacker) 2650, and exit. It flows into the port 66.

Next, the through gate 67 and the second ball entry port 640, which are arranged in the right side area of the game board 13, will be explained. In this embodiment, a through gate 67 is disposed downstream of the first flow path 701 having a bending path 701a, and a second incoming ball is disposed downstream of the second flow path 702 (lower end of the fifth flow path 704b). A port 640 is provided. With this configuration, the balls flowing into the second flow path 702 at 1.2 second intervals can be caused to flow down toward the second ball entry port 640 without reducing the speed of the balls flowing down. Therefore, since the interval between the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the balls are connected in the second flow path 702 and a plurality of balls enter the second ball entry port 640 at the same time. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In addition, if you do not notice that the electric accessory 640a has been opened and the third symbol display device 81 informs you that the electric accessory 640a is open, the ball can be quickly transferred to the second ball entrance 640. You can let the ball enter the ball.

In addition, the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery, and the electric accessory 640a, whose operation is controlled by winning the normal symbol, are divided into different channels (first channel 701, Since the distribution member 700 is disposed in the second flow path 702), if the distribution member 700 is destroyed so that the balls flow down only to one of the flow paths (if the distribution function is disabled), the second ball entry port It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the ball at 640. In other words, when the through gate 67 and the electric accessories 640a are arranged in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is destroyed and a state is created in which the balls flow down only in one flow path. This makes it possible to create a situation in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second ball entry port 640, but by using the configuration of this modification, it is possible to create a situation in which it is easy to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640. It is possible to suppress the creation of a situation where it is easy to cause this.

Next, the case where the ball flows down the second flow path 702 will be explained. The second flow path 702 is configured so that the period during which the balls flow down is shorter than that of the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, the configuration is such that it takes about 1.5 seconds for the spheres that have flowed into the second flow path 702 to flow out from the outlet. With this configuration, when 100 balls are fired toward the right area in one minute, the balls that flow into the first flow path 701 and the balls that are fired next to the second flow path 701 The balls flowing into the ball flow down the lower right area of the game board 13 (the area where the first variable winning device 2650 is arranged) almost simultaneously (with a difference of about 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the gaming state (big win state or small win state) in which the first variable winning device 2650 is released, it is possible to easily win a plurality of balls at once.

Further, a part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701, so that the plurality of flow paths overlap when viewed from the front. In this way, by forming a plurality of ball channels using the depth direction of the game board 13, the space for forming the ball channels (the area occupied by the ball channels on the game board 13) can be reduced. can.

Further, the ball outlet of the second flow path 702 is located below the outlet of the first flow path 701 (downstream of the second ball entry port 640), and The ball is configured to flow out downstream of the ball flowing out from the flow path 701. As a result, the balls that flowed out from the outlet 704c with force (the balls that flowed out at a higher speed than the balls that flowed down the first flow path 701) directly collided with the balls that flowed out from the first flow path 701, resulting in irregular It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball flow.

In this embodiment, a configuration is used in which the distribution member 700 alternately distributes balls fired in a right-handed game into two channels, but other configurations may also be used. The configuration may be such that the balls are distributed to the channels at different ratios instead of alternately (1:1), or the balls may be distributed to three or more channels. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the balls are randomly distributed to a plurality of flow paths depending on the weight of the balls or the timing of the flow. Further, in this embodiment, the distribution member 700 is used which changes the distribution destination of the next passing ball depending on the weight of the passing ball. Separate members may also be used.

Next, the lower area of the game board 13 where the small hit attacker 5650 is arranged will be explained. This small winning attacker 5650 is a variable ball entry means that is opened in a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 201, the small hit attacker 5650 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and the ball flowing down on the game board 13 reaches it by the nail planted in the game board 13. It is designed to be difficult. Therefore, when a small win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small win game in which it is difficult for the player to win a prize ball will be executed.

In this embodiment, when a small hit is won with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the control is configured to interrupt or forcibly stop the other special symbol variation that is being executed, and further, the execution It is configured to switch the control content to be executed based on the variation content of the other special symbol variation. In other words, if the player wins a small hit in the first special symbol lottery, it is difficult for the player to win the prize ball, but it is possible to perform predetermined control (interruption or forced stop) on the second special symbol fluctuation that is in progress. This will serve as an opportunity for implementation.

<About the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 202 to 208. The eighth embodiment differs from the seventh embodiment described above in that a partial configuration of the ROM 202 and a partial configuration of the RAM 203 included in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are different. Other than that, they are the same. Identical configurations will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 202, the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 202, the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 168(a)) in that the ROM 202 has a table of 8 random numbers for small winnings instead of 7 small winning random number tables 202fb. 202gb, jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd instead of jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd, variable pattern selection 8 table 202ge instead of fluctuation pattern selection 7 table 202fe, small hit type instead of small hit type selection 7 table 202ff The difference is that a selection 8 table 202gf is provided, and the rest is the same.

Here, the contents of the small winning random number 8 table 202gb will be explained with reference to FIG. 203. FIG. 203 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small winning random number 8 table 202gb. As shown in FIG. 203, the small hit random number 8 table 202gb also defines a small hit determination value for the first special symbol. Specifically, for the first special symbol of the symbol type, the small hit determination value is defined in a range where the value of the first random number counter C1 is "300 to 599" regardless of the probability state of the special symbol, For the second special symbol of the symbol type, the small hit determination value is defined in the range of "550 to 599" for the value of 1 of the first random number counter C1, regardless of the probability state of the special symbol.

In other words, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit is approximately 1/2 of that when the first special symbol lottery is executed, and the probability of winning a small prize is approximately 1/12 of that when the second special symbol lottery is executed. It is configured to win. In addition, in this embodiment, when a small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small winning attacker 5650 in which a ball cannot (or is difficult to) win during the small winning game is opened. is executed and when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, a small win game is executed in which a variable prize winning device 65 which is released during the jackpot game is released. Therefore, even if it is set to win a small hit with high probability in the first special symbol lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from being given too many specific balls (prize balls). In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, it is set to win a small hit with a lower probability than the small win probability in the first special symbol lottery, and in a variable probability state or a probability state in which the game is executed by a right-handed game. , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls he has.

Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd will be explained with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd. As shown in FIG. 204, this jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd specifies the winning device on which the jackpot operation is executed (the winning device to be released) in contrast to the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 169) described above. The difference is that the value of the time saving counter 203h that is set after the end of the jackpot is different, and other than that, they are the same. In addition, for convenience of explanation, each jackpot type used in the seventh embodiment described above and each jackpot type used in the present eighth embodiment have different names (for example, jackpot A7 and Jackpot A8) are the same except for the elements for which there is no explanation regarding the differences. Detailed explanations of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 204, in the eighth embodiment, when a normal jackpot (jackpot A8, jackpot D8) is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the settings are set at the time of winning the jackpot. Regardless of the current gaming state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0, that is, the high probability state of normal symbols is not set after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, if you win jackpot C8 which is set at a rate of 20% among the jackpot wins in the first special symbol lottery, the value of the time saving counter 203h will be 10000 regardless of the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot. is set to In other words, the configuration is such that the probability variable state is essentially set until the next jackpot is won.

As mentioned above, the jackpot types that are set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery are defined as jackpot types that have different degrees of advantage for the player, and the jackpot types that have different degrees of advantage for the player are "Jackpot A8", "Jackpot A8", “Jackpot B8” and “Jackpot C8” are defined. In other words, "Jackpot C8" is defined as the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, if you win a variable jackpot in the second special symbol lottery (if you win "Jackpot E8"), the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100 regardless of the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot. . That is, when winning the "jackpot E8", a variable probability state is set 100 times (100 special symbol fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot game.

In other words, in this embodiment, when a right-handed game is executed during a variable probability state and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol are executed in parallel (overlappingly), the most advantageous jackpot type is " A game is executed in which the player aims to win the jackpot C8 and not to win the jackpot A8 and jackpot D8 in which the variable probability state ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206, of the variation pattern selection tables in the eighth embodiment, the 8 table for probability variation 202ge and the 8 table for potential probability 202ge, which are referred to during the probability variation state, will be explained. do. FIG. 205 is a diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the 8-table for definite variations 202ge, and FIG. 206 is a diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the 8-table for potential definites 202ge. .

In this embodiment, a right-handed game is executed in a state where a variable probability state and a probability state are set, and a game in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed overlappingly is performed. The variation pattern that is set when a jackpot is won is configured to vary depending on the selected jackpot type. Furthermore, based on the total number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (number of reserved balls of special symbol 1) and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (number of reserved balls of special symbol 2), different The structure is such that a variation pattern can be selected.

Specifically, the variable time selected when the player has won a jackpot advantageous to the player is configured so that the larger the total number of reserved special symbols is, the shorter the variable time selected when the player has won a jackpot advantageous to the player, than when the total number of reserved special symbols is shorter. The variable time selected when the player has won a disadvantageous jackpot is configured to be longer when the total number of reserved special figures is larger than when the total number of reserved special figures is shorter than when the total number of reserved special figures is short.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won in one of the special symbol drawings, control is executed for the other special symbol variation that is being executed, depending on the variation pattern of the other special symbol variation that is being executed. It is configured to have different contents, and specifically, if the other special symbol variation that is being executed is a variation pattern of 30 seconds or more, processing is executed to discard that special symbol variation. , if the variation pattern lasts less than 30 seconds, a process is executed to interrupt the special symbol variation.

With this configuration, when the total number of reserved special symbols is large, the special symbol fluctuation is discarded when a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player is set than when the total number of reserved special symbols is small. When a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is set, the special symbol variation can be made difficult to discard (easily interrupted). Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game so as to maintain a state in which the total number of reserved special symbols is large.

As shown in FIG. 205, in the probability variation 8 table 202g2, there are variations that differ based on the special symbol type, the result of the validity judgment (result of the selected type), and the number of reserved special symbols (total number of reserved special symbols). A pattern is defined.

More specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the jackpot type is "jackpot A" among the jackpots where the judgment result is a jackpot, and the number of special symbols reserved (total special symbol In the range of "0 to 3" (number of reservations), a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is associated as a fluctuation pattern to the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), and the number of special drawings reservation In the range of (total number of reserved special drawings) from 4 to 7, a long variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is associated as a variation pattern to the entire range of variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198). stipulated.

In addition, if the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the number of reserved special symbols (total number of reserved special symbols) is In the range of "0 to 3", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated as a fluctuation pattern to the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), and the number of special symbols on hold (total special symbol In the range of "4 to 7" (pending number), a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"). .

The symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the jackpot type is "jackpot C", and the number of special symbols reserved (total number of special symbols reserved) is "0" among the jackpots where the judgment result is jackpot. ~3'', the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) is associated with a super long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of special figures on hold (total special figure hold In the range of "4 to 7", the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198") is associated with a super short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds as a fluctuation pattern. .

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the winning/failure judgment result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of reserved special symbols (total number of reserved special symbols) is "0 to 3". In the range of , a long variation with a variation time of 35 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1 as a variation pattern, and the number of special symbols on hold (total number of special pictures on hold) is " 4 to 6'', the entire range of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) is associated with a middle variation with a variation time of 25 seconds as a variation pattern, and the number of special figures on hold (total special figure on hold) In the range where the number) is "7", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern in association with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In addition, if the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the judgment result is a jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot D" and the number of reserved special symbols (total number of reserved special symbols) is In the range of "0 to 3", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is associated as a fluctuation pattern to the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), and the number of special symbols on hold (total special symbol In the range of "4 to 7" (pending number), a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 35 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern in correspondence with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"). .

The symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the jackpot type is "jackpot E", and the number of reserved special symbols (total number of reserved special symbols) is "0" among the jackpots where the judgment result is a jackpot. ~3'', the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) is associated with a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 35 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of special drawings on hold (total number of special drawings on hold) ) is "4 to 7", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern in association with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the winning/failure judgment result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of reserved special symbols (total number of reserved special symbols) is "0 to 7". In the range, that is, the entire range, a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is associated and defined as a fluctuation pattern with the entire range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, in the 8 table for potential confirmation 202g2, the special symbol type, the result of the judgment of validity (result of the selected type), and the number of reserved special symbols (total number of reserved special symbols). Different fluctuation patterns are defined based on the

More specifically, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the jackpot type is "jackpot A" among the jackpots where the judgment result is a jackpot, and the number of special symbols reserved (total special symbol In the range of "0 to 4" (number of reservations), a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is associated as a fluctuation pattern to the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), and the number of special drawings reserved In the range of (total number of reserved special drawings) from 5 to 7, a long variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is associated as a variation pattern to the entire range of variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198). stipulated.

In addition, if the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the number of reserved special symbols (total number of reserved special symbols) is In the range of "0 to 4", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is associated as a fluctuation pattern to the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), and the number of special symbols on hold (total special symbol In the range of "5 to 7" (pending number), a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern in correspondence with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"). .

The symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the jackpot type is "jackpot C", and the number of special symbols reserved (total number of special symbols reserved) is "0" among the jackpots where the judgment result is jackpot. ~4'', the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) is associated with a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of special drawings on hold (total number of special drawings on hold) ) is "5 to 7", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern in association with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the winning/failure judgment result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of reserved special symbols (total number of reserved special symbols) is "0 to 6". In the range of , a long variation with a variation time of 35 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1 as a variation pattern, and the number of special symbols on hold (total number of special pictures on hold) is " In the range "7", a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern in correspondence with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In addition, if the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the judgment result is a jackpot, the jackpot type is "jackpot D" and the number of reserved special symbols (total number of reserved special symbols) is In the range of "0 to 4", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is associated as a fluctuation pattern to the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"), and the number of special symbols on hold (total special symbol In the range of "5 to 7" (pending number), a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern in correspondence with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 ("0 to 198"). .

The symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the jackpot type is "jackpot E", and the number of reserved special symbols (total number of reserved special symbols) is "0" among the jackpots where the judgment result is a jackpot. ~4'', the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) is associated with a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds as a fluctuation pattern, and the number of special drawings on hold (total number of special drawings on hold) ) is "5 to 7", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 28 seconds is defined as a fluctuation pattern in association with the entire range ("0 to 198") of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In addition, the symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the winning/failure judgment result is incorrect (including small hits), and the number of reserved special symbols (total number of reserved special symbols) is "0 to 3". In the range of , a long variation with a variation time of 35 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the variation type counter CS1 as a variation pattern, and the number of special symbols on hold (total number of special pictures on hold) is " 4 to 6'' range, the entire range of the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) is associated with a middle variation with a variation time of 325 as a variation pattern, and the number of special drawings on hold (total number of special drawings on hold) ) is "7", and the entire range ("0 to 198") of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with a short variation with a variation time of 15 seconds as a variation pattern. As explained above, in this embodiment, when the execution condition for executing specific control (for example, interruption or discard) with respect to the special symbol variation being executed is satisfied (for example, when executing a small winning game), The content of the specific control to be performed is changed according to the content of the special symbol variation being executed. The variable display mode of the special symbol variation being executed (the variable display mode set at the time of execution of the special symbol variation) is configured to be switched to the variable display mode according to the content of the specific control. As a result, the switching content of the variation display mode can be changed depending on the content of the special symbol variation being executed, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, the switching conditions for switching the variation display mode of the special symbol variation being executed to the specific variation display mode (the variation display mode that causes a forced stop) according to the set gaming state They differ in the ease with which they are established. Furthermore, the ease with which the switching conditions are established is varied (the length of the selected variation time is varied) depending on the type of special symbol being executed and the set jackpot type. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting how the variable display mode will change if the execution condition is met. In addition, in this embodiment, the ease with which the execution condition is satisfied is configured to differ depending on the special symbol type, and specifically, the lottery results ( The probability of a small hit (winning) is varied depending on the special symbol type, and the length of the variation time of the special symbol variation set when a small win is won is also varied. Thereby, the game result can be greatly different depending on which special symbol type is executed at which timing and which variation indicates which lottery result. Note that in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, a specific variable time is selected in accordance with each condition, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable time may be selected in accordance with each condition. A configuration may also be adopted in which a plurality of variation times that can be selected are defined, and a variation pattern with a different variation time is selected depending on the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. Further, in the present embodiment, a variation time of 30 seconds is set as a threshold value as a condition for switching the content of the specific control to be executed, but the threshold value is not limited to this, and a plurality of threshold values may be set. Further, in this embodiment, a variable time (for example, 28 seconds, 30 seconds) that approximates a threshold value set as a condition for switching the content of the specific control to be executed is selected. Thereby, when a variable performance corresponding to the selected variation pattern is executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, a variable performance with the same performance mode can be executed. In addition, the difference in the variation time (2 seconds) can be dealt with by delaying the start timing of the variation performance from the start timing of the special symbol variation, or by making the end timing of the variation production earlier than the end timing of the special symbol variation. If possible, the configuration may be such that a still image (for example, an image displayed at the start of the variable effect or an image displayed at the end of the variable effect) is displayed during the difference period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 207, the contents of the small winning type selection 8 table 202gf in the eighth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning type selection 8 table 202gf. This small hit type selection 8 table 202gf is different from the above-mentioned small hit type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 172(a)) in that the small hit type is also specified for the first special symbol, and the small hit type is also specified for the first special symbol. The difference is that the release target that is released in the game has been changed, the symbol confirmation time has been changed, and the control content for special symbol fluctuations during execution has been changed, but other than that, they are the same. be. The same content will be designated by the same reference numeral and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

To specifically explain the contents stipulated in the small win type selection 8 table 202gf, "small win A8" is associated with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 89". , "Small win B8" is associated with the range "90-99". Since the range of values that the small win type counter C5 can take is 100 from "0 to 99", the percentage of "small win A8" selected when winning a small win is 90% (90/100), " The selection ratio of "Small win B8" is set to be 10% (10/100).

When "small win A" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the small win attacker (second attacker) 5650 is opened for 0.1 seconds. Further, "0.1 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol, and a process of interrupting the second special symbol (special symbol 2) being executed is executed. Here, when the process of interrupting the second special symbol (special symbol 2) being executed is executed, the process of interrupting the process of measuring the elapsed time of the variation of the second special symbol variation being executed is executed. executed. Specifically, when a small winning game is executed, the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag is set to on, and while the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag is set to on, the second special pattern (special pattern 2 ) is executed to skip the process of updating the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203dj indicating the variation time (remaining variation time). Then, with the end of the small winning game as a trigger, the restart condition is established (the special figure 2 temporary stop flag is set to OFF), and the interrupted process of updating the value of the special figure 2 variable time counter 203dj is restarted. With this configuration, while the small winning game is being executed (while the interruption condition is satisfied), it is possible to prohibit the remaining variation time of the second special symbol variation being executed from decreasing. Therefore, while the small winning game is being executed, for example, the second special symbol variation that has been won may be stopped and displayed, and the winning games (big winning game, small winning game) may be executed repeatedly. may be prohibited. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

In addition, since the process of measuring the elapsed time of the special symbol fluctuation that is being executed is simply interrupted (skip), after the restart condition is met, the first special symbol fluctuation that was being executed before the small winning game is can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the results of the special symbol lottery that has already been executed. In addition, in this embodiment, when the interruption condition is satisfied in response to winning a small hit, a process is executed to interrupt the special symbol fluctuation being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special symbol variation in progress may be continuously executed, and the stop display of the first special symbol variation may be interrupted when the variation time of the special symbol variation has elapsed. In other words, even if the interruption condition is met, the update process that updates the variation time of the special symbol variation will continue to be executed, and if the update process is executed until the preset variation time has passed, it will be interrupted. It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not the conditions are met, and when it is determined that the suspension conditions are met, the stop display of the special symbol variation is not executed until the restart conditions are met. Thereby, there is no need to interrupt the update process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation, so the processing load can be reduced.

Furthermore, when "Small win A" is selected, the opening target of the small win game becomes the small win attacker (second attacker) 5650, and a small win game in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball during the small win game is executed. .

When "Small win B" is selected, a small win game is executed with the same operation content as "Small win A" described above. Further, depending on the variation status of the second special symbol being executed, either a process of interrupting the special symbol 2 variation being executed or a process of forcibly stopping (discarding) it is executed. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, in some cases where a small hit is won in one of the special symbol drawings, the content of the control to be executed for the other special symbol fluctuation is changed depending on the situation of the other special symbol fluctuation ( It is configured so that it can be switched based on the fluctuation situation, setting situation). Specifically, if the variation pattern set for the other special symbol variation that is being executed is a variation pattern that has a variation time of 30 seconds or more, that special symbol variation is forcibly stopped (discarded). , when the variation pattern has a variation time of less than 30 seconds, the control content can be switched so that the special symbol variation is interrupted. With this configuration, it is determined whether or not to discard the lottery result of the special symbol lottery that is being executed depending on the fluctuation status of the special symbol fluctuation that is being executed, so the timing of winning the small winning B8 is The player can be made to pay close attention to the timing.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the content of the variation pattern, that is, the length of the variation time is set as a condition for switching the control content for the special symbol variation being executed, for example, it is possible to respond to a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player. By simply defining the variation pattern table so that the variation time of the variation pattern becomes longer, it becomes easier to forcibly stop (discard) the special symbol variation corresponding to a lottery result disadvantageous to the player. Note that the conditions used to determine the control content are not limited to these, and for example, the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed, and the determination result of whether or not the lottery result satisfies a specific condition. The result of the control content may be determined based on the following. Further, the control content to be executed for the first special symbol variation in progress may be determined based on the combination of the first special symbol variation in progress and the lottery result of the second special symbol that won the small hit. .

Next, the contents of the small hit type corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2) as the symbol type in the small hit type selection 8 table 202gf will be explained. "Small win C8" is associated with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 79", and "Small win D8" is associated with the range of "80 to 89". , "Small win E8" is associated with the range "90-99". Since the range of values that the small win type counter C5 can take is 100 values from "0 to 99", the percentage of "small win C8" selected when winning a small win is 80% (80/100), " The proportion of "Small win D8" being selected is 10% (10/100), and the proportion of "Small win E8" being selected is 10% (10/100).

When "small win C8" is selected, a small win game is executed in which the jackpot attacker (first attacker) 2650 is opened for 1.5 seconds. Further, "0.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol. In addition, when "Small win D8" is selected, the same small win game as the above-mentioned "Small win C8" is executed, and furthermore, depending on the fluctuation status of the first special symbol during execution, Either the process of interrupting the special figure 1 variation or the process of forcibly stopping (discarding) it is executed. In addition, the content of the control process when interrupting or forcibly stopping the first special symbol fluctuation based on "small win D8" is that the object of the control process executed based on "small win B8" is changed to the second special symbol. Since it is only a change from the first special symbol to the first special symbol, a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 208 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 208, this embodiment differs from the RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment in that a special fluctuation flag 203ga is added, and is otherwise the same. Identical configurations are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special variation flag 203ga is for indicating whether the special symbol variation to be executed is a variation pattern for which a variation time of 30 seconds or more is set, and when the variation time is set for 30 seconds or more. Set to on. In this embodiment, when a small winning variation that has won a specific small winning type is stopped and displayed, the other special symbol variation is interrupted according to the variation pattern set for the other special symbol variation that is being executed. It is configured to be able to switch between executing a process and discarding (forcibly stopping) a process. In other words, in one special symbol lottery, the processing conditions for switching the variation mode being executed for the other special symbol variation to a variation mode that is different from the variation mode set when executing the other special symbol variation. The configuration is such that when the above is established, the variation mode after switching is changed depending on the variation mode being executed.

With this configuration, when the above-mentioned processing conditions are met, the type of variation mode to be switched to is determined based on the other special symbol variation, which provides surprises to the player. It is possible to provide certain games.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 to 215, the content of control processing by the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be explained. The eighth embodiment differs from the seventh embodiment in that it is structured so that a small hit can be won in the first special symbol lottery, and when a fluctuation pattern is selected, the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more. A process has been added to determine whether a variation pattern that is set has been selected, and when a special symbol variation that has won a small hit is stopped and displayed, it is executed for the other special symbol variation that is being executed. The difference is that processing to determine the processing content is added, but other than that, they are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in this 8th embodiment, the characteristic processing contents of this 8th embodiment will be explained using various control processes executed for the first special symbol, but the same processing contents are , is also executed in the control process of the corresponding second special symbol, but since the explanation would be redundant, detailed explanation using illustrations will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 209, the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386) will be explained. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386). This first special symbol jackpot determination process 8 (S386) is different from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S356 in FIG. 121) of the seventh embodiment (fourth embodiment) described above, in which the lottery result of this time is The difference is that when it is determined that it is not a jackpot (see S457 in FIG. 121), special figure 1 loss variation processing 8 (S481) is executed, but other than that, they are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 loss fluctuation processing 8 (S481) executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing 8 (see S386 in FIG. 209) will be explained with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of special figure 1 off variation processing 8 (S481). In this special symbol 1 winning variation process 8, when a big hit has not been won in the first special symbol lottery (when a winning has been lost), a process for determining whether or not a small winning has been won is executed. In addition, regarding the detailed content, the difference is that the processing target is switched from the second special symbol to the first special symbol with respect to the above-mentioned special symbol 2 off fluctuation processing (see S1059 in Fig. 128), and other than that. are the same.

In the special symbol 1 loss variation process 8 (S481), first, it is determined whether the current lottery result (the lottery result obtained in the process S457 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S386 in FIG. 209)) is a small hit. It is determined (S485).

If it is determined that the small win has been won in the process of S485 (S485: Yes), the small win flag 203i is set on (S486), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a small win (S487). ), then sets the small winning symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S488), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S485, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is a miss (S485: No), the miss symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is is set (S485), and this processing ends.

As explained above, the special symbol 1 off variation process (S481 in FIG. 210), which is executed as one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see S258 in FIG. 120), that is, the special symbol variation (lottery) By setting the small hit flag 203i on when it is determined that a small hit has been won in the process executed at the timing when the first special symbol starts, the setting status of the small win flag 203i is determined at the timing when the fluctuation of the first special symbol stops. Based on this, it is possible to easily execute processing corresponding to a small winning win.

Note that the small hit flag 203i used in this embodiment includes a special pattern 1 area indicating that a small hit was won in the first special symbol lottery, and a special pattern 2 area indicating that a small win was won in the second special symbol lottery. If a small hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the flag of the special symbol 1 area is set to ON, and if a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery, the flag is set to on. , the flag of the special figure 2 area is set to ON. Thereby, even if a small hit is won twice in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the state can be easily memorized.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) will be explained. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387). This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) is different from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) executed in the seventh embodiment (fourth embodiment) described above. , the difference is that after selecting a fluctuation pattern, a discrimination process is added to set the special fluctuation flag on, and a process is added to select a fluctuation pattern other than a jackpot winning, and other than that. are the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 8 (S387) is executed, the same processes as the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) from S551 to S555 are executed, and then the currently selected It is determined whether the fluctuation pattern has a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more (S582). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (S582: Yes), the special fluctuation flag 203ga is set to ON (S583), and the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122) is performed. The same processing from S556 to S559 is executed, and the present processing ends. In addition, if it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 30 seconds or more (S582: No), the process of S583 is skipped and the process of S556 to S559 is the same as the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (see S357 in FIG. 122). Execute the process and end this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S551 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S551: No), a special drawing 1 off variation pattern selection process is executed (S581), and then the process moves to S553. The contents of the special figure 1 off variation pattern selection process (S581) will be described later with reference to FIG. 212.

Here, with reference to FIG. 212, the contents of the special figure 1 off variation pattern selection process 8 (S581) will be explained. FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 off variation pattern selection process 8 (S581). In the special figure 1 off variation pattern selection process 8 (S581), the same processing content as the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) of the seventh embodiment described above is performed, but the target is changed to the second special symbol. The process of switching from the first special symbol to the first special symbol is executed.

When the special pattern 1 off variation pattern selection process 8 (S581) is executed, if it is determined that the current lottery result of the first special symbol (special pattern 1 lottery result) is not a small hit (S591: No), The same process as S1377 to S1379 of special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process 7 (see S1277 in FIG. 179) is executed by changing the processing target to the first special symbol (S597 to S599), and then this process end. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a small win in the process of S591 (S591: Yes), the value of the small win type counter C5 is acquired (S592), and the small win type is determined based on the value of the acquired small win type counter C5. The small winning type is selected with reference to the selection 8 table 202gf (S593). Next, the same process as the process of S1374 to S1376 of the special pattern 2 off variation pattern selection process (see S1277 in FIG. 179) is executed with the processing target changed to the first special pattern (S594 to S596), and the main Finish the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 213, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 8 (S288) will be explained. FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 8 (S288). This first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 8 (S288) determines that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON in contrast to the above-described first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 7 (see S278 in FIG. 175). (S851; No), that is, the time-saving update process 7 (see S882 in FIG. 175), which is executed when the first special symbol fluctuation to be stopped this time is a losing fluctuation, is replaced with the special symbol 1 missing stop processing. 8 (S892) and when it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203i is set to on (S581: Yes), a process is executed to determine whether the second special symbol variation is being executed. (S891), when the second special symbol variation is not executed, various flags and various The difference is that a special fluctuation flag 203ga is added to the counter clearing process (S870 in FIG. 175) (S893 in FIG. 213), but otherwise the process is the same. The same content will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the contents of the special figure 1 out-of-place stop processing 8 (S892) will be explained. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 off-setting stop processing 8 (S892). In this special figure 1 missing stop processing 8 (S892), the same process as the special figure 2 missed stop process 7 (see S1584 in FIG. 181) of the seventh embodiment described above is performed, and the processing target is changed from the second special symbol to the first The difference is that the system switches to a special symbol and executes the small winning process 8 (S1972) instead of the small winning process (see S1671 in FIG. 181), but other than that, the details are the same. The explanation will be omitted.

Here, the small winning process 8 (S1972) executed in the special figure 1 missing stop process 8 (see S892 in FIG. 214) will be explained with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the details of small win processing 8 (S1972). This small win process 8 (S1972) differs from the small win process of the seventh embodiment described above (see S1671 in FIG. 182) in that the content of the control process to be executed differs depending on the type of small win won. They differ in some respects. Specifically, when a specific small winning type (small winning B, D, E) is won, processing (interruption processing, forced stop (discard) processing) according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation being executed is executed. The difference is that they are configured to execute.

When the small win process 8 (S1972) is executed, first, the small win type set for the first special symbol variation of this time is read out (S1682), and the read small win type is "Small win A or small win". It is determined whether the winning result is "C" (S1981). If it is determined that it is "small hit A" or "small hit C" (S1981: Yes), it is determined whether the current special symbol 2 is changing (second special symbol changing) (S1684), If it is determined that the second special symbol fluctuation is in progress (S1684: Yes), the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag indicating that the second special symbol fluctuation is interrupted (temporary stop) is set to ON (S1685), and the special symbol 2 A special figure 2 temporary stop command indicating that the temporary stop flag is turned on is set (S1686), and this processing is ended. In the process of S1684, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is not changing (S1684: No), the processes of S1685 and S1686 are skipped and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1981, if it is determined that it is not "small win A" or "small win C" (S1981: No), then it is determined whether the read small win type is "small win E8". (S1982), and if it is determined that it is a "small hit E8" (S1982: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, the current state is in a variable probability state (in a high probability state with normal symbols). ) (S1688). If it is determined that the current state is in a variable probability state (S1688: Yes), then it is determined whether the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is set to on (S1689), and if the time-saving end standby flag 203dm is not on. If it is determined (S1689: No), that is, if it is determined that it is not the final change in the variable probability state, the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set to ON (S1690).

Next, it is determined whether the special variation flag 203ga is set to on (S1983), and if it is determined that it is not set to on, that is, the variation pattern set for the second special symbol variation being executed is If the variation pattern does not have a variation time of 30 seconds or more, or if the second special symbol variation is not executed (S1983: No), the process moves to S1684 described above. Further, if it is determined in the process of S1688 that the value of the time saving counter 203h is not greater than 0, that is, the current state is not in a variable probability state (S1688: No), or if the time saving end standby flag 203dm is set in the process of S1689. If it is determined that it is set to on, that is, it is the final change in the variable probability state (S1689: Yes), the process of S1690 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S1684 described above. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1983 that the special fluctuation flag 203ga is set to ON (S1983: Yes), the process moves to S1692. In addition, in the process of S1982, if it is determined that it is not a "small win E8", that is, if it is determined that it is a "small win B8" or "small win D8" (S1982: No), the process of S1688 to S1690 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1983.

In the processing of S1692 to S1697, processing similar to the small winning processing of the seventh embodiment described above (see S1671 in FIG. 182) is executed by switching the processing target from the second special symbol to the first special symbol, and then , sets the special fluctuation flag 203ga to OFF (S1184), and ends this process.

As explained above, in the eighth embodiment, when a small winning game is executed (when special processing is executed for a special symbol variation that is being executed), the contents of the special symbol variation that is being executed The configuration is such that the processing content is determined depending on the situation. More specifically, at the time when a small winning game is executed based on one special symbol drawing (at the time when the special symbol indicating a small winning win is stopped and displayed), the fluctuation pattern of the other special symbol fluctuation that is being executed If the determination result is a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds or more), the other special symbol variation being executed is discarded, and the specific variation pattern is determined. If it is other than the pattern, it is configured so that the other special symbol variation being executed can be interrupted. In other words, when a specific condition for executing a special process is established for the special symbol variation being executed, the content of the special process is determined by referring to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the contents of the special process determined when a specific condition is satisfied may be varied depending on the set gaming state. Specifically, if the normal state is set, only "interruption" is determined as the special process even if the specific condition is met, and if the variable probability state is set, the eighth implementation described above is performed. Similarly to the format, the configuration may be such that "interrupt" or "discard" is set. By making the determination of the special process different depending on the game state set in this way, it is possible to provide diversity in the gameplay in each game state.

Further, the content of the special process to be determined may be different depending on the type of special symbol for which the specific condition is met. It may be configured such that "discard" is more likely to be determined when a specific condition is satisfied. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery may be configured so that the specific condition is more difficult to satisfy than the second special symbol lottery (so that it is more difficult to win a small hit), or the specific condition is established. In this case, the condition for determining "discard" (in the eighth embodiment, the running variation pattern is 30 seconds or more) is set in the second special symbol if the specific condition is satisfied in the first special symbol. It may be configured such that the condition is more difficult to satisfy than if the specific condition were satisfied (for example, the fluctuation pattern being executed is 32 seconds or longer). As a result, the content of the special process can be varied depending on which special symbol type the specific condition is satisfied with, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, when a specific condition for executing a special process with respect to a special symbol variation being executed is established, the processing content of the special process is determined by referring to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if the lottery result of the special symbol variation that is being executed is a specific lottery result, the special symbol variation that is being executed is configured so that it is not "discarded". The conditions under which "discard" is determined when the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed is a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss (in the eighth embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol variation being executed is (for 30 seconds or more) may be made different. With this configuration, the ease of "discarding" can be varied depending on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, so it is possible to easily execute a game that is suitable for the design concept.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, as a variation pattern of a special symbol variation (jackpot variation) that has won a jackpot, an advantageous jackpot type in which a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a probability-variable jackpot) is executed, and an advantageous jackpot type in which a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (for example, a probability-variable jackpot) is executed, and a pattern that is disadvantageous to the player. It is configured such that a different variation pattern is selected depending on the disadvantageous jackpot type in which a big jackpot game (for example, a normal jackpot) is executed, and furthermore, a variation pattern is selected depending on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. It is configured to be different.

More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is large, the variation with a variation time of less than 30 seconds is set as a variation pattern corresponding to the advantageous jackpot type than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is small. The pattern is configured to be easily selected, and the variable pattern in which a variable time of 30 seconds or more is set is configured to be easily selected as the variable pattern corresponding to the disadvantageous jackpot type.

By configuring in this way, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is large, it is easier to execute a jackpot game (for example, a probability-variable jackpot) that is advantageous to the player than when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is small ( It is possible to make a jackpot game disadvantageous to the player (for example, a normal jackpot) difficult to execute (easily discarded due to a small win). In other words, the proportion of probability-variable jackpots at the time of jackpot winning can be varied depending on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to accumulate the number of reserved balls of special symbols with the expectation that an advantageous jackpot game will be executed, and as a result, the performance of the game can be improved.

In addition, the eighth embodiment is different from the seventh embodiment described above in that it is configured so that a small win can be won in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. There is. By configuring in this way, even if a jackpot is won in either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot can be canceled due to the small win in the other, According to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, the proportion of the probability-variable jackpot at the time of jackpot winning can be surely varied.

In the eighth embodiment described above, as a condition (specific condition) that triggers the execution of special processing (interruption or discard) for one special symbol variation (for example, the first special symbol variation), the other special symbol variation is This shows the conditions that will be met when a specific small win is won with a variation (for example, the second special symbol variation), but other than this, there may also be an opportunity to establish a specific condition. For example, if the ball is in a specific It may be configured such that a specific condition is satisfied when a ball enters the entrance of the pachinko machine 10, or a state in which the power supplied to the pachinko machine 10 is not normal (for example, noise occurs and the power supply is temporarily turned off). The configuration may be such that the specific condition is satisfied when it is determined that the system is in a state where the system is disconnected. In addition, the gaming method executed by the player may be an illegal gaming method (for example, a gaming method in which a magnetic sensor is provided to detect magnetic force and the magnetic sensor detects magnetic force, or an impact detection method that detects an impact on the pachinko machine 10). A sensor may be provided and the specific condition may be established when the shock detection sensor detects a predetermined amount of shock.

In addition, in each of the embodiments described above, when the special symbol variation that is executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (when the probability variable state or time saving state is set) is discarded (forced stop), , It is configured so that the time saving number (probability variation number) is not added in accordance with the discarded special symbol variation. Specifically, in a gaming machine configured such that a potential state is set when the number of special symbol variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) in a state where a probability change state is set, If the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state is discarded (forcibly stopped), the time saving number (probability variation number) is configured not to be added. In the pachinko machine 10 using such a configuration, for example, on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, a display mode (for example, FIG. 161 ( The value displayed in the display area HR2 in a) is also configured so that the display mode is not updated in synchronization with the number of time reductions. Therefore, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the special symbol variation has been discarded without updating the time saving number. In this case, for example, a pachinko machine configured to update the display mode for indicating the number of time reductions (probability change number) displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the start timing of special symbol fluctuations. If it is machine 10, the display mode will be restored based on the special symbol change being discarded (for example, if the remaining time reduction number is displayed, it will be added, if the elapsed time reduction number is displayed, it will be added). If so, you just need to execute the effect to make it subtract).

In addition, as a transition condition for transitioning from a variable probability state to a potential state (a termination condition (time-saving termination condition) for ending a high-probability state of normal symbols), multiple time-saving termination conditions (for example, the first special symbol A first time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the total number of fluctuations and the second special symbol fluctuation reaches 100 times, and a second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the second special symbol fluctuation is executed 5 times). In the pachinko machine 10 that has been set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays a termination condition that is most likely to be satisfied among the plurality of time-saving termination conditions (for example, a condition corresponding to the second special symbol variation five times). If the pachinko machine 10 is configured to notify the player of the game contents in an easy-to-understand manner by displaying only "5"), the first special symbol variation is executed immediately after the probability variation state is set. Even if it is, the display mode of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is configured not to be updated. Then, in a state where the first special symbol variation has been executed 95 times after the probability variation state is set, if the first special symbol variation is further executed (when the first special symbol variation is executed for the 96th time), , is configured to execute display control to update the display of "5" displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to "4". In this way, it is determined whether or not to update the time saving number display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, depending on the special symbol type in which special symbol variation is executed during the probability change (time saving) state. By doing so, it is possible to inform the player of the period until the end of the variable probability state in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 216 to 223. The ninth embodiment is different from the seventh embodiment described above in that a hold storage function is also provided for the second special symbol, and an effect (RUSH The main difference is that the performance mode of the medium performance has been changed, and the fluctuation patterns of the jackpot type, small hit type, and normal symbol are different.

In the seventh embodiment described above, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the number of reserved special symbols to indicate the number of reserved stored special symbols (see dm1a in FIG. 161). In addition, in recent gaming machines, in order to clearly show the number of reserved special symbols to the player, there are machines that display a number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. . Furthermore, a pre-reading process (pre-discrimination process) is executed on the winning information of the special symbols that have been stored on hold, and the pre-reading result (pre-discrimination result) is used to change the display mode of the corresponding pending symbol (for example, There is a system that executes a pending change effect that is notified to the player by changing the color or effect of the pending symbol or changing the design of the pending symbol.

However, in the above-mentioned pending change effect, the number of pending symbols that are subject to the pending change effect is determined according to the number of special figure held balls that have been acquired, so if the number of special figure held balls is small, the special It becomes more difficult to execute the reservation change performance than when the number of reserved balls is large. In other words, as long as the performance using the reserved symbols displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 is executed according to the number of special symbols reserved balls that have been acquired, Because the performance effect of the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) that notifies the player of the look-ahead result (prior determination result) is variable, for example, for a player who is unable to acquire many special figure hold balls. However, there was a problem in that players felt dissatisfied with not being able to acquire many special figure reserved balls and felt dissatisfied with the fact that the performance effect of the pre-reading performance was reduced, resulting in a decrease in the desire to play.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the number of special symbol reserved balls that have been acquired is determined according to the result of the pre-reading process (pre-discrimination process) executed on the winning information of the special symbol that is reserved and stored. Regardless, it is configured to perform a pre-reading performance (icon performance) that changes the number of specific symbols (dedicated icons displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81). As a result, even if the number of special figure reserved balls that has been acquired is small, it is possible to perform the look-ahead effect in accordance with the look-ahead result in the same way as when the number of special figure held balls that has been acquired is the upper limit. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide a look-ahead performance with a high performance effect even to a player who is unable to obtain a large number of reserved balls, thereby suppressing the player's desire to play from decreasing. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of specific symbols displayed in the above-mentioned icon performance is the number of special symbol reserved balls that can be reserved and stored (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol that is mainly executed during the potential state). (4), and the reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved special symbols that have been acquired are not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (it is difficult for the player to distinguish). (displayed). With this configuration, the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon effect appears as if it were the number of reserved special symbols (the number of retained memory of the second special symbol executed mainly during the potential state). It can be made to think that it is a reserved symbol for showing. It is possible to suppress a player's desire to play who is unable to obtain a large number of special figure reserved balls from decreasing.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading result is a specific result (for example, a jackpot with a potential state set), the number of specific symbols displayed in the icon effect can be reserved and stored. It is configured to be larger than the upper limit value (4) of the number (the number of stored second special symbols that are mainly executed during the potential state). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player who was under the illusion that the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon performance was a reserved symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the pre-reading process (pre-determination process) executed on the winning information of the special symbol that is held and stored, the number of times the attacker is released in the small winning game is determined. , the number of specific symbols to be displayed is determined based on the determination result. The number of times the attacker is opened in one small winning game is varied depending on the type of winning small winning. Further, as part of the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won, the same attacker release operation as in the small win game is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to predict the number of small winning games that the player will play in the future based on the number of specific symbols displayed as icon effects. Further, in this embodiment, the player is informed that the period in which the specific symbol is displayed is a period in which the potential state (RUSH game) does not end. That is, if even one specific symbol remains at the end of the jackpot game, it is notified in advance that a potential state will be set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, each time the number of specific symbols is changed, the player pays attention to the icon presentation, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

<About the production content in the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 216 to 219, characteristic presentation contents among the presentation contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be explained. Specifically, the contents of the icon performance that variably displays a specific symbol that is executed during the potential state (during the RUSH game) will be explained. This icon performance is a performance in which the number of specific symbols (icons) is variably displayed based on the pre-read result for the reserved memory of the acquired second special symbol (special symbol 2 pending).

First, with reference to FIG. 216(a), the display contents of the ending screen of a jackpot game in which a potential state (RUSH game) is immediately set will be explained. FIG. 216(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an ending screen displayed during the ending period in the jackpot game before entering the RUSH game. In the ninth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, if a potential jackpot is won in a state where the potential state is not set (a jackpot in which the potential state is set after the end of the jackpot game), , The performance mode displayed during the ending period is configured to be different depending on the first time when entering the RUSH game and when winning a potential jackpot with a potential state set. .

During the ending period at the time of the first win entering the RUSH game, as shown in FIG. 216(a), a display area 71 is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and a display area HR70 is formed in the center. Then, in the display area HR70, an icon 871 resembling a carrot and acquisition number information 872 (4 in FIG. 216(a)) are displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "RUSH will continue as long as there is an icon" are displayed.

In this embodiment, when a RUSH game is executed, an icon 871 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a game to be executed during the RUSH game is displayed based on the number of icons 871 displayed and the display mode. The game is structured to suggest the contents of the game to the player. This icon 871 is configured such that the number of displays and the display mode are variably set based on information (lottery information, pre-read information) regarding the second special symbol mainly executed during the RUSH game.

As described above, in this embodiment configured so that the icon performance is executed during the RUSH game, the initial stage of the icon performance shown in FIG. The display screen is displayed and four icons 871 are displayed regardless of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol at that time and the pre-read result. As a result, no matter what state the RUSH game is executed in, the presentation mode of the icon presentation at the time of entering the RUSH game can be made the same, so the presentation mode of the icon presentation at the time the RUSH game is started can be changed. It is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Note that in this embodiment, four icons 871 are displayed at the start of the icon presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if a specific start condition is satisfied at the start of the icon presentation, for example, , the number of icons 871 displayed at the start of the icon performance when there is a jackpot advantageous to the player (potential jackpot where the probability state is set again) in the pre-reading result for the reserved ball of the second special symbol. may be configured so that the number of icons 871 is other than four, and in this case, the configuration may be configured such that fewer than four icons 871 are displayed.

When the RUSH game is started, the icon 871 displayed in the display area HR70 is displayed as a hold icon 873 in the display area HR71, and an effect using the hold icon 873 and a character 811 imitating a rabbit is displayed as the main display. It is executed in area Dm. As shown in FIG. 216(b), in this embodiment, the upper limit display number of the hold icons 873 is configured to be the same as the hold limit upper limit number of the second special symbols mainly drawn by lottery during the RUSH game. Therefore, a maximum of four pending icons 873a to 873d are displayed in the display area HR71.

The hold icons 873a to 873d are displayed as a first hold icon 873a, a second hold icon 873b, a third hold icon 873c, and a fourth hold icon 873d in order from the top of the display area HR, and are displayed in order from the first hold icon 873a. used. Then, when the first hold icon 873a is deleted from the display area HR71 for use in production, the remaining second hold icons 873b to fourth hold icons 873d are shifted to the previous hold icon and displayed. Ru. Furthermore, when a new pending icon is acquired, it is additionally displayed after the already displayed pending icons.

In this embodiment, the small winning game executed during the RUSH game, more specifically, the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is read in advance, and the number of pending icons is determined based on the read result. ing. The number of openings of the second attacker 1650 in the small winning game is varied depending on the type of small winning won, and furthermore, even when winning a jackpot, the second attacker A jackpot game is executed in which the attacker 1650 is opened a predetermined number of times.

In other words, for example, even if the number of special map 2 reserved balls that have been acquired is 2, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is released is 4 as a result of pre-reading (preliminary judgment) for the 2 special map 2 reserved balls. In this case, the number of displayed pending icons can be set to four. By configuring in this way, the number of pending icons to be displayed can be determined regardless of the number of special map 2 reserved balls that have actually been acquired. Even if there is, it is possible to perform an interesting icon presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217(a), of the icon performances during the RUSH game, the content of the performance that consumes the pending icon will be explained. FIG. 217(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small winning game is executed during a RUSH game. As shown in FIG. 217(a), when the small winning game is executed, a digest effect in which the character 811 eats the pending icon 873a is executed, and a prize ball display mode showing the prize balls acquired in the small winning game is executed. 874 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 217(a), the prize ball display mode 874 is displayed in the display mode of "+15" indicating that the second attacker 1650 received one ball and there were 15 prize balls. There is. Further, the characters "Itadakimasu" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds to clearly inform the player that an effect in which the character 811 eats the pending icon 873a will be executed.

In addition, in FIG. 217(a), the display screen displayed during the digestion effect was explained using as an example a case where a small winning game is executed in which the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is one. Although the number of pending icons 873a taken is one, for example, when a small winning game is executed in which the second attacker 1650 is opened twice, a digestion effect in which the character 811 eats two pending icons is executed. be done. Although detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, in some small winning games or some big winning games, a winning game in which the second attacker 1650 is opened multiple times is executed. The second attacker 1650 is opened more often in the jackpot game than in the small win game.

In other words, if the character 811 eats a plurality of pending icons as the effect shown in FIG. 217(a), expectations for winning the jackpot can be increased. With this configuration, among the icon effects executed during the RUSH game, it is possible to make the player interested in the content of the effect that consumes pending icons (reduces the number of pending icons).

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening operation mode of the second attacker 1650 that is opened in the small winning game and the opening operation mode of the second attacker 1650 that is opened in the jackpot game are configured to be the same. ing. Therefore, by understanding the contents of the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during a winning game, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the type of the current winning game (small winning game, big winning game). I can do it.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of pending icons 873 corresponding to the number of times the character 811 eats in one consumption performance, that is, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened in the small winning game being executed, is displayed. , without being limited to this, for example, a performance in which the hold icon used for the digestion performance remains at the end timing of the consumption performance, that is, a hold that is greater than the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened in a small winning game. You may perform a digestion effect using an icon. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the number of pending icons that are displayed at the start of the consumption performance, thereby increasing the player's expectations for winning the jackpot.

Further, the number of pending icons used in the extinguishing effect may be varied during the execution period of the extinguishing effect. As a result, the number of pending icons can be increased at any timing, so even if an icon performance with low jackpot expectation is executed, the number of pending icons used for the performance during the execution period will be increased. It is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the game to increase during the performance performance period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217(b), description will be given of the presentation contents of the acquisition presentation that indicates that a plurality of pending icons have been acquired as the icon presentation performed during the RUSH game. FIG. 217(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed as an icon effect executed during the RUSH game, which is an acquisition effect indicating that a plurality of pending icons have been obtained. In this embodiment, similar to the effect executed during the RUSH game of the seventh embodiment described above (see FIG. 162(b)), an effect in which the character 811 opens the treasure box 812 is executed. Then, an acquisition effect is executed in which a predetermined number (1 to 3) of pending icons are displayed from within the treasure box.

As shown in FIG. 217(b), the treasure box 812 displayed during the RUSH game opens, and an icon 871 resembling a carrot and acquisition number information 872 (3 in FIG. 217(b)) are displayed in the display area HR70. Is displayed. Then, the words "Get carrots" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and an effect is executed to notify the player that the number of displayed pending icons has increased.

As mentioned above, in the icon presentation of this embodiment, the number of pending icons displayed is controlled so that the number of pending icons does not become 0 while the RUSH game continues, and acquisition is performed to increase the number of pending icons at various timings. It is configured so that the performance can be executed. The configuration is such that the larger the number of icons 871 acquired in one acquisition performance, the more advantageous a game will be executed to the player. Moreover, in this embodiment, it is configured so that the number of displayed reservation icons can be increased at a timing different from the timing of increase in the number of special figure 2 reservation balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 218(a), the contents of the continuous presentation executed during the icon presentation will be explained. FIG. 218(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a continuous performance performed during an icon performance. In this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the start of variation of the second special symbol, a continuous performance can be performed. This continuous performance has two patterns: a pattern that is executed for the variation period of one second special symbol variation, and a pattern that is executed across multiple second special symbol variations. A presentation using all icons is executed.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the continuous effect can be executed when four pending icons (the upper limit number) are displayed, and when the continuous effect is executed, the screen shown in FIG. 218(a) ), the four pending icons (873a to 873d) displayed in the display area HR71 are displayed in a row in the center of the main display area Dm, and the character 811 eats them in order starting from the first pending icon 873a. is executed. Then, behind the last pending icon 873d, a V icon 873y indicating a jackpot win (a jackpot win of a jackpot type advantageous to the player) is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, characters such as "Eat all the carrots!! Treasure may come out from inside" are displayed to show the content of the continuous performance to the player.

In other words, when the continuous performance is executed, it suggests whether all the pending icons are used up and a jackpot is won, or the pending icons are not used up and the RUSH game continues. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 218(b), the V icon 873z may be displayed from among the pending icons that are being used while the continuous performance is being executed and the last pending icon is being used.

Here, with reference to FIG. 218(b), the content of the presentation when the V icon 873z is displayed during the continuous presentation will be explained. FIG. 218(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the V icon 873z is acquired without using up all the pending icons during continuous performance. As shown in FIG. 218(b), while the third pending icon 873c is being consumed (while eating), an effect is executed to discover the V icon 873z from among the third pending icon 873c. . In this case, since the fourth pending icon 873d has not been digested, the fourth pending icon 873d is displayed in the display area HR71. If a jackpot game is started in this state, the jackpot game will be executed with the pending icon displayed, so at this point, the potential state (RUSH game) will be executed again after the jackpot game ends. The player will be notified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the content of the presentation in which a special icon different from the normal hold icon is displayed during the icon presentation will be explained. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when special icons are displayed during icon rendering. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed is calculated based on the number of special figure 2 hold balls and the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 calculated in advance. There is.

When the number of pending icons that can be displayed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, four or more), that is, exceeds the upper limit for display, a special icon is displayed. The structure is configured such that the number of displayable pending icons easily exceeds a predetermined number when the second special symbol variation in progress or the pre-read result of the second special symbol includes a jackpot win that is advantageous to the player. are doing.

As shown in FIG. 219, if the number of displayable pending icons is calculated to be greater than or equal to a predetermined number, a special icon effect in which a special icon 873x resembling a gorgeous carrot appears from inside the treasure box 812 is executed as an acquisition effect. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Lucky, SP Carrot Get" are displayed to indicate to the player that the icon acquired this time is a special icon. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of icons that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area HR71 is set to four, which is the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, so the number of displayable reserved icons is 4. When the number of icons exceeds the maximum number, a special icon is displayed to maintain the upper limit of the number of icons that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area HR71, and to increase the player's expectation of a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the number of displayable pending icons exceeds 4 (when special conditions are met), the upper limit number of pending icons that can be displayed simultaneously in the display area HR71 may be set. The second special symbol may be configured to have a larger number than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls. With this configuration, for a player who has recognized that the hold icon indicates the number of balls held in the second special symbol, the number of balls held that exceeds the upper limit of the number of balls held in the second special symbol is displayed. By displaying the icon, a surprising effect can be performed. Furthermore, if a number of pending icons exceeding the upper limit of the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol are displayed, the expectation of winning a jackpot can be increased, so the player is surprised to see a performance with high expectations for a jackpot. It can be executed using a realistic presentation.

Above, various production screens executed during the characteristic production (icon production) executed in the ninth embodiment have been explained using FIGS. 216 to 219, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the number of reserved special symbols 2 becomes 0 while the RUSH game is being executed, one or more reserved icons will be displayed, and the reserved symbols will not be related to the result of the special symbol lottery. It may be configured to perform a pseudo fluctuation effect using icons, or it may be configured to hide pending icons.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon is a display mode that imitates a normal carrot (see the hold icon 873a in FIG. 217(a)), and a display mode that imitates a luxurious carrot (the special icon in FIG. 219). 873 A corresponding second display mode and a third display mode corresponding to a specific jackpot may be configured to be settable. Further, in order to additionally display a large number of pending icons at one time, a reduction effect may be executed in which a large number of pending icons are consumed at once.

<About the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 220 to 223. The ninth embodiment is different from the seventh embodiment described above in a partial configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a partial configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113, and a partial configuration of the RAM 223. are doing. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 220, the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hd included in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 220 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hd. This jackpot type selection 9 table 202hd differs from the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 169) in the seventh embodiment described above, in that the jackpot type (jackpot type) associated with the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is The opening target of the jackpot action prescribed for A to C) and the value of the time saving counter 203h set after the end of the jackpot game are made different and are associated with the second special symbol (special figure 2). The difference is that the number of jackpot types has been increased, but other than that they are the same.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220, the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is the jackpot type for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 34". “Jackpot A9” is defined in association. Since this "jackpot A9" is the same jackpot type as the "jackpot A7" of the seventh embodiment described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Further, "Jackpot B9" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "35 to 79". This "Jackpot B9" is different from the "Jackpot B7" of the seventh embodiment described above in that the value of the time saving counter 203h, which is set after the end of the jackpot game, is changed, but otherwise is the same.

Specifically, if you win "Jackpot B9" in the normal state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 100, and if you win "Jackpot B9" in the variable probability state, the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 50. is set. On the other hand, if "Jackpot 9" is won in the probability state, 0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h.

That is, when the "jackpot B9" is won in the normal state or the variable probability state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous variable probability state. On the other hand, if "Jackpot B9" is won in the probability state, the time saving number is set to 0, so the gaming state after the end of the jackpot becomes the most advantageous probability state. In addition, even if a variable probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game, it is more advantageous for the player to win "jackpot B9" in a variable probability state than to win "jackpot B9" in a normal state. In order to set a probability variable state, the number of probability variations is configured to be smaller when a winner is won in a probability variable state than when a winner is won in a normal state.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to shift from the normal state, which is the initial gaming state, to a different gaming state, thereby making it easier for the player to shift to the most advantageous gaming state. It is possible to make the player play the game enthusiastically aiming for the most advantageous gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 220, "Jackpot C9" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". This "Jackpot C9" is different from the "Jackpot C7" of the seventh embodiment described above in that the value of the time saving counter 203h that is set after the end of the jackpot game is changed, but otherwise is the same.

Specifically, if you win "Jackpot C9" in the normal state, variable probability state, and probability state, that is, if you win "Jackpot C9", the time saving counter 203h will be changed regardless of the set gaming state. The value is set to 0. That is, when winning "Jackpot C9", the most advantageous game state (potential state) for the player is always set after the end of the jackpot game, which is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. In addition, in the state where the probability state is set, the values of "Jackpot B9" and "Jackpot C9" are the same.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the rate of transition to the gaming state (potential state) that is most advantageous to the player is determined depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. , is configured differently depending on whether the normal state and variable probability state are set and the case where the probability state is set. It is configured such that the probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game based on the percentage.

In addition, as mentioned above, the normal state in which the rate of transition to the probable state is set to 20%, and the variable probability state are both configured to shift to the variable state at a rate of 45%, but the variable probability state The configuration is such that the degree of expectation of transition to the definite state is different when the transition to the definite state occurs. By configuring in this way, the transition rate of shifting to the most advantageous gaming state (potential state) for the player after the end of the jackpot game for multiple gaming states as the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot is set. Even if they are set the same, the degree of expectation of transition to the probability state can be made different for each gaming state set at the time of winning a jackpot.

Next, the jackpot type selected when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery will be explained. As shown in FIG. 220, in the ninth embodiment, four jackpot types (jackpot D9 to G9) associated with the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are defined, and depending on the selected jackpot type, The contents of the opening operation of the jackpot game are different.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), "jackpot D9" is associated as the jackpot type for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 34". It is stipulated that This "jackpot D9" is a jackpot type in which the same content as the "jackpot D7" of the seventh embodiment described above is defined. “Jackpot E9” is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of “35 to 69”. This "Jackpot E9" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, when "jackpot E9" is won in the normal state, variable probability state, and potential state, 0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h.

That is, when winning "Jackpot C9", the value of the time saving counter 203h is set to 0 regardless of the set gaming state. That is, when winning "Jackpot C9", the most advantageous game state (potential state) for the player is always set after the end of the jackpot game, which is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot E9" are 35, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot E9" being determined is 35% (35/100).

"Jackpot F9" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 89". This "Jackpot F9" has 9 rounds of jackpot, and in the 1st round (R), the second attacker 1650 opens for 1.5 seconds, and from the 2nd round (R) to the 9th round (R) Until then, a jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 opens for 30 seconds is executed, and after the end of the jackpot, the special symbol is set to a variable probability state (9 round probability variable jackpot). In addition, when "jackpot F9" is won in the normal state, variable probability state, and potential state, 0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h.

As described above, if the "big win F9" is won, the same opening operation as in the small win game is executed as the first round. That is, in the pre-reading of the second special symbol, in addition to the jackpot winning, the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is calculated once. As a result, in the icon presentation that determines the number of pending icons to be displayed based on the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 (the number of openings of the small winning game), a pattern suggesting a small winning win and a pattern suggesting a jackpot winning can be differentiated. This can be made difficult for players to understand, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. Further, in "Jackpot F9", a nine-round jackpot game is defined so that the number of openings of the first attacker 650 is the same as in the above-mentioned "Jackpot E9". With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the jackpot type selected based on the number of opening operations of the first attacker 650.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same opening operation as the small winning game is executed in the first round (R), and the actual jackpot game is executed from the second round (R) onwards. For example, even if the jackpot F9 is won, the jackpot game of 8 rounds (R) is executed, and the second attacker 1650 is opened for 1.5 seconds in the 1st round (R). The opening operation and the opening operation of opening the first attacker 650 for 28.5 seconds may be configured to be executed. With this configuration, the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed can be unified, so for example, a notification means (for example, an LED If a means for notifying the number of rounds by lighting a lamp is provided, the number of types of rounds to be notified by the notifying means can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the type of jackpot based on the notification content of the notification means.

``Jackpot G9'' is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of ``90 to 99''. In this "Jackpot G9", the number of jackpot rounds is 11 rounds, and in the 1st to 3rd rounds (R), the second attacker 1650 opens for 1.5 seconds, and from the 4th round (R) to the 11th round (R). ), a jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 opens for 30 seconds is executed, and after the end of the jackpot, a special symbol is set in a variable probability state (11 round probability variable jackpot). In addition, in the case of winning "Jackpot G9" in the normal state, variable probability state, and probability state, 0 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203h.

As described above, if the "Jackpot G9" is won, the same opening operation as in the small winning game is performed in the first to third rounds. That is, in the pre-reading of the second special symbol, in addition to the jackpot winning, the number of openings of the second attacker 1650, which is three times, is calculated. As a result, in the icon presentation that determines the number of pending icons to be displayed based on the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 (the number of openings of the small winning game), a pattern suggesting a small winning win and a pattern suggesting a jackpot winning can be differentiated. This can be made difficult for players to understand, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened three times is calculated as the lottery result of one second special symbol lottery, even if the number of reserved balls in the special pattern 2 is small, the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened is calculated. It is possible to calculate a large number of icons, and it is possible to diversify the presentation mode of the icon presentation. Further, in "Jackpot G9", an 11-round jackpot game is defined so that the number of openings of the first attacker 650 is the same as in "Jackpot E9" described above. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the jackpot type selected based on the number of opening operations of the first attacker 650.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same opening operation as the small winning game is executed in the 1st round (R) to the 3rd round (R), and the actual jackpot game is executed from the 4th round (R) onwards. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, even if a jackpot G9 is won, a jackpot game of 8 rounds (R) is executed, and in the 1st round (R), the second attacker 1650 The opening operation of opening the first attacker 650 for 1.5 seconds may be executed three times, and then the opening operation of opening the first attacker 650 for 25.5 seconds may be executed. With this configuration, the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed can be unified, so for example, a notification means (for example, an LED If a means for notifying the number of rounds by lighting a lamp is provided, the number of types of rounds to be notified by the notifying means can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the type of jackpot based on the notification content of the notification means.

Next, the contents of the small winning type selection 9 table 202hf will be explained with reference to FIG. 221(a). FIG. 221(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small winning type selection 9 table 202hf. As shown in FIG. 221(a), the small winning type selection 9 table 202hf has the following points: the small winning type selection 7 table 202ff of the seventh embodiment described above has been increased in the number of small winning types; Changes are made to the contents of the small winning operation specified for the small winning type (opening operation contents of the small winning game) and the processing contents for the first special symbol variation that is executed when the small winning game is executed. They are different in that they are the same, but are otherwise the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

This small winning type selection 9 table 202hf is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small winning type after winning a small winning in the special symbol lottery, similar to the above-mentioned small winning type selection 7 table 202ff. It is specified that four types of small winnings, "small winning A9" to "small winning D9", are selected in correspondence with the value of the small winning type counter C5.

When a small win is won in the special symbol lottery, the contents of the small win operation and the processing contents for the special symbol variation being executed can be varied depending on the selected small win type. In addition, in this embodiment, no matter which small hit type is selected, the interruption process is executed for the special symbol variation that is being executed. This interruption process is a process that temporarily suspends the process of subtracting the variation time of the special symbol variation that is being executed (for example, until the small winning game ends). This interruption process is the same as the seventh embodiment described above, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

To specifically explain the contents stipulated in the small win type selection 7 table 202ff, "small win A9" is associated with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 59". , "Small win B9" is associated with the range "60-79", "Small win C9" is associated with the range "80-89", and "Small win C9" is associated with the range "90-99". “Small win D9” is associated with “Small win D9”. Since the range of values that the small win type counter C5 can take is 100 from "0 to 99", the percentage of "small win A9" selected when winning a small win is 60% (60/100), " The percentage of "Small win B9" selected is 20% (20/100), the percentage of "Small win C9" selected is 10% (10/100), and the percentage of "Small win D9" is selected is 10%. (10/100).

If "Small win A9" is selected, a small win game in which the variable winning device (first attacker 650) is opened for 1.5 seconds is executed, and if "Small win B9" is selected, the right variable winning game is executed. When a small winning game is executed in which the device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds and "Small win C9" is selected, the right variable prize winning device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds. If a small winning game is executed twice and "small winning C9" is selected, a small winning game is executed where the right variable winning device (second attacker) 2650 is opened for 0.5 seconds three times. It is stipulated that

In other words, in this embodiment, depending on the small winning type selected when a small winning is won, there is a small winning game in which the first attacker 650 that is opened is opened mainly during the jackpot game, and a small winning game in which the first attacker 650 is opened mainly during the small winning game. A small winning game in which the second attacker 2650 that is operated to open is opened is configured to be executable. With this configuration, wouldn't the big winning game be executed immediately after the small winning game was executed? This can make the player think. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, if a jackpot game is executed while the pending icon is displayed during the potential state, the potential state is set again after the jackpot game ends. The icon presentation is executed. Therefore, when a "small win A" is won while the pending icon is displayed, the player can be made to feel that an advantageous jackpot game has been executed when the first attacker 650 is released.

In addition, when "Small win B9" to "Small win D9" is selected, a small win game in which the second attacker 1650 is released is executed, but the second attacker is activated for each selected small win type. The number of times 1650 is opened is different. In other words, it is configured such that the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 calculated for one special symbol lottery can be varied. As a result, when calculating the display number of reserved icons in the icon performance, it is possible to make the number of times the second attacker 1650 is released significantly different from the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2, and even the number of small winnings. Become. Therefore, it is possible to easily display the number of pending icons determined based on the number of times the second attacker 1650 is opened without synchronizing it with the number of special figure 2 pending balls.

In addition, in this embodiment, a small winning game is executed in which either the first attacker 650 or the second attacker 1650 is opened depending on the selected small winning type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, an opening operation may be set in which the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 1650 are sequentially opened in one small winning game. Thereby, the player can be made to think that the opening operation executed as one small winning game is being executed as a plurality of small winning games in succession. Therefore, the relationship between one special symbol lottery and the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 can be made more difficult to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 221(b), the contents of the normal pattern variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg will be explained. FIG. 221(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the regular pattern variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg. As shown in FIG. 221(b), the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg is different from the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table 202fg of the seventh embodiment described above, in that the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table 202hg is a variation of the ordinary symbols selected during the potential state. The difference is that the pattern is the same as in the normal state, and the rest is the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in the normal pattern variation pattern selection 9 table 202hg, in this embodiment, during the probability variation state, the ball fired by the right-handed game is configured to enter the right electric accessory 164, as in the seventh embodiment. are doing. On the other hand, the structure is such that a ball fired by a right-handed game during a potential state is more difficult to enter the right electric accessory 164 than in the seventh embodiment described above. In other words, in the seventh embodiment described above, the game feature is to make it easy to increase the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol by letting the ball enter the right electric accessory 164 even in the potential state. The ninth embodiment does not have such gameplay, so the same variation pattern as in the normal state is selected.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 included in the audio lamp control device 113 of the ninth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 222(a). FIG. 222(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(a), in the ninth embodiment, an icon display number selection table 222ha, a continuous effect selection table 222hb, The difference is that a Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The icon display number selection table 222ha is a data table that is referred to when selecting the display number of pending icons to be displayed in the icon presentation described above with reference to FIGS. The number of displayed pending icons is based on the information regarding the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 calculated based on the winning information command received from the main control device 110 stored in is stipulated.

Here, the contents of the icon display number selection table 222ha will be explained with reference to FIG. 223(a). FIG. 223(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the icon display number selection table 222ha. As shown in FIG. 223(a), the number of icons that can be selected (number of reserved icons displayed) is the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (count of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol among the special symbol reserved balls number counter 223c). The number of icons to be displayed is defined based on the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb.

Specifically, when the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "1" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", "1" is specified as the number of icons displayed. If the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5", "5 (special)" is defined as the number of icons to be displayed. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is "1", the corresponding value is not defined because the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is never greater than "6".

In addition, if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "2" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", "1 to 2" is specified as the number of icons displayed. If the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5", the number of icons to be displayed is defined as "1 to 4" and is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb. When the value is "6~", "5 (special)" is specified as the number of icons to be displayed.

If the number of reserved special figures 2 is "3" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", "1 to 3" is specified as the number of icons to be displayed, If the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5", the number of icons to be displayed is defined as "2 to 4", and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is In the case of "6~", "4" is defined as the number of icons to be displayed.

If the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "4" and the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "0 to 2", "1 to 4" is specified as the number of icons to be displayed. If the value stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is "3 to 5", "3 to 4" is defined as the number of icons to be displayed, and the number is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb. If the value is "6~", "4" is defined as the number of icons to be displayed.

Here, if the number of icons displayed is "5 (special)", it means that the number of icons displayed is larger than "4", which is the upper limit of the number of balls reserved for special map 2, and this implementation In this case, the upper limit for the number of reserved balls to be displayed is "4", so a special icon (Fig. 219 special icon 873x) is displayed.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the larger the difference between the number of special figure 2 pending balls and the value stored in the display information storage area 223hb, the more The configuration is such that the more times the second attacker 1650 is opened, the more likely the special icon is displayed. By configuring in this way, even if the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 is small, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation.

On the other hand, if the number of special pattern 2 reserved balls is large (for example, 3 or 4), the number of special pattern 2 reserved balls that will be read in advance will be large, so it will be executed when the number of special pattern 2 reserved balls is small. There is a higher possibility that the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 will be calculated multiple times as a result of the pre-reading of one special figure 2 reservation than the pre-reading result of one special figure 2 reservation. , 4) is configured so that "4" is more likely to be set as the number of icons to be displayed, instead of "5 (special)" being set. And, when the number of icons displayed is "4", it is configured to facilitate the execution of continuous effects, which will be described later. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the special icon is frequently displayed in a state where the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is large.

In addition, even if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is small (for example, 2), if the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is large as a result of pre-reading, that is, small hit C9 or small hit D9 (Fig. 221 (a) ), or when the jackpot G9 (see FIG. 220) is won, a larger number of icons to be displayed than the number of reserved balls in special drawing 2 is selected.

On the other hand, even if the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is large, if the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is small as a result of pre-reading, that is, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, or if the small hit A9 ( 221(a)), or when jackpot D9 or jackpot E9 (see FIG. 220) is won, the number of icons displayed that is smaller than the number of reserved balls in special drawing 2 is selected. It is configured to

With this configuration, the display number of reserved icons used for icon production can be determined regardless of the actual number of reserved balls for special figure 2, so the game is full of interest regardless of the number of reserved balls for special figure 2. It is possible to perform a look-ahead performance.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that the reserved icon is not displayed to the player. The design is designed to make it appear to be a reserved symbol to indicate the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2, and to perform an interesting look-ahead effect regardless of the actual number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2, but it is limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the reserved icon used for icon production and the reserved symbol indicating the actual number of reserved balls for special figure 2 are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, the player can be made aware of the actual number of special drawing 2 reserved balls and the displayed number of reserved icons, so for example, if a large number of reserved icons are displayed when the number of reserved special drawing 2 balls is small, It can make you think that you have won the jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the jackpot type (jackpot F9 or jackpot G9) for which the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is calculated is won, the potential state is set after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, all jackpots that can be predicted based on the displayed number of pending icons are jackpots for which a probability state is set. Therefore, the prediction based on the performance mode of the icon performance (display of the pending icon) is a prediction of a jackpot win that is advantageous to the player, so it is more likely to interest the player than a prediction that also includes a jackpot win that is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot win in which the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is not calculated, that is, a jackpot (jackpot D9, jackpot E9) in which the second attacker 1650 is not released during a jackpot game, the The configuration is such that the probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game is 50%. Therefore, even if you win a jackpot when the icon performance is such that it is impossible to predict a jackpot win (for example, a small number of pending icons are displayed), the probability state will change after the jackpot game ends. You can leave the possibility that it will be set. In this case, before the jackpot game is executed, a performance is performed to encourage whether or not the pending icon will be completely consumed, and if even one pending icon is displayed at the age when the jackpot game is executed, it is a jackpot. It is configured to notify that a potential state will be set (the RUSH game will continue) after the end of the game.

In this way, by using the hold icon displayed in the icon presentation for various purposes, it is possible to perform a more diverse range of presentations and enhance the presentation effect.

Returning to FIG. 222, the explanation will be continued. The continuous performance selection table 222hb is a data table that is referred to when selecting whether to execute the continuous performance described above with reference to FIG. 218, and the number of displayed pending icons in the icon performance is 4. It is referred to when the second special symbol variation is started in the state. This continuous performance selection table 222hb defines whether or not to execute continuous performance based on winning information regarding the second special symbol (special figure 2 winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223b.

Here, the contents specified in the continuous performance selection table 222hb will be specifically explained with reference to FIG. 223(b). FIG. 223(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the continuous performance selection table 222hb. As shown in FIG. 223(b), the continuous performance selection table 222hb includes the winning information of the execution area (winning information used in the current second special symbol lottery) and the pending prize information among the special symbol 2 winning information. Whether or not to execute is determined based on the winning information of (holding area), the value of the acquired performance counter 223f, and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, and when the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 4 That is, it is specified that the continuous performance can be selected only when four pending icons 873 are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81.

Specifically, if the winning information included in the execution area is a jackpot, that is, the second special symbol variation to be executed this time is a jackpot variation, and if the jackpot type is "jackpot F9, jackpot G9", , If the execution of continuous performance A (execution A) is specified and the other jackpot types are "jackpot D9, jackpot E9", the range of the acquired performance counter 223f is continuous in the range of "0 to 89". The non-execution of the performance is associated with the range of "90 to 99", and the execution of the continuous performance B (execution B) is associated with and defined. In addition, if the execution area contains winning information related to jackpot winnings, the jackpot game will be executed after this second special symbol change, so the winning information stored in the pending area will not be considered and the winning information will be played continuously. Whether or not to perform the performance is stipulated.

Here, in the continuous performance of the pattern where you finally win the jackpot, the first result is that you get the V icon 873y by digesting all the pending icons, and the V icon without digesting all the pending icons. A determination is made as to which of the second results of getting 873z is to be used. More specifically, it is determined whether the jackpot targeted for execution of this continuous performance is a guaranteed variable jackpot (jackpot E9 to G9), and if it is determined that it is not a guaranteed variable jackpot (jackpot D9) (execution B). ), set the first result to exhaust all the pending icons, and if it is determined that it is a guaranteed jackpot, a lottery (result) is held to determine whether to set the first result or the second result A selection lottery) is executed, and the type of performance result is set based on the result of the selection lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation from occurring in which the potential state is not set after the end of the jackpot game even though the jackpot game is executed with the pending icon remaining. can.

In addition, even if you win the guaranteed variable jackpot (execution A), the first result can be set as the result of the continuous performance, so for example, a continuous performance where you get V icon 873y. Even if the game is executed, it is possible to make the player play the game while keeping them looking forward to the end. In addition, if a jackpot game corresponding to a guaranteed variable jackpot is executed with all the pending icons consumed, the pending icon will be removed by the time the jackpot game ends as a predetermined occurrence condition is met during the jackpot game. It is preferable that the display is configured to execute an effect to be displayed. For example, when an operation effect is executed that causes the player to operate the frame button 22 during a jackpot game, and the effect of the operation effect is a predetermined effect result. It is preferable that the configuration is such that the generation conditions are satisfied.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player who is playing the jackpot game play the game with enthusiasm in order to quickly grasp the gaming state that will be set after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, the method for establishing the occurrence condition is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined number of balls may be entered into the variable entering means (the first attacker 650 or the second attacker 1650) that is opened during the jackpot game. It is also possible to set an occurrence condition that is satisfied when a ball enters a predetermined number of balls into a ball entering means different from the variable ball entering means that is opened during a jackpot game.

Returning to FIG. 223(b), the explanation will be continued. If the winning information indicating a small win is included in the execution area of the special figure 2 winning information, and the winning information is "Small win B9" to "Small win D9", "Large win E", When there is winning information indicating a jackpot type of either "Jackpot F" or "Jackpot G", the execution of continuous performance B (execution B) is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 69". The range of "70 to 99" is associated with non-execution of continuous performance. In addition, if there is no winning information in the hold that indicates a jackpot type of "jackpot E", "jackpot F", or "jackpot G", the value of the production counter 223f will be continuously in the range of "0 to 69". The non-execution of the performance is associated with the range of "70 to 99", and the execution of the continuous performance C (execution C) is associated and defined. In addition, if the winning information indicating a small hit win is included in the special drawing 2 winning information execution area and the winning information is "small hit A9", regardless of the winning information stored in the reservation area. , the non-execution of continuous performance is stipulated.

If the special drawing 2 winning information execution area contains winning information that indicates a missed win, the winning information that indicates a jackpot type of "Jackpot E", "Jackpot F", or "Jackpot G" is displayed in the pending area. It is specified that the continuous performance is executed in association with the case where there is, and the execution of the continuous performance is specified in association with the case where there is no winning information indicating the jackpot type of “Jackpot E”, “Jackpot F”, or “Jackpot G” in the pending It is stipulated that the performance should not be performed.

As mentioned above, when selecting whether or not to execute a continuous performance, the lottery result of the second special symbol to be executed this time and the pre-read result of the second special symbol stored in the pending memory (stored in the pending area) are selected. Since the winning information (winning information) is referred to, it is possible to execute a continuous performance that increases the expectation of a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make the player watch the continuous performance while paying close attention to whether the result of the continuous performance will be the first result or the second result, knowing that the jackpot will be won when the continuous performance is executed. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, in this embodiment, the continuous performance is executed only when four pending icons are displayed. As shown in FIG. 223(a), the configuration is such that the larger the actual number of reserved balls for special figure 2, the more easily the four reserved icons are displayed. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the four pending icons are displayed, and the performance of the game can be increased. In addition, even if the number of reserved balls for special map 2 has reached the upper limit, the maximum number of reserved balls (4) may not be displayed, so the number of reserved balls for special map 2 has reached the upper limit. Even in this state, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the four pending icons are displayed, and the performance of the game can be further improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the continuous performance can be performed only when four pending icons are displayed, but the continuous performance is not limited to this, and when two or more pending icons are displayed, It may be configured to be able to perform effects. In this case, for example, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute a continuous performance based on the actual number of reserved balls of special figure 2 and the look-ahead result, and, for example, win a jackpot (jackpot E9) that is advantageous to the player. It is preferable to perform a continuous performance with fewer pending icons only when there is winning information indicating that the game will be played. As a result, the degree of expectation of the continuous performance, that is, the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, can be varied depending on the number of displayed pending icons at the time when the continuous performance is executed. On the other hand, it is also possible to create interest in the timing at which the continuous performance is executed.

Furthermore, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute a continuous performance based on the actual number of reserved balls of special figure 2 and the look-ahead result, and for example, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute a continuous performance based on the actual number of reserved balls of special drawing 2 and the result of pre-reading. If there is winning information to indicate, as a preparatory effect for executing the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be configured to be executed after a forced increase display is executed so that the number of displayed pending icons reaches the upper limit. .

In addition, when explaining the contents stipulated in the continuous performance selection table 222hb with reference to FIG. 223(b), continuous performance A (execution A), continuous performance B (execution B), continuous performance B (execution B), Continuous performance C (execution C) is provided, and in execution A, the continuous performance mainly acquires the V icon 873z in the middle of the continuous performance (see FIG. 218(b)), and in execution B, the V icon is mainly obtained at the end of the continuous performance. In execution C, the performance that acquires the V icon 873y in FIG. Although it has been explained that the effect in which the icon cannot be obtained is executed, it is sufficient that the effect described above is mainly executed, for example, the effect of execution B is executed in execution A with a low probability, i.e. If the performance result is a performance that is more disadvantageous than the actual game result, another continuous performance may be configured to be executable.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 222(b). FIG. 222(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 222(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the ninth embodiment is not displayed in contrast to the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 174). The difference is that an information storage area 223ha, an undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, a displayed icon number counter 223hc, and a continuous performance flag 223hd are added, and other than that, the same. Identical contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The undisplayed information storage area 223hb is a data area for temporarily storing the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 calculated based on the winning information command (winning command) received from the main control device 110, and will be described later. In winning command processing 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224), the extracted number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is stored (S4486 in FIG. 224). The stored information is then referenced when determining the number of icons to be displayed, and thereafter the referenced information is discarded. In addition, for winning information that has already been acquired before the potential state is set, the second attacker 1650 releases all winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223hb at the end timing of the jackpot game. The number of times is extracted and the result is stored.

By providing the undisplayed information storage area 223hb in this manner, the timing at which the winning information of the special symbol is received and the timing at which the performance mode is determined can be easily made different.

The undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is a counter for indicating the number of pending icons that are not yet displayed among the currently displayable pending icons, and the value of the counter is decremented when a new pending icon is displayed. be done. In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc are increased/decreased as the performance of increasing and decreasing the number of pending icons, and the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the display It is configured to be able to execute a pseudo effect (effect that ultimately becomes the same value) in which only the number of pending icons in appearance is increased or decreased without increasing or decreasing the value of the completed icon number counter 223hc.

The displayed icon number counter 223hc is a counter for measuring the number of currently displayed pending icons, and is incremented when a new pending icon is displayed and subtracted when the number of pending icons decreases. It is. When displaying a new pending icon, the total number of pending icons to be displayed is determined by referring to the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, and the determined total number and The number of displayed icons is determined based on the difference from the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc.

The continuous performance flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that a continuous performance is being performed, and is set to ON while the continuous performance is being performed. While the continuous presentation flag 223hd is set on, the icon presentation is configured so that the presentation in which the number of pending icons increases or decreases is not performed.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device of the ninth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 224 to 227, a description will be given of the control processing executed by the audio lamp control device among the control contents of the ninth embodiment. The control contents of the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment include winning command processing 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) instead of winning command processing (see S4211 in FIG. 183) in the seventh embodiment described above. Jackpot end processing 9 (see S4954 in FIG. 225) instead of jackpot end processing, preparation state setting processing 9 (see S4691 in FIG. 226) instead of preparation state setting processing (see S4641 in FIG. 185), RUSH setting The difference is that a RUSH setting process 9 (see S8450 in FIG. 227) is executed instead of the process (see S8410 in FIG. 192), but other than that, the process is the same. Detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 224, the contents of winning command processing 9 (see S4281 in FIG. 224) will be explained. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning command processing 9 (S4281). In this winning command processing 9 (S4281), information related to the icon performance executed during the RUSH game is updated, and processing for determining the number of pending icons 873 (see FIG. 217) to be displayed in the icon performance is executed. be done.

When winning command processing 9 (S4281) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S4481), and it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set on. (S4482), if it is set to on (S4482: Yes), win information (big win information, small win information) included in the received winning command is extracted (S4484). That is, it is determined whether the winning command received this time is a winning command that will lead to a winning prize.

If it is determined that there is winning information in the process of S4484 (S4484: Yes), the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 is extracted based on the winning type (big winning type, small winning type) indicated by the winning information (S4485), A value corresponding to the number of times of extraction is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S4486). Then, the number of icons to be displayed is selected with reference to the icon display number selection table 222ha based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls and the information stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S4487). Thereafter, the difference between the selected icon display number and the displayed icon number counter 223hc is added to the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb (S4488), other processing is executed (S4412), and this processing ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a winning command is received as a winning command, the information used for icon production is only updated, and the control for varying the number of displayed pending icons is not performed. As a result, the timing at which the number of displayed pending icons changes can be made different from the timing at which the winning command is received, making it difficult for players to understand when and how the number of displayed pending icons changes. be able to. In addition, in this embodiment, when a winning command is received as a winning command, the information used for the icon presentation is only updated, and the control for varying the number of displayed pending icons is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control for varying the number of displayed pending icons may be executed, or the control for varying the displayed number of pending icons when a predetermined lottery is executed and a winner is won. It may be configured to execute.

In addition, in the process of S4484, if it is determined that there is no winning information (S4484: No), then it is determined whether the continuous performance flag 223hd is set to on (S4489), and if it is not set to on. If it is determined (S4489: No), it is determined whether the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is greater than 0 (S4490). If it is determined that the number of icons is larger than 0 (S4490: Yes), a mode of pseudo-effect that increases or decreases the number of icons is set (S4491), an execution timing of the pseudo-effect is set (S4492), and the execution timing of the pseudo-effect is set according to the mode of the pseudo-effect. updates the values of various counters (undisplayed icon counter 223hb, displayed icon counter 223hc) (S4493), sets a display command to indicate the set presentation mode (S4494), and moves to the process of S4412. do.

If it is determined in the process of S4489 that the continuous presentation flag 223hd is set to ON (S4489: Yes), that is, if the continuous presentation is currently being performed, or if the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is 0. If (S4404: No), that is, if the number of displayed pending icons cannot be increased, the process proceeds to S4412 without setting the pseudo effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 225, the contents of the jackpot ending process 9 (S4954) will be explained. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot end processing 9 (S4954). This jackpot end processing 9 (S4954) is performed based on the winning information that has already been won when the RUSH game can be executed after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability state is set or when the probability variable state is set. The processing content is largely different from the jackpot end processing described above in that processing for setting information regarding icon effects is executed.

When the jackpot end process 9 (S4954) is executed, it is first determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set to on (S5051), and if it is determined that it is not set to on (S5051: No), Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot (S5052). If it is determined that it is a variable jackpot (S5052: Yes), that is, if the variable probability state is set due to a jackpot executed at a timing other than during the RUSH game, all of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b will be Reads the winning information (S5053), extracts winning information (big win information, small winning information) included in the winning information (S5054), and calculates the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 based on the extracted winning information (S5054). S5055). Then, the calculated total number of second attackers (total number of openings) is stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb (S5056).

Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a potential jackpot (S5057), and if it is a potential jackpot (S5057: Yes), a display is displayed to indicate the corresponding potential jackpot mode (preparation mode, RUSH mode). command (S5058), the number of icons to be displayed is set to 4 (S5059), the value of the displayed icon number counter is set to 4 (S5060), and the information stored in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb is The information corresponding to the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is deleted (S5061), a display command indicating the end of the jackpot is set (S5062), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5057 that it is not a potential jackpot (it is a variable probability jackpot) (S5057: No), a display command to indicate the variable probability mode is set (S5063), and the process proceeds to S5062. .

If it is determined in the process of S5051 that the RUSH flag 223fg is set to ON, that is, if it is a jackpot won during the RUSH game (S5051: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot is a normal jackpot. (S5064), and if it is a normal jackpot (S5064: Yes), the RUSH game ends, so the various flags and counters related to the RUSH game are reset (set to the initial state) (S5065), and the current jackpot is A corresponding RUSH display command is set (S5066), and the process moves to S5062. In this case, in the process of S5066, a display command indicating the end of the RUSH game is set. If it is determined in the process of S5065 that it is not a normal jackpot (S5064: No), the process of S5065 is skipped and the process of S5066 is executed. In this case, a display command indicating that the RUSH game continues is set.

Next, the contents of the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691) will be explained with reference to FIG. 226. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691). In this preparation state setting process 9 (S4691), in contrast to the preparation state setting process of the seventh embodiment described above (see S4641 in FIG. 226), a pending icon is displayed at the timing of transition from the variable probability state to the potential state. The difference is that processing for The same content will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation will be omitted.

When the preparation state setting process 9 (S4691) is executed, first, the same processes from S8001 to S8004 as the preparation state setting process (see S4641 in FIG. 226) are executed, and then the corresponding implicit mode (RUSH mode) is executed. (S8051), sets the number of displayed icons to 4 (S8052), sets the value of the displayed icon number counter to 4 (S8053), and stores it in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb. The information corresponding to the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is deleted from the displayed information (S8054), and the present process ends.

That is, the same process as that executed at the end of the jackpot in the case where the potential state is set after the end of the jackpot game is executed. This makes it possible to unify the initial display of the icon performance (a state in which four reserved icons are displayed regardless of the number of reserved balls in special figure 2) when the potential state is set. Therefore, it is possible to unify the control processing for varying the presentation mode of the icon presentation according to the timing of transition to the potential state, and thus the load on the control processing can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450) will be explained with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of the RUSH setting process 9 (S8450). In this RUSH setting process 9 (S8450), a process for setting the performance mode of the icon performance to be performed in response to the second special symbol variation performed during the RUSH game is executed.

When RUSH setting processing 9 (S8450) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 4 (S8651), and if it is 4 (S8651: Yes), continuous production selection is performed. A continuous effect is selected with reference to the table 222hb (S8652), and it is determined whether to execute the continuous effect (S4453). If it is determined that a continuous performance is to be performed (S4453: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the performance mode of the selected continuous performance (S4454), and this processing is ended. In addition, in the process of S4454, the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc and the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb are also updated in correspondence with the number of pending icons used (consumed) in the selected continuous performance. If it is determined in the process of S4453 that the continuous effect is not to be executed (S8653: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S8651, if it is determined that the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is not 4 (S8651: No), then it is determined whether the continuous presentation flag 223hd is set to on (S8655). ), if it is determined that it is not set to on (S8655: No), it is determined whether the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is greater than 0 (S8656). If it is determined that the number is larger than 0 (S8656: Yes), a mode of pseudo-effect that increases or decreases the number of icons is set (S8657), and an execution timing of the pseudo-effect is set (S8658) to match the mode of the pseudo-effect. updates the values of various counters (undisplayed icon counter 223hb, displayed icon counter 223hc) (S8659), sets a display command to indicate the set presentation mode (S8660), and ends this process. .

If it is determined in the process of S8655 that the continuous presentation flag 223hd is set to on (S8655: Yes), that is, if the continuous presentation is currently being performed, or if the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb is 0. In other words, if the number of displayed pending icons cannot be increased, the process ends without setting the pseudo effect.

<About the modification of the ninth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the ninth embodiment described above will be explained. In the icon presentation executed in the ninth embodiment described above, continuous presentation can be executed based on the pre-read result. Then, the performance mode of the continuous performance was determined when the continuous performance was set. Specifically, as a result of the continuous performance, the type of performance mode is determined in advance, such as a performance mode that is executed so that the pending icon remains, or a performance mode that is executed so that all the pending icons are consumed, The configuration was such that a performance was executed according to the type. By configuring in this way, the performance result of the continuous performance and the actual game result will not be different, and the processing load during the continuous performance can be reduced, but the performance pattern of the continuous performance The problem was that it was not possible to provide diversity.

On the other hand, in this modification, when the jackpot game that is the target of the continuous performance starts, the performance mode of the continuous performance is changed based on the type of jackpot won and the number of remaining pending icons. There is. With this configuration, it is possible to set the performance mode of the continuous performance by dividing it into, for example, the first half period until the jackpot game starts and the second half period after the jackpot game starts. Therefore, it is possible to easily diversify the performance patterns of continuous performances.

In addition, in this modified example, since the process of increasing the display number of pending icons after the start of the jackpot game is configured to be executable, a performance mode is set in which all pending icons are consumed in the first half of the continuous performance. However, if the winning type of jackpot is a potential jackpot, the number of displayed pending icons can be increased during the jackpot game. Therefore, the prohibitive conditions when determining the performance mode for the first half of the performance pattern of continuous performance can be relaxed, and the performance pattern can be easily diversified.

Furthermore, in this modification, the continuous performance is configured to progress in accordance with the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the jackpot game. Thereby, even though the second attacker 1650 is opened in a jackpot game, it is possible to make the player think that a small win game is being executed.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the modification of the ninth embodiment>
Here, with reference to FIG. 228, the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. This modification is different from the ninth embodiment described above in that jackpot related processing 9 (S4802) is executed at the start timing of the jackpot game, and the rest is the same. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot related processing 9 (S4802).

When jackpot related processing 9 (S4802) is executed, it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S4901), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4901: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S4902). ), then it is determined whether the RUSH flag 223fg is set on (S4951), and if it is determined that it is set on (S4951: Yes), then the continuous production flag 223hd is turned on. It is determined whether it has been set (S4952). That is, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a jackpot that is subject to continuous performance.

In the process of S4952, if it is determined that the continuous performance flag 223hd is set to ON (S4952: Yes), the continuous performance flag 223hd is set to OFF (S4953), and the current jackpot is a potential jackpot (S4952: Yes). It is determined whether it is a jackpot (the potential state is set after the end of the jackpot game) (S4954), and if it is determined that it is a potential jackpot (S4954: Yes), the number of openings of the second attacker 1650 during the jackpot is determined. Correspondingly, the information in the undisplayed information storage area 223hb and the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc are updated, that is, the pending icon is displayed in correspondence with the release of the second attacker 1650 executed in the jackpot game executed this time. Each value is updated to complete the number (S4955).

Thereafter, a display command corresponding to the updated content is set (S4956), and after the update, it is determined whether the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is 0 (S4957). If it is determined to be 0, that is, Even though RUSH continues due to a potential jackpot, when the continuous performance progresses in accordance with the release of the second attacker 1650, if the number of displayed pending icons becomes 0 (S4957), execute the continuous performance. An additional effect (aspect) for later displaying one pending icon is set (S4958), and the present process ends. The additional performance mode set here includes a performance in which carrots fall from the sky during a jackpot game. Also, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if a jackpot game is being played during RUSH and the pending icon is not displayed, that is, if there is a possibility that the RUSH game will end due to the current jackpot game. In this case, a pseudo additional effect is executed to determine whether or not the above-described additional effect is executed. This pseudo-additional performance, like the additional performance, is formed from a first performance in which something appears to fall from the sky, and a second performance in which something other than carrots falls from the sky. Thereby, it is possible to make the players play the game while keeping them looking forward to the end.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4954 that the current jackpot is not a potential jackpot (S4954: No), that is, if the RUSH game ends with this jackpot, all the displayed pending icons are consumed. The presentation mode is determined (S4959), the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc is cleared (S4960), and this process ends. In addition, in the process of S4951, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4951: No), the same processes of S4913 to S4916 as the above-mentioned jackpot related process (see S4802 in FIG. 68) are executed, This process ends.

It should be noted that the technical idea used in this modification, that is, the technical idea of executing an effect that changes the number of displayed pending icons at the timing when a jackpot game starts, can be used for purposes other than executing it in a continuous effect. Also good.

In this modified example, the process of increasing the display number of pending icons after the start of the jackpot game is configured to be executable. Also, if the winning type of jackpot is a potential jackpot, the number of displayed pending icons can be increased during the jackpot game. Therefore, the prohibitive conditions when determining the performance mode for the first half of the performance pattern of continuous performance can be relaxed, and the performance pattern can be easily diversified.

Furthermore, in this modification, the continuous performance is configured to progress in accordance with the opening operation of the second attacker 1650 executed during the jackpot game. Thereby, even though the second attacker 1650 is opened in a jackpot game, it is possible to make the player think that a small win game is being executed.

As explained above, in the ninth embodiment described above, the special symbol that has been acquired is It is configured to execute a look-ahead performance (icon performance) that changes the number of specific symbols (dedicated icons displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) regardless of the number of reserved balls. As a result, even if the number of special figure reserved balls that has been acquired is small, it is possible to perform the look-ahead effect in accordance with the look-ahead result in the same way as when the number of special figure held balls that has been acquired is the upper limit. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide a look-ahead performance with a high performance effect even to a player who is unable to acquire many special figure reserved balls, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play. I can do it.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of specific symbols displayed in the above-mentioned icon performance is the number of special symbol reserved balls that can be reserved and stored (the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol that is mainly executed during the potential state). (4), and the reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved special symbols that have been acquired are not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (it is difficult for the player to distinguish). ). With this configuration, the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon effect appears as if it were the number of reserved special symbols (the number of retained memory of the second special symbol executed mainly during the potential state). It can be made to think that it is a reserved symbol for showing. It is possible to suppress a player's desire to play who is unable to obtain a large number of special figure reserved balls from decreasing.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the pre-reading result is a specific result (for example, a jackpot with a potential state set), the number of specific symbols displayed in the icon effect can be reserved and stored. It is configured to be larger than the upper limit value (4) of the number (the number of stored second special symbols that are mainly executed during the potential state). By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player who was under the illusion that the specific symbol displayed to the player in the icon performance was a reserved symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a result of the pre-reading process (pre-determination process) executed on the winning information of the special symbol that is held and stored, the number of times the attacker is released in the small winning game is determined. , the number of specific symbols to be displayed is determined based on the determination result. The number of times the attacker is opened in one small winning game is varied depending on the type of winning small winning. Further, as part of the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won, the same attacker release operation as in the small win game is executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to predict the number of small winning games that the player will play in the future based on the number of specific symbols displayed as icon effects. Further, in this embodiment, the player is informed that the period in which the specific symbol is displayed is a period in which the potential state (RUSH game) does not end. That is, if even one specific symbol remains at the end of the jackpot game, it is notified in advance that a potential state will be set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, each time the number of specific symbols is changed, the player pays attention to the icon presentation, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the ninth embodiment described above, the number of icons that can be displayed (the number of pending icons) is determined in the winning command processing 9 (S4281 in FIG. ), and the configuration is configured to execute an effect that increases or decreases the number of displayed pending icons at various times, but the process to determine the number of displayable icons (number of pending icons) The process for determining the number of possible icons) is not executed every time the winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224), which is executed when a winning information command indicating winning information of a special symbol is received, is executed. Processing 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224) may be configured to be executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, a predetermined period of time (for example, a period indicating the elapsed time of 30 seconds since the previous process for determining the number of displayable icons was executed, or the number of additional winning information commands (winning commands) received is 3). The configuration may also be such that the process for determining the number of displayable icons is executed when the period (up to As a result, the timing at which the winning information command (winning command) is actually received and the timing at which the number of displayable icons is determined based on the information included in that command can be made different. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the number of pending icons has been determined for the figure pending storage). In this way, by varying the timing of determining the number of icons that can be displayed, the received winning information command can include a presentation mode that increases or decreases the number of pending icons displayed within the range of the number of icons that can be displayed. Since it is possible to easily deviate from the winning information that is received, it is possible to easily provide a surprising performance to the player.

Furthermore, in addition to the winning command process 9 (S4281 in FIG. 224), for example, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operable operation means (frame button 22), a process for determining the number of displayable icons is executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case, it is preferable to perform an operation effect on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to cause the player to operate the operation means with predetermined contents. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has correctly operated the operation means for the operation performance to be executed to execute the icon performance based on the winning information included in the received winning information command. The player can be made to play the game enthusiastically.

In addition, it also detects that a ball has entered the general prize opening 63 or through gate 67 provided on the game board 13, and based on the detection result (with a predetermined probability when the ball enters), displays the It may be configured to execute the process of determining the number of possible icons. With this configuration, the number of pending icons that can be displayed is determined by a game that is unrelated to the special symbol lottery, so the player is informed of the timing when the winning information command (winning command) is actually received. , and the timing at which the number of displayable icons is determined based on the information included in the command can be changed, so it is possible to know for which winning information (special figure reservation memory) the number of pending icons has been determined. It can be made difficult.

In the present embodiment, as a performance for increasing or decreasing the number of pending icons, a true icon performance for increasing or decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, and the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb, the display. A pseudo-effect that only increases or decreases the number of visible pending icons without increasing or decreasing the value of the completed icon number counter 223hc (a presentation that ultimately becomes the same value) is configured to be executable, and any of the effects can be executed. Although the mode is configured to be set by the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113, the configuration is not limited to this, and the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute a pseudo effect, and When it is determined that the effect is to be executed, the range of the number of pending icons to be increased or decreased in the pseudo effect and a display command indicating that the pseudo effect is to be executed are set, and output to the display control device 114. When a display command indicating that a pseudo effect is to be executed is received, the effect mode may be determined based on information included in the received display command.

With this configuration, the audio lamp control device 113 only needs to control the presentation mode using the audio lamp control device 113 only for the icon presentation (true icon presentation) that is set based on the winning information of the special symbol. The processing load of control processing can be reduced. In addition, by executing a pseudo effect that increases or decreases (varies) only the apparent number of pending icons without increasing or decreasing the value of the undisplayed icon number counter 223hb or the value of the displayed icon number counter 223hc, the icon effect is It is possible to diversify the variable pattern of the number of icons. In addition, since the pseudo-effect is executed so that the final increase and decrease of the pending icon match, it is important to pay attention to the presentation status of the pseudo-effect when setting the presentation mode of the true icon presentation. This is not necessary, and the processing load of the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the embodiments described above, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command Although a case has been described in which the information is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. This makes it possible to reduce the number of times the main controller 110 sends the number of pending commands to the audio lamp controller 113 and the number of times the audio lamp controller 113 receives the number of pending commands, so the main controller 110 and The control burden on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the number of balls entered into the special drawing ball entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the passage through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of one time, but the maximum number of balls held is limited to this. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls, which is displayed in a variable manner based on winnings in the special drawing ball entrance 64, can be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four can be displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured as follows.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display may be performed by moving the symbols vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the display of fluctuating symbols; for example, one or more characters may be displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes with or without the symbol. This also includes the presentation and display that will be displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. In addition, it may be difficult for the player to distinguish between the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol. For example, each display mode may be set using common image data possessed by the display control device 114.

In each of the embodiments described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol that is highlighted and displayed to the player and displaying the secondary symbol. Moreover, as the structure of the display means, a structure other than a liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the left side of the game board 13 is divided into a gaming state (time saving state) which is advantageous to the player and a gaming state (normal state) which is disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state. Although the configuration is such that a left-handed game aiming at an area is executed, it is also possible to configure the target area of different game boards 13 to be different depending on the game state. For example, in the normal state, the game board It may be configured such that a left-handed game aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is executed, and a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the time-saving state. may be executed, and a right-handed game may be executed during the normal state.

Furthermore, in each of the embodiments described above, a left-handed game aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is configured to be executed no matter which game state is set or when a jackpot game is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the right-handed game is executed when the time saving state is set and during the jackpot game, and the left-handed game is executed only during the normal state. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether or not the situation is advantageous for the player depending on the gaming method to be executed (right-handed game, left-handed game).

In each of the embodiments described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the frame button 22 is used to determine that the operation means has been operated when the player presses it. However, other configurations are possible. It may also be possible to use a lever-shaped operating means that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or forward or backward, or whether it has been operated by the player touching or coming close to it. It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. Further, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used to change the performance mode of the performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation. However, it is only necessary to be able to change the performance mode of various performances performed by the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation on the frame button 22. For example, the display mode of the frame button 22 may be It may be electrically connected to the control device 114, or an output signal from the operating means (frame button 22) can be input, and the display control device 114, audio lamp control device 113, audio output device 226, lamp display A control device that can generate an effect setting signal that can be output to the device 227 may be provided. With this configuration, even if a plurality of performance operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of performance operation means can be centrally managed. It is possible to smoothly set the performance mode for the player's operation on the means.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment described above, the switching button group 22z (switching button 22za, first selection button 22zb, second selection button 22zc) for selecting the end condition of the accessory winning game is provided, and the movable valve 750 and A part of each operation control of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c, or The entire process may be configured to be executed not by the main controller 110 but by the audio lamp controller 113 side.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, a pachinko machine may be implemented in which a plurality of levels of probability combinations (commonly referred to as settings) are provided for the jackpot lottery, and the settings can be changed at the game parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In addition, for pachinko machines that have multiple settings, the combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of jackpot probability in a low probability state and jackpot probability in a variable probability state) can be set in one of multiple stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to , but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the pachinko machine is capable of varying the proportion of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot depending on the settings. It's okay. That is, the rate at which jackpots of a type advantageous to the player are determined may be varied, or the rate at which jackpots of a type disadvantageous to the player are determined, may be varied depending on the settings. More specifically, for example, the rate at which jackpots are determined with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) may be varied depending on the settings, or the rate at which jackpots are determined with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may also be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting is varied by varying the proportion of each setting. In addition, for example, after the jackpot ends, the ratio at which a jackpot is determined that will give a large number of time savings (for example, 100 times) can be varied depending on the setting, or a jackpot that will give a small number of time savings (for example, 0 times). The rate at which the is determined may be varied depending on the settings. Furthermore, the rate at which jackpots are determined to transition (or are likely to transition) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot can be varied according to settings, or may be changed to a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, normal state). ) may be changed depending on the setting. Further, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided which has a significantly higher probability of being determined only in a specific setting (almost never being determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the settings can be set in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set to 6. In setting 6, if there is a jackpot, a 6-round jackpot is determined 2% of the time, while in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only 0.01% of the time. It may also be a configuration. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, there is an extremely high possibility that the most advantageous setting is 6, so the player is forced to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot when playing the game. be able to. In addition, instead of this, or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the proportion of the jackpot type in which 66 time saving times are given after the jackpot ends is higher than in other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or the accessory inside the jackpot) operates in a different operation pattern from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is more likely to be determined (the ratio of determination becomes higher) with a specific setting. In addition, when changing the combination of jackpot probabilities depending on the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in the variable probability state, the setting is less favorable to the player. A configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot probability increases as the number increases. This configuration is particularly suitable for a type of game ball type in which the number of special symbol drawings increases as the number of drawings for special symbols increases (the number of prize balls paid out is easier to increase than the number of game balls fired). Effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying this to a type of gaming machine that has a configuration in which the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won, and in which the variable probability state has a high probability of winning a small win, the advantage of high settings can be realized. You can improve your sexuality. That is, when the probability of a jackpot is low in a variable probability state, the number of drawings until the next jackpot is likely to be increased, so there are many chances to win a small jackpot and win a prize ball. Therefore, when the probability changes, it becomes easier for the player to obtain more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, slot machines are well-known machines in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and the symbol active line determined, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

All or part of the embodiments and control examples described above may be combined. For example, the configuration of the passage detection sensor 228 of the right variable prize winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to other embodiments. For example, by applying it to the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during execution of the standby state production can be more accurately linked to the number of game balls flowing down the top surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. More specifically, the passage number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment is also provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, and the value of the passage number counter 223k is updated in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 87). (See S4211, S4212, S4219, S4220). During execution of the standby state performance, each time the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated, the mode of the chance meter CM is updated so that the gauge number corresponds to the updated counter value. Thereby, the mode of the chance meter CM can be made in accordance with the situation of the top surface of the actual opening/closing door 65f1. The configuration of the sixth embodiment can be applied to other embodiments in a similar manner.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristics Group A> (The update timing of the number of time reductions and the timing for determining the end of time reduction are different)
A discriminating means that performs discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means that can dynamically display identification information for a predetermined period of time to show the discrimination result of the discriminating means, and the dynamic display means. a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result; a first game state; a second gaming state different from the gaming state; and gaming state setting means capable of setting any gaming state among a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state, the gaming machine having a second gaming state different from the gaming state; an updating means capable of updating related first information; and an end determining means capable of determining whether the first information updated by the updating means satisfies an end condition, and the game state setting The means sets the second gaming state when the ending determining means determines that the ending condition is satisfied in the state where the first gaming state is set, and the gaming machine A gaming machine A1, characterized in that the update timing of the first information by the updating means is different from the end determination timing at which the end determination means determines whether the end condition is satisfied.

In recent years, in game machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and after a predetermined period of variation, the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If so, a bonus game advantageous to the player has been executed. Furthermore, it is configured such that a plurality of game states can be set, and when a specific game state is set, an advantageous state in which the game ball easily enters the starting hole is set until the number of drawings reaches a specific number. There is a gaming machine configured as follows (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-033569). Such a gaming machine allows the player to play the game while expecting the first gaming state to be set, thereby increasing the player's desire to play. Furthermore, in the gaming machine described above, the process of measuring (subtracting) the number of drawings during an advantageous state and the process of ending the advantageous state, which is executed based on the number of drawings reaching a specific number, are stopped and displayed while the lottery results are displayed. The system is configured to be executed at the timing when the game is set, and the set advantageous state is provided to the player for a longer period of time. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the lottery results are stopped and displayed, including the process of measuring (subtracting) the number of drawings during an advantageous state, and the process of ending the advantageous state, which is executed based on the number of drawings reaching a specific number. Since the system is configured to be executed in response to a lottery result, there is a problem in that the number of processes to be executed at a predetermined timing (timing for stopping and displaying lottery results) increases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the processing load by reducing the amount of processing executed at the same timing in the gaming machine described above.

In addition, in recent years, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been configured so that games for executing bonus games can be executed overlappingly (overlapping games are possible), and depending on the game result of one game, a lottery for the other game is performed. There is a gaming machine configured to interrupt the subtraction of the fluctuation period for indicating the result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In such games, since a plurality of games can be executed overlappingly, it is possible to efficiently play a game that aims to execute a bonus game. Furthermore, since the game of one game can be temporarily interrupted depending on the game result of the other game, multiple games that are executed overlappingly can result in the bonus game being executed redundantly, and the player On the other hand, it is possible to suppress the execution of difficult-to-understand bonus games.

However, when a gaming machine capable of executing duplicate games is configured to be able to set the above-mentioned advantageous state, it is possible to measure (subtract) the number of drawings during the advantageous state, and when the number of drawings reaches a specific number. Because the end processing of the advantageous state that is executed based on the timing is executed at the timing when the lottery results are stopped and displayed, for example, based on the bonus game being awarded in one game, the lottery result in the other game is If the subtraction of the variable time to show the difference is interrupted and an advantageous state is set due to the awarded bonus game, the interrupted subtraction of the variable time will be restarted and the lottery result will be stopped and displayed. There has been a problem in that when the number of lottery draws is counted (subtracted), the process is executed. In other words, since the process of measuring (subtracting) the number of drawings during an advantageous state is executed based on the stop display of the lottery results executed in a state other than an advantageous state, it is difficult for the player to play games during an advantageous state. There was a problem that it could not be executed properly. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by allowing the player to suitably execute the game in an advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine A1, the updating of the first information by the updating means and the determination of termination by the termination determining means can be executed at different timings. Therefore, when the termination condition is satisfied by updating the first information, the amount of processing executed at the same timing can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced.

In the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the update timing is a timing at which the discrimination is performed by the discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, since the update timing of the first information related to the discrimination by the discriminating means is the timing when the discriminating means executes the discrimination, the first information corresponding to the discrimination content is This has the effect that information can be updated reliably. Furthermore, since the first information can be updated by the updating means when the determining means executes the determination, the player is made to be interested in both the determination made by the determining means and the game state to be set. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the first information is updated by the update means when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, it is possible to suppress unnecessary update processing and reduce the processing load. There is.

A gaming machine A3 in the gaming machine A1 or A2, wherein the end determination timing is after the identification information is stopped and displayed.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the end condition is determined during a period when the identification information is not dynamically displayed, so that the player can grasp the determination result of the determining means. It is possible to prevent the game state from changing while the player is watching the dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

In the gaming machine A3, the discrimination means executes discrimination corresponding to the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, and the end discrimination timing is set after the identification information is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the period is until the determination by the determining means is performed next.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, even though the first information has been updated by the updating means to first information for which the termination condition can be satisfied, the determination by the determining means is performed before the second gaming state is set. can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the update timing of the first information and the end determination timing are made different, there is an effect that the determination performed by the determination means can be appropriately performed.

A gaming machine A5, in any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, wherein the first information is updated by the updating means based on the number of times the determination is performed by the determining means.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the first information is updated every time the determining means executes the determination, so the update status of the first information is displayed to the player. can be made easier to understand. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the first gaming state suddenly shifts to the second gaming state and the player is confused.

In gaming machine A5, the updating means updates the first information between when the determining means executes the determination and until dynamic display for showing the determination result of the determination is performed. A game machine A6 characterized in that it is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A5, since the first information is not updated during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In the gaming machines A1 to A6, if an interruption condition is met while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, an interruption means for interrupting the dynamic display; restarting means for restarting the dynamic display when a restart condition is met; and when the dynamic display is interrupted by the interrupting means, the first information updated by the updating means can be varied. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that it has information variable means.

According to gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when dynamic display is interrupted, the first information may be changed by the information changing means. Therefore, while dynamically displaying the identification information, the player can be entertained not only by the determination result of the determining means but also by the presence or absence of an interruption, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game. .

A gaming machine A8 in the gaming machine A7, wherein the information changing means changes the first information to variable first information in which the termination condition is more difficult to satisfy than the first information.

According to gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A7, the following effects are achieved. That is, while the identification information is dynamically displayed, the player can play the game while expecting that the dynamic display will be interrupted by the interrupting means, and this has the effect of increasing the interest of the game. .

In the gaming machine A7 or A8, the bonus game executing means executes the bonus game even when a second condition different from the first condition that can be satisfied based on the result of the determination performed by the determining means is satisfied. The gaming machine A9 is executable, and the interruption condition is established based on the fulfillment of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7 or A8, the interruption condition can be satisfied when the second condition that allows the bonus game to be executed without using the determination by the determining means is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game different from that determined by the determining means, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine A9 has a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and the second condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the ball entry means. A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, it is possible to play a game in which a game ball is entered into the ball entering means as a game different from the discrimination by the discriminating means, so that the interest in the game is increased. The effect is that it can be improved.

In the game machine A10, a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first state; a variable control means capable of executing a variable operation of varying the member to a first state for a predetermined period based on the establishment of an execution condition, the variable control means being in a state in which the first gaming state is set; The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the variable operation is easier to execute when the second gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A10, the period during which the first gaming state in which the second condition is more easily satisfied than the second gaming state continues can be varied based on the satisfaction of the second condition. This has the effect of motivating the player to play a game to satisfy the second condition.

<Characteristics Group B> (Depending on the setting conditions, the rate at which benefits are awarded for winning balls varies)
variable ball entry means that is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the first state; and the variable ball entry means based on establishment of an execution condition. variable control means for varying the means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period; a specific area through which a game ball entering the variable ball entry means can pass; and a game ball entering the specific area. a privilege awarding means capable of awarding a privilege based on a given event, and a setting information discriminating means capable of discriminating setting information when the variable ball entry means is variably controlled by the variable control means; , according to the setting information determined by the setting information determining means, a first state in which the game ball entering the variable ball entering means easily passes through the specific area, and a first state in which it is more difficult to pass through the specific area. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that it has a switching means capable of switching to a second state.

In recent years, in game machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and after a predetermined period of variation, the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If so, a bonus game advantageous to the player has been executed. Further, a variable ball entry means is provided as a starting port, and a variable ball entry means is provided with a variable member attached to the starting port that can be changed between a first state in which entry of game balls is permitted and a second state in which entry is restricted. There is a gaming machine that is configured to be able to set an advantageous state that is easy to change to the first state, and a disadvantageous state that is more difficult to change to the first state than the first gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-033569 Public bulletin). In such a gaming machine, by varying the ease with which a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the player is encouraged to play the game while expecting that an advantageous situation will be established. However, even if an unfavorable state is set, once the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a lottery is executed, so in a disadvantageous state, the variable entry means There is a risk that the game will be played at the timing when the means becomes the first state, and there is a problem that the player's desire to play the game will be reduced when the advantageous state is set. In the gaming machine described above, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play by making it difficult to perform a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means when a disadvantageous state is set. The purpose is to provide gaming machines.

According to the game machine B1, since it is possible to switch between the first state and the second state according to the setting information, the player is not interested in the setting information at the time when the game ball enters the variable ball entry means. can have. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine B1 has an operation control means for controlling the operation of the switching means, and the switching means is configured such that the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means enters a first flow path and the first flow path is different from the first flow path. The plurality of flow paths can be switched so that the flow flows down any one of the plurality of flow paths including a different second flow path, and the operation control means is configured to control the operation by the variable control means. Operation control of the switching means is started based on the start of the control, and the game ball flowing down the first flow path by the switching means can pass through the specific area. Game machine B2.

According to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the operation of the switching means is controlled by the operation control means based on the start of control by the variable control means, and when the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means flows down the first flow path by the switching means, it passes through a specific area. It is possible. As a result, the variable control for making it easier for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means and the operation control of the switching means can be linked, so that the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means can be placed in a specific area. This has the advantage that it is possible to appropriately control whether or not the vehicle passes through.

In the game machine B2, the game ball that has flown down to the second flow path by the switching means is more difficult to pass through the specific area than the game ball that has flown down to the first flow path. Game machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the game ball flowing down the second channel can be made more difficult to pass through a specific area than the gaming ball flowing down the first channel. There is an effect that the passing rate of game balls entering the variable ball entry means to a specific area can be set simply by controlling the operation of the switching means by the control means.

The gaming machine B2 or B3 has a normal area through which the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means can pass, and the normal area is such that the game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means have a normal area that cannot pass through the specific area. The area is formed so that a game ball that does not pass through the normal area passes through, and the bonus awarding means does not give the bonus when the game ball passes through the normal area. Game machine B4.

According to gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B2 or B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, if the game ball that enters the variable ball entry means passes through the normal area, no benefit will be given. Therefore, even if an excessive number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress excessive awarding of benefits to the player. Furthermore, by providing a normal area within the variable ball entry means, players are provided with excessive benefits without having to provide a mechanism outside the variable ball entry means to prevent game balls from entering the variable ball entry means. Since it is possible to prevent the ball from being applied, there is an effect that the area outside the variable ball entry means can be easily used for other purposes.

In any of the game machines B2 to B4, the game balls flowing down the first flow path are transferred to a third flow path different from the second flow path, and different from the second flow path and the third flow path. and a fourth flow path, and the gaming machine has a first area, as the specific area, into which game balls distributed to the third flow path by the allocation means can enter. It has at least a specific area and a second specific area different from the first specific area into which the game balls sorted into the fourth channel by the sorting means can enter, and the bonus giving means The gaming machine is characterized in that the content of the award is different depending on whether a game ball enters the first specific area and when a game ball enters the second specific area. B5.

According to gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines B2 to B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow path by the switching means is distributed to the third flow path by the distribution means, it passes through the first specific area, and when it is distributed to the fourth flow path, it passes through the first specific area. It passes through the second specific flow path. As a result, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the ease with which the benefit is granted by the benefit granting means is varied according to the establishment of the set conditions, and furthermore, the ease with which the benefit is granted by the distribution means is changed. The content of the benefits can be varied. Therefore, whether or not a benefit will be granted and the content of the benefit to be granted are determined in stages, which makes it easier for players to decide whether or not the benefit will be granted and the content of the benefit at once. This has the effect of extending the period of time during which you can enjoy the game. Further, when using such a configuration, it is preferable to use a function of notifying information indicating the falling state of the game ball in the variable ball entry means. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the falling situation of the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game. In addition, it is preferable to use a function that notifies information indicating that the setting conditions are met. As a result, the player can understand, before the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, that it is likely that some kind of benefit will be granted by entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with high expectations.

Any of the gaming machines B1 to B5 has a gaming state setting means that can set at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the switching means is configured to set a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that when the first gaming state is set by the setting means, it is easier to switch to the first state than when the second gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the ease of switching to the first state can be varied depending on the set gaming state, so that the player can This has the effect of making the player more interested in the currently set gaming status, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B5, the variable control means is configured to vary the variable ball entry means between a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable pattern. controllable, and the switching means is capable of switching at least to the first state when the variable control means variably controls the variable ball entry means in the first variable pattern. A gaming machine B7.

According to gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines B1 to B5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable control means can make it more difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means when the second variable pattern is set than when the variable control is performed using the first variable pattern. . The switching means can be switched to the first state when variably controlled using the first variable pattern. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large number of game balls that cannot pass through the specific area, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the bonus awarding means executes a specific game based on the game ball entering the specific area, and the gaming machine executes the specific game based on the game ball entering the specific area. A gaming machine B8 characterized in that it has a bonus game execution means that can execute a bonus game when the result of the specific game is a predetermined result.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, if the result of a specific game executed when a game ball passes through a specific area is a predetermined result, a bonus game is executed. Since this is executed, the effect is that the player can be motivated to play a game in which the game ball passes through a specific area.

<Characteristics Group C> (In a gaming machine that can execute multiple games overlappingly, the mode of performance regarding one game is set according to the variation time of one game)
A discriminating means that performs discrimination when a discriminating condition is met, a dynamic display means that can dynamically display identification information to show the discrimination result of the discriminating means, and a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information to be displayed based on selection information; and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means indicates the specific determination result. In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means that can execute a bonus game when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed, the specific identification information that allows the execution of a specific game during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed. A game execution means, a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance related to the specific game, and a performance mode of the specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means are set based on at least information corresponding to the selection information. A game machine C1 characterized in that it has a performance mode setting means.

In recent years, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been configured so that games for executing bonus games can be executed overlappingly (overlapping games are possible), and game results are shown for each game that is executed overlappingly. There is a gaming machine that executes an effect display (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-45518). In such games, when multiple games are executed overlappingly, it is possible to easily understand each game by looking at each effect display that is executed overlappingly. Since the performance mode of the performance display being performed is determined only based on the content of the corresponding game, and it is not possible to execute a performance related to multiple games that are executed overlappingly, the performance display being executed There has been a problem in that it is difficult to grasp the entire game that is being executed overlappingly, resulting in a decrease in performance effects. To provide a game machine as described above, which enhances the performance effect and allows players to play games with enthusiasm by executing a performance that makes it easy to understand the contents of a plurality of games that are executed overlappingly. The purpose is to

According to the gaming machine C1, since the performance mode of the specific performance can be determined based on the selection information, a performance that associates the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed redundantly with the specific game is executed. This has the effect of increasing the production effect. In addition, since the performance mode of a specific performance can be determined based on the selection information, it is possible to make players play games voluntarily in order to overlap multiple games in order to see various performance modes. There is an effect that it can be done.

The gaming machine C1 includes a remaining period determining means capable of determining the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the performance mode setting means is configured to determine the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic displaying means, A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the performance mode is set based on the remaining period.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the performance mode of the specific performance is set based on the remaining period of the identification information, so that the determination timing of the determining means and the execution timing of the specific game are The performance mode of the specific performance can be changed accordingly. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to encourage players to play games at various timings in order to overlap a plurality of games in order to see various production modes.

In the gaming machine C2, if an interruption condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the dynamic display is interrupted by the interruption means, and the interruption is interrupted by the interruption means. restart means for restarting the dynamic display based on the end of the bonus game, and the interruption condition is such that the game result of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means is a predetermined game result. A gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the game machine C3 is established when the following is true.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the dynamic display means can be interrupted by the interruption means. Therefore, the determination by the determining means and the specific game can be related not only to the performed performance but also to the actual game, so there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine C3 includes a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which a game more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state is executed, and the gaming state setting means The means sets the first gaming state when a specific period has elapsed since the second gaming state was set, and the restarting means sets the second gaming state after the end of the bonus game. The suspended dynamic display is restarted as a dynamic display during the second gaming state, and the specific period is equal to the remaining period of the identification information restarted by the restarting means. The game is characterized in that the performance mode setting means sets the performance mode based on the remaining period when the dynamic display is interrupted by the interruption means. Machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the length of the specific period in which the second gaming state is set in which a game advantageous to the player is executed is varied depending on the remaining period of the dynamic display interrupted by the interrupting means. Then, the performance mode of the specific performance is set based on the length of the remaining period of the dynamic display when it is interrupted by the interruption means. Therefore, since it is possible to grasp the degree of advantage of a game to be executed later based on the performance mode of the specific performance, there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, a remaining period determining means capable of determining the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic displaying means; and a remaining period determining means that determines the remaining period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; an advantageous condition determining means for determining whether an advantageous condition is satisfied, and the performance mode setting means sets the performance mode based on a determination result of the advantageous condition determining means. Game machine C5.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the advantageous condition determining means determines whether the remaining period satisfies the advantageous conditions, and the performance mode of the specific performance is set based on the determination result, so that the specific performance executed is advantageous to the player. This has the effect of being able to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether or not there is one.

In the gaming machine C5, the advantageous condition determining means determines that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period is longer than the first period.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the identification information being dynamically displayed is longer than the first period, so that the processing is executed. There is an effect that the player can be motivated to play a specific game based on the specific performance.

In the game machine C4 or C5, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means for acquiring acquired information when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means. storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information, and the determination means executes determination based on the obtained information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied. and a pre-discrimination means capable of pre-discriminating the obtained information stored in the storage means before the discrimination based on the obtained information is performed by the discriminating means, and the pre-discrimination means The means determines in advance a dynamic display period of the identification information for showing the result of the determination by the determination means based on at least the acquired information, and the advantageous condition determination means determines in advance that the remaining period is the same as the previous article. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied when the dynamic display period is longer than the dynamic display period determined by the previous determination means.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the acquired information determined by the determining means is stored in the storage means up to a predetermined number, and the dynamic display period corresponding to the acquired information stored in the storage means is determined in advance. Then, if it is determined that the remaining period of the dynamic display being executed is longer than the pre-determined dynamic display period, it is determined that the advantageous condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while predicting the timing of interruption of the dynamic display that will be advantageous to the player based on the specific performance to be executed, so there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C6, the advantageous condition determining means determines the determination result of the prior determining means corresponding to the acquired information that is next determined by the determining means, among the acquired information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine C7 characterized in that it determines whether a target satisfies the advantageous conditions.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are achieved. In other words, an advantageous condition is established when the remaining period is longer than the dynamic display period corresponding to the obtained information to be next judged by the judgment means. The player can decide whether to interrupt the target display or the next dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select a game, and there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the gaming state setting means sets the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic displaying means in a state where the first gaming state is set as the specific period. The first gaming state is set when a predetermined period of at least two or more specified times is stopped and displayed, and includes a period calculation means capable of calculating the specified period, The period calculation means calculates the specific period by summing the dynamic display periods during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, up to the specific number of times, and the period calculation means A gaming machine C8 characterized in that it has a period mode display means capable of displaying a period mode for indicating the specific period calculated by.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines C1 to C7, the following effects are achieved. That is, by looking at the period mode displayed by the period mode display means, it is possible to grasp the length of the specific period and at the same time grasp the gaming situation in the second gaming state based on the performance mode of the specific performance. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the various performances performed, and there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Characteristics Group D> (The conditions for ending the winning game vary depending on the operation on the operating means)
a variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the first state; A gaming machine comprising a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game that changes the ball entering means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, wherein the specific game is executed by the specific game executing means. a first termination condition that is satisfied when a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means; and a period during which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state has elapsed over the predetermined period. A termination means that terminates when one termination condition is satisfied among a plurality of termination conditions including a second termination condition that is satisfied when the first operation is completed, and a second operation different from the first operation; and an operating means capable of executing the above, and the first termination condition is more likely to be met when the first operation is executed by the operating means than when the second operation is executed. A game machine D1 characterized in that it is a game machine.

In recent years, in game machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and after a predetermined period of variation, the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If there is a game ball, a bonus game that allows the player to enter the game ball into the attacker (specific winning slot) is executed, and a gaming machine configured so that multiple conditions are set for ending the bonus game. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-45518). In such gaming machines, generally, the time end condition for ending the bonus game is based on the elapsed time since the bonus game was executed, and the time end condition is based on the number of game balls entered by the attacker during the bonus game. A winning end condition for ending the bonus game is set, and control is executed to end the bonus game when any of the ending conditions is satisfied.

However, since the same game is played every time during the bonus game, even if a plurality of termination conditions are set, basically only one of the termination conditions is likely to be satisfied. In other words, in a gaming machine that is configured to make it easier for an attacker to win a game ball during a bonus game, the winning end condition is likely to be satisfied before the time end condition is satisfied, and the game ball can be easily won by an attacker during a bonus game. In a gaming machine configured so that it is difficult to win a game ball, the time end condition is likely to be satisfied before the winning end condition is satisfied.

In this way, even if multiple ending conditions are set for the bonus game, if most of the ending conditions that can be met are specific ending conditions, the advantage of setting multiple ending conditions is that it is difficult to determine which ending condition By making it difficult to understand whether the bonus game ends based on the establishment of the bonus game, there is a problem in that it becomes difficult to make the player interested in the game during the bonus game. In the gaming machine described above, by suppressing the fact that among the plurality of ending conditions for ending the bonus game, the ending conditions that are met are biased toward a specific ending condition, the player can play games during the bonus game with enthusiasm. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can.

According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to change the ending conditions for ending a specific game in progress depending on the operation content performed by the operating means, so that the player can be motivated to play the game. It has the effect of being able to.

The gaming machine D1 is characterized by having a selection effect execution means capable of executing a selection effect for causing the player to select whether to cause the operation means to execute the first operation or the second operation. A gaming machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the ending condition can be selected based on the selection effect executed by the selection effect execution means, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. There is an effect that it can be done.

The gaming machine D2 includes a performance mode setting means that can set a performance mode of the selected performance executed by the selected performance execution means, and the performance mode setting means is configured to set a performance mode when the first termination condition is satisfied; The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the presentation mode is set differently when the second termination condition is met and when the bonus to be awarded after the end of the specific game is different.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the mode of performance of the selection performance can be varied depending on the privilege given after the end of the specific game, the player pays attention to the selection performance that is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine D3, a determining means for performing determination when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, and identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determining means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period of time. a dynamic display means capable of performing a bonus game, and when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result, a bonus game can be executed. It has a bonus game execution means, and a period determination means that can determine a period until the bonus game execution means is executed based on the determination result of the determination means, and the performance mode setting means is configured to perform the specific game. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the performance mode of the selected performance is set based on the timing at which the above-mentioned selection performance is executed and the determination result of the period determination means.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are achieved. In other words, since the performance mode of the selection performance is set based on the execution timing of the specific game and the timing of the bonus game being executed, the performance mode of the selection performance is set based on the execution timing of the specific game and the timing when the bonus game is executed. The game can be played while predicting whether the period from the end of the specific game to the execution of the bonus game can be shortened by satisfying the end condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased.

The game machine D4 has a second variable ball entry means that is variable between a third state in which a game ball can enter and a fourth state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the third state; The bonus game execution means is for changing the second variable entry means into the third state and the fourth state in a predetermined variable pattern for a predetermined period of time as the bonus game, and the bonus game execution means The types of the bonus game to be executed include a first bonus type, and a second bonus type in which the second variable ball entry means is in the fourth state during the bonus game for a longer period than the first bonus type. , and the performance mode setting means is executed at the end timing of the specific game based on the start timing of the specific game. A gaming machine D5 characterized in that the presentation mode is made different depending on whether the type of the bonus game that can be played is the first bonus type or the second bonus type.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, if a bonus game can be executed at the end timing of a specific game, the performance mode of the selection performance is set according to the type of bonus game, so the performance mode of the selection performance being executed is based on the selection performance being executed. It is possible to make the player play the game while predicting which ending condition to satisfy for the specific game will allow the player to finish the specific game in an advantageous situation. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine D5, the ending timing of the specific game is a first situation in which the dynamic displaying means is executing the dynamic display of the identification information, or the bonus game is being executed by the bonus game execution unit. and a situation determining means for determining whether the second situation is the first situation, and the presentation mode setting means is configured to vary the presentation mode depending on whether the situation is the first situation or the second situation. Gaming machine D6 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the selective production is performed depending on whether the timing at which a specific game can be ended is during the dynamic display of identification information or during the execution of a bonus game. Since the modes can be made different, it is better to satisfy which end condition for the specific game being executed based on the selection performance to be executed, so that the specific game can be ended in a situation advantageous to the player. It is possible to have the player play the game while predicting whether or not he or she will be able to do it. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased.

The gaming machine D6 includes a remaining period determining means for determining the remaining period of the dynamic display at the end timing of the specific game when the situation determining means determines that the first situation is the first situation, The mode setting means is characterized in that, when the remaining period is determined by the remaining period determining means to be a predetermined period or more, the mode setting means sets a different presentation mode from that when the remaining period is less than the predetermined period. Game machine D7.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the performance mode of the selected performance is changed depending on the length of the remaining period of the identification information that is dynamically displayed at the timing when the specific game can be ended. Therefore, based on the selection effect to be executed, it is better to establish which ending condition for the specific game being executed to shorten the period from the end of the specific game until the bonus game is executed. It is possible to have the player play the game while predicting whether or not the length can be shortened. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate in the game can be increased.

In any one of the gaming machines D4 to D7, a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when an execution condition is satisfied, and a specific game execution device that executes the specific game while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display device. and a restarting means for restarting the dynamic display that has been interrupted by the interrupting means when the specific game ends. The gaming machine D8 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines D4 to D7, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the dynamic display can be interrupted while a specific game is being executed, the length of the dynamic display suspension period can be varied by varying the termination conditions for ending the specific game. . Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game.

In the gaming machine D8, the variable entry means has a specific area through which the game ball that has entered can pass, and the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game even when the game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine D9 is characterized in that it is possible.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine D8, a bonus game can be executed even when a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means passes through a specific area, so that it provides a benefit to the player. , it is possible to provide the fun of choosing whether to play a game to satisfy the second ending condition or to play a game to satisfy the first ending condition for a specific game, thereby improving the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D8 or D9, a gaming state setting means capable of setting at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which a game more advantageous to the player is executed than the first gaming state is provided as the gaming state. and the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic displaying means is stopped and displayed a specific number of times while the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine D10 characterized in that it sets a state.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D8 or D9, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the second gaming state in which a game advantageous to the player is executed ends based on the number of times the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information, the dynamic display may be interrupted during the second gaming state. is effective when extending the duration of the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of having him or her select whether to play a game to satisfy the second termination condition or to perform a game to satisfy the first termination condition for a specific game. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

<Feature E group> (Navigation display of the target location for winning games)
variable ball entry means that is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the first state; and a determination is made when a determination condition is satisfied. a discriminating means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discriminating means; Privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game in which the variable entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period when the display is stopped with specific identification information indicating that it is a determination result of A gaming machine E1, characterized in that it has a display control means for displaying a display image showing the variable ball entry means on the display means when the bonus game is executed. .

In recent years, in game machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and after a predetermined period of variation, the lottery result is stopped and displayed. In such a case, a game in which a ball entry means into which a game ball would normally be difficult to enter was opened was executed as a bonus game advantageous to the player. Furthermore, there is a gaming machine in which the starting opening position and the ball entry means opened during the bonus game are arranged differently (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-45518). In such games, the position at which the game ball is fired at the player is varied between when playing a game where the player aims at the starting hole and when playing a bonus game, which may cause the player to get bored. It was possible to provide games that would not come easily.

However, if the bonus game is executed and the player continues to play the game aiming at the starting hole, the ball will not be able to enter the ball entry means during the bonus game, and the player will suffer a loss. There was a possibility that something like this might occur.

In addition, in order to improve the interest of the game, recent gaming machines have multiple devices within a limited gaming area (variable from a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the state to a state in which it is easy to enter the ball depending on the game content). Some devices are arranged closely together (equipment). With such gaming machines, there is a problem in that it is difficult for players to understand which device they should aim the game ball at, resulting in a situation where the player plays an inappropriate game and suffers a loss. Ta. In the gaming machine described above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

According to the gaming machine E1, the display control means displays the display image showing the variable ball entry means on the display means, so that when a bonus game is executed, the game player can know where to aim the game ball. It is possible to notify people in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

In the gaming machine E1, the display control means causes the display image to be displayed on the display means at least during a period from when the specific identification information is stopped and displayed until when the variable ball entrance means is changed to the first state. A game machine E2 characterized in that it displays a display.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, since the display image is displayed before the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state, it is possible to shoot the game ball after viewing the display image. In this case, the game ball can be entered into the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to provide games that are easier to understand for players.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a bonus game type selection means capable of selecting one bonus game type from a plurality of bonus game types as the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, and the display control means. It has a display mode setting means that can set a display mode of the display image to be displayed on the display means, and the display mode setting means sets a different display according to the bonus game type selected by the bonus game type selection means. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the mode can be set.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the display mode of the display image can be varied based on the type of jackpot, so the bonus game can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner, and the bonus game can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner. The content of the game can be suggested to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E3, the bonus game execution means is capable of executing the bonus games having different values depending on the bonus game type selected by the bonus game type selection means. .

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, bonus games with different values depending on the bonus game type are executed, so that the player is forced to pay close attention to the display mode of the display image displayed on the display means. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4 includes ball entry detection means capable of detecting that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, and the display mode setting means is configured to control the display mode by the display control means. A gaming machine E5 characterized in that the display mode of the display image displayed on the screen is variably set based on the detection of the ball hitting by the ball hitting detection means.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines E1 to E4, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means by the ball entry detection means, the display mode of the display image can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of the progress of the bonus game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5 has an operating means that can be operated by a player, and an operation determining means that can determine the content of an operation performed on the operating means, and the display mode setting means includes: A gaming machine E6, characterized in that the display mode is variably set based on the determination result of the operation determining means.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the display mode of the display image can be varied by the player operating the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's desire to play can be improved.

In the gaming machine E6, the display mode setting means is capable of setting a display mode in which the display image is enlarged or reduced based on the determination result of the operation discriminating means. .

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, the displayed image can be enlarged or reduced based on the operation on the operating means. As a result, a player who does not need to display the display image when a bonus game is executed can display the display image in a small size, so that the display area formed on the display means can be used for displaying another effect. becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that a display suitable for the player can be executed.

In the gaming machine E6 or E7, the display mode setting means is capable of setting a rotational display mode in which the display image is rotated from a first position to a second position based on a determination result of the operation determination means. Gaming machine E8 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6 or E7, the display image can be rotated based on the operation on the operating means, so that the detailed configuration of the variable ball entry means can be visually recognized by the player. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature F group> (Switching the time saving end timing according to conditions)
A discriminating means that performs discrimination when a discriminating condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means that can dynamically display identification information for a predetermined period of time to show the discrimination result of the discriminating means, and the dynamic display means. a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result; a first game state; a second gaming state different from the gaming state; a gaming state setting means capable of setting any gaming state among a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state different from the gaming state; an updating means capable of updating predetermined information; and an end determination means capable of determining whether the updated predetermined information satisfies the end condition, and the end condition is determined by the end determination means in a state where the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine capable of setting the second gaming state when it is determined that the second gaming state is satisfied, the gaming machine having a switching means capable of switching the execution timing of the end condition determining means based on establishment of the switching condition. Gaming machine F1 is characterized by:

In recent years, in game machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and after a predetermined period of variation, the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If so, a bonus game advantageous to the player has been executed. Furthermore, it is configured such that a plurality of game states can be set, and when a specific game state is set, an advantageous state in which the game ball easily enters the starting hole is set until the number of drawings reaches a specific number. There is a gaming machine configured as follows (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-033569). Such a gaming machine allows the player to play the game while expecting the first gaming state to be set, thereby increasing the player's desire to play. Furthermore, in the gaming machine described above, the process of measuring (subtracting) the number of drawings during an advantageous state and the process of ending the advantageous state, which is executed based on the number of drawings reaching a specific number, are stopped and displayed while the lottery results are displayed. The system is configured to be executed at the timing when the game is set, and the set advantageous state is provided to the player for a longer period of time. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the lottery results are stopped and displayed, including the process of measuring (subtracting) the number of drawings during an advantageous state, and the process of ending the advantageous state, which is executed based on the number of drawings reaching a specific number. Since the system is configured to be executed in response to a lottery result, there is a problem in that the number of processes to be executed at a predetermined timing (timing for stopping and displaying lottery results) increases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the processing load by reducing the amount of processing executed at the same timing in the gaming machine described above.

In addition, in recent years, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been configured so that games for executing bonus games can be executed overlappingly (overlapping games are possible), and depending on the game result of one game, a lottery for the other game is performed. There is a gaming machine configured to interrupt the subtraction of the fluctuation period for indicating the result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In such games, since a plurality of games can be executed overlappingly, it is possible to efficiently play a game that aims to execute a bonus game. Furthermore, since the game of one game can be temporarily interrupted depending on the game result of the other game, multiple games that are executed overlappingly can result in the bonus game being executed redundantly, and the player On the other hand, it is possible to suppress the execution of difficult-to-understand bonus games.

However, when a gaming machine capable of executing duplicate games is configured to be able to set the above-mentioned advantageous state, it is possible to measure (subtract) the number of drawings during the advantageous state, and when the number of drawings reaches a specific number. Because the end processing of the advantageous state that is executed based on the timing is executed at the timing when the lottery results are stopped and displayed, for example, based on the bonus game being awarded in one game, the lottery result in the other game is If the subtraction of the variable time to show the difference is interrupted and an advantageous state is set due to the awarded bonus game, the interrupted subtraction of the variable time will be restarted and the lottery result will be stopped and displayed. There has been a problem in that when the number of lottery draws is counted (subtracted), the process is executed. In other words, since the process of measuring (subtracting) the number of drawings during an advantageous state is executed based on the stop display of the lottery results executed in a state other than an advantageous state, it is difficult for the player to play games during an advantageous state. There was a problem that it could not be executed properly. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game by allowing the player to suitably execute the game in an advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine F1, since the execution timing of the end condition determining means can be switched based on the establishment of the switching condition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the first gaming state ends. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F1, the updating means is capable of updating, as the predetermined information, at least first information based on the number of times the determination has been performed by the determining means, and the switching condition is updated by the updating means. A gaming machine F2, characterized in that the first information obtained can be satisfied when the termination condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the switching condition can be satisfied when the number of determinations made by the determining means satisfies the termination condition. The player who has executed the determination by the determining means can be made to play the game while being excited to see whether the first game state will end or not. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F2, a second discrimination means that executes a second discrimination when a second discrimination condition is satisfied, and second identification information for indicating the result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means are operated for a predetermined period of time. a second dynamic display means capable of displaying the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and a second specific identification information for indicating a specific second determination result a second bonus game execution means capable of executing a second bonus game when the information is stopped and displayed, and the switching condition is such that the result of the second determination by the second determination means is the second determination. A gaming machine F3 is characterized in that it can be established if the result is a result.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine F2, the switching condition is configured to be satisfied based on the second determination performed by the second determination means different from the determination means, so that the switching condition can be satisfied. When the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed until the condition is satisfied, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the switching condition is satisfied or not. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the switching means delays the execution timing of the termination condition determining means for a specific period, and the determining means is configured to delay the execution timing of the end condition determining means for the first determination to be executed during the specific period. A gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it executes a determination corresponding to a gaming state.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the switching means performs the discrimination of the discriminating means executed during the specific period in which the execution timing of the end condition discriminating means is delayed. This can be carried out as a determination of the current state, and has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4 has a gaming state display means capable of displaying on the display means a display mode for indicating the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, and the gaming state display means includes: As a display mode for indicating that the first gaming state is set, a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode can be displayed, and the second display mode is capable of displaying a second display mode that is different from the first display mode. A gaming machine F5 characterized in that the display is displayed when the execution timing of the end condition determining means is switched by the switching means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the execution timing of the end condition determining means is switched by the switching means as a display mode indicating that the first gaming state is set. Since the second display mode that is displayed when the game is played is configured to be displayable, there is an effect that the current gaming status can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Characteristic Group G> (Variable target device navigation display for winning games according to the progress of the game)
a first variable ball entry means that is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the first state; and when a first execution condition is satisfied; , a first bonus game execution means capable of executing a first bonus game that changes the first variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period, wherein the game ball is a second variable ball entry means that is variable between a third state in which the ball can enter and a fourth state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than in the third state; A second bonus game capable of executing a second bonus game that changes the second variable ball entry means from the fourth state to the third state for a predetermined period when the game result of the first bonus game is a predetermined game result. a bonus game execution means; when the first bonus game is executed, displaying a first display image showing the first variable ball entry means on the display means; when the second bonus game is executed; A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it has a display control means for causing the display means to display a second display image indicating the second variable ball entry means.

In recent years, in game machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and after a predetermined period of variation, the lottery result is stopped and displayed. In such a case, a game in which a ball entry means into which a game ball would normally be difficult to enter was opened was executed as a bonus game advantageous to the player. Furthermore, there is a gaming machine in which the starting opening position and the ball entry means opened during the bonus game are arranged differently (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-45518). In such games, the position at which the game ball is fired at the player is varied between when playing a game where the player aims at the starting hole and when playing a bonus game, which may cause the player to get bored. It was possible to provide games that would not come easily.

However, if the bonus game is executed and the player continues to play the game aiming at the starting hole, the ball will not be able to enter the ball entry means during the bonus game, and the player will suffer a loss. There was a possibility that something like this might occur.

In addition, in order to improve the interest of the game, recent gaming machines have multiple devices within a limited gaming area (variable from a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the state to a state in which it is easy to enter the ball depending on the game content). Some devices are arranged closely together (equipment). With such gaming machines, there is a problem in that it is difficult for players to understand which device they should aim the game ball at, resulting in a situation where the player plays an inappropriate game and suffers a loss. Ta. In the gaming machine described above, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the display image showing the variable ball entry means corresponding to the bonus game executed by the display control means is displayed on the display means, when the bonus game is executed, the game ball is aimed at It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner whether it is appropriate to fire the . Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

In the gaming machine G1, the display control means changes the first display image to A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it displays information on a display means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, since the display image is displayed before the first variable ball entry means is changed to the first state, it is possible to play the game ball after viewing the display image. When fired, the game ball can enter the first variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to provide games that are easier to understand for players.

In the gaming machine G2, the display control means causes at least a part of the second display image to be displayed on the display means when the first bonus game is being executed by the first bonus game execution means. Game machine G3 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, during the execution of the first bonus game, the second display image showing the second variable ball entry means corresponding to the second bonus game that can be executed next. At least a portion is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to know in advance the gaming method after the first bonus game ends, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the display control means causes the display means to display at least a part of the first display image when the second bonus game is being executed by the second bonus game execution means. Game machine G4 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, during the execution of the second bonus game, the first display image showing the first variable ball entry means corresponding to the first bonus game that has already been executed is displayed. At least a portion of the image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the contents of bonus games played in the past, and it is possible to provide games that are easy to understand for the player.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the display control means, based on the first execution condition being satisfied, displays the first display image and the A gaming machine G5 is characterized in that it sequentially displays a second image and a second image.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, it is possible to inform the player of the flow of a plurality of bonus games that may be executed in the future when the first execution condition is satisfied. Therefore, the player can be made to understand a series of gaming methods in advance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy to understand for the player.

<Characteristics H group> (Execution of games that are likely to result in a pending number that allows advantageous games to be executed, and games that are unlikely to occur)
an information acquisition means that acquires information based on the satisfaction of an acquisition condition; a storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the information acquisition means until a discrimination condition for the information is satisfied; When the discriminating condition is met, a discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means and identification information for indicating the discriminating result of the discriminating means are dynamically displayed on a display means. a dynamic display means; and a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result. In the gaming machine, the gaming machine provides more information to the player when the number of the information stored in the storage means satisfies a predetermined condition than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it is easy to execute an advantageous game.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. A gaming machine in which advantageous bonus games are executed has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). In addition, there has been a device configured such that when a game ball enters the starting slot, it is possible to reserve and store a predetermined number of lottery rights for executing a lottery for winning or losing a game. By the way, in the gaming machine described above, games with the same advantageousness are executed regardless of the number of lottery rights held and stored, so there is a problem that the games tend to be monotonous. Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game among the above-mentioned gaming machines.

According to the gaming machine H1, the ease of executing an advantageous game can be varied depending on the number of information stored in the storage means. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player interested in the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H1, the gaming machine has a first game in which the number of the information stored in the storage means easily satisfies the predetermined condition, and a second game in which it is more difficult to satisfy the predetermined condition than the first game. A gaming machine H2 is characterized in that it is capable of executing.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, it is possible to make it easier for the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means to satisfy the predetermined condition in the first game than in the second game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting the first game to be executed, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H2, the predetermined condition can be satisfied when the number of the information stored in the storage means is a specific number smaller than the predetermined number, and the first game is A gaming machine H3 characterized in that when the number of the information stored in the means is greater than the specific number, the number of the information is more easily reduced than in the second game.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, when the first game is executed when the number of information is greater than a specific number, the number of information is reduced compared to when the second game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily set the number of pieces of information to a specific number. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who is playing a game in a state where the number of pieces of information is greater than a specific number can be made to play the game while expecting that the first game will be executed.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the first game makes it easier to increase the number of the information than the second game when the number of the information stored in the storage means is less than the specific number. A game machine H4 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, when the first game is executed when the number of pieces of information is less than a specific number, the number of pieces of information is lower than when the second game is executed. Since it is possible to easily increase the number of pieces of information, it is possible to easily make it possible to increase the number of pieces of information to a specific number. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who is playing a game in a state where the number of pieces of information is less than a specific number can be made to play the game while expecting the first game to be executed.

In any of gaming machines H2 to H4, when the first condition is satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information. has a forced stop means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information until the time period elapses, and the first game is capable of forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information by the forced stop means. A gaming machine H5, wherein the second game is more difficult to forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information by the forced stop means than the first game.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the dynamic display of identification information that is being executed can be forcibly stopped by the forced stopping means. This makes it possible to end the dynamic display of identification information without waiting for the identification information in progress to be dynamically displayed for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the determining means to perform the next determination, thereby increasing gaming efficiency and improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine H5 has a second determination means capable of executing a second determination different from the determination when a second determination condition different from the determination condition is satisfied, and the first condition is at least equal to the second determination condition. A gaming machine H6, characterized in that the game machine H6 can be established when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H4, it is possible to make it easier to satisfy the first condition when the result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is a specific second discrimination result. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved by providing a novel gameplay in which the second discrimination is executed by the second discrimination means in order to forcibly stop the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristics Group I> (Providing a variable display in which the number of time reductions is updated during a short time period and a variable display in which it is not updated)
A discriminating means that performs discrimination when a discriminating condition is met, a dynamic display means that can dynamically display identification information to show the discrimination result of the discriminating means, and a a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result; a first gaming state; and a gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including different second gaming states, in which the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine comprising an updating means capable of updating the first information based on a dynamic display of the identification information, and a restricting means restricting the updating of the first information by the updating means. I1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period in which a lottery is more likely to be drawn after a bonus game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, when the number of drawings executed during the time-saving game reaches a predetermined number, the time-saving game ends, so it is easy for the player to predict the remaining period of the time-saving game. There was a problem in that the player's desire to play the game decreased. Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game among the above-mentioned gaming machines.

According to the gaming machine I1, even if the dynamic display of the identification information is executed while the second gaming state is set, the updating of the first information is restricted by the restriction means if the first condition is satisfied. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I1, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state when a termination condition based on the first information is satisfied while the second gaming state is set. Features gaming machine I2.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1, by restricting the updating of the first information by the restriction means, it is possible to make it difficult to end the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the end condition of the second gaming state is satisfied, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I2, the determining means is configured such that it is better for the player to perform the determination when the second gaming state is set than to perform the determination when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine I3 is characterized in that it executes a determination that is advantageous to the user.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, the second gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, so that during the period in which the second gaming state is set, This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game with the expectation that the number of times the dynamic display will be executed will increase, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I3, the updating means is capable of updating, as the first information, the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed when the second gaming state is set. Game machine I4.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I3, the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information is updated as the first information by the updating means, so that the gaming machine I4 is executed with the second gaming state set. The second gaming state ends based on the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a case where the first information is not updated even though the dynamic display of the identification information is executed according to the conditions that are satisfied, so it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. There is an effect that it can be done.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, when a special condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, the predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information is extended. and a forced stop means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information until the time elapses, and the first condition can be satisfied when the forced stop means forcibly stops the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine I5 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, when the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped by the forced stopping means, the first condition is satisfied and the restriction means updates the information. Updating of the first information by means is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first information from being updated due to the dynamic display of the identification information that could not be dynamically displayed normally, so the identification information This has the effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the second game state ending without being able to dynamically display the game properly.

In the gaming machine I5, the forcible stop means is configured to forcibly stop the machine based on identification information indicating that the determination result of the discriminator is other than the specific determination result, regardless of the determination result of the discriminator that corresponds to the identification information. A gaming machine I6 characterized in that it allows players to play games.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I5, if the identification information is forcibly stopped, the specific game will not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second gaming state from ending without being able to properly dynamically display identification information in a state in which the second gaming state is set, which would cause players to feel uncomfortable. It has the effect of being able to.

The gaming machine I6 includes a second determination means capable of executing a second determination different from the determination when a second determination condition different from the determination condition is satisfied, and the specific game execution means is configured to perform a second determination different from the determination condition. The specific game is executed also when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result, and the special condition is at least the result of the second determination by the second determination means. The gaming machine I7 is characterized in that it can be established when is a predetermined second determination result different from the specific second determination result.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I6, a special condition is satisfied when the second determination result of the second determining means that allows a specific game to be executed is a predetermined second determination result, and a forced stop is made. The dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped and displayed by the means. As a result, when the second discrimination is performed by the second discrimination means in order to execute a specific game, even if the result of the predetermined second discrimination comes before the result of the specific second discrimination, the specific discrimination This has the effect of forcibly stopping the dynamic display of information and preventing the first information from being updated.

In the gaming machine I7, as the type of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means, a first specific game type and a second specific game that can execute a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific game type. game type determining means for determining one specific game type from among a plurality of specific game types including game types; The gaming machine I8 is characterized in that it is easier to determine the second specific game type if the determination result is the specific determination result by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I7, the second discrimination means is more likely to produce a discrimination result that is advantageous to the player than the discrimination means, so the second discrimination is actively performed for the player. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the limiting effect of the limiting means can be further enhanced.

In the gaming machine I7 or I8, the second determination means is easier to execute the second determination when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine I9 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I7 or I8, the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is better when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set. Since this is easy to perform, it is possible to have the player actively perform the second determination in a state where the second gaming state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the limiting effect of the limiting means can be further enhanced.

<Feature J group> (If the conditions for stopping and displaying the variable display in progress are met, the stop control content is switched based on the content of the variable display in progress)
A discriminating means that performs discrimination when a discriminating condition is met, a dynamic display means that can dynamically display identification information to show the discrimination result of the discriminating means, and a and a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the displayed identification information is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result, wherein the dynamic display dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information to be dynamically displayed by the means, and when a switching condition is satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; a specific control means capable of executing specific control for switching the dynamic display mode to a specific dynamic display mode according to a condition satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means; A gaming machine J1 characterized in that it has the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine that can change a plurality of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) at the same time has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). Furthermore, in some gaming machines having the above-described configuration, when a winning result is won in one lottery, the results of the other lottery are forcibly discarded. In this case, the other party's lottery results are forcibly discarded regardless of the content of the other party's lottery results, which may be disadvantageous to the player in some cases, giving the player a sense of distrust. There was a problem. Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game among the above-mentioned gaming machines. In addition, the above-mentioned conventional problem is a problem in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous variation machine) that executes the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel). As described above, the problems to be solved by the technical concept of this feature group are not limited to simultaneous variation machines, but are also applicable to gaming machines other than simultaneous variation machines (for example, the lottery of the first special symbol according to the winning order) Of course, it may also be applied to a gaming machine that executes (variation) and a second special symbol lottery (variation).

According to the gaming machine J1, when the switching condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display mode is changed to a specific mode according to the conditions that are satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information being executed. The display mode can be switched to a specific display mode. Thereby, the dynamic display mode can be switched to a specific dynamic display mode that corresponds to the dynamic display of the identification information being executed. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful when switching the dynamic display mode, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J1, when executing the specific control, the specific control means selects one of the plurality of specific dynamic display modes according to a condition that is satisfied by the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display device. A gaming machine J2 characterized in that it switches to any one of the specific dynamic display modes.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, when specific control is executed, the specific dynamic display mode can be varied depending on the conditions that the dynamic display of the identification information satisfies. . As a result, it is possible to determine a specific control that corresponds to the dynamic display of identification information, so when executing specific control for the dynamic display of identification information, a game that is difficult for the player to understand may be executed. This can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine J1 or J2 includes a second determination means for executing a second determination different from the determination when a second determination condition different from the determination condition is satisfied, and the switching condition is the second determination. A gaming machine J3, characterized in that it can be established if the result of the second determination by the means is a predetermined second determination result.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine J1 or J2, the switching condition is satisfied when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a predetermined second determination result, and the specific control is executed. It's different. Therefore, the control content of the specific control is related to both the determination result by the determination means and the result of the second determination by the second determination means, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J3, the specific game executing means executes the specific game even when the result of the second determination by the second determining means is a specific second determination result different from the predetermined second determination result. A gaming machine J4 characterized in that it is executable.

According to the gaming machine J4, since a specific game can be executed based on the second determination by the second determination means, the player is required to perform both the determination by the determination means and the second determination by the second determination means. can be done voluntarily. Therefore, there is an effect that the frequency with which specific control is executed can be increased.

In any of gaming machines J1 to J4, the dynamic display mode determining means determines at least a dynamic display period of the identification information, and the switching condition is such that the dynamic display period is longer or shorter. The gaming machine J5 is characterized in that it is more easily realized than the game machine J5.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the longer dynamic display period makes it easier to satisfy the switching condition, so that the dynamic display means displays the dynamic display. This has the effect of making the player interested in the length of the dynamic display period of the identification information and improving the interest of the game.

Any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5 has a remaining period determining means capable of determining a residual display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the switching condition is determined by the remaining period. A game J6 characterized in that the ease of execution is varied depending on the length of the residual motion display period determined by the determining means.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the ease with which the switching condition is satisfied can be varied depending on the length of the residual display period. The effect is that the length of the residual display period of the identification information can also be interesting.

<Feature K group> (Increase/decrease the number of specific symbols displayed based on the look-ahead results without synchronizing with the number of reservations)
an information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; and a storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the information acquisition means at least until a discrimination condition for the information is satisfied. , a discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the information stored in the storage means when the discriminating condition is met, and a display means dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discriminating result of the discriminating means. and a specific game in which a specific game can be executed when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result. A gaming machine comprising: a priori determination means for performing a prior determination based on the information before the determination based on the information stored in the storage means is executed; and the prior determination means. a specific symbol display means for displaying a predetermined number of specific symbols on the display means based on the result of the preliminary determination, and a number of the specific symbols displayed by the specific symbol display means to the number of the information. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that it has a symbol number variable display means that can be variably displayed regardless of the number of symbols.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. A gaming machine has been proposed in which advantageous bonus games are executed. In addition, when a game ball enters the starting slot, it is possible to reserve and store a predetermined number of lottery rights for executing a winning lottery for a game, and hold and store lottery rights that are reserved and stored. It has been proposed that the number of rights is displayed as a symbol, and the display mode of the symbol is varied based on the result of prior determination of the lottery results corresponding to the reserved lottery rights (for example, a special Publication No. 2013-223613). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, it was possible to suggest the result of the preliminary determination to the player using the displayed symbols, but if the number of lottery rights held and stored is small, the display The number of symbols displayed is also reduced, the presentation effect is reduced, and the game tends to become monotonous. Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game among the above-mentioned gaming machines.

According to the gaming machine K1, the number of specific symbols displayed based on the result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means can be varied regardless of the number of information stored in the storage means. Therefore, even if the amount of information stored in the storage means is small, the number of specific symbols to be displayed can be varied, and the player can be interested in the performance that suggests the result of the preliminary determination. It has the effect of being able to hold it.

A gaming machine K2 in the gaming machine K1, wherein the specific symbol display means is capable of displaying the specific symbol up to the number of pieces of information that can be stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the upper limit of the number of specific symbols to be displayed is the upper limit of the number of information that can be stored in the storage means, so that the player is not required to store the specific symbols in the storage means. You can make people think that it shows the number of information that is available.

In either gaming machine K1 or K2, when the number of the information stored in the storage means is one or more, the symbol number variable means changes the number of specific symbols within a range of one or more. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that the number of specific symbols displayed is variable.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the specific symbol can be continuously displayed while the information is stored in the storage means, so that the specific symbol can be displayed to the player. It can be made to think that indicates the number of information stored in the storage means.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, one gaming state is set among a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. the gaming state setting means is capable of setting the first gaming state when an end condition is satisfied with at least the second gaming state being set; A gaming machine K4, wherein the specific symbol display means is capable of displaying the specific symbol on the display means while the second gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a second gaming state advantageous to the player is set while the specific symbol is displayed on the display means. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player whether or not the second gaming state ends each time the number of displayed specific symbols changes. Therefore, there is an effect that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K4, the symbol number variable means is capable of varying the number of the specific symbols displayed on the display means to two or more.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K4, the number of specific symbols displayed at one time can be greatly varied, so it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player and improve the performance effect. It has the effect of increasing

In the gaming machine K5, the symbol number variable means includes the information corresponding to the specific determination result in the information stored in the storage means as a result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means. The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that when the information corresponding to the specific determination result is included, it is easier to change the display number of the specific symbol to increase it than when the information corresponding to the specific determination result is not included. .

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K5, it is easier to increase the number of specific symbols displayed if it is determined in advance that information corresponding to a specific discrimination result is included. This has the effect of making the player interested in the variable situation of the specific symbol and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K6, the symbol number variable means includes the information corresponding to the specific determination result in the information stored in the storage means as a result of the preliminary determination by the preliminary determination means. The gaming machine K7 is characterized in that when the information corresponding to the specific determination result is not included, the number of the specific symbols displayed at one time is more likely to be increased. .

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K6, the more the number of specific symbols displayed at once increases, the more likely it is that information corresponding to a specific determination result is included. This has the effect of making the player interested in how the number of displayed specific symbols increases, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine K7 is characterized in that the symbol number variable means is capable of executing a preparatory variable display that reduces the number of displayed specific symbols before increasing the number of displayed specific symbols to a specific number. Game machine K8.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K7, the number of specific symbols displayed can be reduced by the preparation variable display, so regardless of the current number of specific symbols displayed, the specific number can be increased and variable displayed. can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in displaying the number of specific symbols displayed by the symbol number variable means can be increased.

<Characteristics L group> (By varying the upstream electric chew winning rate, the ball entering the downstream starting port can be varied)
a first determining means capable of performing a first determination when a first determining condition is satisfied; and a second determining means that is capable of performing a first determination when a second determining condition different from the first determining condition is satisfied; If the result of the first discrimination by the executable second discrimination means and the first discrimination means is a specific first discrimination result, or the result of the second discrimination by the second discrimination means is a specific first discrimination result. 2. In a gaming machine having a specific game execution means capable of executing a corresponding specific game when the determination result is 2, a first flow path through which a game ball can flow down, and a game in which the game ball flows down the first flow path. A first ball entry means in which a ball can enter and the first determination condition can be satisfied when a game ball enters the ball, and a first state in which a game ball can enter the first ball entry means. and a second state that is more difficult to enter than the first state; and a variable control means that can variably control the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern when an execution condition is satisfied. a second ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and the second determination condition can be satisfied when a game ball enters the ball, and the second ball entering means is connected to the first flow path. A gaming machine L1 is provided at a position where game balls that cannot enter the first ball entry means among the game balls flowing down can enter the first ball entry means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a time-saving game is executed for a predetermined period in which a lottery is more likely to be drawn after a bonus game is executed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). In addition, there is a game machine that makes it easier to draw a lottery during a time-saving game by providing a plurality of starting ports and providing a variable member in one of the starting ports to make it easier to enter a game ball during a time-saving game. By the way, the problem with the above-mentioned game machine is that when the game balls are fired toward the starting port provided with the variable member, the game balls that do not enter the starting port are wasted, reducing the desire to play. was there. Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game among the above-mentioned gaming machines.

According to the gaming machine L1, depending on the length of the period in which the variable means is varied to the first state by the variable control means, the first determination is easily executed based on the game ball flowing down the first channel; It is possible to switch between a state in which it is easy to perform the second determination. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which determination will be made when the game ball flows down the first channel, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the gaming machine L1, the variable patterns of the variable means that are variably controlled by the variable control means include a first variable pattern and a second variable pattern in which the variable means is in the second state for a longer period than the first variable pattern. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that it has variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from among a plurality of variable patterns including at least two variable patterns.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control means according to the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means, so that It is possible to switch between a state where it is easy to perform the first determination and a state where it is easy to perform the second determination based on the game ball flowing down the first channel. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player interested in the variable status of the variable means, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L2 includes a determining means that executes a predetermined determination when a determination condition is met, and the variable control means controls the variable control means when the result of the determination by the determining means is a specific determination result. A gaming machine L3 characterized in that the means are variably controlled.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, since the variable means is variably controlled based on the determination result of the determining means, it is possible to make the player interested in the determination contents of the determining means. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine L3, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination by the determination means, and a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. and a dynamic display period determining means capable of determining one dynamic display period from among a plurality of dynamic display periods of different lengths, the dynamic display period determining means comprising: A gaming machine L4 characterized in that the dynamic display period is determined based on a determination result.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L3, the length of the dynamic display period until the determination result of the determining means is stopped and displayed can be varied, so that the variable control by the variable control means is It is possible to give a player a period of time that will not be played. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine L5 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, the second discriminating means executes a discrimination more advantageous to the player than the first discriminating means.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines L1 to L4, the second discriminating means executes a discrimination that is more advantageous to the player than the first discriminating means. There is an effect that the game can be played while making the player look forward to the ball reaching the ball while also making the player interested in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first channel.

The gaming machine L5 includes a detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down the first channel, and a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance based on a detection result by the detection means, and the detection means The means includes at least a first detection means capable of detecting game balls flowing into the first flow path, and a means for detecting game balls flowing down the first flow path that do not enter the first ball entering means. and a second detection means capable of detecting a game ball, and the performance executed by the performance execution means is such that the ball flowing down the first flow path enters the second ball entering means. A gaming machine L6 characterized in that it is used to show a player the expectation level to be reached.

According to the game machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine L5, the flow situation of the game ball flowing down the first channel can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the production effect can be enhanced. There is.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines described above, gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game when the result of a lottery, which is conducted based on winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening, is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest in playing by making it possible for the player to play a plurality of games that have different degrees of advantage, and by having the player play games with the aim of winning in various games. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-038007).
However, there is a need for further improvement in interest.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the player's interest in playing games.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine according to Technical Idea 1 has a discriminating means that performs discriminating when a discriminating condition is met, and dynamically displays identification information for indicating the discriminating result of the discriminating means. A specific game in which a specific game can be executed when a possible dynamic display means and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are stopped and displayed with specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result. It has an execution means, and a game state setting means that can set one game state from among a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, an updating means that can update the first information based on the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed while the second gaming state is set; and a restriction that restricts the updating of the first information by the updating means. It is something that has the means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the gaming state setting means is configured such that when a termination condition based on the first information is satisfied while the second gaming state is set. The first gaming state is set to .
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in which the determining means performs the determination when the second gaming state is set, and when the first gaming state is set. This method executes a determination that is more advantageous to the player than performing the above-mentioned determination in a state where the
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in which the updating means updates an operation of the identification information that is executed in a state where the second gaming state is set as the first information. The number of times the target is displayed can be updated.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 2 to 4, when a special condition is satisfied in a state where the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. , a forced stop means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information until a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information elapses; The update of the first information by the update means is restricted when the dynamic display of the first information is forcibly stopped.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, there is a discriminating means that performs discriminating when a discriminating condition is met, and a dynamic discriminating means that is capable of dynamically displaying identification information to show the discriminating result of the discriminating means. a display means; and a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means stops displaying the specific identification information for indicating the specific determination result; a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state; An update means capable of updating the first information based on the dynamic display of the identification information executed while the state is set, and a restriction means for restricting the update of the first information by the update means. It is.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the gaming state setting means sets the first information in a state where the second gaming state is set. The first gaming state is set when the termination condition based on the above is satisfied.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, it is better for the discrimination means to perform the discrimination while the second gaming state is set. The determination is more advantageous to the player than the determination performed when the first gaming state is set.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, the updating means is executed in a state where the second gaming state is set as the first information. The number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed can be updated.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 2 to 4, the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. a forced stop means for forcibly stopping the dynamic display of the identification information until a predetermined dynamic display period of the identification information has elapsed when a special condition is satisfied; When the dynamic display of the identification information is forcibly stopped by the forced stop means, updating of the first information by the update means is restricted.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine )

Claims (1)

a first ball entry means provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area can enter;
a variable means capable of changing between a first state in which a first flow path is formed and a second state in which the first flow path is not formed;
variable control means capable of executing control for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition;
A gaming machine comprising: a gaming state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state in which a gaming ball passing through the predetermined area is more likely to reach the first channel than in a first gaming state;
The first ball entering means is disposed at a position where game balls that have flown down a predetermined flow path among game balls that have reached the first flow path enter the ball,
The variable control means is configured to be able to execute at least a first variable control and a second variable control different from the first variable control as the control for changing the variable means,
The gaming machine is
At least some of the game balls that have reached the first flow path and do not flow down the predetermined flow path are transferred to a second flow path different from the first flow path or the first flow. a distribution means capable of distributing the liquid to a third flow path different from the flow path and the second flow path;
a second ball entry means into which the game ball flowing down the second channel can enter, and which is different from the first ball entry means;
a third ball entry means into which the game ball flowing down the third channel can enter, and which is different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means;
means capable of setting the first gaming state when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied as a result of updating a value related to a predetermined element to a specific value during the second gaming state;
A game of the same value or different value depending on the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means in which the game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. It is structured so that benefits can be granted that are advantageous to those who
When a game ball enters the third ball entry means, a benefit advantageous to the player is not provided,
The configuration is such that the value related to the predetermined element can be updated in accordance with the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means,
When a game ball enters the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means, the value related to the predetermined element is not updated,
The game ball that has reached the first flow path enters the second ball entry means during a period before the game ball that has reached the first flow path enters the first ball entry means. This is a configuration that tends to take a long time until
When a game ball enters the first ball entry means in a situation where a specific condition is met, the benefit can be granted without updating the value related to the predetermined element in accordance with the entry. can be,
In a situation where the variable means has changed to the first state by the first variable control, the game ball that has reached the first flow path is more likely to have the variable means change to the first state by the second variable control. The game ball is configured to enter the first ball entry means more easily than the game ball that has reached the first flow path in the changed situation,
A game ball that reaches the first flow path after a first period has elapsed since the variable means changed to the first state due to the first variable control is more likely to The game ball is configured to flow down the predetermined flow path more easily than a game ball that has reached the first flow path in a situation where a second period longer than the first period has passed since the means changed to the first state. A gaming machine characterized by:

Images